table of contents contract documents town branch …€¦ · town branch wwtp thickening process...

TABLE OF CONTENTS

CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

TOWN BRANCH WWTPTHICKENING PROCESS UPGRADES

_______________________________________________________________________________

PART I ADVERTISEMENT FOR BIDS

PART II INFORMATION FOR BIDDERS

PART III FORM OF PROPOSAL

PART IV GENERAL CONDITIONS

PART V SPECIAL CONDITIONS

PART VI CONTRACT AGREEMENT

PART VII PERFORMANCE AND PAYMENT BONDS

PART VIII ADDENDA

PART IX TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

APPENDIX A STANDARD DRAWINGS

AB-1

PART I

ADVERTISEMENT FOR BIDS

..........................................................................

..........................................................................................................

..............................................................................

.................................................

...........................................................................................................

....................................................................................................

.................................................................................................................

.........................................................................................................

.....................................................................................................

.....................................................................................

...........................

...............................................................................................

.....................................................................................................................

INDEX

1. INVITATION AB-2

2. DESCRIPTION OF WORK AB-2

3. OBTAINING PLANS, SPECIFICATIONS, AND BID DOCUMENTS AB-2

4. METHOD OF RECEIVING BIDS AB-3

5. METHOD OF AWARD AB-3

6. BID WITHDRAWAL AB-3

7. BID SECURITY AB-3

8. SUBMISSION OF BIDS AB-3

9. RIGHT TO REJECT AB-4

10. NOTIFICATION TO THE LEXINGTON-FAYETTE URBAN COUNTY

GOVERNMENT FOR AFFIRMATIVE ACTION PLAN AB-4

11. NOTICE CONCERNING DBE GOAL AB-4

12. PRE-BID MEETING AB-5

13. CONSENT DECREE REQUIREMENTS AB-5

AB-2

ADVERTISEMENT FOR BIDS

1. INVITATION

Sealed proposals for the following work will be received by the Lexington-Fayette Urban CountyGovernment until 2:00 p.m., local time, November 15, 2018 for furnishing all labor and/ormaterials and performing all work as set forth by this advertisement, conditions (general andspecial), specifications, and/or the drawings prepared by and for Lexington-Fayette Urban CountyGovernment, Division of Water Quality. Immediately following the scheduled closing time forreception of bids, all proposals which have been submitted in accordance with the above will bepublicly opened and read aloud.

2. DESCRIPTION OF WORK

The project includes providing all construction supervision, labor, materials, tools, test equipmentnecessary for Town Branch WWTP Thickening Process Upgrades. The project includesreplacement of equipment in two (2) gravity thickeners, one (1) carbon adsorber odor control unitwith two (2) fans and associated duct and valving, twelve (12) primary sludge pumps and VFDs,two (2) thickened sludge pumps, two (2) scum pumps, six (6) magnetic flow meters, andapproximately 95 plug valves.

Installation of one (1) new thickening centrifuge, with two (2) new thickened sludge pumps, one(1) thickened sludge hopper, one (1) new magnetic flow meter, and all associated valves, fittings,piping and ductwork. Installation of three (3) new grinders and one (1) new scum chopper pump.Project also includes replacement of select doors, windows, and lighting, roof replacement ofthree (3) buildings, replacement of one (1) air make-up unit, and one (1) energy recoveryventilator. All work listed here together with all related work as specified and shown on theDrawings.

3. OBTAINING PLANS, SPECIFICATIONS, AND BID DOCUMENTS

Plans, Specifications, and Contract Documents may be obtained from the official bid documentdistributor, LYNN IMAGING, 328 Old Vine Street, Lexington, KY 40507, (859) 255-1021 or(www.lynnimaging.com) and click on plan room for a non-refundable price of reproduction foreach full set of plans and documents.

Specifications, Plans, and Bid Documents may be examined at the following places:

LFUCGDivision of Central Purchasing200 East Main Street, Third Floor, Rm 338Lexington, Kentucky 40507(859) 258-3320

Builders Exchange1035 Strader Drive, Ste 100Lexington, Kentucky, 40505

LFUCGDivision of Water Quality125 Lisle Industrial AvenueLexington, Kentucky 40511(859) 425-2400

Dodge Data & Analytics2321 Fortune Drive, Ste 112-ALexington, Kentucky 40509

AB-3

4. METHOD OF RECEIVING BIDS

Bids will be received from Prime Contracting firms on a Lump Sum Basis for total Project Area.Bids shall be submitted in the manner and subject to the conditions as set forth and described inthe Instruction to Bidders and Special Conditions.

Sealed bids shall be clearly marked on the outside of the container as follows: Company Nameand Address, Bid Invitation Number, and the Project Name. Bids are to remain sealed untilofficial Bid closure time.

Mailed bids/proposals should be sent to the Director, Division of Central Purchasing, 200 EastMain Street, Lexington, KY 40507.

5. METHOD OF AWARD

The Contract, if awarded, will be to the lowest, qualified responsible bidder for the total project whosequalifications indicate the award will be in the best interest of the OWNER and whose bid/proposalcomplies with all the prescribed requirements. No Notice of Award will be given until the OWNERhas concluded such investigation as deemed necessary to establish the responsibility, qualifications andfinancial ability of Bidders to do the work in accordance with the Contract Documents to thesatisfaction of the OWNER within the time prescribed. The OWNER reserves the right to reject theBid of any Bidder who does not pass such investigation to the OWNER’s satisfaction. In analyzingBids, the OWNER may take into consideration alternate and unit prices, if requested by the Bid forms.

6. BID WITHDRAWAL

No bidder may withdraw his bid for a period of sixty (60) calendar days after the closing date forreceipt of bids. Errors and omissions will not be cause for withdrawal of bid without forfeit of bidbond. Bids may be withdrawn in person prior to the closing date of receipt of bids.

7. BID SECURITY

If the bid is $50,000 or greater, bid shall be accompanied by a certified / cashier’s check or bidbond payable to the Lexington-Fayette Urban County Government in an amount not less thanFive Percent (5%) of the base bid. Bid bond shall be executed by a Surety Company authorizedto do business in the Commonwealth of Kentucky and countersigned by a licensed KentuckyResident Agent, representing the Surety Company. Bid Bonds are not required for bids under$50,000. A certified check or cashier’s check is also acceptable forms of bid security.

8. SUBMISSION OF BIDS

CONTRACTORS shall submit their bids to the Lexington-Fayette Urban County Government,Division of Purchasing, Third Floor, 200 East Main Street, Lexington, Kentucky 40507. Bidsshall be submitted in a sealed envelope not later than 2:00 p.m., local time, November 15, 2018.Sealed proposals shall be clearly marked on the outside of the container as follows: CompanyName and Address, Bid Invitation Number, and Project Name to be opened at 2:00 p.m. localtime November 15, 2018. Bids received after the scheduled closing time for receipt of bids willnot be considered and will be returned unopened.

AB-4

9. RIGHT TO REJECT

The Purchasing Agent for the Lexington-Fayette Urban County Government reserves the right toreject any and all bids and to waive all informalities and/or technicalities where the best interest ofthe Lexington-Fayette Urban County Government may be served.

10. NOTIFICATION TO THE LEXINGTON-FAYETTE URBAN COUNTYGOVERNMENT FOR AFFIRMATIVE ACTION PLAN AND CURRENT WORKFORCE

The successful bidder must submit with their bid the following items to the Lexington-FayetteUrban County Government:

1. Affirmative Action Plan for his/her firm.2. Current Workforce Analysis Form.

Failure to submit these items as required herein may result in disqualification of the Bidder fromthe award of the contract.

All submissions should be directed to:

Lexington-Fayette Urban County GovernmentDivision of Purchasing200 East Main Street, 3rd Floor, Room 338Lexington, Kentucky 40507

11. NOTICE CONCERNING MWDBE and Veteran GOALS

Notice of requirement for Affirmative Action to ensure Equal Employment Opportunities andDisadvantaged Business Enterprises (DBE) Contract participation. Disadvantaged BusinessEnterprises (DBE) consists of Minority-Owned Business Enterprises (MBE) and Woman-Owned Business Enterprises (WBE).

The Lexington-Fayette Urban County Government has set a goal that not less than ten percent(10%) of the total value of this Contract be subcontracted to Disadvantaged BusinessEnterprises, which is made up of MBEs and WBEs, and set a goal that not less than threepercent (3%) of the total value of this Contract be subcontracted to Veteran-Owned SmallBusinesses. The goals for the utilization of Disadvantaged Business Enterprises and Veteran-Owned Small Businesses as subcontractors are recommended goals. Contractor(s) who fail tomeet such goal will be expected to provide written explanations to the Director of the Divisionof Purchasing of efforts they have made to accomplish the recommended goal, and the extent towhich they are successful in accomplishing the recommended goal will be a consideration inthe procurement process. Depending on the funding source, other DBE goals may apply.

For assistance in locating Disadvantaged Business Enterprises Subcontractors contact:

Sherita Miller, Minority Business Enterprise LiaisonDivision of Central Purchasing

AB-5

200 East Main Street, 3rd Floor, Room 338 Lexington, Kentucky 40507

[email protected] 12. PRE-BID MEETING

A non-mandatory pre-bid meeting will be held at 10:00 AM local time on October 25, 2018 at:

LFUCG- Town Branch Administrative Building 301 Jimmie Campbell Drive Lexington KY 40504

13. CONSENT DECREE REQUIREMENTS

The work to be provided through this bid will assist the LEXINGTON-FAYETTE URBAN

COUNTY GOVERNMENT (the “OWNER”) in successfully implementing the PROJECT

and complying with any requirements which are related to the Consent Decree entered in a case styled United States & Commonwealth of Kentucky v. Lexington Fayette Urban County

Government, United States District Court for the Eastern District of Kentucky, Civil Action No. 5:06-cv-386-KSF (the “CONSENT DECREE”). The services provided through this bid are hereinafter referred to as the PROJECT. The primary goal of the PROJECT is to provide the

OWNER with the technical support and/or construction services necessary to successfully

meet the obligations and deadlines of the CONSENT DECREE.

The BIDDER shall familiarize itself with and shall at all times comply with the CONSENT

DECREE, and all federal, state and local laws, ordinances, and regulations that in any manner affect the PROJECT. Time is of the essence in the performance of this PROJECT. BIDDER is aware that the OWNER is subject to penalties for non-compliance with the CONSENT

DECREE deadlines.

If delays result solely by reason of acts of the BIDDER, the BIDDER shall be held liable for any financial penalties incurred by the OWNER as a result of the delay, including but not limited

to those assessed pursuant to the CONSENT DECREE. In the event the parties cannot mutually agree upon the cause(s) associated with delays in completing project deliverables; the BIDDER must immediately notify the OWNER in the event of such delay, and provide the OWNER a written action plan within five (5) business days on how it will attempt to resolve the delay.

In the event that Bidder’s delay or other nonperformance of its obligations hereunder results in the imposition of penalties against the OWNER pursuant to the CONSENT DECREE, or the OWNER otherwise suffers damage as a result of such delay or nonperformance, BIDDER shall be solely liable to OWNER for any and all such damages, including any costs and attorney’s fees.

An electronic version of the Consent Decree is available on the LFUCG web page for review or to print a copy at no charge.

IB-1

PART II

INFORMATION FOR BIDDERS

INDEX

..............................................

1. RECEIPT AND OPENING OF BIDS IB-2

2. PREPARATION OF BID IB-2

3. SUBCONTRACTS IB-2

4. QUALIFICATION OF BIDDER IB-3

5. BID SECURITY IB-4

6. LIQUIDATED DAMAGES FOR FAILURE TO ENTER INTO CONTRACT IB-4

7. TIME OF COMPLETION AND LIQUIDATED DAMAGES IB-4

8. EXAMINATION OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND SITE IB-5

9. ADDENDA AND INTERPRETATIONS IB-5

10. SECURITY FOR FAITHFUL PERFORMANCE IB-6

11. POWER OF ATTORNEY IB-6

12. TAXES AND WORKMEN'S COMPENSATION IB-6

13. LAWS AND REGULATIONS IB-6

14. EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL AND PERMITS IB-7

15. PREVAILING WAGE LAW AND MINIMUM HOURLY RATES IB-7

16. AFFIRMATIVE ACTION PLAN IB-7

17. CONTRACT TIME IB-7

18. SUBSTITUTION OR "OR-EQUAL" ITEMS IB-8

19. ALTERNATE BIDS IB-8

20. SIGNING OF AGREEMENT IB-8....................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................

...........................................................................

....................................................................................................................

..............................................................................................

.......................................

...................................................

..................................................................................................

...................................................................

.........................................................................................................

....................................................................

.................................................................................

.............................................

.................................................

......................

.........................................................................................................................

...............................................................................................

.....................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................

.......................................................................................

21. ASSISTANCE TO BE OFFERED TO DBE CONTRACTORS IB-9

IB-2

PART II

INFORMATION FOR BIDDERS

1. RECEIPT AND OPENING OF BIDS

The Lexington-Fayette Urban County Government (herein called the OWNER) invites bidsfrom firms on the project described in the Advertisement for Bids. The OWNER willreceive bids at the Division of Purchasing, at the time and in the manner set forth in theAdvertisement for Bids, and the Bids will then be publicly opened and read aloud. TheOWNER may consider informal any bid not prepared and submitted in accordance with theprovisions hereof and may waive any informalities or reject any and all bids. Any bid maybe withdrawn prior to the scheduled time for the opening of bids or authorizedpostponement thereof. Any bid received after the time and date specified shall not beconsidered. No bidder may withdraw a bid within 60 days after the actual time and date ofthe bid opening, but OWNER may, in its sole discretion, release any bid and return the BidSecurity prior to that date.

The Lexington-Fayette Urban County Government assumes no responsibility for bids thatare not addressed and delivered as indicated above. Bids that are not delivered to theDivision of Central Purchasing by the stated time and date will be rejected.

2. PREPARATION OF BID

Each bid must be submitted on the prescribed Form of Proposal. All blank spaces for thebid prices must be filled in, either in ink or typewritten, for both unit prices and extensions.Totals for each bid item must be added to show the total amount of the bid. Each bid mustbe submitted in a sealed envelope bearing on the outside the name of the bidder, theiraddress, the name of the project, the invitation number and time and date for which the bidis submitted. Bids must be addressed to the Director of Purchasing, Lexington-FayetteUrban County Government, Third Floor, 200 East Main Street, Lexington, Kentucky40507. If forwarded by mail, the sealed envelope containing the bid must be enclosed inanother envelope addressed as specified above.

3. SUBCONTRACTS

The bidder is specifically advised that any person, firm, or other party to whom it isproposed to award a subcontract under this Contract must be acceptable to the OWNER.All proposed subcontractors must be identified on the Form of Proposal. Prior to the awardof Contract, the OWNER or the OWNER'S representative will advise the CONTRACTORof the acceptance and approval thereof or of any action necessary to be taken. Should anySubcontractor be rejected by the OWNER, the CONTRACTOR shall present a new nameand/or firm to the OWNER at no change in the Contract Price.

IB-3

4. QUALIFICATION OF BIDDER

The OWNER may make such investigations as the OWNER deems necessary to determinethe ability of the bidder to perform the Work, and the bidder shall furnish to the OWNERall such information and data for this purpose as the OWNER may request. The OWNERreserves the right to reject any bid if the evidence submitted by, or investigation of, suchbidder fails to satisfy the OWNER that such bidder is properly qualified to carry out theobligations of the Contract and to complete the Work contemplated therein. Conditionalbids will not be accepted.

In evaluating Bids, OWNER shall consider the qualifications of the BIDDERS, whether ornot the Bids comply with the prescribed requirements, and alternatives and unit prices, asrequested. OWNER may consider maintenance requirements, performance data, anddisruption or damage to private property. It is OWNER'S intent to accept alternatives, ifrequested by the bid forms, in the order in which they are listed in the Bid Form butOWNER may accept or decline them in any order or combination. The contract, ifawarded, will be awarded to the lowest, qualified, responsible BIDDER based uponOWNER'S evaluation which indicates that the award will be in the best interest of OWNERand the general public.

In the event there is any question as to the bidder's qualifications and ability to complete thework, a final determination will be made in accordance with a fair evaluation by the UrbanCounty Government of the above listed elements.

A. If the OWNER requires filling out a detailed financial statement, the bidder mayprovide its current certified financial statement(s) for the required time interval.

B. Corporate firms are required to be registered and in good standing with therequirements and provisions of the Office of the Secretary of State, Commonwealthof Kentucky.

C. Good standing with Public Works Act - any CONTRACTOR and/or subcontractorsin violation of any wage or work act provisions (KRS 337.510 to KRS 337.550) areprohibited by Statutory Act (KRS 337.990) from bidding on or working on any andall public works contracts, either in their name or in the name of any other company,firm or other entity in which he might be interested. No bid from a prime contractorin violation of the Act can be considered, nor will any subcontractor in violation ofthe Act be approved and/or accepted. The responsibility for the qualifications of thesubcontractor is solely that of the prime contractor.

D. Documents Required of CONTRACTOR - (1) A sworn statement signed by thePresident or owner of the Company regarding all current work in progressanywhere; (2) A document showing the percent of completion of each project andthe total worth of each project; and (3) Documentation showing the percentage ofthe DBE employment levels on each project of the Bidder's current work force, andDBE participation levels for Subcontractors.

IB-4

E. Optional OWNER Requirements - The OWNER, at its discretion, may require theBIDDER/CONTRACTOR to provide: (1) a current detailed financial statement fora period including up to 3 prior years; (2) financial security or insurance in amountsand kinds acceptable to the OWNER to meet the financial responsibilityrequirements for the CONTRACTOR to indemnify the OWNER. (3) Additionalinformation and/or DBE work force data, as well as DBE participation data.

Each bidder agrees to waive any claim it has or may have against the Owner,the Architect/Engineer, and their respective employees, arising out of or inconnection with the administration, evaluation, or recommendation of any bid.

5. BID SECURITY

A. Each bid must be accompanied by a bid bond prepared on a Form of Bid Bond andattached hereto, duly executed by the bidder as principal and having as suretythereon a surety company approved by the OWNER, in the amount of 5% of the bid.Such bid bond will be returned to the unsuccessful bidder(s) only upon writtenrequest to the Director of Central Purchasing within seven (7) days of opening ofbids. Bid bond shall be made payable to the Lexington-Fayette Urban CountyGovernment. Bid security is not required for projects under $50,000.

B. Bonds shall be placed with an agent licensed in Kentucky with surety authorized todo business within the state. When the premium is paid for such coverage, the fullcommission payable shall be paid to such local agent who shall not divide suchcommission with any person other than a duly licensed resident local agent.

6. LIQUIDATED DAMAGES FOR FAILURE TO ENTER INTO CONTRACT

The successful bidder, upon his failure or refusal to execute and deliver the Contract andbonds required within ten (10) days after he has received notice of the acceptance of his bid,shall forfeit to the OWNER, as liquidated damages for such failure or refusal, the securitydeposited with his bid.

7. TIME OF COMPLETION AND LIQUIDATED DAMAGES

Bidder must agree to commence work on or before a date to be specified in a written"Notice to Proceed" from the OWNER and to fully complete the Project within the time asspecified in the Contract. Bidder must agree also to pay $750 per day as liquidateddamages, or the sum as specified in the Contract for each consecutive calendar daythereafter as hereinafter provided in the General Conditions.

IB-5

8. EXAMINATION OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND SITE

A. It is the responsibility of each Bidder before submitting a Bid, to (a) examine theContract Documents thoroughly, (b) visit the site(s) to become familiar with localconditions that may affect cost, progress, performance or furnishing of the work, (c)consider Federal, State and Local laws and regulations that may affect cost,progress, performance or furnishing of the work, (d) study and carefully correlateBidder's observations with the Contract Documents, and (e) notify Engineer of allconflicts, errors or discrepancies in the Contract Documents.

B. Bidders should examine the requirements of section 4 of the General Conditions forinformation pertaining to subsurface conditions, underground structures,underground facilities, and availability of lands, easements, and rights-of-way. Thecompleteness of data, presented in the Contract Documents, pertaining to subsurfaceconditions, underground structures, and underground facilities for the purposes ofbidding or construction is not assured. The Bidder will, at Bidder's own expense,make or obtain any additional examinations, investigations, explorations, tests andstudies and obtain any additional information and data which pertain to the physicalconditions (surface and subsurface) which may affect cost, progress, performance orfurnishing of the Work and which Bidder deems necessary to determine its Bid forperforming and furnishing the Work in accordance with the time, price, and otherterms and conditions of the Contract Documents. On request in advance, OWNERwill provide access to the site to conduct such explorations and tests as each Bidderdeems necessary for submission of a bid. Bidder shall fill all holes, clean up andrestore the site to its former condition upon completion of such explorations.

C. The submission of a Bid will constitute an incontrovertible representation by theBidder that Bidder has complied with every requirement of this paragraph 8; thatwithout exception the Bid is premised upon furnishing and performing the Workrequired by the Contract Documents and such means, methods, techniques,sequences or procedures of construction as may be indicated in or required by theContract Documents; and that the Contract Documents are sufficient in scope anddetail to indicate and convey understanding of all terms and conditions forperformance and furnishing of the Work.

9. ADDENDA AND INTERPRETATIONS

No interpretation of the meaning of the Contract Documents will be made to any bidderorally. Every request for such interpretation should be in writing addressed to the Directorof Central Purchasing, who in turn will have an Addendum issued for the Lexington-FayetteUrban County Government, and to be given consideration must be received prior to the datefixed for the opening of bids. Any and all such interpretations and any supplementalinstructions will be in the form of written addenda to the specifications. Acknowledgementof the receipt of addenda must be included with all submitted bids. Failure of any bidder toreceive any such addendum or interpretation shall not relieve such bidder from anyobligation under his bid as submitted. All addenda so issued shall become part of theContract Documents.

IB-6

10. SECURITY FOR FAITHFUL PERFORMANCE

A. Simultaneously with his delivery of the executed Contracts, the CONTRACTORshall furnish a surety bond or bonds as security for the faithful performance of thisContract and for payment of all persons performing labor on the Project under thisContract and furnishing materials in connection with this Contract, as specified inthe General Conditions. The surety on such bond or bonds shall be a dulyauthorized surety company satisfactory to the OWNER and authorized to dobusiness in the Commonwealth of Kentucky.

B. All bonds required by this Contract and laws of this State shall be placed withagents licensed in the State of Kentucky. When the premium is paid for suchcoverage’s, the full commission shall be paid to such local agent who shall notdivide such commission with any person other than a duly licensed resident localagent.

C. Contractor shall use standard Performance and Payment Bond forms such asdocuments provided with this contract book or AIA form A312-1984 (or later).Each document will be for 100% of the Contract Bid Amount.

11. POWER OF ATTORNEY

Attorney-in-fact who signs bid bonds or contract bonds must file with each bond a certifiedand effectively dated copy of their power of attorney.

12. TAXES AND WORKMEN'S COMPENSATION

The CONTRACTOR and subcontractor will be required to accept liability for payment ofall payroll taxes, sales and use tax, and all other taxes or deductions required by local, stateor federal law, such as old age pension, social security, or annuities measured by wages.Each shall carry Workmen's Compensation Insurance to the full amounts as required byStatutes and shall include the cost of all foregoing items in the proposal. TheCONTRACTOR will not otherwise be reimbursed or compensated for such tax payments.The CONTRACTOR is urged to ascertain at his own risk his actual tax liability inconnection with the execution or performance of his Contract.

13. LAWS AND REGULATIONS

The bidder's attention is directed to the fact that all applicable state laws, municipalordinances, and the rules and regulations of all authorities having jurisdiction overconstruction of the Project shall apply to the Contract throughout, and they will be deemedto be included in the contract, the same as though herein written out in full.

IB-7

14. EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL AND PERMITS

The CONTRACTOR and Subcontractors performing work on projects on behalf of theOWNER shall also comply with all applicable federal, state, and local environmentalregulations and all requirements and conditions set forth in “special” permits includingbut not limited to Corp of Engineers 404 permits, 401 Water Quality Certifications,Stream Crossing and Floodplain Encroachment Permits as described in Part 4 GeneralConditions Paragraph 5.17.

15. PREVAILING WAGE LAW AND MINIMUM HOURLY RATES

Federal or state wage rates and regulations, if required for this Project, will be as describedin the Special Conditions.

16. AFFIRMATIVE ACTION PLAN

The successful Bidder must submit with their bid, the following items to the Urban CountyGovernment:

1. Affirmative Action Plan of the firm

2. Current Work Force Analysis Form

3. Good Faith Effort Documentation

4. List of Disadvantaged Business Enterprise Subcontractors and the Dollar Value ofeach Subcontract

A Work Force Analysis Form shall be submitted for each Contract. Failure to submit theseitems as required herein may result in disqualification of the Bidder from award of theContract.

All submissions should be directed to:

Director, Division of Central PurchasingLexington-Fayette Urban County Government

200 East Main Street, Third FloorLexington, KY 40507

17. CONTRACT TIME

The number of calendar days within which the Work is to be substantially completed andready for final payment (the Contract Time) is set forth in the Form of Proposal and theAgreement.

IB-8

18. SUBSTITUTE OR "OR-EQUAL" ITEMS

The Contract, if awarded, will be on the basis of materials and equipment described in theDrawings or specified in the Specifications without consideration of possible substitute or"or-equal" items. Whenever it is indicated in the Drawings or specified in theSpecifications that a substitute or "or-equal" item of material or equipment may befurnished or used by the CONTRACTOR if acceptable to the ENGINEER and OWNER,application for such acceptance will not be considered by the ENGINEER and OWNERuntil after the effective date of the Agreement. The procedure for submission of any suchapplication by the CONTRACTOR and consideration by the ENGINEER and OWNER isset forth in the General Conditions.

19. ALTERNATE BIDS

Bidders shall submit alternate bids/proposals only if and when such alternatebids/proposals have been specifically requested in an Invitation for Bids. If alternatebids/proposals are requested in an Invitation for Bids, the form of submission of suchalternate bid and the conditions under which such alternate bids will be considered foraward of a contract will be established in the Invitation.

Any Bidder who submits a bid incorporating an alternate proposal when alternatebids/proposals have not been requested in the Invitation for Bids shall have his/her bidrejected as non-responsive.

Any Bidder who submits a bid incorporating two (2) or more prices for an item or groups ofitems (unless such method of pricing is requested in the Invitation for Bids), or whichimposes conditions for acceptance other than those established in the Invitation for Bids,shall have their bid rejected as non-responsive.

20. SIGNING OF AGREEMENT

When OWNER gives a Notice of Award to the successful Bidder, it will be accompaniedby the required number of unsigned counterparts of the Agreement with all other writtenContract Documents attached. Within ten days thereafter, CONTRACTOR shall sign anddeliver the required number of counterparts of the Agreement and attached documents toOWNER with the required Bonds, Certificate of Insurance, and Power of Attorney. TheOWNER will deliver one fully signed counterpart to CONTRACTOR at such time as it hasbeen signed by the Mayor.

IB-9

21. ASSISTANCE TO BE OFFERED TO DISADVANTAGED BUSINESSENTERPRISE (MWDBE) CONTRACTORS

A. Outreach for MWDBE(s)

The Lexington-Fayette Urban County Government (LFUCG) maintains a databaseof MWDBE contractors and organizations. When a LFUCG construction project isadvertised for bidding, notices are sent to companies registered athttps://lexingtonky.ionwave.net. The notices describe the project and indicate thedeadline for submitting bids.

If you wish to be added to the LFUCG MWDBE contractor database, pleasecontact:


Lexington-Fayette Urban County Government200 East Main Street, Room 338

Lexington, Kentucky [email protected]

B. Bid Bond Assistance for MWDBE(s)

For those MWDBE contractors who wish to bid on LFUCG project, bid bondassistance is available. This bid bond assistance is in the form of a “Letter ofCertification” which is accepted by the LFUCG’s Division of Purchasing, in lieu ofa bid bond. The “Letter of Certification” must be included in the bid package whenit is submitted to the Division of Purchasing. The “Letter of Certification” willreference the specific project for which the bid is being submitted, and the time anddate on which the bid is due. Bid bond assistance must be requested from theLexington-Fayette Urban County Government’s Division of Central Purchasing.

C. Eligibility for Bid Bond Assistance for MWDBE(s)

In order to be eligible for any Bid bonding assistance, a MWDBE constructioncompany must be owned or controlled at the level of 51% or more by a member ormembers of a minority group or females. Prior to receiving assistance, a statementproviding evidence of ownership and control of the company by a member ormembers of a minority group or females must be signed by the Owner orcorporate officer and by an attorney or accountant submitted to:




IB-10

D. MWDBE and Veteran Subcontractors

The LFUCG will, upon request, assist prime contractors in the procurement ofeligible DBE subcontractors in an effort to achieve 10% minimum MWDBE and3% minimum veteran goal.

For a list of eligible subcontractors, please contact:




P-1

PART III

FORM OF PROPOSAL

INDEX

...................................................................................

1. FORM OF PROPOSAL P-2

2. LEGAL STATUS OF BIDDER P-4

3 BIDDERS AFFIDAVIT P-5

4. BID SCHEDULE – SCHEDULE OF VALUES P-6

5. STATEMENT OF BIDDER'S QUALIFICATIONS P-8

6. LIST OF PROPOSED SUBCONTRACTORS P-11

7. LEXINGTON FAYETTE URBAN COUNTY GOVERNMENT MWDBEPARTICIPATION GOALS, FORMS, AND GOOD FAITH EFFORTS P-12

8. AUTHENTICATION OF BID AND STATEMENT OF NON-COLLUSIONAND NON-CONFLICT OF INTEREST P-18

9. STATEMENT OF EXPERIENCE P-19

10. EQUAL OPPORTUNITY AGREEMENT P-21

11. EQUAL EMPLOYMENT OPPORTUNITY AFFIRMATIVEACTION POLICY P-24

12. WORKFORCE ANALYSIS P-25

13. EVIDENCE OF INSURABILITY P-26

14. DEBARRED FIRMS P-27......................................................................................................

.................................................................................

..........................................................................................

..........................................................................................................

T....................................................................

E.................................................................................

.......................................................................

.....................

.............................................................

....................................................

...........................................................

.................................................................................................

.....................................................................................

.................................................................................................

15. DEBARRED CERTIFICATION P-28

P-2

PART III_______________________________________________________

Invitation to Bid No. 137-2018

TOWN BRANCH WWTP THICKENING PROCESS UPGRADES

1. FORM OF PROPOSAL

Place: Lexington, Kentucky

Date:

The following Form of Proposal shall be followed exactly in submitting a proposal for this Work.

This Proposal Submitted by

_______________

(Name and Address of Bidding Contractor)

(Hereinafter called "Bidder"), organized and existing under the laws of the State of, doing business as

"a corporation," "a partnership", or an "individual" as applicable.

To: Lexington-Fayette Urban County Government(Hereinafter called "OWNER")Office of the Director of Purchasing200 East Main Street, 3rd FloorLexington, KY 40507

Gentlemen:

The Bidder, in compliance with your Invitation for Bids for Town Branch WWTP ThickeningProcess Upgrades having examined the Plans and Specifications with related documents, havingexamined the site for proposed Work, and being familiar with all of the conditions surrounding theconstruction of the proposed Project, including the availability of materials and labor, herebyproposes to furnish all labor, materials, and supplies, and to construct the Project in accordance withthe Contract Documents, within the time set forth therein, and at the lump sum and/or unit pricesstated hereinafter. These prices are to cover all expenses incurred in performing the Work requiredunder the Contract Documents, of which this proposal is a part. The OWNER will issue work ordersfor work to be performed under this Contract.

P-3

____________

BIDDER hereby agrees to commence work under this contract on or before a date to be specifiedin the Notice to Proceed and to fully complete the project within the time provided in thePurchase Order or Work Orders issued by the OWNER. BIDDER further agrees to payliquidated damages, the sum of $750 for each consecutive calendar day thereafter.

____________

____________

____________

The Bidder hereby acknowledges receipt of the following addenda:

Addendum No. ____ Date








Insert above the number and the date of any Addendum issued and received. If none has beenissued and received, the word "NONE" should be inserted.

____________

____________

____________

____________

P-4

________________________________________________________________________

2. LEGAL STATUS OF BIDDER

__________________________________________________________________________

Bidder

Date

_________________________________________________________________________

* 1. A corporation duly organized and doing business under the laws of the State of, for whom _ , bearing the

official title of , whose signature is affixed to thisBid/Proposal, is duly authorized to execute contracts.

_________________________________________________________________________

* 2. A Partnership, all of the members of which, with addresses are: (Designate general partners assuch)

_________________________________________________________________________

____________________________________________________________________________

____________________________________________________________________________

____________________________________________________________________________

____________________________________________________________________________

_________________________

* 3. An individual, whose signature is affixed to this Bid/Proposal (please print name)

________________ ________________________________

*(The Bidder shall fill out the appropriate form and strike out the other two.)

P-5

3. BIDDERS AFFIDAVIT

Comes the Affiant, , and after being first duly sworn, statesunder penalty of perjury as follows:

1. His/her name is and he/she is the individual

____________________________________________

____________________________________________

submitting the bid or is the authorized representative of, the entity submitting the bid (hereinafter

referred to as "Bidder").

2. Bidder will pay all taxes and fees, which are owed to the Lexington-Fayette UrbanCounty Government at the time the bid is submitted, prior to award of the contract andwill maintain a "current" status in regard to those taxes and fees during the life of thecontract.

3. Bidder will obtain a Lexington-Fayette Urban County Government business license, ifapplicable, prior to award of the contract.

4. Bidder has authorized the Division of Central Purchasing to verify the above-mentionedinformation with the Division of Revenue and to disclose to the Urban County Councilthat taxes and/or fees are delinquent or that a business license has not been obtained.

5. Bidder has not knowingly violated any provision of the campaign finance laws of theCommonwealth of Kentucky within the past five (5) years and the award of a contractto the Bidder will not violate any provision of the campaign finance laws of theCommonwealth.

6. Bidder has not knowingly violated any provision of Chapter 25 of the Lexington-Fayette Urban County Government Code of Ordinances, known as the "Ethics Act."

7. Bidder acknowledges that "knowingly" for purposes of this Affidavit means, withrespect to conduct or to circumstances described by a statute or ordinance defining anoffense, that a person is aware or should have been aware that his conduct is of thatnature or that the circumstance exists.Further, Affiant sayeth naught.

(Affiant)

STATE OF _

COUNTY OF _

The foregoing instrument was subscribed, sworn to and acknowledged before me by

on this the day of , 20_____.

My Commission expires:

NOTARY PUBLIC, STATE AT LARGE

P-6

4. BID SCHEDULE – SCHEDULE OF VALUES

The Bidder agrees to perform all the Work described in the Specifications and shown on the Plans for thefollowing proposed lump sum price, if applicable, which shall include the furnishing of all labor, materials,supplies, equipment and/or vehicle usage, services, all items of cost, overhead, taxes (federal, state, local), andprofit for the Contractor and any Subcontractor involved, within the time set forth herein. If unit prices areapplicable, Bidder must make the extensions and additions showing the total amount of bid.

For a lump sum based bid, the item total is the bid amount the Division uses for bid comparison.

The LFUCG’s decision on the bid amount is final.

The contract, if awarded, will be on the basis of materials and equipment specified in the specifications withoutconsideration of possible substitute or “or equal” items.

Bidder will complete the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents for the following price(s):

Notes: 1. Bids shall include all sales tax, where required, and all other applicable taxes and fees.2. All specific cash allowances are included in the price(s) set forth and have been computed in

accordance with Paragraph 13.02 of the General Conditions and Specification Section012100 Allowances.

3. See Specification 012100 for Description of Allowances. Allowances shall be included inthe LUMP SUM CONTRACT PRICE.

BASE BID PRICE (LESS SCADA PROGRAMMING SERVICES):

(USE WORDS) (FIGURES)

SCADA PROGRAMMING SERVICES:

EIGHTY THOUSAND DOLLARS $80,000.00


TOTAL LUMP SUM CONTRACT PRICE:


P-7

Proposed Major Equipment Manufacturers: The Bidder’s proposed major equipment manufacturersincluded in their Base Bid price shall be listed below for the requested items.

Alternate Equipment Information

Equipment Item Base Bid EquipmentManufacturer

1. Rotary Lobe Pumps Boerger

Vogelsang

2. Check Valves Golden Anderson

3. Plug Valves Golden Anderson

4. Centrifuge Flottweg

Andritz

5. Gravity Thickener Equipment Ovivo

Evoqua

6. In-Line Grinder JWC

7. Odor Control Equipment ECS

8. Chopper Pump Vaughan

9. Magnetic Flow Meter Foxboro

10. Sludge Blanket Sensor Cerlic

11. Valve and Gate Actuators Limitorque

12. Level Transmitters (Sludge Hopper) Ohmart Vega

10. SCADA PLC’s Allen Bradley ControlLogix

P-8

11. Motor Control Center and Power House Allen Bradley

Schneider (Square D)

Eaton (Cutler Hammer)

12. VFDs Schneider (Square D)

Notes: 1. Where more than one Base Bid equipment manufacturer is listed above, the Bidder has theoption of including any of the listed manufacturers in the Base Bid. The bidder mustindicate the Base Bid equipment included in the Bid by circling the selected manufacturer atthe time of the submission of the Bid. The design has been completed using the first listedBase Bid equipment manufacturer. Should the Bidder list the second, third, or fourth BaseBid equipment, the Bidder, at no additional cost to the Owner, shall make any changes tostructure, piping controls, electrical, instrumentation, architectural, mechanical, etc. that maybe necessary to accommodate this equipment.

___________________________________________________________

___________________________________________________________

___________________________________________________________

_____________________________________________________

___________________________________________________________

___________________________________________________________

______________________________________________________

P-9

Submitted by: _

________________________________

________________________________

Firm

________________________________

________________________________

Address

City, State & Zip

Bid must be signed: _(original signature) Signature of Authorized Company Representative – Title

Representative/s Name (Typed or Printed)

Area Code – Phone – Extension Fax #

E-Mail Address

OFFICIAL ADDRESS:

(Seal if Bid is by Corporation)

By signing this form you agree to ALL terms, conditions, and associated forms in this bid package

P-10

5. STATEMENT OF BIDDER'S QUALIFICATIONS

________________________________________

The following statement of the Bidder's qualifications is required to be filled in, executed, and submittedwith the Proposal:

___________________________________________________________

1. Name of Bidder:

_______________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________

2. Permanent Place of Business: _

_______________________________________________________________________

3. When Organized: _

_______________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________

4. Where Incorporated: _

_______________________________________________________________________

5. Construction Plant and Equipment Available for this Project:

____________________________________________________

____________________________________________________

______________________________________________

_____________________________________________________

(Attach Separate Sheet If Necessary)

6. Financial Condition:

If specifically requested by the OWNER, the apparent low Bidder is required to submit its latest three(3) years audited financial statements to the OWNER'S Division of Central Purchasing within seven(7) calendar days following the bid opening.

7. In the event the Contract is awarded to the undersigned, surety bonds will be furnished by:

(Surety)

Signed: (Representative of Surety)

8. The following is a list of similar projects performed by the Bidder: (Attach separate sheet ifnecessary).

P-11

NAME LOCATION CONTRACT SUM

9. The Bidder has now under contract and bonded the following projects:

NAME LOCATION CONTRACT SUM

10. List Key Bidder Personnel who will work on this Project.

NO. OF YEARSNAME POSITION DESCRIPTION WITH BIDDER

P-12

11. DBE Participation on current bonded projects under contract:

SUBCONTRACTORS PROJECT DBE % of WORK

___________

___________

(LIST) (SPECIFIC TYPE)

___________

___________

___________

___________

___________

(USE ADDITIONAL SHEETS IF NECESSARY)

12. We acknowledge that, if we are the apparent low Bidder, we may be required to submit to theOWNER within 7 calendar days following the Bid Opening, a sworn statement regarding all currentwork on hand and under contract, and a statement on the OWNER’S form of the experience of ourofficers, office management and field management personnel. Additionally, if requested by theOWNER, we will within 7 days following the request submit audited financial statements and losshistory for insurance claims for the 3 most recent years (or a lesser period stipulated by the OWNER).

P-13

6. LIST OF PROPOSED SUBCONTRACTORS

The following list of proposed subcontractors is required by the OWNER to be executed, completed andsubmitted with the BIDDER'S FORM OF PROPOSAL. All subcontractors are subject to approval of theLexington-Fayette Urban County Government. Failure to submit this list completely filled out may be causefor rejection of bid.

____________________________ ______

BRANCH OF WORK - LIST EACH SUBCONTRACTOR DBE % of Work

__________________________________

______

MAJOR ITEM Such as: Grading, Yes/No

____________________________

______

bituminous paving, concrete, seeding andprotection, construction staking, etc.

1. Name: _____ ______

Address:

_____ ______

2. Name: ______ _____ ______

___________

Address:

3. Name: ______ _____ ______

___________________

Address:

4. Name: ______ _____ ______

__________________

Address:

5. Name: _

Address:

6. Name: _____ ______

Address:

7. Name: ______ ______

Address:

(Attach additional sheet(s) if necessary.)

P-14

7. Lexington-Fayette Urban County GovernmentMWDBE PARTICIPATION GOALS

A. GENERAL1) The LFUCG request all potential contractors to make a concerted effort to include Minority-

Owned (MBE), Woman-Owned (WBE), Disadvantaged (DBE) Business Enterprises andVeteran-Owned Small Businesses (VOSB) as subcontractors or suppliers in their bids.

2) Toward that end, the LFUCG has established 10% of total procurement costs as a Goal forparticipation of Minority-Owned, Woman-Owned and Disadvantaged Businesses on thiscontract.

3) It is therefore a request of each Bidder to include in its bid, the same goal (10%) forMWDBE participation and other requirements as outlined in this section.

4) The LFUCG has also established a 3% of total procurement costs as a Goal for participation for ofVeteran-Owned Businesses.

5) It is therefore a request of each Bidder to include in its bid, the same goal (3%) for Veteran-Owned participation and other requirements as outlined in this section.

B. PROCEDURES1) The successful bidder will be required to report to the LFUCG, the dollar amounts of all

payments submitted to Minority-Owned, Woman-Owned or Veteran-Owned subcontractorsand suppliers for work done or materials purchased for this contract. (See SubcontractorMonthly Payment Report)

2) Replacement of a Minority-Owned, Woman-Owned or Veteran-Owned subcontractor orsupplier listed in the original submittal must be requested in writing and must beaccompanied by documentation of Good Faith Efforts to replace the subcontractor / supplierwith another MWDBE Firm; this is subject to approval by the LFUCG. (See LFUCGMWDBE Substitution Form)

3) For assistance in identifying qualified, certified businesses to solicit for potential contractingopportunities, bidders may contact:

a) The Lexington-Fayette Urban County Government, Division of CentralPurchasing (859-258-3320)

4) The LFUCG will make every effort to notify interested MWDBE and Veteran-Ownedsubcontractors and suppliers of each Bid Package, including information on the scope ofwork, the pre-bid meeting time and location, the bid date, and all other pertinent informationregarding the project.

C. DEFINITIONS1) A Minority-Owned Business Enterprise (MBE) is defined as a business which is certified as

being at least 51% owned, managed and controlled by persons of African American,Hispanic, Asian, Pacific Islander, American Indian or Alaskan Native Heritage.

2) A Woman-Owned Business Enterprise (WBE) is defined as a business which is certified asbeing at least 51% owned, managed and controlled by one or more women.

P-15

3) A Disadvantaged Business (DBE) is defined as a business which is certified as being at least51% owned, managed and controlled by a person(s) that are economically and sociallydisadvantaged.

4) A Veteran-Owned Small Business (VOSB) is defined as a business which is certified asbeing at least 51% owned, managed and controlled by a veteran and/or a service disabledveteran.

5) Good Faith Efforts are efforts that, given all relevant circumstances, a bidder or proposeractively and aggressively seeking to meet the goals, can reasonably be expected to make. Inevaluating good faith efforts made toward achieving the goals, whether the bidder orproposer has performed the efforts outlined in the Obligations of Bidder for Good FaithEfforts outlined in this document will be considered, along with any other relevant factors.

D. OBLIGATION OF BIDDER FOR GOOD FAITH EFFORTS

1) The bidder shall make a Good Faith Effort to achieve the Participation Goal forMWDBE and Veteran-Owned subcontractors/suppliers. The failure to meet the goalshall not necessarily be cause for disqualification of the bidder; however, bidders notmeeting the goal are required to furnish with their bids written documentation of theirGood Faith Efforts to do so.

2) Award of Contract shall be conditioned upon satisfaction of the requirements set forth herein.

3) The Form of Proposal includes a section entitled “MWDBE Participation Form”. Theapplicable information must be completed and submitted as outlined below.

4) Failure to submit this information as requested may be cause for rejection of bid ordelay in contract award.

E. DOCUMENTATION REQUIRED FOR GOOD FAITH EFFORTS

1) Bidders reaching the Goal are required to submit only the MWDBE Participation Form.”The form must be fully completed including names and telephone number of participatingMWDBE firm(s); type of work to be performed; estimated value of the contract and valueexpressed as a percentage of the total Lump Sum Bid Price. The form must be signed anddated, and is to be submitted with the bid.

2) Bidders not reaching the Goal must submit the “MWDBE Participation Form”, the “QuoteSummary Form” and a written statement documenting their Good Faith Effort to do so. Ifbid includes no MWDBE and/or Veteran participation, bidder shall enter “None” on thesubcontractor / supplier form). In addition, the bidder must submit written proof of theirGood Faith Efforts to meet the Participation Goal:

a. Advertised opportunities to participate in the contract in at least two (2) publications ofgeneral circulation media; trade and professional association publications; small and minoritybusiness or trade publications; and publications or trades targeting minority, women anddisadvantaged businesses not less than fifteen (15) days prior to the deadline for submissionof bids to allow MWDBE firms and Veteran-Owned businesses to participate.

b. Included documentation of advertising in the above publications with the bidders goodfaith efforts package

P-16

c. Attended LFUCG Central Purchasing Economic Inclusion Outreach event

d. Attended pre-bid meetings that were scheduled by LFUCG to inform MWDBEs and/orVeteran-Owned businesses of subcontracting opportunities

e. Sponsored Economic Inclusion event to provide networking opportunities for primecontractors and MWDBE firms and Veteran-Owned businesses.

f. Requested a list of MWDBE and/or Veteran subcontractors or suppliers from LFUCG andshowed evidence of contacting the companies on the list(s).

g. Contacted organizations that work with MWDBE companies for assistance in findingcertified MWBDE firms and Veteran-Owned businesses to work on this project. Thosecontacted and their responses should be a part of the bidder’s good faith effortsdocumentation.

h. Sent written notices, by certified mail, email or facsimile, to qualified, certifiedMWDBEs and/or Veteran-Owned businesses soliciting their participation in the contract notless than seven (7) days prior to the deadline for submission of bids to allow them toparticipate effectively.

i. Followed up initial solicitations by contacting MWDBEs and Veteran-OwnedBusinesses to determine their level of interest.

j. Provided the interested MWBDE firm and/or Veteran-Owned business with adequate andtimely information about the plans, specifications, and requirements of the contract.

k. Selected portions of the work to be performed by MWDBE firms and/or Veteran-Ownedbusinesses in order to increase the likelihood of meeting the contract goals. This includes,where appropriate, breaking out contract work items into economically feasible units tofacilitate MWDBE and Veteran participation, even when the prime contractor may otherwiseperform these work items with its own workforce

l. Negotiated in good faith with interested MWDBE firms and Veteran-Owned businesses notrejecting them as unqualified without sound reasons based on a thorough investigation oftheir capabilities. Any rejection should be so noted in writing with a description as to why anagreement could not be reached.

m. Included documentation of quotations received from interested MWDBE firms andVeteran-Owned businesses which were not used due to uncompetitive pricing or wererejected as unacceptable and/or copies of responses from firms indicating that they would notbe submitting a bid.

n. Bidder has to submit sound reasons why the quotations were considered unacceptable.The fact that the bidder has the ability and/or desire to perform the contract work with itsown forces will not be considered a sound reason for rejecting a MWDBE and/or Veteran-Owned business’s quote. Nothing in this provision shall be construed to require the bidder toaccept unreasonable quotes in order to satisfy MWDBE and Veteran goals.

P-17

o. Made an effort to offer assistance to or refer interested MWDBE firms and Veteran-Owned businesses to obtain the necessary equipment, supplies, materials, insurance and/orbonding to satisfy the work requirements of the bid proposal

p. Made efforts to expand the search for MWBE firms and Veteran-Owned businessesbeyond the usual geographic boundaries.

q. Other--any other evidence that the bidder submits which may show that the bidder hasmade reasonable good faith efforts to include MWDBE and Veteran participation.

Note: Failure to submit any of the documentation requested in this section may be causefor rejection of bid. Bidders may include any other documentation deemed relevant tothis requirement which is subject to review by the MBE Liaison. Documentation ofGood Faith Efforts must be submitted with the Bid, if the participation Goal is not met.

P-18

MINORITY BUSINESS ENTERPRISE PROGRAM

Sherita Miller, MPAMinority Business Enterprise LiaisonDivision of Central PurchasingLexington-Fayette Urban County Government200 East Main StreetLexington, KY [email protected]

OUR MISSION: The mission of the Minority Business Enterprise Program is to facilitate the full participationof minority and women owned businesses in the procurement process and to promote economic inclusion as abusiness imperative essential to the long term economic viability of Lexington-Fayette Urban CountyGovernment.

To that end the city council adopted and implemented Resolution 484-2017 – A Certified Minority, Women andDisadvantaged Business Enterprise ten percent (10%) minimum goal and a three (3%) minimum goal forCertified Veteran-Owned Small Businesses and Certified Service Disabled Veteran – Owned Businesses forgovernment contracts.

The resolution states the following definitions shall be used for the purposes of reaching these goals (a full copy isavailable in Central Purchasing):

Certified Disadvantaged Business Enterprise (DBE) – a business in which at least fifty-one percent (51%) is owned, managedand controlled by a person(s) who is socially and economically disadvantaged as define by 49 CFR subpart 26.

Certified Minority Business Enterprise (MBE) – a business in which at least fifty-one percent (51%) is owned, managed andcontrolled by an ethnic minority (i.e. African American, Asian American/Pacific Islander, Hispanic Islander, Native American/NativeAlaskan Indian) as defined in federal law or regulation as it may be amended from time-to-time.

Certified Women Business Enterprise (WBE) – a business in which at least fifty-one percent (51%) is owned, managed andcontrolled by a woman.

Certified Veteran-Owned Small Business (VOSB) – a business in which at least fifty-one percent (51%) is owned, managed andcontrolled by a veteran who served on active duty with the U.S. Army, Air Force, Navy, Marines or Coast Guard.

Certified Service Disabled Veteran Owned Small Business (SDVOSB) – a business in which at least fifty-one percent(51%) is owned, managed and controlled by a disabled veteran who served on active duty with the U.S. Army, Air Force, Navy, Marines orCoast Guard.

The term “Certified” shall mean the business is appropriately certified, licensed, verified, or validated by an organizationor entity recognized by the Division of Purchasing as having the appropriate credentials to make a determination as tothe status of the business.

P-19

We have compiled the list below to help you locate certified MBE, WBE and DBE certified businesses. Below is alisting of contacts for LFUCG Certified MWDBEs and Veteran-Owned Small Businesses in(https://lexingtonky.ionwave.net)

Business Contact Email Address Phone

LFUCG Sherita Miller [email protected] 859-258-3323

Commerce Lexington – MinorityBusiness Development

Tyrone Tyra [email protected] 859-226-1625

Tri-State Minority Supplier DiversityCouncil

Susan Marston [email protected] 502-365-9762

Small Business Development Council Shawn RogersUK SBDC

[email protected] 859-257-7666

Community Ventures Corporation Phyllis Alcorn [email protected] 859-231-0054

KY Transportation Cabinet (KYTC) Melvin Bynes [email protected] 502-564-3601

KYTC Pre-Qualification Shella Eagle [email protected] 502-782-4815

Ohio River Valley Women’sBusiness Council (WBENC)

Sheila Mixon [email protected] 513-487-6537

Kentucky MWBE Certification Program Yvette Smith, KentuckyFinance Cabinet

[email protected] 502-564-8099

National Women Business Owner’sCouncil (NWBOC)

Janet Harris-Lange [email protected] 800-675-5066

Small Business Administration Robert Coffey [email protected] 502-582-5971

LaVoz de Kentucky Andres Cruz [email protected] 859-621-2106

The Key News Journal Patrice Muhammad [email protected] 859-685-8488

___________________________

P-20

LFUCG MWDBE PARTICIPATION FORMBid/RFP/Quote Reference #

The MWDBE and/or veteran subcontractors listed have agreed to participate on this Bid/RFP/Quote. If anysubstitution is made or the total value of the work is changed prior to or after the job is in progress, it isunderstood that those substitutions must be submitted to Central Purchasing for approval immediately. Failureto submit a completed form may cause rejection of the bid.

MWDBE Company, Name,Address, Phone, Email

MBEWBE or

DBE

Work to be Performed Total DollarValue of the

Work

% Value of TotalContract

1.

2.

3.

4.

_______________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________

The undersigned company representative submits the above list of MWDBE firms to be used in accomplishing the workcontained in this Bid/RFP/Quote. Any misrepresentation may result in the termination of the contract and/or be subjectto applicable Federal and State laws concerning false statements and false claims.

Company Company Representative

Date Title

___________________________

P-21

LFUCG MWDBE SUBSTITUTION FORMBid/RFP/Quote Reference #

The substituted MWDBE and/or veteran subcontractors listed below have agreed to participate on this Bid/RFP/Quote.These substitutions were made prior to or after the job was in progress. These substitutions were made for reasons statedbelow and are now being submitted to Central Purchasing for approval. By the authorized signature of a representative ofour company, we understand that this information will be entered into our file for this project.

SUBSTITUTEDMWDBE Company

Name, Address, Phone,Email

MWDBE FormallyContracted/ Name,

Address, Phone,Email

Work to BePerformed

Reason for theSubstitution

Total DollarValue of the

Work

% Value of TotalContract

1.

2.

3.

4.

______________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________

The undersigned acknowledges that any misrepresentation may result in termination of the contract and/or be subject toapplicable Federal and State laws concerning false statements and false claims.


Date Title

_______________________

P-22

MWDBE QUOTE SUMMARY FORMBid/RFP/Quote Reference #

The undersigned acknowledges that the minority and/or veteran subcontractors listed on this form didsubmit a quote to participate on this project. Failure to submit this form may cause rejection of the bid.

Company Name Contact Person

Address/Phone/Email Bid Package / Bid Date

MWDBECompany Address

ContactPerson

ContactInformation(work phone,Email, cell)

DateContacted

Servicesto beperformed

Method ofCommunication(email, phonemeeting, ad,event etc)

Total dollars $$Do Not LeaveBlank(AttachDocumentation)

MBE *AAHAASNAFemale

Veteran

___________________________________________________________________________

___________________________________________________________________________

(MBE designation / AA=African American / HA= Hispanic American/AS = Asian American/Pacific Islander/NA= Native American)

The undersigned acknowledges that all information is accurate. Any misrepresentation may result in termination of thecontract and/or be subject to applicable Federal and State laws concerning false statements and claims.


Date Title

_______________________________________________

P-23

LFUCG SUBCONTRACTOR MONTHLY PAYMENT REPORT

The LFUCG has a 10% goal plan adopted by city council to increase the participation of minority and women ownedbusinesses in the procurement process. The LFUCG also has a 3% goal plan adopted by cited council to increase theparticipation of veteran owned businesses in the procurement process. In order to measure that goal LFUCG will trackspending with MWDBE and Veteran contractors on a monthly basis. By the signature below of an authorized companyrepresentative, you certify that the information is correct, and that each of the representations set forth below is true. Anymisrepresentation may result in termination of the contract and/or prosecution under applicable Federal and State lawsconcerning false statements and false claims. Please submit this form monthly to the Division of Central Purchasing/ 200East Main Street / Room 338 / Lexington, KY 40507.

Bid/RFP/Quote #____Total Contract Amount Awarded to Prime Contractor for this Project__

Project Name/ Contract # Work Period/ From: To:

Company Name: Address:

Federal Tax ID: Contact Person:

SubcontractorVendor ID(name, address,phone, email

Descriptionof Work

TotalSubcontractAmount

% ofTotalContractAwardedto Primefor thisProject

TotalAmountPaid forthis Period

PurchaseOrder numberforsubcontractorwork(please attachPO)

ScheduledProjectStart Date

ScheduledProjectEnd Date

____________________________________________________________________________

____________________________________________________________________________

By the signature below of an authorized company representative, you certify that the information is correct, and that eachof the representations set forth below is true. Any misrepresentations may result in the termination of the contractand/or prosecution under applicable Federal and State laws concerning false statements and false claims.


Date Title

P-24

LFUCG STATEMENT OF GOOD FAITH EFFORTSBid/RFP/Quote #_________________________________

By the signature below of an authorized company representative, we certify that wehave utilized the following Good Faith Efforts to obtain the maximum participationby MWDBE and Veteran-Owned business enterprises on the project and can supplythe appropriate documentation.

_____ Advertised opportunities to participate in the contract in at least two (2)publications of general circulation media; trade and professional associationpublications; small and minority business or trade publications; and publicationsor trades targeting minority, women and disadvantaged businesses not less thanfifteen (15) days prior to the deadline for submission of bids to allow MWDBEfirms and Veteran-Owned businesses to participate.

_____ Included documentation of advertising in the above publications with thebidders good faith efforts package

_____ Attended LFUCG Central Purchasing Economic Inclusion Outreach event

_____ Attended pre-bid meetings that were scheduled by LFUCG to informMWDBEs and/or Veteran-Owned Businesses of subcontracting opportunities

_____ Sponsored Economic Inclusion event to provide networking opportunitiesfor prime contractors and MWDBE firms and Veteran-Owned businesses

_____ Requested a list of MWDBE and/or Veteran subcontractors or suppliersfrom LFUCG and showed evidence of contacting the companies on the list(s).

_____ Contacted organizations that work with MWDBE companies for assistancein finding certified MWBDE firms and Veteran-Owned businesses to work onthis project. Those contacted and their responses should be a part of the bidder’sgood faith efforts documentation._____Sent written notices, by certified mail, email or facsimile, to qualified,certified MWDBEs soliciting their participation in the contract not less than seven(7) days prior to the deadline for submission of bids to allow them to participateeffectively.

_____ Followed up initial solicitations by contacting MWDBEs and Veteran-Owned businesses to determine their level of interest.

_____ Provided the interested MWBDE firm and/or Veteran-Owned businesswith adequate and timely information about the plans, specifications, andrequirements of the contract.

_____ Selected portions of the work to be performed by MWDBE firms and/orVeteran-Owned businesses in order to increase the likelihood of meeting thecontract goals. This includes, where appropriate, breaking out contract workitems into economically feasible units to facilitate MWDBE and Veteran

P-25

participation, even when the prime contractor may otherwise perform these workitems with its own workforce

_____ Negotiated in good faith with interested MWDBE firms and Veteran-Owned businesses not rejecting them as unqualified without sound reasons basedon a thorough investigation of their capabilities. Any rejection should be so notedin writing with a description as to why an agreement could not be reached.

__________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________

_____ Included documentation of quotations received from interested MWDBEfirms and Veteran-Owned businesses which were not used due to uncompetitivepricing or were rejected as unacceptable and/or copies of responses from firmsindicating that they would not be submitting a bid.

_____ Bidder has to submit sound reasons why the quotations were consideredunacceptable. The fact that the bidder has the ability and/or desire to perform thecontract work with its own forces will not be considered a sound reason forrejecting a MWDBE and/or Veteran-Owned business’s quote. Nothing in thisprovision shall be construed to require the bidder to accept unreasonable quotes inorder to satisfy MWDBE and Veteran goals.

_____ Made an effort to offer assistance to or refer interested MWDBE firms andVeteran-Owned businesses to obtain the necessary equipment, supplies, materials,insurance and/or bonding to satisfy the work requirements of the bid proposal

_____Made efforts to expand the search for MWBE firms and Veteran-Ownedbusinesses beyond the usual geographic boundaries.

_____ Other--any other evidence that the bidder submits which may show that thebidder has made reasonable good faith efforts to include MWDBE and Veteranparticipation.

NOTE: Failure to submit any of the documentation requested in this section may because for rejection of bid. Bidders may include any other documentation deemedrelevant to this requirement which is subject to approval by the MBE Liaison.Documentation of Good Faith Efforts must be submitted with the Bid, if theparticipation Goal is not met.

The undersigned acknowledges that all information is accurate. Any misrepresentations may resultin termination of the contract and/or be subject to applicable Federal and State laws concerningfalse statements and claims.


Date Title

P-26

8. AUTHENTICATION OF BID AND STATEMENT OF NON-COLLUSION ANDCONFLICT OF INTEREST

I hereby swear (or affirm) under the penalty for false swearing:

1. That I am the Bidder (if the Bidder is an individual), a partner of the Bidder (if the Bidder isa partnership), or an officer or employee of the bidding corporation having authority to signon its behalf (if the Bidder is a corporation);

2. That the attached bid has been arrived at by the Bidder independently, and has beensubmitted without collusion with, and without any agreement, understanding or plannedcommon course of action, with any other contractor, vendor of materials, supplies,equipment or services described in the Invitation to Bid, designed to limit independentbidding or competition;

3. That the contents of the bid or bids have not been communicated by the Bidder or itsemployees or agents to any person not an employee or agent of the Bidder or its surety onany bond furnished, with the bid or bids, and will not be communicated to any such person,prior to the official opening of the bid or bids;

4. That the Bidder is legally entitled to enter into the contracts with the Lexington-FayetteUrban County Government, and is not in violation of any prohibited conflict of interest;

5. (Applicable to corporation only) That as a foreign corporation, we are registered with theSecretary of State, Commonwealth of Kentucky, and authorized to do business in the State_____ or, that as a domestic corporation, we are in good standing with the Secretary ofState, Commonwealth of Kentucky _____. Check the statement applicable.

6. This offer is for 60 calendar days from the date this bid is opened. In submitting the above,it is expressly agreed that, upon proper acceptance by the Lexington-Fayette Urban CountyGovernment of any or all items bid above, a contract shall thereby be created with respect tothe items accepted.

7. That I have fully informed myself regarding the accuracy of the statements made in thisstatement.

8. That I certify that Subcontractors have not and will not be awarded to any firm(s) that havebeen debarred from noncompliance with the Federal Labor Standards, Title VI of the CivilRights Act of 1964 As Amended, Executive Order 11246 As Amended or any other FederalLaw.

P-27

9. STATEMENT OF EXPERIENCE

NAME OF INDIVIDUAL:

POSITION/TITLE:

STATEMENT OF EXPERIENCE:

NAME OF INDIVIDUAL:

POSITION/TITLE:


NAME OF INDIVIDUAL:

POSITION/TITLE:


P-28

NAME OF INDIVIDUAL:

POSITION/TITLE:


NAME OF INDIVIDUAL:

POSITION/TITLE:


NAME OF INDIVIDUAL:

POSITION/TITLE:


* Include all officers, office management’s, Affirmative Action officials, and field managementpersonnel. (Attach separate sheets if necessary.)

P-29

10. EQUAL OPPORTUNITY AGREEMENT

Standard Title VI Assurance

The Lexington Fayette-Urban County Government, (hereinafter referred to as the “Recipient”)hereby agrees that as a condition to receiving any Federal financial assistance from the U.S.Department of Transportation, it will comply with Title VI of the Civil Rights Act of 1964,78Stat.252, 42 U.S.C. 2000d-4 (hereinafter referred to as the “Act”), and all requirements imposedby or pursuant to Title 49, Code of Federal Regulations, U.S. Department of Transportation, SubtitleA, Office of the Secretary, (49 CFR, Part 21) Nondiscrimination in Federally Assisted Program ofthe Department of Transportation – Effectuation of Title VI of the Civil Rights Act of 1964(hereinafter referred to as the “Regulations”) and other pertinent directives, no person in the UnitedStates shall, on the grounds of race, color, national origin, sex, age (over 40), religion, sexualorientation, gender identity, veteran status, or disability be excluded from participation in, be deniedthe benefits of, or be otherwise subjected to discrimination under any program or activity for whichthe Recipient receives Federal financial assistance from the U.S. Department of Transportation,including the Federal Highway Administration, and hereby gives assurance that will promptly takeany necessary measures to effectuate this agreement. This assurance is required by subsection21.7(a) (1) of the Regulations.

The Law

∗ Title VII of the Civil Rights Act of 1964 (amended 1972) states that it is unlawful for anemployer to discriminate in employment because of race, color, religion, sex, age (40-70 years)or national origin.

∗ Executive Order No. 11246 on Nondiscrimination under Federal contract prohibits employmentdiscrimination by contractor and subcontractor doing business with the Federal Government orrecipients of Federal funds. This order was later amended by Executive Order No. 11375 toprohibit discrimination on the basis of sex.

∗ Section 503 of the Rehabilitation Act of 1973 States:

The Contractor will not discriminate against any employee or applicant for employmentbecause of physical or mental handicap.

∗ Section 2012 of the Vietnam Era Veterans Readjustment Act of 1973 requires AffirmativeAction on behalf of disabled veterans and veterans of the Vietnam Era by contractors havingFederal Contracts.

∗ Section 206 (A) of Executive Order 12086, Consolidation of Contract Compliance Functions forEqual Employment Opportunity, states:

The Secretary of Labor may investigate the employment practices of any Governmentcontractor or sub-contractor to determine whether or not the contractual provisionsspecified in Section 202 of this order have been violated.

The Lexington-Fayette Urban County Government practices Equal Opportunity in recruiting,hiring and promoting. It is the Government's intent to affirmatively provide employmentopportunities for those individuals who have previously not been allowed to enter into themainstream of society. Because of its importance to the local Government, this policy carries the

P-30

full endorsement of the Mayor, Commissioners, Directors, and all supervisory personnel. Infollowing this commitment to Equal Employment Opportunity and because the Government isthe benefactor of the Federal funds, it is both against the Urban County Government policy andillegal for the Government to let contracts to companies which knowingly or unknowinglypractice discrimination in their employment practices. Violation of the above mentionedordinances may cause a contract to be canceled and the contractor may be declared ineligible forfuture consideration.

Please sign this statement in the appropriate space acknowledging that you have read andunderstand the provisions contained herein. Return this document as part of your applicationpacket.

Bidders

I/We agree to comply with the Civil Rights Laws listed above that govern employment rights ofminorities, women, Vietnam veterans, handicapped, and aged persons.

Signature Name of Business

The Entity (regardless of whether construction contractor, non-construction contractor or supplier)agrees to provide equal opportunity in employment for all qualified persons, to prohibitdiscrimination in employment because of race, color, creed, national origin, sex or age, and topromote equal employment through a positive, continuing program from itself and each of its sub-contracting agents. This program of equal employment opportunity shall apply to every aspect ofits employment policies and practices.

The Kentucky equal Employment Opportunity Act of 1978 (KRS 45.560-45.640) requires that anycount, city, town, school district, water district, hospital district, or other political subdivision of thestate shall include in directly or indirectly publicly funded contracts for supplies, materials, services,or equipment hereinafter entered into the following provisions:

During the performance of this contract, the contractor agrees as follows:

(1) The contractor will not discriminate against any employee or applicant for employmentbecause of race, color, religion, sex, age or national origin;

(2) The contractor will state in all solicitations or advertisements for employees placed by or onbehalf of the contractors that all qualified applicants will receive consideration foremployment without regard to race, color, religion, sex, age or national origin;

(3) The contract will post notices in conspicuous places, available to employees and applicantsfor employment, setting forth the provisions of the non-discrimination clauses required bythis section; and

(4) The contractor will send a notice to each labor union or representative of workers withwhich he has a collective bargaining agreement or other contract or understanding advisingthe labor union or workers’ representative of the contractor’s commitments under thenondiscrimination clauses.

P-31

The Act further provides:

KRS 45.610. Hiring minorities – Information required

(1) For the length of the contract, each contractor shall hire minorities from other sourceswithin the drawing area, should the union with which he has collective bargainingagreements be unwilling to supply sufficient minorities to satisfy the agreed upon goals andtimetable.

(2) Each contractor shall, for the length of the contract, furnish such information as required byKRS 45.560 to KRS 45.640 and by such rules, regulations and orders issued pursuantthereto and will permit access to all books and records pertaining to his employmentpractices and work sites by the contracting agency and the department for purposes ofinvestigation to ascertain compliance with KRS 45.560 to 45.640 and such rules,regulations and orders issued pursuant thereto.

KRS 45.620. Action against contractor – Hiring of minority contractor or subcontractor

(1) If any contractor is found by the department to have engaged in an unlawful practice underthis chapter during the course of performing under a contract or subcontract covered underKRS 45.560 to 45.640, the department shall so certify to the contracting agency and suchcertification shall be binding upon the contracting agency unless it is reversed in the courseof judicial review.

(2) If the contractor is found to have committed an unlawful practice under KRS 45.560 to45.640, the contracting agency may cancel or terminate the contract, conditioned upon aprogram for future compliance approved by the contracting agency and the department.The contracting agency may declare such a contractor ineligible to bid on further contractswith that agency until such time as the contractor complies in full with the requirements ofKRS 45.560 – 45.640.

(3) The equal employment provisions of KRS 45.560 to 45.640 may be met in part by acontractor by subcontracting to a minority contractor or subcontractor. For the provisionsof KRS 45.560 to 45.640, a minority contractor or subcontractor shall mean a business thatis owned and controlled by one or more persons disadvantaged by racial or ethniccircumstances.

KRS 45.630 Termination of existing employee not required, when

Any provision of KRS 45.560 to 45.640 notwithstanding, no contractor shall be required toterminate an existing employee upon proof that that employee was employed prior to thedate of the contract.

KRS 45.640 Minimum skills

Nothing in KRS 45.560 to 45.640 shall require a contractor to hire anyone who fails todemonstrate the minimum skills required to perform a particular job.

P-32

It is recommended that all of the provisions quoted above to be included as special conditions ineach contract. In the case of a contract exceeding $250,000, the contractor is required to furnishevidence that his work-force in Kentucky is representative of the available work-force in the areafrom which he draws employees, or to supply an Affirmative Action plan which will achieve suchrepresentation during the life of the contract.

P-33

11. EQUAL EMPLOYMENT OPPORTUNITY AFFIRMATIVE ACTION POLICY

It is the policy of _

to assure that all applicants for employment and all employees are treated on a fair and equitable

basis without regard to their race, religion, sex, color, handicap, natural origin or age.

Such action shall include employment, promotion, demotion, recruitment or recruitment

advertising, layoff or termination, rates of pay and other forms of compensation, and selection for

training, whether apprenticeship and/or on-the-job-training.

Furthermore, this company agrees to make special recruitment efforts to hire the protected

class whenever feasible. This company also agrees to adhere to all applicable federal, state, and

________________________________________________________

local laws relating to Equal Employment Opportunity for all individuals.

P-34

12. Workforce Analysis Form

Name of Organization:

________________________________________________________Prepared by: _ Date: ______/______/______

(Name and Title) Revised 2015-Dec-15

Categories Total White

(NotHispanic or

Latino)

____________________________________________________________

Hispanic orLatino

Black orAfrican-

American(Not

Hispanic orLatino

NativeHawaiianand Other

PacificIslander

(NotHispanicor Latino

Asian(Not

Hispanicor Latino

AmericanIndian or

Alaskan Native(not Hispanic

or Latino

Two or moreraces (NotHispanic or

Latino

Total

M F M F M F M F M F M F M F M F

Administrators

Professionals

Superintendents

Supervisors

Foremen

Technicians

Protective Service

Para-Professionals

Office/Clerical

Skilled Craft

Service/Maintenance

Total:

P-35

13. EVIDENCE OF INSURABILITY

LEXINGTON-FAYETTE URBAN COUNTY GOVERNMENT CONSTRUCTION PROJECT(Use separate form for each Agency or Brokerage agreeing to provide coverage)

Names Insured: Employee ID:

Address: Phone:

Project to be insured:

In lieu of obtaining certificates of insurance at this time, the undersigned agrees to provide the above Named Insured with the minimum coverage listed below. These are outlined in the Insuranceand Risk Management of Part V (Special Conditions), including all requirements, and conditions:

SectionItems Coverage

Minimum Limits andPolicy Requirements

Limits ProvidedTo Insured

Name ofInsurer

A.M. Best'sCode Rating

SC-3, Section 2, Part 4.1 – see provisions CGL $1,000,000 per occ. And$2,000,000 aggregate

$

SC-3, Section 2, Part 4.1 – see provisions AUTO $2,000,000/per occ.$

SC-3, Section 2, Part 4.1 – see provisions WC Statutory w /endorsement asnoted

$

Section 2 includes required provisions, statements regarding insurance requirements, and the undersigned agrees to abide by all provisions for the coverage’s checked above unless stated otherwisewhen submitting.

Agency or Brokerage Name of Authorized Representative

Street Address Title

City State Zip Authorized Signature

Telephone Number Date

NOTE: Authorized signatures may be the agent's if agent has placed insurance through an agency agreement with the insurer. If insurance is brokered, authorized signature must be that ofauthorized representative of insurer.

P-36

IMPORTANT: Contract may not be awarded if a completed and signed copy of this form for all coverage’s listed above is not provided with the bid.

P-37

14. DEBARRED FIRMS

PROJECT NAME:

BID NUMBER:

________________________________________________

LEXINGTON-FAYETTE URBAN COUNTY GOVERNMENTLEXINGTON, KY

________________________________________________

All prime Contractors shall certify that Subcontractors have not and will not be awarded to anyfirms that has been debarred for noncompliance with the Federal Labor Standards, Title VI of theCivil Rights Act of 1964 As Amended, Executive Order 11246 As Amended or any otherFederal Law.

________________________________________________

________________________________________________

_________________________________

All bidders shall complete the attached certification in duplicate and submit both copies to theOwner with the bid proposal. The Owner (grantee) shall transmit one copy to the Lexington-Fayette Urban County Government, Division of Community Development, within fourteen (14)days after bid opening.

_________________________________

The undersigned hereby certifies that the firm of ___________________________________hasnot and will not award a subcontract, in connection with any contract award to it as the result ofthis bid, to any firm that has been debarred for noncompliance with the Federal labor Standards,Title VI of the civil Rights Act of 1964, Executive Order 11246 as amended or any Federal Law.

Name of Firm Submitting Bid

Signature of Authorized Official

Title

Date

P-38

15. DEBARMENT CERTIFICATION

All contractors/subcontractors shall complete the following certification and submit it with thebid proposal.

_________________________________

The contractor/subcontractor certifies in accordance with Executive Order 12549 (Debarmentand Suspension 2/18/86) that to the best of its knowledge and belief, that it and its principals:

______________________________

1) Are not presently debarred, suspended, proposed for debarment, declared negligible, orvoluntarily excluded from covered transactions or contract by any Federal department oragency for noncompliance with the Federal Labor Standards, Title VI of the Civil RightsAct of 1964 as amended, Executive Order 11246 as amended or any other Federal law;

_________________________________

_________________________________

a) Have not within a three year period preceding this proposal been convicted of orhad a civil judgment rendered against them for commission of fraud or a criminaloffense in connection with obtaining, attempting to obtain, or performing a public(Federal, State or local) transaction or contract under a public transaction;violation of Federal or State antitrust statutes or commission of embezzlement,theft, forgery, bribery, falsification or destruction of records, making falsestatements, or receiving stolen property;

b) Are not presently indicted for or otherwise criminally or civilly charged by agovernment entity (Federal, State or local) with commission of any of theoffenses enumerated in paragraph (1)(a) of this certification; and

c) Have not within a three year period preceding this bid has one or more public(Federal, State or local) transactions or contracts terminated for cause or default.

2) Where the contractor is unable to certify to any of the statements in this certification, suchprospective contractors shall attach an explanation to this certification form.

Firm Name:

Project:

Printed Name and Title of Authorized Representative:

Signature: _________________________________

Date:

END OF SECTION

GC-1

PART IV

GENERAL CONDITIONS

TABLE OF CONTENTS

ArticleNumber Title Page

.................................................................................................

1. DEFINITIONS GC-6

2. PRELIMINARY MATTERS GC-10

3. CONTRACT DOCUMENTS: INTENT, CONFLICTS,

................................................

AMENDING AND REUSE GC-11

4. AVAILABILITY OF LANDS; PHYSICAL CONDITIONS;

.....................................

REFERENCE POINTS GC-13

5. CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES GC-15

6. OTHER WORK GC-26

7. OWNER'S RESPONSIBILITIES GC-27

8. ENGINEER'S STATUS DURING CONSTRUCTION GC-27

9. CHANGES IN THE WORK GC-30

10. CHANGE OF CONTRACT PRICE GC-31

11. CHANGE OF CONTRACT TIME GC-37

12. WARRANTY AND GUARANTEE; TESTS AND INSPECTIONS;......CORRECTION, REMOVAL OR ACCEPTANCE OF DEFECTIVE WORK GC-38

13. PAYMENTS TO CONTRACTOR AND COMPLETION GC-41

14. SUSPENSION OF WORK AND TERMINATION GC-45

..........................................................................

.........................................................................

....................................................................................

..........................................

.............................................................................

........................................................................................................

................................................................

.............................................................................................

.....................................................................................

....................................................................................

............................................................................................................

15. MISCELLANEOUS GC-48

GC-2

DETAILED TABLE OF CONTENTS OF GENERAL CONDITIONS

1. Definitions

2. Preliminary Matters

2.1 Delivery of Bonds2.2 Copies of Documents2.3 Commencement of Contract Time; Notice to Proceed2.4 Starting the Project2.5 Before Starting Construction2.6 Submittal of Schedules2.7 Preconstruction Conference2.8 Finalizing Schedules

3. Contract Documents, Intent, Conflicts, Amending, and Reuse

3.1 General3.2 Intent3.3 Conflicts3.4 Amending and Supplementing Contract Documents3.5 Reuse of Documents

4. Availability of Lands, Physical Conditions, Reference Points

4.1 Availability of Lands4.2 Physical Conditions4.3 Physical Conditions - Underground Facilities4.4 Reference Points

5. CONTRACTOR'S Responsibilities

5.1 Supervision5.2 Superintendence5.3 Labor5.4 Start-Up and Completion of Work5.5 Materials and Equipment5.6 Adjusting Progress Schedule5.7 Substitutes or "Or-Equal" Items5.8 Subcontractors, Suppliers and Others5.9 Patent Fees and Royalties5.10 Permits5.11 Laws and Regulations5.12 Taxes5.13 Use of Premises

GC-3

5.14 Record Drawings5.15 Shop Drawings and Samples5.16 Continuing the Work5.17 Erosion and Sediment Control

6. Other Work

6.1 Related Work at Site6.2 Other Contractors or Utility Owners6.3 Delays Caused By Others6.4 Coordination

7. OWNER'S Responsibilities

7.1 Communications7.2 Data and Payments7.3 Lands, Easements, and Surveys7.4 Change Orders7.5 Inspections, Tests, and Approvals7.6 Stop or Suspend Work

8. ENGINEER'S Status During Construction

8.1 OWNER'S Representative8.2 Visits to Site8.3 Project Representation8.4 Clarification and Interpretations8.5 Authorized Variations in Work8.6 Rejecting Defective Work8.7 Shop Drawings8.8 Change Orders8.9 Payments8.10 Determinations for Unit Prices8.11 Decisions on Disputes8.12 Limitations on ENGINEER'S Responsibilities

9. Changes in the Work

9.1 OWNER May Order Changes9.2 Claims9.3 Work Not in Contract Documents9.4 Change Orders9.5 Notice of Change

GC-4

10. Change of Contract Price

10.1 Total Compensation10.2 Claim for Increase or Decrease in Price10.3 Value of Work10.4 Cost of the Work10.5 Not to Be Included in Cost of the Work10.6 CONTRACTOR'S Fee10.7 Itemized Cost Breakdown10.8 Cash Allowance10.9 Unit Price Work

11. Change of Contract Time

11.1 Change Order11.2 Justification for Time Extension11.3 Time Limits

12. Warranty and Guarantee; Tests and Inspections;Correction, Removal or Acceptance of Defective Work

12.1 Warranty and Guarantee12.2 Access to Work12.3 Tests and Inspections12.4 OWNER May Stop Work12.5 Correction or Removal of Defective Work12.6 One Year Correction Period12.7 Acceptance of Defective work12.8 Owner May Correct Defective Work

13. Payments to CONTRACTOR and Completion

13.1 Schedule of Values13.2 Application for Progress Payments13.3 CONTRACTOR'S Warranty of Title13.4 Review of Application for Progress Payments13.5 Partial Utilization13.6 Final Inspection13.7 Final Application for Payment13.8 Final Payment and Acceptance13.9 CONTRACTOR'S Continuing Obligation13.10 Waiver of Claims

GC-5

14. Suspension of Work and Termination

14.1 OWNER May Suspend Work14.2 OWNER May Terminate14.3 CONTRACTOR'S Services Terminated14.4 Payment After Termination14.5 CONTRACTOR May Stop or Terminate

15. Miscellaneous

15.1 Claims for Injury or Damage15.2 Non-Discrimination in Employment15.3 Temporary Street Closing or Blockage15.4 Percentage of Work Performed by Prime CONTRACTOR15.5 Clean-up15.6 General15.7 Debris Disposal

END OF SECTION

GC-6

PART IV

GENERAL CONDITIONS

1. DEFINITIONS

Wherever used in these General Conditions or the other Contract Documents, the followingterms have the meanings indicated which are applicable to both the singular and pluralthereof.

1.1 AddendaWritten or graphic instruments issued prior to the opening of Bids which clarify,correct, or change the Bid Documents or the Contract Documents.

1.2 AgreementThe written agreement between OWNER and CONTRACTOR covering the Workto be performed; other Contract Documents are attached to the Agreement and madea part thereof as provided therein.

1.3 Application for PaymentThe form accepted by ENGINEER which is to be used by CONTRACTOR inrequesting progress or final payments and which is to include such supportingdocumentation as is required by the Contract Documents.

1.4 BidThe offer or proposal of the Bidder submitted on the prescribed form setting forththe prices for the Work to be performed.

1.5 BidderAn individual, partnership, or corporation, who submit a Bid for a prime contractwith the OWNER, for the Work described in the proposed Contract Documents.

1.6 BondsBid, performance and payment bonds and other instruments of security.

1.7 Calendar DayA calendar day of twenty-four hours measured from midnight to the next midnightshall constitute a day.

1.8 Change OrderA document recommended by ENGINEER, which is signed by CONTRACTORand OWNER and authorizes an addition, deletion or revision in the Work, or anadjustment in the Contract Price or the Contract Time, issued on or after theEffective Date of the Agreement.

GC-7

1.9 Contract DocumentsThe Advertisement for Bidders, Information for Bidders, Agreement, Addenda(which pertain to the Contract Documents), CONTRACTOR'S Bid (includingdocumentation accompanying the Bid and any post-bid documentation submittedprior to the Notice of Award) when attached as an exhibit to the Agreement, theBonds, these General Conditions, the Special Conditions, the Specifications and theDrawings as the same are more specifically identified in the Agreement, togetherwith all amendments, modifications and supplements.

1.10 Contract Unit PriceThe monies payable by OWNER to CONTRACTOR under the Contract Documentsas stated in the Agreement. Unit Prices are to be firm for the term of this Contract.

1.11 Contract TimeThe number of consecutive calendar days between the date of issuance of the Noticeto Proceed and the contract completion date.

1.12 CONTRACTORThe person, firm or corporation with whom OWNER has entered into theAgreement.

1.13 DefectiveAn adjective which when modifying the word Work refers to Work that isunsatisfactory, faulty or deficient, or does not conform to the Contract Documents,or does not meet the requirements of any inspection, reference standard, test orapproval referred to in the Contract Documents, or has been damaged prior toENGINEER’S recommendation of final payment (unless responsibility for theprotection thereof has been assumed by OWNER).

1.14 DrawingsThe drawings which show the character and scope of the Work to be performed andwhich have been prepared or approved by ENGINEER and are referred to in theContract Documents.

1.15 Effective Date of the AgreementThe date indicated in the Agreement on which it becomes effective.

1.16 ENGINEERThe Lexington-Fayette Urban County Government Division of Water Quality or itsauthorized representative.

1.17 Field OrderA documented order issued by ENGINEER which orders minor changes in theWork, but which does not involve a change in the Contract Price or the ContractTime.

GC-8

1.18 Giving NoticeWhenever any provision of the Contract Documents requires the giving of writtennotice, it will be deemed to have been validly given if delivered in person to theindividual or to a member of the firm or to an officer of the corporation for whom itis intended, or if delivered at or sent by registered or certified mail, postage prepaid,to the last business address known to the giver of the notice.

1.19 Laws and RegulationsLaws, rules, regulations, ordinances, codes and/or orders.

1.20 Notice of AwardThe written notice by OWNER to the apparent successful bidder stating that uponcompliance by the apparent successful bidder with the conditions enumeratedtherein, within the time specified, OWNER will sign and deliver the Agreement.

1.21 Notice to ProceedA written notice given by OWNER to CONTRACTOR fixing the date on which theContract Time will commence to run and on which CONTRACTOR shall start toperform CONTRACTOR'S obligations under the Contract Documents.

1.22 OWNERThe Lexington-Fayette Urban County Government.

1.23 Partial UtilizationPlacing a portion of the Work in service for the purpose for which it is intended (orrelated purpose) before reaching Completion for all the Work.

1.24 ProjectThe total construction of which the Work to be provided under the ContractDocuments may be the whole, or a part as indicated elsewhere in the ContractDocuments.

1.25 InspectorThe authorized representative of the ENGINEER who is assigned to the site or anypart thereof.

1.26 Shop DrawingsAll drawings, diagrams, illustrations, schedules and other data which are specificallyprepared by or for CONTRACTOR to illustrate some portion of the Work and allillustrations, brochures, standard schedules, performance charts, instructions,diagrams and other information prepared by a Supplier and submitted byCONTRACTOR to illustrate material or equipment for some portion of the Work.

1.27 SpecificationsThose portions of the Contract Documents consisting of written technicaldescriptions of materials, equipment, construction systems, standards and

GC-9

workmanship as applied to the Work and certain administrative details applicablethereto.

1.28 Standard SpecificationsThe "Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction", TransportationCabinet, Department of Highways, Commonwealth of Kentucky, current edition.MUTCD shall refer to the “Manual of Uniform Traffic Control Devices.

1.29 SubcontractorAn individual, firm or corporation having a direct contract with CONTRACTOR orwith any other Subcontractor for the performance of a part of the Work at the site.

1.30 Special ConditionsThe part of the Contract Documents which amends or supplements these GeneralConditions.

1.31 SupplierA manufacturer, fabricator, supplier, distributor, materialman or vendor.

1.32 Underground FacilitiesAll pipelines, conduits, ducts, cables, wires, manholes, vaults, tanks, tunnels or othersuch facilities or attachments, and any encasements containing such facilities whichhave been installed underground to furnish any of the following services ormaterials: electricity, gases, steam, liquid petroleum products, telephone or othercommunications, cable television, sewage and drainage removal, traffic or othercontrol systems or water.

1.33 Unit Price WorkNot applicable

1.34 WorkThe entire completed construction or the various separately identifiable partsthereof required to be furnished under the Contract Documents. Work is theresult of performing services, furnishing labor and furnishing and incorporatingmaterials and equipment into the construction, all as required by the ContractDocuments.

1.35 Time PeriodWhen any period of time is referred to in the Contract Documents by days, it will becomputed to exclude the first and include the last day of such period. If the last dayof any such period falls on a Saturday or Sunday or on a day made a legal holiday bythe law of the applicable jurisdiction, such day will be omitted from thecomputation.

GC-10

2. PRELIMINARY MATTERS

2.1 Delivery of BondsWhen the CONTRACTOR delivers the executed Agreements to OWNER,CONTRACTOR shall also deliver to OWNER, such Bonds, Insurance Certificate,and Power of Attorney as CONTRACTOR may be required to furnish.

2.2 Copies of DocumentsOwner shall furnish to CONTRACTOR up to three copies (unless otherwisespecified in the Special Conditions) of the Contract Documents as are reasonablynecessary for the execution of the Work. Additional copies will be furnished, uponrequest, at the cost of reproduction.

2.3 Commencement of Contract Time; Notice to ProceedThe Contract Time will commence to run on the day specified in the Notice toProceed.

2.4 Starting the ProjectCONTRACTOR shall start to perform the Work on the date when the ContractTime commences to run, but no Work shall be done at the site prior to the date onwhich the Contract Time commences to run.

2.5 Before Starting ConstructionBefore undertaking each part of the Work, CONTRACTOR shall carefully studyand compare the Contract Documents and check and verify pertinent figures shownthereon and all applicable field measurements. CONTRACTOR shall promptlyreport in writing to ENGINEER any conflict, error or discrepancy whichCONTRACTOR may discover and shall obtain a written interpretation orclarification from ENGINEER before proceeding with any Work affected thereby;however, CONTRACTOR shall not be liable to OWNER or ENGINEER for failureto report any conflict, error or discrepancy in the Contract Documents, unlessCONTRACTOR had actual knowledge thereof or should reasonably have knownthereof.

2.6 Submittal of SchedulesWithin ten days after the effective date of the Agreement (unless otherwisespecified) CONTRACTOR shall submit to ENGINEER for review:

2.6.1 an estimated progress schedule indicating the starting and completiondates of the various stages of the Work;

2.6.2 a preliminary schedule of Shop Drawing submissions; and

2.6.3 a preliminary schedule of values for all of the Work which willinclude quantities and prices of items aggregating the Contract Price and willsubdivide the Work into component parts in sufficient detail to serve as the

GC-11

basis for progress payments during construction. Such prices will include anappropriate amount of overhead and profit applicable to each item of Workwhich will be confirmed in writing by CONTRACTOR at the time ofsubmission.

2.7 Preconstruction ConferenceBefore CONTRACTOR starts the Work at the proposed site, a conference attendedby CONTRACTOR, ENGINEER, EEO-Affirmative Action Officer, and otherappropriate parties will be held to discuss the following issues: (1) The scheduling ofthe Work to be completed; (2) The procedures for handling shop drawings and othersubmittals; (3) The processing of applications for payment; (4) The establishment ofan understanding among the involved parties in regard to the proposed project; and(5) The establishment of procedures for effectively implementing the LFUCG's 10%minimum DBE goals.

2.8 Finalizing SchedulesAt least ten days before submission of the first Application for Payment aconference attended by CONTRACTOR, ENGINEER and others as appropriate willbe held to finalize the schedules submitted in accordance with paragraph 2.6. Thefinalized progress schedule will be acceptable to ENGINEER as providing orderlyprogression of the Work to completion within the Contract Time, but suchacceptance will neither impose on ENGINEER responsibility for the progress orscheduling of the Work nor relieve CONTRACTOR from full responsibility thereof.The finalized schedule of Shop Drawing submissions will be acceptable toENGINEER as providing a workable arrangement for processing the submissions.The finalized schedule of values will be acceptable to ENGINEER as to form andsubstance.

3. CONTRACT DOCUMENTS: INTENT, CONFLICTS, AMENDING ANDREUSE

3.1 GeneralThe Contract Documents comprise the entire agreement between OWNER andCONTRACTOR concerning the Work. The Contract Documents arecomplementary; what is called for by one is as binding as if called for by all. TheContract Documents will be construed in accordance with the law of the place of theProject.

3.2 IntentIt is the intent of the Contract Documents to describe a functionally complete Project (orpart thereof) to be constructed in accordance with the Contract Documents. AnyWork, materials or equipment that may reasonably be inferred from the ContractDocuments as being required to produce the intended result will be supplied whether ornot specifically called for. When words which have a well-known technical or trademeaning are used to describe Work, materials or equipment such words shall beinterpreted in accordance with that meaning. Reference to standard specifications,

GC-12

manuals or codes of any technical society, organization or association, or to the laws orregulations of any governmental authority, whether such reference be specific or byimplication, shall mean the latest standard specification, manual, code or laws orregulations in effect at the time of opening of Bids (or, on the Effective Date of theAgreement if there were no Bids), except as may be otherwise specifically stated.However, no provision of any referenced standard specification, manual or code(whether or not specifically incorporated by reference in the Contract Documents) shallbe effective to change the duties and responsibilities of OWNER, CONTRACTOR orENGINEER, or any of their consultants, agents or employees from those set forth in theContract Documents, nor shall it be effective to assign to ENGINEER, or any ofENGINEER'S consultants, agents or employees, any duty or authority to supervise ordirect the furnishing or performance of the Work or any duty or authority to undertakeresponsibility contrary to the provisions of paragraph 8.12.3 or 8.12.4. Clarificationsand interpretations of the Contract Documents shall be issued by ENGINEER asprovided in paragraph 8.4.

3.3 ConflictsIf, during the performance of the Work, CONTRACTOR finds a conflict, error ordiscrepancy in the Contract Documents, CONTRACTOR shall so report toENGINEER in writing at once and before proceeding with the Work affectedthereby shall obtain a written interpretation or clarification from ENGINEER;however, CONTRACTOR shall not be liable to OWNER or ENGINEER for failureto report any conflict, error or discrepancy in the Contract Documents unlessCONTRACTOR had actual knowledge thereof or should reasonably have knownthereof.

In resolving such conflicts, errors and discrepancies, the documents shall be givenprecedence in the following order:

1. Agreement2. Field and Change Orders3. Addenda4. Special Conditions5. Instruction to Bidders6. General Conditions7. Specifications and Drawings

Figure dimension on drawings shall govern over scale dimensions and detailedDrawings shall govern over general Drawings.

3.4 Amending and Supplementing Contract DocumentsThe Contract Documents may be amended to provide for additions, deletions andrevisions in the Work or to modify the terms and conditions thereof by means of aChange Order or a Field Order. Contract Price and Contract Time may only bechanged by a Change Order.

GC-13

3.5 Reuse of DocumentsNeither CONTRACTOR nor any Subcontractor or Supplier or other person ororganization performing or furnishing any of the Work under a direct or indirectcontract with OWNER shall have or acquire any title to or ownership rights in anyof the Drawings, Specifications or other documents (or copies of any thereof)prepared by or bearing the seal of ENGINEER; and they shall not reuse any of themon extensions of the Project or any other project without written consent of OWNERand ENGINEER and specific written verification or adaptation by ENGINEER.

4. AVAILABILITY OF LANDS; PHYSICAL CONDITIONS, REFERENCE POINTS

4.1 Availability of LandsOWNER shall furnish, as indicated in the Contract Documents, the lands uponwhich the Work is to be performed, rights-of-way and easements for access thereto,and such other lands which are designated for the use of CONTRACTOR.Easements for permanent structures or permanent changes in existing facilities willbe obtained and paid for by OWNER, unless otherwise provided in the ContractDocuments. If CONTRACTOR believes that any delay in OWNER'S furnishingthese lands, rights-of-way or easements entitles CONTRACTOR to an extension ofthe Contract Time, CONTRACTOR may make a claim therefor as provided inArticle 11. ENGINEER shall determine if the claim is legitimate or not.CONTRACTOR shall provide for all additional lands and access thereto that may berequired for temporary construction facilities or storage of materials and equipment.

4.2 Physical Conditions

4.2.1 Explorations and ReportsReference is made to the Special Conditions for identification of thosereports of explorations and tests of subsurface conditions at the site that havebeen utilized by ENGINEER in preparation of the Contract Documents.CONTRACTOR may rely upon the accuracy of the technical data containedin such reports, but not upon non-technical data, interpretations or opinionscontained therein or for the completeness thereof for CONTRACTOR’Spurposes. Except as indicated in the immediately preceding sentence and inparagraph 4.2.6, CONTRACTOR shall have full responsibility with respectto subsurface conditions at the site.

4.2.2 Existing StructuresReference is made to the Special Conditions for identification of thosedrawings of physical conditions in or relating to existing surface andsubsurface structures (except Underground Facilities referred to in paragraph4.3 which are at or contiguous to the site that have been utilized byENGINEER in preparation of the Contract Documents. CONTRACTORmay rely upon the accuracy of the technical data contained in such drawings,but not for the completeness thereof for CONTRACTOR’S purposes.Except as indicated in the immediately preceding sentence and in paragraph4.2.6, CONTRACTOR shall have full responsibility with respect to physicalconditions in or relating to such structures.

GC-14

4.2.3 Report of Differing ConditionsIf CONTRACTOR believes that:

4.2.3.1 any technical data on which CONTRACTOR is entitled to rely asprovided in paragraphs 4.2.1 and 4.2.2 is inaccurate, or

4.2.3.2 any physical conditions uncovered or revealed at the site differmaterially from that indicated, reflected or referred to in the ContractDocuments,

CONTRACTOR shall, promptly after becoming aware thereof and beforeperforming and WORK in connection therewith (except in an emergency)notify OWNER and ENGINEER in writing about the inaccuracy ordifference.

4.2.4 ENGINEER’S ReviewEngineer will promptly review the pertinent conditions, determine thenecessity of obtaining additional explorations or tests with respect theretoand advise CONTRACTOR of ENGINEER’S findings and conclusions.

4.2.5 Possible Document ChangeIf ENGINEER concludes that there is a material error in the ContractDocuments or that because of newly discovered conditions a change I theContract Documents is required, a Change Order will be issued as providedin Article 10 to reflect and document the consequences of the inaccuracy ordifference.

4.2.6 Possible Price and Time AdjustmentsIn each such case, an increase or decrease in the Contract Price or anextension or shortening of the Contract Time, or any combination thereof,will be allowable to the extent that they are attributable to any suchinaccuracy or difference.

4.3 Physical Conditions-Underground Facilities

4.3.1 Shown or IndicatedThe information and data shown or indicated in the Contract Documentswith respect to existing Underground Facilities at or contiguous to the site isbased on information and data furnished to OWNER or ENGINEER by theowners of such underground facilities or by others. Unless it is otherwiseexpressly provided in the Special Conditions:

4.3.1.1 OWNER and ENGINEER shall not be responsible for the accuracyor completeness of any such information or data; and,

4.2.1.2 CONTRACTOR shall have full responsibility for reviewing andchecking all such information and data; for locating all underground

GC-15

facilities shown or indicated in the Contract Documents; for coordination ofthe Work with the owners of such underground facilities during construction;and for the safety and protection thereof and repairing any damage theretoresulting from the Work, the cost of all of which will be considered ashaving been included in the Contract Price.

4.3.2 Not Shown or IndicatedIf an underground facility is uncovered or revealed at or contiguous to thesite which was not shown or indicated in the Contract Documents and whichCONTRACTOR could not reasonably have been expected to be aware of,CONTRACTOR shall, promptly after becoming aware thereof and beforeperforming any Work affected thereby (except in an emergency), identify theowner of such Underground Facility and give written notice thereof to thatowner and to OWNER and ENGINEER. ENGINEER will promptly reviewthe underground facility to determine the extent to which the ContractDocuments should be modified to reflect and document the consequences ofthe existence of the Underground Facility, and the Contract Documents willbe amended or supplemented to the extent necessary. During such time,CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for the safety and protection of suchunderground facility. CONTRACTOR shall be allowed an increase in theContract Price or an extension of the Contract Time, or both, to the extentthat they are attributable to the existence of any underground facility that wasnot shown or indicated in the Contract Documents and whichCONTRACTOR could not reasonably have been expected to be aware of.

4.4 Reference PointsOWNER shall provide engineering surveys to establish reference points forconstruction which in ENGINEER'S judgment are necessary to enableCONTRACTOR to proceed with the Work. CONTRACTOR shall be responsiblefor laying out the Work (unless otherwise specified), shall protect and preserve theestablished reference points and shall make no changes or relocations without theprior written approval of OWNER. CONTRACTOR shall report to ENGINEERwhenever any reference point is lost or destroyed or requires relocation because ofnecessary changes in grades or locations, and shall be responsible for the accuratereplacement or relocation of such reference points by a Registered Land Surveyor.

5. CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES

5.1 SupervisionCONTRACTOR shall supervise and direct the Work competently and efficiently,devoting such attention thereto and applying such skills and expertise as may benecessary to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents.CONTRACTOR shall assure that all CONTRACTOR personnel (includingsubcontractors, etc.) conduct themselves in a courteous and respectful mannertoward the ENGINEER and the general public. Failure to comply with thiscondition of the Contract will result in immediate suspension of the Work.Following a review by the Commissioner of Public Works, the Contract may be

GC-16

terminated (see GC section 14). CONTRACTOR shall be solely responsible for themeans, methods, techniques, sequences and procedures of construction, butCONTRACTOR shall not be responsible for the negligence of others in the designor selection of a specific means, method, technique, sequence or procedure ofconstruction which is indicated in and required by the Contract Documents.CONTRACTOR shall be responsible to see that the finished Work compliesaccurately with the Contract Documents.

5.2 SuperintendenceCONTRACTOR shall keep on the Work at all times during its progress a competentresident superintendent, who shall not be replaced without written notice toOWNER and ENGINEER except under extraordinary circumstances. Thesuperintendent will be CONTRACTOR’S representative at the site and shall haveauthority to act on behalf of CONTRACTOR. All communications given to thesuperintendent shall be as binding as if given to CONTRACTOR.

5.3 LaborCONTRACTOR shall provide competent, suitably qualified personnel to survey andlay out the Work and perform construction as required by the Contract Documents.CONTRACTOR shall at all times maintain good discipline and order at the site.Except in connection with the safety or protection of persons or the Work orproperty at the site or adjacent thereto, and except as otherwise indicated in theContract Documents, all Work at the site shall be performed during regular workinghours, and CONTRACTOR will not permit overtime work or the performance ofWork on Saturday, Sunday or any legal holiday without OWNER'S written consentgiven after prior written notice to ENGINEER.

5.4 Start-Up and Completion of WorkUnless otherwise specified, CONTRACTOR shall furnish and assume fullresponsibility for all materials, equipment, labor, transportation, constructionequipment and machinery, tools, appliances, fuel, power, light, heat, telephone,water, sanitary facilities, temporary facilities and all other facilities and incidentalsnecessary for the furnishing, performance, testing, start-up and completion of theWork.

5.5 Materials and EquipmentAll materials and equipment shall be of good quality and new, except as otherwiseprovided in the Contract Documents. If required by ENGINEER, CONTRACTORshall furnish satisfactory evidence (including reports of required tests) as to the kindand quality of materials and equipment. All materials and equipment shall beapplied, installed, connected, erected, used, cleaned and conditioned in accordancewith the instructions of the applicable supplier except as otherwise provided in theContract Documents; but no provision of any such instructions will be effective toassign to ENGINEER, or any of ENGINEER'S consultants, agents or employees,any duty or authority to supervise or direct the furnishing or performance of the

GC-17

Work or any duty or authority to undertake responsibility contrary to the provisionsof paragraph 8.12.3 or 8.12.4.

5.5.1 Not Clearly Specified or IndicatedIn all instances where materials specified are obtainable in different sizes,weights, trade grades, qualities or finishes, etc., whose weights, trade grades,qualities or finishes, etc., are not clearly specified or indicated on theDrawings, the CONTRACTOR shall notify the ENGINEER of all suchinstances at least five (5) days in advance of receiving the proposals. TheEngineer will then determine which size, weight, trade grade, quality, finish,etc., is required.

5.5.2 Coordination of WorkThe CONTRACTOR shall see that for his own Work and for the work ofeach subcontractor, proper templates and patterns necessary for thecoordination of the various parts of the Work are prepared. TheCONTRACTOR shall furnish or require the Subcontractor to furnish suchduplicates as will enable the Subcontractors to fit together and execute fullytheir respective portions of the Work.

5.6 Adjusting Progress ScheduleCONTRACTOR shall submit to ENGINEER for acceptance (to the extent indicatedin paragraph 2.8) adjustments in the progress schedule to reflect the impact thereonof new developments; these will conform generally to the progress schedule then ineffect and additionally will comply with any provisions of the Contract Documentsapplicable thereto.

5.7 Substitutes or “Or-Equal” Items

5.7.1 GeneralWhenever materials or equipment are specified or described in the ContractDocuments by using the name of a proprietary item or the name of aparticular supplier, the naming of the item is intended to establish the type,function, and quality required. Unless the name is followed by wordsindicating that no substitution is permitted, materials or equipment of otherSuppliers may be accepted by OWNER/ENGINEER if sufficientinformation is submitted by CONTRACTOR to allowOWNER/ENGINEER to determine that the material or equipment proposedis equivalent or equal to that named. The procedure for review byOWNER/ENGINEER will include the following. Requests for review ofsubstitute items of material and equipment will not be accepted byOWNER/ENGINEER from anyone, other than CONTRACTOR. IfCONTRACTOR wishes to furnish or use a substitute item of material orequipment, CONTRACTOR shall make written application toOWNER/ENGINEER for acceptance thereof, certifying that the proposedsubstitute will perform adequately the functions and achieve the results

GC-18

called for by the general design, be similar and of equal substance to thatspecified and be suited to the same use as that specified. The application willstate that the evaluation and acceptance of the proposed substitute will notprejudice CONTRACTOR’S achievement of completion on time, whetheror not acceptance of the substitute for use in the Work will require a changein any of the Contract Documents (or in the provisions of any other directcontract with OWNER for work on the Project) to adapt the design to theproposed substitute and whether or not incorporation or use of the substitutein connection with the Work is subject to payment of any license fee orroyalty. All variations of the proposed substitute from that specified will beidentified in the application and available maintenance, repair andreplacement service will be indicated. The application will also contain anitemized estimate of all costs that will result directly or indirectly fromacceptance of such substitute, including costs of redesign and claims of othercontractors affected by the resulting change, all of which shall be consideredby OWNER/ENGINEER in evaluating the proposed substitute.OWNER/ENGINEER may require CONTRACTOR to furnish atCONTRACTOR’S expense additional data about the proposed substitute.

5.7.2 SubstitutesIf a specific means, method, technique, sequence or procedure ofconstruction is indicated in or required by the Contract Documents,CONTRACTOR may furnish or utilize a substitute means, method,sequence, technique or procedure of construction acceptable toOWNER/ENGINEER, if CONTRACTOR submits sufficient information toallow OWNER/ENGINEER to determine that the substitute proposed isequivalent to that indicated or required by the Contract Documents. Theprocedure for review by OWNER/ENGINEER will be similar to thatprovided in paragraph 5.7.1 as applied by OWNER/ENGINEER.

5.7.3 OWNER/ENGINEER'S ApprovalOWNER/ENGINEER will be allowed a reasonable time within which toevaluate each proposed substitute. OWNER/ENGINEER will be the solejudge of acceptability, and no substitute will be ordered, installed orutilized without OWNER/ENGINEER’S prior written acceptance whichwill be evidenced by either a Change Order or an approved Shop Drawing.OWNER may require CONTRACTOR to furnish at CONTRACTOR’Sexpense a special performance guarantee or other surety with respect toany substitute. OWNER/ENGINEER will record time required byOWNER/ENGINEER and OWNER/ENGINEER’S consultants inevaluating substitutions proposed by CONTRACTOR and in makingchanges in the Contract Documents occasioned thereby. Whether or notOWNER/ENGINEER accepts a proposed substitute, CONTRACTORshall reimburse OWNER for the charges of OWNER/ENGINEER andOWNER/ENGINEER’S consultants for evaluating each proposedsubstitute.

GC-19

5.8 Subcontractors, Suppliers, and Others

5.8.1 Acceptable to ENGINEERCONTRACTOR shall not employ any Subcontractor, Supplier or otherperson or organization (including those acceptable to OWNER andENGINEER as indicated in paragraph 5.8.2), whether initially or as asubstitute, against whom OWNER or ENGINEER may have reasonableobjection. CONTRACTOR shall not be required to employ anySubcontractor, Supplier or other person or organization to furnish or performany of the Work against whom CONTRACTOR has reasonable objection.

5.8.2 Objection After Due InvestigationIf the Contract Documents require the identity of certain Subcontractors,Suppliers or other persons or organizations (including those who are tofurnish the principal items of materials and equipment) to be submitted toOWNER in advance of the specified date prior to the Effective Date of theAgreement for acceptance by OWNER and ENGINEER and ifCONTRACTOR has submitted a list thereof, OWNER'S or ENGINEER'Sacceptance (either in writing or by failing to make written objection theretoby the date indicated for acceptance or objection in the bidding documents orthe Contract Documents) of any such Subcontractor, Supplier or otherperson or organization so identified may be revoked on the basis ofreasonable objection after due investigation, in which case CONTRACTORshall submit an acceptable substitute. No acceptance by OWNER orENGINEER of any such Subcontractor, Supplier or other person ororganization shall constitute a waiver of any right of OWNER orENGINEER to reject defective Work.

5.8.3 Contractor Responsible for Acts of SubcontractorsThe CONTRACTOR shall perform on the site, and with its ownorganization, work equivalent to at least fifty (50) percent of the total amountof Work to be performed under the Contract. This percentage may bereduced by a supplemental agreement to this Contract if, during performingthe Work, the CONTRACTOR requests a reduction and the Urban CountyEngineer determines that the reduction would be to the advantage of theUrban County Government.

The CONTRACTOR shall, at the time he submits his proposal for theContract, notify the OWNER in writing of the names of Subcontractorsproposed for the Work. He shall not employ any Subcontractor without theprior written approval of the OWNER.

CONTRACTOR shall be fully responsible to OWNER and ENGINEER forall acts and omissions of the Subcontractors, Suppliers and other persons andorganizations performing or furnishing any of the Work under a direct or

GC-20

indirect contract with CONTRACTOR just as CONTRACTOR isresponsible for CONTRACTOR’S own acts and omissions. Nothing in theContract Documents shall create any contractual relationship betweenOWNER or ENGINEER and any such Subcontractor, Supplier or otherperson or organization, nor shall it create any obligation on the part ofOWNER or ENGINEER to pay or to see to the payment of any moneys dueany such Subcontractor, Supplier or other person or organization except asmay otherwise be required by Laws and Regulations.

5.8.4 Division of SpecificationsThe divisions and sections of the Specifications and theidentifications of any Drawings shall not control CONTRACTOR individing the Work among Subcontractors or Suppliers or delineatingthe Work to be performed by any specific trade.

5.8.5 Agreement Between Contractor and SubcontractorsAll Work performed for CONTRACTOR by a Subcontractor will bepursuant to an appropriate agreement between CONTRACTOR andthe Subcontractor which specifically binds the Subcontractor to theapplicable terms and conditions of the Contract Documents for thebenefit of OWNER and ENGINEER.

5.8.6 Statements and Comments by CONTRACTORNeither the CONTRACTOR, his employees, nor hissubcontractors shall at any time make any statement or comment asto the project scope, nature, intention, design, or constructionmethod to any third party or parties without the explicit writtenconsent of the OWNER.

Any third party requesting such information shall be referred to the OWNERor his representative.

Should there be any change from the original intent of the project as a resultof any statement or comment by the contractor, his employees orsubcontractors, contractor shall be held liable for any change in the scope,nature, design, or construction method and shall bear the full cost for thepreviously mentioned changes.

5.9 Patent Fees and RoyaltiesCONTRACTOR shall pay all license fees and royalties and assume all costs incidentto the use in the performance of the Work or the incorporation in the Work of anyinvention, design, process, product or device which is the subject of patent rights orcopyrights held by others.

GC-21

5.10 PermitsUnless otherwise provided in the Special conditions, CONTRACTOR shall obtainand pay for all construction permits and licenses. OWNER shall assistCONTRACTOR, when necessary, in obtaining such permits and licenses.CONTRACTOR shall pay all governmental charges and inspection fees necessaryfor the prosecution of the Work, which are applicable at the time of opening of Bids,or if there are no Bids on the Effective Date of the Agreement. CONTRACTORshall pay all charges of utility owners for connections to the Work, and OWNERshall pay all charges of such utility owners for capital costs related thereto such asplant investment fees.

5.11 Laws and Regulations

5.11.1 CONTRACTOR to ComplyCONTRACTOR shall give all notices and comply with all Laws andRegulations applicable to furnishing and performance of the Work. Exceptwhere otherwise expressly required by applicable Laws and Regulations,neither OWNER nor ENGINEER shall be responsible for monitoringCONTRACTOR’S compliance with any Laws and Regulations.

5.11.2 Specifications and Drawings at VarianceIf CONTRACTOR observes that the Specifications or Drawings are atvariance with any Laws or Regulations, CONTRACTOR shall giveENGINEER prompt written notice thereof, and any necessary changeswill be authorized by one of the methods indicated in paragraph 3.4. IfCONTRACTOR performs any Work knowing or having reason to knowthat it is contrary to such Laws, or Regulations, and without such notice toENGINEER, CONTRACTOR shall bear all costs arising therefrom;however, it shall not be CONTRACTOR’S primary responsibility to makecertain that the Specifications and Drawings are in accordance with suchLaws and Regulations.

5.12 TaxesCONTRACTOR shall pay all sales, consumer, use and other similar taxes requiredto be paid by CONTRACTOR in accordance with the Laws and Regulations of theplace of the Project which are applicable during the performance of the Work. Anyparty, firm or individual submitting a proposal pursuant to invitation must have paidall taxes owed to the Lexington-Fayette Urban County Government at the time theproposal is submitted, and must maintain a "current" status in regard to those taxesthroughout the Contract. If applicable, business must be licensed in Fayette County.

5.13 Use of Premises

5.13.1 Project SiteCONTRACTOR shall confine construction equipment, the storage ofmaterials and equipment and the operations of workers to the staging areas

GC-22

or work site areas identified in and permitted by the Contract Documents andother land and areas permitted by Laws and Regulations, rights-of-way,permits and easements, and shall not unreasonably encumber the premiseswith construction equipment or other materials or equipment.CONTRACTOR shall assume full responsibility for any damage to any suchland or area, or to the owner or occupant thereof or of any land or areascontiguous thereto, resulting from the performance of the Work. Should anyclaim be made against OWNER or ENGINEER by any such owner oroccupant because of the performance of the Work, CONTRACTOR shallpromptly attempt to settle with such other party by agreement or otherwiseresolve the claim by arbitration or at law. CONTRACTOR shall, to thefullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, indemnify and holdOWNER and ENGINEER harmless from and against all claims, damages,losses and expenses (including, but not limited to, fees of engineers,architects, attorneys and other professionals and court and arbitration costs)arising directly, indirectly or consequentially out of any action, legal orequitable, brought by any such other party against OWNER or ENGINEERto the extent based on a claim arising out of CONTRACTOR’S performanceof the Work.

5.13.2 Clean UPDuring the progress of the Work, CONTRACTOR shall keep the premisesfree from accumulations of waste materials, rubbish and other debrisresulting from the Work. At the completion of the Work, CONTRACTORshall remove all waste materials, rubbish and debris from and about thepremises as well as all tools, appliances, construction equipment andmachinery, and surplus materials, and shall leave the site clean and ready foroccupancy by OWNER. CONTRACTOR shall restore to original conditionall property not designated for alteration by the Contract Documents.

5.13.1 Loading of StructuresCONTRACTOR shall not load nor permit any part of any structure to beloaded in any manner that will endanger the structure, nor shallCONTRACTOR subject any part of the Work or adjacent property tostresses or pressures that will endanger it.

5.14 Record DrawingsCONTRACTOR shall maintain in a safe place at the site one record copy of allDrawings, Specifications, Addenda, Change Orders, Field Orders and writteninterpretations and clarifications (issued pursuant to paragraph 9.4) in good orderand annotated to show all changes made during construction. These recorddocuments together with all approved samples and a counterpart of all approvedShop Drawings will be available to ENGINEER for reference. Upon completion ofthe Work, these record documents, samples and Shop Drawings will be delivered toENGINEER for OWNER.

GC-23

5.15 Shop Drawings and Samples

5.15.1 Shop Drawing SubmittalsAfter checking and verifying all field measurements and after complyingwith applicable procedures specified, CONTRACTOR shall submit toENGINEER for review and approval in accordance with the acceptedschedule of Shop Drawing submissions (see paragraph 2.8), or for otherappropriate action if so indicated in the Special Conditions, five copies(unless otherwise specified) of all Shop Drawings, which will bear a stampor specific written indication that CONTRACTOR has satisfiedCONTRACTOR’S responsibilities under the Contract Documents withrespect to the review of the submission. All submissions will be identified asENGINEER may require. The data shown on the Shop Drawings will becomplete with respect to quantities, dimensions, specified performance anddesign criteria, materials and similar data to enable ENGINEER to reviewthe information as required.

5.15.2 Sample SubmittalsCONTRACTOR shall also submit to ENGINEER for review and approvalwith such promptness as to cause no delay in Work, all samples required bythe Contract Documents. All samples will have been checked by andaccompanied by a specific written indication that CONTRACTOR hassatisfied CONTRACTOR’S responsibilities under the Contract Documentswith respect to the review of the submission and will be identified clearly asto material, Supplier, pertinent data such as catalog numbers and the use forwhich intended.

5.15.3 Review by CONTRACTORBefore submission of each Shop Drawing or sample CONTRACTOR shallhave determined and verified all quantities, dimensions, specifiedperformance criteria, installation requirements, materials, catalog numbersand similar data with respect thereto and reviewed or coordinated eachShop Drawing or sample with other Shop Drawings and samples and withthe requirements of the Work and the Contract Documents.

5.15.4 Notice of VariationAt the time of each submission, CONTRACTOR shall give ENGINEERspecific written notice of each variation that the Shop Drawings or samplesmay have from the requirements of the Contract Documents, and, inaddition, shall cause a specific notation to be made on each Shop Drawingsubmitted to ENGINEER for review and approval of each such variation.

5.15.5 ENGINEER’S ApprovalENGINEER will review and approve with reasonable promptness ShopDrawings and samples, but ENGINEER’S review and approval will be onlyfor conformance with the design concept of the Project and for compliance

GC-24

with the information given in the Contract Documents and shall not extendto means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures of construction(except where a specific means, method, technique, sequence or procedureof construction is indicated in or required by the Contract Documents) or tosafety precautions or programs incident thereto. The review and approval ofa separate item as such will not indicate approval of the assembly in whichthe item functions. CONTRACTOR shall make corrections required byENGINEER, and shall return the required number of corrected copies ofShop Drawings and submit, as required, new samples for review andapproval. CONTRACTOR shall direct specific attention in writing torevisions other than the corrections called for by ENGINEER on previoussubmittals.

5.15.6 Responsibility for Errors and OmissionsENGINEER’S review and approval of Shop Drawings or samples shall notrelieve CONTRACTOR from responsibility for any variation from therequirements of the Contract Documents unless CONTRACTOR has inwriting called ENGINEER'S attention to each such variation at the time ofsubmission as required by paragraph 5.15.4 and ENGINEER has givenwritten approval of each such variation by a specific written notation thereofincorporated in or accompanying the Shop Drawing or sample approval; norwill any approval by ENGINEER relieve CONTRACTOR fromresponsibility for errors or omissions in the Shop Drawings or fromresponsibility for having complied with the provisions of paragraph 5.15.3.

5.15.7 Cost of Related WorkWhere a Shop or sample is required by the Specifications, any related Workperformed prior to ENGINEER'S review and approval of the pertinentsubmission will be the sole expense and responsibility of CONTRACTOR.

5.16 Continuing the WorkCONTRACTOR shall carry on the Work and adhere to the progress schedule duringall disputes or disagreements with OWNER. No Work shall be delayed or postponedpending resolutions of any disputes or disagreements, except as permitted byparagraph 14.5 or as CONTRACTOR and OWNER may otherwise agree in writing.

5.17 Erosion and Sediment Control

5.17.1 General Environmental RequirementsThe CONTRACTOR and Subcontractors performing work on projects onbehalf of the OWNER shall comply with all applicable federal, state, andlocal environmental regulations and all requirements and conditions setforth in “special” permits including but not limited to Corp of Engineers404 permits, 401 Water Quality Certifications, Stream Crossing andFloodplain Encroachment Permits.

GC-25

Any fines or penalties resulting from the failure to comply with the termsof the federal, state or local permits or perform necessary corrective actionare solely the obligation of the CONTRACTOR.

5.17.2 Stormwater Pollution PreventionA. The CONTRACTOR shall exercise due care to prevent or minimizeany damage to any stream or wetland from pollution by debris, sedimentor other material. The operation of equipment and/or materials in ajurisdictional wetland is expressly prohibited. Water that has been usedfor washing or processing, or that contains oils, sediments or otherpollutants shall not be discharged from the job site. Such waters shall becollected and properly disposed of by the CONTRACTOR in accordancewith applicable local, state and federal law.

B. The CONTRACTOR is solely responsible for securing all requiredstate and local permits associated with stormwater discharges from theproject including, but not necessarily limited to the KY Notice of Intent toDisturb (NOI) for Coverage of Storm Water Discharges Associated withConstruction Activities under the KPDES Storm Water General PermitKYR100000 and the LFUCG, Land Disturbance Permit. Permitapplication preparation and all required documentation are theresponsibility of the CONTRACTOR. The CONTRACTOR is solelyresponsible for maintaining compliance with the stormwater pollutionprevention plan or erosion and sediment control plan and ensuring thefollowing:

a. That the Stormwater Pollution Prevention Plan (SWPPP) orerosion control plan is current and available for review on site;

b. That any and all stormwater inspection reports required by thepermit are conducted by qualified personnel and are available forreview onsite; and

c. That all best management practices (BMPs) are adequatelymaintained and effective at controlling erosion and preventingsediment from leaving the site.

C. The CONTRACTOR shall provide the necessary equipment andpersonnel to perform any and all emergency measures that may berequired to contain any spillage or leakage and to remove materials, soilsor liquids that become contaminated. The collected spill material shall beproperly disposed at the CONTRACTOR’s expense.

D. Upon completion of the work and with the concurrence of theOWNER, the CONTRACTOR must file a Notice of Termination (NOT)of Coverage Under the KPDES General Permit for Storm WaterDischarges Associated with Construction Activity with the appropriatelocal and state authorities.

GC-26

E. Any fines or penalties resulting from the failure to comply with theterms of the state or local stormwater permits or perform necessarycorrective action are solely the obligation of the CONTRACTOR.

6. OTHER WORK

6.1 Related Work at SiteOWNER may perform other work related to the Project at the site by OWNER'Sown forces, have other work performed by utility owners or let other direct contractstherefor which shall contain General Conditions similar to these. If the fact that suchother work is to be performed was not noted in the Contract Documents, writtennotice thereof will be given to CONTRACTOR prior to starting any such otherwork; and, if such performance will involve additional expense to CONTRACTORor requires additional time, a Change Order to the Contract will be negotiated.

6.2 Other Contractors or Utility OwnersCONTRACTOR shall afford each utility owner and other contractor who is a partyto such a direct contract (or OWNER, if OWNER is performing the additional workwith OWNER'S employees) proper and safe access to the site and a reasonableopportunity for the introduction and storage of materials and equipment and theexecution of such work, and shall properly connect and coordinate the Work withtheirs. CONTRACTOR shall do all cutting, fitting and patching of the Work thatmay be required to make its several parts come together properly and integrate withsuch other work. CONTRACTOR shall not endanger any work of others by cutting,excavating or otherwise altering their work and will only cut or alter their work withthe written consent of ENGINEER and the others whose work will be affected. Theduties and responsibilities of CONTRACTOR under this paragraph are for thebenefit of such utility owners and other contractors to the extent that there arecomparable provisions for the benefit of CONTRACTOR in said direct contractsbetween OWNER and such utility owners and other contractors.

6.3 Delays Caused by OthersIf any part of CONTRACTOR'S Work depends for proper execution or results uponthe work of any such other contractor or utility owner (or OWNER),CONTRACTOR shall inspect and promptly report to ENGINEER in writing anydelays, defects or deficiencies in such work that render it unavailable or unsuitablefor such proper execution and results. CONTRACTOR'S failure so to report willconstitute an acceptance of the other work as fit and proper for integration withCONTRACTOR'S Work except for latent or non-apparent defects and deficienciesin the other work.

6.4 CoordinationIf OWNER contracts with others for the performance of other work on the Project at thesite, the person or organization who will have authority and responsibility forcoordination of the activities among the various prime contractors will be identified inthe Special Conditions, and the specific matters to be covered by such authority and

GC-27

responsibility will be itemized, and the extent of such authority and responsibilities willbe provided, in the Special Conditions.

7. OWNER'S RESPONSIBILITIES

7.1 CommunicationsOWNER shall issue all communications to CONTRACTOR throughENGINEER.

7.2 Data and PaymentsOWNER shall furnish the data required of OWNER under the ContractDocuments promptly after they are due.

7.3 Lands, Easements, and SurveysOWNER'S duties in respect of providing lands and easements and providingengineering surveys to establish reference points are set forth in paragraphs 4.1 and4.4. Paragraph 4.2 refers to OWNER'S identifying and making available toCONTRACTOR copies of reports of explorations and tests of subsurface conditionsat the site and in existing structures which have been utilized by ENGINEER inpreparing the Drawings and Specifications.

7.4 Change OrdersOWNER is obligated to execute Change Orders as indicated in paragraph 9.4.

7.5 Inspections, Tests and ApprovalsOWNER'S responsibility in respect to certain inspections, tests and approvals is setforth in paragraph 13.3.

7.6 Stop or Suspend WorkIn connection with OWNER'S right to stop Work or suspend Work, see paragraph12.4 and 14.1 Paragraph 14.2 deals with OWNER'S rights to terminate services ofCONTRACTOR under certain circumstances.

8. ENGINEER'S STATUS DURING CONSTRUCTION

8.1 OWNER'S RepresentativeENGINEER will be OWNER'S representative during the construction period. Theduties and responsibilities and the limitations of authority of ENGINEER asOWNER'S representative during construction are set forth in the ContractDocuments and shall not be extended without written consent of OWNER andENGINEER.

8.2 Visits to SiteENGINEER will make visits to the site at intervals appropriate to the variousstages of construction to observe the progress and quality of the executed Workand to determine, in general, if the Work is proceeding in accordance with theContract Documents. ENGINEER will not be required to make exhaustive or

GC-28

continuous on-site inspections to check the quality or quantity of the Work.ENGINEER'S efforts will be directed toward providing for OWNER a greaterdegree of confidence that the completed Work will conform to the ContractDocuments. On the basis of such visits and on-site observations, ENGINEERwill keep OWNER informed of the progress of the Work and will endeavor toguard OWNER against defects and deficiencies in the Work.

8.3 Project RepresentationENGINEER will provide an Inspector to assist ENGINEER in observing theperformance of the Work. If OWNER designates another agent to representOWNER at the site who is not ENGINEER'S agent or employee, the duties,responsibilities and limitations of authority of such other person will be asprovided in the Special Conditions.

8.4 Clarifications and InterpretationsENGINEER will issue with reasonable promptness such written clarifications orinterpretations of the requirements of the Contract Documents (in the form ofDrawings or otherwise) as ENGINEER may determine necessary, which shall beconsistent with or reasonably inferable from the overall intent of the ContractDocuments.

8.5 Authorized Variations in WorkENGINEER may authorize minor variations in the Work from the requirements ofthe Contract Documents which do not involve an adjustment in the Contract Price orthe Contract Time and are consistent with the overall intent of the ContractDocuments. These may be accomplished by a Field Order.

8.6 Rejecting Defective WorkENGINEER will have authority to disapprove or reject Work which ENGINEERbelieves to be defective, and will also have authority to require special inspection ortesting of the Work as provided in paragraph 12.3, whether or not the Work isfabricated, installed or completed.

8.7 Shop DrawingsIn connection with ENGINEER'S responsibility for Shop Drawings and samples, seeparagraphs 5.15.1 through 5.16 inclusive.

8.8 Change OrdersIn connection with ENGINEER'S responsibilities as to Change Orders, see Articles10, 11 and 12.

8.9 PaymentsIn connection with ENGINEER'S responsibilities with respect to Applications forPayment, etc., see Article 13.

8.10 Determinations for Unit Prices

GC-29

ENGINEER will determine the actual quantities and classifications of Unit PriceWork performed by CONTRACTOR.

ENGINEER will review with CONTRACTOR ENGINEER'S preliminarydeterminations on such matters before rendering a written decision thereon (byrecommendation of an Application for Payment or otherwise).

8.11 Decision on DisputesENGINEER will be the initial interpreter of the requirements of the ContractDocuments and judge of the acceptability of the Work thereunder. Claims,disputes and other matters relating to the acceptability of the Work or theinterpretation of the requirements of the Contract Documents pertaining to theperformance and furnishing of the Work and claims under Articles 10 and 11 inrespect of changes in the Contract Price or Contract Time will be referred initiallyto ENGINEER in writing with a request for a formal decision in accordance withthis paragraph, which ENGINEER will render in writing within a reasonable time.Written notice of each such claim, dispute and other matter will be delivered toENGINEER promptly (but in no event later than thirty days) after the occurrenceof the event giving rise thereto, and written supporting data will be submitted toENGINEER within sixty days after such occurrence unless ENGINEER allows anadditional period of time to ascertain more accurate data in support of the claim.

8.12 Limitations on Engineer's Responsibilities

8.12.1 CONTRACTOR, Supplier, or SuretyNeither ENGINEERS authority to act under this Article 8 or elsewhere in theContract Documents nor any decision made by ENGINEER in good faitheither to exercise or not exercise such authority shall give rise to any duty orresponsibility of ENGINEER to CONTRACTOR, any Subcontractor, anySupplier, or any other person or organization performing any of the Work, orto any surety for any of them.

8.12.2 To Evaluate the WorkWhenever in the Contract Documents the terms "as ordered", "as

directed", "as required", "as allowed", "as approved" or terms of like effector import are used, or the adjectives "reasonable", "suitable", "acceptable","proper", or "satisfactory" or adjectives or like "effect" or "import" are usedto describe a requirement, direction, review or judgment of ENGINEER asto the Work, it is intended that such requirement, direction, review orjudgment will be solely to evaluate the Work for compliance with theContract Documents (unless there is a specific statement indicatingotherwise). The use of any such term or adjective shall not be effective toassign ENGINEER any duty or authority to supervise or direct the furnishingor performance of the Work or any duty or authority to undertakeresponsibility contrary to the provisions of paragraph 8.12.3 or 8.12.4.

GC-30

8.12.3 CONTRACTOR'S Means, Methods, Etc.ENGINEER will not be responsible for CONTRACTOR'S means,

methods, techniques, sequences or procedures of construction, or the safetyprecautions and programs incident thereto, and ENGINEER will not beresponsible for CONTRACTOR'S failure to perform or furnish the Work inaccordance with the Contract Documents.

8.12.4 Acts of Omissions of CONTRACTORENGINEER will not be responsible for the acts or omissions of

CONTRACTOR or of any Subcontractor, any Supplier, or of any otherperson or organization performing or furnishing any of the Work.

9. CHANGES IN THE WORK

9.1 OWNER May Order ChangeWithout invalidating the Agreement and without notice to any surety, OWNER may,at any time or from time to time, order additions, deletions or revisions in the Work;these will be authorized by a Change Order. Upon receipt of such notice,CONTRACTOR shall promptly proceed with the Work involved which will beperformed under the applicable conditions of the Contract Documents (except asotherwise specifically provided).

9.2 ClaimsClaims for an increase or decrease in the Contract Price or an extension orshortening or the Contract Time that should be allowed as a result of a Change Orderwill be settled as provided for in Article 10 or Article 11.

9.3 Work Not in Contract DocumentsCONTRACTOR shall not be entitled to an increase in the Contract Price or anextension of the Contract Time with respect to any Work performed that is notrequired by the Contract Documents as amended, modified and supplemented asprovided in paragraph 3.4, except in the case of an emergency and except in the caseof uncovering Work as provided in paragraph 12.3.4.

9.4 Change OrdersOWNER and CONTRACTOR shall execute appropriate Change Orders covering:

9.4.1 changes in the Work which are ordered by OWNER pursuant toparagraph 9.1, are required because of acceptance of defective Work underparagraph 12.7 or corrective defective Work under paragraph 12.8, or areagreed to by the parties;

9.4.2 changes in the Contract Price or Contract Time which are agreed toby the parties; and

GC-31

9.4.3 changes in the Contract Price or Contract Time which embody thesubstance of any written decision rendered by ENGINEER pursuant toparagraph 8.11; provided that, in lieu of executing any such Change Order,an appeal may be taken from any such decision in accordance with theprovisions of the Contract Documents and applicable Laws andREGULATIONS, but during any such appeal, CONTRACTOR shall carryon the Work and adhere to the progress schedule as provided in paragraph5.16.

9.5 Notice of ChangeIf notice of any change affecting the general scope of the Work or the provisions of theContract Documents (including, but not limited to, Contract Price or Contract Time) isrequired by the provisions of any Bond to be given to a surety, the giving of any suchnotice will be CONTRACTOR'S responsibility, and the amount of each applicableBond will be adjusted accordingly.

10. CHANGE OF CONTRACT PRICE

10.1 Total CompensationThe Contract Price constitutes the total compensation (subject to authorizedadjustments) payable to CONTRACTOR for performing the Work. All duties,responsibilities and obligations assigned to or undertaken by CONTRACTOR shallbe at his expense without change in the Contract Price.

10.2 Claim for Increase or Decrease in PriceThe Contract Price may only be changed by a Change Order. Any claim for anincrease or decrease in the Contract Price shall be based on written notice deliveredby the CONTRACTOR to the ENGINEER promptly (but in no event later thanthirty days) after the occurrence of the event giving rise to the claim and stating thegeneral nature of the claim. Notice of the amount of the claim with supporting datashall be delivered within sixty days after such occurrence (unless ENGINEERallows an additional period of time to ascertain more accurate data in support of theclaim) and shall be accompanied by CONTRACTOR’S written statement that theamount claimed covers all known amounts (direct, indirect, and consequential) towhich the CONTRACTOR is entitled as a result of the occurrence of said event.

10.3 Value of WorkThe value of any Work covered by a Change Order or of any claim for an increaseor decrease in the Contract Price shall be determined in one of the following ways:

10.3.1 Unit PricesWhere the Work involved is covered by unit prices contained in theContract Documents, by application of unit prices to the quantities ofthe items involved (subject to the provisions of paragraphs 10.9.1.through 10.9.3, inclusive).

GC-32

10.3.2 Lump SumBy mutual acceptance of a lump sum (which may include anallowance for overhead and profit not necessarily in accordance withparagraph 10.6.2.1).

10.3.3 Cost Plus FeeOn the basis of the Cost of the Work (determined as provided inparagraphs 10.4 and 10.5) plus a CONTRACTOR’S fee for overheadand profit (determined as provided in paragraphs 10.6 and 10.7).

10.4 Cost of the WorkThe term Cost of the Work means the sum of all costs necessarily incurred and paidby CONTRACTOR in the proper performance of the Work. Except as otherwisemay be agreed to in writing by OWNER, such costs shall be in amounts no higherthan those prevailing in the locality of the Project; shall include only the followingitems; and shall not include any of the costs itemized in paragraph 10.5:

10.4.1 Payroll CostsPayroll costs for employees in the direct employ of CONTRACTORin the performance of the Work under schedules of job classificationsagreed upon by OWNER and CONTRACTOR. Payroll costs foremployees not employed full time on the Work shall be apportionedon the basis of their time spent on the Work. Payroll costs shallinclude, but not be limited to, salaries and wages plus the cost offringe benefits which shall include social security contributions,unemployment, excise and payroll taxes, workers' or workmen'scompensation, health and retirement benefits, bonuses, sick leave,vacation and holiday pay applicable thereto. Such employees shallinclude superintendents and foremen at the site. The expenses ofperforming Work after regular working hours, on Saturday, Sundayor legal holidays, shall be included in the above to the extentauthorized by OWNER.

10.4.2 Materials and Equipment CostsCost of all materials and equipment furnished and incorporated in theWork, including costs of transportation and storage thereof, andSuppliers' field services required in connection therewith. All cashdiscounts shall accrue to CONTRACTOR unless OWNER depositsfunds with CONTRACTOR with which to make payments, in whichcase the cash discounts shall accrue to OWNER. All trade discounts,rebates and refunds and all returns from sale of surplus materials andequipment shall accrue to OWNER, and CONTRACTOR shall makeprovisions so that they may be obtained.

10.4.3 Subcontractor Costs

GC-33

Payments made by CONTRACTOR to the Subcontractors for Workperformed by Subcontractors. If required by OWNER,CONTRACTOR shall obtain competitive bids from Subcontractorsacceptable to CONTRACTOR and shall deliver such bids toOWNER who will then determine, with the advice of ENGINEER,which bids will be accepted. If a subcontract provides that theSubcontractor is to be paid on the basis of Cost of the Work Plus aFee, the Subcontractor's Cost of the Work shall be determined in thesame manner as CONTRACTOR’S Cost of the Work. Allsubcontracts shall be subject to the other provisions of the ContractDocuments insofar as applicable.

10.4.4 Special Consultant CostsCosts of special consultants (including but not limited to engineers,architects, testing laboratories, surveyors, attorneys and accountants)employed for services specifically related to the Work.

10.4.5 Supplemental Costs

10.4.5.1 The proportion of necessary transportation,travel and subsistence expenses of CONTRACTOR’Semployees incurred in discharge of duties connected with theWork.

10.4.5.2 Cost, including transportation andmaintenance, of all materials, supplies, equipment,machinery, appliances, office and temporary facilities at thesite and hand tools not owned by the workers, which areconsumed in the performance of the Work, and cost lessmarket value of such items used but not consumed whichremain the property of CONTRACTOR.

10.4.5.3 Rentals of all construction equipment andmachinery and the parts thereof whether rented fromCONTRACTOR or others in accordance with rentalagreements approved by OWNER with the advice ofENGINEER, and the costs of transportation, loading,unloading, installation, dismantling and removal shall be inaccordance with terms of said rental agreements. The rentalof any such equipment, machinery or parts shall cease whenthe use thereof is no longer necessary for the Work.

10.4.5.4 Sales, consumer, use or similar taxes relatedto the Work, and for which CONTRACTOR is liable,imposed by Laws and Regulations.

GC-34

10.4.5.5 Deposits lost for causes other than negligenceof CONTRACTOR, any Subcontractor or anyone directly orindirectly employed by any of them or for whose acts any ofthem may be liable, and royalty payments and fees forpermits and licenses.

10.4.5.6 Losses and damages (and related expenses),not compensated by insurance or otherwise, to the Work orotherwise sustained by CONTRACTOR in connection withthe performance and furnishing of the Work (except lossesand damages within the deductible amounts of propertyinsurance established by OWNER), provided they haveresulted from causes other than the negligence ofCONTRACTOR, any Subcontractor, or anyone directly orindirectly employed by any of them or for whose acts any ofthem may be liable. Such losses shall include settlementsmade with the written consent and approval of OWNER. Nosuch losses, damages and expenses shall be included in theCost of the Work for the purpose of determiningCONTRACTOR’S fee. If, however, any such loss ordamage requires reconstruction and CONTRACTOR isplaced in charge thereof, CONTRACTOR shall be paid a feeproportionate to that stated in paragraph 10.6.2 for services.

10.4.5.7 The cost of utilities, fuel and sanitary facilitiesat the site.

10.4.5.8 Minor expenses such as telegrams, longdistance telephone calls, telephone service at the site,expressage and similar petty cash items in connection withthe Work.

10.4.5.9 Cost of premiums for additional Bonds andinsurance required because of changes in the Work andpremiums for property insurance coverage within the limitsof the deductible amounts established by OWNER.

10.5 Not to Be Included in Cost of the WorkThe term Cost of the Work shall not include any of the following:

10.5.1 Costs of Officers and ExecutivesPayroll costs and other compensation of CONTRACTOR’S officers,executives, principals (of partnership and sole proprietorships), generalmanagers, engineers, architects, estimators, attorneys, auditors, accountants,purchasing and contracting agents, expeditors, timekeepers, clerks and otherpersonnel employed by CONTRACTOR whether at the site or inCONTRACTOR’S principal or a branch office for general administration of

GC-35

the Work and not specifically included in the agreed upon schedule of jobclassifications referred to in paragraph 10.4.1 or specifically covered byparagraph 10.4.4 - all of which are to be considered administrative costscovered by the CONTRACTOR’S fee.

10.5.2 Principal OfficeExpenses of CONTRACTOR’S principal and branch offices other thanCONTRACTOR’S office at the site.

10.5.3 Capital ExpenseAny part of CONTRACTOR’S capital expenses, including interest onCONTRACTOR’S capital employed for the Work and charges againstCONTRACTOR for delinquent payments.

10.5.4 Bonds and InsuranceCost of premiums for all Bonds and for all insurance whether or notCONTRACTOR is required by the Contract Documents to purchase andmaintain the same (except for the cost of premiums covered by subparagraph10.4.5.9 above).

10.5.5 Costs Due to NegligenceCosts due to the negligence of CONTRACTOR, any Subcontractor, oranyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them or for whose acts anyof them may be liable, including but not limited to, the correction ofdefective Work, disposal of materials or equipment wrongly supplied andmaking good any damage to property.

10.5.6 Other CostsOther overhead or general expense costs of any kind and the costs of anyitem not specifically and expressly included in paragraph 10.4.

10.6 Contractor's Fee

GC-36

The CONTRACTOR’S Fee allowed to CONTRACTOR for overhead and profitshall be determined as follows:

10.6.1 a mutually acceptable fixed fee; or if none can be agreed upon,

10.6.2 a fee based on the following percentages of the various portions of the Costof the Work:

10.6.2.1 for costs incurred under paragraphs 10.4.1 and 10.4.2, theCONTRACTOR’S fee shall be fifteen percent;

10.6.2.2 for costs incurred under paragraph 10.4.3, theCONTRACTOR’S fee shall be five percent; and if a subcontract is on thebasis of Cost of the Work Plus a fee, the maximum allowable toCONTRACTOR on account of overhead and profit of all Subcontractorsshall be fifteen percent;

10.6.2.3 no fee shall be payable on the basis of costs itemized underparagraphs 10.4.4, 10.4.5 and 10.5;

10.6.2.4 the amount of credit to be allowed by CONTRACTOR toOWNER for any such change which results in a net decrease in cost will bethe amount of the actual net decrease plus a deduction in CONTRACTOR’SFee by an amount equal to ten percent of the net decrease; and

10.6.2.5 when both additions and credits are involved in any onechange, the adjustment in CONTRACTOR’S fee shall be computed on thebasis of the net change in accordance with paragraphs 10.6.2.1 through10.6.2.4, inclusive.

10.7 Itemized Cost BreakdownWhenever the cost of any Work is to be determined pursuant to paragraph 10.4 or10.5, CONTRACTOR will submit in form acceptable to ENGINEER an itemizedcost breakdown together with supporting data.

10.8 Cash AllowancesIt is understood that CONTRACTOR has included in the Contract Price allallowances so named in the Contract Documents and shall cause the Work socovered to be done by such Subcontractors or Suppliers and for such sums withinthe limit of the allowances as may be acceptable to ENGINEER, CONTRACTORagrees that:

10.8.1 Materials and EquipmentThe allowances include the cost to CONTRACTOR (less any applicabletrade discounts) of materials and equipment required by the allowances to bedelivered at the site, and all applicable taxes; and

GC-37

10.8.2 Other CostsCONTRACTOR’S costs for unloading and handling on the site, labor,installation costs, overhead, profit and other expenses contemplated for theallowances have been included in the Contract Price and not in theallowances. No demand for additional payment on account of any thereofwill be valid.

10.8.3 Change OrderPrior to final payment, an appropriate Change Order will be issued asrecommended by ENGINEER to reflect actual amounts dueCONTRACTOR on account of Work covered by allowances, and theContract Price shall be correspondingly adjusted.

10.9 Unit Price Work

10.9.1 GeneralWhere the Contract Documents provide that all or part of the Work is to beUnit Price Work, initially the Contract Price will be deemed to include for allUnit Price Work an amount equal to the sum of the established unit pricesfor each separately identified item of Unit Price Work times the estimatedquantity of each item as indicated in the Agreement. The estimatedquantities of items of Unit Price Work are not guaranteed and are solely forthe purpose of comparison of Bids and determining an initial Contract Price.Determinations of the actual quantities and classifications of Unit PriceWork performed by CONTRACTOR will be made by ENGINEER inaccordance with Paragraph 8.10.

10.9.2 Overhead and ProfitEach unit price will be deemed to include an amount considered byCONTRACTOR to be adequate to cover CONTRACTOR’S overhead andprofit for each separately identified item.

10.9.3 Claim for Increase in Unit PriceWhere the quantity of any item of Unit Price Work performed byCONTRACTOR differs materially and significantly from the estimatedquantity of such item indicated in the Agreement and there is nocorresponding adjustment with respect to any other item of Work and ifCONTRACTOR believes that CONTRACTOR has incurred additionalexpense as a result thereof, CONTRACTOR may make a claim for anincrease in the Contract Price in accordance with Article 10.

11. CHANGE OF CONTRACT TIME

11.1 Change Order

GC-38

The Contract Time may only be changed by a Change Order. Any claim for anextension or shortening of the Contract Time shall be based on written noticedelivered to ENGINEER promptly (but in no event later than thirty days) after theoccurrence of the event giving rise to the claim and stating the general nature ofthe claim. Notice of the extent of the claim with supporting data shall bedelivered within sixty days after such occurrence (unless ENGINEER allows anadditional period of time to ascertain more accurate data in support of the claim)and shall be accompanied by the claimant's written statement that the adjustmentclaimed is the entire adjustment to which the claimant has reason to believe it isentitled as a result of the occurrence of said event. All claims for adjustment inthe Contract Time shall be determined by ENGINEER in accordance withparagraph 8.11. No claim for an adjustment in the Contract Time will be valid ifnot submitted in accordance with the requirements of this paragraph 11.1.

11.2 Justification for Time ExtensionsThe Contract Time will be extended in an amount equal to time lost due to delaysbeyond the control of CONTRACTOR if a claim is made therefore as provided inparagraph 11.1. Such delays shall include, but not be limited to, acts or neglect byOWNER or others performing additional work as contemplated by Article 6, or tofires, floods, labor disputes, epidemics, abnormal weather conditions or acts of God.

11.3 Time LimitsAll time limits stated in the Contract Documents are of the essence of theAgreement. The provisions of this Article 11 shall not exclude recovery fordamages (including but not limited to fees and charges of engineers, architects,attorneys and other professionals and court costs) for delay by either party.

12. WARRANTY AND GUARANTEE; TESTS AND INSPECTIONS; CORRECTION,REMOVAL OR ACCEPTANCE OF DEFECTIVE WORK

12.1 Warranty and GuaranteeCONTRACTOR warrants and guarantees to OWNER and ENGINEER that allWork will be in accordance with the Contract Documents and will not be defective.All defective Work, whether or not in place, may be rejected, corrected or acceptedas provided in this Article 12.

12.2 Access to WorkENGINEER and ENGINEER’S representatives, other representatives of OWNER,testing agencies and governmental agencies with jurisdictional interests will haveaccess to the Work at reasonable times for their observation, inspecting and testing.CONTRACTOR shall provide proper and safe conditions for such access.

GC-39

12.3 Tests and Inspections

12.3.1 Timely NoticeCONTRACTOR shall give ENGINEER timely notice of readiness of theWork for all required inspections, tests or approvals.

12.3.2 Requirements and ResponsibilitiesThe ENGINEER may require such inspection and testing during the courseof the Work as he/she deems necessary to ascertain and assure the integrityand acceptable quality of the materials incorporated and the work performed.Inspection presence may be either full-time or intermittent, and neither thepresence nor absence at any time of the ENGINEER or the INSPECTORshall relieve the CONTRACTOR of sole responsibility for the acceptabilityand integrity of the Work or any part thereof.

The costs of sampling, testing, and inspection on-site to ascertainacceptability of the Work and materials will be borne by the OWNER exceptas otherwise provided. The OWNER will select a testing laboratory toperform such sampling and testing. Sampling and/or testing required by theCONTRACTOR or necessitated by failure of Work or materials to meet theabove acceptability test shall be at the expense of the CONTRACTOR.

Inspection services may be performed by the employees of the OWNER orby others selected or designated by the OWNER or the ENGINEER.

Sampling and/or testing required for manufacturing quality and/or processcontrol, for certification that raw mineral materials or manufactured productsare the quality specified in the contract, or to assure the acceptability forincorporation into the Work shall be borne by the CONTRACTOR or thematerial supplier.

Cost for inspection, sampling, testing, and approvals required by the laws orregulations of any public body having competent jurisdiction shall be borneby the CONTRACTOR or the material supplier.

Sampling and testing will be in accord with pertinent codes and regulationsand with appropriate standards of the American Society of Testing Materialsor other specified standards.

12.3.3 On-Site Construction Test and Other TestingAll inspections, tests or approvals other than those required by Laws orRegulations of any public body having jurisdiction shall be performed byorganizations acceptable to OWNER and CONTRACTOR (or byENGINEER if so specified).

GC-40

12.3.4 Covered WorkIf any Work (including the work of others) that is to be inspected, tested orapproved is covered without written concurrence of ENGINEER, it must, ifrequested by ENGINEER, be uncovered for observation. Such uncoveringshall be at CONTRACTOR’S expense unless CONTRACTOR has givenENGINEER timely notice of CONTRACTOR’S intention to cover the sameand ENGINEER has not acted with reasonable promptness in response tosuch notice.

12.3.5 CONTRACTOR’S ObligationNeither observations by ENGINEER nor inspections, tests or approvals byothers shall relieve CONTRACTOR from CONTRACTOR’S obligations toperform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents.

12.4 OWNER May Stop the WorkIf the Work is defective, or CONTRACTOR fails to supply sufficient skilledworkers or suitable materials or equipment, or fails to furnish or perform the Workin such a way that the completed Work will conform to the Contract Documents,OWNER may order CONTRACTOR to stop the Work, or any portion thereof, untilthe cause for such order has been eliminated; however, this right of OWNER to stopthe Work shall not give rise to any duty on the part of OWNER to exercise this rightfor the benefit of CONTRACTOR or any other party.

12.5 Correction or Removal of Defective WorkIf required by ENGINEER, CONTRACTOR shall promptly, as directed, eithercorrect all defective Work, whether or not fabricated, installed or completed, or, ifthe Work has been rejected by ENGINEER, remove it from the site and replace itwith non-defective Work. CONTRACTOR shall bear all direct, indirect andconsequential costs of such correction or removal (including but not limited to feesand charges of engineers, architects, attorneys and other professionals) madenecessary thereby.

12.6 One Year Correction PeriodIf within one year after the date of Completion or such longer period of time as maybe prescribed by Laws or Regulations or by the terms of any applicable specialguarantee required by the Contract Documents or by any specific provision of theContract Documents, any Work is found to be defective, CONTRACTOR shallpromptly, without cost to OWNER and in accordance with OWNER'S writteninstructions, either correct such defective Work, or, if it has been rejected byOWNER, remove it from the site and replace it with non-defective Work. IfCONTRACTOR does not promptly comply with the terms of such instructions, or inan emergency where delay would cause serious risk of loss or damage, OWNERmay have the defective Work corrected or the rejected Work removed and replaced,and all direct, indirect and consequential costs of such removal and replacement(including but not limited to fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys and

GC-41

other professionals) will be paid by CONTRACTOR. In special circumstanceswhere a particular item of equipment is placed in continuous service beforeCompletion of all the Work, the correction period for that item may start to run froman earlier date if so provided in the Specifications or by Change Order.

12.7 Acceptance of Defective WorkIf, instead of requiring correction or removal and replacement of defective Work,OWNER prefers to accept it, OWNER may do so. CONTRACTOR shall bear alldirect, indirect and consequential costs attributable to OWNER’S evaluation of anddetermination to accept such defective Work (such costs to be approved byENGINEER as to reasonableness and to include but not be limited to fees andcharges of engineers, architects, attorneys and other professionals).

12.8 OWNER May Correct Defective WorkIf CONTRACTOR fails within a reasonable time after written notice of ENGINEERto proceed to correct and to correct defective Work or to remove and replace rejectedWork as required by ENGINEER in accordance with paragraph 12.5, or ifCONTRACTOR fails to perform the Work in accordance with the ContractDocuments, or if CONTRACTOR fails to comply with any other provision of theContract Documents, OWNER may, after seven days' written notice toCONTRACTOR, correct and remedy any such deficiency. In exercising the rightsand remedies under this paragraph OWNER shall proceed expeditiously. To theextent necessary to complete corrective and remedial action, OWNER may excludeCONTRACTOR from all or part of the site, take possession of all or part of theWork, and suspend CONTRACTOR’S services related thereto, take possession ofCONTRACTOR’S tools, appliances, construction equipment and machinery at thesite and incorporate in the Work all materials and equipment stored at the site or forwhich OWNER has paid CONTRACTOR but which are stored elsewhere.CONTRACTOR shall allow OWNER, OWNER’S representatives, agents andemployees such access to the site as may be necessary to enable OWNER toexercise the rights and remedies under this paragraph. All direct, indirect andconsequential costs of OWNER in exercising such rights and remedies will becharged against CONTRACTOR in an amount approved as to reasonableness byENGINEER, and a Change Order will be issued incorporating the necessaryrevisions in the Contract Documents with respect to the Work; and OWNER shall beentitled to an appropriate decrease in the Contract Price. Such direct, indirect andconsequential costs will include but not be limited to fees and charges of engineers,architects, attorneys and other professionals, all court costs and all costs of repairand replacement of work of others destroyed or damaged by correction, removal orreplacement of CONTRACTOR’S defective Work. CONTRACTOR shall not beallowed an extension of the Contract Time because of any delay in performance ofthe Work attributable to the exercise by OWNER of OWNER’S rights and remedieshereunder.

GC-42

13. PAYMENTS TO CONTRACTOR AND COMPLETION

13.1 Schedule of ValuesThe schedule of values established as provided in paragraph 2.8 will serve as thebasis for progress payments and will be incorporated into a form of Application forPayment acceptable to ENGINEER. Progress payments on account of Unit PriceWork will be based on the number of units completed.

13.2 Application for Progress PaymentAt least ten days before each progress payment is scheduled (but not more often thanonce a month), CONTRACTOR shall submit to ENGINEER for review anApplication for Payment filled out and signed by CONTRACTOR covering theWork completed as of the date of the Application and accompanied by suchsupporting documentation as is required by the Contract Documents. If payment isrequested on the basis of materials and equipment not incorporated in the Work butdelivered and suitably stored at the site or at another location agreed to in writing,the Application for Payment shall also be accompanied by a bill of sale, invoice orother documentation warranting that OWNER has received the materials andequipment free and clear of all liens, charges, security interests and encumbrances(which are hereinafter in these General Conditions referred to as "Liens") andevidence that the materials and equipment are covered by appropriate propertyinsurance and other arrangements to protect OWNER’S interest therein, all of whichwill be satisfactory to OWNER. OWNER shall, within thirty (30) calendar days ofpresentation to him of an approved Application for Payment, pay CONTRACTORthe amount approved by ENGINEER. Monthly progress payments shall be ninety(90) percent of the sum obtained by applying the respective bid unit prices to theapproved estimated quantities of work completed by the Contractor during thepreceding month. The remaining ten (10) percent will be held by the Owner, asretainage. At such time as the Engineer deems appropriate - based on the quality ofwork performed, progress of cleanup, and other pertinent factors - the rate ofretainage, or the total amount retained, may be reduced; although, any reduction inretainage, below the ten (10) percent level, is made solely at the Engineer'sdiscretion. All remaining retainage held will be included in the final payment to theContractor.

13.3 CONTRACTOR'S Warranty of TitleCONTRACTOR warrants and guarantees that title to all Work, materials andequipment covered by any Application for Payment, whether incorporated in theProject or not, will pass to OWNER no later than the time of payment free and clearof all Liens.

GC-43

13.4 Review of Applications for Progress Payment

13.4.1 Submission of Application for PaymentENGINEER will, after receipt of each Application for Payment, eitherindicate in writing a recommendation of payment and present theApplication to OWNER, or return the Application to CONTRACTORindicating in writing ENGINEER’S reasons for refusing to recommendpayment. In the latter case, CONTRACTOR may make the necessarycorrections and resubmit the Application.

13.4.2 ENGINEER’S RecommendationENGINEER may refuse to recommend the whole or any part of anypayment, if, in ENGINEER'S opinion, it would be incorrect to make suchrepresentations to OWNER. ENGINEER may also refuse to recommendany such payment, or, because of subsequently discovered evidence or theresults of subsequent inspections or tests, nullify any such paymentpreviously recommended, to such extent as may be necessary inENGINEER'S opinion to protect OWNER from loss because:

13.4.2.1 the Work is defective, or completed Work has been damagedrequiring correction or replacement;

13.4.2.2 the Contract Price has been reduced by Written Amendmentor Change Order;

13.4.2.3 OWNER has been required to correct defective Work orcomplete Work in accordance with paragraph 12.8; or

13.4.2.4 of ENGINEER'S actual knowledge of the occurrence of anyof the events enumerated in paragraphs 14.2.1 through 14.2.9 inclusive.

13.5 Partial UtilizationOWNER at any time may request CONTRACTOR in writing to permit OWNER touse any such part of the Work which OWNER believes to be ready for its intendeduse and has been completed. If CONTRACTOR agrees, CONTRACTOR willcertify to OWNER that said part of the Work is complete and request that aCertificate of Completion be issued for that part of the Work.

13.6 Final InspectionUpon written notice from CONTRACTOR that the entire Work or an agreedportion thereof is complete, ENGINEER will make a final inspection withCONTRACTOR and will notify CONTRACTOR in writing of all particulars inwhich this inspection reveals that the Work is incomplete or defective.CONTRACTOR shall immediately take such measures as are necessary toremedy such deficiencies.

GC-44

13.7 Final Application for PaymentAfter CONTRACTOR has completed all such corrections to the satisfaction ofENGINEER and delivered all maintenance and operating instructions, schedules,guarantees, Bonds, certificates of inspection, marked-up record documents (asprovided in paragraph 5.14) and other documents - all as required by the ContractDocuments, and after ENGINEER has indicated that the Work is acceptable (subjectto the provisions of paragraph 13.10), CONTRACTOR may make application forfinal payment following the procedure for progress payments. The final Applicationfor Payment shall be accompanied by all documentation called for in the ContractDocuments, together with complete and legally effective releases or waivers(satisfactory to OWNER) of all Liens arising out of or filed in connection with theWork. In lieu thereof and as approved by OWNER, CONTRACTOR may furnishreceipts or releases in full; an affidavit of CONTRACTOR that the releases andreceipts include all labor, services, material and equipment for which a Lien could befiled, and that all payrolls, material and equipment bills, and other indebtednessconnected with the Work for which OWNER or OWNER'S property might in anyway be responsible, have been paid or otherwise satisfied; and consent of the surety,if any, to final payment. If any Subcontractor or Supplier fails to furnish a release orreceipt in full, CONTRACTOR may furnish a Bond or other collateral satisfactoryto OWNER to indemnify OWNER against any Lien.

13.8 Final Payment and Acceptance

13.8.1 ENGINEER’S ApprovalIf, on the basis of ENGINEER’S observation of the Work duringconstruction and final inspection, and ENGINEER’S review of the finalApplication for Payment and accompanying documentation - all as requiredby the Contract Documents, ENGINEER is satisfied that the Work has beencompleted and CONTRACTOR’S other obligations under the ContractDocuments have been fulfilled, ENGINEER will, after receipt of the finalApplication for Payment, indicate in writing ENGINEER’S recommendationof payment and present the Application to OWNER for payment.Thereupon ENGINEER will give written notice to OWNER andCONTRACTOR that the Work is acceptable, subject to the provisions ofparagraph 13.10. Otherwise, ENGINEER will return the Application toCONTRACTOR, indicating in writing the reasons for refusing torecommend final payment, in which case CONTRACTOR shall make thenecessary corrections and resubmit the Application.

13.8.2 Delay in Completion of WorkIf, through no fault of CONTRACTOR, final completion of the Work issignificantly delayed, OWNER shall, upon receipt of CONTRACTOR’Sfinal Application for Payment and recommendation of ENGINEER, andwithout terminating the Agreement, make payment of the balance due forthat portion of the Work fully completed and accepted. If the remainingbalance to be held by OWNER for Work not fully completed or corrected is

GC-45

less than the retainage stipulated in the Agreement, and if Bonds have beenfurnished as required in paragraph 10 of Part II, Information for Bidders, thewritten consent of the surety to the payment of the balance due for thatportion of the Work fully completed and accepted shall be submitted byCONTRACTOR to ENGINEER with the Application for such payment.Such payment shall be made under the terms and conditions governing finalpayment, except that it shall not constitute a waiver of claims.

13.9 CONTRACTOR'S Continuing ObligationCONTRACTOR’S obligation to perform and complete the Work in accordance withthe Contract Documents shall be absolute. Neither recommendation of any progressor final payment by ENGINEER, nor the issuance of a certificate of Completion, norany payment by OWNER to CONTRACTOR under the Contract Documents, norany use or occupancy of the Work or any part thereof by OWNER, nor any act ofacceptance by OWNER nor any failure to do so, nor any review and approval of aShop Drawing or sample submission, nor any correction of defective Work byOWNER will constitute an acceptance of Work not in accordance with the ContractDocuments or a release of CONTRACTOR’S obligation to perform the Work inaccordance with the Contract Documents (except as provided in paragraph 13.10).

13.10 Waiver of ClaimsThe making and acceptance of final payment will constitute:

13.10.1 a waiver of all claims by OWNER against CONTRACTOR, exceptclaims arising from unsettled Liens, from defective Work appearing afterfinal inspection or from failure to comply with the Contract Documentsor the terms of any special guarantees specified therein; however, it willnot constitute a waiver by OWNER of any rights in respect ofCONTRACTOR’S continuing obligations under the ContractDocuments; and

13.10.2 a waiver of all claims by CONTRACTOR against OWNER other thanthose previously made in writing and still unsettled.

14. SUSPENSION OF WORK AND TERMINATION

14.1 OWNER May Suspend WorkOWNER may, at any time and without cause, suspend the Work or any portionthereof for a period of not more than ninety days by notice in writing toCONTRACTOR and ENGINEER which will fix the date on which Work will beresumed. CONTRACTOR shall resume the Work on the date so fixed.CONTRACTOR shall be allowed an increase in the Contract Price or an extensionof the Contract Time, or both, directly attributable to any suspension ifCONTRACTOR makes an approved claim therefor as provided in Articles 10 and11.

GC-46

14.2 OWNER May TerminateThe OWNER may terminate the Work upon the occurrence of any one or more ofthe following events:

14.2.1 if CONTRACTOR commences a voluntary case under any chapterof the Bankruptcy Code (Title 11, United States Code), as now or hereafterin effect, or if CONTRACTOR takes any equivalent or similar action byfiling a petition or otherwise under any other federal or state law in effect atsuch time relating to the bankruptcy or insolvency;

14.2.2 if a petition is filed against CONTRACTOR under any chapter of theBankruptcy Code as now or hereafter in effect at the time of filing, or if apetition is filed seeking any such equivalent or similar relief againstCONTRACTOR under any other federal or state law in effect at the timerelating to bankruptcy or insolvency;

14.2.3 if CONTRACTOR makes a general assignment for the benefit ofcreditors;

14.2.4 if a trustee, receiver, custodian or agent of CONTRACTOR isappointed under applicable law or under contract, whose appointment orauthority to take charge of property of CONTRACTOR is for the purpose ofenforcing a Lien against such property or for the purpose of generaladministration of such property for the benefit of CONTRACTOR’Screditors;

14.2.5 if CONTRACTOR admits in writing an inability to pay its debtsgenerally as they become due;

14.2.6 if CONTRACTOR persistently fails to perform the Work inaccordance with the Contract Documents (including, but not limited to,failure to supply sufficient skilled workers or suitable materials or equipmentor failure to adhere to the progress schedule established under paragraph 2.8as revised from time to time);

14.2.7 if CONTRACTOR disregards Laws or Regulations of any publicbody having jurisdiction;

14.2.8 if CONTRACTOR disregards the authority of ENGINEER, or

14.2.9 if CONTRACTOR otherwise violates in any substantial way anyprovisions of the Contract Documents;

OWNER may, after giving CONTRACTOR (and the surety) seven days'written notice and to the extent permitted by Laws and Regulations,terminate the services of CONTRACTOR, exclude CONTRACTOR from

GC-47

the site and take possession of the Work and of all CONTRACTOR’S tools,appliances, construction equipment and machinery at the site and use thesame to the full extent they could be used by CONTRACTOR (withoutliability to CONTRACTOR for trespass or conversion), incorporate in theWork all materials and equipment stored at the site or for which OWNERhas paid CONTRACTOR but which are stored elsewhere, and finish theWork as OWNER may deem expedient. In such case CONTRACTOR shallnot be entitled to receive any further payment until the Work is finished. Ifthe unpaid balance of the Contract Price exceeds the direct, indirect andconsequential costs of completing the Work (including but not limited tofees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys and other professionalsand court and arbitration costs) such excess will be paid to CONTRACTOR.If such costs exceed such unpaid balance, CONTRACTOR shall pay thedifference to OWNER. Such costs incurred by OWNER will be approved asto reasonableness by ENGINEER and incorporated in a Change Order, butwhen exercising any rights or remedies under this paragraph OWNER shallnot be required to obtain the lowest price for the Work performed.

14.2.10 If safety violations are observed and brought to the Contractors attention andContractor fails to take immediate corrective measures any repeat of similarsafety violations, Owner will order an immediate termination of contract.Note: it is the Contractor’s responsibility to know proper safety measures asthey pertain to construction and OSHA.

14.2.11 This contract may be canceled by either party thirty (30) days after deliveryby canceling party of written notice of intent to cancel to the othercontracting party.

14.2.12 This contract may be canceled by the Lexington-Fayette Urban CountyGovernment if it is determined that the Bidder has failed to perform underthe terms of this agreement, such cancellation to be effective upon receipt ofwritten notice of cancellation by the Bidder.

14.3 CONTRACTOR'S Services TerminatedWhere CONTRACTOR’S services have been so terminated by OWNER, thetermination will not affect any rights or remedies of OWNER againstCONTRACTOR then existing or which may thereafter accrue. Any retention orpayment of moneys due CONTRACTOR by OWNER will not releaseCONTRACTOR from liability.

14.4 Payment After TerminationUpon seven days' written notice to CONTRACTOR, OWNER may, without causeand without prejudice to any other right or remedy, elect to abandon the Work andterminate the Agreement. In such case, CONTRACTOR shall be paid for all Workexecuted and any expense sustained plus reasonable termination expenses, whichwill include, but not be limited to, direct, indirect and consequential costs (including,

GC-48

but not limited to, fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys and otherprofessionals and court and arbitration costs).

14.5 CONTRACTOR May Stop Work or TerminateIf, through no act or fault of CONTRACTOR, the Work is suspended for a period ofmore than ninety days by OWNER or under an order of court or other publicauthority, or ENGINEER fails to act on any Application for Payment within sixtydays after it is submitted, or OWNER fails for sixty days to pay CONTRACTORany sum finally determined to be due, then CONTRACTOR may, upon seven days'written notice to OWNER and ENGINEER, terminate the Agreement and recoverfrom OWNER payment for all Work executed and any expense sustained plusreasonable termination expenses. In addition and in lieu of terminating theAgreement, if ENGINEER has failed to act on an Application for Payment orOWNER has failed to make any payment as aforesaid, CONTRACTOR may uponseven days' written notice to OWNER and ENGINEER stop the Work until paymentof all amounts then due. The provisions of this paragraph shall not relieveCONTRACTOR of the obligations under paragraph 5.16 to carry on the Work inaccordance with the progress schedule and without delay during disputes anddisagreements with OWNER.

15. MISCELLANEOUS

15.1 Claims for Injury or DamageShould OWNER or CONTRACTOR suffer injury or damage to person or propertybecause of any error, omission or act of the other party or of any of the other party'semployees or agents or others for whose acts the other party is legally liable, claimwill be made in writing to the other party within a reasonable time of the firstobservance of such injury or damage. The provisions of this paragraph 15.1 shallnot be construed as a substitute for or a waiver of the provisions of any applicablestatute of limitations or repose.

15.2 Non-Discrimination in EmploymentThe CONTRACTOR shall comply with the following requirements prohibitingdiscrimination:

15.2.1 That no person (as defined in KRS 344.010) shall bid on Lexington-Fayette Urban County Government construction projects, or bid to furnishmaterials or supplies to the Lexington-Fayette Urban County Government,if, within six months prior to the time of opening of bids, said person shallhave been found, by declamatory judgment action in Fayette Circuit Court,to be presently engaging in an unlawful practice, as hereinafter defined.Such declamatory judgment action may be brought by an aggrievedindividual or upon an allegation that an effort at conciliation pursuant toKRS 344.200 has been attempted and failed, by the Lexington-FayetteCounty Human Rights Commission.

GC-49

15.2.2 That it is an unlawful practice for an employer:

15.2.2.1 to fail or refuse to hire, or to discharge any individualor otherwise to discriminate against an individual, with respect to hiscompensation, terms, conditions, or privileges of employment,because of such individual's race, color, religion, sex, age, or nationalorigin; or

15.2.2.2 to limit, segregate or classify his employees in anyway which would deprive or tend to deprive an individual ofemployment opportunities or otherwise adversely affect his status asan employee because of such individual's sex, race, color, religion,age, or national origin.

15.2.3 That it is an unlawful practice for an employer, labor organization, orjoint-labor management committee controlling apprenticeship or othertraining or retraining, including on-the-job training programs to discriminateagainst an individual because of his race, color, religion, sex, age, ornational origin in admission to, or employment in, any program establishedto provide apprenticeship or other training.

15.2.4 That a copy of this Ordinance shall be furnished all suppliers andmade a part of all bid specifications.

15.2.5 This Ordinance shall take effect after it is signed, published andrecorded, as required by law.

15.3 Temporary Street Closing or BlockageThe CONTRACTOR will notify the ENGINEER at least 72 hours prior to makingany temporary street closing or blockage. This will permit orderly notification to allconcerned public agencies. Specific details and restrictions on street closure orblockage are contained in the Special Conditions.

15.4 Percentage of Work Performed by prime CONTRACTORThe CONTRACTOR shall perform on site, and with its own organization, Workequivalent to at least fifty (50%) percent of the total amount of Work to beperformed under the Contract. This percentage may be reduced by a supplementalagreement to this Contract if, during performing the Work, the CONTRACTORrequests a reduction and the ENGINEER determines that the reduction would be tothe advantage of the OWNER.

15.5 Clean-upCleanup shall progress, to the greatest degree practicable, throughout the course ofthe Work. The Work will not be considered as completed, and final payment willnot be made, until the right-of-way and all ground occupied or affected by theContractor in connection with the Work has been cleared of all rubbish, equipment,

GC-50

excess materials, temporary structures, and weeds. Rubbish and all waste materialsof whatever nature shall be disposed of, off of the project site, in an acceptablemanner. All property, both public and private, which has been damaged in theprosecution of the Work, shall be restored in an acceptable manner. All areas shallbe draining, and all drainage ways shall be left unobstructed, and in such a conditionthat drift will not collect or scour be induced.

15.6 GeneralThe duties and obligations imposed by these General Conditions and the rights andremedies available hereunder to the parties hereto, and, in particular but withoutlimitation, the warranties, guarantees and obligations imposed uponCONTRACTOR by paragraphs 12.1, 12.3.5, 13.3, and 15.2 and all of the rights andremedies available to OWNER and ENGINEER thereunder, are in addition to, andare not to be construed in any way as a limitation of, any rights and remediesavailable to any or all of them which are otherwise imposed or available by Laws orRegulations, by special warranty or guarantee or by other provisions of the ContractDocuments, and the provisions of this paragraph will be as effective as if repeatedspecifically in the Contract Documents in connection with each particular duty,obligation, right and remedy to which they apply. All representations, warrantiesand guarantees made in the Contract Documents will survive final payment andtermination or completion of the Agreement.

15.7 Debris DisposalFor all LFUCG projects any trash, construction demolition debris, yard waste, dirt ordebris of any kind that is removed from the project site must be disposed of inaccordance with local, state, and federal regulations. The disposal site or facilitymust be approved in advance by the LFUCG and disposal documentation isrequired. The Contractor will be responsible for payment of any fines associatedwith improper disposal of material removed from the project site.

END OF SECTION

SC-1

PART VSPECIAL CONDITIONS

INDEX

1 BLASTING SC-2

2 RISK MANAGEMENT PROVISIONS –INSURANCE AND INDEMNIFICATION SC-3

3 .........................................................................................

........................................................................

.....................................................................................................................

WAGE SCALE (if applicable) SC-6

SC-2

1. BLASTING

Blasting shall only be allowed with the specific written permission from the OWNER andthe CONTRACTOR will be fully responsible and will be required to provide additionalinsurance.

Blasting is only allowed by a licensed blaster in compliance with the State of KentuckyLaws, KRS Section 351.310 – 351.340 and applicable rules and regulations issued bythe Department of Mines and Minerals.

CONTRACTOR shall notify each property owner and public utility company havingstructures or facilities in proximity to the site of the work of the intent to use explosives.Give such notice sufficiently in advance to enable those being notified to take thenecessary steps to protect their property from injury. CONTRACTOR will be liable forany and all damages and claims made as a result of his blasting operations.

CONTRACTOR shall preserve the original bearing value of rock located under proposedstructure foundations from damage be blasting, by concussion from the blasting or byexcessive breakage. The CONTRACTOR shall bear any increase in structure costscaused by blasting damage to rock under proposed foundations.

SC-3

2. RISK MANAGEMENT PROVISIONS - INSURANCE AND INDEMNIFICATION

INDEMNIFICATION AND HOLD HARMLESS PROVISION

(1) It is understood and agreed by the parties that Contractor hereby assumes the entireresponsibility and liability for any and all damages to persons or property caused by orresulting from or arising out of any act or omission on the part of Contractor or itsemployees, agents, servants, owners, principals, licensees, assigns or subcontractorsof any tier (hereinafter “CONTRACTOR”) under or in connection with this agreementand/or the provision of goods or services and the performance or failure to perform anywork required thereby.

(2) CONTRACTOR shall indemnify, save, hold harmless and defend the Lexington-FayetteUrban County Government and its elected and appointed officials, employees, agents,volunteers, and successors in interest (hereinafter “LFUCG”) from and against allliability, damages, and losses, including but not limited to, demands, claims, obligations,causes of action, judgments, penalties, fines, liens, costs, expenses, interest, defensecosts and reasonable attorney’s fees that are in any way incidental to or connected with,or that arise or are alleged to have arisen, directly or indirectly, from or byCONTRACTOR’s performance or breach of the agreement and/or the provision of goodsor services provided that: (a) it is attributable to personal injury, bodily injury, sickness, ordeath, or to injury to or destruction of property (including the loss of use resultingtherefrom), or to or from the negligent acts, errors or omissions or willful misconduct ofthe CONTRACTOR; and (b) not caused solely by the active negligence or willfulmisconduct of LFUCG.

(3) In the event LFUCG is alleged to be liable based upon the above, CONTRACTOR shalldefend such allegations and shall bear all costs, fees and expenses of such defense,including but not limited to, all reasonable attorneys’ fees and expenses, court costs, andexpert witness fees and expenses, using attorneys approved in writing by LFUCG, whichapproval shall not be unreasonably withheld.

(4) These provisions shall in no way be limited by any financial responsibility or insurancerequirements, and shall survive the termination of this agreement.

(5) The work and services performed hereunder involve a CONSENT DECREE as furtherexplained in Part 1-Advertisement for Bids, provision 13. These provisions areincorporated herein by reference as if expressly stated.

(6) LFUCG is a political subdivision of the Commonwealth of Kentucky. CONTRACTORacknowledges and agrees that LFUCG is unable to provide indemnity or otherwise save,hold harmless, or defend the CONTRACTOR in any manner.

FINANCIAL RESPONSIBILITY

BIDDER/CONTRACTOR understands and agrees that it shall, prior to final acceptance ofits bid and the commencement of any work, demonstrate the ability to assure compliancewith the above Indemnity provisions and these other risk management provisions.

SC-4

INSURANCE REQUIREMENTS

YOUR ATTENTION IS DIRECTED TO THE INSURANCE REQUIREMENTS BELOW,AAND YOU MAY NEED TO CONFER WITH YOUR INSURANCE AGENTS, BROKERS,OR CARRIERS TO DETERMINE IN ADVANCE OF SUBMISSION OF A RESPONSE THEAVAILABILITY OF THE INSURANCE COVERAGES AND ENDORSEMENTS REQUIREDHEREIN. IF YOU FAIL TO COMPLY WITH THE INSURANCE REQUIREMENTSBELOW, YOU MAY BE DISQUALIFIED FROM AWARD OF THE CONTRACT.

Required Insurance Coverage

BIDDER/CONTRACTOR shall procure and maintain for the duration of this contract thefollowing or equivalent insurance policies at no less than the limits shown below andcause its subcontractors to maintain similar insurance with limits acceptable to LFUCGin order to protect LFUCG against claims for injuries to persons or damages to propertywhich may arise from or in connection with the performance of the work hereunder byCONTRACTOR. The cost of such insurance shall be included in any bid:

Coverage Limits

General Liability $1 million per occurrence, $2 millionaggregate(Insurance Services Office Form CG 00 01) or $2 million combined single limit

Commercial Automobile Liability combined single, $1 million peroccurrence(Insurance Services Office Form CA 0001)

Worker’s Compensation Statutory

Employer’s Liability $500,000.00

The policies above shall contain the following conditions:

a. All Certificates of Insurance forms used by the insurance carrier shall be properlyfiled and approved by the Department of Insurance for the Commonwealth ofKentucky (DOI). LFUCG shall be named as an additional insured in the GeneralLiability Policy and Commercial Automobile Liability Policy using the Kentucky DOIapproved forms.

b. The General Liability Policy shall be primary to any insurance or self-insuranceretained by LFUCG.

c. The General Liability Policy shall include a Products and Completed Operationsendorsement or Premises and Operations Liability endorsement unless it is deemednot to apply by LFUCG.

d. The General Liability Policy shall include an Explosion-Collapse Underground (XCU)endorsement.

SC-5

e. The General Liability Policy shall include a Pollution liability and/or EnvironmentalCasualty endorsement unless it is deemed not to apply by LFUCG.

f. LFUCG shall be provided at least 30 days advance written notice via certified mail,return receipt requested, in the event any of the required policies are canceled ornon-renewed.

g. Said coverage shall be written by insurers acceptable to LFUCG and shall be in aform acceptable to LFUCG. Insurance placed with insurers with a rating classificationof no less than Excellent (A or A-) and a financial size category of no less than VIII, asdefined by the most current Best's Key Rating Guide shall be deemed automaticallyacceptable.

h. Owner requests that the Bidder obtain an Umbrella Liability endorsement to the CGLpolicy for a limit of liability of $5,000,000 and that this CGL policy endorsement berenewed for one (1) year after completion of this project.

Renewals

After insurance has been approved by LFUCG, evidence of renewal of an expiring policymust be submitted to LFUCG, and may be submitted on a manually signed renewalendorsement form. If the policy or carrier has changed, however, new evidence ofcoverage must be submitted in accordance with these Insurance Requirements.

Deductibles and Self-Insured Programs

IF YOU INTEND TO SUBMIT A SELF-INSURANCE PLAN IT MUST BE FORWARDEDTO LEXINGTON-FAYETTE URBAN COUNTY GOVERNMENT, DIVISION OF RISKMANAGEMENT, 200 EAST MAIN STREET, LEXINGTON, KENTUCKY 40507 NOLATER THAN A MINIMUM OF FIVE (5) WORKING DAYS PRIOR TO THE RESPONSEDATE. Self-insurance programs, deductibles, and self-insured retentions in insurancepolicies are subject to separate approval by Lexington-Fayette Urban County Government'sDivision of Risk Management, upon review of evidence of BIDDER/CONTRACTOR’sfinancial capacity to respond to claims. Any such programs or retentions must provideLFUCG with at least the same protection from liability and defense of suits as would beafforded by first-dollar insurance coverage. If BIDDER/CONTRACTOR satisfies anyportion of the insurance requirements through deductibles, self-insurance programs, or self-insured retentions, BIDDER/CONTRACTOR agrees to provide Lexington-Fayette UrbanCounty Government, Division of Risk Management, the following data prior to the finalacceptance of bid and the commencement of any work:

a. Latest audited financial statement, including auditor's notes.

b. Any records of any self-insured trust fund plan or policy and relatedaccounting statements.

c. Actuarial funding reports or retained losses.

d. Risk Management Manual or a description of the self-insurance and riskmanagement program.

SC-6

e. A claim loss run summary for the previous five (5) years.

f. Self-Insured Associations will be considered.

Safety and Loss Control

CONTRACTOR shall comply with all applicable federal, state, and local safety standardsrelated to the performance of its works or services under this Agreement and takenecessary action to protect the life, health and safety and property of all of its personnel onthe job site, the public, and LFUCG.

Verification of Coverage

BIDDER/CONTRACTOR agrees to furnish LFUCG with all applicable Certificates ofInsurance signed by a person authorized by the insurer to bind coverage on its behalf priorto final award, and if requested, shall provide LFUCG copies of all insurance policies,including all endorsements.

Right to Review, Audit and Inspect

CONTRACTOR understands and agrees that LFUCG may review, audit and inspect anyand all of its records and operations to insure compliance with these InsuranceRequirements.

DEFAULT

BIDDER/CONTRACTOR understands and agrees that the failure to comply with any ofthese insurance, safety, or loss control provisions shall constitute default and that LFUCGmay elect at its option any single remedy or penalty or any combination of remedies andpenalties, as available, including but not limited to purchasing insurance and chargingBIDDER/CONTRACTOR for any such insurance premiums purchased, or suspending orterminating the work.

3. WAGE SCALES

This project is being funded in whole by the Owner and no federal funding sources areinvolved. Wage rates are not included as part of this project.

Pursuant to Kentucky Revised Statute 337.510, no laborer, workman, mechanic, helper,assistant, or apprentice shall be permitted to work more than 8 hours in one calendarday, nor more than 40 hours in one week, except in cases of emergency caused by fire,flood, or damage to life or property. Whenever work in excess of 8 hours per day or 40hours per week is required, payment of overtime shall be at not less than one and one-half times of the wages.

END OF SECTION

CA-1

PART VI

CONTRACT AGREEMENT

INDEX

1. SCOPE OF WORK


3. ISSUANCE OF WORK ORDERS

4. THE CONTRACT SUM

5. PROGRESS PAYMENTS

6. ACCEPTANCE AND FINAL PAYMENT

7. THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

8. EXTRA WORK


10. ENUMERATION OF SPECIFICATIONS AND DRAWINGS

__________ _____________

_____________________________________

CA-2

PART VI

_____________

CONTRACT AGREEMENT

THIS AGREEMENT, made on the _ day of _ , 20____, by andbetween Lexington-Fayette Urban County Government, acting herein called "OWNER" and

_____________

____________________ _________________________________________

(bidder’s name) _ , doing businessas *(an individual) (a partnership) (a corporation) located in the City of _ ,County of _ , and State of _ , hereinafter called"CONTRACTOR."

WITNESSETH: That the CONTRACTOR and the OWNER in consideration of _Dollars and

Cents ($ ) quoted in the proposal by the CONTRACTOR, dated_______________, hereby agree to commence and complete the construction described as follows:

1. SCOPE OF WORK

The CONTRACTOR shall furnish all the materials, supplies, machinery, equipment, tools,superintendence, labor, insurance, and other accessories and services necessary to complete the saidproject in accordance with the conditions and prices stated in the Proposal, the General Conditions,and the Special Conditions of the Contract, the Specifications and Contract Documents therefore asprepared by GRW Engineers for the Town Branch WWTP Thickening Process Upgrades whichincludes but is not limited to:

The replacement of equipment in two (2) gravity thickeners, one (1) carbon adsorber odor controlunit with two (2) fans and associated duct and valving, twelve (12) primary sludge pumps andVFDs, two (2) thickened sludge pumps, two (2) scum pumps, six (6) magnetic flow meters, andapproximately 95 plug valves.Installation of one (1) new thickening centrifuge, with two (2) new thickened sludge pumps, one (1)thickened sludge hopper, one (1) new magnetic flow meter, and all associated valves, fittings,piping and ductwork. Installation of three (3) new grinders and one (1) new scum chopper pump.Project also includes replacement of select doors, windows, and lighting, roof replacement of three(3) buildings, replacement of one (1) air make-up unit, and one (1) energy recovery ventilator. Allwork listed here together with all related work as specified and shown on the Drawings.


The time period estimated and authorized by the OWNER for the proper execution of the Workby the Contract, in full, is hereby fixed as TIME OF COMPLETION (335) calendar days. Thetime shall begin ten (10) days after the CONTRACTOR is given the Notice to Proceed with theWork. TIME IS OF THE ESSENCE IN THE PERFORMANCE OF THIS AGREEMENTAND CONTRACTOR SHALL BE LIABLE AND RESPONSIBLE FOR DAMAGES

CA-3

SUFFERED BY OWNER AS A RESULT OF THE DELAY CAUSED BYCONTRACTOR.

Should the contractor fail or refuse to complete the work within the time specified in his Proposaland/or Contract (or extension of time granted by the owner), the Contractor shall pay liquidateddamages in an amount of $750 per day. The amount of liquidated damages shall in no event beconsidered as a penalty, nor other than an amount agreed upon by the Contractor and the Owner fordamages, loses, additional engineering, additional resident representation and other cost that willbe sustained by the owner, if the Contractor fails to complete the work within the specified time.Liquidated damages will be applied on a rate per day for each and every calendar day (Sundays andholidays included) beyond the Contract expiration date stipulated in the Contract Documents,considering all time extension granted. These Liquidated Damages are in addition to any otherdamages/fees/penalties that are incurred as a result of Consent Decree requirements.

3. ISSUANCE OF WORK ORDERS

Notice to begin Work will be given in whole or for part of the Work as determined by the OWNERpending the availability of funds. The order of construction will be as determined by the Engineerafter consultation with the CONTRACTOR and the OWNER.

4. THE CONTRACT SUM

The OWNER agrees to pay the CONTRACTOR in current funds for the performance of theContract, as quoted in the proposal, subject to any additions and deductions, as provided therein.

5. PROGRESS PAYMENTS

The OWNER shall make payments on account of the Contract, as provided in accordance with theGeneral Conditions, as estimated by the Engineer, less the aggregate of previous payments.

6. ACCEPTANCE AND FINAL PAYMENT

Final payment shall be due within ninety (90) days after completion of the Work, provided theWork be then fully completed and the Contract fully accepted.

Before issuance of final certificate, the CONTRACTOR shall submit evidence satisfactory to theEngineer that all payrolls, material bills, and other indebtedness connected with the Work has beenpaid.

If, after the Work has been substantially completed, full completion thereof is materially delayedthrough no fault of the CONTRACTOR, and the ENGINEER so certifies, the OWNER shall uponcertificate of the ENGINEER, and without terminating the Contract, make payment of the balancedue for that portion of the Work fully completed and accepted. Such payment shall be made underthe terms and conditions governing final payment, except that it shall not constitute a waiver ofclaims.

CA-4

7. THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

The Advertisement for Bids, Information for Bidders, the General Conditions, Performance andPayment Bonds, Contract Agreement, Special Conditions, Technical Specifications, any and allAddenda, and Proposal, and Plan Drawings form the Contract, and they are fully a part of theContract as if hereto attached or herein repeated.

8. EXTRA WORK

The OWNER, without invalidating the Contract, may order extra work or make changes byaltering, adding to or deducting from the Work, the Contract Sum being adjusted accordingly. Allsuch Work shall be executed and paid for in accordance with the General Conditions, which is apart of this Contract.


9.1 OWNER, the United States Environmental Protection Agency, and theCommonwealth of Kentucky have entered into a Consent Decree in a case styled UnitedStates, et al. v. Lexington-Fayette Urban County Government, United States DistrictCourt for the Eastern District of Kentucky, Case No. 5:06-CV-00386 (“CONSENTDECREE”), that requires OWNER to complete numerous projects related to its sanitarysewer system and stormwater management program within specific periods of time.9.2 TIME IS OF THE ESSENCE IN THE PERFORMANCE OF THISAGREEMENT. CONTRACTOR is aware that the OWNER is subject to penalties fornon-compliance with the CONSENT DECREE deadlines. The CONTRACTOR shall bespecifically liable and responsible for payment of any and all penalties, fines, or feesassessed against or incurred by the OWNER as a result of any delay in, or non-performanceof, any of the CONTRACTOR’s obligations or responsibilities under this Contract, or forany other damages suffered by OWNER as a result of such delay or non-performance. Thisshall specifically include, but shall not be limited to, any penalty, fine, fee, or assessmentagainst the OWNER by the U.S. Department of Justice, U.S. Environmental ProtectionAgency, and/or the Kentucky Energy and Environment Cabinet related to the ConsentDecree.

9.3 The provisions of this Section and the various rates of compensation forCONTRACTOR's services provided for elsewhere in this Agreement have been agreed to inanticipation of the orderly and continuous progress of the PROJECT through completion.

9.4 If delays result by reason of acts of the OWNER or approving agencies, which arebeyond the control of the CONTRACTOR, an extension of time for such delay will beconsidered. If delays occur, the CONTRACTOR shall immediately notify the OWNER,and within five (5) business days from the date of the delay apply in writing to the OWNERfor an extension of time for such reasonable period as may be mutually agreed uponbetween the parties, and if approved, the PROJECT schedule shall be revised to reflect theextension. Such extension of time to the completion date shall in no way be construed tooperate as a waiver on the part of the OWNER of any of its rights in the Agreement.

CA-5

Section 9.6 of this Agreement (Disputes) shall apply in the event the parties cannot agreeupon an extension of time.

______________________________________________________________________________

In the event that the overall delay resulting from the above-described causes is sufficient toprevent complete performance of the Agreement within six (6) months of the time specifiedherein, the fees to be paid to CONTRACTOR shall be subject to adjustment as agreed uponby the parties. Section 9.6 of this Agreement shall apply in the event the parties cannotagree upon an adjustment of fee.

9.5 If delays result solely by reason of acts of the CONTRACTOR, theCONTRACTOR shall be held liable for any financial penalties incurred by the OWNER asa result of the delay, including but not limited to those assessed pursuant to the CONSENTDECREE as provided in Section 9.2, above. Section 9.6 of this Agreement (Disputes),shall apply in the event the parties cannot mutually agree upon the cause(s) associated withdelays in completing project deliverables. The CONTRACTOR must immediately notifythe OWNER in the event of such delay, and provide the OWNER a written action planwithin five (5) business days on how it will attempt to resolve the delay.

9.6 DISPUTESExcept as otherwise provided in this Agreement, any dispute hereunder may be resolved byagreement of the OWNER’s Agent (Charles H. Martin, P.E., Director of Water Quality) andthe CONTRACTOR. In the absence of such an agreement, the dispute shall be submitted tothe OWNER’s Commissioner, Department of Environmental Quality, whose decision shallbe final and conclusive unless determined by a court of competent jurisdiction to have beenfraudulent, capricious, arbitrary, or so grossly erroneous as necessarily to imply bad faith.Pending a final decision of a dispute hereunder, the CONTRACTOR shall proceeddiligently with the performance of the Agreement in accordance with the directions of theOWNER.

10. THE FOLLOWING IS AN ENUMERATION OF THE SPECIFICATIONS ANDDRAWINGS (CONTRACT DOCUMENTS):

PART NO. TITLE PAGES

I Advertisement for Bids AB 1 thru 6II Information for Bidders IB 1 thru 10III Form of Proposal P 1 thru 20IV General Conditions GC 1 thru 52V Special Conditions SC 1 thru 8VI Contract Agreement CA 1 thru 6VII Performance and Payment Bonds PB 1 thru 7VIII Addenda AD 1 thru 1IX Technical Specifications See Part IX

CA-6

IN WITNESSETH WHEREOF, the parties hereto have executed this Contract as of the date andyear above written.

(Seal) Lexington-Fayette Urban County Government.Lexington, Kentucky

(Owner)ATTEST:

BY:Clerk of the Urban County Council MAYOR

(Witness) (Title)

(Seal)(Contractor)

BY:(Secretary)*

(Witness) (Title)

(Address and Zip Code)

IMPORTANT: *Strike out any non-applicable terms.

Secretary of the Owner should attest. If the CONTRACTOR is corporation,Secretary should attest. Give proper title of each person-executing Contract.

PB-1

PART VII

PERFORMANCE AND PAYMENT BONDS

1. PERFORMANCE BOND

2. PAYMENT BOND

PB-2

PART VII

_______________________________________________________________________________________

PERFORMANCE BOND

____________________________________________________________________________

KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS, that

_______________________________________________________________________________________

(Name of CONTRACTOR)

(Address of CONTRACTOR)

a , hereinafter

______________

(Corporation, Partnership, or Individual)

called Principal, and _(Name of Surety)

______________________________________________

(Address of Surety)

hereinafter called Surety, are held and firmly bound unto

LEXINGTON-FAYETTE URBAN COUNTY GOVERNMENT200 East Main Street, Third Floor

_______________________________________________________________________________________

Lexington, Kentucky 40507

hereinafter called "OWNER" in the penal sum of: _Dollars, ($ ), for the payment of whereof Principal and Surety bind themselves, their heirs,executors, administrators, successors, and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents.

_____________________________________________________________________

WHEREAS, Principal by written agreement is entering into a Contract with OWNER for Town BranchWWTP Thickening Process Upgrades in accordance with drawings and specifications prepared by: GRWEngineers which Contract is by reference made a part hereof, and is hereinafter referred to as the Contract.

NOW THEREFORE, THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION is such that if the Principal shallpromptly and faithfully perform said Contract, then this obligation shall be null and void; otherwise it shallremain in full force and effect.

The Surety hereby waives notice of any alteration or extension of time made by the OWNER.

Whenever, Principal shall be, and declared by OWNER to be in default under the Contract, the OWNERhaving performed OWNER’S obligations thereunder, the Surety may promptly remedy the default, or shallpromptly:

PB-3

(1) Complete the Contract in accordance with its terms and conditions or

(2) Obtain a bid or bids for completing the Contract in accordance with its terms and conditions,and upon determination by Surety of the lowest responsible bidder, or if the OWNER elects,upon determination by the OWNER and Surety jointly of the lowest responsible bidder,arrange for a Contract between such bidder and OWNER, and make available as Workprogresses (even though there may be a default or a succession of defaults under the Contractor Contracts of completion arranged under this paragraph) sufficient funds to pay the cost ofcompletion less the balance of the Contract Price; but not exceeding, including other costs anddamages for which the Surety may be liable hereunder, the amount set forth in the firstparagraph hereof. The term "balance of the Contract Price", as used in this paragraph shallmean the total amount payable by OWNER to Principal under the Contract and anyamendments thereto, less the amount properly paid by OWNER to Principal.

Any suit under this bond must be instituted before the expiration of two (2) years from the date on whichfinal payment under the Contract falls due.

No right of action shall accrue on this bond to or for the use of any person or corporation other than theOWNER named herein or the heirs, executors, administrators or successors of OWNER.

PB-4

IN WITNESS WHEREOF, this instrument is executed in counterparts, each one of(number)

________________________

which shall be deemed an original, this the day of _ , 20______.

ATTEST:

_____________________________

Principal

______________________________

(Principal) Secretary

BY: (s)

______________________________

(Address)

_______________________________________________________

Witness as to Principal

_______________________________

(Address)

_______________________________

_________________________________

SuretyATTEST: BY: _

_________________________________Attorney-in-Fact

_____________________________

____________________________

(Surety) Secretary (Address)

______________________________________________________________

(SEAL)

_____________________________

Witness as to Surety

_____________________________

(Address)

________________________________

TITLE: _Surety

________________________________

__________________________

BY:

TITLE:

NOTE: The number of executed counterparts of the bond shall coincide with the number of executedcounterparts of the Contract.

____________________________

________________________________

__________ __________________

___________________

PB-5

PART VII

______________________________________________________________________________________

PAYMENT BOND

___________________________________________________________________________

KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENT: that

______________________________________________________________________________________

(Name of Contractor)

(Address of Contractor)

a , hereinafter

______________________________________________________________________________________

(Corporation, Partnership or Individual)

called Principal, and _(Name of Surety)

___________________________________________________________________

(Address of Surety)

hereinafter called Surety, are held and firmly bound unto:

LEXINGTON-FAYETTE URBAN COUNTY GOVERNMENT200 East Main Street, Third Floor

Lexington, Kentucky 40507

Obligee, hereinafter called OWNER, for the use and benefit of claimants as hereinafter defined, in theamount of Dollars ($ )the payment whereof Principal and Surety bind themselves, their heirs, executors, administrators, successors,and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents.

WHEREAS, Principal by written agreement is entering into a Contract with OWNER for Town BranchWWTP Thickening Process Upgrades in accordance with drawings and specifications prepared by: GRWEngineers which Contract is by reference made a part hereof, and is hereinafter referred to as the Contract.

NOW, THEREFORE, THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION is such that, if Principal shall promptlymake payment to all claimants as hereinafter defined for all labor and material used or reasonably requiredfor use in the performance of the Contract, then this obligation shall be void; otherwise it shall remain in fullforce and effect, subject, however, to the following conditions.

1. A claimant is defined as one having a direct contract with the Principal or with a Subcontractor ofthe Principal for labor, material, or both, used or reasonably required for use in the performance ofthe Contract, labor and material being construed to include that part of water, gas, power, light, heat,oil, gasoline, telephone service or rental of equipment directly applicable to the Contract.

PB-6

2. The above named Principal and Surety hereby jointly and severally agree with the OWNER thatevery claimant as herein defined, who has not been paid in full before the expiration of a period ofninety (90) days after the date on which the last of such claimant's work or labor was done orperformed, or materials were furnished by such claimant, may sue on this bond for the use of suchclaimant, prosecute the suit to final judgment for such sum or sums as may be justly due claimant,and have execution thereon. The OWNER shall not be liable for the payment of any costs orexpenses of any such suit.

3. No suit or action shall be commenced hereunder by any claimant:

(a) Unless claimant, other than one having a direct contract with the Principal, shall have givenwritten notice to any two of the following: The Principal, the OWNER, or the Surety abovenamed, within ninety (90) days after such claimant did or performed the last of the Work orlabor, or furnished the last of the materials for which said claim is made, stating withsubstantial accuracy the amount claimed and the name of the party to whom the materialswere furnished, or for whom the Work or labor was done or performed. Such notice shall beserved by mailing the same by registered mail or certified mail, postage prepaid, in anenvelope addressed to the Principal, OWNER, or Surety, at any place where an office isregularly maintained for the transaction of business, or served in any manner in which legalprocess may be served in the state in which the aforesaid project is located, save that suchservice need not be made by a public officer.

(b) After the expiration of one (1) year following the date on which Principal ceased Work onsaid Contract, it being understood, however, that if any limitation embodied in this bond isprohibited by any law controlling the construction hereof such limitation shall be deemed tobe amended so as to be equal to the minimum period of limitation permitted by such law.

(c) Other than in a state court of competent jurisdiction in and for the county or other politicalsubdivision of the state in which the project, or any part thereof, is situated, or in the UnitedStates District Court for the district in which the project, or any part thereof, is situated, andnot elsewhere.

4. The amount of this bond shall be reduced by and to the extent of any payment or payments made ingood faith hereunder, inclusive of the payment by Surety of mechanics' liens which may be filed ofrecord against aid improvement, whether or not claim for the amount of such lien be presentedunder and against this bond.

PB-7

IN WITNESS WHEREOF, this instrument is executed in counterparts, each one of(number)

_________________________________

which shall be deemed an original, this the day of _ , 20______.

ATTEST:

____________________________

(Principal)

_________________________________

(Principal) Secretary

(SEAL) BY: (s)

____________________________

(Address)

_____________________________________________________________

(Witness to Principal)

____________________________

(Address)

_____________________________

_________________________________(Surety)

ATTEST:

BY:(Attorney-in-Fact)

____________________________

(Surety) Secretary

(SEAL)

____________________________

____________________________

Witness as to Surety (Address)

_________________________________

_________________________________

_____________________________

(Address)

_____________________________

_______________________________

NOTE: The number of executed counterparts of the bond shall coincide with the number of executedcounterparts of the Contract.

__________ __________________

___________________

END OF SECTION

A-1

PART VIII

ADDENDA

All addenda issued during the bidding of the Project will be reproduced in the signed ContractDocuments, on the pages following this heading sheet.

AddendumNumber Title Date

_________________________________________________________

____________

1.

_____________________________________________

____________

2.

_____________________________________________

____________

3.

_____________________________________________

____________

4.

_____________________________________________

5.

TABLE OF CONTENTS 1 TOWN BRANCH WWTP THICKENING

TABLE OF CONTENTS

PART IX

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS011100 SUMMARY OF WORK011400 GENERAL PROVISIONS011410 SPECIAL PROVISIONS012100 ALLOWANCES012213 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT - LUMP SUM012500 PRODUCTS AND SUBSTITUTIONS013113 PROJECT COORDINATION013213 CONTRACTORS SEQUENCE OF CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE – WATER PLANT013216 PROGRESS SCHEDULES013323 SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, SAMPLES AND RFI’S014216 DEFINITIONS AND STANDARDS014500 QUALITY CONTROL SERVICES015000 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS015213 FIELD OFFICES017329 CUTTING AND PATCHING017400 CLEANING017700 PROJECT CLOSEOUT017823 OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS017834 WARRANTIES AND BONDS017839 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS

DIVISION 2 - SITE CONSTRUCTION024100 DEMOLITION & SALVAGE

DIVISION 3 - CONCRETE033100 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

DIVISION 5 - METALS055202 ALUMINUM HANDRAILS AND RAILINGS055300 ALUMINUM GRATING

DIVISION 7 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION075216 STYRENE-BUTADIENE-STYRENE (SBS) MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE ROOFING076200 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM079200 JOINT SEALANTS

DIVISION 8 - OPENINGS081613 FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC (FRP) DOORS085113 ALUMINUM WINDOWS087100 DOOR HARDWARE

DIVISION 9 - FINISHES099610 HIGH PERFORMANCE PAINTS AND COATINGS

DIVISION 23 – HVAC230100 GENERAL MECHANICAL PROVISIONS230111 SCOPE OF WORK230250 ELECTRICAL COORDINATION230593 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC

TABLE OF CONTENTS 2 TOWN BRANCH WWTP THICKENING

231123 FACILITY NATURAL GAS PIPING233116 NON-METAL DUCTS237223 AIR-TO-AIR ENERGY RECOVERY EQUIPMENT237423 PACKAGED, INDIRECT-FIRED, OUTDOOR, HEATING-ONLY MAKUP-AIR UNITS

DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL260000 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIAL AND METHODS260100 ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION260519 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES260529 SUPPORTING DEVICES260533 RACEWAYS260534 BOXES260553 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION262414 SWITCHBOARD MATTING262416 PANELBOARDS262419 MOTORCONTROL262700 WIRE CONNECTIONS AND CONNECTING DEVICES262716 CONTROL PANELS AND ENCLOSURES262726 WIRING DEVICES262816 SAFETY SWITCHES262923 VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES265100 LIGHTING266013 MOTORS

DIVISION 31 – EARTHWORK312000 EARTHWORK

DIVISION 33 – UTILITIES331216 YARD VALVES

DIVISION 40 – PROCESS INTEGRATION400557 ELECTRIC VALVE AND GATE ACTUATORS409000 BASIC CONTROL INSTRUMENTATION409030 MEASUREMENT AND CONTROL COMMISSIONING409129 PRESSURE MEASURING SYSTEMS409134 IN-LINE FLOW MEASURING SYSTEMS409136 LEVEL MEASURING SYSTEMS409443 PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC PROCESS CONTROLLERS409533 CABLED PROCESS CONTROL NETWORKS409610 PROCESS CONTROL SYSTEMS409620 INSTRUMENT LISTS AND REPORTS

DIVISION 46 – WATER AND WASTEWATER EQUIPMENT460500 BASIC REQUIREMENTS FOR VENDOR CONTROL PANEL PLC’S461023 SUBMERSIBLE MIXER462010 INTERIOR PROCESS PIPING462012 INTERIOR PROCESS VALVES462423 IN-LINE GRINDER463220 ODOR CONTROL CARBON ADSORBER SYSTEM467113 GRAVITY THICKENER467136 CENTRIFUGE THICKENER467510 ROTARY LOBE SLUDGE PUMP467520 CHOPPER PUMP

END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS

DIVISION 01

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

SUMMARY OF WORK 011100-1 TOWN BRANCH WWTP THICKENING

SECTION 011100 - SUMMARY OF WORK

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 REQUIREMENTS

A. The Work to be done under this Contract and in accordance with these Specificationsconsists of furnishing all equipment, supervision, labor, skill, material and all other itemsnecessary for the construction of the East Hickman Wet Weather Storage Facility and PumpStations.

B. The Contractor shall perform all work required for such construction in accordance with theContract Documents and subject to the terms and conditions of the Contract, complete andready for use.

C. The principal features of the Work to be performed under this Contract includes, but is notlimited to the replacement of equipment in two (2) gravity thickeners, one (1) carbon adsorberodor control unit with two (2) fans and associated duct and valving, twelve (12) primary sludgepumps and VFDs, two (2) thickened sludge pumps, two (2) scum pumps, six (6) magneticflow meters, and approximately 95 plug valves.

Installation of one (1) new thickening centrifuge, with two (2) new thickened sludge pumps,one (1) thickened sludge hopper, one (1) new magnetic flow meter, and all associated valves,fittings, piping and ductwork. Installation of three (3) new grinders and one (1) new scumchopper pump. Project also includes replacement of select doors, windows, and lighting, roofreplacement of three (3) buildings, replacement of one (1) air make-up unit, and one (1)energy recovery ventilator. All work listed here together with all related work as specified andshown on the Drawings.

D. The foregoing description(s) shall not be construed as a complete description of all workrequired.

1.02 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

A. Work to be done is shown on the set of Drawings entitled: East Hickman Wet WeatherStorage Facility and Pump Stations. The numbers and titles of all Drawings appear on theindex sheet of the Drawings. All drawings so enumerated shall be considered an integral partof the Contract Documents as defined herein.

1.03 GENERAL ARRANGEMENT

A. Drawings indicate the extent and general arrangement of the work. If any departures from theDrawings are deemed necessary by the Contractor to accommodate the materials andequipment he proposes to furnish, details of such departures and reasons therefore shall besubmitted as soon as practicable to the Engineer for approval. No such departures shall bemade without the prior written approval of the Engineer. Approved changes shall be madewithout additional cost to the Owner for this work or related work under other Contracts of theProject.

1.04 CONSTRUCTION PERMITS, EASEMENTS AND ENCROACHMENTS

A. The Owner shall obtain or cause to be obtained all permanent and temporary constructioneasements as shown on the Drawings or required for completion of the Work. The Contractorshall verify that these easements have been obtained and shall comply with the conditions setforth in each easement.


B. The Contractor shall obtain, keep current and pay all fees for any necessary constructionpermits from those authorities, agencies, or municipalities having jurisdiction over land areas,utilities, or structures which are located within the Contract limits and which will be occupied,encountered, used, or temporarily interrupted by the Contractor's operations unless otherwisestated. Record copies of all permits shall be furnished to the Engineer.

C. When construction permits are accompanied by regulations or requirements issued by aparticular authority, agency or municipality, it shall be the Contractor's responsibility tofamiliarize himself and comply with such regulations or requirements as they apply to hisoperations on this Project.

1.05 ADDITIONAL ENGINEERING SERVICES

A. In the event that the Engineer is required to provide additional engineering services as a resultof substitution of materials or equipment by the Contractor which are not "or equal", orchanges by the Contractor in dimension, weight, power requirements, etc., of the equipmentand accessories furnished, or if the Engineer is required to examine and evaluate anychanges proposed by the Contractor for the convenience of the Contractor, then theEngineer's charges in connection with such additional services shall be charged to theContractor by the Owner.

B. In the event that the Engineer is required to provide additional engineering services as a resultof Contractor's errors, omissions, or failure to conform to the requirements of the ContractDocuments, or if the Engineer is required to examine and evaluate any changes proposed bythe Contractor solely for the convenience of the Contractor, then the Engineer's charges inconnection with such additional services shall be charged to the Contractor by the Owner.

1.06 ADDITIONAL OWNER'S EXPENSES

A. In the event the Work of this Contract is not completed within the time set forth in the Contractor within the time to which such completion may have been extended in accordance with theContract Documents, the additional engineering or inspection charges incurred by the Ownermay be charged to the Contractor and deducted from the monies due him. Extra work orsupplemental Contract work added to the original Contract, as well as extenuatingcircumstances beyond the control of the Contractor, will be given due consideration by theOwner before assessing engineering and inspection charges against the Contractor.

B. Unless otherwise specifically permitted, the normal time of work under this Contract is limitedto 40 hours per week, Monday through Friday. Work beyond these hours will result inadditional expense to the Owner. Any expenses and/or damages, including the cost of theEngineer's on site personnel, arising from the Contractor's operations beyond the hours anddays specified above shall be borne by the Contractor.

C. Charges assessed to the Contractor for additional engineering and inspection costs will bedetermined based on actual hours charged to the job by the Engineer. Daily rates will dependon the number and classifications of employees involved, but in no case shall such chargesexceed $500 per day for field personnel based on an eight hour workday. Additional chargeswill apply if multiple personnel are needed or if engineering time is required as part of the workoutside the contract times.

D. Charges for additional Owner's expenses shall be in addition to any liquidated damagesassessed in accordance with the Contract.

1.07 TIME OF WORK


A. The normal time of work for this Contract is limited to 40 hours per week and shall generallybe between the hours of 7:00 a.m. and 6:00 p.m., Monday through Friday. The Contractormay work beyond these hours or on weekends with written approval from the Owner providedthat all costs incurred by the Owner for any additional engineering shall be borne by theContractor. The Owner shall deduct the cost of additional engineering from monies due theContractor.

B. If it shall become imperative to perform work outside of the normal working hours the Ownerand Engineer shall be informed a reasonable time in advance of the beginning of such work.Temporary lighting and all other necessary facilities for performing and inspecting the workshall be provided and maintained by the Contractor.

C. Unless otherwise specifically permitted, all work that would be subject to damage shall bestopped during inclement, stormy or freezing weather. Only such work as will not suffer injuryto workmanship or materials will be permitted. Contractor shall carefully protect his workagainst damage or injury from the weather, and when work is permitted during freezingweather, he shall provide and maintain approved facilities for heating the materials and forprotecting the finished work.

1.08 SURVEYS AND LAYOUT

A. All work under this Contract shall be constructed in accordance with the lines and gradesshown on the Drawings or as directed by the Engineer. Contractor shall be responsible forconfirming locations and elevations of existing site utilities, site improvements and grades.Elevations of existing ground and appurtenances are believed to be reasonably correct butare not guaranteed to be absolute and therefore are presented only as an approximation. Anyerror or apparent discrepancy in the data shown or omissions of data required for accuratelyaccomplishing the stake out survey shall be referred immediately to the Engineer forinterpretation or correction.

B. All survey work for construction control purposes shall be made by the Contractor at hisexpense. The Contractor shall provide a Licensed Surveyor as Chief of Party, competentlyqualified survey party, all necessary instruments, stakes, and other material to perform thework.

C. Contractor shall establish all baselines for the location of the principal component parts of thework together with a suitable number of bench marks adjacent to the work. Based upon theinformation provided by the Contract Drawings, the Contractor shall develop and make alldetail surveys necessary for construction, including stakes for all working points, lines andelevations.

D. Contractor shall have the responsibility to carefully preserve the bench marks, referencepoints and stakes, and in the case of destruction thereof by the Contractor or resulting fromhis negligence, the Contractor shall be charged with the expense and damage resultingtherefrom and shall be responsible for any mistakes that may be caused by the unnecessaryloss or disturbance of such bench marks, reference points and stakes.

E. Existing or new control points, property markers and monuments that will be or are destroyedduring the normal causes of construction shall be reestablished by the Contractor and allreference ties recorded therefore shall be furnished to the Engineer. All computationsnecessary to establish the exact position of the work shall be made and preserved by theContractor.

F. The Engineer may check all or any portion of the work and the Contractor shall afford allnecessary assistance to the Engineer in carrying out such checks. Any necessary correctionsto the work shall be immediately made by the Contractor. Such checking by the Engineershall not relieve the Contractor of any responsibilities for the accuracy or completeness of hiswork.


G. At completion of the work, the Contractor shall furnish Record Drawings indicating the finallayout of all constructed piping and structures and finished grades constructed or changed aspart of this work.

1.09 FIRE PROTECTION

A. Contractor shall take all necessary precautions to prevent fires at or adjacent to the work andshall provide adequate facilities for extinguishing fires which do occur. Burning shall not bepermitted on site.

B. When fire or explosion hazards are created in the vicinity of the work as a result of thelocations of fuel tanks or similar hazardous utilities or devices, the Contractor shallimmediately alert the local Fire Marshal, the Engineer, and the Owner of such tank or device.The Contractor shall exercise all safety precautions and shall comply with all instructionsissued by the Fire Marshal and shall cooperate with the Owner of the tank or device toprevent the occurrence of fire or explosion.

1.10 CHEMICALS

A. All chemicals used during project construction or furnished for project operation, whetherherbicide, pesticide, disinfectant, or reactant of other classification, must show approval ofeither the EPA or USDA. Use of all such chemicals and disposal of residues shall be in strictconformance with all applicable rules and regulations.

1.11 FIRST AID FACILITIES AND ACCIDENTS

A. First Aid Facilities

1. The Contractor shall provide at the site such equipment and facilities as are necessary tosupply first aid to any of his personnel who may be injured in connection with the work.

B. Accidents

1. The Contractor shall promptly report, in writing, to the Engineer and Owner all accidentswhatsoever out of, or in connection with, the performance of the work, whether on oradjacent to the site, which cause death, personal injury or property damage, giving fulldetails and statements of witnesses.

2. If death, serious injuries, or serious damages are caused, the accident shall be reportedimmediately by telephone or messenger to both the Owner and the Engineer.

3. If any claim is made by anyone against the Contractor or a Subcontractor on account ofany accidents, the Contractor shall promptly report the facts, in writing, to the Engineerand Owner, giving full details of the claim.

1.12 ULTIMATE DISPOSITION OF CLAIMS BY ONE CONTRACTOR ARISING FROM ALLEGEDDAMAGE BY ANOTHER CONTRACTOR

A. During the progress of the Work, other Contractors may be engaged in performing other workor may be awarded other Contracts for additional work on this project. In that event, theContractor shall coordinate the work to be done hereunder with the work of such otherContractors and the Contractor shall fully cooperate with such other Contractors and carefullyfit its own work to that provided under other Contracts as may be directed by the Engineer.


The Contractor shall not commit or permit any act which will interfere with the performance ofwork by any other Contractor.

B. If the Engineer shall determine that the Contractor is failing to coordinate his work with thework of the other Contractors as the Engineer directed, then the Owner shall have the right towithhold any payments otherwise due hereunder until the Contractor completely complies withthe Engineer's directions.

C. If the Contractor notifies the Engineer in writing that another Contractor is failing to coordinatehis work with the work of this Contract as directed, the Engineer will promptly investigate thecharge. If the Engineer finds it to be true, he will promptly issue such directions to the otherContractor with respect thereto as the situation may require. The Owner, the Engineer, norany of their agents shall not, however, be liable for any damages suffered by the Contractorby reason of the other Contractor's failure to promptly comply with the directions so issued bythe Engineer, or by reason of another Contractor's default in performance, it being understoodthat the Owner does not guarantee the responsibility or continued efficiency of any Contractor.

D. The Contractor shall indemnify and hold the Owner and the Engineer harmless from any andall claims of judgments for damages and from costs and expenses to which the Owner maybe subjected or which it may suffer or incur by reason of the Contractor's failure to promptlycomply with the Engineer's directions.

E. Should the Contractor sustain any damage through any act or omission of any otherContractor having a Contract with the Owner for the performance of work upon the site or ofwork which may be necessary to be performed for the proper execution of the work to beperformed hereunder, or through any act or omission of a Subcontractor of such Contract, theContractor shall have no claim against the Owner or the Engineer for such damage, but shallhave a right to recover such damage from the other Contractor under the provision similar tothe following provisions which have been or will be inserted in the Contracts with such otherContractors.

F. Should any other Contractor having or who shall hereafter have a Contract with the Owner forthe performance of work upon the site sustain any damage through any act or omission of theContractor hereunder or through any act or omission of any Subcontractor of the Contractor,the Contractor agrees to reimburse such other Contractor for all such damages and to defendat his own expense any suit based upon such claim and if any judgment or claims against theOwner shall be allowed, the Contractor shall pay or satisfy such judgment or claim and pay allcosts and expenses in connection therewith and shall indemnify and hold the Owner harmlessfrom all such claims.

G. The Owner's right to indemnification hereunder shall in no way be diminished, waived ordischarged, by its recourse to assessment of liquidated damages as provided in the Contract,or by the exercise of any other remedy provided for by Contract Documents or by law.

1.13 BLASTING AND EXPLOSIVES

A. Refer to section 02225 of these specifications for blasting requirements.

1.14 LIMITS OF WORK AREA

A. The Contractor shall confine his construction operations within the Contract limits shown onthe Drawings and/or property lines and/or fence lines. Storage of equipment and materials, orerection and use of sheds outside of the Contract limits, if such areas are the property of theOwner, shall be used only with the Owner's approval. Such storage or temporary structures,even within the Contract's limits, shall not be placed on properties designated as easementsor rights-of-way unless specifically permitted elsewhere in the Contract Documents.


B. The Contractor shall secure, insure, maintain, rent/lease, and restore staging area.

C. The Contractor shall provide Engineer and Owner copy of agreement with landowner ofstaging areas.

1.15 WEATHER CONDITIONS

A. No work shall be done when the weather is unsuitable. The Contractor shall take necessaryprecautions (in the event of impending storms) to protect all work, materials, or equipmentfrom damage or deterioration due to floods, driving rain, or wind, and snow storms. TheOwner reserves the right, through the opinion of the Engineer, to order that additionalprotection measures over and beyond those proposed by the Contractor, be taken tosafeguard all components of the Project. The Contractor shall not claim any compensationfor such precautionary measures so ordered, nor claim any compensation from the Owner fordamage to the work from weather elements.

1.16 PERIODIC CLEANUP: BASIC SITE RESTORATION

A. During construction, the Contractor shall regularly remove from the site of the work allaccumulated debris and surplus materials of any kind which result from his operations.Unused equipment and tools shall be stored at the Contractor's staging area for the Project.

B. As the work involves installation of sewers, drains, manholes, underground structures, orother disturbance of existing features in or across streets, rights-of-way, easements, orprivate property, the Contractor shall (as the work progresses) promptly backfill, compact,grade, and otherwise restore the disturbed area to the basic condition which will permitresumption of pedestrian or vehicular traffic and any other critical activity or functionsconsistent with the original use of the land. The requirements for temporary paving of streets,walks, and driveways are specified elsewhere. Unsightly mounds of earth, large stones,boulders, and debris shall be removed so that the site presents a neat appearance.

C. The Contractor shall perform the cleanup work on a regular basis and as frequently asordered by the Engineer. Basic site restoration in a particular area shall be accomplishedimmediately following the installation or completion of the required facilities in that area.Furthermore, such work shall also be accomplished, when ordered by the Engineer, if partiallycompleted facilities must remain incomplete for some time period due to unforeseencircumstances.

D. Upon failure of the Contractor to perform periodic cleanup and basic restoration of the site tothe Engineer's satisfaction, the Owner may, upon five (5) days prior written notice to theContractor, without prejudice to any other rights or remedies of the Owner, cause such workfor which the Contractor is responsible to be accomplished to the extent deemed necessaryby the Engineer, and all costs resulting therefrom shall be charged to the Contractor anddeducted from the amounts of money that may be due him.

1.17 USE OF FACILITIES BEFORE COMPLETION

A. The Owner reserves the right to enter the site and use any portion of the constructed facilitiesbefore final completion of the whole work to be done under this Contract. However, onlythose portions of the facilities which have been completed to the Engineer's satisfaction, asevidenced by his issuing a Certificate of Substantial Completion covering that part of the work,shall be placed in service.

B. It shall be the Owner's responsibility to prevent premature connections to or use of any portionof the installed facilities by private or public parties, persons or groups of persons, before the


Engineer issues his Certificate of Substantial Completion covering that portion of the work tobe placed in service.

C. Consistent with the approved progress schedule, the Contractor shall cooperate with theOwner, his agents, and the Engineer to accelerate completion of those facilities, or portionsthereof, which have been designated for early use by the Owner.

1.18 CONSTRUCTION VIDEO

A. The Contractor shall video the entire project site including all concrete and asphaltpavements, curb and gutter, fencing to remain, structures to be demolished, and existingstructures that are to remain or be modified. The original video image shall be turned over tothe Engineer prior to beginning construction activities. The video shall be provided as anAudio Video Interleave File (.avi) and shall be provided on DVD+R/DVD-ROM compatiblemedia only. The video shall clearly identify existing site and structural conditions prior toconstruction.

PART 2 – PRODUCT

(NOT USED)

PART 3 – EXECUTION

(NOT USED)

END OF SECTION

GENERAL PROVISIONS 011400-1 TOWN BRANCH WWTP THICKENING

SECTION 011400 - GENERAL PROVISIONS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 DESIGNATION OF PARTIES

A. All references in the Specifications, Contract Documents and Drawings to "Owner" shallmean Lexington Fayette Urban County Government; all references to "Engineer" shall meanGRW Engineers, Inc., 801 Corporate Drive, Lexington, Kentucky 40503.

1.02 EXPERIENCE CLAUSE

A. Wherever experience is required of equipment manufacturers in manufacturing or in recordsof satisfactory operation for a specified period of time, in lieu of the experience, themanufacturer may furnish a 100 percent (100%) performance guarantee bond or a cashdeposit. The bond or cash deposit provided by the manufacturer shall guarantee replacementof the equipment process in the event of failure or unsatisfactory service. The period of timefor which the bond or cash deposit is required shall be the same as the experience period oftime specified.

1.03 ACCESS TO INSPECTION OF WORK

A. Representatives of the State Department of Health, the State Department for NaturalResources and Environmental Protection, local public health agencies, Owner, and Engineershall at all times have full access to the project site for inspection of the work accomplishedunder this Contract and for inspection of all materials intended for use under the Contract.The Contractor shall provide proper facilities for such access and inspection.

1.04 EQUIPMENT LUBRICATION

A. The Contractor shall make suitable provision for the proper lubrication of all equipmentfurnished under this Contract. Accessible grease fittings shall be provided where required. Asupply of oil, grease and other lubricants of proper quality, as recommended by themanufacturer of the equipment, shall be furnished. Lubricants shall be furnished in theiroriginal, unopened containers, in sufficient quantity for initial fillings and for at least one (1)year of operation.

1.05 PRE-CONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE

A. The Contractor, Engineer and Owner, or their duly appointed representative, shall meet in apreconstruction conference prior to the initiation of construction to organize, schedule anddetermine responsibilities for the work as it pertains to each party of the Contract.

1.06 CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE CHART

A. Prior to start of any construction, the Contractor shall furnish a construction schedule orprogress chart. The schedule or chart shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer, and beof sufficient detail to show the chronological relationship of all activities of the project, theorder in which the Contractor proposes to carry on the work, estimated starting andcompletion dates of major features, procurement of materials, and scheduling of equipment.


The schedule shall be in a form suitable for appropriately indicating the percentage of workscheduled for completion at any time. The schedule shall be kept current and shall reflectcompletion of all work under the Contract within the specified time and in accordance withthese Specifications.

1.07 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS MEETINGS

A. Monthly construction progress meetings shall be held at the project site or at a designatedlocation established by the Owner. The Contractor, appropriate Sub-Contractors, theEngineer and the Owner shall meet to review construction progress, equipment or materialsubmittals, construction schedules, etc.

1.08 PRECONSTRUCTION PHOTOGRAPHS

A. Prior to construction and mobilization of equipment, Contractor shall take record photographsof all areas of the project site.

B. In lieu of photographs, a videographic record may be made of the project site.

1.09 SPARE PARTS

A. Spare parts for routine maintenance and minor repairs shall be provided for specifiedequipment items in the respective technical sections of these Specifications. Required spareparts to be provided are listed in the particular equipment Specifications.

B. Parts shall be coated to protect them from a moist atmosphere. All spare parts shall beplainly tagged, marked for identification and reordering, and shall be delivered properlyboxed. Required identification includes (but is not limited to):

1. Name of the manufacturer or supplier of equipment.

2. Name of the unit for which the part is intended.

3. Name of the spare part.

4. Name of the supplier of the spare part.

5. Manufacturer's catalogue part number.

6. Precautionary information.

7. Any other identifying information deemed appropriate.

C. All spare parts for a single equipment item shall be crated together in containers suitable forhandling with hoisting equipment and designed for prolonged storage and stenciled to identifycontents.

D. Where oil or grease lubricated equipment is concerned, sufficient oil or grease of typesrecommended by the equipment manufacturer shall be supplied for one year's operation.

E. The Contractor shall furnish and deliver the spare parts to the Owner at such time as he(Owner) may direct but prior to Contract expiration date. Furnish to the Engineer for recordpurposes a list of spare parts delivered to the Owner.


1.10 CLEANING

A. The Contractor shall at all times keep the construction site and the surrounding areapresentable to the public, and clean of rubbish caused by the Contractor's operation. Atcompletion of the work, the Contractor shall remove all the rubbish, all tools, equipment,temporary work and surplus materials, from and about the premises, and shall leave the siteclean and ready for use.

B. After completion of all work and before final acceptance of the work, the Contractor shallthoroughly clean all equipment and materials and shall remove all foreign matter such asgrease, dirt, plaster, labels, stickers, etc., from the exterior of the piping, equipment and allassociated fabrication.

C. All waste and excess materials shall be disposed of off the project site and at no additionalexpense to the Owner. In no case shall waste materials (any removed concrete, piping,equipment, etc.) be buried on the site. Burning is not permitted.

D. Upon completion of the project, the Contractor is responsible for leaving the project site in asgood as or better condition than the original. This includes site grading, landscaping,replacement of sidewalks, driveways, curbs, mailboxes, clotheslines, fences, etc. andremoval of all construction debris.

1.11 TAXES

A. Proposals shall be made to include any applicable taxes on payrolls, materials, equipment,vehicles, utilities, etc., including State sales taxes and shall include compensation for suchtaxes on all work under this Contract.

1.12 LINES AND GRADES

A. The Engineer will set a benchmark or marks near the site and furnish the Contractor with theelevation of same. The Engineer will assist the Contractor in laying out the axes of thestructures. The Contractor shall be responsible for all other lines and grades required for theconstruction of structures. The Contractor shall set line and grade stakes for all gravitysewers, offset from the centerline of the trench or the axes of the pipelines.

B. The Contractor shall use a laser beam instrument to set the grades on gravity sewer lines. Inusing such an instrument, the Contractor shall be responsible for maintaining grades andelevations as called for on the drawing profiles, and any variances found shall be correctedby the Contractor at his expense. The Contractor shall verify invert elevation at eachmanhole for a check. A blower shall be used with the laser beam instrument during warm orhot weather to assure accurate line and grade for the laser beam.

C. When water lines, process piping and other such buried pressure pipelines are involved, theEngineer will assist the Contractor in the location of these lines; however, any detailed layoutrequiring surveying, or excavation including that required for establishing the grade of thepipeline, shall be accomplished by the Contractor.

D. The Contractor shall furnish all materials, stakes and grade boards that are required forlayout by the Contractor's forces. In addition, the Contractor shall furnish any necessarysurvey personnel to mark the location of the various facilities on the ground, establishingbench levels and determining as-built conditions after work is completed. The Contractor'spersonnel engaged in the layout work described herein and the aides furnished to theEngineer shall be fully capable of performing the duties set out herein and shall be fully


qualified as required. Contractor shall be responsible for verifying all profiles and elevationsprior to construction.

1.13 BLASTING

A. All blasting operations shall be conducted in strict accordance with the Rules and Regulationsof the State Department of Mine and Minerals, Division of Explosives and Blasting, whichshall be deemed to be included in these Specifications the same as though herein written infull. The Contractor shall also comply with applicable municipal ordinances, Federal SafetyRegulations and Section 9 of the Manual of Accident Prevention in Construction, publishedby the Associated General Contractor's of America, Inc. All explosives shall be stored inconformity with said ordinances, laws and safety regulations. No blasting shall be done withinfive feet of any water mains, or ten feet of any gas mains except with light charges ofexplosives. Any damage done by blasting is the responsibility of the Contractor and shall bepromptly and satisfactorily repaired by him. All blast events shall be designed in accordancewith state laws. These guidelines are established to limit peak particle velocities occurring asa result of blasting to protect structures from damage due to ground motions from blastevents. The peak particle velocity is the maximum velocity of particle excitation measuredalong any of the three orthogonal axes (longitudinal, vertical or transverse). In addition thefollowing guidelines shall be applicable to new concrete.

Maximum PermissibleAge of Concrete, Days* Particle Velocity, IPS**

0 to 1 0.252 0.50

3-or more 1.00

* Concrete is defined as properly designed and placed, well-consolidatedPortland Cement concrete achieving a normal increase in strength with age.

** Measured at location of concrete, by probe fixed in or on soil surface.

As an option, a scaled distance (distance from blast to concrete/-square root of chargeweight) of 130 or more can be used conservatively to design blast events.

B. Unless otherwise required by ordinance or law, each excavation crew shall be provided withtwo metal boxes equipped with suitable locks. One of these boxes shall be for storingexplosives and one for caps. The boxes shall always be locked except when in actual use.They shall be painted a bright color and stenciled with appropriate warning signs. At night,explosives and caps shall be stored in separate magazines.

C. If any possibility exists of rock or any other debris leaving the site during a blast event, theshot shall be covered with rope, heavy timber or rubber mats, to prevent the aforementioned.

D. The Contractor shall keep a blasting log and, for each blast, shall record the date, time ofblast, number of holes, type of explosive, number of delays, amount of charge per delay;stemming type, and number of caps; and all other items as required by State laws andregulations.

E. All blasting shall be supervised and performed by qualified personnel and shall be monitoredto ensure compliance with the particle velocity requirements. The Contractor shall submit amonitoring plan to the Engineer prior to beginning blasting activities.

F. A pre-blast survey shall be performed by the Contractor. The pre-blast survey shall beaccurate and up to date at the time of the blast event. The survey shall be a compilation ofthe condition, type, and general appearance of all nearby structures. It shall also include a


listing of any vibration-sensitive equipment or conditions which exist at adjacent facilities. Theowners and occupants of these facilities shall be notified of the intent to blast and the blastingschedule. The survey shall be conducted by a competent engineering firm or other qualifiedfirm and sufficiently documented by photographs, video, measurements, and diagrams. Thesurvey shall include all structures within 200' of the project or any such structure theContractor feels may be reasonably affected by ground and/or air vibrations from blasting.Pre-blast survey results shall be submitted to the Owner upon request.

G. Shot rock which is excavated shall be disposed of offsite by the Contractor. No rock largerthan one-half cubic foot will be permitted in the backfill.

1.14 COMPLIANCE WITH SAFETY REGULATIONS

A. The equipment items furnished shall comply with all governing federal and state lawsregarding safety, including all current requirements of the Occupational Safety and Health Act(OSHA). Contractor shall be solely responsible for job safety in accordance with all laws,regulations, methods, etc. of OSHA and the state.

1.15 MAINTENANCE AND OPERATIONS MANUAL

A. Every piece of equipment furnished and installed shall be provided with completemaintenance and operations manuals. These shall be detailed in instructions to the Owner'spersonnel. They shall be attractively bound for the Owner's records. See 01 33 23 andSection 01 78 23 for requirements. The manuals shall be submitted to the Engineer forreview as to adequacy and completeness. Provide four copies each, unless otherwise noted.

1.16 OBSTRUCTIONS

A. In cases where storm sewers, sanitary sewers, gas lines, water lines, telephone lines, electriclines or other underground structures are encountered, they shall not be displaced ormolested unless necessary, in which case they shall be replaced in as good a condition asfound and as quickly as possible.

B. The Contractor is responsible for notifying the appropriate utility companies, and coordinatingthe protection of the utility. All such lines or underground structures damaged or molested inthe construction shall be replaced at the Contractor's expense, unless in the opinion of theEngineer, such damage was caused through no fault of the Contractor.

1.17 STORAGE FACILITIES

A. The Contractor shall be responsible for proper and adequate storage of all materials andequipment used on the site. Any additional off-site space required for construction purposesshall be the Contractor’s responsibility to obtain.

B. Upon completion of the work, the Contractor shall remove all storage facilities, surplusmaterials and equipment and restore the site to its original condition, or to the finishedcondition as required by the Contract.

1.18 STANDARDS OF WORKMANSHIP

A. Work of all crafts and trades shall be laid out to lines and elevations as established by theContractor from the Drawings or from instructions by the Engineer. Unless otherwise shown,


all work shall be plumb and level, in straight lines and true planes, parallel or square to theestablished lines and levels. The work shall be accurately measured and fitted to tolerance asestablished by the best practices of the crafts and trades involved, and shall be as required tofit all parts of the work carefully and neatly together.

1.19 PERFORMANCE AND PAYMENT BONDS

A. Performance and payment bonds, as specified in of the General Conditions, shall run for aperiod of one (1) year after final acceptance of the work by the Owner. These bonds shall beexecuted on the forms provided as a part of the Contract Documents.

1.20 INITIAL START-UP AND OPERATION

A. The initial operation period provided for herein is to check and provide the satisfactorymechanical operation of the facilities. These requirements for start-up and operation in noway relieve the Contractor of his responsibility with respect to guaranty of work as specified inthe "General Conditions." The manufacturer's representatives shall be present during thisperiod to instruct the operators in the care, operation and maintenance of the equipment.When the shakedown period is completed, the Owner will assume responsibility formaintenance and operation, provided that all major items of the Work are operatingsatisfactorily.

B. If any or all of the facilities are not operating satisfactorily at the end of the shakedown period,the Contractor shall continue to maintain those facilities that are incomplete or not operatingsatisfactorily until they are complete and acceptable to the Owner. Maintenance by theContractor shall include all mechanical facilities such as pumps and like equipment. Prior tostart-up, the Contractor will be required to prepare an operating schedule detailing theproposed start-up and his plans for manpower and auxiliary facilities to be provided.

1.21 GUARANTY

A. Except as otherwise specified herein, the Contractor shall guarantee all work from latentdefects in materials, equipment and workmanship for one (1) year from the date ofsubstantial completion of the Contract as defined in Section 01 77 00 of the technicalSpecifications.

B. The Contractor agrees that he will obtain from the manufacturers of equipment and materialsfurnished under this Contract, guarantees against defective materials and workmanship, andif those guarantees furnished by the manufacturer do not extend for the term of one (1) yearfrom and after the date upon which the final estimate is formally approved by the Owner orother established date as set forth hereinbefore, he shall make the necessary arrangementsand assume all cost for extending this guarantee for the required period.

C. The Contractor shall promptly make such repairs or replacement as may be required underthe above specified guarantee, and, when the repairs or replacements involve one or moreitems of installed equipment, shall provide the services of qualified factory-trained servicemenin the employ of the equipment manufacturers to perform or supervise the repairs orreplacements.

D. When the Engineer or the Owner deems it necessary, and so orders, such replacements orrepairs under this section shall be undertaken by the Contractor within twenty-four (24) hoursafter service of notice. If the Contractor unnecessarily delays or fails to make the orderedreplacements or repairs within the time specified, or if any replacements or repairs are ofsuch nature as not to admit of the delay incident to the service of a notice, then the Owner


shall have the right to make such replacements or repairs, and the expense thereof shall bepaid by the Contractor or deducted from any moneys due the Contractor.

E. The Performance Bond shall remain in full force and effect throughout the Guaranty period.

F. All warranties and guarantees remaining in effect at and beyond the Guaranty expiration dateshall be relinquished and transferred to the Owner. Copies of such warranty/guaranty shall besubmitted to the Engineer prior to date of the start of the guaranty period.

1.22 TRAFFIC CONTROL AND MAINTENANCE

A. Traffic shall be maintained on all highways and streets at all times during construction of pipelines across or along side said highways and streets. Access to all existing subdivisions andprivate residences shall also be kept open. Work shall be performed in accordance withapplicable City, County, and state Department of Transportation guidelines. Traffic controlshall include proper signing and flagging per these guidelines.

B. Traffic shall be maintained in accordance with the Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices.Work shall include all labor and materials necessary for construction and maintenance oftraffic control devices and markings.

C. Traffic control shall also include all flag persons and traffic control devices such as, but notlimited to, flashers, signs, barricades and vertical panels, plastic drums (steel drums will notbe permitted) and cones necessary for the control and protection of vehicular and pedestriantraffic as specified by the Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices.

D. Any temporary traffic control items, devices, materials, and incidentals shall remain theproperty of the Contractor when no longer needed.

E. The Contractor shall maintain a two-lane traveled way with a minimum lane width of 10 feet;however, during working hours, one-way traffic may be allowed at the discretion of theEngineer, provided adequate signing and flagpersons are at the location.

F. The Contractor shall fully cover with plywood any signs, either existing, permanent ortemporary, which do not properly apply to the current traffic phasing, and shall maintain thecovering until the signs are applicable or are removed.

G. In general, all traffic control devices shall be placed starting and proceeding in the direction ofthe flow of traffic and removed starting and proceeding in the direction opposite to the flow oftraffic.

H. The Engineer and Contractor shall review the signing before traffic is allowed to use laneclosures, crossovers, or detours, and all signing shall be approved by the Engineer beforework can be started by the Contractor.

I. If traffic should be stopped due to construction operations and an emergency vehicle on anofficial emergency run arrives on the scene, the Contractor shall make provisions for thepassage of that vehicle immediately.

1.23 FLOOD INSURANCE

A. Contractor is required to carry flood insurance for projects which are located in designatedflood hazard areas unless Federal Flood Insurance is not available.


1.24 UTILITY LINE ACTIVITIES COVERED UNDER NATIONWIDE PERMIT # 12

A. All activities involving utility line construction covered under the US Army Corps of EngineersNATIONWIDE PERMIT # 12 shall meet the following conditions:

1. Utility Line Activities. Activities required for the construction, maintenance, repair, andremoval of utility lines and associated facilities in waters of the United States, providedthe activity does not result in the loss of greater than 1⁄2-acre of waters of the UnitedStates for each single and complete project. Utility lines: This NWP authorizes theconstruction, maintenance, or repair of utility lines, including outfall and intake structures,and the associated excavation, backfill, or bedding for the utility lines, in all waters of theUnited States, provided there is no change in pre-construction contours. This NWP alsoauthorizes temporary structures, fills, and work necessary to conduct the utility lineactivity.

2. Appropriate measures must be taken to maintain normal downstream flows and minimizeflooding to the maximum extent practicable, when temporary structures, work, anddischarges, including cofferdams, are necessary for construction activities, access fills, ordewatering of construction sites. Temporary fills must consist of materials, and be placedin a manner, that will not be eroded by expected high flows. Temporary fills must beremoved in their entirety and the affected areas returned to pre-construction elevations.The areas affected by temporary fills must be revegetated, as appropriate.

3. Notification: The permittee must submit a pre-construction notification to the US ArmyCorps district engineer prior to commencing the activity if any of the following criteria aremet: (1) The activity involves mechanized land clearing in a forested wetland for the utilityline right-of-way; (2) a section 10 permit is required; (3) the utility line in waters of theUnited States, excluding overhead lines, exceeds 500 feet; (4) the utility line is placedwithin a jurisdictional area (i.e., water of the United States), and it runs parallel to or alonga stream bed that is within that jurisdictional area; (5) discharges that result in the loss ofgreater than 1⁄10-acre of waters of the United States; (6) permanent access roads areconstructed above grade in waters of the United States for a distance of more than 500feet; or (7) permanent access roads are constructed in waters of the United States withimpervious materials.

B. All activities involving utility line construction covered under KENTUCKY GENERALCERTIFICATION of Nationwide Permit # 12 shall meet the following conditions:

The general Water Quality Certification applies to surface waters of the Commonwealth asdefined in 401KAR10:001 Chapter 10, Section 1(80): Surface waters means those watershaving well-defined banks and beds, either constantly or intermittently flowing, lakes andimpounded waters; marshes and wetlands; and any subterranean waters flowing in well-defined channels and having a demonstrable hydrologic connection with the surface.

1. The activity will not occur within surface waters of the Commonwealth identified by theKentucky Division of Water as Outstanding State or National Resource Water, ColdWater Aquatic Habitat, or Exceptional Waters.

2. The activity will not occur within surface waters of the Commonwealth identified asperpetually-protected (e.g. deed restriction, conservation easement) mitigation sites.

3. This general water quality certification does not authorize the installation of utility lines ina linear manner within the stream channel or below the top of the stream bank.

4. For a single crossing, impacts from the construction and maintenance corridor in surfacewaters shall not exceed 50 feet of bank disturbance.


5. This general certification shall not apply to nationwide permits issued for individualcrossings which are part of a larger utility line project where the total cumulative impactsfrom a single and complete linear project exceed ½ acre of wetlands or 300 linear feet ofsurface waters. Cumulative impacts include utility line crossings, permanent or temporaryaccess roads, headwalls, associated bank stabilization areas, substations, pole or towerfoundations, maintenance corridor, and staging areas.

6. Stream impacts under Conditions 4 and 5 of this certification are defined as the length ofbank disturbed. For the utility line crossing and roads, only one bank length is used incalculation of the totals.

7. Stream impacts covered under this General Water Quality Certification and undertakenby those persons defined as an agricultural operation under the Agricultural WaterQuality Act must be completed in compliance with the Kentucky Agricultural WaterQuality Plan (KWQP).

8. The Kentucky Division of Water may require submission of a formal application for anindividual certification for any project if the project has been determined to likely have asignificant adverse effect upon water quality or degrade the waters of the Commonwealthso that existing uses of the water body or downstream waters are precluded.

9. Activities that do not meet the conditions of this General Water Quality Certificationrequire an Individual Section 401 Water Quality Certification.

10. Blasting of stream channels, even under dry conditions, is not allowed under this generalwater quality certification.

11. Utility lines placed parallel to the stream shall be located at least 50 feet from anintermittent or perennial stream, measured from the top of the stream bank. The cabinetmay allow construction within the 50 foot buffer if avoidance and minimization efforts areshown and adequate methods are utilized to prevent soil from entering the stream.

12. Utility line stream crossings shall be constructed by methods that maintain flow and allowfor a dry excavation. Water pumped from the excavation shall be contained and allowedto settle prior to re-entering the stream. Excavation equipment and vehicles shall operateoutside of the flowing portion of the stream. Spoil material from the excavation shall notbe allowed to enter the flowing portion of the stream.

13. The activities shall not result in any permanent changes in pre-construction elevationcontours in surface waters or wetlands or stream dimension, pattern or profile.

14. Utility line activities which impact wetlands shall not result in conversion of the area tonon-wetland status. Mechanized land clearing of forested wetlands for the installation ormaintenance of utility lines is not authorized under this certification.

15. Activities qualifying for coverage under this General Water Quality Certification aresubject to the following conditions:

a. Erosion and sedimentation pollution control plans and Best Management Practicesmust be designed, installed, and maintained in effective operating condition at alltimes during construction activities so that violations of state water quality standardsdo not occur.

b. Sediment and erosion control measures, such as check-dams constructed of anymaterial, silt fencing, hay bales, etc., shall not be placed within surface waters of theCommonwealth, either temporarily or permanently, without prior approval by theKentucky Division of Water’s Water Quality Certification Section. If placement of


sediment and erosion control measures in surface waters is unavoidable, design andplacement of temporary erosion control measures shall not be conducted in such amanner that may result in instability of streams that are adjacent to, upstream, ordownstream of the structures. All sediment and erosion control devices shall beremoved and the natural grade restored within the completion timeline of theactivities.

c. Measures shall be taken to prevent or control spills of fuels, lubricants, or other toxicmaterials used in construction from entering the watercourse.

d. Removal of riparian vegetation shall be limited to that necessary for equipmentaccess.

e. To the maximum extent practicable, all in-stream work under this certification shall beperformed under low-flow conditions.

f. Heavy equipment, e.g. bulldozers, backhoes, draglines, etc., if required for thisproject, should not be used or operated within the stream channel. In those instancesin which such in-stream work is unavoidable, then it shall be performed in such amanner and duration as to minimize turbidity and disturbance to substrates and bankor riparian vegetation.

g. Any fill shall be of such composition that it will not adversely affect the biological,chemical, or physical properties of the receiving waters and/or cause violations ofwater quality standards. If rip-rap is utilized, it should be of such weight and size thatbank stress or slump conditions will not be created because of its placement.

h. If there are water supply intakes located downstream that may be affected byincreased turbidity and suspended solids, the permittee shall notify the operatorwhen such work will be done.

i. Should evidence of stream pollution or jurisdictional wetland impairment and/orviolations of water quality standards occur as a result of this activity (either from aspill or other forms of water pollution), the Kentucky Division of Water shall be notifiedimmediately by calling (800) 928-2380.

16. Non-compliance with the conditions of this general certification or violation of Kentuckystate water quality standards may result in civil penalties.

1.25 PROTECTION OF VEGETATION

A. Reasonable care shall be taken during construction to avoid damage to vegetation.Ornamental shrubbery and tree branches shall be temporarily tied back, where appropriate,to minimize damage. Trees which receive damage to branches shall be trimmed of thosebranches to improve the appearance of the tree. Tree trunks receiving damage fromequipment shall be treated with a tree dressing.

1.26 PIPE AND MANHOLE REPLACEMENT

A. Where indicated in the Contract Documents, pipe and manholes to be replaced shall beremoved from the site and disposed of by the Contractor. Material shall not be placed back inthe trench or buried on the site.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)

PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Applicable)

END OF SECTION

SPECIAL PROVISIONS 011410-1 TOWN BRANCH WWTP THICKENING

SECTION 011410 - SPECIAL PROVISIONS

PART 1 - GENERAL

A. Engineer to address any and all requirements for sequence of work, keeping units in operation,bypass pumping, temporary power or equipment, etc.

1.01 START-UP AND OWNER TRAINING

A. After each piece of equipment is successfully started-up, the Contractor shall “Video Tape” theOwner’s training administered by the particular piece of equipment’s factory Representative. Thetape shall be give to the Owner for future reference.



END OF SECTION

ALLOWANCES 012100-1 TOWN BRANCH WWTP THICKENING

SECTION 012100 - ALLOWANCES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE OF WORK

A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements governing allowances.Certain items are specified in the Contract Documents by allowances. Allowances have beenestablished in lieu of additional requirements and to defer selection of actual materials andequipment to a later date when additional information is available for evaluation. If necessary,additional requirements will be issued by Change Order.

B. Types of allowances include the following:

1. Defined, allowances. Defined allowances include equipment, systems, or services thathave been selected by the Owner from a designated supplier. These will be handled inaccordance with paragraph 1.06 of this specification.

2. Undefined allowances. Undefined allowances are intended for work which has anunknown scope at the time of bidding. These will be handled in accordance withparagraph 1.07 of this specification.

C. The following defined cash allowances shall be included in the Contractor’s bid:

1. SCADA System Programming and Integration Services - $80,000

1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and SupplementaryConditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section

1.03 SELECTION AND PURCHASE

A. At the earliest practical date after award of the Contract, advise Engineer of the date when finalselection and purchase of each product or system described by an allowance must becompleted to avoid delaying the Work.

B. At Engineer’s request, obtain proposals for each allowance for use in making final selectionsand include recommendations that are relevant to performing the Work.

C. Purchase products and systems selected by the Engineer from the designated supplier.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit proposals for purchase of products or systems included in allowances, in the formspecified for Change Orders.

B. Submit invoices or delivery slips to show actual quantities of materials delivered to the site foruse in fulfillment of each allowance.

C. Coordinate and process submittals for allowance items in same manner as for other portions ofthe Work.

1.05 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate allowance items with other portions of the Work. Furnish templates as required tocoordinate installation.


1.06 MISCELLANEOUS CONTINGENCY ALLOWANCES

A. Contingency allowances shall include miscellaneous work for which the scope is not yetdetermined. The allowance amount is not guaranteed and is solely for the purpose ofdetermining an initial Contract Price. Miscellaneous contingency allowances are the same asContingency Allowances as defined in Article 11.02 of the General Conditions.

B. Once the scope of work is defined, the Contractor shall present a cost proposal and scheduleas listed in 1.04.A above.

1.07 DEFINED CASH ALLOWANCES

A. Defined cash allowances shall include cost to Contractor of specific products and materialsordered by the Contractor under the defined allowance and shall include taxes, freight, anddelivery to the project site. Defined allowances are the same as Cash Allowances as definedin Article 11.02 of the General Conditions.

B. Contractor's costs at the Project site for labor, installation, overhead and profit, and similarcosts related to the equipment ordered under the defined allowance shall be included as partof the Contract Lump Sum Base Bid and not part of the allowance.

C. Contractor shall not be allowed any markup of subcontractors work or materials under theallowances. Markup shall be included as part of the Contract Lump Sum Base Bid and notpart of the defined allowance.

1.08 UNUSED MATERIALS

A. Contractor shall be responsible for returning unused materials purchased under an allowance tothe manufacturer or supplier for credit to Owner, after installation has been completed andaccepted.

B. When it is not economically practical to return material for credit, Contractor shall be responsiblefor preparing and delivering unused material to Owner’s designated storage location.Otherwise, disposal of unused material shall be Contractor’s responsibility.

C. Any amount of the allowance not used will be removed from total contract price during the finaladjusting change order.

1.09 DESCRIPTION OF ALLOWANCES

A. SCADA System Programming and Integration

1. The Contractor shall include a $150,000 allowance and subcontract with the SystemIntegrator (SI) chosen by LFUCG (Control Touch) for all necessary SCADA system PLCand HMI programming and re-programming to add/rework this new process area to theplant SCADA system. The SI shall not be responsible for programming processequipment vendor-furnished PLC hardware, but the SI will be responsible for establishingnetwork communications with process equipment vendor-furnished PLC’s and forassuring that vendor PLC equipment will respond to commands and provide thenecessary data to and from the plant SCADA system. This item includes requiredSCADA interface data, logic and tagging.The allowance includes Control Touch chairingand attending project meetings, preparing submittals, reviewing Contractor submittalsrelated to SCADA operation, performing design review and participating in factoryacceptance testing.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Examine products covered by an allowance promptly on delivery for damage or defects. Returndamaged or defective products to manufacturer for replacement.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Coordinate materials and their installation for each allowance with related materials andinstallations to ensure that each allowance item is completely integrated and interfaced withrelated work.

END OF SECTION

BASIS OF MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 012213-1 TOWN BRANCH WWTP THICKENING

SECTION 012213 - BASIS OF MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT - LUMP SUM

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 WORK INCLUDED

The Contractor shall furnish all necessary labor, machinery, tools, apparatus, equipment,materials, equipment, service, other necessary supplies and perform all work includingall excavation and backfilling (without additional compensation, except where specificallyset out in these specifications) at the contract lump sum bid for the work described in theplans and specifications.

1.02 PROGRESS AND PAYMENTS SCHEDULES

A. The Contractor's construction schedule and schedule of values must be submittedand approved by the Engineer before any payments shall be made on this contract.Refer to Section 01320.

B. Within fifteen (15) days after the date of formal execution of the Agreement(Contract), the Contractor shall prepare and submit to the Engineer, for approval, aschedule of values which depicts the Contractor's cost for completing the contractrequirements and show by major unit of the project work, the Contractor's dollarvalue for the material and the labor (two separate amounts) to be used as a basis forthe periodic payments. The Contractor's schedule of values must be approved by theEngineer before any payments shall be made on this contract.

C. The Engineer's decision as to sufficiency and completeness of the Contractor'sconstruction schedule and schedule of values shall be final.

D. The Contractor must make current, to the satisfaction of the Engineer, theconstruction schedule and schedule of values each time it requests a payment onthis contract.

E. The Contractor's construction schedule and schedule of values must be maintainedat the construction site available for inspection and shall be revised to incorporateapproved change orders as they occur.

F. When the Contractor requests a payment on this contract, it must be on theapproved schedule of values and be current. Further, the current schedule of valuesand construction schedule (both updated and revised) shall be submitted for reviewand approval by the Engineer before monthly payments shall be made by the Owner.The Contractor may submit stored materials for pay purposes provided properdocumentation is provided.

G. Refer to Section 00800 14.02.A.6-8 for retainage requirements.

1.03 CLAIMS FOR EXTRA WORK


A. If the Contractor claims that any instructions by Drawings or otherwise involve extracost, it shall give the Engineer written notice of said claim within seven (7) days afterthe receipt of such instructions, and in any event before proceeding to execute thework, stating clearly and in detail the basis of its claim or claims. No such claim shallbe valid unless so made.

B. Claims for additional compensation for extra work, due to alleged errors in spotelevations, contour lines, or bench marks, shall not be recognized unlessaccompanied by certified survey data, made prior to the time the original ground wasdisturbed, clearly showing that errors exist which resulted, or would result, inhandling more material, or performing more work than would reasonably beestimated from the Drawings and topographical maps issued.

C. Any discrepancies which may be discovered between actual conditions and thoserepresented by the topographical maps and Drawings shall at once be reported tothe Engineer, and work shall not proceed, except at the Contractor's risk, until writteninstructions have been received by the Contractor from the Engineer.

D. If, on the basis of the available evidence, the Engineer determines that anadjustment of the Contract Price or time is justifiable, the procedure shall then be asprovided herein for "Changes in the Work".

E. By execution of this Contract, the Contractor warrants that it has visited the site ofthe proposed work and fully acquainted itself with the conditions there existingrelating to construction and labor, and that it fully understands the facilities,difficulties, and restrictions attending the execution of the work under this Contract.The Contractor further warrants that it has thoroughly examined and is familiar withthe Drawings, Specifications and all other documents comprising the Contract. TheContractor further warrants that by execution of this Contract its failure when it wasbidding on this Contract to receive or examine any form, instrument or document, orto visit the site and acquaint itself with conditions there existing, in no way relievesthe Contractor from any obligation under the Contract, and the Contractor agreesthat the Owner shall be justified in rejecting any claim based on facts regardingwhich it should have been on notice as a result thereof.

1.04 DETERMINATION OF THE VALUE OF EXTRA (ADDITIONAL) OR OMITTED WORK

A. The value of extra (additional) or omitted work shall be determined in one or more ofthe following ways:

1. On the basis of the actual cost of all the items of labor (including on-the-job supervision),materials, and use of equipment, plus a maximum 15 percent for added work or aminimum 15 percent for deleted work which shall cover the Contractor's generalsupervision, overhead and profit.

a. Labor may include on-site supervision, on-site project management, in addition tofield personal associated with the work.

b. In case of subcontracts, the 15 percent (maximum for added work and minimumfor deleted work) is interpreted to mean the subcontractor's supervision,overhead and profit, and an additional 5 percent (maximum for added work and


minimum for deleted work) may then be added to such costs to cover theGeneral Contractor's supervision, overhead and profit.

c. The cost of labor shall include required insurance, taxes and fringe benefits.

d. Equipment costs shall be based on current rental rates in Lexington, KY.

2. By estimate and acceptance in a lump sum.

3. By unit prices named in the Contract or subsequently agreed upon.

B. Provided, however, that the cost or estimated cost of all extra (additional) work shallbe determined in advance of authorization by the Engineer and approved by theOwner.

C. All extra (additional) work shall be executed under the conditions of the originalContract. Any claim for extension of time shall be adjusted according to theproportionate increase or decrease in the final total cost of the work unlessnegotiated on another basis.

D. Except for over-runs in contract unit price items, no extra (additional) work shall bedone except upon a written Change Order from the Engineer, and no claim on thepart of the Contractor for pay for extra (additional) work shall be recognized unlessso ordered in writing by the Engineer.



END OF SECTION

PRODUCTS AND SUBSTITUTIONS 012500-1 TOWN BRANCH WWTP THICKENING

SECTION 012500 - PRODUCTS AND SUBSTITUTIONS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 DESCRIPTION OF REQUIREMENTS

A. General: Substitution of materials and/or equipment is defined in Paragraph 6.7.1 of theGeneral Conditions and more fully hereinafter.

B. Definitions: Definitions used in this paragraph are not intended to negate the meaning ofother terms used in the Contract Documents including such terms as "specialties", "systems","structure", "finishes", "accessories", "furnishings", "special construction" and similar terms.Such terms are self-explanatory and have recognized meanings in the construction industry.

1. "Products" are items purchased for incorporation in the Work, regardless of whether theywere specifically purchased for the project or taken from the Contractor's previouslypurchased stock. The term "product" as used herein includes the terms "material","equipment", "system" and other terms of similar intent.

2. "Named Products" are products identified by use of the manufacturer's name for aproduct, including such items as a make or model designation, as recorded in publishedproduct literature, of the latest issue as of the date of the Contract Documents.

3. "Materials" are products that must be substantially cut, shaped, worked, mixed, finished,refined or otherwise fabricated, processed, or installed to form units of work.

4. "Equipment" is defined as a product with operational parts, regardless of whethermotorized or manually operated, and in particular, a product that requires serviceconnections such as wiring or piping.

C. Substitutions: The Contractor's requests for changes in the products, materials, equipmentand methods of construction required by the Contract Documents are considered requests for"substitutions", and are subject to the requirements specified herein. The following are notconsidered as substitutions:

1. Revisions to the Contract Documents, where requested by the Owner, Engineer areconsidered as "changes" not substitutions.

2. Substitutions requested during the bidding period, which have been accepted prior to theContract Date, are included in the Contract Documents and are not subject to therequirements for substitutions as herein specified.

3. Specified Contractor options on products and construction methods included in theContract Documents are choices available to the Contractor and are not subject to therequirements for substitutions as herein specified.

4. Except as otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, the Contractor's determinationof and compliance with governing regulations and orders as issued by governingauthorities do not constitute "substitutions" and do not constitute a basis for changeorders.

D. Standards: Refer to Division-01 section "Definitions and Standards" for applicability ofindustry standards to the products specified for the project, and for acronyms used in the textof the specification sections.



A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and SupplementaryConditions and other Division-01 Specification sections, apply to Work of this Section.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

The information required to be furnished for evaluation of product substitution will be asfollows:

A. Performance capabilities, and materials and construction details will be evaluated basedupon conformance with the Specifications. Products that do not conform with theSpecification shall not be accepted.

B. Manufacturer's production and service capabilities, and evidence of proven reliability will beacceptable if the following is furnished.

1. Written evidence that the manufacturer has not less than (3) years experience in thedesign and manufacture of the substitute product.

2. Written evidence of at least one application, of a type and size similar to the proposedsubstitute product, in successful operation in a wastewater treatment plant for a period ofat least one year.

3. In lieu of furnishing evidence of a manufacturer's Experience and successful operation ofan application of the product to be substituted, the Contractor has the option of furnishinga cash deposit or bond which will guarantee replacement if the product the furnisheddoes not satisfy the other requirements specified in this section. The amount of eachdeposit or bond will be subject to the approval.

C. Specific reference to characteristics either superior or inferior to specified requirements willbe evaluated based on their net effect on the project. Products with any characteristicsinferior to those specified will not be acceptable unless offset by characteristics that, in theopinion of the Engineer, will cause the overall effect of the product on the project to be atleast equal to that of those specified.

1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Source Limitations: To the fullest extent possible, provide products of the same generic kind,from a single source, for each unit of work.

B. Compatibility of Options: Compatibility of products is a basic requirement of productselection. When the Contractor is given the option of selecting between two or more productsfor use on the project, the product selected must be compatible with other productspreviously selected, even if the products previously selected were also Contractor options.The complete compatibility between the various choices available to the Contractor is notassured by the various requirements of the Contract Documents, but must be provided by theContractor.

C. The detailed estimate of operating and maintenance costs will be evaluated based oncomparison with similar data on the specified products. Proposed substitute products whichhave an operating and maintenance cost that, in the opinion of the Engineer, exceeds that ofthe specified products will not be considered equal and will not be acceptable.

1.05 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

General: Deliver, store, and handle products in accordance with manufacturer'srecommendations, using means and methods that will prevent damage, deterioration and


loss, including theft. Control delivery schedules to minimize long-term storage at the site andto prevent overcrowding of construction spaces. In particular coordinate delivery andinstallation to ensure minimum holding or storage times for items known or recognized to beflammable, hazardous, easily dam aged, or sensitive to deterioration, theft and other sourcesof loss.

A. Deliver products to the site in the manufacturer's sealed container or other packaging system,complete with labels and instructions for handling, storing, unpacking, protecting andinstalling.

B. Store products at the site in a manner that will facilitate inspection and measurement ofquantity or counting of units.

C. Store heavy materials away from the project structure in a manner that will not endanger thesupporting construction.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL PRODUCT COMPLIANCE

A. General: Requirements for individual products are indicated in the Contract Documents;compliance with these requirements is in itself a Contract Requirement. These requirementsmay be specified in any one of several different specifying methods, or in any combination ofthese methods. These methods include the following:

1. Proprietary.

2. Descriptive.

3. Performance.

4. Compliance with Reference Standards.

Compliance with codes, compliance with graphic details, allowances, and similar provisionsof the Contract Documents also have a bearing on the selection process.

B. Procedures for Selecting Products: Contractor's options in selecting products are limited byrequirements of the Contract Documents and governing regulations. They are not controlledby industry traditions or procedures experienced by the Contractor on previous constructionprojects.

2.02 SUBSTITUTIONS

A. Conditions: Contractor's request for substitution will be received and considered whenextensive revisions to the Contract Documents are not required, when the proposed changesare in keeping with the general intent of the Contract Documents, when the request aretimely, fully documented and properly submitted, and when one or more of the followingconditions is satisfied, all as judged by the Engineer; otherwise the requests will be returnedwithout action except to record non-compliance with these requirements.

1. The Engineer will consider a request for substitution where the request is directly relatedto an "or equal" clause or similar language in the Contract Documents.

2. The Engineer will consider a request for substitution where the specified product ormethod cannot be provided within the Contract Time. However, the request will not beconsidered if the product or method cannot be provided as a result of the Contractor'sfailure to pursue the work promptly or to coordinate the various activities properly.


3. The Engineer will consider a request for substitution where the specified product ormethod cannot receive necessary approval by a governing authority, and the requestedsubstitution can be approved.

4. The Engineer will consider a request for a substitution where a substantial advantage isoffered the Owner, in terms of cost, time, energy conservation or other considerations ofmerit, after deducting offsetting responsibilities the Owner may be required to bear.These additional responsibilities may include such considerations as additionalcompensation to the Engineer for redesign and evaluation services, the increased cost ofother work by the Owner or separate contractors, and similar considerations.

5. The Engineer will consider a request for substitution when the specified product ormethod cannot be provided in a manner which is compatible with other materials of thework, and where the Contractor certifies that the substitution will overcome theincompatibility.

6. The Engineer will consider a request for substitution when the specified product ormethod cannot be properly coordinated with other materials in the work, and where theContractor certifies that the proposed substitution can be properly coordinated.

7. The Engineer will consider a request for substitution when the specified product ormethod cannot receive a warranty as required by the Contract Documents and where theContractor certifies that the proposed substitution receive the required warranty.

8. The Contractor shall reimburse the Owner any costs for review by the Engineer ofproposed product substitutions which require major design changes, as determined bythe Owner, to related of adjacent work made necessary by the proposed substitutions.

B. Work-Related Submittals: Contractor's submittal of and the Engineer's acceptance of shopdrawings, product data or samples which relate to work not complying with requirements ofthe Contract Documents, does not constitute an acceptable or valid request for a substitution,nor approval thereof.

2.03 GENERAL PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS

A. General: Provide products that comply with the requirements of the Contract Documents andthat are undamaged and, unless otherwise indicated, unused at the time of installation.Provide products that are complete with all accessories, trim, finish, safety guards and otherdevices and details needed for a complete installation and for the intended use and effect.

1. Standard Products: Where they are available, provide standard products of types thathave been produced and used successfully in similar situations on other projects.

2. Continued Availability: Where, because of the nature of its application, the Owner islikely to need replacement parts or additional amounts of a product at a later date, eitherfor maintenance and repair or replacement, provide standard, domestically producedproducts for which the manufacturer has published assurances that the products and itsparts are likely to be available to the Owner at a later date.

B. Nameplates: Except as otherwise indicated for required labels and operating data, do notpermanently attach or imprint manufacturer's or producer's nameplates or trademarks onexposed surfaces of products which will be exposed to view either in occupied spaces or onthe exterior of the completed project.

1. Labels: Locate required product labels and stamps on a concealed surface or, whererequired for observation after installation, on an accessible surface which, in occupiedspaces, is not conspicuous.


2. Equipment Nameplates: Provide permanent nameplate on each item ofservice-connected or power operated equipment. Locate the nameplate on an easilyaccessible surface which is inconspicuous in occupied spaces. The nameplate shallcontain the following information and other essential operating data.

a. Name of manufacturer

b. Name of product

c. Model number

d. Serial number

e. Capacity

Speed

g. Ratings

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION OF PRODUCTS

A. General: Except as otherwise indicated in individual sections of these Specifications, complywith the manufacturer's instructions and recommendations for installation of the products inthe applications indicated. Anchor each product securely in place, accurately located andaligned with other work. Clean exposed surfaces and protect surfaces as necessary toensure freedom from damage and deterioration at Time of Acceptance.

END OF SECTION

PROJECT COORDINATION 013113-1 TOWN BRANCH WWTP THICKENING

SECTION 013113 - PROJECT COORDINATION

PART 1 - GENERAL


Minimum administrative and supervisory requirements necessary for coordination of work onthe project include but are not necessarily limited to the following:

A. Coordination and meetings.

B. Limitations for use of site.

C. Coordination of crafts, trades and subcontractors.

D. General installation provisions.

E. Cleaning and protection.

F. Conservation and salvage.


A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and SupplementaryConditions and other Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section.

1.03 COORDINATION AND MEETINGS

A. Monthly general project coordination meetings will be held at regularly scheduled timesconvenient for all parties involved. These meetings are in addition to specific meetings heldfor other purposes, such as regular project meetings and special pre-installation meetings.Representation at each meeting by every party currently involved in coordination or planningfor the work of the entire project is requested. Meetings shall be conducted in a mannerwhich will resolve coordination problems. Results of the meeting shall be recorded andcopies distributed to everyone in attendance and to others affected by decisions or actionsresulting from each meeting.

1.04 LIMITATIONS ON USE OF THE SITE

A. Limitations on site usage as well as specific requirements that impact site utilization areindicated on the drawings and by other contract documents. In addition to these limitationsand requirements, allocation of available space shall be administered equitably amongentities needing both access and space so as to produce the best overall efficiency inperformance of the total work of the project. Schedule deliveries so as to minimize spaceand time requirements for storage of materials and equipment on site.

1.05 COORDINATION OF CRAFTS, TRADES AND SUBCONTRACTORS

A. The Contractor shall coordinate the work of all the crafts, trades and subcontractors engagedon the work, and he shall have final responsibility as regards the schedule, workmanship andcompleteness of each and all parts of the work.

B. All crafts, trades and subcontractors shall be made to cooperate with each other and withothers as they may be involved in the installation of work which adjoins, incorporates,precedes or follows the work of another. It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to point outareas of cooperation prior to the execution of subcontractor agreements and the assignment

PROJECT COORDINATION 013113-2 TOWN BRANCH WWTP THICKENING

of the parts of the work. Each craft, trade and subcontractor shall be made responsible tothe Owner, for furnishing embedded items and giving directions, for doing all cutting andfitting and making all provisions for accommodating the work, and for protecting, patching,repairing and cleaning as required to satisfactorily perform the work.

C. The Contractor shall be responsible for all cutting, digging and other action of hissubcontractors and workmen. Where such action impairs the safety or function of anystructure or component of the project, the Contractor shall make such repairs, alterations andadditions as will, in the opinion of the Engineer, bring said structure or component back to itsoriginal design condition at no additional cost to the Owner.

D. Each subcontractor is expected to be familiar with the General Requirements and all sectionsof the detailed Specifications for all other trades and to study all Drawings applicable to hiswork including Architectural and Structural Drawings, to the end that complete coordinationbetween trades will be effected. Consult with the Engineer if conflicts exist on the Drawings.

E. Special attention shall be given to points where ducts or piping must cross other ducts orpiping, where lighting fixtures must be recessed in ceilings and where ducts, piping andconduits must fit into walls and columns. It shall be the responsibility of such subcontractor toleave the necessary room for other trades.

F. No extra compensation will be allowed to cover the cost of removing piping, conduit, ducts,etc., or equipment found encroaching on space required by others.



END OF SECTION

SECQUENCE OF CONSTRUCTION 013213-1 TOWN BRANCH WWTP THICKENING

SECTION 013213 - CONTRACTORS SEQUENCE OF CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 CONTRACTOR’S CONSTRUCTION SEQUENCE, SCHEDULE & PROVISIONS

The Contractor shall be responsible for all planning, coordination and execution of the work. Thesequence of work shall provide assurances that reliable treatment plant operation will bemaintained and such sequences shall be approved by the Owner and the Engineer. No cost orschedule adjustments shall be given for changes to the construction sequence not approved bythe Owner and Engineer.

The Contractor’s proposed construction sequence schedule must allow the Owner to maintain fulloperation of their existing wastewater treatment plant during the construction period of theproposed expansion to the existing facilities. The Contractor shall take all necessary precautionsto minimize if not totally eliminate, the disruption in water treatment operations. When a disruptionin the operations is required, the Contractor shall coordinate in advance (5 days minimum) theinterruption with the Owner and the Engineer. The interruptions shall be held to a minimum bywise and prudent coordination of the Contractor’s work efforts. Some items of new constructionwill have to be completed prior to the removal from service and/or renovation of existing facilities.

The contractor shall be responsible for all damages brought about by the disruption of theoperation if such disruptions are a direct cause of Contractor negligence and/or a failure of theContractor to coordinate his work effort to minimize and/or eliminate disruptions in service.

Some general constraints to the Contractor’s construction sequence are noted as follows:

A. Total and/or partial plant shut-downs shall be scheduled for nights or weekends and at no timeshall the water treatment plant be out of service for longer than eight (8) hours.

B. Once any work operation begins that necessitates a complete shut-down of the treatment plantoperation, that work shall proceed on a 24-hour per day, 7 day per week schedule until the plantis returned to service without any additional cost to the Owner.

C. Contractor shall provide all temporary piping and pumping which may be required for constructionof the treatment plant.

D. Only one Gravity Thickener and associated equipment shall be taken down at a time. The othermust remain fully operational.

E. Only three (3) Primary Sludge Pumps may be taken out of operation a time. The remaining nine(9) pumps must remain fully operational.


PART 3 - PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Applicable)

END OF SECTION

PROGRESS SCHEDULE 013216-1 TOWN BRANCH WWTP THICKENING

SECTION 013216 - PROGRESS SCHEDULES

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Scheduling Responsibilities:

1. In order to provide a definitive basis for determining job progress, a construction scheduleof a type approved by the Owner will be used to monitor the project.

2. The Contractor shall be responsible for preparing the schedule and updating on amonthly basis. It shall at all times remain the Contractor’s responsibility to schedule anddirect his forces in a manner that will allow for the completion of the work within thecontractual period.

B. Construction Hours:

1. No work shall be done between 6:00 p.m. and 7:00 a.m. nor on Saturdays, Sundays orlegal holidays without the prior written permission of the Owner. However, emergencywork may be done without prior written permission.

2. If the Contractor, for his convenience and at his own expense, should desire to carry onhis work at night or outside the regular hours, he shall submit a written request to theEngineer and shall allow nine (9) days for satisfactory arrangements to be made forinspecting the work in progress. If permission is granted, the Contractor shall light thedifferent parts of the project as required to comply with all applicable federal, state, andlocal regulations. The Contractor shall also revise his schedule as appropriate at the nextmonthly schedule update meeting to reflect the changes in working hours.

C. Progress of the Work:

1. The work shall be started within ten (10) days following the Notice to Proceed and shallbe executed with such progress as may be required to prevent delay to other Contractorsor to the general completion of the project. The work shall be executed at such times andin or on such parts of the project, and with such forces, material and equipment, toassure completion of the work in the time established by the Contract.

2. The Contractor agrees that whenever it becomes apparent from the current monthlyschedule update that delays have resulted and, hence, that the Contract completion datewill not be met or when so directed by the Owner, he will take some or all of the followingactions at no additional cost to the Owner:

a. Increase construction manpower in such quantities and crafts as will substantiallyeliminate the backlog of work.

b. Increase the number of working hours per shift, shifts per working day or days perweek, the amount of construction equipment, or any combination of the foregoing tosubstantially eliminate the backlog of work.

c. Reschedule activities to achieve maximum practical concurrency of accomplishmentof activities, and comply with the revised schedule.

d. The Contractor shall submit to the Owner or the Owner’s representative for review awritten statement of the steps he intends to take to remove or arrest the delay to thecritical path in the accepted schedule. If the Contractor should fail to submit a


written statement of the steps he intends to take or should fail to take such steps asrequired by the Contract, the Owner may direct the level of effort in manpower(trades), equipment, and work schedule (overtime, weekend and holiday work, etc.),to be employed by the Contractor in order to remove or arrest the delay to the criticalpath in the accepted schedule, and Contractor shall promptly provide such level ofeffort at no additional cost to the Owner.

1.02 CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE

A. Within ten (10) calendar days of the Notice to Proceed, the Contractor shall submit to theEngineer five (5) copies of his proposed schedule. The schedule will be the subject of aschedule review meeting with the Contractor, the Engineer and the Owner or the Owner’srepresentative within one (1) week of its submission. The Contractor will revise and resubmitthe schedule until it is acceptable and accepted by the Owner or the Owner’s representative.

1.03 SUBMITTAL SCHEDULE

A. In addition to the above scheduling requirements, the Contractor will be required to submit acomplete and detailed listing of anticipated submittals during the course of the Contract. TheContractor will coordinate his submittals with those of his Subcontractors and Suppliers andwill identify each submittal by Contract drawing number and specification number. Theanticipated submission date for each submittal must be indicated along with the date onwhich its return is anticipated. For planning purposes, the Engineer will usually return shopdrawings thirty (30) days after receipt. However, longer durations for review will not beconsidered a basis for a claim.

B. The Submittal Schedule must be submitted within twenty (20) working days of the Notice toProceed and will be the subject of a special meeting with the Engineer and the Owner or theOwner’s representative within one (1) week of the schedule’s submission. At that meeting,the Submittal Schedule will be reviewed for comprehensiveness and feasibility. TheEngineer will adjust the projected return dates based on the need for more or less time foreach submittal’s review. The Submittal Schedule will then be accepted or revised asrequired.

1.04 SCHEDULE UPDATES

A. Monthly Meetings:

1. A monthly Schedule Update Meeting will be held in conjunction with the applicableprogress meeting at the construction site to review and update the Schedule. TheSchedule Update Meetings will be chaired by the Owner or the Owner’s representativeand attended by the Contractor and the Engineer. Actual progress of the previous monthwill be recorded and future activities will be reviewed. The duration of activities and theirlogical connections may be revised as needed. Decisions made at these meetings andagreed to by all parties are binding with the exception that no contractual completiondates will be modified without formal written requests and acceptance as specifiedherein.

B. Revisions to Schedule:

1. The Schedule shall be formally revised if any of the following conditions are encountered:

a. When a delay in completion of any work item or sequence of work items results in anindicated extension of the project completion.

b. When delays in submittals or deliveries or work stoppages are encountered whichmake replanning or rescheduling of the work necessary.


c. When the schedule does not represent the actual prosecution and progress of theproject.

1.05 CONTRACT COMPLETION TIME

A. Causes for Extensions:

1. The Contract completion time will be adjusted only for causes specified in this Contract.In the event the Contractor requests an extension of any Contract completion date, heshall furnish such justification and supporting evidence as the Owner or the Owner’srepresentative may deem necessary for a determination as to whether the Contractor isentitled to an extension of time under the provisions of this Contract. The Owner, withthe assistance of the Engineer, will, after receipt of such justification and supportingevidence, make findings of fact and will advise the Contractor in writing thereof.

B. Requests for Time Extension:

1. Each request for change in any Contract completion date shall be initially submitted tothe Owner within the time frame stated in the General Conditions. All information knownto the Contractor at that time concerning the nature and extent of the delay shall betransmitted to the Owner at that time. Within the time frame stated in the GeneralConditions but before the date of final payment under this Contract, all information asrequired above concerning the delay must be submitted to the Owner. No time extensionwill be granted for requests which are not submitted within the foregoing time limits.



END OF SECTION

SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, SAMPLES 013323-1 TOWN BRANCH WWTP THICKENING

SECTION 013323 - SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, SAMPLES AND RFI’S

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. General: This section specifies procedural requirements for non- administrative submittalsincluding shop drawings, product data, samples (when samples are specifically requested)and other miscellaneous work-related submittals. Shop drawings, product data, samples andother work-related submittals are required to amplify, expand and coordinate the informationcontained in the Contract Documents.

B. Refer to other Division-01 sections and other Contract Documents for Specifications onadministrative, non-work-related submittals. Such submittals include, but are not limited to thefollowing items:

1. Permits.

2. Payment applications.

3. Performance and payment bonds.

4. Insurance certificates.

5. Inspection and test reports.

6. Schedule of values.

7. Progress reports.

8. Listing of subcontractors.

9. Operating and Maintenance Manuals

C. Engineer prefers initial submittals be in electronic media along with one paper copy forreview. Engineer utilizes Newforma software and will provide Contractor with the necessarylinks and instructions for submittal purposes. Upon completion of the review process,Contractor shall print two (2) copies of complete submittal, including transmittal cover pageand stamp page, and deliver to Engineer.

1. If Contractor does not have capability to submit electronic submittals, then Contractorshall submit a request to Engineer for waiver. In the event a waiver is granted, papersubmittals shall be provided as directed by the Engineer.

D. Submittals shall be checked and reviewed by the Contractor and stamped with Contractor’sreview stamp before submission to the Engineer. The review of the submittals by theEngineer shall not be construed as a complete check but will indicate only that the generalmethod of construction and detailing is satisfactory. Review of such submittals will not relievethe Contractor of the responsibility for any errors which may exist as the Contractor shall beresponsible for the dimensions and design of adequate connections, details, and satisfactoryconstruction of all work.

E. All Requests for Information (RFI) to Engineer shall be submitted electronically via Engineer’sNewforma software.



A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and SupplementaryConditions and other Division-01 Specification sections, apply to work of this section.

B. Section 017823 - Operating and Maintenance Manuals.

1.03 DEFINITIONS

A. Shop drawings are technical drawings and data that have been specially prepared for thisproject, including but not limited to the following items:

1. Fabrication and installation drawings.

2. Setting diagrams.

3. Shopwork manufacturing instructions.

4. Templates.

5. Patterns.

6. Coordination drawings (for use on site).

7. Schedules.

8. Design mix formulas.

9. Contractor's engineering calculations.

Standard information prepared without specific reference to a project is not considered to beshop drawings.

B. Product data includes standard printed information on manufactured products that has notbeen specially-prepared for this project, including but not limited to the following items:

1. Manufacturer's product specifications and installation instructions.

2. Standard color charts.

3. Catalog cuts.

4. Roughing-in diagram and templates.

5. Standard wiring diagrams.

6. Printed performance curves.

7. Operational range diagrams.

8. Mill reports.

9. Standard product operating and maintenance manuals.

C. Samples, where specifically required, are physical examples of work, including but not limitedto the following items:

1. Partial sections of manufactured or fabricated work.


2. Small cuts or containers of materials.

3. Complete units of repetitively-used materials.

4. Swatches showing color, texture and pattern.

5. Color range sets.

6. Units of work to be used for independent inspection and testing.

D. Miscellaneous submittals are work-related, non-administrative submittals that do not fit in thethree previous categories, including, but not limited to the following:

1. Specially-prepared and standard printed warranties.

2. Maintenance agreements.

3. Workmanship bonds.

4. Survey data and reports.

5. Testing and certification reports.

6. Record drawings.

7. Field measurement data.

1.04 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

A. General: Refer to the General Conditions and Paragraph 1.1 hereinbefore for basicrequirements for submittal handling.

B. Coordination: Coordinate the preparation and processing of submittals with the performanceof the work. Coordinate each separate submittal with other submittals and related activitiessuch as testing, purchasing, fabrication, delivery and similar activities that require sequentialactivity.

1. It is the Contractor’s responsibility to make such field measurements as are needed tobase submittals on actual field conditions to assure proper connection, fit, function andperformance of all work and equipment in the execution of the contract work.

2. Coordinate the submittal of different units of interrelated work so that one submittal willnot be delayed by the Architect/Engineer's need to review a related submittal. TheArchitect/Engineer reserves the right to withhold action on any submittal requiringcoordination with other submittals until related submittals are forthcoming.

C. Coordination of Submittal Times: Prepare and transmit each submittal to theArchitect/Engineer sufficiently in advance of the scheduled performance of related work andother applicable activities. Transmit different kinds of submittals for the same unit of work sothat processing will not be delayed by the Architect/Engineer's need to review submittalsconcurrently for coordination.

D. Review Time: Allow sufficient time so that the installation will not be delayed as a result ofthe time required to properly process submittals, including time for resubmittal, if necessary.Advise the Architect/Engineer on each submittal, as to whether processing time is critical tothe progress of the work and if the work would be expedited if processing time could beshortened.


1. Allow a longer time period where processing must be delayed for coordination withsubsequent submittals. The Architect/Engineer will advise the Contractor promptly whenit is determined that a submittal being processed must be delayed for coordination.

2. No extension of time will be authorized because of the Contractor's failure to transmitsubmittals to the Architect/Engineer sufficiently in advance of the work.

E. Submittal Preparation: Mark each submittal with a permanent label for identification. Providethe following information on the label for proper processing and recording of action taken.

1. Project name.

2. Date.

3. Name and address of Architect/Engineer.

4. Name and address of Contractor.

5. Name and address of subcontractor.

6. Name and address of supplier.

7. Name of manufacturer.

8. Number and title of appropriate specification section.

9. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate.

10. Similar definitive information as necessary.

F. All submittals shall be referenced to the applicable item, section and division of theSpecifications, and to the applicable drawing(s) or drawing schedule(s). Include only oneitem in a submittal.

G. The Contractor shall review and check submittals, and shall indicate his review by initials anddate. Any submittal received without this evidence of review shall be returned to theContractor without review.

H. If the submittals deviate from the Contract Drawings and/or Specifications, the Contractorshall advise the Engineer in writing of the deviation and the reasons therefore.

I. Submittal Transmittal: Package each submittal appropriately for transmittal and handling.Transmit each submittal from the Contractor to the Architect/Engineer, and to otherdestinations as indicated, by use of a transmittal form. Submittals received from sourcesother than the Contractor will be returned to the sender "without action".

J. Electronic Submittals: If the electronic method of submittals is agreed to by Contractor,Engineer, and Owner, the format and procedures will be determined and implemented priorto any submittals. Submittals will be processed through “Newforma” software. Each item ofthe submittal documents shall be in .pdf format and shall be oriented so that they are readfrom upper left corner to lower right corner, with no rotation of said document being requiredafter receiving it. The .pdf file shall be named so that it describes the item being submitted.All other requirements herein are part of the electronic submittal process with the exception ofthe duplicate copies. Contractor stamp indicating review and any comments or notes mustbe on the .pdf submittal.


1.05 SPECIFIC SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Shop drawings shall be prepared by a qualified detailer. Details shall be identified byreference to sheet and detail numbers shown on Contract Drawings. Where applicable, showfabrication, layout, setting and erection details.

1. Shop drawings are defined as original drawings prepared by the Contractor,subcontractors, suppliers, or distributors performing work under this Contract. Shopdrawings illustrate some portion of the work and show fabrication, layout, setting orerection details of equipment, materials and components. The Contractor shall, except asotherwise noted, have prepared the number of reviewed copies required for hisdistribution plus four (4) which will be retained by the Engineer. Shop drawings shall befolded to an approximate size of 8-1/2" x 11" and in such manner that the title block willbe located in the lower right-hand corner of the exposed surface.

B. Project data shall include manufacturer's standard schematic drawings modified to deleteinformation which is not applicable to the project, and shall be supplemented to provideadditional information applicable to the project. Each copy of descriptive literature shall beclearly marked to identify pertinent information as it applies to the project.

C. Where samples are required, they shall be adequate to illustrate materials, equipment orworkmanship, and to establish standards by which completed work is judged. Providesufficient size and quantity to clearly illustrate functional characteristics of product andmaterial, with integrally related parts and attachment devices, along with a full range of colorsamples.

D. In the event the Engineer does not specifically reject the use of material or equipment atvariance to that which is shown on the Drawings or specified, the Contractor shall, at noadditional expense to the Owner, and using methods reviewed by the Engineer, make anychanges to structures, piping, controls, electrical work, mechanical work, etc., that may benecessary to accommodate this equipment or material. Should equipment other than that onwhich design drawings are based be accepted by the Engineer, shop drawings shall besubmitted detailing all modification work and equipment changes made necessary by thesubstituted item.

E. Additional information on particular items, such as special drawings, schedules, calculations,performance curves, and material details, shall be provided when specifically requested inthe technical Specifications.

F. Submittals for all electrically operated items (including instrumentation and controls) shallinclude complete size, color coding, all terminations and connections, and coordination withrelated equipment.

G. Equipment shop drawings shall indicate all factory or shop paint coatings applied bysuppliers, manufacturers and fabricators; the Contractor shall be responsible for insuring thecompatibility of such coatings with the field-applied paint products and systems.

H. Fastener specifications of manufacturer shall be indicated on equipment shop drawings.

I. Where manufacturers brand names are given in the Specifications for building andconstruction materials and products, such as grout, bonding compounds, curing compounds,masonry cleaners, waterproofing solutions and similar products, the Contractor shall submitnames and descriptive literature of such materials and products he proposes to use in thisContract.

J. No material shall be fabricated or shipped unless the applicable drawings or submittals havebeen reviewed by the Engineer and returned to the Contractor.


K. All bulletins, brochures, instructions, parts lists, and warranties package with andaccompanying materials and products delivered to and installed in the project shall be savedand transmitted to the Owner through the Engineer.

1.06 REVIEW STATUS

A. Submittals will be returned, stamped with the following classifications: "Reviewed","Furnish as Corrected”, "Revise and Resubmit", "Rejected", or “Submit Specified Item”.

B. In some instances, corrections to dimensions or clarification notations will be required, inwhich case the drawings will be marked "Furnish as Corrected." These shop drawings willnot be required to be resubmitted for further approval. If the supplier makes additionalmodifications after receiving a "Furnish as Corrected" disposition, the drawings must then beresubmitted for review.

C. If the shop drawing is returned with the notation “Revise and Resubmit”, the Contractor shallpromptly make the revisions indicated and repeat the submittal approval procedure.

D. If the shop drawing is returned with the notation “Submit Specified Item”, this indicates thatthe submittal does not meet the specification, will not be reviewed, and is unacceptable.Upon return of a drawing so marked, the Contractor shall repeat the initial approvalprocedure, submitting acceptable materials or equipment.

E. The "Rejected" notation is used to indicate materials or equipment that are not acceptableand are not included in the project.

1.07 REMINDER OF CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITIES

A. Verify field measurements, field construction criteria, catalog numbers, and similar data.

B. Coordinate each submittal with requirements of work and of Contract Documents.

C. Notify Engineer, in writing at time of submission, of deviations in submittals fromrequirements of Contract Documents.

D. Begin no work, and have no material or products fabricated or shipped which requiressubmittals until return of submittals with Engineer's stamp and initials or signature indicatingreview.

E. Upon review and close-out of a submittal, Contractor shall print two (2) copies of completesubmittal, including transmittal cover page and stamp page, and deliver to Engineer.

F. It is emphasized that the review of shop drawings by the Engineer is for general conformanceto the Contract Drawings and Specifications, but subject to the detailed requirements of theContract Drawings and Specifications. Although the Engineer may check submitted data inmore or less detail, such checking is an effort to discover errors and omissions in theContractor's drawings and to assist the Contractor in coordinating and expediting his work,but shall in no way relieve the Contractor of his obligation and responsibility to properlycoordinate the work, and to Engineer the details of the work in such a manner, that thepurpose and intent of the Contract will be achieved nor shall any such detailed checking bythe Engineer be construed as placing on him or on the Owner, any responsibility for theaccuracy, proper fit, functioning or performance of any phase of the work included in thisContract. The Contractor is responsible for confirmation and correlation of dimensions at thejob site; for information that pertains solely to the fabrication processes or to the techniquesof construction; for the coordination of the work of all trades; and for performance of his workin a safe and satisfactory manner.




END OF SECTION

DEFINITIONS AND STANDARDS 014216-1 TOWN BRANCH WWTP THICKENING

SECTION 014216 - DEFINITIONS AND STANDARDS

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. This section specifies procedural and administrative requirements for compliance withgoverning regulations and codes and standards imposed upon the Work. Theserequirements include obtaining permits, licenses, inspections, releases and similardocumentation, as well as payments, statements and similar requirements associated withregulations, codes and standards.

B. The term, "Regulations", is defined to include laws, statutes, ordinances and lawful ordersissued by governing authorities, as well as those rules, conventions and agreements withinthe construction industry which effectively control the performance of the Work regardless ofwhether they are lawfully imposed by governing authority or not.


A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and SupplementaryConditions and other Division-01 Specification Sections, apply to Work of this Section.

1.03 DEFINITIONS

A substantial amount of specification language consists of definitions of terms found in otherContract Documents, including Drawings. (Drawings are recognized as being diagrammaticin nature and not completely descriptive of the requirements indicated thereon). Certainterms used in Contract Documents are defined in this article. Definitions and explanationscontained in this section are not necessarily either complete or exclusive, but are general forthe Work to the extent that they are not stated more explicitly in another element of theContract Documents.

The provisions or requirements of other Division-01 sections apply to entire Work of theContract and, where so indicated, to other elements which are included in the Project.

A. Indicated: The term, "indicated", is a cross-reference to graphic representations, notes orschedules on the Drawings, to other paragraphs or schedules in the Specifications, and tosimilar means of recording requirements in Contract Documents. Where terms such as"shown", "noted", "scheduled", and "specified" are used in lieu of "indicated", it is for thepurpose of helping the reader locate the cross-reference, and no limitation of location isintended except as specifically noted.

B. Directed, Requested, Etc.: Where not otherwise explained, terms such as "directed","requested", "authorized", "selected", "approved", "required", "accepted", and "permitted"mean "directed by the Architect/ Engineer", "requested by the Architect/ Engineer", andsimilar phrases. However, no such implied meaning will be interpreted to extend theArchitect's/Engineer's responsibility into the Contractor's area of construction supervision.

C. Approve: Where used in conjunction with the Architect's/Engineer's response to submittals,requests, applications, inquiries, reports and claims by the Contractor, the meaning of theterm "approved" will be held to limitations of the Architect's/Engineer's responsibilities andduties as specified in General and Supplementary Conditions. In no case will theArchitect/Engineer's approval be interpreted as a release of the Contractor fromresponsibilities to fulfill requirements of Contract Documents.


D. Project Site: The term, "project site", is defined as the space available to the Contractor forperformance of the Work, either exclusively or in conjunction with others performing otherwork as part of the Project. The extent of the Project site is shown on the Drawings, and mayor may not be identical with the description of the land upon which the Project is to be built.

E. Furnish: Except as otherwise defined in greater detail, the term "furnish" is used to mean"supply and deliver to the project site, ready for unloading, unpacking, assembly, installation,and similar operations" as applicable in each instance.

F. Install: Except as otherwise defined in greater detail, the term "install" is used to describeoperations at project site including the actual "unloading, unpacking, assembly, erection,placing, anchoring, applying, working to dimension, finishing, curing protecting, cleaning andsimilar operations", as applicable in each instance.

G. Provide: Except as otherwise defined in greater detail, the term "provide" means "to furnishand install, complete and ready for intended use", as applicable in each instance.

H. Installer: The term "installer" is defined as "the entity" (person or firm) engaged by theContractor, its subcontractor or sub-subcontractor for performance of a particular unit of workat the project site, including installation, erection, application and similar required operations.It is a requirement that installers are experienced in the operations they are engaged toperform.

I. Testing Laboratories: The term "testing laboratory" is defined as an independent entityengaged to perform specific inspections or tests of the Work, either at the project site orelsewhere, and to report, and (if required) interpret results of those inspections or tests.

1.04 INDUSTRY STANDARDS

A. Applicability of Standards: Except where more explicit or more stringent requirements arewritten into the Contract Documents, applicable construction industry standards have thesame force and effect as if bound into or copied directly into the Contract Documents. Suchindustry standards are made a part of the Contract Documents by reference. Individualspecification sections indicate which codes and standards the Contractor must keep availableat the project site for reference.

1. Referenced standards (standards referenced directly in the Contract Documents) takeprecedence over nonreferenced standards that are recognized in the industry forapplicability to the Work.

2. Non-referenced standards are defined as not being applicable to the Work, except as ageneral requirement of whether the Work complies with recognized construction industrystandards.

B. Publication Dates: Except as otherwise indicated, where compliance with an industrystandard is required, comply with standard in effect as of date of Contract Documents.

C. Conflicting Requirements: Where compliance with two (2) or more standards is specified,and where these standards establish different or conflicting requirements for minimumquantities or quality levels, the most stringent requirement will be enforced, unless theContract Documents specifically indicate a less stringent requirement. Refer requirementsthat are different, but apparently equal, and uncertainties as to which quality level is morestringent to the Architect/Engineer for a decision before proceeding.

1. Minimum Quantities or Quality Levels: In every instance the quantity or quality levelshown or specified is intended to be the minimum for the work to be provided orperformed. Unless otherwise indicated, the actual work may either comply exactly, withinspecified tolerances, with the minimum quantity or quality specified, or may exceed that


minimum within reasonable limits. In complying with these requirements, the indicatednumeric values are either minimum or maximum values, as notes, or as appropriate forthe context of the requirements. Refer instances of uncertainty to the Architect/Engineerfor decision before proceeding.

D. Copies of Standards: The Contract Documents require that each entity performing work beexperienced in that part of the Work being performed. Each entity is also required to befamiliar with industry standards applicable to that part of the work. Copies of applicablestandards are not bound with the Contract Documents.

1. Where copies of standards are needed for proper performance of the Work, theContractor is required to obtain such copies directly from the publication source.

2. Although certain copies of standards needed for enforcement of the requirements may berequired submittals, the Architect/ Engineer reserves the right to require the Contractor tosubmit additional copies of these standards as necessary for enforcement of therequirements.

E. Abbreviations and Names: Trade association names and title of general standards arefrequently abbreviated. The following acronyms or abbreviations as referenced in ContractDocuments are defined to mean the associated names. Both names and addresses aresubject to change, and are believed to be, but are not assured to be, accurate and up-to-dateas of date of Contract Documents:

AA Aluminum Association818 Connecticut Ave. NWWashington, DC 20006 (202) 862-5100

AABC Associated Air Balance Council1518 K Street, NW, Suite 503Washington, DC 20005 (202) 737-0202

AAMA American Architectural Manufacturer's Association2700 River Road, Suite 118Des Plaines, IL 60018 (312) 699-7310

AAN American Association of Nurserymen1250 Eye Street, Suite 500Washington, DC 20005 (202) 789-2900

AASHTO American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials444 North Capitol Street,Suite 225Washington, DC 20005 (202) 624-5800

AATCC American Association of Textile Chemists and ColoristsP.O. Box 12215Research Triangle Park NC 27709 (919) 549-8141

ACI American Concrete InstituteP.O. Box 19150Detroit, MI 48219 (313) 532-2600

ACIL American Council of Independent Laboratories1725 K Street, N.W.Washington, DC 20006 (202) 887-5872

ACPA American Concrete Pipe Association8320 Old Courthouse Road


Vienna, VA 22180 (703) 821-1990

ACS Acoustical Society of America335 East 45th StreetNew York, NY 10017 (212) 661-9404

ADC Air Diffusion Council230 N. Michigan Ave., Suite 1200Chicago, IL 60611 (312) 372-9800

AGA American Gas Association1515 Wilson Blvd.Arlington, VA 22209 (703) 841-8400

AHA American Hardboard Association877-B Wilmette RoadPalatine, IL 60067 (312) 934-8800

AHAM Association of Home Appliance Manufacturers20 N. Wacker DriveChicago, IL 60606 (312) 984-5800

AI Asphalt InstituteAsphalt Institute BuildingCollege Park, MD 20740 (301) 277-4258

AIA American Institute of Architects1735 New York Ave., NWWashington, DC 20006 (202) 626-7300

A.I.A. American Insurance Association85 John StreetNew York, NY 10038 (212) 669-0400

AIHA American Industrial Hygiene Association475 Wolf Ledges ParkwayAkron, OH 44311 (216) 762-7294

AISC American Institute of Steel Construction400 N. Michigan Ave., 8th FloorChicago, IL 60611 (312) 670-2400

AISI American Iron and Steel Institute1000 Sixteenth Street, NWWashington, DC 20036 (202) 452-7100

AITC American Institute of Timber Construction333 W. Hampden Ave.Englewood, CO 80110 (303) 761-3212

ALI Associated Laboratories, Inc.Eight Brush StreetPontiac, MI 48053 (313) 335-6114

ALSC American Lumber Standards CommitteeP.O. Box 210Germantown, MD 20874 (301) 972-1700

AMCA Air Movement and Control Association


30 W. University DriveArlington Heights, IL 60004 (312) 394-0150

ANSI American National Standards Institute655 Fifteenth Street, NW,Suite 300Washington, DC 20015 (202) 639-4090

APA American Plywood AssociationP.O. Box 11700Tacoma, WA 98411 (206) 565-6600

A.P.A. American Parquet Association1650 Union National PlazaLittle Rock, AR 72201 (501) 375-5561

API American Petroleum Institute1220 L Street, NWWashington, DC 20005 (202) 682-8000

ARI Air Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute1501 Wilson Blvd.Arlington, VA 22209 (703) 524-8800

ARMA Asphalt Roofing Manufacturers Association6288 Montrose RoadRockville, MD 20852 (301) 231-9050

ASC Adhesive and Sealant Council1600 Wilson Blvd., Suite 910Arlington, VA 22209 (703) 841-1112

ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-ConditioningEngineers1791 Tullie Circle, NEAtlanta, GA 30329 (404) 636-8400

ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers345 East 47th StreetNew York, NY 10017 (212) 705-7722

ASPE American Society of Plumbing Engineers15233 Ventura Blvd., Suite 811Sherman Oaks, CA 91403 (818) 783-4845

ASSE American Society of Sanitary EngineeringP.O. Box 40362Bay Village, OH 44140 (216) 835-3040

ASTM ASTM1916 Race StreetPhiladelphia, PA 19103 (215) 299-5400

AWI Architectural Woodwork Institute2310 S. Walter Reed DriveArlington, VA 22206 (703) 671-9100

AWPA American Wood-Preservers' AssociationP.O. Box 849


Stevensville, MD 21666 (301) 643-4163

AWPB American Wood Preservers BureauP.O. Box 60582772 S. Randolph StreetArlington, VA 22206 (703) 931-8180

AWS American Welding SocietyP.O. Box 351040550 Le Jeune Road, NWMiami, FL 33135 (305) 443-9353

AWWA American Water Works Association6666 W. Quincy Ave.Denver, CO 80235 (303) 794-7711

BANC Brick Association of North CarolinaP.O. Box 6305Greensboro, NC 27415 (919) 273-5566

BHMA Builders' Hardware Manufacturers Association60 East 42nd St., Room 511New York, NY 10165 (212) 682-8142

BIA Brick Institute of America11490 Commerce Park Drive,Suite 300Reston, VA 22091 (703) 620-0010

BIFMA Business and Institutional Furniture Manufacturer's Association2335 Burton Street, S.E.Grand Rapids, MI 49506 (616) 243-1681

CAUS Color Association of the United States343 Lexington AvenueNew York, NY 10016 (212) 683-9531

CAGI Compressed Air and Gas Institutec/o Thomas Associates, Inc.1230 Keith BuildingCleveland, OH 44115 (216) 241-7333

CBM Certified Ballast Manufacturers AssociationHanna Building, Suite 7721422 Euclid AvenueCleveland, OH 44115 (216) 241-0711

CDA Copper Development AssociationBox 1840, Greenwich Office Park 2Greenwich, CT 06836 (203) 625-8210

CGA Compressed Gas Association1235 Jefferson Davis HighwayArlington, VA 22202 (703) 979-0900

CISPI Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute1499 Chain Bridge Road, Suite 203McLean, VA 22101 (703) 827-9177


CLPA California Lathing and Plastering Association25332 Narbonne, Suite 170Lomita, CA 90717 (213) 539-6080

CRI Carpet and Rug InstituteBox 2048Dalton, GA 30720 (404) 278-3176

CRSI Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute933 Plum Grove RoadSchaumburg, IL 60195 (312) 490-1700

CTI Ceramic Tile Institute700 North Virgil AvenueLos Angeles, CA 90029 (213) 660-1911

DHI Door and Hardware Institute7711 Old Springhouse RoadMcLean, VA 22102 (703) 556-3990

DLPA Decorative Laminate Products Association(Formerly National Association of Plastic Fabricators)Hulman Building, 20th Floor120 West Second StreetDayton, OH 45402 (513) 228-1041

ECSA Exchange Carriers Standards AssociationFour Century Drive, 3rd FloorParsippany, NJ 07054 (201) 538-6111

EIA Electronic Industries Association2001 Eye Street, NWWashington, DC 20006 (202) 457-4900

EIMA Exterior Insulation Manufacturers AssociationP.O. Box 75037Washington, DC 20013 (202) 783-6582

ETL ETL Testing Laboratories, Inc,P.O. Box 2040Route 11, Industrial ParkCortland, NY 13045 (607) 753-6711

FCI Fluid Controls InstituteP.O. Box 9036Morristown, NJ 07960 (201) 829-0990

FGMA Flat Glass Marketing AssociationWhite Lakes Professional Building3310 HarrisonTopeka, KS 66611 (913) 266-7013

FM Factory Mutual System1151 Boston-Providence TurnpikeNorwood, MA 02062 (617) 762-4300

FTI Facing Tile Institutec/o Box 8880Canton, OH 44711 (216) 488-1211


GA Gypsum Association1603 Orrington Ave.Evanston, IL 60201 (312) 491-1744

HEI Heat Exchange Institute1230 Keith BuildingCleveland, OH 44115 (216) 241-7333

HI Hydronics InstituteP.O. Box 21835 Russo PlaceBerkeley Heights, NJ 07922 (201) 464-8200

HMA Hardwood Manufacturers Association805 Sterick BuildingMemphis, TN 38103 (901) 525-8221

ICEA Insulated Cable Engineers Association, Inc.P.O. Box PSouth Yarmouth, MA 02664 (617) 394-4424

IEC International Electrotechnical Commission(Available from ANSI)655 Fifteenth Street, NW,Suite 300Washington, DC 20015 (202) 639-4090

IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers345 E. 47th StreetNew York, NY 10017 (212) 705-7926

IES Illuminating Engineering Society of North America345 E. 47th StreetNew York, NY 10017 (212) 705-7926

IGCC Insulating Glass Certification CouncilRoute 11, Industrial ParkCortland, NY 13045 (607) 753-6711

ILI Indiana Limestone Institute of AmericaStone City Bank BuildingSuite 400Bedford, IN 47421 (812) 275-4426

IMSA International Municipal Signal AssociationP.O. Box 8249Forth Worth, TX 76112 (817) 429-8638

IRI Industrial Risk Insurers85 Woodland StreetHartford, CT 06102 (203) 525-2601

ISA Instrument Society of AmericaP.O. Box 12277; 67 Alexander DriveResearch Triangle Park, NC 27709 (919) 549-8411

LPI Lighting Protection InstituteP.O. Box 406; 48 N. Ayer Street


Harvard, IL 60033 (815) 943-7211

MBMA Metal Building Manufacturer's Association1230 Keith BuildingCleveland, OH 44115 (216) 241-7333

MCAA Mechanical Contractors Association of America5410 Grosvenor Lane; Suite 120Bethesda, MD 20814 (301) 897-0770

MIA Marble Institute of America33505 State StreetFarmington, MI 48024 (313) 746-5558

ML/SFA Metal Lath/Steel Framing Association1221 N. LaSalle StreetSuite 2026Chicago, IL 60601 (312) 346-1600

MSS Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry127 Park Street, NEVienna, VA 22180 (703) 281-6613

NAAMM National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers221 N. LaSalle StreetChicago, IL 60601 (312) 346-1600

NAPF National Association of Plastic Fabricators (Now DLPA)

NBGQA National Building Granite Quarries Associationc/o H.E. Fletcher Co.West Chelmsford, MA 08163

NBHA National Builder's Hardware Association(Now Part of DHI)711 Old Springhouse RoadMcLean, VA 22101 (703) 556-3990

NCMA National Cement Masonry AssociationP.O. Box 781Herndon, VA 22070 (703) 435-4900

NCRPM National Council on Radiation Protection and Measurement7910 Woodmont Avenue; Suite 1016Bethesda, MD 20814 (301) 657-2652

NEC National Electric Code(by NFPA)

NECA National Electrical Contractors Association7315 Wisconsin Ave.Bethesda, MD 20814 (301) 657-3110

NEII National Elevator Industry, Inc.600 Third Ave.New York, NY 10016 (212) 986-1545

NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association2101 L Street, NW; Suite 300


Washington, DC 20037 (202) 457-8400

NFPA National Fire Protection AssociationBatterymarch ParkQuincy, MA 02269 (617) 770-3000

NFPA National Forest Products Association1619 Massachusetts Ave. N.W.Washington, DC 20036 (202) 797-5800

NHLA National Hardwood Lumber AssociationP.O. Box 34518Memphis, TN 38184 (901) 377-1818

NKCA National Kitchen Cabinet AssociationP.O. Box 6830Falls Church, VA 22046 (703) 237-7580

NOFMA National Oak Flooring Manufacturers Association804 Sterick BuildingMemphis, TN 38103 (901) 526-5016

NPA National Particleboard Association18928 Premiere CourtGaithersburg, MD 20879 (301) 670-0604

NPCA National Paint and Coating Association1500 Rhode Island Avenue, N.W.Washington, DC 20005 (202) 462-6272

NRCA National Roofing Contractors Association8600 Bryn Mawr AvenueChicago, IL 60631 (312) 693-0700

NSF National Sanitation FoundationP.O. Box 1468; 3475 Plymouth RoadAnn Arbor, MI 48106 (313) 769-8010

NSSEA National School Supply and Equipment Association1500 Wilson Blvd.Arlington, VA 22209 (703) 524-8819

NTMA National Terrazzo and Mosaic Association3166 Des Plaines Ave.; Suite 24Des Plaines, IL 60018 (312) 635-7744

NWMA National Woodwork Manufacturers Association (Now NWWDA)

NWWDA National Wood Window and Door Association(Formerly NWMA)205 West Touhy AvenuePark Ridge, IL 60068 (312) 823-6747

PCI Prestressed Concrete Institute201 N. Wells StreetChicago, IL 60606 (312) 346-4071

PDI Plumbing and Drainage Institute(c/o Austin O. Roche, Jr.)


5342 Boulevard PlaceIndianapolis, IN 46208 (317) 251-5298

PEI Porcelain Enamel Institute1911 North Fort Myer DriveArlington, VA 22209 (703) 527-5257

RFCI Resilient Floor Covering Institute966 Hungerford Drive; Suite 12-BRockville, MD 20805 (301) 340-8580

RIS Redwood Inspection Service591 Redwood Highway; Suite 3100Mill Valley, CA 94941 (415) 381-1304

RMA Rubber Manufacturers Association1400 K Street, N.W.Washington, DC 20005 (202) 682-4800

SAMA Scientific Apparatus Makers Association1101 Sixteenth Street, N.W.Washington, DC 20036 (202) 223-1360

SDI Steel Deck InstituteP.O. Box 3812St. Louis, MO 63122 (314) 965-1741

S.D.I. Steel Door Institute(c/o A.P. Wherry and Associates, Inc.)14600 Detroit AvenueCleveland, OH 44107 (216) 226-7700

SGCC Safety Glazing Certification CouncilRoute 11; Industrial ParkCortland, NY 13045 (607) 753-6711

SHLMA Southern Hardwood Lumber Manufacturers Association(Now HMA)

SIGMA Sealed Insulating Glass Manufacturers Association111 E. Wacker DriveChicago, IL 60601 (312) 644-6610

SJI Steel Joist Institute1205 48th Street, North; Suite AMyrtle Beach, SC 29577 (803) 449-0487

SMACNA Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National AssociationP.O. Box 70Merrifield, VA 22116 (703) 790-9890

SPIB Southern Pine Inspection Bureau4709 Scenic HighwayPensacola, FL 32504 (904) 434-2611

SPRI Single Ply Roofing Institute1800 Pickwick AvenueGlenview, IL 60025 (312) 724-7700


SSPC Steel Structures Painting Council4400 Fifth AvenuePittsburgh, PA 15213 (412) 578-3327

SWI Steel Window Institute(c/o Thomas Associates, Inc.)1230 Keith BuildingCleveland, OH 44115 (216) 241-7333

TCA Tile Council of AmericaP.O. Box 326Princeton, NJ 08540 (609) 921-7050

TIMA Thermal Insulation Manufacturer's Association7 Kirby PlazaMt. Kisco, NY 10549 (914) 241-2284

TPI Truss Plate Institute583 D'Onofrio Drive; Suite 200Madison, WI 53719 (608) 833-5900

UL Underwriters Laboratories333 Pfingsten RoadNorthbrook, IL 60062 (312) 272-8800

WCLIB West Coast Lumber Inspection BureauP.O. Box 23145Portland, OR 97223 (503) 639-0651

WIC Woodwork Institute of CaliforniaP.O. Box 11428Fresno, CA 93773 (209) 233-9035

WRI Wire Reinforcement Institute8361 A Greensboro DriveMclean, VA 22102 (703) 790-9790

WSC Water Systems Council221 North LaSalle St.Chicago, IL 60601 (312) 346-1600

WSFI Wood and Synthetic Flooring Institute4415 West Harrison StreetSuite 242 CHillside, IL 60162 (312) 449-2933

WWPA Western Wood Products Association1500 Yeon BuildingPortland, OR 97204 (503) 224-3930

WWPA Woven Wire Products Association2515 N. Nordica Ave.Chicago, IL 60635 (312) 637-1359

F. Federal Government Agencies: The names and titles of Federal Government standard orspecification producing agencies are frequently abbreviated. The following acronyms orabbreviations as referenced in the Contract Documents indicate the names of standard orspecification producing agencies of the Federal Government. Names and addresses are


subject to change but are believed to be, but are not assures to be, accurate and up-to-dateas of the date of the Contract Documents.

CE Corps of Engineers(US Department of the Army)Chief of Engineers-ReferralWashington, DC 20314 (202) 693-6456

CFR Code of Federal RegulationsAvailable from the Government Printing OfficeNorth Capitol Streetbetween G and H Streets, NWWashington, DC 20402 (202) 783-3238

(Material is usually first published in the Federal Register)

CPSC Consumer Product Safety Commission1111 Eighteenth Street, NWWashington, DC 20207 (202) 634-7700

CS Commercial Standard(U.S. Department of Commerce)Government Printing OfficeWashington, DC 20402 (202) 377-2000

DOC Department of Commerce14th Street and Constitution Avenue, NWWashington, DC 20230 (202) 377-2000

DOT Department of Transportation400 Seventh Street, SWWashington, DC 20590 (202) 426-4000

EPA Environmental Protection Agency401 M Street, SWWashington, DC 20460 (202) 829-3535

FAA Federal Aviation Administration(U.S. Department of Transportation)800 Independence Avenue, SWWashington, DC 20590 (202) 426-4000

FCC Federal Communications Commission1919 M Street, NWWashington, DC 20554 (202) 632-7000

FHA Federal Housing Administration(U.S. Department of Housing and Urban Development)451 Seventh Street, SWWashington, DC 20201 (202) 755-5995

FS Federal Specification(General Services Administration)Specification Units (WFSIS)7th and D Streets, SW (202) 472-2205Washington, DC 20406 or 472-2140

GSA General Services AdministrationF Street and 18th Street, NW


Washington, DC 20405 (202) 655-4000

MIL Military Standardization Documents(U.S. Department of Defense)Naval Publications and Forms Center5801 Tabor AvenuePhiladelphia, PA 19120

NBS National Bureau of Standards(U.S. Department of Commerce)Gaithersburg, MD 20234 (301) 921-1000

OSHA Occupational Safety and Health Administration(U.S. Department of Labor)Government Printing OfficeWashington, DC 20402 (202) 783-3238

PS Product Standard of NBS(U.S. Department of Commerce)Government Printing OfficeWashington, DC 20402 (202) 783-3238

REA Rural Electrification Administration(U.S. Department of Agriculture)14th Street and Independence Avenue, SWWashington, DC 20250 (202) 382-1255

SDA U.S. Department of AgricultureIndependence Avenue between12th and 14th Streets, SWWashington, DC 20250 (202) 447-4929

USPS U.S. Postal Service475 L'Enfant Plaza, SWWashington, DC 20260 (202) 245-4000

1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. Permits, Licenses, and Certificates: For the Owner's records, submit copies of permits,licenses, certifications, inspection reports, releases, jurisdictional settlements, notices,receipts for fee payments, and similar documents, correspondence and records establishedin conjunction with compliance with standards and regulations bearing upon performance ofthe work.



END OF SECTION

QUALITY CONTROL SERVICES 014500-1 TOWN BRANCH WWTP THICKENING

SECTION 014500 - QUALITY CONTROL SERVICES

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Required inspection and testing services are intended to assist in the determination ofprobable compliance of the Work with requirements specified or indicated. These requiredservices do not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for compliance with theserequirements or for compliance with requirements of the Contract Documents.

B. Tests, inspections and certifications of materials, equipment, subcontractors or completedWork, as required by the various sections of the Specifications shall be obtained by theContractor and all costs shall be included in the Contract Price.

C. The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer the name of any testing laboratory to be used.

D. Contractor shall deliver written notice to the Engineer at least 24 hours in advance of anyinspections or tests to be made at the project site. All inspections or tests to be conducted atthe field shall be done in the presence of the Engineer or his representative.

E. Certifications by independent testing laboratories may be by copy of the attest and shall givescientific procedures and results of tests. Certifications by persons having interest in thematter shall be by original attest properly sworn to and notarized.

F. Inspections, tests and related actions specified in this section and elsewhere in the ContractDocuments are not intended to limit the Contractor's own quality control procedures whichfacilitate overall compliance with requirements of the Contract Documents.


A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and SupplementaryConditions and other Division-01 Specification sections, apply to Work of this Section.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. General: Refer to Section 01 33 23 for the general requirements on submittals. Submit acertified written report of each inspection, test or similar service, directly to theArchitect/Engineer.

B. Report Data: Written reports of each inspection, test or similar service shall include, but notbe limited to the following:

1. Name of testing agency or test laboratory.

2. Dates and locations of samples and tests or inspections.

3. Names of individuals making the inspection or test.

4. Designation of the work and test method.

5. Complete inspection or test data.

6. Test results.

7. Interpretations of test results.


8. Notation of significant ambient conditions at the time of sample-taking and testing.

9. Comments or professional opinion as to whether inspected or tested work complies withrequirements of the Contract Documents.

10. Recommendations on retesting, if applicable.

1.04 RESPONSIBILITIES

A. Contractor Responsibilities: Except where they are specifically indicated as being theOwner's responsibility, or where they are to be provided by another identified entity,inspections, tests and similar quality control services are the Contractor's responsibility; theseservices also include those specified to be performed by an independent agency and notdirectly by the Contractor. Costs for these services shall be included in the Contract Sum.The Contractor shall employ and pay an independent agency, testing laboratory or otherqualified firm to perform quality control services specified.

B. Retest Responsibility: Where results of required inspections, tests or similar services proveunsatisfactory and do not indicate compliance of related Work with the requirements of theContract Documents, then retests are the responsibility of the Contractor, regardless ofwhether the original test was the Contractor's responsibility. Retesting of work revised orreplaced by the Contractor is the Contractor's responsibility, where required tests wereperformed on original Work.

C. Responsibility for Associated Services: The Contractor is required to cooperate with theindependent performing required inspections, tests and similar services. Provide suchauxiliary services as are reasonably requested. Notify the testing agency sufficiently inadvance of operations to permit assignment of personnel. These auxiliary services includebut are not necessarily limited to the following:

1. Providing access to the work.

2. Taking samples or assistance with taking samples.

3. Delivery of Samples to test laboratories.

4. Delivery and protection of samples and test equipment at the project site.

D. Coordination: The Contractor and each independent agency engaged to perform inspections,tests and similar services for the project shall coordinate the sequence of their activities so asto accommodate required services with a minimum of delay in the progress of the Work. Inaddition, the Contractor and each independent testing agency shall coordinate their Work soas to avoid the necessity of removing and replacing Work to accommodate inspections andtests. The Contractor is responsible for scheduling times for inspections, tests, taking ofsamples and similar activities.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 REPAIR AND PROTECTION

A. Upon completion of inspection, testing, sample taking and similar services performed on theWork, repair damaged work and restore substrates and finishes to eliminate deficiencies,including deficiencies in the visual qualities of exposed finishes. Comply with the ContractDocument requirements for "Cutting and Patching". Protect Work exposed by or for quality


control service activities, and protect repaired work. Repair and protection is the Contractor'sresponsibility, regardless of the assignment of responsibility for inspection, testing or similarservices.

END OF SECTION

TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 015000-1 TOWN BRANCH WWTP THICKENING

SECTION 015000 - TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS

PART 1 - GENERAL


This section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for temporary services andfacilities, including such items as temporary utility services, temporary construction andsupport facilities, and project security and protection.

A. Use Charges: No cost or usage charges for temporary services or facilities are chargeable tothe Owner or Engineer. Cost or use charges for temporary services or facilities will not beaccepted as a basis of claims for a change-order extra.

B. Temporary utility services required for use at the project site include but are not limited to thefollowing:

1. Water service and distribution.

2. Temporary electric power and light.

3. Telephone service.

4. Storm and sanitary sewer.

5. Provide adequate utility capacity at each stage of construction. Prior to availability oftemporary utilities at the site, provide trucked-in services for start-up of constructionoperations.

6. Obtain and pay for temporary easements required to bring temporary utilities to theproject site, where the Owner's permanent easement cannot be utilized for that purpose.

7. High speed internet service.

C. Temporary construction and support facilities required for the project include but are notlimited to the following:

1. Temporary heat.

2. Field offices and storage sheds.

3. Temporary roads and paving.

4. Sanitary facilities, including drinking water.

5. Dewatering facilities and drains.

6. Temporary enclosures.

7. Project identification, bulletin boards and signs.

8. Waste disposal services.

9. Construction aids and miscellaneous general services and facilities.

10. Alternate temporary services and facilities, equivalent to those specified, may be used,subject to acceptance by the Engineer.


D. Security and protection facilities and services required for the project include but are notlimited to the following:

1. Environmental protection.

2. Alternate security and protection methods or facilities, equivalent to those specified, maybe used, subject to acceptance by the Engineer.


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and SupplementaryConditions and other Division-01 Specification sections, apply to the Work of this Section.

1.03 PROPERTY PROTECTION

A. Care is to be exercised by the Contractor in all phases of construction, to prevent damageand/or injury to the Owner’s and/or other property. Payments for the repair and restorationare limited as set forth in the “Conflict With or Damage to Existing Utilities Facilities” of theSupplementary General Conditions.

B. All exposed existing piping must be immediately supported to prevent damage. Prior tocompletion of each day’s work, such piping must be adequately covered by the Contractorand approved by the Owner’s representative.

C. The Contractor shall avoid unnecessary injury to trees and shall remove only thoseauthorized to be removed by written consent of the Owner. Fences, gates, and terraindamaged or disarranged by the Contractor’s forces shall be immediately restored in theiroriginal condition or better.

1.04 CONSTRUCTION WARNING SIGNS

A. The Contractor shall provide construction warning signs for each location where he is workingin the state highway right-of-way or in City or County streets. He will further provide flagmenas required and shall abide by all Department of Highways safety rules, including size, typeand placement of construction signs. All signs shall be of professional quality.

1.05 ACCESS ROADWAYS

A. The Contractor shall construct all access roadways needed during construction, and theplanned access roadways for the completed project. The Contractor shall maintain accessroadways continuously during the construction period.

B. The Contractor shall maintain all existing roadways within the project site which are used forany purpose by his construction operations. The degree and frequency of maintenance shallbe adequate to keep existing roadways in a condition at least equal to their condition prior toconstruction. Road maintenance shall include daily dust control and grading as necessary onall roads and sweeping of paved roads every other day.

1.06 RESPONSIBILITY FOR TRENCH SETTLEMENT

A. The Contractor shall be responsible for any settlement caused by the construction, thatoccurs within one (1) year after the final acceptance of this Contract by the Owner. Repair ofany damage caused by settlement shall meet the approval of the Owner.

1.07 WASTE DISPOSAL

A. The Contractor shall dispose of waste, including hazardous waste, off-site in accordance withall applicable laws and regulations.


1.08 CONTRACTOR’S TRAILERS AND MATERIAL STORAGE

A. The location of the Contractor’s and Subcontractor’s office and work trailers and parkingareas on the project site shall be subject to the Owner’s approval.

B. The location of the Contractor’s and Subcontractor’s material storage yards on the projectsite shall be subject to the Owner’s approval.


A. Regulations: Comply with requirements of local laws and regulations governing constructionand local industry standards, in the installation and maintenance of temporary services andfacilities, including but not limited to the following:

1. Obtain all permits as required by governing authorities.

2. Obtain and pay for temporary easements required across property other than that ofOwner.

3. Comply with applicable codes.

a. In addition, comply with "Environmental Impact" commitments the Owner or previousOwners of the site may have made to secure approval to proceed with construction ofthe project.

B. Inspections: Inspect and test each service before placing temporary utilities in use. Arrangefor required inspections and tests by governing authorities, and obtain required certificationsand permits for use.

1.10 JOB CONDITIONS

A. General: Provide each temporary service and facility ready for use at each location when theservice or facility is first needed to avoid delay in performance of the Work. Maintain, expandas required, and modify temporary services and facilities as needed throughout the progressof the Work. Do not remove until services or facilities are no longer needed, or are replacedby the authorized use of completed permanent facilities.

1. With the establishment of the job progress schedule, establish a schedule for theimplementation and termination of service for each temporary utility. At the earliestfeasible time, and when acceptable to the Owner and Engineer, change over from theuse of temporary utility service to the use of the permanent service, to enable removal ofthe temporary utility and to eliminate possible interference with completion of the Work.

B. Conditions of Use: Operate temporary services and facilities in a safe and efficient manner.Do not overload temporary services or facilities, and do not permit them to interfere with theprogress of the Work. Do not allow unsanitary conditions, public nuisances or hazardousconditions to develop or persist on the site.

1. Temporary Utilities: Do not permit the freezing of pipes, flooding or the contamination ofwater sources.

2. Temporary Construction and Support Facilities: Maintain temporary facilities in such amanner as to prevent discomfort to users. Take necessary fire prevention measures.Maintain temporary support facilities in a sanitary manner so as to avoid health problemsand other deleterious effects.

3. Security and Protection: Maintain site security and protection facilities in a safe, lawfuland publicly acceptable manner. Take necessary measures to prevent erosion of the site.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS, EQUIPMENT AND SERVICES

A. General: Provide new materials and equipment for temporary services and facilities; usedmaterials and equipment that are undamaged and in serviceable condition may be used, ifacceptable to the Engineer. Provide only materials and equipment that are recognized asbeing suitable for the intended use, by compliance with appropriate standards.

B. Temporary Electricity:

1. Provide temporary electrical service for construction needs, power to all constructiontrailers, and for lighting and heating facilities, throughout construction period.

2. Service shall be adequate for construction use by all trades during construction period.

3. Contractor shall make all necessary arrangements with the power company to obtain thisservice. He shall furnish, erect, and maintain the service pole, wires, main switch,panelboards, outlets, lights and metering facilities as required by the power company andas necessary to provide electrical service throughout the construction site.

4. Contractor shall be responsible for payment of all monthly billing charges for temporaryelectric power. Contractor shall pay costs of equipment, materials, furnishing, installing,maintenance and removal of temporary electric service facilities.

5. Contractor shall pay costs of equipment, furnishing, installing, maintenance and removalof temporary service facilities.

6. Maintenance of temporary electric service shall be the sole responsibility of the GeneralContractor.

C. Temporary Lighting:

1. Furnish and install temporary lighting required for :

a. Construction needs.

b. Safe and adequate working conditions.

c. Public Safety.

d. Security lighting.

e. Temporary office and storage area lighting.

2. As each building is enclosed, temporary lighting shall be furnished to provide not lessthan 10 foot-candles in all areas.

3. Service Periods:

a. Security lighting: All hours of darkness.

b. Safety lighting:

c. Within construction area: All times that authorized personnel are present.

d. Public areas: At all times.


4. Costs of installation and operation: Contractor shall pay all installation, maintenance andremoval costs of temporary lighting.

5. Maintenance of temporary lighting service (replacement of bulbs, etc.) shall be the soleresponsibility of the General Contractor.

D. Temporary Heating and Ventilating

1. Furnish and install temporary heat and ventilation in enclosed areas throughoutconstruction period required to:

a. Facilitate progress of work.

b. Protect work and products against dampness and cold.

c. Prevent moisture condensation on surfaces.

d. Provide suitable ambient temperatures and humidity levels for installation and curingof materials.

e. Provide adequate ventilation to meet health regulations for safe workingenvironment.

f. Heat and ventilate temporary field offices for Contractor and for Engineer, and otherstorage and construction buildings.

g. Allow beneficial occupancy of project, or portion of project, prior to final completion,including air conditioning.

2. Temperatures required in buildings:a. Generally, 24 hours a day: Minimum 40 degrees F. (4.5 degrees C.).

b. 24 hours a day during placing, setting and curing of cementitious materials: Asrequired by specification section for each product.

c. 24 hours a day, seven (7) days prior to, and during, placing of interior finishes;woodwork, flooring, painting and finishing: As required by specification section foreach product.

d. 24 hours a day after application of finishes, and until Substantial Completion:Minimum 70 degrees F. (21 degrees C.).

e. Storage areas: As required by Specification Section for each product.

3. Ventilation Required:

a. General: Prevent hazardous accumulations of dusts, fumes, mists, vapors or gasesin areas occupied during construction.

b. Provide local exhaust ventilation to prevent harmful dispersal of hazardoussubstances into atmosphere of occupied areas.

c. Dispose of exhaust materials in a manner that will not result in harmful exposure topersons.

d. Ventilate storage spaces containing hazardous or volatile materials.

e. Provide adequate ventilation for:


1) Curing installed materials.

2) Dispersal of humidity.

3) Ventilation of temporary sanitary facilities.

f. Duration of operation:

1) At all times personnel occupies an area subject to hazardous accumulationsof harmful elements.

2) Continue operation of ventilation and exhaust system for time after cessationof work process to assure removal of harmful elements.

3) For curing installed materials: As required by specification section forrespective materials.

4) For humidity dispersal: As needed to provide suitable ambient conditions forwork.

4. Contractor shall pay costs of installation, operation, maintenance and removal oftemporary heat and ventilation.

E. Temporary Telephone and Fax Service:

1. Furnish and install temporary telephone service for construction needs throughoutconstruction periods.

2. Pay costs for temporary telephone service including installation, maintenance, andremoval.

3. Pay service costs for all local telephone service.

4. Pay costs of toll charges related to construction of the Project.

5. Do not use Owner's existing telephone system.

F. Temporary Water:

1. Contractor shall make his own arrangements at his own expense for obtaining the watersupply necessary for construction purposes.

2. Contractor shall pay costs of the furnishing, maintaining and removing all temporarywater service equipment, fixtures, hose, piping, etc.

G. Protection and Security:

1. Provide barricades, lanterns and other such signs and signals as may be necessary towarn of the dangers in connection with open excavation and obstructions.

2. Provide an adequate and approved system to secure the project area at all times,especially during non-construction periods; General Contractor shall be solelyresponsible for taking proper security measures.

3. Contractor shall pay all costs for protection and security systems.

H. Sanitary Facilities:


1. The Contractor shall furnish, install and maintain ample sanitary facilities for theworkmen. As the needs arise, enclosed temporary toilets, in sufficient number, shall beplaced as directed by the Engineer. Permanent toilets installed under this Contract shallnot be used during construction. Drinking water shall be provided from a proven safesource so piped or transported as to be kept clean and fresh and served from singleservice containers of satisfactory types.

I. Temporary Protection:

1. Temporary Enclosures:

a. Furnish and install temporary enclosures at doorways, windows and other openingsin exterior walls, as necessitated by weather and other conditions, and when requiredfor the progress of the Work. Temporary doors shall be substantially built and hung,equipped with proper hinges, locks and other necessary hardware and shall beremoved and reset whenever required to accommodate the work of other tradesrequiring their removal. All enclosures shall be maintained in good repair andremoved when no longer needed. Door and window frames and sills shall beprotected as necessary to prevent damage to items during construction.

2. Temporary Covering:

a. Provide substantial temporary wood covering over all floor openings for ducts, shafts,equipment, etc., using rough planking at least two (2) inches thick, cleated togetherand made sufficiently strong and put in place wherever required.

3. Temporary Railing:

a. Temporary railing shall be provided on stairs and around wells, pits and otherlocations where needed, to prevent accidents or injury to persons.

J. Project Sign:

1. The Contractor shall provide sign(s), as detailed hereinafter, near the site of the work.The sign(s) shall set forth the description of the work and the names of the Owner,Engineer, and Contractor, and other information as required.

2. The sign shall be constructed of 3/4-inch thick APA A-B Exterior grade or marineplywood. Posts shall be 4" x 4" of fencing type material. Prime all wood with white primer.

3. The sign shall be maintained in good condition until completion of the project.

K. Contractor’s Field Office:

1. Each Contractor shall establish and maintain a field office on his project and haveavailable at the office a responsible representative who can officially receive instructionsfrom the Engineer. The Contractor’s Field Office shall be provided in accordance withSection 01 52 13.

L. Resident Project Representative’s Field Office:

1. The Contractor shall furnish and maintain a field office for the exclusive use of theResident Project Representative at a location designated by the Engineer and shall be inaccordance with the requirements of Section 01 52 13.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Use qualified tradesmen for installation of temporary services and facilities. Locate temporaryservices and facilities where they will serve the entire project adequately and result inminimum interference with the performance of the Work.

B. Relocate, modify and extend services and facilities as required during the course of work soas to accommodate the entire work of the Project.

3.02 REMOVAL

A. Completely remove temporary materials, equipment, and offices upon completion ofconstruction.

B. Repair damage caused by installation, and restore to specified or original condition.

END OF SECTION


Figure 1: Typical Project Sign


USE THIS SIGN FOR CDBG FUNDED PROJECTS


USE THIS SIGN FOR RD FUNDED PROJECTS

FIELD OFFICES 015213-1 TOWN BRANCH WWTP THICKENING

SECTION 015213 - FIELD OFFICES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 CONTRACTOR'S FIELD OFFICE

A. The Contractor shall establish and maintain a field office on this project and have available atthe office a responsible representative who can officially receive communications from theOwner and the Engineer. The Contractor shall have one complete, up-to-date set ofDrawings, Specifications and Contract Documents (including all Addenda and ChangeOrders) in this office at all times, available for reference at any time. The office shall beprovided with telephone service, toilet facilities, light, air conditioning and heat; the cost ofwhich shall be borne by the Contractor. Notices, instructions, orders, directions or othercommunications from the Engineer, left at this office, shall be considered as received by theContractor.

1.02 RESIDENT REPRESENTATIVE'S FIELD OFFICE

A. The Contractor shall establish and maintain a separate field office for the ResidentRepresentative on this project. The office shall have a minimum of 300 square feet. Theoffice shall be provided with high speed internet service, toilet facilities, lighting, airconditioning and heat; the cost of which shall be borne by the Contractor.

1. The Contractor shall provide:

a. One plan table approximately 3' x 6' with smooth top and appropriate swivel chair.

b. Two additional chairs.

c. Electric lights and outlets as directed.

d. One desk for general office use with appropriate chair.

e. One plan rack.

f. One four-drawer legal size metal filing cabinets with locks.

g. Private telephone with local service paid by the Contractor.

h. One trash can.

i. The Contractor shall have the office cleaned (swept, mopped, dusted, etc.) once perweek.

B. The Contractor shall provide a facsimile (Fax) machine including all costs for supplies andservice for the duration of the project. The Fax machine may be on the same telephone lineas the resident representative's phone, but must have a "delayed" answering switch.

C. The Contractor shall have the Engineer's field office set up and fully operational within two (2)weeks from the date of execution of the Contract.



END OF SECTION

CUTTING AND PATCHING 017329-1 TOWN BRANCH WWTP THICKENING

SECTION 017329 - CUTTING AND PATCHING

PART 1 - GENERAL


A Definition: "Cutting and patching" includes cutting into existing construction to provide for theinstallation or performance of other Work and subsequent fitting and patching required torestore surfaces to their original condition.

B. Cutting and patching" is performed for coordination of the work, to uncover work for access orinspection, to obtain samples for testing, to permit alterations to be performed or for othersimilar purposes upon written instructions of the Engineer.

C. Cutting and patching is performed during the manufacture of products, or during the initialfabrication. Erection or installation processes are not considered to be "cutting and patching"under this definition. Drilling of holes to install fasteners and similar operations are also notconsidered to be "cutting and patching".

D. "Cutting and Patching" includes removal and replacement of Work not conforming torequirements of the Contract Documents, removal and replacement of defective Work, anduncovering Work to provide for installation of ill-timed Work.

E. No Work shall be endangered by cutting or altering Work or any part of it.


A. Drawing and general provisions of Contract, including General and SupplementaryConditions and other Division-1 Specification sections, apply to Work of this Section.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Prior to cutting which affects structural safety of Project, submit written notice to the Engineer,requesting consent to proceed with cutting, including:

1. Identification of Project.

2. Description of affected work.

3. Necessity for cutting.

4. Effect on structural integrity of Project.

5. Description of proposed work. Designate:

a. Scope of cutting and patching.

b. Trades to execute work.

c. Products proposed to be used.

d. Extent of refinishing.

6. Alternatives to cutting and patching.

B. Should conditions of work, or schedule, indicate change of materials or methods, submitwritten recommendation to the Engineer, including:


1. Conditions indicating change.

2. Recommendations for alternative materials or methods.

3. Submittals as required for Substitutions.

C. Submit written notice to the Engineer, designating time Work will be uncovered, to provide forobservation.


A. Requirements for Structural Work: Do not cut and patch structural Work in a manner thatwould result in a reduction of load-carrying capacity or of load-deflection ratio.

B. Operational and Safety Limitations: Do not cut and patch operational elements or safetyrelated components in a manner that would result in a reduction of their capacity to perform inthe manner intended, including energy performance, or that would result in increasedmaintenance, or decreased operational life or decreased energy.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS

A. For replacement of work removed, comply with Specifications for type of work to be done.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 INSPECTION

A. Before cutting, examine the surfaces to be cut and patched and the conditions under whichthe Work is to be performed. If unsafe or otherwise unsatisfactory conditions areencountered, take corrective action before proceeding with the Work.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Temporary Support: To prevent failure, provide temporary support of Work to be cut. Provideshoring, bracing and support as required to maintain structural integrity of project.

B. Protection: Protect other Work during cutting and patching to prevent damage. Provideprotection from adverse weather conditions for that part of the project that may be exposedduring cutting and patching operations. Avoid interference with use of adjoining areas orinterruption of free passage to adjoining areas. Take precautions not to cut existing pipe,conduit or duct serving the building but scheduled to be relocated until provisions have beenmade to bypass them.

3.03 PERFORMANCE

A. General: Employ skilled workmen to perform cutting and patching Work. Except as otherwiseindicated or as approved by the Engineer, proceed with cutting and patching at the earliestfeasible time and complete Work without delay.

B. Cutting: Cut the Work using methods that are least likely to damage work to be retained oradjoining Work. Where possible, review proposed procedures with the original installer;comply with original installer's recommendations.


1. In general, where cutting is required use hand or small power tools designed for sawingor grinding, not hammering and chopping. Cut through concrete and masonry using acutting machine such as a carborundum saw or core drill to insure a neat hole. Cut holesand slots neatly to size required with minimum disturbance of adjacent work. To avoidmarring existing finished surfaces, cut or drill from the exposed or finished side intoconcealed surfaces. Temporarily cover openings when not in use.

2. Comply with requirements of applicable sections of Division 2 where cutting and patchingrequires excavating and backfilling.

3. By-pass utility services such as pipe and conduit, before cutting, where such utilityservices are shown or required to be removed, relocated or abandoned. Cut-off conduitand pipe in wall or partitions to be removed. After by-pass and cutting, cap, valve or plugand seal tight remaining portion of pipe and conduit to prevent entrance of moisture orother foreign matter.

C. Patching: Patch with seams which are durable and as invisible as possible. Comply withspecified tolerances for the Work.

1. Where feasible, inspect and test patched areas to demonstrate integrity of work.

2. Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and where necessary, extend finishrestoration into retained adjoining Work in a manner which will eliminate evidence ofpatching and refinishing.

3. Execute fittings and adjustment of products to provide finished installations to complywith specified tolerances.

4. Restore work which has been cut or removed; install new products to provide completedwork in accord with requirements of Contract Documents.

5. Refinish entire surfaces as necessary to provide an even finish.

a. Continuous Surfaces: To nearest intersection.

b. Assembly: Entire refinishing.

3.04 CLEANING

A. Thoroughly clean areas and spaces where Work is performed or used as access to work.Remove completely point, mortar, oils, putty and items of similar nature. Thoroughly cleanpiping, conduit and similar features before painting or other finishing is applied. Restoredamaged pipe covering to its original condition.

END OF SECTION

CLEANING 017400-1 TOWN BRANCH WWTP THICKENING

SECTION 017400 - CLEANING

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Maintain premises free from accumulations of waste, debris, and rubbish.

B. At completion of work, remove waste materials, rubbish, tools, equipment, machinery andsurplus materials, and clean all exposed surfaces. Leave project clean and ready foroccupancy.


A. Cutting and Patching: Section 01 73 29.

B. Project Closeout: Section 01 77 00.

C. Cleaning for Specific Products of Work: Specification Section for that work.

1.03 SAFETY REQUIREMENTS

A. Hazards Control:

1. Store volatile wastes in covered metal containers, and remove from premises daily.

2. Prevent accumulation of wastes which create hazardous conditions.

3. Provide adequate ventilation during use of violative noxious substances.

B. Conduct cleaning and disposal operations to comply with local ordinances and anti-pollutionlaws.

1. Do not burn or bury rubbish and waste materials on project site.

2. Do not dispose of volatile wastes such as mineral spirits, oil, or paint thinner in storm orsanitary drains.

3. Do not dispose of wastes into streams or waterways.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS

A. Use only cleaning materials recommended by manufacturer of surface to be cleaned.

B. Use cleaning materials only on surfaces recommended by cleaning material manufacturer.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 DURING CONSTRUCTION

A. Execute cleaning to ensure that building, grounds, and public properties are maintained freefrom accumulations of waste materials and rubbish.

CLEANING 017400-2 TOWN BRANCH WWTP THICKENING

B. Wet down dry materials and rubbish to lay dust and prevent blowing dust.

C. At reasonable intervals during progress of work, clean site and public properties, and disposeof waste materials, debris and rubbish.

D. Provide on-site containers for collection of waste materials, debris and rubbish.

E. Remove waste materials, debris and rubbish from site and legally dispose of at public orprivate dumping areas off Owner's property.

F. Handle materials in a controlled manner with as few handlings as possible; do not drop orthrow materials from heights.

G. Schedule cleaning operations so that dust and other contaminants resulting from cleaningprocess will not fall on wet, newly painted surfaces.

3.02 FINAL CLEANING

A. Employ experienced workmen, or professional cleaners, for final cleaning.

B. In preparation for substantial completion or occupancy, conduct final inspection of sight-exposed interior and exterior surfaces, and of concealed spaces.

C. Remove grease, dust, dirt, stains, labels, fingerprints, and other foreign materials, from sight-xposed interior or exterior finished surfaces; polish surfaces so designated to shine finish.

D. Repair, patch and touch up marred surfaces to specified finish, to match adjacent surfaces.

E. Broom clean paved surfaces; rake clean other surfaces of grounds.

F. Maintain cleaning until project, or portion thereof, is occupied by Owner.

END OF SECTION

PROJECT CLOSEOUT 017700-1 TOWN BRANCH WWTP THICKENING

SECTION 017700 - PROJECT CLOSEOUT

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 RELATED REQUIREMENTS SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE

A. Liquidated Damages: Supplemental General Conditions

B. Cleaning: Section 017400.

C. Project Record Documents: Section 017839.

1.02 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION

A. In order to initiate project closeout procedures, the Contractor shall submit the following:

1. Written certification to Engineer that project is Substantially Complete.

2. List of major items to be completed or corrected.

B. Engineer will make an inspection within seven (7) days after receipt of certification, togetherwith Owner's Representative.

C. Should Engineer consider that work is Substantially Complete:

1. Contractor shall prepare, and submit to Engineer, a list of items to be completed orcorrected, as determined by the inspection.

2. Engineer will prepare and issue a Certificate of Substantial Completion, containing:

a. Date of Substantial Completion.

b. Contractor's list of items to be completed or corrected, verified and amended byEngineer.

c. The time within which Contractor shall complete or correct work of listed items.

d. Time and date Owner will assume possession of work or designated portion thereof.

e. Responsibilities of Owner and Contractor for:

1) Insurance

2) Utilities

3) Operation of Mechanical, Electrical, and Other Systems.

4) Maintenance and Cleaning.

5) Security.

f. Signatures of:

1) Engineer

2) Contractor


3) Owner

3. Owner occupancy of Project or Designated Portion of Project:

a. Contractor shall:

1) Obtain certificate of occupancy.

2) Perform final cleaning in accordance with Section 017400.

b. Owner will occupy Project, under provisions stated in Certificates of SubstantialCompletion.

4. Contractor: Complete work listed for completion or correction, within designated time.

D. Should Engineer consider that work is not Substantially Complete:

1. He shall immediately notify Contractor, in writing, stating reasons.

2. Contractor: Complete work, and send second written Engineer, certifying that Project, ordesignated portion of Project is substantially complete.

3. Engineer will reinspect work.

E. Should Engineer consider that work is still not finally complete:

1. He shall notify Contractor, in writing, stating reasons.

2. Contractor shall take immediate steps to remedy the stated deficiencies, and send thirdwritten notice to the Engineer certifying that the work is complete.

3. Engineer and Owner will reinspect work at Contractor's expense.

1.03 FINAL INSPECTION

A. Contractor shall submit written certification that:

1. Contract Documents have been reviewed.

2. Project has been inspected for compliance with Contract Documents.

3. Work has been completed in accordance with Contract Documents.

4. Equipment and systems have been tested in presence of Owner's Representative andare operational.

5. Project is completed, and ready for final inspection.

B. Engineer will make final inspection within seven (7) days after receipt of certification.

C. Should Engineer consider that work is finally complete in accordance with requirements ofContract Documents, he shall request Contractor to make Project Closeout submittals.

D. Should Engineer consider that work is not finally complete:

1. He shall notify Contractor in writing, stating reasons.


2. Contractor shall take immediate steps to remedy the stated deficiencies, and sendsecond written notice to Engineer certifying that work is complete.

3. Engineer will reinspect work.

1.04 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Project Record Documents: To requirements of Section 017839.

B. Guarantees, Warranties and Bonds: To requirements of particular technical Specificationsand Section 017834.

1.05 INSTRUCTION

A. Instruct Owner's personnel in operation of all systems, mechanical, electrical, and otherequipment.

1.06 FINAL APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT

A. Contractor shall submit final applications in accordance with requirements of GeneralConditions.

1.07 FINAL CERTIFICATE FOR PAYMENT

A. Engineer will issue final certificate in accordance with provisions of general conditions.

B. Should final completion be materially delayed through no fault of Contractor, Engineer mayissue a Semi-Final Certificate for Payment.



END OF SECTION

OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 017823-1 TOWN BRANCH WWTP THICKENING

SECTION 017823 – OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Compile product data and related information appropriate for Owner's maintenance andoperation of equipment furnished under the Contract. Prepare operating and maintenancedata as specified.

B. In addition to maintenance and operations data, the manufacturer's printed recommendedinstallation practice shall also be included. If not part of the operations and maintenancemanual, separate written installation instructions shall be provided, serving to assist theContractor in equipment installation.

C. Related requirements specified elsewhere:

1. Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples: 01 33 23.

2. Project Closeout: Section 01 77 00.

3. Project Record Documents: Section 01 78 39.

4. Warranties and Bonds: Section 01 78 34.


A. Preparation of data shall be done by personnel:

1. Trained and experienced in maintenance and operation of the described products.

2. Completely familiar with requirements of this Section.

3. Skilled as a technical writer to the extent required to communicate essential data.

4. Skilled as a draftsman competent to prepare required drawings.

1.03 SUBMITTAL SCHEDULE

A. Submit one (1) printed copy of operation and maintenance data for each item of equipmentprior to 80% completion of the Contract. Binder is not required for Preliminary submittals.Digital submittal is NOT required for preliminary review.

B. Upon approval of ALL O&M submittal items, the complete manual shall be assembled asdescribed in the following sections.

C. The complete, assembled Operation and Maintenance Manual shall be submitted ten (10)days prior to final inspection or acceptance to the Owner. Provide a total of two (2) hardcopies and one (1) digital copy of the complete manual. Do not submit individual equipmentitems as final O&M manuals. The final submittal shall be the COMPLETE assembledmanual, with a master table of contents included.

1.04 FORM OF SUBMITTALS

A. Format: Preliminary submittals may be made of each individual item of equipment. The finalO & M Manual shall be assembled by combining the individual equipment submittals in oneor more 3-ring binder(s). Large equipment operating and maintenance instructions may be


contained in their individual binder(s). Smaller O&M instructions shall be assembled in abinder, with the sections separated by a tabbed divider page, and a table of contents.

1. Size: 8-1/2 in. x 11 in.

2. Paper: 20 pound minimum, white, for typed pages.

3. Text: Manufacturer's printed data, or neatly typewritten.

4. Photo copies must be clear and legible.

5. Drawings:

a. Provide reinforced punched binder tab, bind in with text.

b. Fold large drawings to the size of the text pages where feasible.

c. For flow or piping diagrams that cannot be detailed on the standard size drawings, alarger, appropriate size drawing may be submitted and supplied in a properly markedmap packet.

6. Provide fly-leaf for each separate product, or each piece of operating equipment.

a. Provide typed description of product, and major component parts of equipment.

b. Provide indexed tabs.

7. Cover: Identify each volume with types or printed title "OPERATING ANDMAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS". List:

a. Title of Project.

b. Identity of separate structure as applicable.

c. Identity of general subject matter covered in the manual.

B. Binders:

1. Commercial quality, durable and cleanable, 3-ring binders, with oil and moisture resistanthard covers.

2. Imprinted on the front cover and side of each binder shall be the name of the Plant, theContract Number and title of equipment.

3. Binders shall be new and not recycled from a prior data manual.

1.05 CONTENTS OF MANUAL

A. Table of Contents: Each item shall be placed in a logical sequential order, according to theoperating process of the facility as shown on the Hydraulic Profile in the Contract Drawings.

B. Content, for each unit of equipment and system, as appropriate:

1. Process Description: Detailed description of the process and operation functions asapplicable.


2. Component Instructions: Instructions for all components of the equipment whethermanufactured by the supplier or not, including valves, controllers and othermiscellaneous components.

3. Component Data: Description of unit and component parts.

a. Function, normal operating characteristics, and limiting conditions.

b. Performance curves, engineering data and tests.

c. Complete nomenclature and commercial number of all replaceable parts.

d. Exploded and/or sectional drawing views.

e. Piping diagrams numbered to correspond to the installation.

f. Equipment model number and serial number.

4. Control and Wiring Diagrams:

a. Internal and external wiring diagrams numbered to correspond to the installation.

b. Control circuit diagrams

c. One line diagrams

d. P&ID drawings

e. As-installed control diagrams by controls supplier.

5. Operating procedures:

a. Start-up, break-in, routine and normal operating instructions.

b. Regulation, control, stopping, shutdown and emergency instructions.

c. Summer and winter operating instructions.

d. Special operating instructions.

e. Description of sequence of operation by control supplier.

6. Maintenance Procedures:

a. Routine operations.

b. Guide to "trouble-shooting".

c. Disassembly, repair and reassembly.

d. Alignment, adjusting and checking.

e. Equipment parts list.

f. Original manufacturer's parts list, illustrations, assembly drawings and diagramsrequired for maintenance.

1) Predicted life of parts subject to wear.


g. Local service center.

7. Lubrication and Service schedule.

a. Preventative maintenance schedule.

b. Component lubrication and servicing interval schedule.

c. List of lubricants and/or filters required.

d. Lubrication and servicing procedures.

8. Recommended spare parts list and quantities.

9. Guide to "trouble-shooting".

10. Plant specific instructions:

a. Each Contractor's coordination drawings.

b. As-installed color coded piping diagrams.

c. Detailed specific “Sequence of Operation” for the constructed plant or project.

d. Charts of valve tag numbers, if appropriate, with the location and function of eachvalve.

11. Plant specific start-up and shut-down procedures.

12. Detailed instructions for emergency operation

13. Other data as required under pertinent sections of Specifications.

C. Content, for each electrical system, as appropriate:

1. Description of system and component parts.

a. Function, normal operating characteristics, and limiting conditions.

b. Performance curves, engineering data and tests.

c. Complete nomenclature and commercial number of replacement parts.

2. Circuit directories of panel boards.

a. Electrical service.

b. Controls.

c. Communications.

3. As-installed color-coded wiring diagrams.

4. Operating procedures:

a. Routine and normal operating instructions.

b. Sequences required.


c. Special operating instructions.

5. Maintenance procedures:

a. Routine operations.

b. Guide to "trouble-shooting".

c. Disassembly, repair and reassembly.

d. Adjustment and checking.

6. Manufacturer's printed operating and maintenance instructions.

7. List of original manufacturer's recommended spare parts, manufacturer's current prices,and recommended quantities to be maintained in storage.

D. Prepare and include additional data when the need for such data becomes apparent duringinstruction of Owner's personnel.

E. Additional requirements for operating and maintenance data: The respective section ofSpecifications.



END OF SECTION

GRW Std.7/10 OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS 017823-6

Project Name

Project Number

Manufacturer Submittals/

Operation and Maintenance Manual Review Guide

Em

er g

en

cy

Op

era

ti on

Ma

inte

na

nce

Pro

ce

du

res

Lu

bric

at io

nS

c he

d ul e

Equipment Items Co

nt r

olD

iag

r am

s

Mo

de

l/S

er i

alN

um

be

r

Pla

nt

Sp

eci fi

cIn

str

uct io

ns

Pa

r ts

Li s

t

Sp

ar e

Part

sL

i st

Tr o

ub

l esho

otin

gG

ui d

e

St a

r t-u

p/S

hu

t-D

ow

n

Notes

Spec

Section Co

mp o

ne

ntIn

s tru

ctio

ns

Pr o

cess

De s

c rip

ti on

I nitia

lSu

bm

it ta

lD

ate

Form

at/B

inde

r /T

OC

Ma

nu

f ac t

ure

rD

ata

Op

er a

t ing

Pr o

ce

du

res

WARRANTIES AND BONDS 017834-1 TOWN BRANCH WWTP THICKENING

SECTION 017834 - WARRANTIES AND BONDS

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Compile specified warranties and bonds.

B. Compile specified service and maintenance contracts.

C. Co-execute submittals when so specified.

D. Review submittals to verify compliance with Contract Documents.

E. Submit to Engineer for review and transmittal to Owner. Comply with provisions of Section013323.


A. Bid Bond: Instructions to Bidders.

B. Performance and Payment Bonds: General Conditions and Supplemental GeneralConditions.

C. Guaranty: General Conditions and Supplemental General Conditions.

D. General Warranty of Construction: General Conditions.

E. Project Closeout: Section 017700.

F. Warranties and Bonds required for specific products: As listed in technical specifications inthese Contract Documents herein.

G. Provisions of Warranties and Bonds, Duration: Respective specification sections for particularproducts.

1.03 SUBMITTALS REQUIREMENTS

A. Assemble warranties, bonds and service and maintenance contracts, executed by each ofthe respective manufacturers, suppliers and subcontractors.

B. Furnish two (2) original signed copies.

C. Table of Contents: Neatly typed, in orderly sequence. Provide complete information for eachitem.

1. Product, equipment or work item.

2. Firm name, address and telephone number.

3. Scope

4. Date of beginning of warranty, bond or service and maintenance contract.

5. Duration of warranty, bond or service and maintenance contract.

6. Provide information for Owner's personnel:

WARRANTIES AND BONDS 017834-2 TOWN BRANCH WWTP THICKENING

a. Proper procedure in case of failure.

b. Instances which might affect the validity of warranty or bond.

7. Contractor name, address and telephone number.

1.04 FORM OF SUBMITTALS

A. Prepare in duplicate packets.

B. Format:

1. Size 8-1/2 in. x 11 in., punch sheets for 3-ring binder.

a. Fold larger sheets to fit into binders.

2. Cover: Identify each packet with typed or printed title "WARRANTIES AND BONDS." List:

a. Title of Project

b. Name of Contractor

C. Binders: Commercial quality, three-ring, with durable and cleanable plastic covers.

1.05 TIME OF SUBMITTALS

A. For equipment or component parts of equipment put into service during progress ofconstruction:

1. Submit documents within 10 days after inspection and acceptance.

B. Otherwise make submittals within 10 days after date of substantial completion, prior to finalrequest for payment.

C. For items of work, where acceptance is delayed materially beyond the Date of SubstantialCompletion, provide updated submittal within 10 days after acceptance, listing the date ofacceptance as the start of the warranty period.

1.06 SUBMITTALS REQUIRED

A. Submit warranties, bonds, service and maintenance contracts as specified in the respectivesections of the Specifications.



END OF SECTION

PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 017839-1 TOWN BRANCH WWTP THICKENING

SECTION 017839 - PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 MAINTENANCE OF DOCUMENTS

A. Maintain at job site, one copy of:

1. Contract Drawings

2. Specifications

3. Addenda

4. Reviewed Shop Drawings

5. Change Orders

6. Other Modifications to Contract

B. Store documents in approved location, apart from documents used for construction.

C. Provide files and racks for storage of documents.

D. Maintain documents in clean, dry, legible condition.

E. Do not use record documents for construction purposes.

F. Make documents available at all times for inspection by Engineer and Owner.

1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE

A. Shop Drawings, Product Data, and Samples: Section 01 33 23.

1.03 MARKING DEVICES

A. Provide colored pencil or felt-tip marking pen for all marking.

1.04 RECORDING

A. Label each document "PROJECT RECORD" in 2-inch high printed letters.

B. Keep record documents current.

C. Do not permanently conceal any work until required information has been recorded.

D. Contract Drawings: Legibly mark to record actual construction:

1. Horizontal and vertical location of underground utilities and appurtenances referenced topermanent surface improvements.

2. Location of internal utilities and appurtenances concealed in construction referenced tovisible and accessible features of structure.

3. Field changes of dimension and detail.

4. Changes made by Change Order or Field Order.

PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 017839-2 TOWN BRANCH WWTP THICKENING

5. Details not on original Contract Drawings.

E. Specifications and Addenda: Legibly mark up each section to record:

1. Manufacturer, trade name, catalog number, and supplier of each product and item ofequipment actually installed.

2. Changes made by Change Order or Field Order.

3. Other matters not originally specified.

F. Shop Drawings: Maintain as record documents; legibly annotate shop drawings to recordchanges made after review. Coordinate and confirm with Engineer that electronic mediaversions of all shop drawings have been provided to Engineer.

1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. At completion of project, deliver record documents to Engineer.

B. Accompany submittal with transmittal letter, in duplicate, containing:

1. Date.

2. Project Title and Number.

3. Contractor's Name and Address.

4. Title and Number of each Record Document.

5. Certification that each Document as Submitted is Complete and Accurate.

6. Signature of Contractor, or His Authorized Representative.



END OF SECTION

DIVISION 02

EXISTING CONDITIONS

DEMOLITION AND SALVAGE 024100-1 TOWN BRANCH WWTP THICKENING

SECTION 024100 - DEMOLITION & SALVAGE

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Provide all labor, materials, equipment and services required for demolition as shown on theDrawings and specified herein.


A. Earthwork: Section 31 20 00

1.03 PROCEDURE

A. The procedures proposed for the accomplishment of salvage and demolition work shall besubmitted for review. The procedures shall provide for safe conduct of the work, carefulremoval and disposition of materials specified to be salvaged, protection of property which isto remain undisturbed, coordination with other work in progress and timely disconnection ofutility services. The procedures shall include a detailed description of the methods andequipment to be used for each operation, and the sequence of operations.

B. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to visit the site to familiarize himself with the amountof Work that is included under this Section.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 DUST CONTROL

A. The amount of dust resulting from the demolition shall be controlled to prevent the spread ofdust to occupied portions of the plant and to avoid creation of a nuisance in the surroundingarea. Use of water will not be permitted when it will result in, or create, hazardous orobjectionable conditions such as ice, flooding and pollution.

3.02 DISCONNECTION OF UTILITY SERVICES

A. Utilities shall be disconnected at the points indicated by the Owner or Engineer and left in asafe condition.

3.03 BURNING

A. The use of burning at the project site for the disposal of refuse and debris will not bepermitted, unless authorized in writing by the Owner.

3.04 PROTECTION OF EXISTING WORK

A. Existing work to remain shall be protected from damage. Work damaged by the Contractorshall be repaired to match existing work.

3.05 BACKFILL OF STRUCTURES

A. All existing structures to be abandoned shall have equipment removed and walls demolisheda minimum of two feet below finish grade. The portion of the demolished structures

DEMOLITION AND SALVAGE 024100-2 TOWN BRANCH WWTP THICKENING

remaining below grade shall be backfilled with concrete, masonry, etc., from the demolition orany backfill material which is acceptable to the Engineer. The top two (2) feet of the backfillshall be made up of topsoil and graded to match the existing ground. It shall be free of any ofthe demolition material. The entire backfill shall be compacted in such a manner as toprevent settlement.

B. All existing demolished basins shall have some method of positive drainage thru the bottomslab as approved by the Engineer.

C. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to dispose of all excess demolition material from thesite as soon as practicable.

3.06 SALVAGE MATERIAL

A. All equipment, pumps, controls, valves, piping, etc., is the property of the Owner and careshall be taken in its removal so not to damage it in any way. Such salvage material shall beremoved and delivered to the Owner to a site designated by him. The Owner has the right torefuse any salvage material, and in such cases it is the responsibility of the Contractor todispose of the unwanted material.

END OF SECTION 024100

DIVISION 03

CONCRETE

CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033100-1 TOWN BRANCH WWTP THICKENING

SECTION 033100 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Provide all labor, materials, equipment and services required to furnish and install all cast-in-place concrete as indicated on the Drawings and specified herein.

B. All concrete construction shall conform to all applicable requirements of ACI 301 (latest),Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings, except as modified by the supplementalrequirements specified herein.


A. Earthwork: Section 31 20 00

1.03 SUBMITTALS

The Contractor shall submit the following data for Engineer's review in accordance withSection 01 33 23.

A. Concrete mixture proportions, test results and curves plotted to establish water-cementitiousmaterials ratio if ACI 301-05 Section 4.2.3.4.b is followed.

B. Proposed mix designs and all necessary substantiating data used to establish the proposedmix designs if ACI 301-05 Section 4.2.3.1 is followed.

C. Mix designs shall be submitted for all mixes proposed or required to be used, including allmixes containing admixtures.

D. A certified copy of the control records of the proposed production facility establishing thestandard deviation as defined in Paragraph 4.2.3.2. of ACI 301.

E. Submit shop drawings as specified in ACI 301. Submit shop drawing showing the location ofproposed construction and control joints separate from the steel reinforcement shopdrawings.

1. Construction Joints

2. Control Joints

3. Steel Reinforcement


The Contractor shall obtain and have available in the field office at all times, the followingreferences:

A. ACI 301 Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings ACI 301 (latest Revision).

B. SP-15 (05) Field Reference Manual: Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings withselected ACI references.

Available from:

The American Concrete Institute


Publications DepartmentP.O. Box 9094Farmington Hills, Michigan 48333-9094

C. Manual of Standard Practice - CRSI. (Latest Edition).

D. Placing Reinforcing Bars - CRSI (Latest Edition).

Available from:

Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute933 North Plum Grove RoadSchaumburg, Illinois 60173-4758

E. ACI 318-08 Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete and Commentary.

F. ACI 347 Guide to Form Work for Concrete.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 CLASSES OF CONCRETE AND USAGE

A. Structural concrete of the various classes required shall be proportioned by either Method 1or Method 2 of ACI 301 to produce the following 28-day compressive strengths:

1. Selection of Proportions for Class A Concrete:

a. 4,500 psi compressive for strength at 28 days.

b. Type II cement plus supplementary cementitious materials.

c. Max. water-cementitious materials ratio = 0.45.

d. Min. cement content = 584 lbs.

e. Nominal max. size coarse aggregate = No. 67 (3/4" max.) or No. 57 (1" max.). Wallswith architectural treatment shall use No. 67 (3/4" max.).

f. Air content = 6% plus or minus 1% by volume.

g. Slump = 3" - 4" when tested in accordance with ASTM C 143/C 143M. Slump shallnot exceed 8 inches when high-range water-reducers are used.

2. Selection of Proportions for Class B Concrete:

a. 3,000 psi compressive strength at 28 days.

b. Type I cement plus supplementary cementitious materials.

c. Max. water-cementitious materials ratio = 0.45.

d. Min. cement content = 470 lbs. (5.0 bags)/cu. yd. concrete.

e. Nominal max. size coarse aggregate = No. 67 (3/4" max.) or No. 57 (1" max). Wallswith architectural treatment shall use No. 67 (3/4" max.).

f. Air content = 6% plus or minus 1% by volume.


g. Slump = 3" - 4" when tested in accordance with ASTM C 143/C 143M. Slump shallnot exceed 8 inches when high-range water-reducers are used.

B. Concrete shall be used as follows:

1. Class A concrete for all concrete work except as noted below.

2. Class B concrete for fill concrete, thrust blocks and topping over hollow-core slabs, andwhere indicated on the Drawings.

C. Type II cement conforming to ASTM C 150 shall be used in all structural concrete. Cementfor exposed to view concrete shall have a uniform color classification.

D. Coarse aggregate for concrete shall be size No. 57, as specified in ASTM C 33 unless asmaller size aggregate is required to conform to provisions of Section 4.2.2.3 of ACI 301.Coarse aggregate shall conform to all requirements of ASTM C 33.

E. Manufactured sand shall not be used as fine aggregate in concrete.

2.02 ADMIXTURES

A. An air entraining admixture shall be used on all concrete exposed to freezing and thawingcycles. Product shall be MB-AE 90, MB-VR or Micro Air by BASF Construction Chemicals orapproved equal. Certification attesting to the percent of effective solids and compliance ofthe material with ASTM C 260 shall be furnished, if requested.

B. Water-Reducing Admixture shall conform to ASTM C 494/C 494M Type A. Product shall be“Pozzolith” Series or “PolyHeed” Series by BASF Construction Chemicals or approved equal.

C. High-Range Water-Reducing Admixture shall conform to ASTM C 494/C 494M Type F.Product shall be Rheobuild 1000, “Glenium” Series or PS 1466 by BASF ConstructionChemicals or approved equal.

D. Accelerating Admixture shall conform to ASTM C 494/C 494M Type C or E. Products shall bePozzolith NC 534 or Pozzutec 20+ by BASF Construction Chemicals or approved equal.

E. Retarding Admixture shall conform to ASTM C 494/C 494M Type B or D. Product shall be“Pozzolith” Series or “DELVO” Series by BASF Construction Chemicals.

F. A water-reducing, set controlling admixture (nonlignin type) shall be used in all concrete. Theadmixture shall be a combination of polyhydroxylated polymers including catalysts andcomponents to produce the required setting time based on job site conditions, specified earlystrength development, finishing characteristics required, and surface texture, as determinedby the Engineer.

G. Certification shall be furnished attesting that the admixture exceeds the physicalrequirements of ASTM C 494, Type A, water-reducing and normal setting admixture, andwhen required, for ASTM C 494, Type D, water-reducing and retarding admixture when usedwith local materials with which the subject concrete is composed.

H. The admixture manufacturer, when requested, shall provide a qualified concrete technicianemployed by the manufacturer to assist in proportioning concrete for optimum use. He shallalso be available when requested to advise on proper addition of the admixture to theconcrete and on adjustment of the concrete mix proportions to meet changing job conditions.

I. The use of admixtures to retard setting of the concrete during hot weather, to acceleratesetting during cold weather, and to reduce water content without impairing workability will bepermitted if the following conditions are met:


J. The admixture shall conform to ASTM C494, except that the durability factor for concretecontaining the admixture shall be at least 100 percent of control, the water content amaximum of 90 percent of control and length change shall not be greater than control, asdefined in ASTM C 494.

K. Where the Contractor finds it impractical to employ fully the recommended procedures for hotweather concreting, the Engineer may at his discretion, require the use of a set retardingadmixture for mass concrete 2.5 feet or more thick for all concrete whenever the temperatureat the time concrete is cast exceeds 80oF. The admixture shall be selected by the Contractorsubject to the review of the Engineer. The admixture and concrete containing the admixtureshall meet all the requirements of these Specifications. Preliminary tests of this concreteshall be required at the Contractor's expense.

L. When more than one (1) admixture is used, all admixtures shall be compatible. They shouldpreferably be by the same manufacturer.

M. Calcium chloride will not be permitted as an admixture in any concrete.

2.03 REINFORCEMENT

A. The minimum yield strength of the reinforcement shall be 60,000 pounds per square inch.Bar reinforcement shall conform to the requirements of ASTM A 615/A 615M. All barreinforcement shall be deformed.

B. Wire-mesh reinforcement shall be continuous between expansion joints. Laps shall be atleast one full mesh plus 2 inches, staggered to avoid continuous lap in either direction, andsecurely wired or clipped with standard clips.

C. Smooth dowels shall be plain steel bars conforming to ASTM A 615/A615M, Grade 60, orsteel pipe conforming to ASTM A 120, Schedule 80. Pipe, if used, shall be closed flush ateach end with mortar or metal or plastic cap. Dowels shall be installed at right angles toconstruction joints and expansion joints. Dowels shall be accurately aligned parallel to thefinished surface, and shall be rigidly held in place and supported during placing of theconcrete. One end of dowels shall be oiled or greased or dowels shall be coated with highdensity polyethylene with a minimum thickness of 14 mils.

D. Reinforcement supports and other accessories in contact with the forms for members whichwill be exposed to view in the finished work shall be of stainless steel or shall have approvedhigh-density polyethylene tips so that the metal portion shall be at least one-quarter of aninch from the form or surface. Supports for reinforcement, when in contact with the ground orstone fill, shall be precast stone concrete blocks. Particular attention is directed to therequirement of Paragraph 3.3.2.4 of ACI Standard 301. These requirements apply to allreinforcement, whether in walls or other vertical elements, inclined elements or flatwork.

E. Particular care shall be taken to bend tie wire ends away from exposed faces of beams, slabsand columns. In no case shall ends of tie wires project toward or touch formwork.

2.04 OTHER MATERIALS

A. Anchorage items shall be of standard manufacture and of type required to engage with theanchors to be installed therein under other sections of the Specifications and shall be subjectto approval by the Engineer.

1. Slots shall be galvanized dovetail-type as specified in Section "Masonry Work".

2. Inserts shall be malleable iron or steel, and of sturdy design adequate strength for theload to be carried. All inserts shall be galvanized. Adjustable wedge inserts shall havean integral loop or strap at the back, or shall be slotted to receive a special-headed bolt


not smaller than 5/8-inch in diameter and of the required length and fitted with hexagonalnut. Other inserts shall be either threaded or slotted as required by their usage.Threaded inserts shall have integral lugs to prevent running.

3. Concrete anchors shall be an approved expansion type conforming to FederalSpecification FF-S-325, Groups I, II, III, or VIII and shall be installed in strict accordancewith the manufacturer's recommendations. Material for anchors shall be as specified inSection 05500 "Miscellaneous Metals". Anchors shall develop ultimate shear and pull outloads of not less than the following values in Class A concrete:

Bolt Diameter Min. Shear Min. Pull-Out Load(Inches) (Pounds) (Pounds)

2 4,500 4,6005/8 6,900 7,7003/4 10,500 9,900

B. Epoxy bonding adhesive used to bond fresh plastic concrete to sound, hardened concreteshall meet the following Specification. Contractor shall furnish a notarized certification by themanufacturer that the proposed material meets the Specification.

1. Material: The epoxy material shall consist of a 2-component system whose componentsconform to the following requirements:

a. Component A - Component A shall be a modified epoxy resin of the epichlorohydrinbisphenol A condensation type, containing suitable viscosity control agents andhaving an epoxide equivalent of 180-200.

b. Component B - The B component shall be primarily a reaction product of one mole ofan aliphatic polyamine and two moles of mono-functional epoxide containingcompounds modified with 2, 4, 6 tri (dimethylaminomethyl) phenol.

c. The component ratio of B to A by volume shall be as specified by the manufacturer.

2. Properties of Mixed Components:

a. Solids Content 100% by weight

b. Pot Life 25-35 min. @ 73oF.

c. Tack-Free Time 4-5-1/2 hrs @ (Thin Film) 73oF.

d. Final Cure ASTM D 695 3 days at 73oF. (75% ultimate strength)

e. Initial Viscosity (A+B) 2,000 cps. min at 73oF.

f. Color Mixed Straw

3. Properties of Cured Material (Neat Material):

a. Tensile Strength 3,000 psi min. @

ASTM D 638 14 days 73oF. cure

b. Tensile Elongation 2 - 2% at 14

ASTM D 638 modified days 73oF. cure


c. Compressive Strength 12,500 psi min. at

ASTM D 695 73o F. cure

d. Compressive Modules 470,000 psi min. @

ASTM D 695 28 days, 73oF cure

e. Compressive Strength 5,500 psi min. @

ASTM D 695 24 days 73oF cure

f. Water Pick-up 1.5 max.

ASTM D 570

C. Flashing reglets shall be as specified in Section 075300. Reglets shall be correctly placedinto forms prior to placing concrete in formwork.

D. Premolded expansion-joint filler strips shall conform to ASTM D 1752 and shall be 3/8-inchthick unless otherwise shown.

E. Joint sealants shall conform to ANSI A 116.1. The following joint sealants are acceptable:

1. Colma by Sika Chemical Corporation

2. Hornflex by A.C. Horn, Inc.

3. Sonolastic by BASF Construction Chemicals.

F. Nonshrink grout shall be Embeco 885 grout by BASF Construction Chemicals, Euco Firmixgrout by the Euclid Chemical Company, or approved equal. The approved product shall bedelivered to the site of the Work in the original sealed containers, each bearing the tradename of the material and the name of the manufacturer.

G. Hardeners and dustproofers shall be colorless, aqueous solution of zinc or magnesiumfluosilicate. Each gallon of solution used for the first application shall contain not less thanone pound of crystals. Each gallon of solution used for subsequent application shall containnot less than two pounds of crystals. Materials shall be reviewed by the Engineer. Productshall be Lapidolith by BASF Construction Chemicals or approved equal.

H. Porous fill shall be crushed rock or gravel of such size that all will pass a 1-1/2 inch screenand not more than 5 percent will pass a No. 4 screen, free from earth clay or other foreignsubstances.

I. Waterstops: Waterstops shall be polyvinyl chloride, flat dumbbell shape (no center bulb), ofsize shown on Drawings, complete with fittings as required such as unions, vertical tees,vertical ells, flat crosses, flat ells, flat tees, etc. Waterstops shall be securely wired into placeto maintain proper position during placement of fresh concrete, as shown on the Drawings.Care shall be taken in the installation of the waterstop and the placing of the concrete toavoid "folding" while concrete is being placed, and to prevent voids in the concretesurrounding the waterstop.

J. Form Liners: Form liners for construction of fluted wall treatment shall be prefabricatedplastic liners as manufactured by Greenstreak Plastic Products, Interform Company, orSymons Corporation.


1. Liners shall be fiberglass or ABS (acrylonitrile - butadiene - styrene) of such configurationas to obtain the fluted pattern shown or indicated on the Drawings.

2. For purposes of designating type and quality of material required, form liners shall bepattern 361 trapezoidal liners as manufactured by Greenstreak Plastic Products.

3. Preparation of forming materials, sealing of joints to prevent grout leakage and formrelease treatment (if required) shall be in strict compliance with the manufacturer's printedinstructions and recommendations.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 FINISHES

A. Exposed to Public View Concrete Surfaces:

1. All concrete exposed to view in the completed structure shall be produced usingmaterials and workmanship to such quality that only nominal finishing will be required.The provisions of paragraphs 6.2.2.1 and 6.3.6 of ACI 301 shall apply to all exteriorexposed to public view concrete surfaces, including the outside surfaces of tanks.

2. Forms for exposed concrete surfaces shall be exterior grade, high-density overlayplywood, steel, or wood forms with smooth tempered hard-board form-liners.

3. Forms shall be coated with an approved release agent before initial pour and betweensubsequent pours, in accordance with the manufacturer's printed instructions. Formboards shall not be wet prior to placing concrete.

4. Recessed joints in concrete shall be formed using lacquer-coated wood battens or forms,milled to indicated profiles. Battens and corner strips shall be carefully inspected beforeconcrete is placed and damaged pieces replaced.

5. Chamfer strips shall be one (1) inch radius with leg, polyvinyl chloride strips by GatewayBuilding Products, Saf-T-Grip Specialties Corp., Vinylex Corp., or equal.

6. Form panels shall be provided in the maximum sized practicable in order to minimizeform joints. Wherever practicable, form joints shall occur at recessed joints. All formjoints in exterior exposed to view surfaces shall be carefully caulked with an approvednonstaining caulking compound. Joints shall not be taped. Form oil or other materialwhich will impart a stain to the concrete shall not be allowed to contact concrete surfaces.

7. Care shall be taken to prevent chipping of corners or other damage to concrete whenforms are removed. Exposed corners and other surfaces which may be damaged byensuing operations shall be protected from damage by boxing, corner boards or otherapproved means until construction is completed.

8. Form ties shall remain in the walls and shall be equipped with a waterseal to preventpassage of water through the walls. Minimum set back of form ties shall be 1-1/2 inchesfrom faces of wall. The hole left by removal of tie ends shall be sealed and grouted inaccordance with the procedure described hereinafter in Par. 3.01.F. Form ties will bepermitted to fall within as-cast areas of architecturally treated wall surfaces; this does notapply to walls receiving decorative waterproof masonry coating.

9. All formed exposed to view concrete surfaces shall have a "smooth rubbed finish".Exterior vertical surfaces shall be rubbed to one foot below grade. Interior exposed topublic view vertical surfaces of liquid containers shall be rubbed to one (1) foot below theminimum liquid level that will occur during normal operations.


B. All vertical surfaces in liquid containing structures shall have a "smooth form" finish.

1. All "smooth form" concrete vertical surfaces shall be a true plane within 1/4 inch in ten(10) feet as determined by a ten (10) foot straightedge placed anywhere on the surface inany direction. Abrupt irregularities shall not exceed 1/8 inch.

C. Basin, flume, conduit and tank floors shall have a "troweled" finish unless shown otherwise onDrawings.

D. Weirs and overflow surfaces shall be given a "troweled" finish.

E. Exterior platforms, steps and landings, shall be given a "broom" finish. "Broom" finish shallbe applied to surfaces which have been steel-troweled to an even, smooth finish. Thetroweled surface shall then be broomed with a fiber-bristle brush in the direction transverse tothat of the main traffic.

F. Patching of holes due to removal of tie ends and other repairable defective areas, shall be asfollows: Entire contact area of hole shall be coated with two-part moisture insensitive epoxybonding compound as specified in Par. 2.04.B. in accordance with manufacturer'sspecifications, and prior to placing of freshly mixed patching mortar. Parching mortar shall bemixed and placed in general accordance with ACI 301, Par. 5.3.7.5.

G. For floors and slabs in which drains occur, special care shall be exercised to slope the floorsuniformly to the drains. All floors with drains shall be sloped not less than 1/8 inch per footunless otherwise shown. In all areas where quarry tile or other materials requiring more than1/4 inch drop are to be overlaid, the concrete base slab shall be depressed to provide afinished floor at the same elevation as surrounding areas.

3.02 TESTING

A. All testing shall be in accordance with provisions of ACI 301. Testing services listed in ACISections 1.6.4 shall be performed by a testing agency acceptable to the Engineer andOwner.

B. The testing services of ACI sections 1.6.4.2 and 1.6.4.3 shall be performed at theContractor’s expense. The Owner-approved third party testing agency shall be responsiblefor making concrete test cylinders, storing and protecting concrete cylinders and deliveringcylinders to the Owner-approved testing laboratory.

C. Testing services of ACI Section 1.6.4.4 shall be paid for by the Contractor. Test shall bemade for each 50 cubic yards of concrete and/or each day concrete is placed.

3.03 ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Unless otherwise directed by the Engineer, the vertical surfaces of footings shall be formed.Excavations and reinforcement for all footings shall have been inspected by the Engineerbefore any concrete is placed.

B. The installation of underground and embedded items shall be inspected before slabs areplaced. Pipes and conduits shall be installed below the concrete unless otherwise indicated.Fill required to raise the subgrade shall be placed as specified in Section 312000"Earthwork". Porous fill not less than 6 inches in compacted thickness shall be installedunder all slabs, tank bottoms, and foundations. The fill shall be leveled and uniformlycompacted to a reasonably true and even surface. The surfaces shall be clean, free fromfrost, ice, mud and water. Waterproof paper, polyethylene sheeting of nominal 4-milminimum thickness, or polyethylene-coated burlap shall be laid over all surfaces receivingconcrete.


C. Concrete shall be placed in layers not over 18 inches deep and each layer shall becompacted by mechanical internal-vibrating equipment supplemented by hand spading,rodding and tamping as directed. Vibrators shall not be inserted into lower courses that havebegun to set.

D. Concrete Mixing

1. Ready-Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, mix, and deliver concrete according to ASTM C94/C 94M and ASTM C 1116/C 1116M and furnish batch ticket information.

a. When air temperature is between 85 and 90 deg F (30 and 32 deg C), reduce mixingand delivery time from 1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes; when air temperature is above 90deg F (32 deg C), reduce mixing and deliver time to 60 minutes.

2. Project site Mixing: Measure, batch, and mix concrete materials and concrete accordingto ASTM C94/C 94M. Mix concrete materials in appropriate drum-type batch machinemixer.

a. For mixer capacity of 1 cu. yd. (0.76 cu. m) or smaller, continue mixing at lease 1-1/2minutes, but not more than 5 minutes after ingredients are in mixer, before any partof batch is released.

b. For mixer capacity larger than 1 cu. Yd. (0.76 cu. m), increase mixing time by 15seconds for each additional 1 cu. yd.

c. Provide batch ticket for each batch discharged and used in the Work, indicatingProject identification name and number, date, mixture type, mixture time, quantity,and amount of water added. Record approximate location of final deposit instructure.

E. If concrete is placed by pumping, no aluminum shall be used in any parts of the pumpingsystem which contact or might contaminate the concrete. Aluminum chutes and conveyorsshall not be used.

F. All concrete surfaces shall be moist cured by the application of absorptive mats or doublethicknesses of fabric kept continuously wet. Forms shall be kept continuously wet. Use ofother curing methods will not be permitted unless written authorization is received from theEngineer.

G. The unit of operation shall not exceed 30 feet for tank walls and walls exposed to weather,and 45 feet for other work in any horizontal direction and not less than 48 hours shall elapsebetween casting of adjoining units unless these requirements are waived by the Engineer.Provision shall be made for jointing successive units as indicated or required to be made atspacing of approximately 25 feet. Additional construction joints required to satisfy the 25 footspacing shall be located by the Contractor subject to the review of the Engineer. TheContractor shall submit for review drawings separate from the steel reinforcing drawings,showing the location of all proposed construction joints. All construction joints shall beprepared for bonding by roughening the surface of the concrete in an acceptable mannerwhich will expose the aggregate uniformly and will not leave laitance, loosened particles ofaggregate or damaged concrete at the surface. Joints in walls and columns shall bemaintained level. Concrete shall be placed in layers not over 18 inches deep and each layershall be compacted by mechanical internal-vibrating equipment supplemented by handspading, rodding and tamping as directed. Vibrators shall not be inserted into lower coursesthat have begun to set.

H. Formwork for beam soffits and slabs and other parts that support the weight of concrete, shallremain in place until the concrete has reached its specified 28-day strength, unless otherwisespecified or permitted.


I. Concrete Walks and Curbs:

1. Subgrade shall be true and well compacted at the required grades. Spongy andotherwise unsuitable material shall have been removed and replaced with approvedmaterial. Concrete walks shall be placed upon porous fill covered with waterproof paper,polyethylene sheeting of nominal 4-mil minimum thickness or polyethylene-coated burlap.

2. Concrete walks shall be not less than 4 inches in thickness. Walks shall have contractionjoints every 5 linear feet in each groove in the top surface of the slab to a depth of at leastone-fourth the slab thickness with a jointing tool. Transverse expansion joints shall beinstalled at all returns, driveways, and opposite expansion joints in adjacent curbs.Where curbs are not adjacent, transverse expansion joints shall be installed at intervalsof approximately forty (40) feet. Sidewalks shall receive a "broomed" finish. Scoring shallbe in a transverse direction. Edges of the sidewalks and joints shall be edged with a toolhaving a radius not greater than 1/6 inch. Sidewalks adjacent to curbs shall have a slopeof 1/4 inch per foot toward the curb. Sidewalks not adjacent to curbs shall have a slopeof 1/4 inch per foot. The surface of the concrete shall show no variation in cross sectionin excess of 1/4 inch in 5 feet. Concrete walks shall be reinforced with 6 x 6-W1.4xW1.4welded wire reinforcement.

3. Concrete curbs shall be constructed to the section indicated on the Standard Detail, andall horizontal and vertical curves shall be incorporated as indicated or required. Formsshall be steel as approved by the Engineer. At the option of the Contractor, the curbsmay be precast or cast-in-place. Cast-in-place curbs shall be divided into sections 8 to10 feet in length using steel divider plates. The divider plates shall extend completelythrough the concrete and shall be removed. Precast curbs shall be cast in lengths of 4 to5 feet. All exposed surfaces of concrete shall be finished smooth. All sharp edges andthe edges of joints and divisions shall be tooled to 1/4 inch radius. Steel reinforcementshall be installed where the curb crosses pipe trenches or other insecure foundations.Such reinforcement shall consist of two (2) No. 4 deformed bars near the bottom of thecurb and shall extend at least 24 inches beyond the insecure area. Transverseexpansion joints shall be installed at all curb returns and at intervals of approximately 40feet.

J. Column base plates, bearing plates for beams and similar structural members, machineryand equipment bases shall, after being plumbed and properly positioned, be provided with fullbearing with nonshrink grout. Concrete surfaces shall be rough, clean, free of oil, grease,and laitance and shall be moistened thoroughly immediately before grout is placed. Metalsurfaces shall be clean and free of oil, grease and rust. Mixing and placing shall be inconformance with the material manufacturer's printed instructions. After the grout has set,exposed surfaces shall be cut back one (1) inch and covered with a parge coat of mortarconsisting of one (1) part Portland cement, two (2) parts sand and sufficient water to makethe mixture placeable. Parge coat shall have a smooth dense finish. Exposed surfaces ofgrout and parge coat shall be water cured with wet burlap for seven (7) days.

K. Grout fill which is formed in place by using rotating equipment as a screen, such as clarifiersand similar types of equipment, shall be mixed in proportions and consistencies as requiredby the manufacturer or supplier of the equipment.

L. Watertightness:

1. The structures which are intended to contain liquids and/or will be subjected to exteriorhydrostatic pressures shall be so constructed that, when completed and tested, thereshall be no loss of water and no wet spots shall show.

2. As soon as practicable, after the completion of the structures, the Contractor shall fillthem with water and if leakages develop or wet spots show, the Contractor shall emptysuch structures and correct the leakage in an approved manner. Any cracks which


appear in the concrete shall be dug out and suitably repaired. Temporary bulkheads overpipe openings in walls shall be provided as required for the testing.

3. After repairs, if any are required, the structures shall be tested again and further repairedif necessary until satisfactory results are obtained. All work in connection with these testsand repairs shall be at the expense of the Contractor.

4. Waterstops shall be placed in other locations as indicated on the Drawings and as maybe required to assure the watertightness of all containers of liquids. Special shopfabricated ells, tees and crosses shall be provided at junctions. Waterstops shall beextended at least 6 inches beyond end of placement in order to provide splice length forsubsequent placement. In slabs and tank bottoms, water stops shall be turned up to bemade continuous with waterstops at bottom of walls or in walls.

5. Joints between pipe (except cast iron wall pipe) and cast-in-place concrete walls shall besealed by means of a groove cast completely around the pipe; the groove shall be filledwith a quick setting hydraulic compound similar and equal to Waterplug as made byBASF Construction Chemicals mixed and applied in accordance with the manufacturer'sinstructions.

M. Unless otherwise shown or directed, all pumps, other equipment, and items such as lockers,motor control centers and the like, shall be installed on concrete bases. The bases shall beconstructed to the dimensions shown on the plans or as required to meet plan elevations.Where no specific plan elevations are required, the bases shall be 6 inches thick and shallextend 3 inches outside the metal equipment base. In general, the concrete bases shall beplaced up to 2 inches below the metal base. The equipment shall then be properly shimmiedto grade and the 2- inch void filled with nonshrink grout.

N. Concrete which, in the opinion of the Architect-Engineer, has excessive honeycomb,aggregate pockets or depressions will be rejected and the Contractor shall, at his ownexpense, remove the entire section containing such defects and replace it with acceptableconcrete.

O. Manhole or access steps shall be plastic, constructed of copolymer polypropylene meetingthe requirements of ASTM D 2146 for Type II, Grade 16906 material. Step shall bereinforced with ASTM A 615, Grade 60, #4 deformed steel reinforcing bar, be 9" deep, 14"wide, provided with notched tread ridge, foot retainer lugs on each side of tread andpenetration stops for press fit installation. Plastic steps shall be PS2-PF as manufactured byM.A. industries, Inc., Peachtree City, Georgia. Steps shall be installed by drilling 1" diameterholes, minimum 3-3/4 inches deep into the wall, and then driving steps into hole to thepenetration stop, resulting in a press fit condition.

P. Tank pressure relief valves shall be 6" diameter Neenah Foundry Company R-5001-1,American Valve & Hydrant B315.1, or equal, floor type, with outside hooks or insideself-contained lock; quantity and spacing as shown on structural drawings. No part ofpressure relief valves shall project above the neat line of the tank floor to prevent fouling ofscraper mechanisms where used.

Q. All existing contact surfaces with new patch shall be coated with moisture insensitive epoxybonding adhesive, Sikadur Hi-Mod, Concresive LPL Liquid by BASF Construction Chemicals,or approved equal. Patch shall consist of base pour of 4,000 psi structural concrete, then atopping of non-shrink natural aggregate grout, Masterflow 713, Sonogrout by BASFConstruction Chemicals, or approved equal, mixed and placed in accordance withmanufacturer's instructions, to the thicknesses shown on Drawings. Coat base pour withepoxy bonding adhesive prior to placing grout course.

END OF SECTION

DIVISION 05

METALS

ALUMINUM HANDRAILS AND RAILS 055202-1 TOWN BRANCH WWTP THICKENING

SECTION 055202 – ALUMINUM HANDRAILS AND RAILINGS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Extent and dimensions of handrails and railings are indicated on Drawings and includemiscellaneous handrails and railing systems not included in other Sections of theseSpecifications.

B. Type of handrails and railing systems in this Section is aluminum pipe handrails and railingsystems.

C. Products furnished but not installed under this Section include inserts and anchors preset inmasonry and concrete for anchorage of hand rails and railing systems.


A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditionsand Division-1 Specification Sections, apply to Work of this Section.

B. Division 5 - Metals

C. Structural Steel: Section 051200

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Manufacturer's technical data for products and processes used in handrails andrailing systems, including finishes and grout.

B. Shop Drawings: Shop details of fabrication and installation for each type and material ofhandrail and railing system required including plans, elevations, sections, profiles of rails,fittings, connections, and anchors.

C. Samples: Prepare samples of each type of metal finish required on metal of same thicknessand alloy indicated for final work. Where finish involves normal color and texture variations,include sample sets composed of two (2) or more units showing limits of such variationsexpected in completed work. Include 6" long samples of each distinctly different railing memberincluding handrails, top rails, posts, and samples of fittings and brackets.

1.04 DEFINITIONS

A. Definitions in ASTM E 985 for railing-related terms apply to this Section.

1.05 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Structural Performance of Handrails and Railing Systems: Design, engineer, fabricate, andinstall handrails and railing systems to withstand the following structural loads withoutexceeding the allowable design working stress of the materials for handrails, railing systems,


anchors, and connections. Apply each load to produce the maximum stress in each of therespective components comprising handrails and railing systems.

1. Top Rail of Guardrail Systems: Concentrated load of 200 lbf (890 N) applied at any pointand in any direction and a uniform load of 50 lbf per linear foot (730 N/m) appliedhorizontally and concurrently with a uniform load of 100 lbf per linear foot (1460 N/m)applied vertically downward. Concentrated and uniform loads need not be assumed toact concurrently.

2. Handrails Not Serving as Top Rails: Concentrated load of 200 lbf (890 N) applied at anypoint and in any direction and a uniform load of 50 lbf per linear foot (730 N/m) applied inany direction. Concentrated and uniform loads need not be assumed to act concurrently.

3. Infill Area of Guardrail Systems: Horizontal concentrated load of 200 lbf (890 N) appliedto 1 sq. ft. (0.09 sq. m) at any point in the system including gates, panels, intermediaterails, balusters, or other elements composing the infill area. Loads on infill area need notbe assumed to act concurrently with loads on top rails.

B. Prevent galvanic action and other forms of corrosion by insulating metals and other materialsfrom direct contact with incompatible materials.

C. Material for rails and gates shall be a minimum of 1-1/2” diameter Schedule 40 and for posts, aminimum of Schedule 80.


A. Single Source Responsibility: Obtain handrails and railing systems of each type and materialfrom a single manufacturer.

B. Design Responsibility: Engage a qualified professional engineer to prepare or supervise thepreparation of structural computations for handrails and railing systems to determinecompliance with structural performance requirements indicated.

1.07 STORAGE

A. Store handrails and railing systems in clean, dry location, away from uncured concrete andmasonry, protected against damage of any kind. Cover with waterproof paper, tarpaulin, orpolyethylene sheeting; allow for air circulation inside the covering.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide handrails and railing systems of one of thefollowing, or an approved equal. Handrail System shall be equal to “TUFRAIL” as manufacturedby Thompson Fabricating Company.

1. Thompson Fabricating Company, Inc., Birmingham, Alabama.2. Superior Railing Company3. Alumaguard


2.02 METALS

A. General: Comply with standards indicated for forms and types of metals indicated or requiredfor handrail and railing system components.

B. Aluminum: Provide alloy and temper recommended by aluminum producer or finisher for typeof use and finish indicated, and with not less than the strength and durability properties of thealloy and temper designated below for each aluminum form required.

1. Extruded Bar and Shapes: ASTM B 221, 6063-T6.2. Extruded Pipe and Tube: ASTM B 429, 6063-T6.3. Plate and Sheet: ASTM B 209, 6061-T6.4. Die and Hand Forgings: ASTM B 247, 6061-T6.5. Castings: ASTM B 26, 356-T6.

2.03 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A. Nonshrink Nonmetallic Grout: Pre-mixed, factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive,nongaseous grout complying with CE CRD C621. Provide grout specifically recommended bymanufacturer for interior and exterior applications of type specified in this Section.

B. Welding Electrodes and Filler Metal: Provide type and alloy of filler metal and electrodes asrecommended by producer of metal to be welded, complying with applicable AWSSpecifications, and as required for color match, strength, and compatibility in fabricated items.

C. Fasteners: Use fasteners of stainless steel for aluminum components, unless otherwiseindicated. Do not use metals which are corrosive or incompatible with materials joined.

D. Provide concealed fasteners for interconnection of handrail and railing components and for theirattachment to other work except where exposed fasteners are unavoidable or are the standardfastening method for handrail and railing system indicated.

E. Provide Phillips flat-head machine screws for exposed fasteners, unless otherwise indicated.

F. Anchors and Inserts: Provide anchors of type, size, and material required for type of loadingand installation condition shown, as recommended by manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated.Use nonferrous metal of hot-dipped galvanized anchors and inserts for exterior locations andelsewhere as required for corrosion resistance. Use toothed steel or expansion bolt devices fordrilled-in-place anchors.

G. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High zinc dust content paint for regalvanizing welds in galvanizedsteel: Sherwin-Williams Zinc-Clad Galvanizing Compound #143-0255 or equal.

H. Bituminous Paint: SSPC-Paint 12 (cold-applied asphalt mastic).

I. Zinc Chromate Primer for Galvanized Metals: Sherwin-Williams Galvite, B50W3 or equal; forFerrous Metals: Sherwin-Williams KemKromik Universal, B50Z Series or equal.

2.04 FABRICATION

A. General: Fabricate handrails and railing systems to design, dimensions and details shown.Provide handrail and railing members in sizes and profiles indicated, with supporting posts andbrackets of size and spacing shown, but not less than required to comply with requirementsindicated for structural performance. Handrail systems which use fittings which are glued orpop-riveted will not be acceptable.


B. Shop Assembly: Pre-assemble items in shop to greatest extent possible to minimize fieldsplicing and assembly. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handlinglimitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation.

C. Nonwelded Connections: Fabricate railing systems and handrails for interconnection ofmembers by means of railing manufacturer's standard concealed mechanical fasteners andfittings unless otherwise indicated. Fabricate members and fittings to produce flush, smooth,rigid, hairline joints.

D. Welded Connections for Aluminum Pipe: Fabricate aluminum pipe handrails and railingsystems for interconnection of members by concealed internal welds, which eliminate surfacegrinding, using manufacturer's standard system of sleeve and socket fittings.

E. Form changes in direction of railing members by bending members, insertion of prefabricatedelbow fittings, radius bends, or by mitering.

F. For handrails and railing systems with nonwelded connections which are exposed to exterior orto moisture from condensation or other sources, provide weepholes or other means forevacuation of entrapped water in hollow sections of railing members.

G. Toe Boards: Where required by O.S.H.A. and where indicated on the Drawings, provide toeboards at railing systems around openings and at edge of open-sided floors and platforms.Fabricate to dimensions and details shown or, if not shown, use manufacturer's standard detail.The toe plate shall be a 4 inch x ¼ inch plate or a 4” tall aluminum extruded channel.

H. Brackets, Flanges, Fittings and Anchors: Provide manufacturer's standard wall brackets,flanges, hinges, miscellaneous fittings and anchors for interconnection of handrail and railingmembers to other work, unless otherwise indicated.

I. Furnish inserts and other anchorage devices for connecting handrails and railing systems toconcrete or masonry work. Fabricate anchorage devices which are capable of withstandingloadings imposed by handrails and railing systems. Coordinate anchorage devices withsupporting structure.

J. For railing posts set in concrete provide preset sleeves of steel, not less than 6" long and insidedimensions not less than 2" greater than outside dimensions of post, with steel plate formingbottom closure.

K. Provide slip-fit metal sockets to receive removable railing posts. Fabricate sockets for a close fitwith posts and to limit deflection of post without lateral load, measured at top, not to exceed1/12 of post height. Design and fabricate socket covers to resist accidental dislodgement.

L. Gates: Provide gates of equal structural properties of railing system, with toe board. Hingesshall be capable of providing a swing of 180 degrees. Provide positive latching device whichshall be operable from both sides of gate.

2.05 METAL FINISHES, GENERAL

A. Comply with NAAMM "Metal Finishes Manual" for recommendations and designations offinishes, except as otherwise indicated.

B. Class I Clear Anodized Finish: AA-M10C22A41 (medium satin directional textured mechanicalfinish; chemical etch, medium matte; 0.7 mil min. thick clear anodic coating) complying withAAMA 607.1.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 PREPARATION

A. Coordinate setting drawings, diagrams, templates, instructions, and directions for installation ofanchorages, such as sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and miscellaneous items havingintegral anchors, which are to be embedded in concrete as masonry construction. Coordinatedelivery of such items to project site.

B. Field Measurements: Take field measurements prior to fabrication.


A. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form tight, hairline joints.

B. Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installation of handrails and railing systems. Setwork accurately in location, alignment, and elevation, plumb, level, true, and free of rack,measured from established lines and levels. Do not weld, cut or abrade surfaces of handrailsand railing components which have been coated or finished after fabrication, and are intendedfor field connection by mechanical means without further cutting or fitting.

C. Field Welding: Comply with applicable AWS Specification for procedures of manual shieldedmetal-arc welding, for appearance and quality, of welds made, and for methods used incorrecting welding work. Weld connections which are not to be left as exposed joints, butcannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations. Grind exposed welded jointssmooth and restore finish to match finish of adjacent rail surfaces.

D. Corrosion Protection: Coat concealed surfaces of aluminum, which will be in contact with grout,concrete, masonry, wood, or dissimilar metals, with a heavy coat of bituminous paint or zincchromate primer.

E. Adjust handrails and railing systems prior to anchoring to ensure matching alignment at abuttingjoints. Space posts at 5'-0" o.c. MAX but not more than that required by design loadings.

3.03 ANCHORING POSTS

A. Anchor aluminum handrail posts to concrete with manufacturer’s base flange assembly (3anchors per base) for top and side mount brackets recommended for meeting the designcriteria. Base flanges and side mount brackets will not be welded to the post but will bemechanically fastened so as to achieve a rigid construction without annealing the post. Allconnections to concrete will be made using stainless steel wedge anchors, which are to besized and furnished by the handrail manufacturer as an integral part of their handrail system.Anchor post on new concrete shall be side mounted except where shown otherwise on thedrawings.

B. Anchor posts to metal surfaces with manufacturer's standard fittings designed for this purposeunless otherwise indicated.

C. Provide removable railing sections as indicated, using slip-fit metal sockets. Accurately locatesockets to match post spacing.


3.04 RAILING CONNECTIONS

A. Nonwelded Connections: Use manufacturer's standard mechanical joints for permanentlyconnecting railing components. Components that are glued or pop riveted at the joints will notbe acceptable. All components must be mechanically fastened with stainless steel hardware.Use wood blocks and padding to prevent damage to railing members and fittings. Sealrecessed holes of exposed locking screws using plastic filler cement colored to match finish ofhandrails and railing systems.

B. Welded Connections: Use fully welded joints for permanently connecting railing components bywelding. Cope or butt components to provide 100 percent contact or use manufacturer'sstandard fittings designed for this purpose.

3.05 ANCHORING RAILING ENDS

A. Anchor railing ends into concrete or masonry with manufacturer's standard fittings designed forthis purpose, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Anchor railing ends to metal surfaces with manufacturer's standard fittings using concealedfasteners, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Expansion Joints: Provide expansion joints at locations indicated or, if not indicated, at intervalsnot to exceed 40 feet. Provide slip-joint internal sleeve extending 2" beyond joint on either side;fasten internal sleeve securely to one side, locate joint within 6" of post.

3.06 ATTACHMENT OF HANDRAILS TO WALLS

A. General: Secure handrails to walls with manufacturer's standard wall brackets and end fittings,unless otherwise indicated.

B. For concrete and solid masonry, use drilled-in expansion shields and concealed hanger bolts,unless otherwise indicated.

C. For hollow masonry anchorage, use toggle bolts with square heads, unless otherwise indicated.

3.07 PROTECTION

A. Protect finishes of railing systems and handrails from damage during construction period by useof temporary protective coverings approved by railing manufacturer. Remove protectivecovering at time of Substantial Completion.

B. Restore finishes damaged during installation and construction period so that no evidenceremains of correction work. Return items which cannot be refinished in the field to the shop;make required alterations and refinish entire unit, or provide new units as required.


ALUMINUM GRATING 055300-1 TOWN BRANCH WWTP THICKENING

SECTION 055300 – ALUMINUM GRATING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Provide all labor, materials, equipment and services required to furnish and install metal bargrating in accordance with the Drawings and specified herein.


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and SupplementaryConditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to the work of this section.

B. Miscellaneous Metals and Fasteners are included in Division 05.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

Comply with Section 01 33 23 as well as the requirements specified herein.

A. Submit shop drawings to the Engineer for review before fabrication.

B. Indicate areas to receive grating, grating details and dimensions, and material specifications.

C. Show anchorage details and locations.

D. Indicate coordination with equipment suppliers where openings for such equipment arerequired.

1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. Design, fabrication and installation of grating shall be in accordance with StandardSpecifications and Voluntary Code of Practice in Metal Bar Grating Manual, 1979 Edition,published by National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers, Chicago, Illinois (ANSIA 202.1).

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 DESIGN CRITERIA

A. Gratings shall meet or exceed the following design criteria:

B. Support uniform live load of 100 psf.

C. Deflection not to exceed span of bearing bars (in inches) divided by 360.

D. Maximum fiber stress: 12,000 psi.


2.02 BASIC DESIGN

The basic design requirements are listed below:

A. Shape: Rectangular.

B. Type Construction: Pressure locked.

C. Bar Sizes, unless otherwise shown on the Drawings:

1. Bearing Bars: 1-1/2" x 3/16".2. Cross Bars: 1" x 1/8".

D. Maximum Bar Spacing:

1. Bearing Bars: 1-3/16" c-c.2. Cross Bars: 4" c-c.

E. Banding Bars:

1. Same thickness as bearing bars to which they are attached.2. At free ends: Same depth as bearing bars.3. At supported ends: 1/8" less in depth than bearing bars.

F. Bearing and crossbars shall be flush at surface.

G. All free and supported bar ends around perimeter and around cutouts shall be banded.

H. Provide removable sections of grating with suitable end bearing where noted on the Drawingsor otherwise required.

2.03 MATERIALS

A. Aluminum Grating:

The materials of construction shall meet the following requirements:

1. Bearing Bars: ASTM B 221, 6061-T6 or 6063-T6, aluminum.2. Cross Bars: ASTM B 221 (extruded) or ASTM B 210 (drawn) aluminum.3. All steel fasteners used with aluminum grating shall be galvanized.4. Finish: Aluminum mill finish (as fabricated).5. Anchors: Saddle clips of manufacturer's standard design, galvanized.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Grating shall be fabricated as indicated by shop drawings which have been revised to reflectactual field measurements.

B. Grating shall be set with full and uniform end bearing to preclude rocking; do not use wedges orshims.


C. Provide 1-inch minimum bearing with maximum erection clearance of 1/4-inch all around.

D. Anchor grating with saddle clips in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations or asdetailed on the Drawings.

E. Provide cutouts for the passage of pipe, valve and equipment operators, conduit, stems andsimilar work; cutouts for circular obstructions shall be at least 2" larger in diameter than theobstruction.

F. Protect all surfaces of angles and frames to be in contact with concrete or dissimilar metals withtwo (2) coats of Fed. Spec. TT-V-51F Asphalt Varnish.


DIVISION 07

THERMAL AND MOISTUREPROTECTION

SBSMODIFIEDBITUMINOUSMEMBRANE ROOFING 075216 - 1 TOWN BRANCH WWTP THICKENING

SECTION 075216 - STYRENE-BUTADIENE-STYRENE (SBS) MODIFIED BITUMINOUSMEMBRANE ROOFING

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General andSupplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to thisSection.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Styrene-butadiene-styrene (SBS)-modified bituminous membrane roofing.2. Roof insulation.

B. Related Requirements:1. Section 076200 "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for metal roof flashings and

counter-flashings.2. Section 079200 "Joint Sealants" for joint sealants, joint fillers, and joint

preparation.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Roofing Terminology: Definitions in ASTM D 1079 and glossary of NRCA's "The NRCARoofing and Waterproofing Manual" apply to work of this Section.

1.4 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS

A. Preliminary Roofing Conference: Before starting roof deck construction, conductconference at Project site.

1. Meet with Owner, Architect, Owner's insurer if applicable, testing and inspectingagency representative, roofing Installer, roofing system manufacturer'srepresentative, and installers whose work interfaces with or affects roofing,including installers of roof accessories and roof-mounted equipment.

2. Review methods and procedures related to roofing installation, includingmanufacturer's written instructions.

3. Review and finalize construction schedule, and verify availability of materials,Installer's personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress andavoid delays.

4. Review deck substrate requirements for conditions and finishes, includingflatness and fastening.


5. Review structural loading limitations of roof deck during and after roofing.6. Review base flashings, special roofing details, roof drainage, roof penetrations,

equipment curbs, and condition of other construction that affects roofing system.7. Review governing regulations and requirements for insurance and certificates if

applicable.8. Review temporary protection requirements for roofing system during and after

installation.9. Review roof observation and repair procedures after roofing installation.

1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product.

B. Shop Drawings: For roofing system. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, andattachments to other work, including:

1. Base flashings and membrane terminations.2. Tapered insulation, including slopes.3. Crickets, saddles, and tapered edge strips, including slopes.4. Insulation fastening patterns for corner, perimeter, and field-of-roof locations.

C. Samples for Verification: For the following products:

1. Cap sheet, of color required.2. Flashing sheet, of color required.3. Aggregate surfacing material in gradation and color required.

1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Qualification Data: For Installer and manufacturer.

B. Manufacturer Certificates: Signed by roofing manufacturer certifying that roofingsystem complies with requirements specified in "Performance Requirements" Article.

1. Submit evidence of complying with performance requirements.

C. Product Test Reports: For components of membrane roofing system, for testsperformed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency.

D. Research/Evaluation Reports: For components of membrane roofing system, fromICC-ES.

E. Field quality-control reports.

F. Sample Warranties: For manufacturer's special warranties.



A. Maintenance Data: For roofing system to include in maintenance manuals.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer that is FM Global approved formembrane roofing system identical to that used for this Project.

B. Installer Qualifications: A qualified firm that is approved, authorized, or licensed byroofing system manufacturer to install manufacturer's product and that is eligible toreceive manufacturer's special warranty.

1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver roofing materials to Project site in original containers with seals unbroken andlabeled with manufacturer's name, product brand name and type, date of manufacture,approval or listing agency markings, and directions for storing and mixing with othercomponents.

B. Store liquid materials in their original undamaged containers in a clean, dry, protectedlocation and within the temperature range required by roofing system manufacturer.Protect stored liquid material from direct sunlight.

1. Discard and legally dispose of liquid material that cannot be applied within itsstated shelf life.

C. Protect roof insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration bysunlight, moisture, soiling, and other sources. Store in a dry location. Comply withinsulation manufacturer's written instructions for handling, storing, and protectingduring installation.

D. Handle and store roofing materials, and place equipment in a manner to avoidpermanent deflection of deck.

1.10 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecastedweather conditions permit roofing system to be installed according to manufacturer'swritten instructions and warranty requirements.

1.11 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of roofingsystem that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.


1. Special warranty includes membrane roofing, base flashings, roof insulation,fasteners, cover boards, substrate board, roofing accessories, flashings, metals,and other components of roofing system.

2. Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion.3. Limit of Liability: No dollar limitation.4. Scope of Coverage: Repair leaks in the roofing system caused by:

a. Wear in the systems elementsb. Manufacturing defect in materialsc. Defective workmanship used to install materials

B. Special Project Warranty: Submit roofing Installer's warranty, on warranty form at endof this Section, signed by Installer, covering the Work of this Section, including allcomponents of roofing system such as membrane roofing, base flashing, roofinsulation, fasteners, cover boards, substrate boards, vapor retarders, and walkwayproducts, for the following warranty period:

1. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Siplast,Inc.; SBS Modified Bitumen, 2 Ply system or a comparable product by one of thefollowing or equal:

1. CertainTeed Corporation.2. Johns Manville; a Berkshire Hathaway company.3. Firestone Building Products

B. Source Limitations: Obtain components including roof insulation, fasteners for roofingsystem from same manufacturer as membrane roofing.

C. Manufacture to have a min ten years of experience manufacturing the roofing systemto be provided.

D. Manufacture to be ISO 9002 certified.

2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. General Performance: Installed roofing and base flashings shall withstand specifieduplift pressures, thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failuredue to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction.Roofing and base flashings shall remain watertight.


1. Accelerated Weathering: Roofing system shall withstand 2000 hours of exposurewhen tested according to ASTM G 152, ASTM G 154, or ASTM G 155.

2. Impact Resistance: Roofing system shall resist impact damage when testedaccording to ASTM D 3746 or ASTM D 4272.

B. Material Compatibility: Roofing materials shall be compatible with one another andadjacent materials under conditions of service and application required, asdemonstrated by roofing manufacturer based on testing and field experience.

C. Roofing System Design: Tested by a qualified testing agency to resist the followinguplift pressures:

1. Corner Uplift Pressure: 78 lbf/sq. ft. (kPa/sq. m).2. Perimeter Uplift Pressure: 52 lbf/sq. ft. (kPa/sq. m).3. Field-of-Roof Uplift Pressure: 31 lbf/sq. ft. (kPa/sq. m).

D. FM Global Listing: Roofing, base flashings, and component materials shall comply withrequirements in FM Global 4450 or FM Global 4470 as part of a roofing system, andshall be listed in FM Global's "RoofNav" for Class 1 or noncombustible construction, asapplicable. Identify materials with FM Global markings.

1. Fire/Windstorm Classification: Class 1A-120.2. Hail-Resistance Rating: MH.

2.3 ROOFING SHEET MATERIALS

A. Base Sheet: ASTM D 4601, Type II, SBS-modified asphalt-impregnated and -coatedsheet, with glass-fiber-reinforcing mat, dusted with fine mineral surfacing on both sides.

1. Weight: 50 lb/100 sq. ft. (2.4 kg/sq. m), minimum.

B. Roofing Membrane Sheet: ASTM D 6163, Grade S, Type I or II, SBS-modified asphaltsheet (reinforced with glass fibers); smooth surfaced; suitable for application methodspecified.

C. Granule-Surfaced Roofing Cap Sheet: ASTM D 6163, Grade G, Type I or II, SBS-modified asphalt sheet (reinforced with glass fibers); granule surfaced; suitable forapplication method specified, and as follows:

1. Granule Color: White.

2.4 BASE FLASHING SHEET MATERIALS

A. Backer Sheet: ASTM D 6163, Grade S, Type I or II, SBS-modified asphalt sheet(reinforced with glass fibers); smooth surfaced; suitable for application methodspecified.


B. Granule-Surfaced Flashing Sheet: ASTM D 6163, Grade G, Type I or II, SBS-modifiedasphalt sheet (reinforced with glass fibers); granule surfaced; suitable for applicationmethod specified, and as follows:

1. Granule Color: White.

2.5 AUXILIARY ROOFING MATERIALS

A. General: Auxiliary materials recommended by roofing system manufacturer forintended use and compatible with roofing.

1. Liquid-type auxiliary materials shall comply with VOC limits of authorities havingjurisdiction.

B. Asphalt Primer: ASTM D 41/D 41M.

C. Roofing Asphalt: ASTM D 6152, SEBS modified.

D. Cold-Applied Adhesive: Roofing system manufacturer's standard asphalt-based, one-or two-part, asbestos-free, cold-applied adhesive specially formulated for compatibilityand use with roofing membrane and base flashings.

E. Asphalt Roofing Cement: ASTM D 4586, asbestos free, of consistency required byroofing system manufacturer for application.

F. Mastic Sealant: Polyisobutylene, plain or modified bitumen; nonhardening,nonmigrating, nonskinning, and nondrying.

G. Fasteners: Factory-coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates complying withcorrosion-resistance provisions in FM Global 4470, designed for fastening roofingcomponents to substrate; tested by manufacturer for required pullout strength, andacceptable to roofing system manufacturer.

H. Roofing Granules: Ceramic-coated roofing granules, No. 11 screen size with 100percent passing No. 8 (2.36-mm) sieve and 98 percent of mass retained on No. 40(0.425-mm) sieve, color to match roofing.

I. Miscellaneous Accessories: Provide those recommended by roofing systemmanufacturer.

2.6 ROOF INSULATION

A. General: Preformed roof insulation boards manufactured or approved by roofingmanufacturer, selected from manufacturer's standard sizes suitable for application, ofthicknesses indicated and that produce FM Global-approved roof insulation.

B. Polyisocyanurate Board Insulation: ASTM C 1289, Type II, Class 1, Grade 2, felt orglass-fiber mat facer on both major surfaces.


1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provideSiplast Inc.; Polyisocyanurate Board, ISO 95+ GL or a comparable product byone of the following or equal:

a. Carlisle SynTec Incorporated.b. GAF Materials Corporation.c. Johns Manville; a Berkshire Hathaway company.d. Firestone Building Products

C. Composite Polyisocyanurate Board Insulation: ASTM C 1289, with factory-appliedfacing board on one major surface, as indicated below by type, and felt or glass-fibermat facer on the other surface.

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provideFirestone Building Products; Polyisocyanurate Board, Isoguard HD Composite ora comparable product by one of the following or equal:

a. CertainTeed Corporation.b. GAF Materials Corporation.c. Johns Manville; a Berkshire Hathaway company.

D. Tapered Insulation: Provide factory-tapered insulation boards fabricated to slope of 1/4inch per 12 inches (1:48) unless otherwise indicated.

E. Provide preformed saddles, crickets, tapered edge strips, and other insulation shapeswhere indicated for sloping to drain. Fabricate to slopes indicated.

2.7 INSULATION ACCESSORIES

A. General: Roof insulation accessories recommended by insulation manufacturer forintended use and compatibility with roofing.

B. Insulation Attachment:1. Provide Insulation Adhesive at all Concrete Deck Locations: Insulation

manufacturer's recommended adhesive formulated to attach roof insulation tosubstrate or to another insulation layer. Utilize Modified asphaltic, asbestos-free,cold-applied adhesive

C. Insulation Cant Strips and Tapered Edge Strips: ASTM C 728, perlite insulation board.Provide min 5” dimension at 45 degree face. Provide between all horizontal andvertical planes that exceed 45 degrees.

D. Wood Nailer Strips: Provide PS 20 dimension lumber, Structural grade No.2 or betterSouthern Pine, Douglas Fir. Width of 3-1/2” and thickness to match roof insulation.

E. Cover Board: ASTM C 1177/C 1177M, glass-mat, water-resistant gypsum substrate,1/2 inch (13 mm) thick factory primed.


1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provideGeorgia-Pacific Building Products; Dens Deck Primed or a comparable productby one of the following or equal:

a. CertainTeed Corporation.b. National Gypsum Company.c. United States Gypsum Company.

F. Substrate Joint Tape: 6- or 8-inch- (150- or 200-mm-) wide, coated, glass fiber.

2.8 ROOF ACCESSORIES

Roofing manufacturer to coordinate, install supplemental materials and cap sheetsrequired of the roofing system at pipe and curb penetrations to maintain warrantycompliance with section 1.11 “Warranty”.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance withrequirements and other conditions affecting performance of the Work:

1. Verify that roof openings and penetrations are in place, curbs are set and braced,and roof-drain bodies are securely clamped in place.

2. Verify that wood cants, blocking, curbs, and nailers are securely anchored to roofdeck at penetrations and terminations and that nailers match thicknesses ofinsulation.

3. Verify that concrete substrate is visibly dry and free of moisture. Test for capillarymoisture by plastic sheet method according to ASTM D 4263.

a. Test for moisture by pouring 1 pint (0.5 L) of hot roofing asphalt on deck atstart of each day's work and at start of each roof area or plane. Do notproceed with Work of this Section if test sample foams or can be easily andcleanly stripped after cooling.

4. Verify that concrete-curing compounds that impair adhesion of roofingcomponents to roof deck have been removed.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Clean substrate of dust, debris, moisture, and other substances detrimental to roofinginstallation according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions. Removesharp projections.


B. Prevent materials from entering and clogging roof drains and conductors and fromspilling or migrating onto surfaces of other construction. Remove roof-drain plugs whenno work is taking place or when rain is forecast.

C. Prime surface of concrete deck with asphalt primer at a rate of 3/4 gal./100 sq. ft.(0.3 L/sq. m), and allow primer to dry.

D. Install insulation strips in ribs of acoustical roof decks according to acoustical roof deckmanufacturer's written instructions.


A. Comply with roofing system manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Asphalt Heating: Heat and apply SBS-modified roofing asphalt according to roofingsystem manufacturer's written instructions.

C. Substrate-Joint Penetrations: Prevent roofing asphalt and adhesives from penetratingsubstrate joints, entering building, or damaging roofing system components or adjacentbuilding construction.

D. Install roofing, insulation, flashings, and accessories in accordance with roofingmanufacturer's published instructions and recommendations for the specified roofingsystem. Where manufacturer provides no instructions or recommendations, followgood roofing practices and industry standards. Comply with federal, state, and localregulations.

E. Obtain all relevant instructions and maintain copies at project site for duration ofinstallation period.

F. Do not start work until Pre-Installation Notice has been submitted to manufacturer asnotification that this project requires a manufacturer's warranty.

G. Perform work using competent and properly equipped personnel.

H. Temporary closures, which ensure that moisture does not damage any completedsection of the new roofing system, are the responsibility of the applicator. Completionof flashing terminations, and temporary closures shall be completed as required toprovide a watertight condition.

I. Install roofing membrane only when surfaces are clean, dry, smooth and free of snowor ice; do not apply roofing membrane during inclement weather or when ambientconditions will not allow proper application; consult manufacturer for recommendedprocedures during cold weather. Do not work with sealants and adhesives whenmaterial temperature is outside the range of 60 to 80 degrees F.

J. Protect adjacent construction, property, vehicles, and persons from damage related toroofing work; repair or restore damage caused by roofing work.


1. Protect from spills and overspray from bitumen, adhesives, sealants andcoatings.

2. Particularly protect metal, glass, plastic, and painted surfaces from bitumen,adhesives, and sealants within the range of wind-borne overspray.

3. Protect finished areas of the roofing system from roofing related work traffic andtraffic by other trades.

K. Until ready for use, keep materials in their original containers as labeled by themanufacturer.

L. Consult membrane manufacturer's instructions, container labels, and Material SafetyData Sheets (MSDS) for specific safety instructions. Keep all adhesives, sealants,primers and cleaning materials away from all sources of ignition.

M. Provide additional cap sheets at rooftop terrace system supports to maintain warranty.

3.4 INSULATION INSTALLATION

A. Install one lapped base-sheet course and mechanically fasten to substrate according toroofing system manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Insulation Cant Strips: Install and secure preformed 45-degree insulation cant strips atjunctures of roofing system with vertical surfaces or angle changes greater than 45degrees.

C. Install tapered insulation under area of roofing to conform to slopes indicated.

D. Install insulation with long joints of insulation in a continuous straight line, with endjoints staggered between rows, abutting edges and ends between boards. Fill gapsexceeding 1/4 inch (6 mm) with insulation.

1. Cut and fit insulation within 1/4 inch (6 mm) of nailers, projections, andpenetrations.

E. Install insulation under area of roofing to achieve required thickness. Where overallinsulation thickness is 2.7 inches (68 mm) or greater, install two or more layers withjoints of each succeeding layer staggered from joints of previous layer a minimum of 6inches (150 mm) in each direction.

F. Install tapered edge strips at perimeter edges of roof that do not terminate at verticalsurfaces.

G. Adhered Insulation: Install each layer of insulation and adhere to substrate as follows:

1. Set each layer of insulation in a uniform coverage of full-spread insulationadhesive, firmly pressing and maintaining insulation in place.

H. Install cover boards over insulation with long joints in continuous straight lines with endjoints staggered between rows. Offset joints of insulation below a minimum of 6 inches


(150 mm) in each direction. Loosely butt cover boards together and fasten to roof deck.Tape joints if required by roofing system manufacturer.

3.5 ROOFING INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Install roofing system according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructionsand applicable recommendations in ARMA/NRCA's "Quality Control Guidelines for theApplication of Polymer Modified Bitumen Roofing."

1. Install roofing system MBS-2- C- L- M, according to roof assembly identificationmatrix and roof assembly layout illustrations in NRCA's "The NRCA Roofing andWaterproofing Manual" and to Section requirements.

B. Start installation of roofing in presence of manufacturer's technical personnel.

C. Coordinate installation of roofing system so insulation and other components of theroofing system not permanently exposed are not subjected to precipitation or leftuncovered at the end of the workday or when rain is forecast.

1. Provide tie-offs at end of each day's work to cover exposed roofing sheets andinsulation with a course of coated felt set in roofing cement or hot roofing asphalt,with joints and edges sealed.

2. Complete terminations and base flashings, and provide temporary seals toprevent water from entering completed sections of roofing system.

3. Remove and discard temporary seals before beginning work on adjoining roofing.

3.6 BASE-PLY SHEET INSTALLATION

A. Install glass-fiber base-ply sheets according to roofing system manufacturer's writteninstructions starting at low point of roofing system. Align glass-fiber base-ply sheetswithout stretching. Extend sheets over and terminate beyond cants.

1. Shingle side laps of glass-fiber base-ply sheets uniformly to ensure that requirednumber of glass-fiber base-ply sheets covers substrate at any point. Shingle indirection to shed water.

3.7 SBS-MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE INSTALLATION

A. Install modified bituminous roofing sheet and cap sheet according to roofingmanufacturer's written instructions, starting at low point of roofing system. Extendroofing membrane sheets over and terminate beyond cants, installing as follows:

1. Adhere to substrate in cold-applied adhesive.2. Unroll roofing sheets and allow them to relax for minimum time period required

by manufacturer.


B. Laps: Accurately align roofing sheets, without stretching, and maintain uniform sideand end laps. Stagger end laps. Completely bond and seal laps, leaving no voids.

1. Repair tears and voids in laps and lapped seams not completely sealed.2. Apply roofing granules to cover exuded bead at laps while bead is hot.

C. Install roofing sheets so side and end laps shed water.

3.8 FLASHING AND STRIPPING INSTALLATION

A. Install base flashing over cant strips and other sloped and vertical surfaces, at roofedges, and at penetrations through roof, and secure to substrates according to roofingsystem manufacturer's written instructions and as follows:

1. Prime substrates with asphalt primer if required by roofing system manufacturer.2. Backer-Sheet Application: Adhere backer sheet to substrate in cold-applied

adhesive.3. Flashing-Sheet Application: Adhere flashing sheet to substrate in cold-applied

adhesive at rate required by roofing system manufacturer.4. Flashing-Sheet Application: Adhere flashing sheet to substrate in asphalt roofing

cement at rate required by roofing system manufacturer.

B. Extend base flashing up walls or parapets a minimum of 8 inches (200 mm) aboveroofing membrane and 4 inches (100 mm) onto field of roofing membrane.

C. Mechanically fasten top of base flashing securely at terminations and perimeter ofroofing.

1. Seal top termination of base flashing with a strip of glass-fiber fabric set inasphalt roofing cement.

D. Install roofing cap-sheet stripping where metal flanges and edgings are set on roofingaccording to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions.

3.9 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to inspect substrate conditions,surface preparation, membrane application, flashings, protection, and drainagecomponents, and to furnish reports to Architect.

B. Final Roof Inspection: Arrange for roofing system manufacturer's technical personnel toinspect roofing installation on completion.

1. Notify Architect and Owner 48 hours in advance of date and time of inspection.

C. Roofing system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.


__________________

_________________

1. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed todetermine if replaced or additional work complies with specified requirements.

___________________________

3.10 PROTECTING AND CLEANING

A. Protect roofing system from damage and wear during remainder of construction period.When remaining construction does not affect or endanger roofing, inspect roofing fordeterioration and damage, describing its nature and extent in a written report, withcopies to Architect and Owner.

______________________________

B. Correct deficiencies in or remove roofing system that does not comply withrequirements, repair substrates, and repair or reinstall roofing system to a conditionfree of damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion and according towarranty requirements.

C. Clean overspray and spillage from adjacent construction using cleaning agents andprocedures recommended by manufacturer of affected construction.

3.11 ROOFING INSTALLER'S WARRANTY

A. WHEREAS _ of, herein called the "Roofing Installer," has performed

roofing and associated work ("work") on the following project:

1. Owner: Insert name of Owner.2. Address: Insert address.3. Building Name/Type: Insert information.4. Address: Insert address.5. Area of Work: Insert information.6. Acceptance Date: .7. Warranty Period: Insert time.8. Expiration Date: .

B. AND WHEREAS Roofing Installer has contracted (either directly with Owner orindirectly as a subcontractor) to warrant said work against leaks and faulty or defectivematerials and workmanship for designated Warranty Period,

C. NOW THEREFORE Roofing Installer hereby warrants, subject to terms and conditionsherein set forth, that during Warranty Period he will, at his own cost and expense,make or cause to be made such repairs to or replacements of said work as arenecessary to correct faulty and defective work and as are necessary to maintain saidwork in a watertight condition.

D. This Warranty is made subject to the following terms and conditions:

1. Specifically excluded from this Warranty are damages to work and other parts ofthe building, and to building contents, caused by:


___________________ __________________________

a. lightning;b. peak gust wind speed exceeding 120 mph (m/s);c. fire;d. failure of roofing system substrate, including cracking, settlement,

excessive deflection, deterioration, and decomposition;e. faulty construction of parapet walls, copings, chimneys, skylights, vents,

equipment supports, and other edge conditions and penetrations of thework;

f. vapor condensation on bottom of roofing; andg. activity on roofing by others, including construction contractors,

maintenance personnel, other persons, and animals, whether authorized orunauthorized by Owner.

2. When work has been damaged by any of foregoing causes, Warranty shall benull and void until such damage has been repaired by Roofing Installer and untilcost and expense thereof have been paid by Owner or by another responsibleparty so designated.

3. Roofing Installer is responsible for damage to work covered by this Warranty butis not liable for consequential damages to building or building contents resultingfrom leaks or faults or defects of work.

4. During Warranty Period, if Owner allows alteration of work by anyone other thanRoofing Installer, including cutting, patching, and maintenance in connection withpenetrations, attachment of other work, and positioning of anything on roof, thisWarranty shall become null and void on date of said alterations, but only to theextent said alterations affect work covered by this Warranty. If Owner engagesRoofing Installer to perform said alterations, Warranty shall not become null andvoid unless Roofing Installer, before starting said work, shall have notified Ownerin writing, showing reasonable cause for claim, that said alterations would likelydamage or deteriorate work, thereby reasonably justifying a limitation ortermination of this Warranty.

5. During Warranty Period, if original use of roof is changed and it becomes usedfor, but was not originally specified for, a promenade, work deck, spray-cooledsurface, flooded basin, or other use or service more severe than originallyspecified, this Warranty shall become null and void on date of said change, butonly to the extent said change affects work covered by this Warranty.

6. Owner shall promptly notify Roofing Installer of observed, known, or suspectedleaks, defects, or deterioration and shall afford reasonable opportunity forRoofing Installer to inspect work and to examine evidence of such leaks, defects,or deterioration.

7. This Warranty is recognized to be the only warranty of Roofing Installer on saidwork and shall not operate to restrict or cut off Owner from other remedies andresources lawfully available to Owner in cases of roofing failure. Specifically, thisWarranty shall not operate to relieve Roofing Installer of responsibility forperformance of original work according to requirements of the ContractDocuments, regardless of whether Contract was a contract directly with Owner ora subcontract with Owner's General Contractor.

E. IN WITNESS THEREOF, this instrument has been duly executed thisday of , _ .


_____________________________________________________________________________

1. Authorized Signature: .2. Name: .3. Title: .

_______________________________________


SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 076200 - 1 TOWN BRANCH WWTP THICKENING

SECTION 076200 - SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:1. Manufactured counter-flashing.2. Formed roof-drainage sheet metal fabrications.3. Formed low-slope roof sheet metal fabrications.4. Formed wall sheet metal fabrications.5. Formed equipment support flashing.

B. Related Requirements:1. Section 075216 “SBS Modified Bituminous Roofing System”

1.3 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate sheet metal flashing and trim layout and seams with sizes and locations ofpenetrations to be flashed, and joints and seams in adjacent materials.

B. Coordinate sheet metal flashing and trim installation with adjoining roofing and wallmaterials, joints, and seams to provide leakproof, secure, and noncorrosive installation.


A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.

1. Review construction schedule. Verify availability of materials, Installer'spersonnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays.

2. Review special roof details, roof drainage, roof-penetration flashing, equipmentcurbs, and condition of other construction that affect sheet metal flashing andtrim.

Review requirements for insurance and certificates if applicable.3. Review sheet metal flashing observation and repair procedures after flashing

installation.



A. Product Data: For each type of product.

1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individualcomponents and profiles, and finishes for each manufactured product andaccessory.

B. Shop Drawings: For sheet metal flashing and trim.

1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and attachment details.2. Detail fabrication and installation layouts, expansion-joint locations, and keyed

details. Distinguish between shop- and field-assembled work.3. Include identification of material, thickness, weight, and finish for each item and

location in Project.4. Include details for forming, including profiles, shapes, seams, and dimensions.5. Include details for joining, supporting, and securing, including layout and spacing

of fasteners, cleats, clips, and other attachments. Include pattern of seams.6. Include details of termination points and assemblies.7. Include details of expansion joints and expansion-joint covers, including showing

direction of expansion and contraction from fixed points.8. Include details of roof-penetration flashing.9. Include details of edge conditions, including eaves, ridges, valleys, rakes,

crickets, and counterflashings as applicable.10. Include details of special conditions.11. Include details of connections to adjoining work.12. Detail formed flashing and trim at scale of not less than 1-1/2 inches per 12

inches (1:10).

C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of sheet metal and accessory indicatedwith factory-applied finishes.

D. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish.

1. Sheet Metal Flashing: 12 inches (300 mm) long by actual width of unit, includingfinished seam and in required profile. Include fasteners, cleats, clips, closures,and other attachments.

2. Trim, Metal Closures, Expansion Joints, Joint Intersections, and MiscellaneousFabrications: 12 inches (300 mm) long and in required profile. Include fastenersand other exposed accessories.

3. Unit-Type Accessories and Miscellaneous Materials: Full-size Sample.4. Anodized Aluminum Samples: Samples to show full range to be expected for

each color required.


A. Qualification Data: For fabricator.

B. Product Certificates: For each type of coping and roof edge flashing that isFM Approvals approved.


C. Product Test Reports: For each product, for tests performed by a qualified testingagency.

D. Sample Warranty: For special warranty.


A. Maintenance Data: For sheet metal flashing and trim, and its accessories, to include inmaintenance manuals.


A. Fabricator Qualifications: Employs skilled workers who custom fabricate sheet metalflashing and trim similar to that required for this Project and whose products have arecord of successful in-service performance.

1. For copings and roof edge flashings that are FM Approvals approved, shop shallbe listed as able to fabricate required details as tested and approved.


A. Do not store sheet metal flashing and trim materials in contact with other materials thatmight cause staining, denting, or other surface damage. Store sheet metal flashing andtrim materials away from uncured concrete and masonry.

B. Protect strippable protective covering on sheet metal flashing and trim from exposureto sunlight and high humidity, except to extent necessary for period of sheet metalflashing and trim installation.

1.10 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty on Finishes: Manufacturer agrees to repair finish or replace sheetmetal flashing and trim that shows evidence of deterioration of factory-applied finisheswithin specified warranty period.

1. Exposed Panel Finish: Deterioration includes, but is not limited to, the following:

a. Color fading more than 5 Hunter units when tested according toASTM D 2244.

b. Chalking in excess of a No. 8 rating when tested according toASTM D 4214.

c. Cracking, checking, peeling, or failure of paint to adhere to bare metal.

2. Finish Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion.3. All Roofing System Components, including copings, counter flashing, sidewall

flashing, etc to be covered as part of the roofing system manufacture / installerwarranty. See Section 075216 “SBS Modified Bituminous Roofing System”.-


PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. General: Sheet metal flashing and trim assemblies shall withstand wind loads,structural movement, thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather withoutfailure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects inconstruction. Completed sheet metal flashing and trim shall not rattle, leak, or loosen,and shall remain watertight.

B. Sheet Metal Standard for Flashing and Trim: Comply with NRCA's "The NRCA RoofingManual" and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" requirements fordimensions and profiles shown unless more stringent requirements are indicated.

C. Sheet Metal Standard for Copper: Comply with CDA's "Copper in ArchitectureHandbook." Conform to dimensions and profiles shown unless more stringentrequirements are indicated.

D. FM Approvals Listing: Manufacture and install copings, roof edge flashings that arelisted in FM Approvals' "RoofNav" and approved for windstorm classification, Class 1-120. Identify materials with name of fabricator and design approved by FM Approvals.

E. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surfacetemperature changes to prevent buckling, opening of joints, overstressing ofcomponents, failure of joint sealants, failure of connections, and other detrimentaleffects. Base calculations on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heatgain and nighttime-sky heat loss.

1. Temperature Change: 120 deg F (67 deg C), ambient; 180 deg F (100 deg C),material surfaces.

2.2 SHEET METALS

A. General: Protect mechanical and other finishes on exposed surfaces from damage byapplying strippable, temporary protective film before shipping.

B. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M), alloy as standard with manufacturerfor finish required, with temper as required to suit forming operations and performancerequired; with smooth, flat surface.

1. Exposed Coil-Coated Finish:

a. Three-Coat Fluoropolymer: AAMA 620. Fluoropolymer finish containing notless than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in both color coat and cleartopcoat. Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces tocomply with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions.

2. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.


C. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 240/A 240M, Type 304, dead soft, fully annealed; withsmooth, flat surface.

1. Finish: 2D (dull, cold rolled).

2.3 UNDERLAYMENT MATERIALS

A. Felt: ASTM D 226/D 226M, Type II (No. 30), asphalt-saturated organic felt;nonperforated.

B. Slip Sheet: Rosin-sized building paper, 3 lb/100 sq. ft. (0.16 kg/sq. m) minimum.


A. General: Provide materials and types of fasteners, solder, protective coatings,sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required for complete sheet metal flashingand trim installation and as recommended by manufacturer of primary sheet metal ormanufactured item unless otherwise indicated.

B. Fasteners: Screws, annular threaded nails, self-tapping screws, self-locking rivets andbolts, and other suitable fasteners designed to withstand design loads andrecommended by manufacturer of primary sheet metal or manufactured item.

1. General: Blind fasteners or self-drilling screws, gasketed, with hex-washer head.

a. Exposed Fasteners: Heads matching color of sheet metal using plasticcaps or factory-applied coating. Provide metal-backed EPDM or PVCsealing washers under heads of exposed fasteners bearing on weatherside of metal. Exposed Fasteners are only allowed in non-visible locations.

b. Blind Fasteners: High-strength aluminum or stainless-steel rivets suitablefor metal being fastened.

c. Spikes and Ferrules: Same material as gutter; with spike with ferrulematching internal gutter width.

2. Fasteners for Aluminum Sheet: Aluminum or Series 300 stainless steel.

C. Solder:1. For Stainless Steel: ASTM B 32, Grade Sn60, with acid flux of type

recommended by stainless-steel sheet manufacturer.

D. Sealant Tape: Pressure-sensitive, 100 percent solids, polyisobutylene compoundsealant tape with release-paper backing. Provide permanently elastic, nonsag,nontoxic, nonstaining tape 1/2 inch (13 mm) wide and 1/8 inch (3 mm) thick.

E. Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C 920, elastomeric silicone polymer sealant; of type,grade, class, and use classifications required to seal joints in sheet metal flashing andtrim and remain watertight.


F. Butyl Sealant: ASTM C 1311, single-component, solvent-release butyl rubber sealant;polyisobutylene plasticized; heavy bodied for hooked-type expansion joints with limitedmovement.

G. Epoxy Seam Sealer: Two-part, noncorrosive, aluminum seam-cementing compound,recommended by aluminum manufacturer for exterior nonmoving joints, includingriveted joints.

H. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion according to ASTM D 1187.

I. Asphalt Roofing Cement: ASTM D 4586, asbestos free, of consistency required forapplication.

2.5 MANUFACTURED SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM

A. Reglets: Units of type, material, and profile required, formed to provide secureinterlocking of separate reglet and counterflashing pieces, and compatible with flashingindicated with factory-mitered and -welded corners and junctions and with interlockingcounterflashing on exterior face, of same metal as reglet.

1. Material: Aluminum, 0.024 inch (0.61 mm) thick.2. Concrete Type: Provide temporary closure tape to keep reglet free of concrete

materials, special fasteners for attaching reglet to concrete forms, and guides toensure alignment of reglet section ends.

3. Masonry Type: Provide with offset top flange for embedment in masonry mortarjoint.

4. Accessories:

a. Flexible-Flashing Retainer: Provide resilient plastic or rubber accessory tosecure flexible flashing in reglet where clearance does not permit use ofstandard metal counterflashing or where Drawings show reglet withoutmetal counterflashing.

b. Counterflashing Wind-Restraint Clips: Provide clips to be installed beforecounterflashing to prevent wind uplift of counterflashing's lower edge.

5. Finish: With manufacturer's standard color coating.

2.6 FABRICATION, GENERAL

A. General: Custom fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim to match existing conditionsand recommendations in cited sheet metal standard that apply to design, dimensions,geometry, metal thickness, and other characteristics of item required. Fabricate sheetmetal flashing and trim in shop to greatest extent possible.

1. Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim in thickness or weight needed to complywith performance requirements, but not less than that specified for eachapplication and metal.

2. Obtain field measurements for accurate fit before shop fabrication.


3. Form sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates without excessive oil canning,buckling, and tool marks; true to line, levels, and slopes; and with exposed edgesfolded back to form hems.

4. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible. Do not useexposed fasteners on faces exposed to view.

B. Fabrication Tolerances: Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim that is capable ofinstallation to a tolerance of 1/4 inch in 20 feet (6 mm in 6 m) on slope and locationlines indicated on Drawings and within 1/8-inch (3-mm) offset of adjoining faces and ofalignment of matching profiles.

C. Fabrication Tolerances: Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim that is capable ofinstallation to tolerances specified in MCA's "Guide Specification for Residential MetalRoofing."

D. Expansion Provisions: Form metal for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim.

1. Form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch (25mm) deep, filled with butyl sealant concealed within joints.

2. Use lapped expansion joints only where indicated on Drawings.

E. Sealant Joints: Where movable, nonexpansion-type joints are required, form metal toprovide for proper installation of elastomeric sealant according to cited sheet metalstandard.

F. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices from same material as accessory beinganchored or from compatible, noncorrosive metal.

G. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices of sizes as recommended by cited sheetmetal standard and by FM Global Property Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-49 forapplication, but not less than thickness of metal being secured.

H. Seams for Aluminum: Fabricate nonmoving seams with flat-lock seams. Form seamsand seal with epoxy seam sealer. Rivet joints where necessary for strength.

I. Do not use graphite pencils to mark metal surfaces.

2.7 LOW-SLOPE ROOF SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS

A. Copings: Fabricate in minimum 96-inch- (2400-mm-) long, but not exceeding 12-foot-(3.6-m-) long, sections. Fabricate joint plates of same thickness as copings. Furnishwith continuous cleats to support edge of external leg and interior leg. Miter corners,fasten and seal watertight. Shop fabricate interior and exterior corners.

1. Coping Profile: Fig 3-4A according to SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet MetalManual."

2. Joint Style: Butted with expansion space and 6-inch- (150-mm-) wide, concealedbackup plate.

3. Fabricate from the Following Materials:


a. Aluminum: 0.050 inch (1.27 mm) thick.

B. Roof Edge Flashing (Gravel Stop) and Fascia Cap: Fabricate in minimum 96-inch-(2400-mm-) long, but not exceeding 12-foot- (3.6-m-) long sections. Furnish with 6-inch- (150-mm-) wide, joint cover plates. Shop fabricate interior and exterior corners.

1. Joint Style: Butted with expansion space and 6-inch- (150-mm-) wide, concealedbackup plate.

2. Fabricate from the Following Materials:

a. Aluminum: 0.050 inch (1.27 mm) thick.

C. Roof-to-Wall Transition, Roof-to-Roof Edge-Flashing (Gravel-Stop) and Fascia-CapTransition Expansion-Joint Cover: Fabricate from the following materials: Shopfabricate interior and exterior corners.

1. Aluminum: 0.050 inch (1.27 mm) thick.

D. Base Flashing: Shop fabricate interior and exterior corners. Fabricate from thefollowing materials:


E. Counterflashing: Shop fabricate interior and exterior corners. Fabricate from thefollowing materials:


F. Flashing Receivers: Fabricate from the following materials:


G. Roof-Penetration Flashing: Fabricate from the following materials:

1. Stainless Steel: 0.019 inch (0.48 mm) thick.

H. Roof-Drain Flashing: Fabricate from the following materials:


2.8 MISCELLANEOUS SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS

A. Equipment Support Flashing: Fabricate from the following materials:



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance withrequirements for installation tolerances, substrate, and other conditions affectingperformance of the Work.

1. Verify compliance with requirements for installation tolerances of substrates.2. Verify that substrate is sound, dry, smooth, clean, sloped for drainage, and

securely anchored.3. Verify that air- or water-resistant barriers have been installed over sheathing or

backing substrate to prevent air infiltration or water penetration.


3.2 UNDERLAYMENT INSTALLATION

A. Felt Underlayment: Install felt underlayment, wrinkle free, using adhesive to minimizeuse of mechanical fasteners under sheet metal flashing and trim. Apply in shinglefashion to shed water, with lapped joints of not less than 2 inches (50 mm).

B. Synthetic Underlayment: Install synthetic underlayment, wrinkle free, according tomanufacturers' written instructions, and using adhesive where possible to minimize useof mechanical fasteners under sheet metal.

C. Self-Adhering Sheet Underlayment: Install self-adhering sheet underlayment, wrinklefree. Prime substrate if recommended by underlayment manufacturer. Comply withtemperature restrictions of underlayment manufacturer for installation; use primer forinstalling underlayment at low temperatures. Apply in shingle fashion to shed water,with end laps of not less than 6 inches (150 mm) staggered 24 inches (600 mm)between courses. Overlap side edges not less than 3-1/2 inches (90 mm). Roll lapsand edges with roller. Cover underlayment within 14 days.

D. Apply slip sheet, wrinkle free, before installing sheet metal flashing and trim.


A. General: Anchor sheet metal flashing and trim and other components of the Worksecurely in place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement. Use fasteners,protective coatings, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required tocomplete sheet metal flashing and trim system.

1. Install sheet metal flashing and trim true to line, levels, and slopes. Provideuniform, neat seams with minimum exposure of solder, welds, and sealant.

2. Install sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates and to result in watertightperformance. Verify shapes and dimensions of surfaces to be covered beforefabricating sheet metal.


3. Space cleats not more than 12 inches (300 mm) apart. Attach each cleat with atleast two fasteners. Bend tabs over fasteners.

4. Install exposed sheet metal flashing and trim with limited oil canning, and free ofbuckling and tool marks.

5. Torch cutting of sheet metal flashing and trim is not permitted.6. Do not use graphite pencils to mark metal surfaces.

B. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals contact each other, or where metal contactspressure-treated wood or other corrosive substrates, protect against galvanic action orcorrosion by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating or by other permanentseparation as recommended by sheet metal manufacturer or cited sheet metalstandard.

1. Coat concealed side of uncoated-aluminum and stainless-steel sheet metalflashing and trim with bituminous coating where flashing and trim contact wood,ferrous metal, or cementitious construction.

2. Underlayment: Where installing sheet metal flashing and trim directly oncementitious or wood substrates, install underlayment and cover with slip sheet.

C. Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim.Space movement joints at maximum of 10 feet (3 m) with no joints within 24 inches(600 mm) of corner or intersection.

1. Form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch (25mm) deep, filled with sealant concealed within joints.

2. Use lapped expansion joints only where indicated on Drawings.

D. Fasteners: Use fastener sizes that penetrate substrate not less than recommended byfastener manufacturer to achieve maximum pull-out resistance.

E. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible in exposed work andlocate to minimize possibility of leakage. Cover and seal fasteners and anchors asrequired for a tight installation.

F. Seal joints as required for watertight construction.

1. Use sealant-filled joints unless otherwise indicated. Embed hooked flanges ofjoint members not less than 1 inch (25 mm) into sealant. Form joints tocompletely conceal sealant. When ambient temperature at time of installation isbetween 40 and 70 deg F (4 and 21 deg C), set joint members for 50 percentmovement each way. Adjust setting proportionately for installation at higherambient temperatures. Do not install sealant-type joints at temperatures below 40deg F (4 deg C).

2. Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with requirements in Section 079200"Joint Sealants."

G. Rivets: Rivet joints in uncoated aluminum where necessary for strength.


3.4 ROOF FLASHING INSTALLATION

A. General: Install sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with performancerequirements, sheet metal manufacturer's written installation instructions, and citedsheet metal standard. Provide concealed fasteners where possible, and set units trueto line, levels, and slopes. Install work with laps, joints, and seams that arepermanently watertight and weather resistant.

B. Roof Edge Flashing: Anchor to resist uplift and outward forces according torecommendations in FM Global Property Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-49 for FMApprovals' listing for required windstorm classification.

C. Copings: Anchor to resist uplift and outward forces according to recommendations inFM Global Property Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-49 for specified FM Approvals'listing for required windstorm classification.

D. Pipe or Post Counterflashing: Install counterflashing umbrella with close-fitting collarwith top edge flared for elastomeric sealant, extending minimum of 4 inches (100 mm)over base flashing. Install stainless-steel draw band and tighten.

E. Counterflashing: Coordinate installation of counterflashing with installation of baseflashing. Insert counterflashing in reglets or receivers and fit tightly to base flashing.Extend counterflashing 4 inches (100 mm) over base flashing. Lap counterflashingjoints minimum of 4 inches (100 mm). Secure in waterproof manner by means ofinterlocking folded seam or blind rivets and sealant unless otherwise indicated.

F. Roof-Penetration Flashing: Coordinate installation of roof-penetration flashing withinstallation of roofing and other items penetrating roof. Seal with elastomeric sealantand clamp flashing to pipes that penetrate roof.

3.5 MISCELLANEOUS FLASHING INSTALLATION

A. Equipment Support Flashing: Coordinate installation of equipment support flashing withinstallation of roofing and equipment. Weld or seal flashing with elastomeric sealant toequipment support member.

3.6 ERECTION TOLERANCES

A. Installation Tolerances: Shim and align sheet metal flashing and trim within installedtolerance of 1/4 inch in 20 feet (6 mm in 6 m) on slope and location lines indicated onDrawings and within 1/8-inch (3-mm) offset of adjoining faces and of alignment ofmatching profiles.

B. Installation Tolerances: Shim and align sheet metal flashing and trim within installedtolerances specified in MCA's "Guide Specification for Residential Metal Roofing."


3.7 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. Clean exposed metal surfaces of substances that interfere with uniform oxidation andweathering.

B. Clean and neutralize flux materials. Clean off excess solder.

C. Clean off excess sealants.

D. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films as sheet metal flashingand trim are installed unless otherwise indicated in manufacturers written installationinstructions. On completion of sheet metal flashing and trim installation, removeunused materials and clean finished surfaces as recommended by sheet metal flashingand trim manufacturer. Maintain sheet metal flashing and trim in clean condition duringconstruction.

E. Replace sheet metal flashing and trim that have been damaged or that havedeteriorated beyond successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repairprocedures.


JOINT SEALANTS 079200 - 1 TOWN BRANCH WWTP THICKENING

SECTION 079200 - JOINT SEALANTS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Silicone joint sealants.2. Nonstaining silicone joint sealants.3. Urethane joint sealants.4. Mildew-resistant joint sealants.5. Butyl joint sealants.6. Latex joint sealants.


A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.


A. Product Data: For each joint-sealant product.

B. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of strips of curedsealants showing the full range of colors available for each product exposed to view.

C. Samples for Verification: For each kind and color of joint sealant required, provideSamples with joint sealants in 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) wide joints formed between two 6-inch- (150-mm-) long strips of material matching the appearance of exposed surfacesadjacent to joint sealants.

D. Joint-Sealant Schedule: Include the following information:

1. Joint-sealant application, joint location, and designation.2. Joint-sealant manufacturer and product name.3. Joint-sealant formulation.4. Joint-sealant color.



A. Qualification Data: For qualified testing agency.

B. Product Test Reports: For each kind of joint sealant, for tests performed by a qualifiedtesting agency.

C. Preconstruction Laboratory Test Schedule: Include the following information for eachjoint sealant and substrate material to be tested:

1. Joint-sealant location and designation.2. Manufacturer and product name.3. Type of substrate material.4. Proposed test.5. Number of samples required.

D. Preconstruction Laboratory Test Reports: From sealant manufacturer, indicating thefollowing:

1. Materials forming joint substrates and joint-sealant backings have been tested forcompatibility and adhesion with joint sealants.

2. Interpretation of test results and written recommendations for primers andsubstrate preparation are needed for adhesion.

E. Preconstruction Field-Adhesion-Test Reports: Indicate which sealants and jointpreparation methods resulted in optimum adhesion to joint substrates based on testingspecified in "Preconstruction Testing" Article.

F. Field-Adhesion-Test Reports: For each sealant application tested.

G. Sample Warranties: For special warranties.


A. Installer Qualifications: An authorized representative who is trained and approved bymanufacturer.

B. Product Testing: Test joint sealants using a qualified testing agency.

1. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM C 1021 to conductthe testing indicated.

C. Mockups: Install sealant in mockups of assemblies specified in other Sections that areindicated to receive joint sealants specified in this Section. Use materials andinstallation methods specified in this Section.

1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under the following conditions:


1. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permittedby joint-sealant manufacturer or are below 40 deg F (5 deg C).

2. When joint substrates are wet.3. Where joint widths are less than those allowed by joint-sealant manufacturer for

applications indicated.4. Where contaminants capable of interfering with adhesion have not yet been

removed from joint substrates.

1.8 WARRANTY

A. Special Installer's Warranty: Installer agrees to repair or replace joint sealants that donot comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section withinspecified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.

B. Special Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to furnish joint sealants torepair or replace those joint sealants that do not comply with performance and otherrequirements specified in this Section within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.

C. Special warranties specified in this article exclude deterioration or failure of jointsealants from the following:

1. Movement of the structure caused by stresses on the sealant exceeding sealantmanufacturer's written specifications for sealant elongation and compression.

2. Disintegration of joint substrates from causes exceeding design specifications.3. Mechanical damage caused by individuals, tools, or other outside agents.4. Changes in sealant appearance caused by accumulation of dirt or other

atmospheric contaminants.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 JOINT SEALANTS, GENERAL

A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backings, and other related materials that arecompatible with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service andapplication, as demonstrated by joint-sealant manufacturer, based on testing and fieldexperience.

B. VOC Content of Interior Sealants: Sealants and sealant primers used inside theweatherproofing system shall comply with the following:

1. Architectural sealants shall have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less.2. Sealants and sealant primers for nonporous substrates shall have a VOC content

of 250 g/L or less.


3. Sealants and sealant primers for nonporous substrates shall have a VOC contentof 775 g/L or less.

C. Colors of Exposed Joint Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's fullrange.

2.2 SILICONE JOINT SEALANTS

A. Silicone, S, NS, 100/50, NT: Single-component, nonsag, plus 100 percent andminus 50 percent movement capability, nontraffic-use, neutral-curing silicone jointsealant; ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 100/50, Use NT.

B. Silicone, S, NS, 100/50, T, NT: Single-component, nonsag, plus 100 percent andminus 50 percent movement capability, traffic- and nontraffic-use, neutral-curingsilicone joint sealant; ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 100/50, Uses T and NT.

C. Silicone, S, P, 100/50, T, NT: Single-component, pourable, plus 100 percent andminus 50 percent movement capability traffic- and nontraffic-use, neutral-curingsilicone joint sealant; ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade P, Class 100/50, Uses T and NT.

D. Silicone, M, P, 100/50, T, NT: Multicomponent, pourable, plus 100 percent andminus 50 percent movement capability, traffic- and nontraffic-use, neutral-curingsilicone joint sealant; ASTM C 920, Type M, Grade P, Class 100/50, Uses T and NT.

2.3 NONSTAINING SILICONE JOINT SEALANTS

A. Nonstaining Joint Sealants: No staining of substrates when tested according toASTM C 1248.

B. Silicone, Nonstaining, S, NS, 100/50, NT: Nonstaining, single-component, nonsag,plus 100 percent and minus 50 percent movement capability, nontraffic-use, neutral-curing silicone joint sealant; ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 100/50, Use NT.

C. Silicone, Nonstaining, S, NS, 100/50, T, NT: Nonstaining, single-component, nonsag,plus 100 percent and minus 50 percent movement capability, traffic- and nontraffic-use,neutral-curing silicone joint sealant; ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 100/50,Uses T and NT.

D. Silicone, Nonstaining, M, NS, 50, NT: Nonstaining, multicomponent, nonsag, plus 50percent and minus 50 percent movement capability, nontraffic-use, neutral-curingsilicone joint sealant; ASTM C 920, Type M, Grade NS, Class 50, Use NT.

2.4 BUTYL JOINT SEALANTS

A. Butyl-Rubber-Based Joint Sealants: ASTM C 1311.


2.5 LATEX JOINT SEALANTS

A. Acrylic Latex: Acrylic latex or siliconized acrylic latex, ASTM C 834, Type OP,Grade NF.

2.6 JOINT-SEALANT BACKING

A. Sealant Backing Material, General: Nonstaining; compatible with joint substrates,sealants, primers, and other joint fillers; and approved for applications indicated bysealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, availablemanufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include,but are not limited to the following:

a. BASF Corporation-Construction Systems.b. Construction Foam Products; a division of Nomaco, Inc.

B. Cylindrical Sealant Backings: ASTM C 1330, Type C (closed-cell material with asurface skin) or any of the type, as approved in writing by joint-sealant manufacturerfor joint application indicated, and of size and density to control sealant depth andotherwise contribute to producing optimum sealant performance.

C. Bond-Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape recommended by sealantmanufacturer for preventing sealant from adhering to rigid, inflexible joint-filler materialsor joint surfaces at back of joint. Provide self-adhesive tape where applicable.


A. Primer: Material recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer where required foradhesion of sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstructionjoint-sealant-substrate tests and field tests.

B. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers ofsealants and sealant backing materials, free of oily residues or other substancescapable of staining or harming joint substrates and adjacent nonporous surfaces in anyway, and formulated to promote optimum adhesion of sealants to joint substrates.

C. Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants andsurfaces adjacent to joints.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants, with Installer present, for compliancewith requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances, and other conditionsaffecting performance of the Work.



3.2 PREPARATION

A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealantsto comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions and the followingrequirements:

1. Remove all foreign material from joint substrates that could interfere withadhesion of joint sealant, including dust, paints (except for permanent, protectivecoatings tested and approved for sealant adhesion and compatibility by sealantmanufacturer), old joint sealants, oil, grease, waterproofing, water repellents,water, surface dirt, and frost.

2. Clean porous joint substrate surfaces by brushing, grinding, mechanicalabrading, or a combination of these methods to produce a clean, sound substratecapable of developing optimum bond with joint sealants. Remove loose particlesremaining after cleaning operations above by vacuuming or blowing out jointswith oil-free compressed air. Porous joint substrates include the following:

a. Concrete.b. Masonry.

3. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete.4. Clean nonporous joint substrate surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means

that do not stain, harm substrates, or leave residues capable of interfering withadhesion of joint sealants. Nonporous joint substrates include the following:

a. Metal.b. Glass.

B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where recommended by joint-sealantmanufacturer or as indicated by preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests or priorexperience. Apply primer to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's writteninstructions. Confine primers to areas of joint-sealant bond; do not allow spillage ormigration onto adjoining surfaces.

C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant orprimer with adjoining surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained ordamaged by such contact or by cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears.Remove tape immediately after tooling without disturbing joint seal.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS

A. General: Comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written installation instructions forproducts and applications indicated, unless more stringent requirements apply.

B. Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 1193 for useof joint sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated.


C. Install sealant backings of kind indicated to support sealants during application and atposition required to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealantsrelative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability.

1. Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings.2. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear sealant backings.3. Remove absorbent sealant backings that have become wet before sealant

application, and replace them with dry materials.

D. Install bond-breaker tape behind sealants where sealant backings are not usedbetween sealants and backs of joints.

E. Install sealants using proven techniques that comply with the following and at the sametime backings are installed:

1. Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates.2. Completely fill recesses in each joint configuration.3. Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that

allow optimum sealant movement capability.

F. Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinningor curing begins, tool sealants according to requirements specified in subparagraphsbelow to form smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated; to eliminate airpockets; and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint.

1. Remove excess sealant from surfaces adjacent to joints.2. Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by sealant manufacturer and that

do not discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces.3. Provide concave joint profile per Figure 8A in ASTM C 1193 unless otherwise

indicated.


A. Field-Adhesion Testing: Field test joint-sealant adhesion to joint substrates as follows:

1. Extent of Testing: Test completed and cured sealant joints as follows:

a. Perform 10 tests for the first 1000 feet (300 m) of joint length for each kindof sealant and joint substrate.

2. Test Method: Test joint sealants according to Method A, Field-Applied SealantJoint Hand Pull Tab, in Appendix X1 in ASTM C 1193 or Method A, TailProcedure, in ASTM C 1521.

a. For joints with dissimilar substrates, verify adhesion to each substrateseparately; extend cut along one side, verifying adhesion to opposite side.Repeat procedure for opposite side.

3. Inspect tested joints and report on the following:


a. Whether sealants filled joint cavities and are free of voids.b. Whether sealant dimensions and configurations comply with specified

requirements.c. Whether sealants in joints connected to pulled-out portion failed to adhere

to joint substrates or tore cohesively. Include data on pull distance used totest each kind of product and joint substrate. Compare these results todetermine if adhesion complies with sealant manufacturer's field-adhesionhand-pull test criteria.

4. Record test results in a field-adhesion-test log. Include dates when sealants wereinstalled, names of persons who installed sealants, test dates, test locations,whether joints were primed, adhesion results and percent elongations, sealantmaterial, sealant configuration, and sealant dimensions.

5. Repair sealants pulled from test area by applying new sealants following sameprocedures used originally to seal joints. Ensure that original sealant surfaces areclean and that new sealant contacts original sealant.

B. Evaluation of Field-Adhesion-Test Results: Sealants not evidencing adhesive failurefrom testing or noncompliance with other indicated requirements will be consideredsatisfactory. Remove sealants that fail to adhere to joint substrates during testing or tocomply with other requirements. Retest failed applications until test results provesealants comply with indicated requirements.

3.5 CLEANING

A. Clean off excess sealant or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progressesby methods and with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of jointsealants and of products in which joints occur.

3.6 PROTECTION

A. Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminatingsubstances and from damage resulting from construction operations or other causesso sealants are without deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If,despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out, remove, and repairdamaged or deteriorated joint sealants immediately so installations with repaired areasare indistinguishable from original work.

3.7 JOINT-SEALANT SCHEDULE

A. Joint-Sealant Application: Exterior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontrafficsurfaces JS-1.

1. Joint Locations:a. Perimeter joints between materials listed above and frames of doors,

windows and louvers.

2. Joint Sealant: Silicone, nonstaining, S, NS, 50, NT.


3. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range ofcolors.

B. Joint-Sealant Application: Interior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontrafficsurfaces not subject to significant movement JS-2.

1. Joint Locations:a. Perimeter joints between interior wall surfaces and frames of interior doors

and windows.

2. Joint Sealant: Acrylic latex (Paintable)3. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of

colors.

C. Joint-Sealant Application: Concealed mastics JS-3.

1. Joint Locations:

a. Aluminum thresholds.b. Sill plates.

2. Joint Sealant: Butyl-rubber based3. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of

colors.


DIVISION 08

OPENINGS

FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC(FRP) DOORS 081613-1 TOWN BRANCH WWTP THICKENING

SECTION 081613 - FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC (FRP) DOORS

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and SupplementaryConditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.02 SUMMARY


1. Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic (FRP) Doors as indicated on Drawings.

B. Related Sections:1. See Division 08 “Door Hardware”.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings: Include the following:

1. Summary door schedule indicating the specific reference numbers as used ondrawings, with columns noting door type, frame type, size, handing, accessoriesand hardware.

2. A drawing depicting front and rear door elevations showing hardware.

3. Locations of reinforcement and preparations for hardware.

4. Details of each different wall opening condition.

5. Drawing showing dimensional location of each hardware item and size of eachdoor.

6. Details of moldings, removable stops, and glazing.

B. Samples for Initial Selection: For factory-applied color finishes. Provide color samples ofthe actual finish material, not paper color charts.

1. Colors shall be chosen from manufacturer's full-range of available colors.

C. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by aqualified testing agency, for each type of fiberglass reinforced plastic door assembly.

D. Product Technical Data Including:

1. Acknowledgment that products submitted meet requirements of standardsreferenced. Coordinate with door hardware schedule.

2. Manufacturer shall provide certificate of compliance with current local and federalregulations as it applies to the manufacturing process.


3. Manufacturer's installation instructions.

4. Schedule of doors indicating the specific reference numbers as used ondrawings, door type, size, handing and applicable hardware.

5. Details of core and edge construction. Include factory-construction specifications.

6. Certification of manufacturer's qualifications.

7. Fire-resistance ratings.

E. Operation and Maintenance Manuals:

1. Include recommended methods and frequency for maintaining optimum conditionof fiberglass doors under anticipated traffic and use conditions.

2. Include one set of final as built drawings with the same requirements asmentioned in Section A, above.

3. Include certificate of warranty for door listing specific door registration numbers.

4. Include hardware data sheets and hardware manufacturer's warranties.


A. Provide manufacturer’s heavy-duty doors and frames only. No light-duty, or medium-dutydoors and frames will be accepted.

B. Source Limitations:

1. Manufacturer Qualifications: A company specialized in the manufacture offiberglass reinforced plastic (FRP) doors and frames as specified herein with aminimum of (5) years documented experience and with a record of successful in-service performance for the applications as required for this project.

2. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed fiberglassdoor and frame installations similar in material, design, and extent to thoseindicated and whose work has resulted in construction with a record ofsuccessful in-service performance.

3. Source Limitations: Obtain FRP doors through one source fabricated from asingle manufacturer.

4. Source Limitations: Hardware and accessories for all FRP doors and framesshall be provided by door and frame manufacturer in accordance with relatedSection 087100 - Door Hardware.

5. Substitutions: Substitution items will be subject to compliance with therequirements of this section and must provide all the functions and features ofthe specified product or it will not be approved as equal.

a. Equivalency: It shall be the responsibility of the contractor to furnish allnecessary items (samples, product data, all listing reference standards,etc.) in a clear and orderly format in order to show compliance andequivalency.


b. Equivalency Format: Should be as simple as a "side-by-side" comparison(via table, chart, etc.) between the substitution item and the basis-of-design specified item so that the substitution item is easily shown to beequivalent. If the substitution item is not easily compared to beequivalent it will not be approved as equal.

C. Referenced Standards

1. ANSI A250.4 1,000,000 cycle test.

2. ANSI A117.1 specifications for handicap accessibility, ADA requirements.

3. NFPA 80 for fire-rated class.

4. NFPA 252 fire-rated door, panel, and frame construction.


A. Each door shall be delivered to jobsite in an adequate crate and/or carton as required forprotection from damage. Each crate / carton shall be clearly marked with projectinformation, door location, specific reference number as shown on drawings, andshipping information.

B. Doors shall be stored in the original container in a vertical position, clear of the floor, outof inclement weather and/or extreme temperatures for protection against damage.Provide blocking between doors to permit air circulation between the doors and toprevent damage to the door faces.

C. Handle doors pursuant to the manufacturer's recommendations.

D. Use care in handling FRP doors and frames to prevent damage to factory finish. Wearprotective gloves when handling product. Do not slide or drag doors or frames againstone another.

E. All damaged or otherwise unsuitable doors shall be immediately removed from thejobsite.

1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Field Measurements: Verify actual dimensions of openings by field measurementsbefore fabrication.

1.07 WARRANTY

A. Provide that the structural integrity of the doors have not been violated or compromised,provide the following:

1. ANSI A250.4 1,000,000 cycle test. Warranty all fiberglass doors for a period of10 years against failure due to corrosion.

2. Warranty all fiberglass doors on materials and workmanship for a period of 10years, including warp, separation or delamination, and expansion of the core.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements specified throughout thisSection, provide heavy-duty FRP door products by one of the following:

1. Chem-Pruf Door Company, Ltd., Brownsville, TX. (excluding Simon Door Co.)

2. Tiger Door Company, LLC, Greensburg, PA.

3. Corrim Company, Oshkosh, WI.

4. Or approved equal as outlined in Section 1.4.

2.02 FRP DOORS

A. Doors shall be made of fiberglass reinforced plastic (FRP) using chemically proven resinsresistant to contaminants typically found in the environment for which these specificationsare written. Doors shall be 1 3/4 inch thick and of flush construction, having no seams orcracks. All doors up to 4'0 x 8'0 shall have equal diagonal measurements with amaximum tolerance of +/- 1/32 inch.

B. Comply with ASTM E 84, or UL 723 for low flame spread rating of 25 or less.

C. Door Plates shall be from one of the following methods:

1. Molded in one continuous piece, starting with a 25-mil gelcoat of the colorspecified, integrally molded with at least two layers of 1.5 ounce per square footfiberglass. Door plate weight shall not be less than 0.97 pounds per square footwith a 30/70 fiberglass to resin.

2. Face sheets shall be manufactured using a corrosion resistant resin system withlight stabilizing additives. The resin shall be reinforced with fiberglass, 50%average by weight for enhanced strength. Face sheets shall be a minimum of0.125 inch thick fiberglass.

3. Facing shall be 0.120” composite FRP sheet exterior grade, fiber reinforced lasticpanel on interior and exterior faces. Colored pigment shall be maximum amontformulated with the resin. FRP sheets shall be USDA acceptable, non-porous,meeting the Class C requirements of ASTM E84.

D. Stiles and rails shall be constructed from one of the following methods:

1. A matrix of at least three layers of 1.5 ounce per square foot of fiberglass mat.The stile and rail shall be molded in one continuous piece to a U-shapedconfiguration and to the exact dimensions of the door. In this manner there willbe no miter joints or disparate materials used to form the one-piece stile and rail.Stiles and Rails for rated openings: Core shall be banded with firestop per factorydrawings.

2. A pultruded FRP square or rectangular tube sub-frame, minimum 1 ¼" x 1 ¼" x¼" thick, is to be provided within the door.


E. Core material: shall have an R Factor = 11 and properties that comply with ASTM E 84 orUL 723 for low flame spread rating of 25 or less and complies with the InternationalBuilding Code. Core shall be constructed from one of the following methods:

1. Polypropylene plastic honeycomb core with a non woven polyester veil forunparalleled plate bonding.

2. Phenolic impregnated resin paper honeycomb core.

3. Phenolic impregnated resin kraft paper honeycomb core.

4. Mineral core for 30 minute to 90 minute fire-rated doors.

F. Internal reinforcement: Provide internal reinforcement sufficient amount to adequatelysupport required hardware and function of the same.

G. Finish of door and existing frame shall be identical. Colors, for doors, to be chosen frommanufacturer's full range of colors. Finish of door shall be one of the following:

1. Textured, Semi-gloss or Matte finish. Secondary painting to achieve color orfinish is not acceptable.

H. Window openings shall be provided for at time of manufacture and shall be completelysealed so that the interior of the door is not exposed to the environment. Retainers shallhave a profile that drains away from glazing. The retainers must match the color, texture,and finish of the door plates. Glass shall be provided by door and frame manufacturer. Attime of manufacture.

I. Provisions for lights and louvers shall be performed during manufacture and shall not beattempted in the field. Cutouts are to be totally enclosed by FRP stile and rail framingincorporated into the door structure. Light and louver cutouts that expose core materialare not acceptable.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 VERIFICATION OF CONDITIONS

A. Examine conditions under which construction activities of this section are to beperformed, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements and submit a writtenreport to general contractor if conditions are unacceptable.

B. General Contractor shall submit two copies of the Installer’s report to the A/E Consultantwithin 24 hours of receipt of report.

C. Verify openings are correctly prepared to receive doors and frames.

D. Verify openings are correct size and depth in accordance with shop drawings orsubmittals.

E. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.


3.02 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install fiberglass reinforced plastic work plumb, rigid, properly aligned, andsecurely fastened in place; comply with Drawings and manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Field alteration of doors or frames to accommodate field conditions is strictly prohibited.

C. Fire labeled doors and frames must be installed in strict accordance with manufacturer’sinstructions and the current versions of the following:

1. I.B.C., Section 715, Opening Protectives.

2. UL 10C, for side-hinged or pivot swinging doors, and NFPA 252, StandardMethods of Fire Tests of Door Assemblies.

3. UL 10B, for other types of doors, and NFPA 252, Standard Methods of Fire Testsof Door Assemblies.

4. NFPA 80, Standard for Fire Doors and Other Opening Protectives.

5. NFPA 257, Standard on Fire Tests for Window and Glass Block Assemblies.

3.03 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. Final Adjustments: Check and readjust operating hardware items immediately beforefinal inspection. Leave work in complete and proper operating condition. Remove andreplace defective work, including FRP work that is warped, bowed, or otherwiseunacceptable.

B. Adjust doors in accordance with door manufacturer’s maintenance instructions to swingopen and shut without binding and to remain in place at any angle without being movedby gravitational influence.

C. Adjust door hardware to operate correctly in accordance with hardware manufacturer’smaintenance instructions.

D. Clean surfaces of door opening assemblies and exposed door hardware in accordancewith respective manufacturer’s maintenance instructions. Only use cleaning productsthat will not scratch or damage the surfaces and are recommended by the manufacturer

3.04 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED PRODUCTS

A. Protect door opening assemblies and door hardware from damage by subsequentconstruction activities until final inspection.


ALUMINUM WINDOWS 085113 - 1 TOWN BRANCH WWTP THICKENING

SECTION 085113 - ALUMINUM WINDOWS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes aluminum architectural window units fabricated from standard extrudedsections and components stocked by the manufacturer. Window types required include:

1. Fixed windows w/ operable projecting transom as shown on the construction documentdrawings.

1.3 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. General: Provide aluminum architectural window units that comply with performancerequirements specified, as demonstrated by testing corresponding systems according to testmethods indicated.

B. Limit air leakage for project-out and fixed window units to 0.06 CFM/min/sf of wall area at 6.24PSF as measured in accordance with ASTM E283.

C. Water Penetration: There shall be no water penetration, as defined in ASTM E 331, whentested in accordance with ASTM E 331 at an inward test pressure of 8.00 lbf per sq. ft.

D. Condensation Resistance: Where window units are indicated to be of "thermal-breakconstruction," provide units that have been tested for thermal performance in accordance withAAMA 1503.1 showing a condensation resistance factor (CRF) of 54.

E. Thermal Transmittance: Provide window units that have a U-value maximum of 0.62BTU/hour/sq. ft./deg F at 15 mph exterior wind velocity when tested in accordance with AAMA1502.7.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of the Contract and Division 1Specification Sections.

1. Product data for each type of window required, including:

a. Construction details and fabrication methods.b. Data on hardware, accessories, and finishes.c. Recommendations for maintenance and cleaning of exterior surfaces.

2. Shop drawings for each type of window required. Include information not fully detailed inmanufacturer's standard product data and the following:


a. Layout and installation details, including anchors.b. Elevations of continuous work at 1/4-inch scale and typical window unit elevations

at 3/4-inch scale.c. Full-size section details of typical composite members, including reinforcement.d. Hardware including operators.e. Glazing details.f. Accessories.


A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer who has completed installation ofaluminum windows similar in design and extent to those required for the project and which hasresulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance.

B. Single-Source Responsibility: Provide aluminum window units from one source and producedby a single manufacturer.

C. Design Concept: The drawings indicate the size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of thealuminum window types required and are based on Kawneer 8225TL Thermal Lanced fixedunits with projecting transom, equal leg sill receptor, head receptor, and jamb receptors.Aluminum windows by other manufacturers may be considered provided deviations indimensions and profiles are minor and do not change the design concept as judged by theArchitect. The burden of proof of equality is on the proposer.


A. Field Measurements: Check actual window openings by accurate field measurement beforefabrication. Show recorded measurements on final shop drawings. Coordinate fabricationschedule with construction progress to avoid delay of work.

1. Where necessary, proceed with fabrication without field measurements and coordinatefabrication tolerances to ensure proper fit of window units.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offeringproducts that may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. EFCO Corporation.2. Graham Architectural Products Corporation.3. Kawneer Company, Inc.4. Manko Window Systems, Inc.5. Traco.

2.2 PRODUCTS

A. Provide Kawneer 8225TL Thermal Lanced fixed units with projecting transom, equal leg sillreceptor, head receptor, and jamb receptors, or equivalent by other approved manufacturer.


2.3 MATERIALS

A. Aluminum Extrusions: Provide alloy and temper recommended by the window manufacturer forthe strength, corrosion resistance, and application of required finish.

B. Fasteners: Provide aluminum, nonmagnetic stainless steel, epoxy adhesive, or other materialswarranted by the manufacturer to be noncorrosive and compatible with window members, trim,hardware, anchors, and other components of window units.

1. Reinforcement: Where fasteners screw-anchor into aluminum less than 0.125 inch thick,reinforce the interior with aluminum or nonmagnetic stainless steel to receive screwthreads, or provide standard noncorrosive, pressed-in, splined grommet nuts.

2. Exposed Fasteners: Do not use exposed fasteners except where unavoidable forapplication of hardware. For application of hardware, use fasteners that match the finishof the member or hardware being fastened, as appropriate.

C. Anchors, Clips, and Window Accessories: Depending on strength and corrosion-inhibitingrequirements, fabricate anchors, clips, and window accessories of aluminum or nonmagneticstainless steel. Anchors, clips, and window accessories fabricated of zinc-coated steel or ironcomplying with ASTM B 633 may be used for concealed work.

D. Compression-Type Weatherstripping: Provide manufacturer’s standard weatherstripping.

E. Sealant: For sealants required within fabricated window units, provide type recommended bythe window manufacturer for joint size and movement. Sealant shall remain permanentlyelastic, nonshrinking, and nonmigrating. Unless otherwise indicated, comply with Division 7"Joint Sealants" Section for selection and installation of sealants.

2.4 HARDWARE

A. Projected Window Hardware:

1. Gear-Type Rotary Operators: Complying with AAMA 901 when tested according toASTM E 405, Method A. Provide operators that function without requiring the removal ofinterior screens or using screen wickets.

a. Type and Style: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of typesand styles

2. Hinges: Non-friction type, not less than two per sash.3. Lock: Lever handle and cam-action lock with keeper.4. Limit Devices: Concealed support arms with adjustable, limited, hold-open devices

designed to restrict sash opening.

a. Limit clear opening to 6 inches (150 mm) for ventilation; with custodial key release.

2.5 FABRICATION

A. General: Fabricate aluminum window units to comply with indicated standards. Include acomplete system for assembly of components and anchorage of window units.

1. Provide units that are reglazable without dismantling sash framing.2. Prepare window sash for glazing.


B. Thermal-Break Construction: Fabricate window units with an integral concealed low-conductance thermal barrier, located between exterior materials and window members exposedon the interior, in a manner that eliminates direct metal-to-metal contact.

C. Weepholes: Provide weepholes and internal passages to conduct infiltrating water to theexterior.

D. Provide water-shed members above side-hinged ventilators and similar lines of natural waterpenetration.

E. Preglazed Fabrication: Preglaze window units at the factory where possible and practical forapplications indicated. Comply with glass and glazing requirements of the "Glass and Glazing"Sections of these specifications and AAMA 101.

2.6 FINISHES

A. General: Comply with NAAMM "Metal Finishes Manual" for recommendations relative toapplication and designations of finishes.

B. Finish designations prefixed by "AA" conform to the system established by the AluminumAssociation for designating aluminum finishes.

C. Class II, Color Anodic Finish: AA-M12C22A32/A34 (Mechanical Finish: nonspecular asfabricated; Chemical Finish: etched, medium matte; Anodic Coating: Architectural Class II,integrally colored or electrolytically deposited color coating 0.010 mm or thicker) complying withAAMA 611.

1. Color: Clear Anodized. Match existing aluminum windows.

2.7 INSECT SCREENS

A. General: Fabricate insect screens to integrate with window frame. Provide screen for eachoperable exterior sash. Screen wickets are not permitted.

1. Type and Location: Full, inside for project-out sashes.

B. Aluminum Frames: Manufacturer's standard aluminum alloy complying with SMA 1004 orSMA 1201. Fabricate frames with mitered or coped joints or corner extrusions, concealedfasteners, and removable PVC spline/anchor concealing edge of frame.

1. Tubular Framing Sections and Cross Braces: Roll formed from aluminum sheet.

C. Aluminum Wire Fabric: 18-by-16 (1.1-by-1.3-mm) mesh of 0.011-inch- (0.28-mm-) diameter,coated aluminum wire.

1. Wire-Fabric Finish: Charcoal gray.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSPECTION

A. Inspect openings before beginning installation. Verify that rough or masonry opening is correctand the sill plate is level.

1. Masonry surfaces shall be visibly dry and free of excess mortar, sand and otherconstruction debris.

2. Metal surfaces shall be dry; clean; free of grease, oil, dirt, rust and corrosion, and weldingslag; and without sharp edges or offsets at joints.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's specifications and recommendations for installation of window units,hardware, operators, and other components of the work.

B. Set units plumb, level, and true to line, without warp or rack of frames or sash. Provide propersupport and anchor securely in place. Do not bridge thermal breaks.

1. Separate aluminum and other corrodible surfaces from sources of corrosion or electrolyticaction at points of contact with other materials by complying with the requirementsspecified under paragraph "Dissimilar Materials" in the Appendix to AAMA 101.

C. Set sill members and other members in a bed of compound or with joint fillers or gaskets, asshown, to provide weathertight construction. Refer to the "Joint Sealer" Sections of Division 7for compounds, fillers, and gaskets to be installed concurrently with window units. Coordinateinstallation with wall flashings and other components of the work.

1. Compounds, joint fillers, and gaskets to be installed after installation of window units arespecified as work in another Section in Division 7.

3.3 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust operating sashes and hardware for a tight fit at contact points and weather stripping forsmooth operation and weathertight closure.

3.4 CLEANING

A. Clean aluminum surfaces promptly after installation of windows. Exercise care to avoid damageto protective coatings and finishes. Remove excess glazing and sealant compounds, dirt, andother substances.

1. Keep protective films and coverings in place until final cleaning.

B. Clean glass of preglazed units promptly after installation of windows.

3.5 PROTECTION

A. Remove and replace glass that has been broken, chipped, cracked, abraded, or damagedduring construction period.


B. Initiate and maintain protection and other precautions required through the remainder of theconstruction period to ensure that, except for normal weathering, window units will be free ofdamage or deterioration at the time of Substantial Completion.


DOOR HARDWARE 087100-1 TOWN BRANCH WWTP THICKENING

SECTION 087100 - DOOR HARDWARE

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and SupplementaryConditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes items known commercially as finish or door hardware that arerequired for swing, sliding, and folding doors, except special types of unique hardwarespecified in the same sections as the doors and door frames on which they areinstalled.

1. Hinges.2. Lock cylinders and keys.3. Lock and latch sets.4. Closers.5. Exit Devices.6. Door trim units.7. Weatherstripping for exterior doors.8. Thresholds.

B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to thisSection.

1. Division 8 Section "FRP Doors and Frames" for factory pre-fitting and factorypre-machining of doors for door hardware.

C. References: Comply with applicable requirements of the following standards. Wherethese standards conflict with other specific requirements, the most restrictive shallgovern.

1. Builders Hardware Manufacturing Association (BHMA)2. NFPA 101 Life Safety Code3. NFPA 80 -Fire Doors and Windows4. ANSI-A156.xx- Various Performance Standards for Finish Hardware5. UL10C – Positive Pressure Fire Test of Door Assemblies6. ANSI-A117.1 – Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities7. DHI /ANSI A115.IG – Installation Guide for Doors and Hardware8. ICC – International Building Code

Intent of Hardware Groups:


9. Should items of hardware not definitely specified be required for completion ofthe Work, furnish such items of type and quality comparable to adjacenthardware and appropriate for service required.

10. Where items of hardware aren’t definitely or correctly specified, are required forcompletion of the Work, a written statement of such omission, error, or otherdiscrepancy to be submitted to Architect, prior to date specified for receipt of bidsfor clarification by addendum; or, furnish such items in the type and qualityestablished by this specification, and appropriate to the service intended.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division1 Specification sections.

B. Product data including manufacturers' technical product data for each item of doorhardware, installation instructions, maintenance of operating parts and finish, andother information necessary to show compliance with requirements.

C. Final hardware schedule coordinated with doors, frames, and related work to ensureproper size, thickness, hand, function, and finish of door hardware.

1. Final Hardware Schedule Content: Based on hardware to match and replaceexisting hardware on openings indicated in door schedule; organize scheduleinto "hardware sets" indicating complete designations of every item required foreach door or opening. Include the following information:

a. Type, style, function, size, and finish of each hardware item.b. Name and manufacturer of each item.c. Fastenings and other pertinent information.d. Location of each hardware set cross referenced to indications on Drawings

both on floor plans and in door and frame schedule.e. Explanation of all abbreviations, symbols, and codes contained in

schedule.f. Mounting locations for hardware.g. Door and frame sizes and materials.h. Keying information.

2. Submittal Sequence: Submit final schedule at earliest possible date particularlywhere acceptance of hardware schedule must precede fabrication of other workthat is critical in the Project construction schedule. Include with schedule theproduct data, samples, shop drawings of other work affected by door hardware,and other information essential to the coordinated review of schedule.

3. Keying Schedule: Submit separate detailed schedule indicating clearly how theOwner's final instructions on keying of locks has been fulfilled.

D. Templates for doors, frames, and other work specified to be factory prepared for theinstallation of door hardware. Check shop drawings of other work to confirm thatadequate provisions are made for locating and installing door hardware to comply withindicated requirements.


1.4 SUBSTITUTIONS:

A. Comply with Division 1.


A. Single Source Responsibility: Obtain each type of hardware (latch and lock sets,hinges, closers, etc.) from a single manufacturer.

B. Supplier Qualifications: A recognized architectural door hardware supplier, withwarehousing facilities in the Project's vicinity, that has a record of successful in-serviceperformance for supplying door hardware similar in quantity, type, and quality to thatindicated for this Project and that employs an experienced architectural hardwareconsultant (AHC) who is available to Owner, Architect, and Contractor, at reasonabletimes during the course of the Work, for consultation.

1. Require supplier to meet with Owner to finalize keying requirements and toobtain final instructions in writing.

C. Fire-Rated Openings: Provide door hardware for fire-rated openings that complieswith NFPA Standard No. 80 and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.Provide only items of door hardware that are listed and are identical to products testedby UL, Warnock Hersey, FM, or other testing and inspecting organization acceptableto authorities having jurisdiction for use on types and sizes of doors indicated incompliance with requirements of fire-rated door and door frame labels.

1. Comply with requirements of the current Kentucky Building Code.

1.6 PRODUCT HANDLING

A. Tag each item or package separately with identification related to final hardwareschedule, and include basic installation instructions with each item or package.

B. Packaging of door hardware is responsibility of supplier. As material is received byhardware supplier from various manufacturers, sort and repackage in containersclearly marked with appropriate hardware set number to match set numbers ofapproved hardware schedule. Two or more identical sets may be packed in samecontainer.

C. Inventory door hardware jointly with representatives of hardware supplier andhardware installer until each is satisfied that count is correct.

D. Deliver individually packaged door hardware items promptly to place of installation(shop or Project site).

E. Provide secure lock-up for door hardware delivered to the Project, but not yet installed.Control handling and installation of hardware items that are not immediately


replaceable so that completion of the Work will not be delayed by hardware lossesboth before and after installation.

1.7 WARRANTY

A. Refer to Conditions of the Contract.

B. Manufacturer’s Warranty:

1. Closers: Ten years2. Exit Devices: Five Years3. Locksets & Cylinders: Three years4. All other Hardware: Two years.

1.8 OWNER’S INSTRUCTION:

A. Instruct Owner’s personnel in operation and maintenance of hardware units.

1.9 MAINTENANCE

A. Maintenance Tools and Instructions: Furnish a complete set of specialized tools andmaintenance instructions as needed for Owner's continued adjustment, maintenance,and removal and replacement of door hardware.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide productsby one of the following:

1. Butts and Hinges:

a. Hager Hinge Co.b. Lawrence Brothers, Inc.c. McKinney Products Co.d. H. Soss & Company.e. Stanley Hardware, Div. Stanley Works.

2. Locks:a. Arrow Lock Manufacturing Co.b. Corbin & Russwin Architectural Hardware, Div. Black & Decker Corp.c. Falcon Lock Co.d. Sargent Manufacturing Company.e. Schlage Lock, Div. Ingersoll-Rand Door Hardware Group.f. Yale Security Inc.


3. Lock Cylinders and Keying:a. Dormakaba (match owner’s existing high-security keying system)

4. Overhead Closers:

a. Dorma Door Controls International.b. LCN, Div. Ingersoll-Rand Door Hardware Group.c. Norton Door Controls, Div. Yale Security Inc.d. Rixson-Firemark, Div. Yale Security Inc.e. Sargent Manufacturing Company.f. Yale Security Inc.

5. Door Trim Units and Kick Plates:

a. Baldwin Hardware Corp.b. Brookline Industries, Div. Yale Security Inc.c. Builders Brass Works Corp.d. Hager Hinge Co.e. H. B. Ives, A Harrow Company.f. Triangle Brass Manufacturing Company (Trimco).

6. Door Stripping and Seals:

a. Hager Hinge Co.b. National Guard Products, Inc.c. Pemko Manufacturing Co., Inc.d. Reese Enterprises, Inc.e. Sealeze Corp.f. Ultra Industries.g. Zero International, Inc.

7. Thresholds:

a. Hager Hinge Co.b. National Guard Products, Inc.c. Pemko Manufacturing Co., Inc.d. Reese Enterprises, Inc.e. Sealeze Corp.f. Zero International, Inc.

8. Exit Devices:

a. Monarchb. Von Duprin, Inc.c. Yale Security Inc.

9. Stops:

a. Triangle Brass Manufacturing Company (Trimco).b. Glynn-Johnson Corp.c. HES (ASSA ABLOY).


d. Trimco.

2.2 MATERIALS AND FABRICATION

A. Base Metals: Produce hardware units of basic metal and forming method indicatedusing manufacturer's standard metal alloy, composition, temper, and hardness, but inno case of lesser (commercially recognized) quality than specified for applicablehardware units for finish designations indicated.

B. Fasteners: Provide hardware manufactured to conform to published templates,generally prepared for machine screw installation. Do not provide hardware that hasbeen prepared for self-tapping sheet metal screws, except as specifically indicated.

C. Furnish screws for installation with each hardware item. Provide Phillips flat-headscrews except as otherwise indicated. Finish exposed (exposed under any condition)screws to match hardware finish or, if exposed in surfaces of other work, to matchfinish of this other work as closely as possible including "prepared for paint" surfacesto receive painted finish.

D. Provide concealed fasteners for hardware units that are exposed when door is closedexcept to the extent no standard units of type specified are available with concealedfasteners. Do not use thru-bolts for installation where bolt head or nut on oppositeface is exposed in other work unless their use is the only means of reinforcing the workadequately to fasten the hardware securely. Where thru-bolts are used as a means ofreinforcing the work, provide sleeves for each thru-bolt or use sex screw fasteners.

2.3 HINGES, BUTTS, AND PIVOTS

A. Templates: Provide template-produced units.

B. Screws: Provide Phillips flat-head screws complying with the following requirements:

1. For metal frames install machine screws into drilled and tapped holes.2. For wood doors install wood screws.3. For fire-rated wood doors install #12 x 1-1/4-inch, threaded-to-the-head steel

wood screws.4. Finish screw heads to match surface of hinges or pivots.

C. Hinge Pins: Except as otherwise indicated, provide hinge pins as follows:

1. Out-Swing Corridor Doors with Locks: Nonremovable pins.2. Interior Doors: Nonrising pins.3. Tips: Flat button and matching plug, finished to match leaves, except where

hospital tip (HT) indicated.

D. Number of Hinges: Provide number of hinges indicated but not less than 3 hinges perdoor leaf for doors 90 inches or less in height and one additional hinge for each 30inches of additional height.


1. Fire-Rated Doors: Not less than 3 hinges per door leaf for doors 86 inches orless in height with same rule for additional hinges.

2.4 LOCK CYLINDERS AND KEYING

A. Review the keying system with the Owner and provide the type required (master,grandmaster or great-grandmaster), integrated with Owner's existing high-securitysystem.

B. Equip locks with ‘Dormakaba’ core cylinders to match owner’s existing high-securitykeying system.

C. Metals: Construct lock cylinder parts from brass or bronze, stainless steel, or nickelsilver.

D. Comply with Owner's instructions for master keying and, except as otherwiseindicated, provide individual change key for each lock that is not designated to bekeyed alike with a group of related locks.

E. Key Material: Provide keys of nickel silver only.

F. Key Quantity: Furnish 3 change keys for each lock, 5 master keys for each mastersystem, and 5 grandmaster keys for each grandmaster system.

1. Deliver keys to Owner.

2.5 LOCKS, LATCHES, AND BOLTS

A. Strikes: Provide manufacturer's standard wrought box strike for each latch or lock bolt,with curvedlip extended to protect frame, finished to match hardware set, unlessotherwise indicated or recommended by manufacturer.

1. Provide recess type top strikes for bolts locking into head frames, unlessotherwise indicated.

2. Provide dust-proof strikes for foot bolts.

B. Lock Throw: Provide 5/8-inch minimum throw of latch on pairs of doors. Comply withUL requirements for throw of bolts and latch bolts on rated fire openings.

1. Provide 1/2-inch minimum throw of latch for other bored and preassembled typesof locks and 3/4-inch minimum throw of latch for mortise locks. Provide 1-inchminimum throw for all dead bolts.

2.6 CLOSERS

A. Size of Units: Except as otherwise specifically indicated, comply with themanufacturer's recommendations for size of door control unit depending on size ofdoor, exposure to weather, and anticipated frequency of use.


1. Where parallel arms are indicated for closers, provide closer unit one size largerthan recommended for use with standard arms.

2. Provide all door closers with thru-bolts and grommets.3. Provide parallel arms for all overhead closers, except as otherwise required or

recommended.4. Provide adjustable units complying with ANSI A117.1 and ADA provisions for

door opening force and delayed action closing.

2.7 DOOR TRIM UNITS

A. Fasteners: Provide manufacturer's standard exposed fasteners for door trim unitsconsisting of either machine screws or self-tapping screws.

B. Fabricate protection plates not more than 1-1/2 inches less than door width on hingeside and not more than 1/2 inch less than door width on pull side by height indicated.

1. Metal Plates: Stainless steel, 0.050 inch (U.S. 18 gage).

2.8 WEATHERSTRIPPING AND SEALS

A. General: Provide continuous weatherstripping on exterior doors and smoke, light, orsound seals on interior doors where indicated or scheduled. Provide noncorrosivefasteners for exterior applications and elsewhere as indicated.

B. Replaceable Seal Strips: Provide only those units where resilient or flexible seal stripis easily replaceable and readily available from stocks maintained by manufacturer.

C. Weatherstripping at Jambs and Heads: Provide bumper-type resilient insert and metalretainer strips, surface applied unless shown as mortised or semimortised.

2.9 THRESHOLDS

A. General: Except as otherwise indicated, provide standard metal threshold unit of type,size, and profile as shown or scheduled.

2.10 HARDWARE FINISHES

A. Match items to the manufacturer's standard color and texture finish for the latch andlock sets (or push-pull units if no latch or lock sets).

B. Provide finishes that match those established by BHMA or, if none established, matchthe Architect's sample.

C. Provide quality of finish, including thickness of plating or coating (if any), composition,hardness, and other qualities complying with manufacturer's standards, but in no caseless than specified by referenced standards for the applicable units of hardware.


D. Provide protective lacquer coating on all exposed hardware finishes of brass, bronze,and aluminum, except as otherwise indicated. The suffix "-NL" is used with standardfinish designations to indicate "no lacquer."

E. The designations used in schedules and elsewhere to indicate hardware finishes arethe industry-recognized standard commercial finishes, except as otherwise noted.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Mount hardware units at heights indicated in following applicable publications, exceptas specifically indicated or required to comply with governing regulations and exceptas otherwise directed by Architect.

1. "Recommended Locations for Builders Hardware for Standard Steel Doors andFrames" by the Door and Hardware Institute.

2. NWWDA Industry Standard I.S.1.7, "Hardware Locations for Wood FlushDoors."

3. Requirements of Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA).

B. Install each hardware item in compliance with the manufacturer's instructions andrecommendations. Where cutting and fitting is required to install hardware onto or intosurfaces that are later to be painted or finished in another way, coordinate removal,storage, and reinstallation or application of surface protection with finishing workspecified in the Division 9 Sections. Do not install surface-mounted items until finisheshave been completed on the substrates involved.

C. Set units level, plumb, and true to line and location. Adjust and reinforce theattachment substrate as necessary for proper installation and operation.

D. Drill and countersink units that are not factory prepared for anchorage fasteners.Space fasteners and anchors in accordance with industry standards.

E. Set thresholds for exterior doors in full bed of butyl-rubber or polyisobutylene masticsealant complying with requirements specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealers."

F. Weatherstripping and Seals: Comply with manufacturer's instructions andrecommendations to the extent installation requirements are not otherwise indicated.

3.2 ADJUSTING, CLEANING, AND DEMONSTRATING

A. Adjust and check each operating item of hardware and each door to ensure properoperation or function of every unit. Replace units that cannot be adjusted to operatefreely and smoothly or as intended for the application made.

1. Where door hardware is installed more than one month prior to acceptance oroccupancy of a space or area, return to the installation during the week prior to


acceptance or occupancy and make final check and adjustment of all hardwareitems in such space or area. Clean operating items as necessary to restoreproper function and finish of hardware and doors. Adjust door control devices tocompensate for final operation of heating and ventilating equipment.

B. Clean adjacent surfaces soiled by hardware installation.

C. Instruct Owner's personnel in the proper adjustment and maintenance of doorhardware and hardware finishes.

3.3 HARDWARE SCHEDULE

A. General: Provide hardware for each door to comply with requirements of Section"Door Hardware," hardware sets shall match existing features and function for eachdoor listed in the door schedule. Contractor shall submit full hardware schedule foreach opening.

1. Hardware sets shall indicate quantity, item, manufacturer and productdesignation, size, and finish or color, as applicable.


DIVISION 09

FINISHES

HIGH PERFORMACE PAINTS AND COATINGS 099610-1 TOWN BRANCH WWTP THICKENING

SECTION 099610-HIGH PERFORMANCE PAINTS AND COATINGS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 DESCRIPTION OF WORK

A. Provide all labor, materials, equipment and services for furnishing and installing the finishesas indicated on drawings and schedules, and as herein specified.

B. Work includes painting and finishing of interior and exterior exposed items and surfacesthroughout project, except as otherwise indicated. Surface preparation, priming and coats ofpaint specified are in addition to shop-priming and surface treatment specified under othersections of work.

C. Work includes field painting of exposed bare and covered pipes and ducts (including colorcoding), and of hangers, exposed steel and iron work, and primed metal surfaces ofequipment installed under mechanical and electrical work, except as otherwise indicated. Inaddition, the Contractor shall provide for the use of deep tone colors to be applied in selectedareas as wall graphics, stripes and visual accents. The areas and colors shall be selected bythe Architect-Engineer and shall not exceed 15% of the total wall surface area to be painted.

D. "Paint" as used herein means all coating systems materials, including primers, emulsions,enamels, stains, sealers and fillers, and other applied materials whether used as prime,intermediate or finish coats.

E. Surfaces to be Painted: Except where natural finish of material is specifically noted as asurface not to be painted, paint exposed surfaces whether or not colors are designated in"schedules". Where items or surfaces are not specifically mentioned, paint the same assimilar adjacent materials or areas. If color or finish is not designated, Architect-Engineer willselect these from standard colors or finishes available.

F. Following categories of work are not included as part of field- applied finish work.

1. Pre-Finished Items: Unless otherwise indicated, do not include painting whenfactory-finishing or installer-finishing is specified for such items as (but not limited to)toilet enclosures, prefinished partition systems, acoustic materials, architecturalwoodwork and casework, and finish mechanical and electrical equipment, including lightfixtures, switchgear, and distribution cabinets.

2. Concealed Surfaces: Unless otherwise indicated, painting is not required on surfacessuch as walls or ceilings in concealed areas and generally inaccessible areas, furred areas,pipe spaces, and duct shafts.

3. Finished Metal Surfaces: Unless otherwise indicated, metal surfaces of anodizedaluminum, stainless steel, chromium plate, copper, bronze and similar finished materialswill not require finish painting.

4. Operating Parts: Unless otherwise indicated, moving parts of operating units, mechanicaland electrical parts, such as valve and damper operators, linkages, sinkages, sensingdevices, motor and fan shafts will not require finish painting.

G. Following categories of work are included under other sections of these specifications.

1. Shop Priming: Unless otherwise specified, shop priming of ferrous metal items isincluded under various sections for structural steel, metal fabrications, hollow metal workand similar items.

e

ul

r

t

t

a

D


2. Unless otherwise specified, shop priming of fabricated components such as architecturalwoodwork, wood casework and shop-fabricated or factory-built mechanical and electricalequipment or accessories is included under other sections of these Specifications.

H. Do not paint over any code-required labels, such as Underwriters' Laboratories and FactoryMutual, or any equipment identification, performance rating, name, or nomenclature plates.

I. PVC plastic process piping shall not be painted, but shall be stenciled and labeled or taggedfor identification surfaces. Each type of process piping using PVC pipe shall be installedusing the same color pipe.

J. Repainting of existing structures, tanks, piping, and all other existing items shall not be part ofthis Contract unless otherwise noted. Areas that have been directly altered or damaged byconstruction shall be repainted to match existing conditions using the appropriate paintingsystem.


A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and SupplementaryConditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to Work of this Section.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical information including paint label analysis andapplication instructions for each material proposed for use.

B. Samples: Prior to beginning work, submit color chips for surfaces to be painted. Userepresentative colors when preparing samples for review. Submit samples for Architect-Engineer's review of color and texture only. Provide a listing of material and application foreach coat of each finish sample.

C. Submit manufacturer’s data and shop drawings for the materials specified herein. Complywith all requirements of Section 013323.

D. Descriptive literature, catalog cuts, and dimensional prints clearly indicating all dimensionsand materials of construction, shall be submitted on all items specified herein to the Engineerfor review before ordering.

E. At the time of submission, the Contractor shall, in writing, call the Engineer's attention to anydeviations that the submittals may have from the requirements of the Engineer's ContractDrawings and Specifications.

F. In accordance with the requirements of the General and Special Conditions and this Section,the following table includes, but is not limited to, the items required to be submitted:

Item Description Sh

op

raw

ing

s

Pro

du

ctD

ta

Sch

edul

es

Inst

alla

tion

Da

a

Par

tsL

iss

Wir

ing

Dia

gam

Sam

ples

O&

MM

ana

Crt

ific

ates

War

rant

y

Rep

ort

Oth

er

oa ngCo tin s X X X X X



A. Single Source Responsibility: Provide primers and other undercoat paint produced by samemanufacturer as finish coats. Use only thinners approved by paint manufacturer, and useonly within recommended limits.

B. Coordination of Work: Review other sections of these Specifications in which prime paintsare to be provided to ensure compatibility of total coatings systems for various substrates.Upon request from other trades, furnish information or characteristics of finish materialsprovided for use, to ensure compatible prime coats are used.

1.05 DELIVERY AND STORAGE

A. Deliver materials to job site in original, new and unopened packages and containers bearingmanufacturer's name and label, and following information:

1. Name or title of material.

2. Fed. Spec. number, if applicable.

3. Manufacturer's stock number, batch number, and date of manufacturer.

4. Manufacturer's name.

5. Contents by volume, for major pigment and vehicle constituents.

6. Thinning instructions.

7. Application instructions.

8. Color name and number.

B. Store materials not in actual use in tightly covered containers. Maintain containers used instorage of paint in a clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. Protect fromfreezing where necessary. Keep storage area neat and orderly. Remove oily rags andwaste daily. Take all precautions to ensure that workmen and work areas are adequatelyprotected from fire hazards and health hazards resulting from handling, mixing andapplication of paints.

1.06 JOB CONDITIONS

A. Apply water-base paints only when temperature of surfaces to be painted and surrounding airtemperatures are between 50 degrees F (10 degrees C) and 90 degrees F (32 degrees C),unless otherwise permitted or restricted by paint manufacturer's printed instructions.

B. Apply solvent-thinned paints only when temperature of surfaces to be painted andsurrounding air temperatures are between 45 degrees F (7 degrees C) and 95 degrees F (35degrees C), unless otherwise permitted or restricted by paint manufacturer's printedinstructions.

C. Do not apply paint in snow, rain, fog or mist, or when relative humidity exceeds 85%, or todamp or wet surfaces, unless otherwise permitted or restricted by paint manufacturer'sprinted instructions. Painting may be continued during inclement weather if areas andsurfaces to be painted are enclosed and heated within temperature limits specified by paintmanufacturer during application and drying periods.

D. Paint only when the surface temperature is at least 5 degrees F above the dew point, unlessotherwise permitted by paint manufacturer’s printed instructions.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS

A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offeringproducts which may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Tnemec Company, Inc. (Tnemec)

2 The Sherwin-Williams Company

3. Carboline

2.02 MATERIALS

A. Material Quality: Provide best quality grade of various types of coatings as regularlymanufactured by acceptable paint materials manufacturers. Materials not displayingmanufacturer's identification as a standard, best-grade product will not be acceptable.

B. Proprietary names used to designate colors or materials are not intended to imply thatproducts of named manufacturers are required to exclusion of equivalent products of othermanufacturers.

C. Color Pigments: Pure, non-fading, applicable types to suit substrates and service indicated.

1. Lead content in pigment, if any, is limited to contain not more than 0.06% lead, as leadmetal based on the total non-volatile (dry-film) of paint by weight.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 INSPECTION

A. Applicator must examine areas and conditions under which painting work is to be applied andnotify Contractor in writing of conditions detrimental to proper and timely completion of work.Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manneracceptable to Applicator.

B. Starting of painting work will be construed as Applicator's acceptance of surfaces andconditions within any particular area.

C. Do not paint over dirt, rust, scale, grease, moisture, scuffed surfaces, or conditions otherwisedetrimental to formation of a durable paint film.

3.02 SURFACE PREPARATION

A. General: Perform preparation and cleaning procedures in accordance with paintmanufacturer's instructions and as herein specified, for each particular substrate condition.

1. Provide barrier coats over incompatible primers or remove and re-prime as required.Notify Architect-Architect-Engineer in writing of any anticipated problems in using thespecified coating systems with substrates primed by others.

2. Remove hardware, hardware accessories, machined surfaces, plates, lighting fixtures,and similar items in place and not to be finish-painted, or provide surface-appliedprotection prior to surface preparation and painting operations. Remove, if necessary, forcomplete painting of items and adjacent surfaces. Following completion of painting ofeach space or area, reinstall removed items.


3. Clean surfaces to be painted before applying paint or surface treatments. Remove oiland grease prior to mechanical cleaning per SSPC SP-1. Program cleaning and paintingso that contaminants from cleaning process will not fall onto wet, newly-painted surfaces.

4. Abrasives for blasting shall be sharp, washed, salt free, angular, and free from feldspar orother constituents that tend to breakdown and remain on the surface.

5. Concrete floors shall be dry as indicated by testing in accordance with ASTM D4263,Standard Test Method for Indicating Moisture in Concrete by the Plastic Sheet Method.

B. Cementitious Materials: Per ASTM D4261, Standard Practice for Surface Cleaning ConcreteUnit Masonry for Coating, prepare cementitious surfaces of concrete block to be painted byremoving efflorescence, chalk, dust, dirt, grease, oils, and by roughening as required toremove glaze. Per ASTM D4262, Standard Test Method for pH of Chemically Cleaned orEtched Concrete Surfaces, determine alkalinity of surfaces to be painted by performingappropriate tests. If surfaces are found to be sufficiently alkaline to cause blistering andburning of finish paint, correct this condition before application of paint. Test the surface formoisture and do not paint over surfaces where moisture content exceeds that permitted inmanufacturer's printed directions.

C. Wood: Clean wood surfaces to be painted of dirt, oil, or other foreign substances withscrapers, mineral spirits, and sandpaper, as required. Sandpaper smooth those finishedsurfaces exposed to view, and dust off. Scrape and clean small, dry, seasoned knots andapply a thin coat of white shellac or other recommended knot sealer, before application ofpriming coat. After priming, fill holes and imperfections in finish surfaces with putty or plasticwood-filler. Sandpaper smooth when dried.

1. Prime, stain, or seal wood required to be job-painted immediately upon delivery to job.Prime edges, ends, faces, undersides, and backsides of such wood, including cabinets,counters, cases, paneling.

2. When transparent finish is required, use spar varnish for backpriming.

D. Ferrous Metals: Clean ferrous surfaces, which are not galvanized or shop-coated, of oil,grease, dirt, and other foreign substances by solvent cleaning per SSPC SP-1. Mechanicalcleaning shall be in accordance with SSPC-SP6 Commercial Blast Cleaning specificationsfor non-immersion surfaces and SSPC-SP10 Near White Metal Blast Cleaning for immersionin potable or non-potable water.

E. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean free of oil and surface contaminants with non-petroleum basedsolvent.

F. Shop Primed Surfaces: Prepare shop-applied prime coats wherever damaged or bare asrequired by other sections of these Specifications. Clean and touch-up with same type shopprimer.

3.03 MATERIALS PREPARATION

A. Mix and prepare painting materials in accordance with manufacturer's directions.

B. Maintain containers used in mixing and application of paint in a clean condition, free offoreign materials and residue.

C. Stir materials before application to produce a mixture of uniform density, and stir as requiredduring application. Do not stir surface film into material. Remove film and, if necessary,strain material before using.


3.04 APPLICATION

A. General: Apply paint in accordance with manufacturer's directions. Use applicators andtechniques best suited for substrate and type of material being applied.

1. Painting requirements, surface treatments, and finishes, are indicated in "schedules" ofthe contract documents and as noted in Paragraph 3.11 hereinafter.

2. Provide finish coats which are compatible with prime paints used.

3. Apply additional coats when undercoats, stains or other conditions show through finalcoat of paint, until paint film is of uniform finish, color and appearance. Give specialattention to insure that surfaces, including edges, corners, crevices, welds, and exposedfasteners receive a dry film thickness equivalent to that of flat surfaces.

4. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture same as similar exposedsurfaces. Paint surfaces behind permanently- fixed equipment or furniture with primecoat only before final installation of equipment.

5. Paint interior surfaces of ducts, where visible through registers or grilles, with a flat,non-specular black paint.

6. Paint back sides of access panels, and removable or hinged covers to match exposedsurfaces.

7. Finish exterior doors on tops, bottoms and side edges same as exterior faces, unlessotherwise indicated.

8. Sand lightly between each succeeding enamel or varnish coat.

9. Omit first coat (primer) on metal surfaces which have been shop-primed and touch-uppainted, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Scheduling Painting: Apply first-coat material to surfaces that have been cleaned, pretreatedor otherwise prepared for painting as soon as practicable after preparation and beforesubsequent surface deterioration. Allow sufficient time between successive coatings topermit proper drying. Do not recoat until paint has dried to where it feels firm, does notdeform or feel sticky under moderate thumb pressure, and application of another coat ofpaint does not cause lifting or loss of adhesion of the undercoat.

C. Minimum Coating Thickness: Apply materials at not less than manufacturer's recommendedspreading rate, to establish a total dry film thickness as indicated or, if not indicated, asrecommended by coating manufacturer.

D. Mechanical and Electrical Work: Painting of mechanical and electrical work is limited tothose items exposed in mechanical equipment rooms and in occupied spaces.

1. Mechanical items to be painted include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Piping, pipe hangers, supplementary steel and supports except galvanized surfaces.

b. Heat exchangers.

c. Tanks.

d. Ductwork, insulation.

e. Motor, mechanical equipment, and supports.


f. Accessory items.

2. Electrical items to be painted include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Conduits and fittings except galvanized surfaces.

b. Switchgear.

c. Hanger and support except galvanized surfaces.

E. Prime Coats: Apply prime coat of material which is required to be painted or finished, andwhich has not been prime coated by others. Recoat primed and sealed surfaces wherethere is evidence of suction spots or unsealed areas in first coat, to assure a finish coat withno burn- through or other defects due to insufficient sealing.

F. Pigmented (Opaque) Finishes: Completely cover to provide an opaque, smooth surface ofuniform finish, color, appearance and coverage. Cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brushmarks, runs, sags, ropiness or other surface imperfections will not be acceptable. Holidaytest coated steel in immersion areas in accordance with NACE International SP 0188-2007Discontinuity (Holiday) Testing of New Protective Coatings on Conductive Substrates.

G. Transparent (Clear) Finishes: Use multiple coats to produce glass-smooth surface film ofeven luster. Provide a finish free of laps, cloudiness, color irregularity, runs, brush marks,orange peel, nail holes, or other surface imperfections. Provide satin finish for final coats,unless otherwise indicated.

H. Completed Work: Match approved samples for color, texture and coverage. Remove,refinish or repaint work not in compliance with specified requirements.


A. The right is reserved by Owner to invoke the following material testing procedure at any time,and any number of times during period of field painting:

1. Engage services of an independent testing laboratory to sample paint being used.Samples of materials delivered to project site will be taken, identified and sealed, andcertified in presence of Contractor.

2. Testing laboratory will perform appropriate tests for any or all of following characteristics:Abrasion resistance, apparent reflectivity, flexibility, washability, absorption, acceleratedweathering, dry opacity, accelerated yellowness, recoating, skinning, color retention,alkali resistance and quantitative materials analysis.

B. If test results show that material being used does not comply with specified requirements,Contractor may be directed to stop painting work, and remove non-complying paint; pay fortesting; repaint surfaces coated with rejected paint; remove rejected paint from previouslypainted surfaces if, upon repainting with specified paint, the two coatings arenon-compatible.

3.06 CLEAN-UP AND PROTECTION

A. Clean-Up: During progress of work, remove from site discarded paint materials, rubbish,cans and rags at end of each work day.

B. Upon completion of painting work, clean window glass and other paint-spattered surfaces.Remove spattered paint by proper methods of washing and scraping, using care not toscratch or otherwise damage finished surfaces.


C. Protection: Protect work of other trades, whether to be painted or not, against damage bypainting and finishing work. Correct any damage by cleaning, repairing or replacing, andrepainting, as acceptable to Architect-Architect-Engineer. Provide "Wet Paint" signs asrequired to protect newly-painted finishes. Remove temporary protective wrappings providedby others for protection of their work, after completion of painting operations. At completionof work of other trades, touch-up and restore all damaged or defaced painted surfaces.

3.07 PAINTING SYSTEMS

A. Ferrous Metals, Structural, Tanks, Pipe and Equipment

1. Exterior, Non-ImmersionTnemec Dry Mils Sherwin Williams Dry Mils Carboline Dry Mils

SurfacePrep

SSPC-SP6Commercial Blast Cleaning

SSPC-SP6Commercial BlastCleaning


1st Coat N 69 High-Build Epoxoline II 3.0 – 5.0Macropoxy 646 or5500 3.0 – 5.0 Carboguard 60 3.0 – 5.0

2nd Coat N 69 High-Build Epoxoline II 2.0 – 3.0 Macropoxy 646 2.0 – 3.0 Carboguard 60 4.0 – 6.0

3rd Coat 1074 Endura -Shield 2.0 – 3.0 Acrolon 218 HS 2.0 – 3.0 Carbothane 134 HG 2.0 – 3.0

2. Interior, Non-ImmersionTnemec Dry Mils Sherwin Williams Dry Mils Carboline Dry Mils

SurfacePrep

SSPC-SP6Commercial Blast Cleaning



1st Coat N 69 High-Build Epoxoline II 3.0 – 5.0 Macropoxy 646 3.0 – 5.0 Carboguard 60 3.0 – 5.0


3rd Coat N 69 High-Build Epoxoline II 2.0 – 3.0 Macropoxy 646 2.0 – 3.0 Carboguard 60 4.0 – 6.0

3. Immersion, Non-Potable WaterTnemec Dry Mils Sherwin Williams Dry Mils Carboline Dry Mils

SurfacePrep

SSPC-SP10Near-White Blast Cleaning

SSPC-SP10Near-White BlastCleaning

SSPC-SP10Near-White BlastCleaning

1st Coat N 69 High-Build Epoxoline II 4.0 –6.0 Dura-Plate 235 4.0 – 6.0 Carboguard 60 4.0 – 6.0

2nd Coat N 69 High-Build Epoxoline II 4.0 – 6.0 Dura-Plate 235 4.0 – 6.0 Carboguard 60 4.0 – 6.0

3rd Coat N 69 High-Build Epoxoline II 4.0 – 6.0 Dura-Plate 235 4.0 – 6.0 Carboguard 60 4.0 – 6.0

)4. Factory Primed Interior (Refer to Piping SpecificationsTnemec Dry Mils Sherwin Williams Dry Mils Carboline Dry Mils

SurfacePrep Surface Shall be Clean / Dry

Surface Shall be Clean/ Dry


Touch up N69 High-Build Epoxoline Macropoxy 646 Carboguard 60

1st Coat N69 High-Build Epoxoline 4.0 – 6.0 Macropoxy 646 4.0 – 6.0 Carboguard 60 4.0 – 6.0

2nd Coat N69 High-Build Epoxoline 4.0 – 6.0 Macropoxy 646 4.0 – 6.0 Carboguard 60 4.0 – 6.0

)5. Factory Primed, Exterior (Refer to Piping SpecificationsTnemec Dry Mils Sherwin Williams Dry Mils Carboline Dry Mils




Touch up N69 Hi-Build Epoxoline Macropoxy 646 Carboguard 60

1st Coat N69 Hi-Build Epoxoline 4.0 – 6.0 Macropoxy 646 4.0 – 6.0 Carboguard 60 4.0 – 6.0

2nd Coat 1074 Endura -Shield 2.0 – 3.0Acrolon 218 HS, B65Series 2.0 – 3.0 Carbothane 134 HG 2.0 – 3.0


6. Primed Steel (Doors, Frames, etc.) – ExteriorTnemec Dry Mils Sherwin Williams Dry Mils Carboline Dry Mils




Touch-up N69 High-Build Epoxoline Macropoxy 646 Carboguard 60

1st Coat N 69 High-Build Epoxoline 4.0 – 6.0 Macropoxy 646 2.0 – 3.0 Carboguard 60 4.0 – 6.0

2nd Coat 1074 Endura -Shield 2.0 – 3.0 Acrolon 218 HS 2.0 – 3.0 Carbothane 134 HG 2.0 – 3.0

7. BuriedTnemec Dry Mils Sherwin Williams Dry Mils Carboline Dry Mils

SurfacePrep

SSPC-SP6 Commercial BlastCleaning



1st Coat Hi-Build Tneme-Tar16.0 –20.0 Hi-Mil Sher-Tar Epoxy

16.0 –24.0 Bitumastic 300M

16.0 –24.0

8. Hydrogen Sulfide ExposedTnemec Dry Mils Sherwin Williams Dry Mils Carboline Dry Mils

SurfacePrep SSPC-SP5

SSPC-SP 5 Near-White Blast Cleaning

SSPC-5 White BlastCleaning

1st Coat 435 Perma-Glaze15.0 –20.0

Dura-Plate 5800 or5900

15.0 –20.0 Plasite 4500S

30.0 –40.0

2nd Coat 435 Perma-Glaze15.0 –20.0

Dura-Plate 5800 or5900

15.0 –20.0 2nd coat not required

B. Galvanized Steel - Pipe and Miscellaneous Fabrications

1. Exterior, Non-ImmersionTnemec Dry Mils Sherwin Williams Dry Mils Carboline Dry Mils

SurfacePrep

SSPC-SP1 Solvent Cleaning& Etch

SSPC-SP1 SolventCleaning

SSPC-SP1 SolventCleaning & Etch

1st Coat N 69 Epoxoline II 4.0 – 6.0 Macropoxy 646 4.0 – 6.0 Carboguard 60 4.0 – 6.0

2nd Coat 1074-Color Endura -Shield 2.0 – 3.0 Acrolon 218 HS 2.0 – 3.0 Carbothane 134 HG 2.0 – 3.0

2. Interior, Non-Immersion (Doors, Frames, etc.)Tnemec Dry Mils Sherwin Williams Dry Mils Carboline Dry Mils

SurfacePrep

SSPC-SP1 Solvent Cleaning& Etch

SSPC-SP1 SolventCleaning

SSPC-SP1 SolventCleaning & Etch

1st Coat N 69 Epoxoline II 4.0 – 6.0 Macropoxy 646 4.0 – 6.0 Carboguard 60 4.0 – 6.0


3. Immersion, Non-Potable WaterTnemec Dry Mils Sherwin Williams Dry Mils Carboline Dry Mils

SurfacePrep

SSPC-SP1 Solvent CleaningFollowed by Abrasive Blast

SSPC-SP7 Brush-OffBlast Cleaning

SSPC-SP10 NearWhite Blast Cleaning

1st Coat N 69 Epoxoline II 4.0 – 6.0 Dura-Plate 235 4.0 – 6.0 Carboguard 60 4.0 – 6.0

2nd Coat N 69 Epoxoline II 4.0 – 6.0 Dura-Plate 235 4.0 – 6.0 Carboguard 60 4.0 – 6.0

C. Porous Masonry - Concrete Masonry Units

1. InteriorTnemec Dry Mils Sherwin Williams Dry Mils Carboline Dry Mils


Surface Shall be Clean /Dry


1st Coat130 Envirofill (Spray andBack Roll to Fill Porosity)

80 - 100sf/gal.

Heavy Duty Block Filleror Cement-Plex 875 (rollor backroll)

80-100sf/gal Carboline Sanitile 100

80 - 100sf/gal


Tnemec Dry Mils Sherwin Williams Dry Mils Carboline Dry Mils

2nd Coat 113 H.B. Tneme-Tufcoat 2.0 – 3.0Pro-Industrial WaterBased Catalyzed Epoxy 2.0 – 3.0 Sanitile 255 4.0 – 6.0

3rd Coat 113 H.B. Tneme-Tufcoat 2.0 – 3.0Pro-Industrial WaterBased Catalyzed Epoxy 2.0 – 3.0 Sanitile 255 4.0 – 6.0

2. ExteriorTnemec Dry Mils Sherwin Williams Dry Mils Carboline Dry Mils




1st Coat Series 156 Enviro-Crete 6.0 – 8.0* Loxon XP6.0 –8.0* Flexxide Elastomer 6.0-8.0*

2nd Coat Series 156 Enviro-Crete 6.0 – 8.0* Loxon XP6.0 –8.0* Flexxide Elastomer 6.0 – 8.0

*Coats must be sufficient to fill the porosity of the block face and create a pinhole-free surface.

D. Cast-In-Place Concrete

1. Concrete Walls & Precast Concrete Ceilings (Interior)Tnemec Dry Mils Sherwin Williams Dry Mils Carboline Dry Mils

SurfacePrep

SSPC-SP13 Abrasive Blast SSPC-SP13 AbrasiveBlast

SSPC-SP13 AbrasiveBlast

1st Coat 113 H.B. Tneme-Tufcoat 4.0 – 6.0

Pro-Industrial WaterBased CatalyzedEpoxy 2.0 – 4.0 Sanitile 255 4.0 – 6.0

2nd Coat 113 H.B. Tneme-Tufcoat 4.0 – 6.0

Pro-Industrial WaterBased CatalyzedEpoxy 2.0 – 4.0 Sanitile 255 4.0 – 6.0

)2. Concrete Walls, Tanks and Basins (Exterior, Exposed) (where noted on the drawings or

specifiedTnemec Dry Mils Sherwin Williams Dry Mils Carboline Dry Mils

SurfacePrep

SSPC SP13 Abrasive BlastSevere Service



1st Coat Series 156 Enviro-Crete 125 sf/gal Loxon XP 125 sf/gal Flexxide Elastomere125sf/gal

2nd Coat Series 156 Enviro-Crete 200 sf/gal Loxon XP 200 sf/fal Flexxide Elastomere200sf/gal

)3. Concrete Floors (Where noted on the drawings or specifiedTnemec Dry Mils Sherwin Williams Dry Mils Carboline Dry Mils

SurfacePrep

SSPC-SP13, SevereServiceAbrasive Blast



1st Coat N 66 Epoxoline 3.0 – 5.0 Macropoxy 646 3.0 – 5.0 Carboguard 60 4.0 – 6.0

2nd Coat N 66 Epoxoline 4.0 – 6.0 Macropoxy 646 4.0 – 6.0 Carboguard 60 4.0 – 6.0

3rd Coat N 66 Epoxoline 4.0 – 6.0 Macropoxy 646 4.0 – 6.0 Carboguard 60 4.0 – 6.0

)4. Concrete Tanks & Basins (ImmersionTnemec Dry Mils Sherwin Williams Dry Mils Carboline Dry Mils

SurfacePrep




1st Coat N 69 Epoxoline II 3.0 – 5.0 Dura-Plate 235 3.0 – 5.0 Carboguard 890 4.0 – 6.0

2nd Coat N 69 Epoxoline II 4.0 – 6.0 Dura-Plate 235 4.0 – 6.0 Carboguard 890 4.0 – 6.0

3rd Coat N 69 Epoxoline II 4.0 – 6.0 Dura-Plate 235 4.0 – 6.0 Carboguard 890 4.0 – 6.0

5. Chemical Containment Areas – Acid ExposureTnemec Dry Mils Sherwin Williams Dry Mils Carboline Dry Mils

SurfacePrep

SSPC-SP13, SevereService




Tnemec Dry Mils Sherwin Williams Dry Mils Carboline Dry MilsAbrasive Blast Abrasive Blast Abrasive Blast

1st Coat Series 120-5002 Vinyl Ester 12 – 18CoroBond Vinyl EsterPrimer 3.5 – 4.0 Semstone 800 8.0 –10.0

2nd Coat Series 120-5002 Vinyl Ester 12 - 18 CorCote VEN FF15.0 –20.0

Semstone 870(aggregate-filled)

25.0 –30.0

3rd CoatCorCote VEN FF withWax Solution

15.0 –20.0 Semstone 870

15.0 –20.0

6. Chemical Containment Areas – OtherTnemec Dry Mils Sherwin Williams Dry Mils Carboline Dry Mils

SurfacePrep

SSPC-SP13, Severe ServiceAbrasive Blast



1st Coat 201 Epoxoprime 6.0 – 8.0 CoroBond 100 6.0 – 8.0 Semstone 110 8.0 – 10.0

2nd Coat 275 Stranlock 25.0 – 40.0CorCote HCR Flake-Filled 15.0 – 20.0 Semstone 140

25 mils(BroadcastSilica)

3rd Coat 282 Tneme-Glaze 8.0 – 12.0 CorCote HCR 15.0 – 20.0 Semstone 14015.0 –25.0

)7. Concrete Tanks and Basins (Below Grade, Soil SideTnemec Dry Mils Sherwin Williams Dry Mils Carboline Dry Mils

SurfacePrep




1st Coat46 H – 413 Hi-Build Tneme-Tar 7.0– 10.0 Hi-Mil Sher-Tar Epoxy 7.0– 10.0 Bitumastic 300 M 8.0 – 10.0

2nd Coat46 H – 413 Hi-Build Tneme-Tar 7.0– 10.0 Hi-Mil Sher-Tar Epoxy 7.0– 10.0 Bitumastic 300 M 8.0 – 10.0

)8. Concrete Tanks and Basins (Hydrogen Sulfide ExposedTnemec Dry Mils Sherwin Williams Dry Mils Carboline Dry Mils

SurfacePrep

SSPC-SP13, Abrasive BlastClean and Dry

SSPC-SP13, AbrasiveBlast Clean and Dry

SSPC-SP13,Abrasive Blast Cleanand Dry

1st Coat 218 or 219 to fill bugholesFT910 or Dura-Plate2300 to fill bugholes

Carboguard 510 to fillbugholes

2nd Coat 435 Perma-Glaze 15.0-20.0Dura-Plate 5800 or5900 15.0-20.0 Plasite 4500S 30.0-40.0

3rd Coat 435 Perma-Glaze 15.0-20.0Dura-Plate 5800 or5900 15.0-20.0 2nd coat not required

E. Wood

1. Interior or ExteriorTnemec Dry Mils Sherwin Williams Dry Mils Carboline Dry Mils



Surface Shall beClean / Dry

1st Coat 151-1051 Elasto-Grip FC 1.0 – 1.5Multi-Purpose LatexPrimer (B51-8000) 1.0 – 1.5 Carbocrylic 120 1.0 – 2.0

2nd Coat 1029 Enduratone2.0–3.0 -3.5

Pro Industrial DTMAcrylic Coating 2.0 – 3.0

Carbocrylic 3359DTM 2.0 – 3.0

3rd Coat 1029 Enduratone 2.0 – 3.0Pro Industrial DTMAcrylic Coating 2.0 – 3.0


F. Insulated PipeTnemec Dry Mils Sherwin Williams Dry Mils Carboline Dry Mils

SurfacePrep

Surface Shall be Clean / Dry Surface Shall be Clean /Dry


1st Coat 1029 Enduratone 2.0 – 3.0DTM Primer/Finish,B66W1 2.0 – 3.0


2nd Coat 1029 Enduratone 2.0 – 3.0DTM Primer/Finish,B66W1 2.0 – 3.0



G. Gypsum Board

1. Interior Drywall – ArchitecturalTnemec Dry Mils Sherwin Williams Dry Mils Carboline Dry Mils

SurfacePrep



1st Coat 151-1051 Elasto-Grip FC 1.0 – 1.5 Promar 200 Printer 1.0 – 1.5 Carbocrylic 120 1.0 – 2.0

2nd Coat 6-Color Tneme-Cryl 2.0 – 3.0ProMar 200 F, SF,EgShel 1.0 – 1.5


2. Interior Drywall - Severe ExposureTnemec Dry Mils Sherwin Williams Dry Mils Carboline Dry Mils

SurfacePrep



PrimeCoat 151-1051 Elasto-Grip FC 1.0 – 1.5 Promar 200 Primer 1.0 – 1.5 Sanitile 120 1.0 – 2.0

1st Coat 113 H.B. Tneme-Tufcoat 2.0 – 3.0Pro-Industrial WaterBased Catalyzed Epoxy 2.0 – 3.0 Carboline Sanitile 255 2.0 – 3.0

2nd Coat 113 H.B. Tneme-Tufcoat 2.0 – 3.0Pro-Industrial WaterBased Catalyzed Epoxy 2.0 – 3.0 Carboline Sanitile 255 2.0 – 3.0

H. PVC Piping – Do Not Paint

I. Aluminum Windows, Doors, Handrails & Grating – Do Not Paint

J. Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic Doors & Windows – Do Not Paint

3.08 PIPING COLOR CODE

A. To facilitate identification of piping in plants and pumping stations the owner should beprovided with color selections for each category of piping.

3.09 STENCILING

A. The Contractor shall supply all materials and labor necessary for stenciling of legends onpipes. The legend shall show the name of the contents. Review by the Architect-Engineer oflegends will be required. Names shall be "plainly visible". Arrows showing direction of flowshall also be stenciled on pipes. The legends shall be located not more than 10 feet apartand, in general, at each valve and piece of equipment. The size and location of the legendshall be in general accordance with ANSI A13.1-1981 "Scheme for the Identification ofPiping Systems". All visible piping 6" in diameter and larger shall be color-coded andstenciled. "Stick-on" labels are not acceptable.

3.10 PLASTIC IDENTIFICATION MARKERS

A. All visible piping 3/4" and greater and less than 6" which is accessible for maintenanceoperations shall be color-coded and identified with semi-rigid plastic identification markersequal to SETMARK Pipe Markers as manufactured by Seton Name Plate Corporation, NewHaven, Conn.; T & B/Westline, Los Angeles, California; or equal. Direction of flow arrows areto be included on each marker, unless otherwise specified.

B. Each marker background is to be appropriately color coded with a clearly printed legend toidentify the contents of the pipe in conformance with the "Scheme for the Identification ofPiping Systems" (ANSI A 13.1 - 1981).

C. For pipes under 3/4" O.D. (too small for color bands and legends), brass identification tags1-1/2" in diameter with depressed 1/4" high black-filled letters above 1/3" blackfilled numbersshall be fastened securely at specified locations.


D. All electrical conduits, which are accessible for maintenance operations, shall be identifiedwith semi-rigid identification markers similar to those specified above.

E. Each marker background is to be color-coded with a clearly printed legend to identify theconductor. Size of markers and sizes of lettering to generally conform with the "Scheme forIdentification of Piping Systems" (ANSI A 13.1 - 1981)

F. Locations for pipe and electrical markers to be as follows:

1. Adjacent to each valve and fitting (except on plumbing fixtures and equipment).

2. At each branch and riser take-off.

3. At each pipe passage through wall, floor and ceiling construction.

4. At each pipe passage to underground.

5. On all horizontal pipe runs-marked every 25 feet.

3.11 PAINT SCHEDULE

All items at the Project site shall be painted in accordance with these Specifications andDrawings. The following paint schedule is provided only to assist the Owner and Contractorin selection of the appropriate paint system and is not intended to be a complete list of itemsto be painted.

A. Paint Application Schedule

Location and/or Description System

1. Primary Sludge Pump Station No. 1 Building

a. Ferrous Metals – Interior, Non-Immersion A.2, A.4

2. Primary Sludge Pump Station No. 2 Building


3. Gravity Thickener Control Building


4. Solids Processing Building


5. Gravity Thickeners Equipment

a. Ferrous Metals – Exterior A.1, A.5

b. Ferrous Metals – Immersion A.3

c. FRP Weirs and Baffles Do not Paint

END OF SECTION

DIVISION 23

HEATING, VENTILATING,AND AIR-CONDITIONING

GENERAL MECHANICAL PROVISIONS 230100-1 TOWN BRANCH WWTP THICKENING

SECTION 230100 - GENERAL MECHANICAL PROVISIONS

PART 1 - GENERAL

A. The General Requirements of this specification and Division 01, in its entirety, shall beconsidered part of this section and incorporated hereby, as if fully set forth herein.Requirements of Division 1 supersede and replace any statements in Division 23 with whichthey are in direct conflict. Sections 230100 through 237413 (as included) contain basicmechanical materials and methods of a general nature and apply to all work specified inDivision 23, except as modified in individual sections.


A. Consult Plans and Specifications Sections 230100-238123

B. Drawings:

1. Drawings are schematic and show approximate locations of ducts, piping and equipment.Coordinate and field verify exact locations with other trades.

2. Obtain Engineer's approval for significant deviations from drawing locations and layout.

3. The Engineer reserves the right to make minor changes in the location of mechanicalwork or equipment prior to roughing-in without additional cost.

4. Examine the Contract Documents and immediately report any error, discrepancy oromission. The Engineer will determine which interpretation shall take precedence wheretwo or more conflicting statements occur. Otherwise, the Contractor is responsible for themore stringent (or expensive) interpretation. In general, schedules, wherever theyappear, supersede specifications, and specifications supersede plans.

5. Contractor shall make use of all data in all Contract Documents and shall verify thisinformation at the building site. All Drawings of the Contract set are hereby made a partof these Specifications and shall be consulted by Contractor and his work adjusted tomeet the conditions shown thereon.


A. Materials, equipment and installation shall meet the requirements of the following asapplicable:

1. American Gas Association (AGA)

2. American National Standards Institute (ANSI).

3. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM).

4. American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE).

5. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME).

6. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA).

7. Sheet Metal and Air-Conditioning Contractor's National Association (SMACNA).

8. Underwriters Laboratories (UL).


B. All equipment shall bear the label of an approved independent testing laboratory (e.g. UL),where such standards exist.

C. All equipment shall be supplied with integral fusing as required for compliance with its listing.

D. Performance of work shall be in strict accordance with the best common practices of thetrades involved, in a thorough, substantial, neat, and workman-like manner by competent,qualified workmen. No trainees or apprentice workmen shall be allowed at the job site unlessunder the direct, continuous supervision of a qualified journeyman. All work on HVAC,plumbing, fire protection or electrical systems shall be supervised and performed byindividuals properly licensed, where required by state law, or as otherwise indicated in theseDocuments.

1.03 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

A. The work in this Division shall meet the requirements, as applicable, of the following Codesand regulatory bodies:

1. Kentucky Building Code.

2. Kentucky Department for Natural Resources and Environmental Protection.

3. Kentucky and Local Construction and Building Code Officials.

4. Life Safety Code - NFPA 101.

5. Local Building Codes and Health Department.

6. Local Utility Regulations.

7. ANSI 17.1 Elevator Code as adopted by IBC.

8. Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) - Where referenced, product design and installationshall meet minimum requirements of the Act.

B. Conformity with code requirements shall be maintained whether or not official inspections,fees or certificates are required due to project not falling under scope or jurisdiction ofregulatory agencies.

1.04 REFERENCES

A. With regard to this Project and these Contract Documents, the following specific definitionsshall apply:

1. "Furnish": To purchase and deliver products to the project site and prepare forinstallation.

2. "Install": To take furnished products, assemble, erect, secure, connect and place intooperation.

3. "Provide": To furnish and install.

4. "Products": Includes materials, systems, equipment and accessories, as specified.

5. "Work": The providing of products for any or all of the entire Contract.

6. "Project": The sum total of all work by all parties, to be accomplished as directed in theContract Documents.


7. "Documents", "Contract Documents": All Plans, Specifications, addenda, bid packagesand any other enclosures, agreements or instruments specifically included in theContract.

8. "Division(s)": Means the generally accepted subdivisions of the Specifications, usuallyaccording to the CSI scheme of organizing construction documents, such as Division 23 -Mechanical, Division 26 - Electrical, etc. Also refers to all work covered within thereferenced Division(s) of the Specifications.

9. "Section(s)": Means the subdivisions of the "Division" of construction specifications, suchas, under Division 23, Section 230100 - General Mechanical Provisions, Section 230111- Scope of Work, etc. Also refers to all work covered within the referenced Section(s) ofthe Specifications.

10. "Engineer", "Architect", "E/A", "A/E": The engineering, architectural orarchitectural/engineering firm with design authority for the Project.

11. "Contractor": Means the General Contractor and also the Plumbing, Fire Protection,Controls, HVAC or any other Mechanical Contractor, individually or collectively.

12 "Concealed": Embedded in or installed behind walls, within partitions, above ceilings, intrenches, in tunnels and crawl spaces. Areas above lay-in ceilings, in crawl spaces or inservice tunnels and trenches, other than stand-up utility tunnels, chases or vaults, maybe considered concealed with reference to appearance or finish but not concealed withrespect to accessibility. Check for specific exceptions.

13. "Exposed": Not installed underground or "concealed" as defined above. Generally,systems in all mechanical spaces, including mechanical or boiler rooms, stand-up orwalk-thru chases and utility tunnels or vaults shall be considered to be exposed withrespect to finish or accessibility requirements.

14. "Equivalent" or "Equal": In the opinion of the Engineer, acceptably comparable inconcept, form, quality, performance and compatibility with the design.

15. "Mechanical": May refer to all mechanical trades, including HVAC, plumbing, fireprotection, or may refer to HVAC work as opposed to say plumbing, the difference beingnecessarily taken from context.

16. “Plans”, “Drawings”: Mean all information presented in a drawing or graphical format,which have been included in the Contract, including but not limited to plans, sections,elevations, details, diagrams, schedules, notes, legends and addenda thereto.

17. “Specifications”: Means all information pertaining to performing the Work, presented intext format and in the accepted organization of Divisions and Sections and in theaddenda thereto.

18. “Addendum”, “Addenda”: Means information published after the original distribution ofDocuments (but before the Bid Opening), which may contain changes to Drawings,Specifications or the bidding process. Such information carries the same weight as iforiginally included in the Documents.

19. “Demolish”: Means to carefully and legally disconnect, separate and remove the itemfrom the project site and dispose of it, unless specific directions are given in theseDocuments to move, preserve, store or transport the item to a different location, in whichcase, “Demolish” shall mean to disconnect and take out of service.

B. Abbreviations and Symbology:


1. Refer to the following references for any abbreviations, acronyms or symbols not definedin the Contract Documents:

a. ASHRAE Fundamentals Handbook, current edition, chapter on Abbreviations andSymbols.

2. The following abbreviations may be used throughout the mechanical Documents. Referalso to legends or symbol lists on Drawings and to architectural abbreviations. Note thatall abbreviations are not necessarily used.

A, AMP Ampere AAE Automatic AirAV Air Vent EliminatorAAV Automatic Air Vent ABV AboveAC Alternating Current ACCU Air Cooled Condensing

Air Conditioning UnitAD Access Door ADDL AdditionalADJ Adjustable ARL Above Roof Level

AdjacentA/E Architect/Engineer AFF Above Finished FloorAHU Air Handling Unit ALT AltitudeAL Aluminum AlternateALTN Alternate ANOD Anodized, AnodeAP Access Panel APPROX ApproximateARCH Architect(ural) ATM AtmosphereAUTO Automatic AV Acid VentAVG Average AW Acid WasteAWG American Wire AWT Average Water

Gauge TemperatureAFD Adj. Freq. Drive

BDD Backdraft Damper BD BoardBEL Below BHP Brake HorsepowerBLDG Building BOD Bottom of DuctBOP Bottom of Pipe (Elevation)

(Elevation) BRK Break, BreakerBRKT Bracket BRZ Bronze, BrazeBS Bird Screen BSMT BasementBTU British Thermal BTUH BTU/HR

Unit BFP Backflow Preventer

CAP Capacity CB Catch BasinCC Center to Center CD Ceiling DiffuserCEIL Ceiling CENT CentralCFH Cubic Feet/Hour CFM Cubic Feet/MinuteCHG Charge, Change CG Ceiling GrilleCI Cast Iron CKT CircuitCLG Cooling CLO ClosetCLR Clear CO Carbon MonoxideCO Cleanout CO2 Carbon DioxideCOL Column COMP CompoundCONC Concrete Compressor (ed)COND Condensate, CONFIG Configuration

Condensation CONN ConnectionCondenser CONST Construction

CONT Control(s), CONTR ContractorContinuous COP Coefficient of

CPLG Coupling Performance,CT Cooling Tower CopperCTR Center CU Copper, Condensing


CUH Cabinet Unit Unit, CubicHeater CIRC Circular

CW Cold Water CWR Chilled WaterCWS Chilled Water Return

Supply CR Ceiling Register

D Depth, Diameter dB DecibelsDifferential DOUB Double

DB Dry Bulb DC Direct CurrentDCW Domestic Cold DD Direct Drive

Water DDC Direct DigitalDET Detail ControlDF Drinking Fountain DG Door GrilleDHW Domestic Hot Water DHWR Domestic Hot WaterDI Double Inlet ReturnDIA Diameter DIFF DiffuserDIM Dimension DISC DisconnectDISCH Discharge DL Door LouverDN Down DP Double PoleDS Downspout DT Double ThrowDW Double Width DWG DrawingDWH Domestic Water DWV Drain, Waste and

Heater VentDR Drain DHBC See HBC

E East EA Each, Entering AirEER Energy Efficiency Exhaust Air

Ratio EF Exhaust FanEGW Ethylene Glycol/

EL Elevation Water MixtureELEC Electric EMD End of Main DripEMER Emergency ENTR EntranceENT Entering EQUIP EquipmentEQ Equal, Equivalent ET Entering TemperatureEVAP Evaporative Expansion TankEW Eye Wash EWC Electric WaterEWH Electric Wall Heater CoolerEWT Entering Water EXH Exhaust

Temperature EXIST ExistingEXP Expansion, EXT Exterior,

Exposed, External, ExtrudedExplosion EAT Entering Air

EDB Entering Dry Bulb TemperatureEWB Entering Wet Bulb ESP Ext.Static Pres.

F Fahrenheit FCU Fan/Coil UnitTemperature FD Floor Drain

FDN Foundation Fire DamperFE Fire FEC Fire Extinguisher

Extinguisher CabinetFF Fouling Factor FH Fire HydrantFHC Fire Hose Cabinet FIG FigureFIN Finish FL, FLR FloorFLA Full Load Amps FLEX FlexibleFLUOR Fluorescent FOR Fuel Oil ReturnFOS Fuel Oil Supply, FP Fire Protection

Suction FPF Fins Per FootFPH Frost-Proof FPM Feet Per Minute

Hydrant FPS Feet Per Second


FPT Female Pipe FR FrameThread FT Feet

FTR Finned Tube FVC Fire Valve CabinetRadiation FSD Fire/Smoke Damper

FCV Flow Cont. Valve

GA Gauge GAL GallonGALV Galvanized GI Grease InterceptorGL Glass GND, GRD GroundGPD Gallons Per Day GPH Gallons Per HourGPM Gallons Per Minute GR Grade, Grille

H Height, Horizontal HB Hose BibHT, HGT Height HD HeadHIGH Height HDWE HardwareHEX Hexagonal HOA Hand/Off/AutomaticHORIZ Horizontal HP High PressureHPR High Pressure Horsepower

Steam Condensate Heat PumpReturn HPS High Pressure

HI High SteamHR Hour HS Hair StrainerHTG Heating HTR HeaterHUH Horizontal Unit HVAC Heating,

Heater Ventilating andHVY Heavy Air ConditioningHW Hot Water HWR Heating Hot WaterHWS Heating Hot Water Return

Supply HZ Hertz = CPS =Cycles/Sec.

HWH Hot Water Heater(Domestic)

ID Inside Diameter, ID IdentificationInside Dimension IDENT Identification

ICC International Code IFB Integral Face andCouncil Bypass Damper

IN Inches, Input INCAND IncandescentIN.Hg Inches of Mercury INSUL InsulationINJ Injection, Injector IN.W.C., Inches of WaterIND Indirect Drain IN.W.G. columnIR Infrared INV InvertIMC International

Mechanical Code

JT Joint

KIT Kitchen KV KilovoltKVA Kilovolt Amps KW KilowattKWH Kilowatthour IBC In.. Bldg. Code

L Long, Louver, Latent LB, # PoundLFS Low Fire Start LG LengthLAT Leaving Air LAV Lavatory

Temperature LIQ LiquidLatent

LP Low Pressure LPR Low PressureLiquified Steam CondensatePetroleum (Gas) Return

LPS Low Pressure Steam LT Light, Leaving


LTG Lighting TemperatureLWT Leaving Water LVG Leaving

Temperature LDB Leaving Dry BulbLWB Leaving Wet Bulb LO Low

MA Milliampere MACH MachineMAN Manual MATL MaterialMAV Manual Air Vent MAX MaximumMBH Thousand BTU Per MD Manual Damper

Hour MECH MechanicalMET Metal MEZZ MezzanineMFR Manufacturer MH ManholeMIN Minimum, Minute MISC MiscellaneousMK Mark MO Motor-OperatedMOD Motorized Damper Month

Modulating MPH Miles Per HourMPR Medium Pressure MPS Medium Pressure

Steam Condensate SteamReturn MPT Male Pipe Thread

MS Motor Starter MT MountMTD Mounted MTG MountingMV Millivolt MW MegawattMCC Motor Control Ctr.

N North, Neutral NC Noise CriteriaNEUT Neutral Normally ClosedNIC Not In Contract NO Normally OpenNOM Nominal NumberNPSH Net Positive NTS Not To Scale

Suction Head

O2 Oxygen OA Outside AirOBD Opposed Blade OD Outside Diameter

Damper Outside DimensionOC On Center (s) OPN OperationOPP Opposite OPNG OpeningOVHD Overhead OZ Ounces

P Pressure, Pump PD Pressure DropPERF Perforated PH PhasePIV Post Indicator PL Plate,

Valve Property LinePLBG Plumbing PNEU PneumaticPNL Panel PPM Parts Per MillionPR Pair PRELIM PreliminaryPRES Pressure PRI PrimaryPRV Pressure PSC Permanent Split

Regulating Valve CapacitorPSF Pounds Per Square PSI Pounds Per Square

Foot InchPSIG Pounds Per Square PT Plaster Trap

Inch, Gauge PointPVC Polyvinyl chloride ø PhasePCR Pumped Condensate POC Point of Conn.

Return

QT Quart QTY QuantityQUAL Quality QX Heat Exchanger


R Thermal or RA Return AirElectrical RAD RadiusResistance, Radius RCP Reinforced

RD Roof Drain Concrete PipeRECIRC Recirculating RECOV RecoveryRED Reducing REG RegisterREINF Reinforced RegulatorREQD Required REV Revised, RevisionRH Relative Humidity RM RoomRND, ø Round RPM Revolutions PerRPS Revolutions Per Minute

Second RWC, RWL Rainwater ConductorRG, RAG Return Air Grille RPZReduced PressureRF Return Fan Zone (BFP)RECT Rectangular

S South, Sensible SA Supply AirSAN Sanitary SCH ScheduleSCHED Schedule(d)SCR Silicon-Controlled SD Smoke Detector

Rectifier Storm DrainSEC Secondary SECT Section, SectorSENS Sensible SERV ServiceSF Square Feet SGL Single

Supply Fan SG, SAG Supply Air GrilleSH Sheet SHT SheetSING Single SIM SimilarSOL Solenoid SP Static PressureSPEC(S) Specification(s) SpaceSP.GR. Specific Gravity Single PoleSQ Square STRUCT StructuralSS Stainless Steel ST Sound Trap,

Sanitary Sewer Single Throwor Storm Sewer SWP Steam Working(See Legend) Pressure

STD Standard STL SteelSTM Steam STOR StorageSTR Straight STRL StructuralSUP Support(ed) SUSP Suspend(ed)SW Switch SYS, SYST System

T Temperature, Total T&B Top and BottomTAB Testing Adjusting Testing & Balancing

& Balancing TOT TotalTD Temperature TDH Total Dynamic

Difference HeadTEFC Totally Enclosed TEMP Temperature

Fan Cooled TemporaryTERM Terminal THK ThickTHRU Through TYP TypicalTG, TAG Transfer Grille

U Overall Heat UC UndercutTransfer Coefficient UGND Underground

UH Unit Heater UR UrinalUTIL Utility, Utilities UV Ultraviolet

Unit Ventilator

V Volts, Vent VAC Vacuum


Vertical, VelocityVCP Vitrified Clay VEL Velocity

Pipe VENT Ventilat(or),VERT Vertical (ion), (e)VOL Volume VSP Vitrified SewerVTR Vent Thru Roof PipeVUH Vert. Unit Heater VSD, VFD Variable Speed

Drive

W Waste, Water W/ WithWatt, West, Width WB Wet Bulb

WC Water Column WOG Water, Oil or GasWater Closet

WG Water Gauge WH Wall HydrantWL Water Level WO Waste OilW/O Without WP Working PressureWSHP Water Source WT Weight

Heat Pump WTR Water

XFMR Transformer XBRA Cross BracingXT Expansion Tank XFER TransferXA Transfer Air

YD Yard YH Yard HydrantYR Year

Z Impedence

C. Organizational Acronyms:

AABC Associated Air Balance CouncilAAF Association of Air-Conditioning of ArgentinaAAMP American Association of Meat ProcessorsABC Air Balance ConsultantsABMA American Boiler Manufacturers AssociationACCA Air Conditioning Contractors of AmericaACEC American Consulting Engineers CouncilACEEE American Council for an Energy Efficient EconomyACGIH American Conference of Governmental Industrial HygienistsACPA American Concrete Pipe AssociationADC Air Diffusion CouncilADDA American Design Drafting AssociationADI Air Distribution InstituteAEE Association of Energy EngineersAESP Association of Energy Services ProfessionalsAFBMA Antifriction Bearing Manufacturers AssociationAFE Association for Facilities EngineeringAFEAS Alternative Fluorocarbons Environmental Acceptability StudyAFFI American Frozen Foods InstituteAFSA American Fire Sprinkler AssociationAGA American Gas AssociationAGAR American Gas Association ResearchAGCA Associated General Contractors of AmericaAGCC American Gas Cooling Center, Inc.AHAM Association of Home Appliance ManufacturersAIA American Institute of ArchitectsAIAQC American IAQ CouncilAIC American Institute of Contractors


AIM/R Association of Industry Manufacturers RepresentativesAISETF Association of Independent Scientific, Engineering, and Testing FirmsAMCA Air Movement and Control Association InternationalAMCA-HVI Home Ventilating Institute DivisionANSI American National Standards InstituteAPEC Automated Procedures for Engineering Consultants, Inc.APFA American Pipe Fittings AssociationARDM Association of Refrigerant Desuperheaters Manufacturers/Trevor-Martin

Corp.AREMA Air-Conditioning and Refrigeration Equipment Manufacturers AssociationARI Air-Conditioning and Refrigeration InstituteARW Air Conditioning & Refrigeration Wholesalers InternationalASA American Subcontractors AssociationASA American Supply AssociationASC Associated Specialty ContractorsASE Alliance to Save EnergyASES American Solar Energy SocietyASGE American Society of Gas EngineersASHI American Society of Home InspectorsASHRAE American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning

EngineersASIC American Society of Home InspectorsASME American Society Mechanical EngineersASPE American Society of Plumbing EngineersASPE American Society of Professional EstimatorsASSE American Society of Safety EngineersASSE American Society of Sanitary EngineeringASTM American Society for Testing and MaterialsAUCA American Underground Construction AssociationAWS American Welding SocietyAWT Association of Water TreatmentAWWA American Water Works AssociationBHCC Better Heating-Cooling CouncilBIASC Building Industry Association of Southern CaliforniaBOCA Building Officials & Code Administration International, Inc. (ICC)BOMA Building Owners & Managers AssociationCABA Continental Automated Buildings AssociationCBAC Commercial Building Air Conditioning CenterCCPI/AEE Cogeneration & Competitive Power Institute, Div. of AEECDA Copper Development Association Inc.CERI Clean Energy Research Institute, University of MiamiCIBSE Chartered Institution of Building Services EngineersCIDC Construction Industry Development CouncilCIMA Cellulose Insulation Manufacturers AssociationCMAA Construction Management Association of AmericaCISPI Cast Iron Soil Pipe InstituteCOBRA Cogeneration Boilers Stationary Engineers AssociationCPPA Corrugated Polyethylene Pipe AssociationCRC Chemical Rubber Co. (Handbook)CRMA Commercial Refrigerator Manufacturers AssociationCS Commercial Standards (sometimes known as commodity standards’)

produced by the U.S. Department of CommerceCSA Cryogenic Society of American, Inc.CSI Construction Specifications InstituteCTI Cooling Technology InstituteEC Envirosense Consortium, Inc.ECI Evaporative Cooling Institute, Inc.EEI Edison Electric InstituteEIA Environmental Information Association, Inc.


EIC Energy Ideas ClearinghouseEPRI Electric Power Research InstituteEREC Energy Efficiency & Renewable Energy ClearinghouseESC EnviroSense Consortium — IAQFM Factory Mutual SystemFMI Food Marketing InstituteFPMSA Food Processing Machinery and Supplies AssociationFS Federal SpecificationGAMA Gas Appliance Manufacturers AssociationGEA Geothermal Energy AssociationGHPC Geothermal Heat Pump Consortium, Inc.GHPC NIRC Geothermal Heat Pump Consortium National Information Resource

CenterGRI Gas Research InstituteHA Heating Alternatives, Inc.HAA Home Automation AssociationHI Hydronics Institute Division of GAMAHPA Hearth Products AssociationHRAI Heating, Refrigeration and Air Conditioning ContractorsHVCA Heating and Ventilating Contractors’ AssociationHVI Home Ventilating Institute Division of AMCAIAFIS International Association of Food Industry, SuppliesIAPMO International Association of Plumbing & Mechanical OfficialsIAQA Indoor Air Quality AssociationIARW International Association of Refrigerated WarehousesIBR Hydronics InstituteICA Independent Contractors AssociationICA Insulation Contractors of AmericaICARMA International Council of Air-Conditioning and Refrigeration

Manufacturers’ AssociationsICBO International Conference of Building OfficialsICC International Code CouncilICRA International Compressor Remanufactures AssociationICS Industrial Computing SocietyICT Institute of Gas TechnologyIDEA International District Energy AssociationIEC Independent Electrical Contractors Inc.IEEE The Institute of Electrical and Electronic EngineersIEQA Indoor Environmental Quality AllianceIESNA Illuminating Engineering Society of North AmericaIFMA International Facility Management AssociationIGA International Geothermal AssociationIGSHPA International Ground Source Heat Pump AssociationIGT Institute of Gas TechnologyIHACI Institute of Heating & Air Conditioning, Inc.IIAR International Institute of Ammonia RefrigerationIIEC Sustainable Energy GuideIRI Industrial Risk Insurers (Formerly FIA)ISA International Society for Measurement and ControlISB Institute for Sick BuildingsISES International Solar Energy SocietyISO International Standards OrganizationsLIA LonMark Interoperability AssociationMACS Mobile Air Conditioning SocietyMACSW Mobile Air Conditioning Society WorldwideMANA Manufacturers’ Agents National AssociationMCA Mechanical Contractors AssociationMCAA Mechanical Contractors Association of America, IncMHANA Masonry Heater Association of North America


MICA Midwest Insulation Contractors Association Home PageMSCA Mechanical Service Contactors of AmericaMIL Military SpecificationsMSS Manufacturer’s Standardization Society of the Valves and Fitting IndustryNACE NACE International, the Corrosion SocietyNADCA National Air Duct Cleaners AssociationNAEIR National Association for the Exchange of Industrial ResourcesNAESCO National Association of Energy Service CompaniesNAESP National Association of Energy Services CompaniesNAFA National Air Filtration AssociationNAFEM North American Association of Food Equipment ManufacturersNAHB National Association of HomebuildersNAHBRC National Association of Home Builders Remodelors CouncilNAIMA North American Insulation Manufacturers AssociationNAOHSM National Association of Oil Heating Service ManagersNAPCA National Association of Pipe Coating ApplicatorsNAPE National Association of Power EngineersNAPF National Association of Pipe FabricatorsNAPH National Alliance of Plumbing-Heating-Cooling ContractorsNARI National Association of the Remodeling IndustryNASM National Association of Service ManagersNATE North American Technician Excellence, Inc.NAW National Association of Wholesaler-DistributorsNBBPVI National Board of Boiler and Pressure Vessel InspectorsNBS National Bureau of StandardsNCIAQ National Coalition on Indoor Air QualityNCRSA National Commercial Refrigeration Sales AssociationNCSBCS National Conference of States on Building Codes and StandardsNEBB National Environmental Balancing BureauNEC National Electrical Code (NFPA 70)NECA National Electrical Contractors AssociationNEMA National Electrical Manufacturers AssociationNEMI National Energy Management InstituteNESEA Northeast Sustainable Energy AssociationNFPA National Fire Protection AssociationNFSA National Fire Sprinkler Association, Inc.NGWA National Ground Water AssociationNHRAW North American Heating, Refrigeration & Air Conditioning Wholesalers

AssociationNIBS National Institute of Building SciencesNIST U.S. National Institute of Standards and TechnologyNMA National Mining AssociationNPGA National Propane Gas AssociationNRA National Restaurant AssociationNRCA National Refrigeration Contractors AssociationNRCA National Roofing Contractors AssociationNSAE National Society of Architectural EngineersNSPE National Society of Professional EngineersNUCA National Utility Contractors AssociationNWSA National Welding Supply AssociationOMA Oil Heat Manufacturers AssociationOSHA Occupational Safety and Health Administration or Occupational Safety

and Health ActPAG Pipe Association GlobalPEC Piping Education Council, A Division of MSAPEPP Professional Engineers in Private PracticePFI/US Pipe Fabrication Institute (USA)PHCC National Association of Plumbing-Heating-Cooling ContractorsPMI Plumbing Manufacturers Institute


PPI/HTPD Plastic Pipe Institute, High Temperature Plastics DivisionPS Product Standard, produced by U.S. Department of CommercePTA Pipe Trades AssociationRCA Remodeling Contractors Association, Inc.RETA Refrigerating Engineers & Technicians AssociationRPA Radiant Panel AssociationRSES Refrigeration Service Engineers SocietySDMA Spiral Duct Manufacturers AssociationSFPE Society of Fire Protection EngineersSIPA Structural Insulated Panel AssociationSMACNA Sheet Metal and Air-conditioning Contractor’s National AssociationSMWIA Sheet Metal Workers International AssociationSPI The Society of the Plastics Industry, Inc.SRCC Solar Rating & Certification Corp.STFDA Specialty Tools & Fasteners Distributor AssociationSTI Steel Tank InstituteTABB Testing Adjusting and Balancing BureauTIEQ Total Indoor Environmental Quality CoalitionTRRF Refrigeration Research FoundationUACA United American Contractors AssociationUAJAP United Association of Journeymen & Apprentices, Plumbing/Pipe Fitting

IndustryUL Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.USECRE United States Export Council for Renewable EnergyVMA Valve Manufacturers Association of AmericaWDA Wholesaler Distributors AssociationWEEA World Energy Efficiency Association Home PageWOHMA/HA Waste Oil Heating Manufacturers Association/Heating Alternatives

D. Technique:

1. HVAC Metal Duct Standards - SMACNA

2. Industrial Duct Construction - SMACNA

3. Industrial Ventilation - ACGIH

4. Welding Pressure Piping - ASME

1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. Refer to Division 01 for submittal procedures and references.

B. Otherwise, submit 8 to 12 copies of information to the Engineer for approval. Check eachSpecification Section for all items to be included

C. Submit all required items within sixty (60) days of Contract date or Notice to Proceed,whichever is later, unless otherwise specifically instructed. Approval of the Engineer must beobtained to submit later on any item.

D. Submittals are required for all items of mechanical equipment and products provided by theContractor which are called out in individual sections of the specifications. In general, do notsubmit product data on pipe, pipe fittings, sheet metal, sleeves, lubrication or packing unlessspecifically directed in these Contract Documents, but do submit schedules listing materialsto be used.

E. All drawings or other material submitted on sheets larger than 8 1/2" X 11" (or 11" X 17"foldout) shall be submitted as one set of paper sepia or mylar sepia reproducibles and one


set of blueline prints. Corrections and approvals will be indicated on the sepias and returnedto the Contractor for copying and distribution.

F. Submittals shall be referenced correctly to the appropriate Sections of the Specifications.

G. Manufacturer's catalog cuts, instead of complete shop drawings, may be submitted for allstandard cataloged equipment, provided that the item required to meet the projectspecifications is not modified in any way from the standard catalog version of said item. Cutsshall be clearly marked to indicate the version of said item, including the exact size, type,rating, capacity, accessories, etc., of the item to be furnished. Any cut sheets showingmultiple items, multiple dimensions, multiple performance figures, multiple accessories and/ormultiple options shall be legibly marked to indicate the exact item to be provided and itsassociated information. Failure to do this will result in rejection of the submittal without furtherreview or comment. Do not use the term “furnished by others” or similar designations, as thismay imply that the item is not being provided in the Contract.

H. No faxed (Facsimile Transmitted) material will be accepted for submittals and all drawingsand text shall be clear original printed material or low-generation copies with no blurred,blotched or unreadable areas. Submittals with any illegible portions or materials not suitablefor permanent record will result in rejection of the submittal for cause, without further reviewor comment.

I. Bind shop drawings/catalog cuts in folders with a title sheet and identification on front of thefolder. Allow space for Contractor, Architect and Engineer review stamps.

J. All submittals must bear the dated, handwritten signature of the Contractor and his stamp ofapproval before being considered for review.

K. See additional requirements in individual Sections of these Specifications.

1.06 SAMPLES AND MOCK-UPS

A. Samples of any product called for by individual sections of the specifications shall bedelivered to the Engineer at the time of submittal on that item. Submittals, in those cases, willnot be approved until the samples have been examined.

B. Where called for in the specifications, the Contractor shall construct a sectional mock-up ofequipment installations using actual equipment or equipment cabinets of the type to be usedfor purposes of checking appearance, fit of piping, ductwork, controls or structural elements.Mock-ups shall be inspected and approved by the Engineer prior to release for shipment ofthe material in question.

1.07 CERTIFICATES, LICENSES AND FEES

A. The Contractor shall pay all fees, stand all required inspections, obtain all necessarylicenses, and obtain all required certificates for the work at his own expense.

B. Certificates requiring display shall be suitably framed and mounted in the mechanical room orother appropriate location. Copies of the certificate shall be included in each copy of themaintenance and operating manuals.

C. Certificates not requiring display shall be delivered to the Engineer for transmittal to theOwner, and copies of the certificate shall be included in each copy of the maintenance andoperating manuals.

1.08 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS

A. Record Drawings


1. Comply with Division 01 for record document procedures and requirements.

2. Maintain and protect one complete set of drawing prints on job site to record anydeviations from Contract drawings.

3. Neatly and correctly enter with multicolored pencils any deviations on drawings and keepdrawings available for inspection.

a. Record locations of concealed ducts, piping and valves.

b. Record Addendum and Change Order items.

4. Record deviations made necessary to incorporate equipment different from baseequipment specified.

5. Drawings shall be available at the site at all times for inspection by the Engineer duringnormal project working hours.

6. At completion of Project and before final approval, make any final corrections todrawings, certify to the accuracy of each print by signature thereon and deliver same toEngineer for approval and drafting.

7. Underground site utilities shall be located by survey. Actual inverts and elevations shallbe recorded.

1.09 MAINTENANCE AND OPERATING MANUALS

A. Submit in accordance with Division 01 specification requirements to the Engineer for reviewand obtain receipt for delivery.

B. Format of the manual shall be as follows:

1. First page, Each Volume: Title of Project, Owner, Address, Date of Submittal, Name andAddress of Contractor, Name of Engineer.

2. Second page, Each Volume: Index of manual contents.

3. First section: A copy of each shop drawing and reviewed submittal with an index at thebeginning of the section. Include operating and maintenance instructions, wiring/controldiagrams, spare parts lists for each type of equipment.

4. Second section: A list of all major equipment used on the job, together with supplier'sname and address and servicing agency's name and address.

5. Third section: Copies of Contractor and manufacturer warranties.

6. Fourth section: Test and balance reports, construction test reports, start-up reports, watertreatment reports.

7. Fifth section:

a. Include a list of any special keys, tools and wrenches required for operation.

b. Include a list of all lubrication procedures, special lubricants and equipment.

c. Include a list of all tagged valves with tag number, valve description, location, andfunction. Include a revised flow chart, obtained from the Engineer to show valveidentification.


C. No faxed (Facsimile Transmitted) material will be accepted for Maintenance and OperatingManual submittals and all drawings and text shall be clear original printed material or low-generation copies with no blurred, blotched or unreadable areas.

D. Final payments cannot be made and Project cannot be closed out until Maintenance andOperating Manuals have been approved.

1.10 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Arrange deliveries of products in accordance with construction schedules to avoid conflictwith work and site conditions.

1 Deliver products in undamaged condition, in manufacturer's original containers orpackaging, with identifying labels intact and legible.

2. Immediately on delivery, inspect shipments to assure compliance with the requirementsof the Contract Documents and approved submittals, and that products are properlyprotected and undamaged.

3. Provide equipment and personnel to handle products by methods to prevent soiling anddamage to products or packaging.

B. Store products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions with seals and labels intact andlegible.

1. Store fabricated products above the ground, on blocking or skids, prevent soiling orstaining. Cover products which are subject to deterioration with impervious sheetcoverings. Provide adequate ventilation to avoid condensation.

2. Arrange storage in a manner to provide easy access for inspection. Make periodicinspections of stored products to assure that products are maintained under specificconditions, and free from damage or deterioration.

3. Provide substantial coverings as necessary to protect installed products from damage.Remove when no longer needed.

1.11 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS AND EXISTING CONDITIONS

A. Locate existing utilities prior to beginning work. Reroute or replace existing utilities wherenecessary to permit installation of the work. Provide adequate means of protection duringwork operations. Repair existing utilities damaged during work operations to the satisfactionof the utility owner and at Contractor's expense.

B. Should uncharted or incorrectly charted piping or other utilities be encountered during workoperations, notify the Engineer immediately for procedure directions. Cooperate with utilitycompanies in maintaining active utilities in operation.

C. Contractor shall not remove or disturb any known or suspected existing hazardous materialsin buildings, above ground or underground, except work performed in compliance with EPArequirements, as instructed in this Contract, including, but not limited to, asbestos, lead-based paints, PCB's and radioactive materials. If such materials are encountered during thecourse of the Work, the Engineer shall be immediately notified and the materials shall beavoided.

D. All materials removed from the site including scraps, construction materials, excavated ordemolished materials shall be disposed of in a legal manner.


1.12 WARRANTY

A. The Contractor shall guarantee all work, both labor and products against defects and failureunder normal use for the period of one year from the official date of Substantial Completion.The Contractor shall leave the entire installation in complete working order and free from anyand all defects in materials, workmanship or finish. He shall repair or replace at his ownexpense any part that may develop defects due to faulty material or workmanship duringconstruction and the warranty period and shall guarantee also to repair or replace with likematerials any existing work of the building or equipment which is damaged during therepairing of such defective apparatus, materials or workmanship. The signing of the Contractfor this Work, covered by these Documents of which they shall become a part, shall becomea written guarantee on the part of the Contractor to carry out all the provisions of this Divisionof these Specifications.

B. Refer to Division 01 for other specific requirements.

C. Refer to each Section of Division 23 for additional requirements.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS, STANDARD PRODUCTS AND SUBSTITUTIONS

A. All material and equipment shall be new and in good condition. Refer to Division 01 foradditional requirements.

B. Design is based upon a specific make and model of equipment. However, except wherenoted, the specifications are not intended to limit competition or the Contractor's option to usealternate products of equivalent concept, quality, and performance.

C. Products of alternate manufacturers listed may be substituted without approval prior to theBid, if they are regularly catalogued items and meet the criteria of equivalence in concept,quality, and performance in the opinion of the Engineer. It is recommended that the opinion ofthe Engineer be solicited prior to the bid if there are any questions. This opinion does notguarantee approval of the submittals at a later time. In the case where the equipment isunfamiliar to the Engineer, all vendors desiring to furnish equipment other than that specifiedmust submit, in addition to ordinary shop drawings, a complete verification specification forthe substituted equipment along with catalogs, literature, wiring diagrams, piping diagrams,and a list of similar sized installations where the proposed equipment is installed. Thisinformation may be required to be presented immediately after the Bid and lack of informationor of qualifications, as judged by the Engineer, may result in a Bid not being accepted.

D. All products which require submittals, whether design basis or otherwise accepted, must beformally approved by the Engineer before shipment to the job.

E. The Contractor is responsible for any and all costs for changes to the mechanical work or thework of other trades necessitated by the optional substitution of approved alternateequipment. Approval of alternate equipment or modifications to the plans by the Engineer arenot to be construed as relief from this responsibility. In the case of significant modification tothe design, the Contractor may also be required to pay for the cost of design review and/orredesign by the Engineer.

F. Listing: The successful bidder shall furnish to the Engineer within one hour of the Bidopening, or as indicated in bidding instructions, a list of all major items of mechanicalequipment to be provided, indicating the manufacturer and the general type. List shall includeall items of major equipment such as boilers, chillers, towers, pumps, tanks, air handlers,packaged equipment, controls, plumbing fixtures, or other items to which whole Sections ofSpecifications are devoted. Do not include piping, sheet metal, small specialty items or the


like unless specifically requested. In addition, a list of all Subcontractors to be involved in theproject shall be furnished to include, in addition to the prime mechanical contractor, as aminimum, the plumbing, pipe fitting, sheet metal, controls, water treatment, thermalbalancing, insulating, fire protection and asbestos removal subcontractors, as utilized in theproject. Any list of required items included in the Bid Form, Instructions to Bidders or otherBid documents shall supercede these items. Changing manufacturers or subcontractors afterthe listing will not be acceptable, unless initiated by the Owner or the Engineer. Finalacceptance of the bids is contingent upon submission and approval of these lists.

2.02 QUANTITIES AND COMPLETENESS

A. Items may be referred to as singular or plural on drawings and specifications. Contractor isresponsible for determining quantity of each item.

B. All components required for the complete installation and legal, proper and safe operation ofequipment and systems indicated in the Documents shall be provided by the Contractor.Optional accessory items shall be included only as specified.

2.03 TESTING AND CERTIFICATION

A. Conduct tests and adjustments of equipment as specified and necessary to verifyperformance requirements. Submit test data to the Engineer. Pay all fees involved in requiredtesting of equipment.

B. Provide necessary personnel and testing instruments required to perform test(s) ofinstallation.

C. Refer to individual Sections for additional requirements.

D. Submit copies of all test reports, manufacturer's certifications and inspection reports to theEngineer. Include copies of each in each copy of the Maintenance and Operating Manual(Section 230100).

2.04 NOISE AND VIBRATION

A. Equipment shall be free of unusual or excessive noise and vibration in the opinion of theEngineer. No amount of rattling of loose, improperly isolated or ill-fitting parts will beacceptable. Vibration transmitted to the structure shall be reasonable and within recognizedand specified limits.

2.05 HAZARDOUS MATERIALS

A. No materials or products containing known regulated hazardous materials shall be used inthe Project, including asbestos, paint containing lead or products containing PCB's inamounts grater than current standards allow.

B. No solder containing lead shall be used on the Project.

C. Chemical products used in the construction process or for water treatment purposes shall beused in a manner in complete compliance with all OSHA and EPA regulations and guidelines.Formal Material Safety Data (MSD) Sheets shall be provided for each product used and shallbe posted in the work area most accessible to the place of use of the product. In addition,MSD sheets shall accompany and be attached to water treatment products from the time theyarrive on site through the end of Warranty.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 TEMPORARY SERVICES

A. Refer to Division 01 for specific requirements, responsibilities and methods for temporarywater service, sanitation, heat and ventilation.

3.02 COORDINATION

A. The Contractor is responsible for sequencing of the work and coordination with all trades toprevent delays in the project. No extras will be allowed for changes made necessary byinterference of work between trades.

B. Carefully check and coordinate location and level of all pipes, ducts, etc. Run preliminarylevels and check with all trades so that conflicts in all locations may be avoided. Contractorshall rough sketch sections through the corridors or other tight mechanical/electrical spaceswhen requested to do so, in order to show that any possible conflicts have been resolvedamong all the trades. Where conflicts occur, if any, the following preference schedule shall befollowed:

1. Recessed electrical light fixtures.

2. Sanitary and storm drainage piping on critical grade.

3. Ductwork.

4. Large HVAC or domestic water mains.

5. Sprinkler piping.

6. Communications wireway

7. Small HVAC piping.

8. Domestic water piping.

9. Electric and communications conduits.

C. Ductwork or Heating Main: No ductwork or heating main shall have preference over plumbinglines below plumbing fixtures, or over electrical conduits above or below electric switchgearand panels. No piping conveying fluids shall be installed directly over electrical equipment.

D. Unless otherwise indicated, coordinate all work with the arrival of materials on the site toprevent unnecessary delays between demolition or other preliminary phases of work and theinstallation of new materials. Periods of abandonment of work area, once work has begunshall be avoided unless necessary to allow other trades to complete their work.

E. The storage of materials on site shall be minimized. Materials delivered to the site far inadvance of construction, and/or exposed to weather, mud or construction abuse for longperiods, will not be eligible to be included in pay requests, and will be accepted for use in theproject at the time of construction based upon condition at that time. Generally, rusted, beat-up products, including large equipment, will not be accepted for use.

3.03 INSPECTIONS

A. The Engineer or his representative may inspect the work at any time and for any reason, but,generally, inspections will be arranged to coordinate with phasing of the work and withregularly scheduled Project meetings. The Engineer will attempt to accommodate the


Contractor where possible, but in general, it is the Contractor's responsibility to schedule thework in such a manner that inspections are not required more often than the regularmeetings, except for substantial completion and final inspections.

B. No work shall be permanently concealed (underground, behind drywall or masonry, or anyother inaccessible location) without being inspected by the Engineer or his representative,unless specific permission is granted to do so by the Engineer.

C. In general, piping and ductwork must be inspected by the Engineer or his representativebefore insulation is applied, unless specific permission to do otherwise is given by theEngineer.

D. The Contractor shall supply lights, ladders, tools, equipment and assistance to the Engineer,as required, for performing inspections and verifying the operation of mechanical systems.

3.04 CONCRETE WORK

A. Provide all concealed concrete work required for Division 23, including but not limited to pipeand duct anchors, foundations and encasement, inertia bases, and pads. Coordinate withother divisions.

B. Equipment pads, slabs and bases exposed to view and not part of the building structure (seearchitectural/structural plans) shall be provided by the Contractor. Coordinate with otherdivisions. The Contractor shall locate, dimension and furnish sleeves and anchors asrequired.

C. Concrete shall conform to Division 03 requirements.

3.05 PROTECTION

A. Protect equipment and materials during construction from damage from water, dirt, weldingand cutting, spatters, paint droppings, etc., by use of shield and drop cloths. Damagedequipment or materials shall be repaired or replaced by the Contractor. Rusting, corroded ordamaged materials or equipment is not acceptable, whether installed or not.

B. Products stored outside or in unheated spaces shall be covered with water-proof drop clothsor tarpaulins. Condensation shall be prevented by heating and ventilating. Method shall beacceptable to the Engineer (see Section 230100).

C. During construction, maintain all materials and equipment in an orderly manner.

D. Protect floors from soiling and damages caused by tools, chips, cutting oil, pipe compound,paint and the like.

E. The Contractor shall use OSHA-approved ladders and lifts for Division 23 work. Workmenshall not be allowed to stand or sit on the unprotected surfaces of insulation, equipmentjackets, conduit, control panels or any other location not intended for traffic.

3.06 CUTTING AND PATCHING

A. Avoid cutting of concrete, masonry and other finished work by use of sleeves and inserts.

B. Perform cutting and patching required for installation of the work. Methods and proceduresshall be acceptable to the Engineer. Obtain written permission before any cutting.

C. Cut holes through concrete, brick, tile, etc., when necessary, by rotary core drilling ormasonry saw.


D. Damages, patches, or work in areas previously finished under the work of other Divisionsshall be repaired at the expense of the Contractor and to the satisfaction of the Engineer.

3.07 CLEANING

A. Upon completion, ductwork, piping and equipment shall be thoroughly cleaned of dirt, grease,rust and oil, primed where necessary, and left ready for painting. Vacuum clean the insideand outside of fan plenums, air handling units and equipment cabinets. Vacuum clean coilsand comb out damaged fins.

B. Clean galvanized piping and ductwork in exposed areas with diluted acetic acid.

C. Clean copper piping in exposed areas with emery cloth and solvent.

D. Clean gauges, thermometers, traps, strainers and fittings.

E. Install new filters in throwaway and replaceable filter frames. Properly clean permanent filters.

F. Upon completion of Work, the Contractor shall remove all resulting rubbish, debris, andsurplus materials from the premises, together with all disused instruments and equipmentand shall leave the site in a neat, clean, and acceptable condition as approved by Engineer.Contractor shall maintain Work areas of existing facilities in a reasonably clean condition on adaily basis, and shall not allow debris to create operational or safety problems for the Owner.

3.08 PAINTING AND FINISHING

A. Painting shall meet the requirements of Division 07, when included in the Specifications. Nopainting or coating shall be done on surfaces already rusting without proper surfacepreparation.

B. Exterior insulation and coverings shall be cleaned and painted per Division 09 or coated asspecified and left ready for service identification. Consult Engineer for color to be used.

C. Ferrous metal exposed to weather shall be cleaned, primed, and painted per Division 09.Consult Engineer for color to be used.

D. All ferrous fasteners, hardware, hangers, hanger rods exposed to weather shall be stainlesssteel, galvanized or cadmium plated. Plating must include threads and all other surfaces.Other fasteners shall be properly prepared and coated immediately after installation withblack asphaltum.

E. Non-ferrous metals, stainless steel and plastic materials shall not be painted unless indicatedin other Sections or Divisions or in the Drawings.

F. Factory finished equipment which has rusted or been damaged shall be replaced. Only afterapproval by the Engineer, may it be cleaned, primed, and entirely repainted the original colorby the Contractor.

G. Interior insulation coverings shall be cleaned, sized if necessary, painted white and left readyfor service identification. Exposed insulation inside finished areas shall match colors ofnearby finishes, or color selected by the Architect.

H. Interior uninsulated ferrous piping, supports and hangers exposed to view shall be paintedper Division 09 in areas not finished under other Divisions of the Specifications. All itemsshall be painted white except for pipe designated to be color coded in other Sections. Infinished areas, color shall be selected by Architect.


I. Clean interior surfaces of air ducts, and convector and baseboard heating cabinets that arevisible through grilles and louvers and cover with one coat of flat black paint, to limit of sightline. Paint dampers exposed behind louvers, grilles, and convector and baseboard cabinetsto match face panels.

J. Paint insulated and uninsulated duct and piping, cabinets, louvers, boxes, hangers, brackets,collars, and supports where exposed to view in finished areas, except when prefinished orwhere painted under other Divisions.

K. Contractor is responsible for any damage to building or contents from painting process. Donot allow paint over any existing or new name or identification plates or tags. Mask off anywarning or instructional stickers or tags on equipment while painting.

L. Wall mounted plumbing fixtures shall be caulked between fixture and wall or floor withcaulking compatible with finish surfaces.

3.09 ACCESS

A. Equipment has been chosen to properly fit into the physical spaces provided and indicated,allowing ample room for access, servicing, removal and replacement of parts, etc. Adequatespace shall be allowed for clearance in accordance with Code requirements. Physicaldimensions and arrangements of equipment to be installed shall be subject to Engineerapproval. Submit shop drawings of equipment layout for approval where it does not complywith plans.

B. Space Requirements: In the preparation of Drawings, a reasonable effort has been made toinclude all equipment manufacturer's recommendations. Since space requirements andequipment arrangement vary according to manufacturer, the responsibility for initial accessand proper fit rests with the Contractor. The final arrangement of equipment and serviceconnections shall allow the unit to be serviced. This shall include space to pull motors, filters,coils, tubes, etc. Contractor shall demonstrate that proper access has been provided toinspectors.

3.10 CONSTRUCTION DIRT, DUST AND NOISE CONTROL

A. All cutting or drilling of concrete, masonry, steel or wood shall be performed with absolutecontrol of dirt and dust resulting from the cutting or drilling operation. Workers performingoperations or in the immediate vicinity shall wear OSHA approved protective equipment.

B. The Contractor is required to minimize construction noise levels in all locations adjacent to orin occupied areas.

C. The Owner reserves the right to prevent use of any tools which cause detrimental vibration ornoise.

3.11 TRAINING

A. Training and instruction to the Owner shall be provided for all Division 23 equipment, systemsand controls. See individual Sections for additional specific requirements. Contractor shallsubmit a training agenda to the Engineer for approval, prior to Substantial Completion,including a proposed schedule, all items to be covered and who is to make the presentations.If the Owner chooses to decline training, or any part thereof, the Contractor will credit theProject for the cost of any unused hours of training and instruction. Contractor shall keeprecord of attendance at the training sessions and submit to the Engineer upon completion.

B. Instruction shall be based upon material in the Maintenance & Operating Manuals, describedabove, which shall be approved by the Engineer, prior to the training. Any supplementalinformation required shall be provided by the Contractor.


C. Training and instruction to the Owner shall be videotaped at the Contractor’s expense, inDVD format, and the original and one copy shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval,prior to Project Closeout. Video is not required to be made by professional videographers, butshall show technical competence, with clear pictures and sound, and useable for futurepersonnel training by the Owner.

3.12 LEAKS

A. During the time period from date of Contract until termination date of the guarantee,Contractor shall be responsible for damages to the building, grounds, walks, roads, pipingsystems, insulation, electrical systems, refrigeration, heating, ventilating and air conditioningsystems, building equipment, furniture, and other building contents caused by leaks in pipingsystems or equipment being installed or having been installed by him. All repair work shall bedone as directed by, and in a manner satisfactory to the Engineer and at no cost to theOwner.


SCOPE OF WORK 230111-1 TOWN BRANCH WWTP THICKENING

SECTION 230111- SCOPE OF WORK

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 WORK INCLUDED

A. The Contractor shall provide a complete system of mechanical equipment, piping, ductwork,and controls to accomplish the building heating, ventilating, air conditioning, and plumbing,for those buildings shown on the plans and described in the Specifications, including allprovisions of Section 230100. In addition, the Contractor shall provide all site utilityimprovements as indicated by plans and specifications. All labor, materials, apparatus, toolsand appliances essential to the complete functioning of systems described and/or indicatedherein, or which may be reasonably implied as essential, whether mentioned in the ContractDocuments or not, shall be provided by the Contractor. In case of doubt as to the workintended, or in the event of need for explanation thereof, the Contractor shall call upon theEngineer for supplemental instructions.

B. Systems to be provided include but are not limited to:

1. Complete area heating, ventilation, and/or energy recovery unit system includingpackaged roof top units, and all trim and accessories.

2. Natural gas pipe and connections

3. Ductwork and duct connections to existing duct systems.

4. Complete system of controls and necessary electrical interlocks for all mechanicalsystems.

5. A complete system of mechanical identification.

6. See other Divisions and coordinate any additional drainage or utilities work exterior to thebuilding.

C. In providing the work described, all provisions of the Specifications and the Plans shall beadhered to, and the following work shall also be provided as a matter of course:

1. Coordination among all trades and subcontractors to accomplish timely and correctcompletion of the work.

2. All excavation, backfill and surface repair required for underground mechanical work.

3. Equipment pads which are not part of the building structure (see details). All anchors,supports, curbs, frames, hangers and attachments for all mechanical work, includingprovisions for expansion compensation and vibration elimination.

4. All hoisting equipment, staging, scaffolding, ladders, barricades, shores or similarequipment required to properly carry out work in accordance with accepted safetypractices and regulations.

5. All cutting, patching, sleeves, flashings, seals and repairs required to seal penetrations ofthe building roofs, walls, floors, or fire barriers by mechanical work.

6. All finish doors and panels for access to mechanical work, unless shown in architecturalplans.

7. Protection plates in stud walls, chases and soffits for piping.

SCOPE OF WORK 230111-2 TOWN BRANCH WWTP THICKENING

8. Insulation of mechanical systems

9. Finish painting of mechanical systems only, unless otherwise stated. Equipment shall befactory painted and touched up in the field only with Engineer's approval.

10. Final electrical connections to all Division 23 motors and control panels (conduit and wirehaving been run under Division 26). See Section 230250. Furnish starters anddisconnects only where specified to be included with equipment. Provide all fusingrequired for equipment panels.

11. All specialized start-ups, all testing, adjusting and balancing.

12. Payment of all fees, obtaining all permits, passing all inspections and tests required byauthorities having jurisdiction and providing all certificates of approval, for the timelycompletion of the work described in the Contract Documents and the delivery to theOwner of a completely functional facility, lien-free and suitable for occupancy.

13. Building Mechanical System Maintenance and Operating Manuals, extra materials andtools, as indicated in 230100 and other individual Sections of the Specifications

14. Instruction and training of the Owner's personnel in the operation of the system and avideo taped record of same.

15. Warranty of all work for one year or as otherwise specified.

1.02 WORK INSTALLED BUT FURNISHED BY OTHERS

A. Connect equipment furnished by owner and other Divisions as shown.

B. Coordinate connections to site utilities with Division 33 and utilities companies.

1.03 WORK FURNISHED BUT NOT INSTALLED

A. Coordinate equipment motor controls with Division 26 as specified in 230250.

1.04 RELATED WORK

A. Division 03 – Concrete

B. Division 05 – Metals

C. Division 08 – Openings

D. Division 09 – Finishes

E. Division 26 – Electrical


ELECTRICAL COORDINATION 230250-1 TOWN BRANCH WWTP THICKENING

SECTION 230250 - ELECTRICAL COORDINATION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 WORK INCLUDED

A. Provide all control wiring for Divisions 22 and 23 work that is 24 volts or less, includingthermistor wiring, as well as any 120 volt line voltage wiring and conduit required for controlssystem from nearest panels or indicated points of connection. Provide power for any controlair compressors, driers and accessories required unless shown in the electrical plans.

B. All work specified under controls sections of the specifications shall be accomplished by asubcontractor normally engaged in control system design, sales, and installation. Controlwork not specified in that section including line voltage interlock wiring may, at thiscontractor's option, be performed by the controls contractor, the Division 26 Contractor oranother fully qualified technician approved by the A/E, but the work must meet the standardsof quality and code specified in other sections, and is the responsibility of the Division 23Contractor.

C. All power wiring to all motors and line voltage feed to factory control panels shall be providedunder Division 26, except as indicated. The motor starters (3-phase) and disconnects for allmechanical equipment which has not been specified to have factory control panels or factory-mounted motor controls, or which is fed from Motor Control Centers (MCC) or relays (singlephase) for motors fed from MCC's, shall also be provided under Division 26. Otherwise,single phase relays are control items and shall be provided under Division 23. Necessity ofrelays on small motors will be determined by amps capacity of control devices.

D. Final connections to the terminals or pigtails of motors, elements and controls or controlpanels shall be the responsibility of the Division 23 Contractor or his subcontractor. TheContractor is completely responsible for any damages incurred as a result of incorrect oruntimely power connection. This includes connection to dry water heating elements andconnections to equipment rated for different voltages, regardless of the reason.

E. Install valve bodies, wells, flow switch bodies, dampers, and sensor devices in piping andductwork as required for controls work. Coordinate locations with controls subcontractor.

F. Where packaged equipment with control panels (including but not limited to outdoor airhandlers and HVAC units, chillers, pumps, burners and boilers), powered only by a singleconnection of 3-phase power, or 1-phase power over 200 volts, as shown in the electricalDocuments, is indicated to have, or may reasonably be expected to have, internal stepdowntransformers for providing internal 120 volt or low voltage ac power for the operation ofcontrols, actuators, filter drives, lights or other completely internal isolated accessories, suchtransformers shall be provided under this Division. Any alternate source of 120 volt powerrequired for complete operation of the specified system, due to not providing saidtransformers, shall be provided at no cost to the Owner, after approval of the Engineer.

G. Sprinkler system flow and supervisory switches, unless otherwise indicated, shall be mountedunder Division 23 and wired under Division 26.

H. HVAC system duct or equipment-mounted smoke detectors shall, unless otherwise indicated,be mounted under Division 23 and furnished and wired under Division 26.

1.02 RELATED WORK

A. Division 26: Electrical.



A. Wiring and conduit shall conform to the National Electrical Code, latest edition.

B. Electrical equipment shall conform to NEMA standards and shall be UL listed.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop drawings of all equipment shall indicate power and control interlock connections.Contractor shall furnish to the Division 26 installer wiring diagrams for equipment suppliedwith starters and/or power disconnects as an integral part.

B. Complete terminal to terminal wiring diagrams showing terminal designations on controlledequipment and devices shall be furnished. Diagrams may be part of temperature controlsubmittal.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 WIRING

A. Oversized solid conductor wiring on control systems will not be accepted. Maximum 14 ga.stranded machine tool wire shall be used for all line voltage control applications and smallersizes may be used where ampacity permits. The Engineer shall be notified before connectionof any control circuit which draws in excess of 10 amps, 120 volts.

B. Low voltage control wiring may include standard small gauge solid thermostat wire andcables where applicable.

2.02 ALTERNATE EQUIPMENT

A. This Contractor is responsible for differences in the cost of power and control wiring andmotor controls or switches due to use of equipment other than that upon which the design isbased. Any increase in specified line sizes, breaker or fuse sizes or the use of any equipmentwhose total ampacity exceeds that of the specified equipment by 5percent or more shall bespecifically and separately reported to the Engineer (not in submittal form) before equipmentis released for delivery.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 CONTROL WIRING INSTALLATION

A. Provide control wiring.

B. Wiring shall meet all requirements of NEC, NFPA-90A and the Kentucky Building Code.


A. Coordinate power requirements for all equipment to be installed with Division 26 before wiringbegins. The Contractor is ultimately responsible for providing a properly functioningmechanical system.

B. Any discrepancy in power or control wiring requirements in mechanical or electrical Drawingsor Specifications or between Contract Documents and equipment instructions shall bereported to the Engineer before any work in question is started, or else incorrect work mayhave to be changed at no expense to the Owner.

TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING 230593-1 TOWN BRANCH WWTP THICKENINGFOR HVAC

SECTION 230593 - TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.02 SUMMARY


1. Balancing Air Systems:

a. Constant-volume air systems.

1.03 DEFINITIONS

A. AABC: Associated Air Balance Council.

B. NEBB: National Environmental Balancing Bureau.

C. TAB: Testing, adjusting, and balancing.

D. TABB: Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Bureau.

E. TAB Specialist: An entity engaged to perform TAB Work.


A. Qualification Data: Within 30 days of Contractor's Notice to Proceed, submit documentationthat the TAB contractor and this Project's TAB team members meet the qualificationsspecified in "Quality Assurance" Article.

B. Contract Documents Examination Report: Within 30 days of Contractor's Notice to Proceed,submit the Contract Documents review report as specified in Part 3.

C. Strategies and Procedures Plan: Within 30 days of Contractor's Notice to Proceed, submitTAB strategies and step-by-step procedures as specified in "Preparation" Article.

D. Certified TAB reports.

E. Sample report forms.

F. Instrument calibration reports, to include the following:

1. Instrument type and make.

2. Serial number.

3. Application.

4. Dates of use.

5. Dates of calibration.



A. TAB Contractor Qualifications: Engage a TAB entity certified by AABC or NEBB.

1. TAB Field Supervisor: Employee of the TAB contractor and certified by AABC or NEBB.

2. TAB Technician: Employee of the TAB contractor and who is certified by AABC or NEBBas a TAB technician.

B. TAB Conference: Meet with Architect, Construction Manager, and Commissioning Authorityon approval of the TAB strategies and procedures plan to develop a mutual understanding ofthe details. Require the participation of the TAB field supervisor and technicians. Provideseven days' advance notice of scheduled meeting time and location.

1. Agenda Items:

a. The Contract Documents examination report.

b. The TAB plan.

c. Coordination and cooperation of trades and subcontractors.

d. Coordination of documentation and communication flow.

C. Certify TAB field data reports and perform the following:

1. Review field data reports to validate accuracy of data and to prepare certified TABreports.

2. Certify that the TAB team complied with the approved TAB plan and the proceduresspecified and referenced in this Specification.

D. TAB Report Forms: Use standard TAB contractor's forms approved by Engineer andCommissioning Authority.

E. Instrumentation Type, Quantity, Accuracy, and Calibration: As described in ASHRAE 111,Section 5, "Instrumentation."


A. Partial Owner Occupancy: Owner may occupy completed areas of building before SubstantialCompletion. Cooperate with Owner during TAB operations to minimize conflicts with Owner'soperations.

1.07 COORDINATION

A. Notice: Provide seven days' advance notice for each test. Include scheduled test dates andtimes.

B. Perform TAB after leakage and pressure tests on air and water distribution systems havebeen satisfactorily completed.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Examine the Contract Documents to become familiar with Project requirements and todiscover conditions in systems' designs that may preclude proper TAB of systems andequipment.

B. Examine systems for installed balancing devices, such as test ports, gage cocks,thermometer wells, flow-control devices, balancing valves and fittings, and manual volumedampers. Verify that locations of these balancing devices are accessible.

C. Examine the approved submittals for HVAC systems and equipment.

D. Examine design data including HVAC system descriptions, statements of design assumptionsfor environmental conditions and systems' output, and statements of philosophies andassumptions about HVAC system and equipment controls.

E. Examine equipment performance data including fan curves.

1. Relate performance data to Project conditions and requirements, including system effectsthat can create undesired or unpredicted conditions that cause reduced capacities in allor part of a system.

2. Calculate system-effect factors to reduce performance ratings of HVAC equipment wheninstalled under conditions different from the conditions used to rate equipmentperformance. To calculate system effects for air systems, use tables and charts found inAMCA 201, "Fans and Systems," or in SMACNA's "HVAC Systems - Duct Design."Compare results with the design data and installed conditions.

F. Examine system and equipment installations and verify that field quality-control testing,cleaning, and adjusting specified in individual Sections have been performed.

G. Examine test reports specified in individual system and equipment Sections.

H. Examine HVAC equipment and filters and verify that bearings are greased, belts are alignedand tight, and equipment with functioning controls is ready for operation.

I. Examine heat-transfer devices for correct piping connections and for clean and unobstructedairflow.

J. Examine operating safety interlocks and controls on HVAC equipment.

K. Report deficiencies discovered before and during performance of TAB procedures. Observeand record system reactions to changes in conditions. Record default set points if differentfrom indicated values.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Prepare a TAB plan that includes strategies and step-by-step procedures.

B. Complete system-readiness checks and prepare reports. Verify the following:

1. Permanent electrical-power wiring is complete.


2. Automatic temperature-control systems are operational.

3. Equipment and duct access doors are securely closed.

4. Balance, smoke, and fire dampers are open.

5. Ceilings are installed in critical areas where air-pattern adjustments are required andaccess to balancing devices is provided.

6. Windows and doors can be closed so indicated conditions for system operations can bemet.

3.03 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR TESTING AND BALANCING

A. Perform testing and balancing procedures on each system according to the procedurescontained in NEBB's "Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing ofEnvironmental Systems" and SMACNA's "HVAC Systems - Testing, Adjusting, andBalancing" and in this Section.

B. Cut insulation, ducts, pipes, and equipment cabinets for installation of test probes to theminimum extent necessary for TAB procedures.

1. After testing and balancing, install test ports and duct access doors that comply withrequirements in Section 233300 "Air Duct Accessories."

2. Install and join new insulation that matches removed materials. Restore insulation,coverings, vapor barrier, and finish according to Section 230713 "Duct Insulation,"Section 230716 "HVAC Equipment Insulation," and Section 230719 "HVAC PipingInsulation."

C. Mark equipment and balancing devices, including damper-control positions, valve positionindicators, fan-speed-control levers, and similar controls and devices, with paint or othersuitable, permanent identification material to show final settings.

D. Take and report testing and balancing measurements in inch-pound (IP) units.

3.04 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR BALANCING AIR SYSTEMS

A. Prepare test reports for both fans and outlets. Obtain manufacturer's outlet factors andrecommended testing procedures. Crosscheck the summation of required outlet volumes withrequired fan volumes.

B. Prepare schematic diagrams of systems' "as-built" duct layouts.

C. Determine the best locations in main and branch ducts for accurate duct-airflowmeasurements.

D. Check airflow patterns from the outdoor-air louvers and dampers and the return- andexhaust-air dampers through the supply-fan discharge and mixing dampers.

E. Locate start-stop and disconnect switches, electrical interlocks, and motor starters.

F. Verify that motor starters are equipped with properly sized thermal protection.

G. Check dampers for proper position to achieve desired airflow path.

H. Check for airflow blockages.


I. Check for proper sealing of air-handling-unit components.

J. Verify that air duct system is sealed as specified in Section 233116 "Non-Metal Ducts."

3.05 PROCEDURES FOR CONSTANT-VOLUME AIR SYSTEMS

A. Adjust fans to deliver total indicated airflows within the maximum allowable fan speed listedby fan manufacturer.

1. Measure total airflow.

a. Where sufficient space in ducts is unavailable for Pitot-tube traverse measurements,measure airflow at terminal outlets and inlets and calculate the total airflow.

2. Measure fan static pressures as follows to determine actual static pressure:

a. Measure outlet static pressure as far downstream from the fan as practical andupstream from restrictions in ducts such as elbows and transitions.

b. Measure static pressure directly at the fan outlet or through the flexible connection.

c. Measure inlet static pressure of single-inlet fans in the inlet duct as near the fan aspossible, upstream from the flexible connection, and downstream from ductrestrictions.

d. Measure inlet static pressure of double-inlet fans through the wall of the plenum thathouses the fan.

3. Measure static pressure across each component that makes up an air-handling unit,rooftop unit, and other air-handling and -treating equipment.

a. Report the cleanliness status of filters and the time static pressures are measured.

4. Measure static pressures entering and leaving other devices, such as sound traps, heat-recovery equipment, and air washers, under final balanced conditions.

5. Review Record Documents to determine variations in design static pressures versusactual static pressures. Calculate actual system-effect factors. Recommend adjustmentsto accommodate actual conditions.

6. Obtain approval from Engineer and Commissioning Authority for adjustment of fan speedhigher or lower than indicated speed. Comply with requirements in HVAC Sections forair-handling units for adjustment of fans, belts, and pulley sizes to achieve indicated air-handling-unit performance.

7. Do not make fan-speed adjustments that result in motor overload. Consult equipmentmanufacturers about fan-speed safety factors. Modulate dampers and measure fan-motor amperage to ensure that no overload will occur. Measure amperage in full-cooling,full-heating, economizer, and any other operating mode to determine the maximumrequired brake horsepower.

B. Adjust volume dampers for main duct, submain ducts, and major branch ducts to indicatedairflows within specified tolerances.

1. Measure airflow of submain and branch ducts.


a. Where sufficient space in submain and branch ducts is unavailable for Pitot-tubetraverse measurements, measure airflow at terminal outlets and inlets and calculatethe total airflow for that zone.

2. Measure static pressure at a point downstream from the balancing damper, and adjustvolume dampers until the proper static pressure is achieved.

3. Remeasure each submain and branch duct after all have been adjusted. Continue toadjust submain and branch ducts to indicated airflows within specified tolerances.

C. Measure air outlets and inlets without making adjustments.

1. Measure terminal outlets using a direct-reading hood or outlet manufacturer's writteninstructions and calculating factors.

D. Adjust air outlets and inlets for each space to indicated airflows within specified tolerances ofindicated values. Make adjustments using branch volume dampers rather than extractors andthe dampers at air terminals.

1. Adjust each outlet in same room or space to within specified tolerances of indicatedquantities without generating noise levels above the limitations prescribed by theContract Documents.

2. Adjust patterns of adjustable outlets for proper distribution without drafts.

3.06 PROCEDURES FOR MOTORS

A. Motors, 1/2 HP and Larger: Test at final balanced conditions and record the following data:

1. Manufacturer's name, model number, and serial number.

2. Motor horsepower rating.

3. Motor rpm.

4. Efficiency rating.

5. Nameplate and measured voltage, each phase.

6. Nameplate and measured amperage, each phase.

7. Starter thermal-protection-element rating.

3.07 PROCEDURES FOR HEAT-TRANSFER DEVICES

A. Measure, adjust, and record the following data for each gas-fired heat transfer device:

1. Dry-bulb temperature of entering and leaving air.

2. Wet-bulb temperature of entering and leaving air.

3. Airflow.

4. Air pressure drop.

3.08 PROCEDURES FOR TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING SYSTEMS

A. Perform a preconstruction inspection of existing equipment that is to remain and be reused.


1. Measure and record the operating speed, airflow, and static pressure of each fan.

2. Measure motor voltage and amperage. Compare the values to motor nameplateinformation.

3. Check the refrigerant charge.

4. Check the condition of filters.

5. Check the condition of coils.

6. Check the operation of the drain pan and condensate-drain trap.

7. Check bearings and other lubricated parts for proper lubrication.

8. Report on the operating condition of the equipment and the results of the measurementstaken. Report deficiencies.

B. Before performing testing and balancing of existing systems, inspect existing equipment thatis to remain and be reused to verify that existing equipment has been cleaned andrefurbished. Verify the following:

1. New filters are installed.

2. HX devices are clean and airflow unobstructed.

3. Drain pans are clean.

4. Fans are clean.

5. Bearings and other parts are properly lubricated.

6. Deficiencies noted in the preconstruction report are corrected.

C. Perform testing and balancing of existing systems to the extent that existing systems areaffected by the renovation work.

1. Compare the indicated airflow of the renovated work to the measured fan airflows, anddetermine the new fan speed and the face velocity of filters and coils.

2. Verify that the indicated airflows of the renovated work result in filter and coil facevelocities and fan speeds that are within the acceptable limits defined by equipmentmanufacturer.

3. If calculations increase or decrease the air flow rates and water flow rates by more than 5percent, make equipment adjustments to achieve the calculated rates. If increase ordecrease is 5 percent or less, equipment adjustments are not required.

4. Balance each air outlet.

3.09 TOLERANCES

A. Set HVAC system's air flow rates and water flow rates within the following tolerances:

1. Supply, Return, and Exhaust Fans and Equipment with Fans: Plus or minus 10 percent.

2. Air Outlets and Inlets: Plus or minus 10 percent.


3. Heating-Water Flow Rate: Plus or minus 10 percent.

4. Cooling-Water Flow Rate: Plus or minus 10 percent.

3.10 REPORTING

A. Initial Construction-Phase Report: Based on examination of the Contract Documents asspecified in "Examination" Article, prepare a report on the adequacy of design for systems'balancing devices. Recommend changes and additions to systems' balancing devices tofacilitate proper performance measuring and balancing. Recommend changes and additionsto HVAC systems and general construction to allow access for performance measuring andbalancing devices.

B. Status Reports: Prepare biweekly progress reports to describe completed procedures,procedures in progress, and scheduled procedures. Include a list of deficiencies andproblems found in systems being tested and balanced. Prepare a separate report for eachsystem and each building floor for systems serving multiple floors.

3.11 FINAL REPORT

A. General: Prepare a certified written report; tabulate and divide the report into separatesections for tested systems and balanced systems.

1. Include a certification sheet at the front of the report's binder, signed and sealed by thecertified testing and balancing engineer.

2. Include a list of instruments used for procedures, along with proof of calibration.

B. Final Report Contents: In addition to certified field-report data, include the following:

1. Pump curves.

2. Fan curves.

3. Manufacturers' test data.

4. Field test reports prepared by system and equipment installers.

5. Other information relative to equipment performance; do not include Shop Drawings andproduct data.

C. General Report Data: In addition to form titles and entries, include the following data:

1. Title page.

2. Name and address of the TAB contractor.

3. Project name.

4. Project location.

5. Architect's name and address.

6. Engineer's name and address.

7. Contractor's name and address.

8. Report date.


9. Signature of TAB supervisor who certifies the report.

10. Table of Contents with the total number of pages defined for each section of the report.Number each page in the report.

11. Summary of contents including the following:

a. Indicated versus final performance.

b. Notable characteristics of systems.

c. Description of system operation sequence if it varies from the Contract Documents.

12. Nomenclature sheets for each item of equipment.

13. Data for terminal units, including manufacturer's name, type, size, and fittings.

14. Notes to explain why certain final data in the body of reports vary from indicated values.

15. Test conditions for fans performance forms including the following:

a. Settings for outdoor-, return-, and exhaust-air dampers.

b. Conditions of filters.

c. HX device entering and leaving conditions.

d. Face and bypass damper settings at coils.

e. Fan drive settings including settings and percentage of maximum pitch diameter.

f. Other system operating conditions that affect performance.

D. System Diagrams: Include schematic layouts of air and hydronic distribution systems.Present each system with single-line diagram and include the following:

1. Quantities of outdoor and supply airflows.

2. Duct, outlet, and inlet sizes.

3. Position of balancing devices.

E. Heating and Ventilating Unit Test Reports: Include the following:

1. Unit Data:

a. Unit identification.

b. Location.

c. Make and type.

d. Model number and unit size.

e. Manufacturer's serial number.

f. Unit arrangement and class.


g. Discharge arrangement.

h. Sheave make, size in inches (mm), and bore.

i. Center-to-center dimensions of sheave, and amount of adjustments in inches (mm).

j. Number, make, and size of belts.

k. Number, type, and size of filters.

2. Motor Data:

a. Motor make, and frame type and size.

b. Horsepower and rpm.

c. Volts, phase, and hertz.

d. Full-load amperage and service factor.

e. Sheave make, size in inches (mm), and bore.

f. Center-to-center dimensions of sheave, and amount of adjustments in inches (mm).

3. Test Data (Indicated and Actual Values):

a. Total air flow rate in cfm (L/s).

b. Total system static pressure in inches wg (Pa).

c. Fan rpm.

d. Discharge static pressure in inches wg (Pa).

e. Filter static-pressure differential in inches wg (Pa).

f. Outdoor airflow in cfm (L/s).

g. Outdoor-air damper position.

F. Gas-Fired Heat Apparatus (Heating and Ventilating Unit’s Natural Gas-Fired Furnaces) TestReports: In addition to manufacturer's factory startup equipment reports, include thefollowing:

1. Unit Data:

a. System identification.

b. Location.

c. Make and type.

d. Model number and unit size.


f. Fuel type in input data.


g. Output capacity in Btu/h (kW).

h. Ignition type.

i. Burner-control types.

j. Motor horsepower and rpm.

k. Motor volts, phase, and hertz.

l. Motor full-load amperage and service factor.


a. Entering-air temperature in deg F (deg C).

b. Leaving-air temperature in deg F (deg C).

c. Low-fire fuel input in Btu/h (kW).

d. High-fire fuel input in Btu/h (kW).

e. Manifold pressure in psig (kPa).

f. High-temperature-limit setting in deg F (deg C).

g. Operating set point in Btu/h (kW).

h. Motor voltage at each connection.

i. Motor amperage for each phase.

j. Heating value of fuel in Btu/h (kW).

G. Fan Test Reports: For supply and exhaust fans, include the following:

1. Fan Data:

a. System identification.

b. Location.

c. Make and type.

d. Model number and size.


f. Arrangement and class.

g. Sheave make, size in inches (mm), and bore.

h. Center-to-center dimensions of sheave, and amount of adjustments in inches (mm).

2. Motor Data:

a. Motor make, and frame type and size.


b. Horsepower and rpm.

c. Volts, phase, and hertz.

d. Full-load amperage and service factor.

e. Sheave make, size in inches (mm), and bore.

f. Center-to-center dimensions of sheave, and amount of adjustments in inches (mm).

g. Number, make, and size of belts.


a. Total airflow rate in cfm (L/s).

b. Total system static pressure in inches wg (Pa).

c. Fan rpm.

d. Discharge static pressure in inches wg (Pa).

e. Suction static pressure in inches wg (Pa).

H. Round, Flat-Oval, and Rectangular Duct Traverse Reports: Include a diagram with a gridrepresenting the duct cross-section and record the following:

1. Report Data:

a. System and air-handling-unit number.

b. Location and zone.

c. Traverse air temperature in deg F (deg C).

d. Duct static pressure in inches wg (Pa).

e. Duct size in inches (mm).

f. Duct area in sq. ft. (sq. m).

g. Indicated air flow rate in cfm (L/s).

h. Indicated velocity in fpm (m/s).

i. Actual air flow rate in cfm (L/s).

j. Actual average velocity in fpm (m/s).

k. Barometric pressure in psig (Pa).

I. Instrument Calibration Reports:

1. Report Data:

a. Instrument type and make.

b. Serial number.


c. Application.

d. Dates of use.

e. Dates of calibration.

3.12 INSPECTIONS

A. Initial Inspection:

1. After testing and balancing are complete, operate each system and randomly checkmeasurements to verify that the system is operating according to the final test andbalance readings documented in the final report.

2. Check the following for each system:

a. Measure airflow of all air outlets.

b. Measure room temperature at each thermostat/temperature sensor. Compare thereading to the set point.

c. Verify that balancing devices are marked with final balance position.

d. Note deviations from the Contract Documents in the final report.

B. Final Inspection:

1. After initial inspection is complete and documentation by random checks verifies thattesting and balancing are complete and accurately documented in the final report,request that a final inspection be made by Engineer and Commissioning Authority.

2. The TAB contractor's test and balance engineer shall conduct the inspection in thepresence of Engineer and Commissioning Authority.

3. Engineer and Commissioning Authority shall randomly select measurements,documented in the final report, to be rechecked. Rechecking shall be limited to either 10percent of the total measurements recorded or the extent of measurements that can beaccomplished in a normal 8-hour business day.

4. If rechecks yield measurements that differ from the measurements documented in thefinal report by more than the tolerances allowed, the measurements shall be noted as"FAILED."

5. If the number of "FAILED" measurements is greater than 10 percent of the totalmeasurements checked during the final inspection, the testing and balancing shall beconsidered incomplete and shall be rejected.

C. TAB Work will be considered defective if it does not pass final inspections. If TAB Work fails,proceed as follows:

1. Recheck all measurements and make adjustments. Revise the final report and balancingdevice settings to include all changes; resubmit the final report and request a second finalinspection.

2. If the second final inspection also fails, Owner may contract the services of another TABcontractor to complete TAB Work according to the Contract Documents and deduct thecost of the services from the original TAB contractor's final payment.


D. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.13 ADDITIONAL TESTS

A. Within 90 days of completing TAB, perform additional TAB to verify that balanced conditionsare being maintained throughout and to correct unusual conditions.

B. Seasonal Periods: If initial TAB procedures were not performed during near-peak summerand winter conditions, perform additional TAB during near-peak summer and winterconditions.


FACILITY NATURAL-GAS PIPING 231123-1 TOWN BRANCH WWTP THICKENING

SECTION 231123 - FACILITY NATURAL-GAS PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.02 SUMMARY


1. Pipes, tubes, and fittings.

2. Piping specialties.

3. Piping and tubing joining materials.

4. Valves.

5. Pressure regulators.

1.03 DEFINITIONS

A. Finished Spaces: Spaces other than mechanical and electrical equipment rooms, furredspaces, pipe and duct shafts, unheated spaces immediately below roof, spaces aboveceilings, unexcavated spaces, crawlspaces, and tunnels.

B. Exposed, Interior Installations: Exposed to view indoors. Examples include finished occupiedspaces and mechanical equipment rooms.

C. Exposed, Exterior Installations: Exposed to view outdoors or subject to outdoor ambienttemperatures and weather conditions. Examples include rooftop locations.


A. Minimum Operating-Pressure Ratings:

1. Piping and Valves: 100 psig (690 kPa) minimum unless otherwise indicated.

2. Service Regulators: 65 psig (450 kPa) minimum unless otherwise indicated.

B. Natural-Gas System Pressure within Buildings: 0.7 psig (4.83 kPa) or less.

C. Delegated Design: Design restraints and anchors for natural-gas piping and equipment,including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, usingperformance requirements and design criteria indicated.


A. Product Data: For each type of the following:

1. Piping specialties.

2. Corrugated, stainless-steel tubing with associated components.


3. Valves. Include pressure rating, capacity, settings, and electrical connection data ofselected models.

4. Pressure regulators. Indicate pressure ratings and capacities.

5. Dielectric fittings.

B. Shop Drawings: For facility natural-gas piping layout. Include plans, piping layout andelevations, sections, and details for fabrication of pipe anchors, hangers, supports for multiplepipes, alignment guides, expansion joints and loops, and attachments of the same to buildingstructure. Detail location of anchors, alignment guides, and expansion joints and loops.

1. Shop Drawing Scale: 1/4 inch per foot (1:50).

2. Detail mounting, supports, and valve arrangements for pressure regulator assembly.

C. Delegated-Design Submittal: For natural-gas piping and equipment indicated to comply withperformance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed bythe qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.

1. Detail fabrication and assembly of seismic restraints.

2. Design Calculations: Calculate requirements for selecting seismic restraints.


A. Coordination Drawings: Plans and details, drawn to scale, on which natural-gas piping isshown and coordinated with other installations, using input from installers of the itemsinvolved.

B. Site Survey: Plans, drawn to scale, on which natural-gas piping is shown and coordinatedwith other services and utilities.

C. Qualification Data: For qualified professional engineer.

D. Welding certificates.

E. Field quality-control reports.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For motorized gas valves and pressure regulators toinclude in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.


A. Steel Support Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according toAWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."

B. Pipe Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and operators according to ASME Boiler andPressure Vessel Code.

C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.



A. Handling Flammable Liquids: Remove and dispose of liquids from existing natural-gas pipingaccording to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Deliver pipes and tubes with factory-applied end caps. Maintain end caps through shipping,storage, and handling to prevent pipe end damage and to prevent entrance of dirt, debris,and moisture.

C. Store and handle pipes and tubes having factory-applied protective coatings to avoiddamaging coating, and protect from direct sunlight.

D. Protect stored PE pipes and valves from direct sunlight.


A. Perform site survey, research public utility records, and verify existing utility locations.Contact utility-locating service for area where Project is located.

1.11 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided.

B. Coordinate requirements for access panels and doors for valves installed concealed behindfinished surfaces. Comply with requirements in Section 083113 "Access Doors and Frames."

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 PIPES, TUBES, AND FITTINGS

A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, black steel, Schedule 40, Type E or S, Grade B.

1. Malleable-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.3, Class 150, standard pattern.

2. Wrought-Steel Welding Fittings: ASTM A 234/A 234M for butt welding and socketwelding.

3. Unions: ASME B16.39, Class 150, malleable iron with brass-to-iron seat, ground joint,and threaded ends.

4. Forged-Steel Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.5, minimum Class 150, includingbolts, nuts, and gaskets of the following material group, end connections, and facings:

a. Material Group: 1.1.

b. End Connections: Threaded or butt welding to match pipe.

c. Lapped Face: Not permitted underground.

d. Gasket Materials: ASME B16.20, metallic, flat, asbestos free, aluminum o-rings, andspiral-wound metal gaskets.

e. Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel aboveground and stainless steelunderground.

5. Protective Coating for Underground Piping: Factory-applied, three-layer coating of epoxy,adhesive, and PE.


a. Joint Cover Kits: Epoxy paint, adhesive, and heat-shrink PE sleeves.

6. Mechanical Couplings:

a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturersoffering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limitedto the following:

1) Dresser Piping Specialties.

2) Smith-Blair, Inc.

3) Victaulic Company.

b. Stainless-steel flanges and tube with epoxy finish.

c. Buna-nitrile seals.

d. Stainless-steel bolts, washers, and nuts.

e. Coupling shall be capable of joining PE pipe to PE pipe, steel pipe to PE pipe, orsteel pipe to steel pipe.

f. Steel body couplings installed underground on plastic pipe shall be factory equippedwith anode.

B. Corrugated, Stainless-Steel Tubing: Comply with ANSI/IAS LC 1.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturersoffering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited tothe following:

a. OmegaFlex, Inc.

b. Parker Hannifin Corporation.

c. Titeflex.

d. Tru-Flex Metal Hose Corp.

2. Tubing: ASTM A 240/A 240M, corrugated, Series 300 stainless steel.

3. Coating: PE with flame retardant.

a. Surface-Burning Characteristics: As determined by testing identical productsaccording to ASTM E 84 by a qualified testing agency. Identify products withappropriate markings of applicable testing agency.

1) Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less.

2) Smoke-Developed Index: 50 or less.

4. Fittings: Copper-alloy mechanical fittings with ends made to fit and listed for use withcorrugated stainless-steel tubing and capable of metal-to-metal seal without gaskets.Include brazing socket or threaded ends complying with ASME B1.20.1.

5. Striker Plates: Steel, designed to protect tubing from penetrations.


6. Manifolds: Malleable iron or steel with factory-applied protective coating. Threadedconnections shall comply with ASME B1.20.1 for pipe inlet and corrugated tubing outlets.

7. Operating-Pressure Rating: 5 psig (34.5 kPa).

C. PE Pipe: ASTM D 2513, SDR 11.

1. PE Fittings: ASTM D 2683, socket-fusion type or ASTM D 3261, butt-fusion type withdimensions matching PE pipe.

2. PE Transition Fittings: factory-fabricated fittings with PE pipe complying with ASTM D2513, SDR 11; and steel pipe complying with ASTM A 53/a 53m, BLACK STEEL,Schedule 40, Type E or S, Grade B.

3. Anodeless Service-Line Risers: Factory fabricated and leak tested.

a. Underground Portion: PE pipe complying with ASTM D 2513, SDR 11 inlet.

b. Casing: Steel pipe complying with ASTM A 53/a 53m, Schedule 40, black steel,Type E or S, Grade B, with corrosion-protective coating covering. Vent casingaboveground.

c. Aboveground Portion: PE transition fitting.

d. Outlet shall be threaded or flanged or suitable for welded connection.

e. Tracer wire connection

f. Ultraviolet shield.

g. Stake supports with factory finish to match steel pipe casing or carrier pipe.

4. Transition Service-Line Risers: Factory fabricated and leak tested.

a. Underground Portion: PE pope complying with ASTM D 2513, SDR 11 inletconnected to steel pipe complying with ASTM A 53/A 53M, Schedule 40, Type E orS, Grade B, with corrosion-protective coating for aboveground outlet.

b. Outlet shall be threaded or flanged or suitable for welded connection.

c. Bridging sleeve over mechanical coupling.

d. Factory-connected anode.

e. Tracer wire connection.

f. Ultraviolet shield.

g. Stake supports with factory finish to match steel pope casing or carrier pope.

5. Steel Mechanical Couplings: Capable of joining plain-end PE pipe to PE pipe, steel pipeto PE pipe, or steel pipe to steel pipe.

a. Stainless-steel flanges and tube with epoxy finish.

b. Buna-nitrile seals.

c. Stainless-steel bolts, washers, and nuts.


d. Factory-installed anode for steel-body couplings installed underground.

2.02 PIPING SPECIALTIES

A. Appliance Flexible Connectors:

1. Indoor, Fixed-Appliance Flexible Connectors: Comply with ANSI Z21.24.

2. Indoor, Movable-Appliance Flexible Connectors: Comply with ANSI Z21.69.

3. Outdoor, Appliance Flexible Connectors: Comply with ANSI Z21.75.

4. Corrugated stainless-steel tubing with polymer coating.

5. Operating-Pressure Rating: 0.5 psig (3.45 kPa).

6. End Fittings: Zinc-coated steel.

7. Threaded Ends: Comply with ASME B1.20.1.

8. Maximum Length: 36 inches (915 mm.)

B. Y-Pattern Strainers:

1. Body: ASTM A 126, Class B, cast iron with bolted cover and bottom drain connection.

2. End Connections: Threaded ends for NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller; flanged ends forNPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger.

3. Strainer Screen: 40-mesh startup strainer, and perforated stainless-steel basket with 50percent free area.

4. CWP Rating: 125 psig (862 kPa).

C. Weatherproof Vent Cap: Cast- or malleable-iron increaser fitting with corrosion-resistant wirescreen, with free area at least equal to cross-sectional area of connecting pipe and threaded-end connection.

2.03 JOINING MATERIALS

A. Joint Compound and Tape: Suitable for natural gas.

B. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12/D10.12M for welding materials appropriatefor wall thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded.

C. Brazing Filler Metals: Alloy with melting point greater than 1000 deg F (540 deg C) complyingwith AWS A5.8/A5.8M. Brazing alloys containing more than 0.05 percent phosphorus areprohibited.

2.04 MANUAL GAS SHUTOFF VALVES

A. General Requirements for Metallic Valves, NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Comply withASME B16.33.


2. Threaded Ends: Comply with ASME B1.20.1.


3. Dryseal Threads on Flare Ends: Comply with ASME B1.20.3.

4. Tamperproof Feature: Locking feature for valves indicated in "Underground Manual GasShutoff Valve Schedule" and "Aboveground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule"Articles.

5. Listing: Listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction forvalves 1 inch (25 mm) and smaller.

6. Service Mark: Valves 1-1/4 inches (32 mm) to NPS 2 (DN 50) shall have initials "WOG"permanently marked on valve body.

B. One-Piece, Bronze Ball Valve with Bronze Trim: MSS SP-110.


a. A.Y. McDonald Mfg. Co.

b. BrassCraft Manufacturing Co.; a Masco company.

c. Conbraco Industries, Inc.

d. Lyall, R. W. & Company, Inc.

e. Perfection Corporation.

2. Body: Bronze, complying with ASTM B 584.

3. Ball: Chrome-plated brass.

4. Stem: Bronze; blowout proof.

5. Seats: Reinforced TFE; blowout proof.

6. Packing: Separate packnut with adjustable-stem packing threaded ends.

7. Ends: Threaded, flared, or socket as indicated in "Underground Manual Gas ShutoffValve Schedule" and "Aboveground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" Articles.


9. Listing: Valves NPS 1 (DN 25) and smaller shall be listed and labeled by an NRTLacceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

10. Service: Suitable for natural-gas service with "WOG" indicated on valve body.

C. Bronze Plug Valves: MSS SP-78.



b. Lee Brass Company.


2. Body: Bronze, complying with ASTM B 584.

3. Plug: Bronze.

4. Ends: Threaded, socket, or flanged as indicated in "Underground Manual Gas ShutoffValve Schedule" and "Aboveground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" Articles.

5. Operator: Square head or lug type with tamperproof feature where indicated.

6. Pressure Class: 125 psig (862 kPa).

7. Listing: Valves NPS 1 (DN 25) and smaller shall be listed and labeled by an NRTLacceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

8. Service: Suitable for natural-gas service with "WOG" indicated on valve body.

D. Valve Boxes:

1. Cast-iron, two-section box.

2. Top section with cover with "GAS" lettering.

3. Bottom section with base to fit over valve and barrel a minimum of 5 inches (125 mm) indiameter.

4. Adjustable cast-iron extensions of length required for depth of bury.

5. Include tee-handle, steel operating wrench with socket end fitting valve nut or flat head,and with stem of length required to operate valve.

2.05 PRESSURE REGULATORS

A. General Requirements:

1. Single stage and suitable for natural gas.

2. Steel jacket and corrosion-resistant components.

3. Elevation compensator.

4. End Connections: Threaded for regulators NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller; flanged forregulators NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger.

B. Line Pressure Regulators: Comply with ANSI Z21.80.


a. Actaris.

b. American Meter Company.

c. Eclipse Innovative Thermal Technologies.

d. Fisher Control Valves & Instruments; a brand of Emerson Process Management.

e. Invensys.


f. Itron Gas.

g. Maxitrol Company.

h. Richards Industries.

2. Body and Diaphragm Case: Cast iron or die-cast aluminum.

3. Springs: Zinc-plated steel; interchangeable.

4. Diaphragm Plate: Zinc-plated steel.

5. Seat Disc: Nitrile rubber resistant to gas impurities, abrasion, and deformation at thevalve port.

6. Orifice: Aluminum; interchangeable.

7. Seal Plug: Ultraviolet-stabilized, mineral-filled nylon.

8. Single-port, self-contained regulator with orifice no larger than required at maximumpressure inlet, and no pressure sensing piping external to the regulator.

9. Pressure regulator shall maintain discharge pressure setting downstream, and notexceed 150 percent of design discharge pressure at shutoff.

10. Overpressure Protection Device: Factory mounted on pressure regulator.

11. Atmospheric Vent: Factory- or field-installed, stainless-steel screen in opening if notconnected to vent piping.

12. Maximum Inlet Pressure: 2 psig (13.8 kPa).

C. Appliance Pressure Regulators: Comply with ANSI Z21.18.


a. Canadian Meter Company Inc.

b. Eaton Corporation.

c. Harper Wyman Co.

d. Maxitrol Company.

e. SCP, Inc.

2. Body and Diaphragm Case: Die-cast aluminum.

3. Springs: Zinc-plated steel; interchangeable.

4. Diaphragm Plate: Zinc-plated steel.

5. Seat Disc: Nitrile rubber.

6. Seal Plug: Ultraviolet-stabilized, mineral-filled nylon.


7. Factory-Applied Finish: Minimum three-layer polyester and polyurethane paint finish.

8. Regulator may include vent limiting device, instead of vent connection, if approved byauthorities having jurisdiction.

9. Maximum Inlet Pressure: 1 psig (6.9 kPa).

2.06 DIELECTRIC FITTINGS

A. General Requirements: Assembly of copper alloy and ferrous materials with separatingnonconductive insulating material. Include end connections compatible with pipes to bejoined.

B. Dielectric Unions:



b. Capitol Manufacturing Company.

c. Central Plastics Company.

d. HART Industrial Unions, LLC.

e. Jomar Valve.

f. Matco-Norca.

g. Watts; a Watts Water Technologies company.

h. Wilkins.

i. Zurn Industries, LLC.

2. Description:

a. Standard: ASSE 1079.

b. Pressure Rating: 125 psig (860 kPa) minimum at 180 deg F (82 deg C).

c. End Connections: Solder-joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous.

C. Dielectric Flanges:


a. Capitol Manufacturing Company.

b. Central Plastics Company.

c. Matco-Norca.

d. Watts; a Watts Water Technologies company.


e. Wilkins.

2. Description:

a. Standard: ASSE 1079.

b. Factory-fabricated, bolted, companion-flange assembly.

c. Pressure Rating: 125 psig (860 kPa) minimum at 180 deg F (82 deg C).

d. End Connections: Solder-joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous; threaded solder-joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous.

D. Dielectric-Flange Insulating Kits:


a. Advance Products & Systems, Inc.

b. Calpico, Inc.

c. Central Plastics Company.

d. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc.

2. Description:

a. Nonconducting materials for field assembly of companion flanges.

b. Pressure Rating: 150 psig (1035 kPa).

c. Gasket: Neoprene or phenolic.

d. Bolt Sleeves: Phenolic or polyethylene.

e. Washers: Phenolic with steel backing washers.

2.07 LABELING AND IDENTIFYING

A. Detectable Warning Tape: Acid- and alkali-resistant, PE film warning tape manufactured formarking and identifying underground utilities, a minimum of 6 inches (150 mm) wide and 4mils (0.1 mm) thick, continuously inscribed with a description of utility, with metallic coreencased in a protective jacket for corrosion protection, detectable by metal detector whentape is buried up to 30 inches (750 mm) deep; colored yellow.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Examine roughing-in for natural-gas piping system to verify actual locations of pipingconnections before equipment installation.



3.02 PREPARATION

A. Close equipment shutoff valves before turning off natural gas to premises or piping section.

B. Inspect natural-gas piping according to NFPA 54 to determine that natural-gas utilizationdevices are turned off in piping section affected.

C. Comply with NFPA 54 requirements for prevention of accidental ignition.

3.03 OUTDOOR PIPING INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NFPA 54 for installation and purging of natural-gas piping.

B. Steel Piping with Protective Coating:

1. Apply joint cover kits to pipe after joining to cover, seal, and protect joints.

2. Repair damage to PE coating on pipe as recommended in writing by protective coatingmanufacturer.

3. Replace pipe having damaged PE coating with new pipe.

C. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.

D. Install pressure gage downstream from each service regulator. Pressure gages are specifiedin Section 230519 "Meters and Gages for HVAC Piping."

3.04 INDOOR PIPING INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NFPA 54 for installation and purging of natural-gas piping.

B. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement ofpiping systems. Indicated locations and arrangements are used to size pipe and calculatefriction loss, expansion, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unlessdeviations to layout are approved on Coordination Drawings.

C. Arrange for pipe spaces, chases, slots, sleeves, and openings in building structure duringprogress of construction, to allow for mechanical installations.

D. Install piping in concealed locations unless otherwise indicated and except in equipmentrooms and service areas.

E. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas atright angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specificallyindicated otherwise.

F. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal.

G. Locate valves for easy access.

H. Install natural-gas piping at uniform grade of 2 percent down toward drip and sediment traps.

I. Install piping free of sags and bends.

J. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.

K. Verify final equipment locations for roughing-in.


L. Comply with requirements in Sections specifying gas-fired appliances and equipment forroughing-in requirements.

M. Drips and Sediment Traps: Install drips at points where condensate may collect, includingservice-meter outlets. Locate where accessible to permit cleaning and emptying. Do notinstall where condensate is subject to freezing.

1. Construct drips and sediment traps using tee fitting with bottom outlet plugged or capped.Use nipple a minimum length of 3 pipe diameters, but not less than 3 inches (75 mm)long and same size as connected pipe. Install with space below bottom of drip to removeplug or cap.

N. Extend relief vent connections for service regulators, line regulators, and overpressureprotection devices to outdoors and terminate with weatherproof vent cap.

O. Conceal pipe installations in walls, pipe spaces, utility spaces, above ceilings, below grade orfloors, and in floor channels unless indicated to be exposed to view.

P. Concealed Location Installations: Except as specified below, install concealed natural-gaspiping and piping installed under the building in containment conduit constructed of steel pipewith welded joints as described in Part 2. Install a vent pipe from containment conduit tooutdoors and terminate with weatherproof vent cap.

1. Above Accessible Ceilings: Natural-gas piping, fittings, valves, and regulators may beinstalled in accessible spaces without containment conduit.

2. In Floors: Install natural-gas piping with welded or brazed joints and protective coating incast-in-place concrete floors. Cover piping to be cast in concrete slabs with minimum of1-1/2 inches (38 mm) of concrete. Piping may not be in physical contact with othermetallic structures such as reinforcing rods or electrically neutral conductors. Do notembed piping in concrete slabs containing quick-set additives or cinder aggregate.

3. In Floor Channels: Install natural-gas piping in floor channels. Channels must have coverand be open to space above cover for ventilation.

4. In Walls or Partitions: Protect tubing installed inside partitions or hollow walls fromphysical damage using steel striker barriers at rigid supports.

a. Exception: Tubing passing through partitions or walls does not require strikerbarriers.

5. Prohibited Locations:

a. Do not install natural-gas piping in or through circulating air ducts, clothes or trashchutes, chimneys or gas vents (flues), ventilating ducts, or dumbwaiter or elevatorshafts.

b. Do not install natural-gas piping in solid walls or partitions.

Q. Use eccentric reducer fittings to make reductions in pipe sizes. Install fittings with level sidedown.

R. Connect branch piping from top or side of horizontal piping.

S. Install unions in pipes NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller, adjacent to each valve, at final connectionto each piece of equipment. Unions are not required at flanged connections.

T. Do not use natural-gas piping as grounding electrode.


U. Install strainer on inlet of each line-pressure regulator and automatic or electrically operatedvalve.

3.05 VALVE INSTALLATION

A. Install manual gas shutoff valve for each gas appliance ahead of corrugated stainless-steeltubing, or copper connector.

B. Install underground valves with valve boxes.

C. Install regulators and overpressure protection devices with maintenance access spaceadequate for servicing and testing.

D. Install earthquake valves aboveground outside buildings according to listing.

3.06 PIPING JOINT CONSTRUCTION

A. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs.

B. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings beforeassembly.

C. Threaded Joints:

1. Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads complying with ASME B1.20.1.

2. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies.

3. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full inside diameter of pipe.

4. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless drysealthreading is specified.

5. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded ordamaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds.

D. Welded Joints:

1. Construct joints according to AWS D10.12/D10.12M, using qualified processes andwelding operators.

2. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.

3. Patch factory-applied protective coating as recommended by manufacturer at field weldsand where damage to coating occurs during construction.

E. Flanged Joints: Install gasket material, size, type, and thickness appropriate for natural-gasservice. Install gasket concentrically positioned.

F. Flared Joints: Cut tubing with roll cutting tool. Flare tube end with tool to result in flaredimensions complying with SAE J513. Tighten finger tight, then use wrench. Do notovertighten.

3.07 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION

A. Install seismic restraints on piping. Comply with requirements for seismic-restraint devicesspecified in Section 230548 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC."


B. Comply with requirements for pipe hangers and supports specified in Section 230529"Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment."

C. Install hangers for horizontal steel piping with the following maximum spacing and minimumrod sizes:

1. NPS 1 (DN 25) and Smaller: Maximum span, 96 inches (2438 mm); minimum rod size,3/8 inch (10 mm).

2. NPS 1-1/4 (DN 32): Maximum span, 108 inches (2743 mm); minimum rod size, 3/8 inch(10 mm).

3. NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2 (DN 40 and DN 50): Maximum span, 108 inches (2743 mm);minimum rod size, 3/8 inch (10 mm).

4. NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 3-1/2 (DN 65 to DN 90): Maximum span, 10 feet (3 m); minimum rodsize, 1/2 inch (13 mm).

5. NPS 4 (DN 100) and Larger: Maximum span, 10 feet (3 m); minimum rod size, 5/8 inch(15.8 mm).

D. Corrugated stainless-steel tubing for final appliance/equipment connection only. Maximumlength is 36 inches (915 mm).

3.08 CONNECTIONS

A. Connect to utility's gas main according to utility's procedures and requirements.

B. Install natural-gas piping electrically continuous, and bonded to gas appliance equipmentgrounding conductor of the circuit powering the appliance according to NFPA 70.

C. Install piping adjacent to appliances to allow service and maintenance of appliances.

D. Connect piping to appliances using manual gas shutoff valves and unions. Install valve within72 inches (1800 mm) of each gas-fired appliance and equipment. Install union between valveand appliances or equipment.

E. Sediment Traps: Install tee fitting with capped nipple in bottom to form drip, as close aspractical to inlet of each appliance.

3.09 LABELING AND IDENTIFYING

A. Comply with requirements in Section 230553 "Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment"for piping and valve identification.

B. Install detectable warning tape directly above gas piping, 12 inches (300 mm) below finishedgrade, except 6 inches (150 mm) below subgrade under pavements and slabs.

3.10 PAINTING

A. Comply with requirements in Section 099113 "Exterior Painting" and Section 099123 "InteriorPainting" for painting interior and exterior natural-gas piping.

B. Paint exposed, exterior metal piping, valves, service regulators, service meters and meterbars, earthquake valves, and piping specialties, except components, with factory-appliedpaint or protective coating.

1. Alkyd System: MPI EXT 5.1D.


a. Prime Coat: Alkyd anticorrosive metal primer.

b. Intermediate Coat: Exterior alkyd enamel matching topcoat.

c. Topcoat: Exterior alkyd enamel (flat).

d. Color: Gray.

C. Paint exposed, interior metal piping, valves, service regulators, service meters and meterbars, earthquake valves, and piping specialties, except components, with factory-appliedpaint or protective coating.

1. Latex Over Alkyd Primer System: MPI INT 5.1Q.


b. Intermediate Coat: Interior latex matching topcoat.

c. Topcoat: Interior latex (flat).

d. Color: Gray.

2. Alkyd System: MPI INT 5.1E.


b. Intermediate Coat: Interior alkyd matching topcoat.

c. Topcoat: Interior alkyd (flat).

d. Color: Gray.

D. Damage and Touchup: Repair marred and damaged factory-applied finishes with materialsand by procedures to match original factory finish.


A. Perform tests and inspections.

B. Tests and Inspections:

1. Test, inspect, and purge natural gas according to NFPA 54 and authorities havingjurisdiction.

C. Natural-gas piping will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.


3.12 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnelto adjust, operate, and maintain earthquake valves.

3.13 OUTDOOR PIPING SCHEDULE

A. Aboveground natural-gas pipingshall be one of the following:

1. Steel pipe with malleable-iron fittings and threaded joints.


2. Steel pipe with wrought-steel fittings and welded joints.

B. Containment Conduit: Steel pipe with wrought-steel fittings and welded joints. Coat pipe andfittings with protective coating for steel piping.

3.14 INDOOR PIPING SCHEDULE FOR SYSTEM PRESSURES MORE THAN 0.5 PSIG (3.45 kPa)AND LESS THAN 5 PSIG (34.5 kPa)

A. Aboveground, branch piping NPS 1 (DN 25) and smaller shall be the following:


B. Aboveground, distribution piping shall be one of the following:


2. Steel pipe with steel welding fittings and welded joints.

C. Containment Conduit: Steel pipe with wrought-steel fittings and welded joints. Coatunderground pipe and fittings with protective coating for steel piping.

D. Containment Conduit Vent Piping: Steel pipe with malleable-iron fittings and threaded orwrought-steel fittings with welded joints. Coat underground pipe and fittings with protectivecoating for steel piping.

3.15 ABOVEGROUND MANUAL GAS SHUTOFF VALVE SCHEDULE

A. Valves for pipe sizes NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller at service meter shall be one of thefollowing:

1. One-piece, bronze ball valve with bronze trim.

2. Bronze plug valve.

B. Distribution piping valves for pipe sizes NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller shall be one of thefollowing:



C. Valves in branch piping for single appliance shall be one of the following:




NON METAL DUCTS 233116-1 TOWN BRANCH WWTP THICKENING

SECTION 233116 - NONMETAL DUCTS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Thermoset FRP ducts and fittings.

B. Related Sections:

1. Section 230593 "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC" for testing, adjusting, andbalancing requirements for nonmetal ducts.

2. Section 233113 "Metal Ducts" for single- and double-wall, rectangular and round ducts.3. Section 233300 "Air Duct Accessories" for dampers, duct-mounting access doors and

panels, turning vanes, and flexible ducts.


A. Delegated Duct Design: Duct construction, including duct closure, reinforcements, and hangersand supports, shall comply with SMACNA's "Fibrous Glass Duct Construction Standards" andperformance requirements and design criteria indicated.

1. Static-Pressure Classes:

a. Supply Ducts: 2-inch wg (500 Pa).

B. Structural Performance: Duct hangers and supports and seismic restraints shall withstand theeffects of gravity and seismic loads and stresses within limits and under conditions to complywith ASCE/SEI 7.

C. Airstream Surfaces: Surfaces in contact with the airstream shall comply with requirements inASHRAE 62.1.


A. Product Data: For each type of the following products:

1. Thermoset FRP duct materials.

B. Shop Drawings:


1. Fabrication, assembly, and installation, including plans, elevations, sections,components, and attachments to other work.

2. Duct layout indicating sizes and pressure classes.3. Elevation of top of ducts.4. Dimensions of main duct runs from building grid lines.5. Fittings.6. Reinforcement and spacing.7. Seam and joint construction.8. Penetrations through fire-rated and other partitions.9. Equipment installation based on equipment being used on Project.10. Hangers and supports, including methods for duct and building attachment, seismic

restraints, and vibration isolation.

C. Delegated-Design Submittal:

1. Duct materials and thicknesses.2. Joint and seam construction and sealing.3. Reinforcement details and spacing.4. Design Calculations: Calculations, including analysis data signed and sealed by the

qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation for selecting hangers andsupports and seismic restraints.


A. Coordination Drawings: Plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown andcoordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved:

1. Duct installation in congested spaces, indicating coordination with general construction,building components, and other building services. Indicate proposed changes to ductlayout.

2. Structural members to which duct will be attached.3. Penetrations of smoke barriers and fire-rated construction.4. Items penetrating finished roof/ceiling including the following:

a. Lighting fixtures.b. Air outlets and inlets.c. Sprinklers.d. Access panels.

B. Welding certificates.

C. Field quality-control reports.


A. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M,"Structural Welding Code - Steel," for hangers and supports.

B. ASHRAE Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1, Section 5 - "Systems andEquipment" and Section 7 - "Construction and System Start-up."

C. ASHRAE/IESNA Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1, Section 6.4.4 -"HVAC System Construction and Insulation."


D. NFPA Compliance:

1. NFPA 90A, "Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems."2. NFPA 90B, "Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems."

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 THERMOSET FRP DUCTS AND FITTINGS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offeringproducts that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following:

1. Industrial Fiberlass Specialties.2. McGill AirFlow LLC.3. Perry Fiberglass Products, Inc.4. Spunstrand Inc.

B. Duct and Fittings:

1. Thermoset FRP Resin: Manufacture duct with resin that complies with UL 181, Class 1,maximum flame-spread index of 25 and maximum smoke-developed index of 50 whentested by an NRTL according to ASTM E 84.

2. Inner Liner: FSK liner rated by an NRTL to comply with UL 181, Class 1.3. Round Duct: ASTM D 2996, Type I, Grade 2, Class E, filament-wound duct, minimum

0.125-inch (3.2-mm) wall thickness, with tapered bell and spigot ends for adhesive joints,or plain ends with couplings.

4. Round Fittings: Compression or spray-up/contact, molded of same material, pressureclass, and joining method as duct.

5. Rectangular Fittings: Minimum 0.125-inch- (3.2-mm-) thick flat sheet with fiberglassroving and resin-reinforced joints and seams.

6. Double-Wall Insulated Duct: Inner and outer duct complying with requirements for "RoundDuct" description above. Polyurethane foam or isocyanurate insulation with maximumthermal conductivity of 0.14 Btu x in./h x sq. ft. x deg F (0.020 W/m x K) at 75 deg F (24deg C) mean temperature.

C. Joining Materials: Roving and polyester resin.

1. Fiberglass adhesive shall have a VOC content of 80 g/L or less when calculatedaccording to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

2. Adhesive shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the CaliforniaDepartment of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile OrganicEmissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."

D. Fabrication:

1. Fabricate joints, seams, transitions, reinforcement, elbows, branch connections, andaccess doors and panels according to SMACNA's "Thermoset FRP Duct ConstructionManual," Chapter 7, "Requirements."

2. Fabricate 90-degree rectangular mitered elbows to include turning vanes, 90-degreeround elbows with a minimum of three segments for 12 inches (300 mm) and smaller anda minimum of five segments for 14 inches (350 mm) and larger.

E. Drains: Formed drain pockets with a minimum of NPS 1 (DN 25) threaded pipe connections.


2.2 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. Hanger Rods for Corrosive Environments: 316 stainless steel all-thread rods.

B. Strap and Rod Sizes: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal andFlexible," Table 5-1 (Table 5-1M), "Rectangular Duct Hangers Minimum Size," and Table 5-2,"Minimum Hanger Sizes for Round Duct."

C. Steel Cables: ASTM A 492, stainless steel and ASTM A555 stainless steel (316) with endconnections made of cadmium-plated steel assemblies with brackets, swivel, and boltsdesigned for duct hanger service; with an automatic-locking and clamping device.

D. Duct Attachments: 316 stainless steel sheet metal screws, blind rivets, or self-tapping metalscrews; compatible with duct materials.

E. Trapeze and Riser Supports: Steel shapes complying with ASTM A 36/A 36M.

2.3 SEISMIC-RESTRAINT DEVICES

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offeringproducts that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following:

1. B-line, an Eaton business.2. Ductmate Industries, Inc.3. Hilti, Inc.4. Kinetics Noise Control, Inc.5. Loos & Co., Inc.6. Mason Industries, Inc.7. TOLCO.8. Unistrut; Part of Atkore International.

B. General Requirements for Restraint Components: Rated strengths, features, and applicationsshall be as defined in reports by an agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Structural Safety Factor: Allowable strength in tension, shear, and pullout force ofcomponents shall be at least four times the maximum seismic forces to which they will besubjected.

C. Channel Support System: Shop- or field-fabricated support assembly made of slotted steelchannels with accessories for attachment to braced component at one end and to buildingstructure at the other end. Include matching components and corrosion-resistant coating.

D. Restraint Cables: ASTM A 492, stainless-steel cables with end connections made of cadmium-plated steel assemblies with brackets, swivel, and bolts designed for restraining cable service;and with an automatic-locking and clamping device or double-cable clips.

E. Hanger Rod Stiffener: Steel tube or steel slotted-support-system sleeve with internally boltedconnections to hanger rod.

F. Mechanical Anchor Bolts: Drilled-in and stud-wedge or female-wedge type. Select anchor boltswith strength required for anchor and as tested according to ASTM E 488.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 DUCT INSTALLATION

A. Install ducts with fewest possible joints.

B. Unless otherwise indicated, install ducts vertically and horizontally, and parallel andperpendicular to building lines.

C. Install ducts close to walls, overhead construction, columns, and other structural and permanentenclosure elements of building.

D. Install ducts with a clearance of 1 inch (25 mm), plus allowance for insulation thickness.

E. Where ducts pass through non-fire-rated interior partitions and exterior walls and are exposedto view, cover the opening between the partition and duct or duct insulation with sheet metalflanges. Overlap openings on four sides by at least 1-1/2 inches (38 mm).

F. Where ducts pass through fire-rated interior partitions and exterior walls, install fire dampers.Comply with requirements in Section 233300 "Air Duct Accessories" for fire and smokedampers.

G. Protect duct interiors from the moisture, construction debris and dust, and other foreignmaterials.

H. Install thermoset FRP ducts and fittings to comply with SMACNA's "Thermoset FRP DuctConstruction Manual."

3.2 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION

A. Install hangers and supports for thermoset FRP ducts and fittings to comply with SMACNA's"Thermoset FRP Duct Construction Manual," Chapter 7, "Requirements."

B. Building Attachments: Concrete inserts, powder-actuated fasteners, or structural-steel fastenersappropriate for construction materials to which hangers are being attached.

1. Install concrete inserts before placing concrete.2. Install powder-actuated concrete fasteners after concrete is placed and completely cured.3. Use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for standard-weight aggregate concretes or for

slabs more than 4 inches (100 mm) thick.4. Do not use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for lightweight-aggregate concretes or for

slabs less than 4 inches (100 mm) thick.5. Do not use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for seismic restraints.

C. Install upper attachments to structures. Select and size upper attachments with pull-out,tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials whereused.


3.3 SEISMIC-RESTRAINT-DEVICE INSTALLATION

A. Install ducts with hangers and braces designed to support the duct and to restrain againstseismic forces required by applicable building codes. Comply with SMACNA's "SeismicRestraint Manual: Guidelines for Mechanical Systems."

1. Space lateral supports a maximum of 40 feet (12 m) o.c., and longitudinal supports amaximum of 80 feet (24 m) o.c.

2. Brace a change of direction longer than 12 feet (3.7 m).

B. Select sizes of components so strength will be adequate to carry present and future static andseismic loads within restraint device capacity.

C. Install cables so they do not bend across edges of adjacent equipment or building structure.

D. Install cable restraints where ducts are suspended with vibration isolators.

E. Install seismic-restraint devices using methods approved by an agency acceptable to authoritieshaving jurisdiction.

F. Attachment to Structure: If specific attachment is not indicated, anchor bracing and restraints tostructure to flanges of beams, to upper truss chords of bar joists, or to concrete members.

G. Drilling for and Setting Anchors:

1. Identify position of reinforcing steel and other embedded items prior to drilling holes foranchors. Do not damage existing reinforcement or embedded items during drilling. Notifythe Architect if reinforcing steel or other embedded items are encountered during drilling.Locate and avoid prestressed tendons, electrical and telecommunications conduit, andgas lines.

2. Do not drill holes in concrete or masonry until concrete, mortar, or grout has achieved fulldesign strength.

3. Wedge Anchors: Protect threads from damage during anchor installation. Heavy-dutysleeve anchors shall be installed with sleeve fully engaged in the structural element towhich anchor is to be fastened.

4. Set anchors to manufacturer's recommended torque, using a torque wrench.5. Install zinc-coated steel anchors for interior applications and stainless-steel anchors for

applications exposed to weather.

3.4 PAINTING

A. Paint interior of thermoset FRP ducts that are visible through registers and grilles and that donot have duct liner. Apply one coat of flat, black, latex paint over a compatible galvanized-steelprimer. Paint materials and application requirements are specified in Section 099123 "InteriorPainting."


A. Perform tests and inspections.

B. Leakage Tests:


1. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual." Submit a test report foreach test.

2. Test the following systems:a. Supply Ducts with a Pressure Class of 2-Inch wg (500 Pa) or Higher: Test

representative duct sections totaling no less than 50 percent of total installed ductarea for each designated pressure class.

b. Outdoor Air Ducts with a Pressure Class of 2-Inch wg (500 Pa) or Higher: Testrepresentative duct sections totaling no less than 50 percent of total installed ductarea for each designated pressure class.

3. Disassemble, reassemble, and seal segments of systems to accommodate leakagetesting and for compliance with test requirements.

4. Test for leaks before applying external insulation.5. Conduct tests at static pressures equal to maximum design pressure of system or section

being tested. If static-pressure classes are not indicated, test entire system at maximumsystem design pressure. Do not pressurize systems above maximum design operatingpressure. Give seven days' advance notice for testing.

C. Duct System Cleanliness Tests:

1. Visually inspect duct system to ensure that no visible contaminants are present.2. Test sections of nonmetal duct system, chosen randomly by Owner, for cleanliness

according to "Vacuum Test" in NADCA ACR, "Assessment, Cleaning and Restoration ofHVAC Systems."

a. Acceptable Cleanliness Level: Net weight of debris collected on the filter mediashall not exceed 0.75 mg/100 sq. cm.

D. Duct system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

E. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.6 DUCT CLEANING

A. Clean new duct system(s) before testing, adjusting, and balancing.

B. Use service openings for entry and inspection.

1. Create new openings and install access panels appropriate for duct static-pressure classif required for cleaning access. Provide insulated panels for insulated or lined duct. Patchduct as recommended by duct manufacturer. Comply with Section 233300 "Air DuctAccessories" for access panels and doors.

2. Disconnect and reconnect flexible ducts as needed for cleaning and inspection.3. Remove and reinstall ceiling to gain access during the cleaning process.

C. Particulate Collection and Odor Control:

1. When venting vacuuming system inside the building, use HEPA filtration with 99.97percent collection efficiency for 0.3-micron-size (or larger) particles.

2. When venting vacuuming system to outdoors, use filter to collect debris removed fromHVAC system, and locate exhaust downwind and away from air intakes and other pointsof entry into building.

D. Clean the following components by removing surface contaminants and deposits:


1. Air outlets and inlets (registers, grilles, and diffusers).2. Supply, return, and exhaust fans including fan housings, plenums (except ceiling supply

and return plenums), scrolls, blades or vanes, shafts, baffles, dampers, and driveassemblies.

3. Air-handling unit internal surfaces and components including mixing box, coil section, airwash systems, spray eliminators, condensate drain pans, humidifiers and dehumidifiers,filters and filter sections, and condensate collectors and drains.

4. Coils and related components.5. Return-air ducts, dampers, actuators, and turning vanes except in ceiling plenums and

mechanical equipment rooms.6. Supply-air ducts, dampers, actuators, and turning vanes.7. Dedicated exhaust and ventilation components and makeup air systems.

E. Mechanical Cleaning Methodology:

1. Use vacuum-collection devices that are operated continuously during cleaning. Connectvacuum device to downstream end of duct sections so areas being cleaned are undernegative pressure.

2. Use mechanical agitation to dislodge debris adhered to interior duct surfaces withoutdamaging integrity of ducts or duct accessories.

3. Clean fibrous-glass duct with HEPA vacuuming equipment; do not permit duct to get wet.Replace fibrous-glass duct that is damaged, deteriorated, or delaminated or that hasfriable material, mold, or fungus growth.

4. Clean coils and coil drain pans according to NADCA 1992. Keep drain pan operational.Rinse coils with clean water to remove latent residues and cleaning materials; comb andstraighten fins.

5. Provide drainage and cleanup for wash-down procedures.6. Antimicrobial Agents and Coatings: Apply EPA-registered antimicrobial agents if fungus

is present. Apply antimicrobial agents according to manufacturer's written instructionsafter removal of surface deposits and debris.

3.7 START UP

A. Air Balance: Comply with requirements in Section 230593 "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing forHVAC."

3.8 DUCT SCHEDULE

A. Indoor Ducts and Fittings:

1. Thermoset FRP Rectangular or Round Ducts and Fittings:

a. Insulation: See Specification 23 07 13 DUCT INSULATION.

B. Outdoor Ducts and Fittings:

1. Thermoset FRP Ducts and Fittings:

a. Insulation: See Specification 23 07 13 DUCT INSULATION


AIR-TO-AIR ENERGY RECOVERY EQUIPMENT 237223-1 TOWN BRANCH WWTP THICKENING

SECTION 237223 - AIR-TO-AIR ENERGY RECOVERY EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.02 SUMMARY


1. Heat wheels.

2. Packaged energy recovery units.


A. Delegated Design: Design vibration isolation and seismic-restraint details, includingcomprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performancerequirements and design criteria indicated.

B. Seismic Performance: Air-to-air energy recovery equipment shall withstand the effects ofearthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7.

1. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any partsfrom the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified.


A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include rated capacities, operatingcharacteristics, furnished specialties, and accessories.

B. Shop Drawings: For air-to-air energy recovery equipment. Include plans, elevations,sections, details, and attachments to other work.

1. Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, requiredclearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each fieldconnection.

2. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring.

C. Delegated-Design Submittal: For air-to-air energy recovery equipment indicated to complywith performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealedby the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.

1. Detail fabrication and assembly of air-to-air energy recovery equipment.

2. Vibration Isolation Base Details: Detail fabrication including anchorages and attachmentsto structure and to supported equipment. Include adjustable motor bases, rails, andframes for equipment mounting.

3. Design Calculations: Calculate requirements for selecting vibration isolators and fordesigning vibration isolation bases.



A. Coordination Drawings: Plans, elevations, and other details, drawn to scale, on which thefollowing items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from Installers of theitems involved:

1. Suspended ceiling components.

2. Structural members to which equipment or suspension systems will be attached.

B. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For air-to-air energy recovery equipment, accessories, andcomponents, from manufacturer.

1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test ofassembled components or on calculation.

2. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and locateand describe mounting and anchorage provisions.

3. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is basedand their installation requirements.

C. Field quality-control reports.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For air-to-air energy recovery equipment to include inmaintenance manuals.

1.07 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS

A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protectivecovering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Filters: Two set(s) of each type of filter specified.

2. Fan Belts: Two set(s) of belts for each belt-driven fan in energy recovery units.

3. Wheel Belts: Two set(s) of belts for each heat wheel.


A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined inNFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

B. ARI Compliance:

1. Capacity ratings for air-to-air energy recovery equipment shall comply with ARI 1060,"Performance Rating of Air-to-Air Heat Exchangers for Energy Recovery VentilationEquipment."

C. ASHRAE Compliance:

1. Applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1, Section 5 - "Systems and Equipment" andSection 7 - "Construction and Startup."

2. Capacity ratings for air-to-air energy recovery equipment shall comply with ASHRAE 84,"Method of Testing Air-to-Air Heat Exchangers."


D. NRCA Compliance: Roof curbs for roof-mounted equipment shall be constructed accordingto recommendations of NRCA.

E. UL Compliance:

1. Packaged heat recovery ventilators shall comply with requirements in UL 1812, "DuctedHeat Recovery Ventilators"; or UL 1815, "Nonducted Heat Recovery Ventilators."

2. Electric coils shall comply with requirements in UL 1995, "Heating and CoolingEquipment."

1.09 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of air-to-air energy recovery equipment and suspensionsystem with other construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including lightfixtures, HVAC equipment, fire-suppression system, and partition assemblies.

B. Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided.

C. Coordinate sizes and locations of equipment supports, with actual equipment provided.

1.10 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair orreplace components of air-to-air energy recovery equipment that fail in materials orworkmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period for Packaged Energy Recovery Units: Two years.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 HEAT WHEELS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of thefollowing:

B. Basis-of-Design Product:

1. Advanced Thermal Technologies.

2. Airxchange Inc.

3. American Energy Exchange, Inc.

4. Novel Aire Technologies

5. SEMCO Incorporated.

C. Casing:

1. Steel with standard factory-painted finish.

2. Integral purge section limiting carryover of exhaust air to between 0.05 percent at 1.6-inch wg and 0.20 percent at 4-inch wg (0.05 percent at 400-Pa and 0.20 percent at 1000-Pa) differential pressure.

3. Casing seals on periphery of rotor and on duct divider and purge section.


4. Support vertical rotors on grease-lubricated ball bearings having permanently lubricatedbearings. Support horizontal rotors on tapered roller bearing.

D. Rotor: Aluminum segmented wheel strengthened with radial spokes, with nontoxic,noncorrosive, silica-gel desiccant coating.

1. Maximum Solid Size for Media to Pass: 500 micrometer.

E. Rotor: Polymer segmented wheel strengthened with radial spokes impregnated withnonmigrating, water-selective, molecular-sieve desiccant coating.

1. Maximum Solid Size for Media to Pass: 800 micrometer.

F. Drive: Fractional horsepower motor and gear reducer and self-adjusting multilink belt aroundoutside of rotor.

1. Comply with NEMA designation, temperature rating, service factor, enclosure type, andefficiency requirements for motors specified in Division 23 Section "Electrical MotorRequirements."

2. Motor Sizes: Minimum size as indicated. If not indicated, large enough so driven loadwill not require motor to operate in service factor range above 1.0.

G. Controls:

1. Starting relay, factory mounted and wired, and manual motor starter for field wiring.

2. Controller, factory mounted and wired, with exhaust-air sensor to vary rotor speed andmaintain exhaust temperature above freezing.

3. Controller, factory mounted and wired, with exhaust- and outdoor-air sensors, automaticchangeover thermostat and set-point adjuster, to vary rotor speed and maintain exhausttemperature above freezing and air differential temperature above set point. Rotor speedshall increase to maximum when exhaust-air temperature is less than outdoor-airtemperature.

4. Pilot-Light Indicator: Display rotor rotation and speed.

H. Extended-Surface, Disposable Panel Filters:

1. Comply with NFPA 90A.

2. Filter Holding Frames: Arranged for flat or angular orientation, with access doors on bothsides of unit. Filters shall be removable from one side or lift out from access plenum.

3. Factory-fabricated, dry, extended-surface type.

4. Thickness: 2 inches (50 mm).

5. Minimum Arrestance: >90%, according to ASHRAE 52.1.

6. Minimum Merv: 8, according to ASHRAE 52.2.

7. Media: Fibrous material formed into deep-V-shaped pleats with antimicrobial agent andheld by self-supporting wire grid.

8. Media-Grid Frame: Nonflammable cardboard.


9. Mounting Frames: Welded, galvanized steel with gaskets and fasteners, suitable forbolting together into built-up filter banks.

2.02 PACKAGED OUTDOOR HEAT RECOVERY UNITS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of thefollowing (or approved equal):

1. AAON.

2. Engineered Air.

3. Greenheck.

B. Surfaces in contact with the airstream shall comply with requirements in ASHRAE 62.1.

C. Housing: Manufacturer's standard construction with corrosion-protection coating and exteriorfinish, hinged access doors with neoprene gaskets for inspection and access to internal parts,minimum 2-inch- (50-mm-) thick thermal insulation, knockouts for electrical and pipingconnections, exterior drain connection, and lifting lugs.

1. Inlet and outlet: Weatherproof, ducted with damper for exhaust and supply.

a. Exhaust: Spring-return, two-position, motor-operated damper.

b. Supply: Spring-return, two-position, motor-operated damper.

D. Heat Recovery Device: Heat wheel.

E. Supply and Exhaust Fans: Forward-curved, centrifugal fan with spring isolators and insulatedflexible duct connections.

1. Motor and Drive: Belt driven with adjustable sheaves, motor mounted on adjustablebase.

2. Comply with NEMA designation, temperature rating, service factor, enclosure type, andefficiency requirements for motors specified in Division 23 Section "Electrical MotorRequirements."

3. Motor Sizes: Minimum size as indicated. If not indicated, large enough so driven loadwill not require motor to operate in service factor range above 1.0.

4. Controllers, Electrical Devices, and Wiring: Comply with requirements for electricaldevices and connections specified in Division 26 Sections.

5. Spring isolators on each fan having 1-inch (25-mm) static deflection.

F. Extended-Surface, Disposable Panel Filters:

1. Comply with NFPA 90A.

2. Filter Holding Frames: Arranged for flat or angular orientation, with access doors on bothsides of unit. Filters shall be removable from one side or lift out from access plenum.

3. Factory-fabricated, dry, extended-surface type.

4. Thickness: 2 inches (50 mm).


5. Minimum Arrestance: >90% according to ASHRAE 52.1.

6. Minimum Merv: 8, according to ASHRAE 52.2.

7. Media: Fibrous material formed into deep-V-shaped pleats[ with antimicrobial agent] andheld by self-supporting wire grid.

8. Media-Grid Frame: Nonflammable cardboard.

9. Mounting Frames: Welded, galvanized steel with gaskets and fasteners, suitable forbolting together into built-up filter banks.

G. Electrical Coils, Controls, and Accessories: Comply with UL 1995.

1. Casing Assembly: Slip-in or flanged type with galvanized-steel frame.

2. Access: Fabricate coil section to allow removal and replacement of coil and to allow in-place access for service.

3. Sheathed Heating Elements: Coiled resistance wire of 80 percent nickel and 20 percentchromium surrounded by compacted magnesium-oxide powder in tubular-steel sheath;with spiral-wound, copper-plated, steel fins continuously brazed to sheath.

4. Open Heating Elements: Resistance wire of 80 percent nickel and 20 percent chromiumsupported and insulated by floating ceramic bushings recessed into casing openings,fastened to supporting brackets, and mounted in galvanized-steel frame.

5. Overtemperature Protection: Disk-type, automatically resetting, thermal-cutout, safetydevice; serviceable through terminal box without removing heater from coil section.

6. Secondary Protection: Load-carrying, manually resetting or manually replaceable,thermal cutouts; factory wired in series with each heater stage.

7. Control Panel: Remote mounted with disconnecting means and overcurrent protection.

a. Magnetic contactor.

b. Solid-state, stepless pulse controller.

c. Toggle switches, one per step.

d. Step controller.

e. Time-delay relay.

f. Pilot lights, one per step.

g. Airflow proving switch.

H. Piping and Wiring: Fabricate units with space within housing for piping and electricalconduits. Wire motors and controls so only external connections are required duringinstallation.

1. Outdoor Enclosure: NEMA 250, Type 3R enclosure contains relays, starters, andterminal strip.

2. Include nonfused disconnect switches.


I. Accessories:

1. Ducted outside air supply to existing duct, and exhaust air return.

2. Intake weatherhood with 2-inch- (50-mm-) thick (MERV 8) filters.

3. Exhaust weatherhood with birdscreen.

4. Isolation Dampers: Opposed-blade, galvanized-steel dampers with cadmium-plated steeloperating rods rotating in sintered bronze or nylon bearings mounted in a singlegalvanized-steel frame with operating rods connected with a common linkage, andelectric damper operator factory wired. Blades shall have gaskets and edge seals, andshall be mechanically fastened to operating rod.

5. Duct flanges.

6. Roof Curb: Galvanized steel pressurized plenum curb with gasketing and factory installednailer, complying with NRCA standards. Minimum height is 12 inches.

7. Hinged access doors with quarter-turn latches.

8. Weatherproofing for tilt-control system.

9. Weatherproof outdoor unit.

2.03 CONTROLS

A. Solid-state, programmable, microprocessor-based unit for mounting in outdoor NEMA 250,Type 3R enclosure and battery backup protection of program settings against power failure toenergize unit.

B. Locate control panel remotely in the primary pump station 2 room. Coordinate with TownBranch maintenance personnel for exact location of control panel.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements forinstallation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Examine casing insulation materials and filter media before air-to-air energy recoveryequipment installation. Reject insulation materials and filter media that are wet, moisturedamaged, or mold damaged.

C. Examine roughing-in for electrical services to verify actual locations of connections beforeinstallation.

D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Install heat wheels so supply and exhaust airstreams flow in opposite directions and rotationis away from exhaust side to purge section to supply side.

1. Install access doors in both supply and exhaust ducts, both upstream and downstream,for access to wheel surfaces, drive motor, and seals.


2. Install removable panels or access doors between supply and exhaust ducts on buildingside for bypass during startup.

B. Install wind and seismic restraints according to manufacturers' written instructions.

C. Install units with clearances for service and maintenance.

D. Install new filters at completion of equipment installation and before testing, adjusting, andbalancing.

E. Install electric heat according to NFPA 72, "National Electric Code."

F. Install curb on concrete deck level and secure according to NRCA. Install equipment on curband coordinate penetrations and flashing.

G. Equipment Mounting: Install air-to-air energy recovery equipment on curb.

H. Unit Support: Install unit level on structural curb. Coordinate deck penetrations and flashingwith deck construction. Secure air-to-air energy recovery equipment to curb with anchorbolts.

3.03 CONNECTIONS

A. Connect to existing ductwork.

B. Electrical Connections: Comply with applicable requirements in Division 26 Sections.

1. Install electrical devices furnished with units but not factory mounted.


A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect,test, and adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections.

B. Perform tests and inspections.

1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative toinspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, andto assist in testing.

C. Tests and Inspections:

1. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirmproper motor rotation and unit operation.

2. Adjust seals and purge.

3. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controlsand equipment.

4. Set initial temperature and humidity set points.

5. Set field-adjustable switches and circuit-breaker trip ranges as indicated.

D. Air-to-air energy recovery equipment will be considered defective if it does not pass tests andinspections.

E. Prepare test and inspection reports.


3.05 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnelto adjust, operate, and maintain air-to-air energy recovery units.

END OF SECTION

PACKAGED, INDIRECT-FIRED, OUTDOOR, 237423-1 TOWN BRANCH WWTP THICKENINGHEATING-ONLY MAKEUP-AIR UNITS

SECTION 237423 - PACKAGED, INDIRECT-FIRED, OUTDOOR, HEATING-ONLY MAKEUP-AIRUNITS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.02 SUMMARY

A. Section includes indirect-fired makeup-air units.

1.03 DEFINITIONS

A. DDC: Direct digital control.


A. Product Data: For each type and configuration of outdoor, indirect-fired makeup-air unit.

1. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, electrical characteristics, andfurnished specialties and accessories.

B. Shop Drawings: For each type and configuration of outdoor, indirect-fired heating andventilating unit.

1. Signed, sealed, and prepared by or under the supervision of a qualified professionalengineer.

2. Include plans, elevations, sections, and attachment details.

3. Include details of equipment assemblies. Indicate dimensions, weights, loads, requiredclearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each fieldconnection.

4. Detail fabrication and assembly of gas-fired heating and ventilating units, as well asprocedures and diagrams.

5. Design Calculations: Calculate requirements for selecting vibration isolators and fordesigning vibration isolation bases.

6. Vibration Isolation Base Details: Detail fabrication including anchorages and attachmentsto structure and to supported equipment. Include auxiliary motor slides and rails, andbase weights.

7. Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.


A. Startup service reports.

B. Sample Warranty: For manufacturer's special warranty.



A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For indirect-fired makeup-air units to include in emergency,operation, and maintenance manuals.

1.07 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS

A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protectivecovering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Filters: Two sets for each unit.

2. Fan Belts: Two sets for each unit.


A. Comply with NFPA 70.

B. ASHRAE Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1, Section 5 - "Systems andEquipment" and Section 7 - "Construction and Startup."

C. ASHRAE/IES 90.1 Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IES 90.1, Section 6 -"Heating, Ventilating, and Air-Conditioning."

1.09 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of indirect-firedheating and ventilating units that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warrantyperiod.

1. Warranty Period for Heat Exchangers: Manufacturer's standard, but not less than fiveyears from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of thefollowing:

1. Engineered Air.

2. Greenheck Fan Corporation.

3. Hastings HVAC; Division of Eric, Inc.

4. Modine Manufacturing Company.

5. REZNOR; Thomas & Betts Corporation, a member of ABB Group.

6. Engineer approved equal.


A. Factory-assembled, prewired, self-contained unit consisting of cabinet, supply fan, controls,filters, and indirect-fired gas burner to be installed exterior to the building.


B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

2.03 UNIT CASINGS

A. General Fabrication Requirements for Casings:

1. Forming: Form walls, roofs, and floors with at least two breaks at each joint.

2. Casing Joints: Sheet metal screws or pop rivets, factory sealed with water-resistantsealant.

3. Factory Finish for Galvanized-Steel Casings: Immediately after cleaning and pretreating,apply manufacturer's standard two-coat, baked-on enamel finish, consisting of prime coatand thermosetting topcoat.

4. Casing Coating: Powder-baked enamel.

5. Air-Handling-Unit Mounting Frame: Formed galvanized-steel channel or structuralchannel supports, designed for low deflection, welded with integral lifting lugs.

a. Seismic Fabrication Requirements: Fabricate mounting base and attachment to air-handling-unit sections, accessories, and components with reinforcement strongenough to withstand seismic forces defined in Section 230548 "Vibration and SeismicControls for HVAC" when air-handling-unit frame is anchored to building structure.

6. Airstream Surfaces: Surfaces in contact with the airstream shall comply withrequirements in ASHRAE 62.1.

B. Configuration: Horizontal unit with horizontal discharge for concrete-base installation.

C. Cabinet: Galvanized-steel panels, formed to ensure rigidity and supported by galvanized-steel channels or structural channel supports with lifting lugs. Duct flanges at inlet and outlet.Pitched roof panels and knockouts with grommet seals for electrical and piping connectionsand lifting lugs.

D. Outer Casing: 0.0598-inch- (1.519-mm-) thick steel with heat-resistant, baked-enamel.

E. Inner Casing:

1. Burner Section Inner Casing: 0.0299-inch- (0.759-mm-) thick steel.

2. Double-wall casing with inner wall of solid steel, for the following sections:

a. Blower section.

b. Filter section.

c. Inlet plenum.

d. Discharge plenum.

e. Access Doors: Hinged with handles for burner and fan motor assemblies on bothsides of unit.

3. Internal Insulation: Fibrous-glass duct lining, neoprene coated, comply withASTM C 1071, Type II, applied on complete unit.


a. Thickness: 1 inch (25 mm).

b. Insulation Adhesive: Comply with ASTM C 916, Type I.

c. Density: 1.5 lb/cu. ft. (24.0 kg/cu. m).

d. Mechanical Fasteners: Galvanized steel suitable for adhesive, mechanical, orwelding attachment to casing without damaging liner when applied as recommendedby manufacturer and without causing air leakage.

F. Casing Insulation and Adhesive:

1. Materials: ASTM C 1071, Type I.

2. Location and Application: Factory applied with adhesive and mechanical fasteners to theinternal surface of section panels downstream from, and including, the heating-coilsection.

a. Liner Adhesive: Comply with ASTM C 916, Type I.

b. Mechanical Fasteners: Galvanized steel, suitable for adhesive, mechanical, orwelding attachment to duct without damaging liner when applied as recommended bymanufacturer and without causing leakage in cabinet.

c. Liner materials applied in this location shall have airstream surface coated with atemperature-resistant coating or faced with a plain or coated fibrous mat or fabric,depending on service-air velocity.

3. Location and Application: Encased between outside and inside casing.

G. Inspection and Access Panels and Access Doors:

1. Panel and Door Fabrication: Formed and reinforced, single- or double-wall and insulatedpanels of same materials and thicknesses as casing.

2. Inspection and Access Panels:

a. Fasteners: Two or more camlock type for panel lift-out operation. Arrangement shallallow panels to be opened against air-pressure differential.

b. Gasket: Neoprene, applied around entire perimeters of panel frames.

c. Size: Large enough to allow inspection and maintenance of air-handling unit'sinternal components.

3. Access Doors:

a. Hinges: A minimum of two ball-bearing hinges or stainless-steel piano hinge and twowedge-lever-type latches, operable from inside and outside. Arrange doors to beopened against air-pressure differential.

b. Gasket: Neoprene, applied around entire perimeters of panel frames.

c. Fabricate windows in doors of double-glazed, wire-reinforced safety glass with an airspace between panes and sealed with interior and exterior rubber seals.

d. Size: At least 18 inches (450 mm) wide by full height of unit casing up to a maximumheight of 60 inches (1500 mm).


4. Locations and Applications:

a. Fan Section: Doors.

b. Access Section: Doors.

c. Damper Section: Doors.

d. Filter Section: Doors large enough to allow periodic removal and installation of filters.

2.04 ACCESSORIES

A. Electric heater with integral thermostat maintains minimum 50 deg F (10 deg C) temperaturein gas burner compartment.

2.05 OUTDOOR-AIR INTAKE HOOD

A. Type: Manufacturer's standard hood or louver.

B. Materials: Match cabinet.

C. Bird Screen: Comply with requirements in ASHRAE 62.1.

D. Filter: Aluminum, 1 inch (25 mm) cleanable.

E. Configuration: Designed to inhibit wind-driven rain and snow from entering unit.

2.06 SUPPLY-AIR FAN

A. Fan Type: Centrifugal, rated according to AMCA 210; statically and dynamically balanced,galvanized steel; mounted on solid-steel shaft with heavy-duty, self-aligning, permanentlylubricated ball bearings. Bearing rating: L10 of 100,000 hours.

B. Drive: V-belt drive with matching fan pulley and adjustable motor sheaves and belt assembly.

C. Mounting: Fan wheel, motor, and drives shall be mounted in fan casing with restrained,isolators.

D. Fan-Shaft Lubrication Lines: Extended to a location outside the casing.

2.07 AIR FILTERS

A. Disposable Panel Filters: Factory-fabricated, pleated, flat-panel-type, disposable air filterswith holding frames, with a MERV 8 according to ASHRAE 52.2.

1. Thickness: 1 inch (25 mm).

2. Media: Interlaced glass fibers.

3. Frame: Galvanized steel.

2.08 DAMPERS

A. Outdoor-AirDamper: Galvanized-steel, opposed-blade dampers with vinyl blade seals andstainless-steel jamb seals, having a maximum leakage of 10 cfm/sq. ft. (51 L/s per sq. m) ofdamper area, at a differential pressure of 2-inch wg (448 Pa).


B. Damper Operator: Direct coupled, electronic with spring return.

2.09 INDIRECT-FIRED GAS BURNER

A. Description: Factory assembled, piped, and wired; and complying with ANSI Z21.47, "Gas-Fired Central Furnaces," and with NFPA 54, "National Fuel Gas Code."

1. CSA Approval: Designed and certified by and bearing label of CSA.

2. Burners: Aluminized steel with stainless-steel inserts.

a. Gas Control Valve: Two stage.

b. Fuel: Natural gas.

c. Minimum Combustion Efficiency: 80 percent.

d. Ignition: Electronically controlled electric spark with flame sensor.

B. Venting: Power vented, with integral, motorized centrifugal fan interlocked with gas valve.

C. Combustion-Air Intake: Separate combustion-air intake and vent terminal assembly.

D. Heat Exchanger: Aluminized steel.

E. Heat-Exchanger Drain Pan: Stainless steel.

F. Safety Controls:

1. Vent Flow Verification: Differential pressure switch to verify open vent.

2. Control Transformer: 24-V ac.

3. High Limit: Thermal switch or fuse to stop burner.

4. Gas Train: Regulated, redundant, 24-V ac gas valve assembly containing pilot solenoidvalve, hydraulic-modulating temperature control valve, pilot filter, pressure regulator, pilotshutoff, and manual shutoff all in one body.

5. Purge-period timer shall automatically delay burner ignition and bypass low-limit control.

6. Gas Manifold: Safety switches and controls complying with ANSI standards.

7. Airflow Proving Switch: Differential pressure switch senses correct airflow beforeenergizing pilot.

8. Automatic-Reset, High-Limit Control Device: Stops burner and closes main gas valve ifhigh-limit temperature is exceeded.

9. Safety Lockout Switch: Locks out ignition sequence if burner fails to light after three tries.Controls are reset manually by turning the unit off and on.

2.10 UNIT CONTROL PANEL

A. Factory-wired, fuse-protected control transformer, connection for power supply and field-wired unit to remote control panel.


B. Control Panel: Surface-mounted remote panel, with engraved plastic cover and the followinglights and switches:

1. On-off-auto fan switch.

2. Heat-vent-off switch.

3. Supply-fan operation indicating light.

4. Heating operation indicating light.

5. Thermostat.

6. Damper position potentiometer.

7. Dirty-filter indicating light operated by unit-mounted differential pressure switch.

8. Safety-lockout indicating light.

9. Enclosure: NEMA 250, Type 1.

2.11 CONTROLS

A. See sheet M-1-701.

B. Control Devices:

1. Remote Thermostat: Adjustable room thermostat with temperature readout.

2. Remote temperature sensor.

3. Timers: Solid-state, programmable time control with four separate programs; 24-hourbattery carryover; individual on-off-auto switches for each program; 365-day calendarwith 20 programmable holidays; choice of fail-safe operation for each program; andsystem fault alarm.

C. Fan Control: Interlock fan to start after exhaust louver dampers open to which this heatingand ventilating unit is associated for pressure relief exhaust air.

D. Fan Control: Timer starts and stops indirect-fired heating and ventilating unit opens andcloses relief louver dampers.

1. Smoke detectors, located in supply air, shall stop fans when the presence of smoke isdetected.

E. Outdoor-Air Damper Control, 100 Percent Outdoor-Air Units: Outdoor-air damper shall openwhen supply fan starts, and close when fan stops.

F. Temperature Control: Operates gas valve to maintain supply-air temperature.1. Operates gas valve to maintain space temperature with wall-mounting, field-wired

sensor with temperature adjustment, and adjustment on remote-control panel.2. Burner Control: Two or four steps of control using one or two burner sections in series.

2.12 MOTORS

A. Comply with NEMA designation, temperature rating, service factor, and efficiencyrequirements for motors specified in Section 230513 "Common Motor Requirements forHVAC Equipment."


1. Enclosure: Totally enclosed, fan cooled.

2. Enclosure Materials: Cast iron.

3. Motor Bearings: L10, 100,000 hrs.

4. Efficiency: Premium efficient.

5. NEMA Design: MG1.

6. Service Factor: 1.15.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements forinstallation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Examine roughing-in for piping, ducts, and electrical systems to verify actual locations ofconnections before equipment installation.

C. Verify cleanliness of airflow path to include inner-casing surfaces, filters, coils, turning vanes,fan wheels, and other components.

D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Equipment Mounting:

1. Install heating and ventilating units on cast-in-place concrete equipment bases.

B. Unit Support: Install heating and ventilating unit level on concrete pad. Coordinate wallpenetrations and flashing with wall construction. Secure units to structural support withanchor bolts.

C. Install gas-fired units according to NFPA 54, "National Fuel Gas Code."

D. Install controls and equipment shipped by manufacturer for field installation with indirect-firedheating and ventilating units.

3.03 CONNECTIONS

A. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

1. Gas Piping: Comply with requirements in Section 231123 "Facility Natural-Gas Piping."Connect gas piping with shutoff valve and union, and with sufficient clearance for burnerremoval and service. Make final connections of gas piping to unit with corrugated,stainless-steel tubing flexible connectors complying with ANSI LC 1/CSA 6.26 equipmentconnections.

B. Drain: Comply with requirements in Section 221316 "Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping" fortraps and accessories on piping connections to condensate drain pans under condensingheat exchangers. Where installing piping adjacent to heating and ventilating units, allowspace for service and maintenance.


C. Duct Connections: Connect supply ducts to indirect-fired heating and ventilating units withflexible duct connectors. Comply with requirements in Section 233300 "Air Duct Accessories"for flexible duct connectors.

D. Ground equipment according to Section 260526 "Grounding and Bonding for ElectricalSystems."

E. Connect wiring according to Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors andCables."


A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to test andinspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections.

B. Perform tests and inspections with the assistance of a factory-authorized servicerepresentative.

C. Units will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.


3.05 STARTUP SERVICE

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service.

B. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions andperform the following:

1. Inspect for visible damage to burner combustion chamber.

2. Inspect casing insulation for integrity, moisture content, and adhesion.

3. Verify that clearances have been provided for servicing.

4. Verify that controls are connected and operable.

5. Verify that filters are installed.

6. Purge gas line.

7. Inspect and adjust vibration isolators.

8. Verify bearing lubrication.

9. Inspect fan-wheel rotation for movement in correct direction without vibration and binding.

10. Adjust fan belts to proper alignment and tension.

C. Start unit according to manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Complete startup sheets and attach copy with Contractor's startup report.

2. Inspect and record performance of interlocks and protective devices; verify sequences.

3. Operate unit for run-in period recommended by manufacturer.


4. Perform the following operations for both minimum and maximum firing, and adjustburner for peak efficiency:

a. Measure gas pressure at manifold.

b. Measure combustion-air temperature at inlet to combustion chamber.

c. Measure supply-air temperature and volume when burner is at maximum firing rateand when burner is off. Calculate useful heat to supply air.

5. Calibrate thermostats.

6. Adjust and inspect high-temperature limits.

7. Inspect dampers, if any, for proper stroke and interlock with return-air dampers.

8. Inspect controls for correct sequencing of heating, and normal and emergency shutdown.

9. Measure and record airflow. Plot fan volumes on fan curve.

10. Verify operation of remote panel, including pilot-operation and failure modes. Inspect thefollowing:

a. High-limit heat.

b. Alarms.

11. After startup and performance testing, change filters, verify bearing lubrication, and adjustbelt tension.

12. Verify outdoor-air damper operation.

3.06 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust initial temperature set points.

B. Set field-adjustable switches and circuit-breaker trip ranges as indicated.

C. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 months from date of SubstantialCompletion, provide on-site assistance in adjusting system to suit actual occupied conditions.Provide up to two Insert number visits to Project during other-than-normal occupancy hoursfor this purpose.

3.07 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnelto adjust, operate, and maintain heating and ventilating units.

END OF SECTION 237423.16

DIVISION 26

ELECTRICAL

BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 260000-1 TOWN BRANCH WWTP THICKENING

SECTION 260000 - BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 REQUIREMENT

A. Contractors bidding work under this Contract shall read and understand Division Zero andDivision 1 - General Requirements. If any discrepancies are discovered between the BasicElectrical Materials and Methods and General Requirements, the above mentioneddocuments shall overrule this section. The Basic Electrical Materials and Methods areintended as a supplement to the above mentioned documents.

B. The Contractor shall bid as outlined in the above mentioned Specifications and shall begoverned by any alternates or unit prices called for in the form of proposal.

C. Each Contractor bidding on the work included in these Specifications shall view the buildingsite and carefully examine the contract Drawings and Specifications, so that he/she may fullyunderstand what is to be done, and to document existing conditions.

1.02 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Work included in this section of the Specifications shall include the furnishing of all labor,material, tools, approvals, utility connection fees, excavation, backfill, and other equipmentnecessary to install the electrical system as shown on the Contract Drawings and asspecified herein.

B. It also includes installation and connection of all electrical utilization equipment included inthis Contract but furnished by other contractors or suppliers.

C. It is the general intent that all motors shall be furnished with the particular object of equipmentit drives, except where a new motor is to be provided for an item of existing equipment (areplacement motor), then it shall be provided under this Division of the Specifications.

D. The Contractor shall furnish and install all conduit, wire, disconnect switches andmiscellaneous material to make all electrical connections to all items of utilization equipmentor wiring devices except as otherwise specified.

E. Equipment connections shall be made with flexible or rigid conduit as required. Controllersfor motors, disconnect switches, and all control, protective and signal devices for motorcircuits, except where such apparatus is furnished mounted and connected integrally with themotor driven equipment, shall be installed, connected and left in operating condition. Thenumber and size of conductors between motors and control or protective apparatus shall beas required to obtain the operation described in these Specifications, and/or by the ContractDocuments, and/or as shown in manufacturer furnished, Engineer reviewed Shop Drawings.

F. All devices and items of electrical equipment, including those shown on the ContractDrawings but not specifically mentioned in the Specifications or those mentioned in theSpecifications but not shown on the Contract Drawings, are to be furnished under this sectionof the specifications. Any such device or item of equipment, if not defined in quality, shall beequal to similar Equipment and/or devices specified herein.

G. All devices and items of equipment mentioned in this section of the Specifications whetherelectrical or not or whether furnished under this or other Division of the Specifications, shallbe installed under this Division of the Specifications, unless specifically indicated otherwise.


H. Where wiring diagrams are not shown on the Contract Drawings, they are to be provided bythe supplier of the equipment served and such diagrams shall be adhered to except as hereinmodified.

I. The following is a list of items that may not be defined clearly on the Contract Drawings or inother parts of these Specifications. The list is meant to be an aid to the Contractor and is notnecessarily a complete list of all work to be performed under this Contract:

1. Connect all motors and accessories furnished by equipment suppliers.

2. Furnish, install, and connect all motor controls.

3. Furnish, install, and connect lighting, indoor and outdoor.

4. Furnish, install, and connect power and signal lines to all instrumentation equipment, andaccessories.

5. Furnish, install, and connect all electrical conduit, duct and cables.

6. Furnish, install, and connect all telephone boxes, outlets, etc.

7. Furnish, install, and connect all power distribution equipment.

8. Furnish and install standby power equipment.

1.03 SHOP DRAWINGS, DESCRIPTIVE LITERATURE, INSTALLATION, OPERATION ANDMAINTENANCE INFORMATION

A. Shop Drawings including descriptive literature and/or installation, operation and maintenanceinstructions shall be submitted per Section 01300.

B. Shop Drawings shall be submitted on the following materials specified in this Division:

1. Conduit - all types and sizes, including liquid-tight flexible.

2. Boxes - all types and sizes.

3. Coal tar epoxy paint.

4. Wiring devices.

5. Device plates.

6. Metal framing system (Strut type channel).

7. Conduit fittings, expansion joints, support hardware.

8. Motor control equipment - including individually mounted items.

9. Power distribution equipment - including individually mounted items.

10. Adjustable speed equipment and accessories.

11. Miscellaneous spare parts and hardware.

12. Wire - all types and sizes.


13. Light fixtures - all types.

14. Wire markers, signs and labels.

15. Lightning/transient suppressors.

C. The Engineer reserves the right to make modifications to motor control and power distributionequipment ratings after Shop Drawing review, if the Shop Drawings are submittedprematurely (prematurely meaning submitted before all utilization equipment has beenreviewed and accepted). Cost of modifications shall be the Contractor’s responsibility.

1.04 SYMBOLS AND ABBREVIATIONS

A. The symbols and abbreviations general follow standard electrical and architectural practice,however, exceptions to this shall be as shown on the Contract Drawings.

1.05 COORDINATION WITH OTHER TRADES

A. The Contractor shall coordinate the electrical work with that of other trades to ensure properfinal location of all electrical equipment and/or connections. The Contractor shall verify doorswings to see that light switches are located properly.

1.06 CODES

A. The minimum standard for all work shall be the latest revision of the Kentucky Building Code(KBC), and the National Electrical Code (NEC). Whenever and wherever state and/or locallaws or ordinances and/or regulations and/or the Engineer’s design require a higher standardthat the current NEC or KBC, then these laws and/or regulations and/or the design shall befollowed.

B. Following is a list of other applicable Standards or Codes:

1. Kentucky Building Code KBC

2. National Electrical Code NEC

3. National Electrical Safety Code NESC

4. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. UL

5. Factory Mutual System FM

6. National Fire Protection Association NFPA

7. National Electrical Manufacturers Association NEMA

8. Occupational Safety and Health Administration OSHA

9. Insulated Cable Engineers Association, Inc. ICEA

10. Illuminating Engineering Society of North America IES

11. Instrument Society of America ISA

12. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers, Inc. IEEE

13. American National Standards Institute, Inc. ANSI


14. Anti-Friction Bearing Manufacturers Association, Inc. AFBMA

15. Joint Industry Council JIC

16. American Society of Heating, Refrigeratingand Air Conditioning Engineers, Inc. ASHRAE

17. Federal Communications Commission FCC

18. American Society for Testing and Materials ASTM

19. American Wood Preservers Association AWPA

20. Rural Electrification Association REA

1.07 INSPECTIONS AND PERMITS

A. Inspection of the electrical system on all construction projects is required. If the localgovernment has appointed a state licensed inspector, the Contractor shall be required to usethat person to perform the inspections. If a locally mandated inspector does not exist, theContractor shall select and hire a state licensed inspector, who has jurisdiction before anywork is concealed. The Contractor shall notify the electrical inspector in writing, immediatelyupon notice to proceed, and a copy of the notice shall be submitted to the Engineer.

B. At the time of completion of the project, there shall be furnished to the Owner a certificate ofcompliance, from the agency having jurisdiction pursuant to all electrical work performed.The Engineer shall also receive a photostatic copy.

C. All costs incurred by the Contractor to execute the above mentioned requirements shall bepaid by the Contractor at no extra cost to the Owner.

D. All permits necessary for the complete electrical system shall be obtained by the Contractorfrom the authorities governing such work. For further information, see Division 1.

1.08 STORAGE

A. All work, equipment, and materials shall be protected against dirt, water, or other injury duringthe period of construction.

B. Sensitive electrical equipment such as light fixtures, motor starters, controls, andpanelboards, delivered to the job site, shall be protected against injury or corrosion due toatmospheric conditions or physical damage by other means. Protection is interpreted tomean that equipment shall be stored under roof, in a structure properly heated in coldweather and ventilated in hot weather. Provision shall be made to control the humidity in thestorage area to 50 percent relative. The stored equipment shall be inspected periodically,and if it is found that the protection is inadequate, further protective measures shall beemployed. Electrical equipment other than boxes and conduit shall not be installed until thestructure is under roof with doors and windows installed.

C. No light fixtures or device plates shall be hung or installed until after painting is completed;however, temporary lighting shall be provided by the Contractor.

D. The Contractor shall not store submersible pump units in the wetwell. If it is absolutelynecessary to do so, the open power cable ends are to be suspended above the maximumflood elevation or maximum expected water level. If not stored in this manner, the Contractormay be called upon to replace the pump motors and cables with new units to ensure thatwater has not penetrated the cable and entered the motor housing.


1.09 MATERIALS

A. All materials used shall be new and at least meet the minimum standards as established bythe NEC and/or National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA). All materials shall beUL listed for the application, where a listing exists. Additional requirements are found inDivision 1. All equipment shall meet applicable FCC requirements and restrictions.

B. The material and equipment described herein has been specified according to a particulartrade name or make to set quality standards. However, each Contractor has the right tosubstitute other material and equipment in lieu of that specified, other than those specificallymentioned at matching or for standardization, providing such material and equipment meetsall of the requirements of those specified and is accepted, in writing by the Engineer.

C. The reuse of salvaged electrical equipment and/or wiring will not be permitted unlessspecified herein or indicated on the Contract Drawings.

D. All salvaged or abandoned electrical materials shall become the property of the Contractorand shall be removed from the job site upon completion of the project, unless otherwisenoted on the Contract Drawings or specified herein.

1.10 ERRORS, CORRECTIONS, AND/OR OMISSIONS

A. Should a piece of utilization equipment be supplied of a different size or horsepower thanshown on the Contract Drawings, the Contractor shall be responsible for installing the propersize wiring, conduit, starters, circuit breakers, etc., for proper operation of that unit and thecomplete electrical system at no extra cost to the Owner.

B. It is the intent of these Specifications to provide for an electrical system installation completein every respect, to operate in the manner and under conditions as shown in theseSpecifications and on the Contract Drawings. The Contractor shall notify the Engineer, inwriting, of any omission or error at least 10 days prior to opening of bids. In the event of theContractor’s failure to give such notice, he/she may be required to correct work and/or furnishitems omitted without additional cost. Further requirements on this subject may be found inthe General Requirements, Division 1.

C. Necessary changes or revisions in electrical work to meet any code or power companyrequirement shall be made by the Contractor without additional charge.

1.11 GUARANTEES AND WARRANTIES

A. The Contractor shall guarantee all work including equipment, materials, and workmanship.This guarantee shall be against all defects of any of the above and shall run for a period of 1year from the date of acceptance of the work, concurrent with the one year guarantee perioddesignated for the general construction contract under which electrical work is performed.Date of acceptance shall be considered to be the date on which all “punch list” items arecompleted (“punch list” is defined to be the written listing of work that is incomplete ordeficient that must be finished or replaced/repaired before the Contractor receives finalpayment).

B. Repair and maintenance for the guarantee period is the responsibility of the Contractor andshall include all repairs and maintenance other than that which is considered as routine.(That is oiling, greasing, etc.) The Engineer shall be the judge of what shall be considered asroutine maintenance.

C. Lamps shall bear the manufacturer’s warranty.


1.12 TESTING

A. After the wiring system is complete, and at such time as the Engineer may direct, theContractor shall conduct an operating test for acceptance. The equipment shall bedemonstrated to operate in accordance with the requirements of these Specifications and theContract Drawings. The test shall be performed in the presence of the Engineer or hisauthorized representative. The Contractor shall furnish all instruments and personnelrequired for the tests, as well as the necessary electrical power.

B. Before energizing the system, the Contractor shall check all connections and set all relaysand instruments for proper operation. He shall obtain all necessary clearances, approvals,and instructions from the serving utility company and/or equipment manufacturers prior toplacing power on the equipment.

C. Tests may be performed by the Engineer to determine integrity of insulation on wiring circuitsselected by the Engineer at random.

D. Cost of utilities for testing done prior to beneficial occupancy by the Owner shall be borne bythe Contractor.

1.13 CLEANUP

A. Cleanup shall be completed as soon as possible after the electrical installation is complete.All light fixtures, outlets, switches, starters, motor control centers, disconnect switches andother electrical equipment shall be free of shipping tags, stickers, etc. All painted equipmentshall be left free of scratches or other blemishes, such as splattered or blistered paint, etc.All light fixture diffusers shall be clean and the interior of all motor controls, etc., shall be freeof dust, dirt, wire strippings, etc. Surplus material, rubbish and equipment resulting from thework shall be removed from the job site by the Contractor upon completion of the work.

B. During construction, cover all Owner equipment and furnishings subject to mechanicaldamage or contamination in any way.

1.14 CUTTING AND PATCHING

A. Cutting and patching shall be held to an absolute minimum and such work shall be done onlyunder the direction of the Engineer or Owner. The Contractor shall be responsible for andshall pay for all openings that may be required in the floors or walls, and he shall beresponsible for putting said surfaces back in their original condition. Every attempt shall bemade to avoid cutting reinforcing steel bars when an opening is required in a reinforcedconcrete wall or floor slab.

1.15 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL

A. Excavation

1. Excavation for conduits shall be of sufficient width to allow for proper jointing andalignment of the type conduit used. Conduit shall be laid in straight lines between pullboxes and/or structures unless otherwise notes on the Contract Drawings. The cost ofsolid rock excavation shall be included in the lump sum bid with no extra pay allowed(unclassified).

B. Encasement/Backfill

1. All buried conduits shall be concrete encased. Backfill over the ductbank may containrocks but must be mixed with sufficient earth to fill all voids.


1.16 SLEEVES, CHASES AND OPENINGS

A. Sleeves shall be required at all points where exposed conduits pass through new concretewalls, slabs, or masonry walls. Sleeves that must be installed below grade or where subjectto high water conditions must be installed watertight.

B. Wiring chases shall be provided where shown on the Contract Drawings. The Contractorshall have the option of installing chases below surface mounted panelboards provided allstructural requirements are met.

C. It is the Contractor’s responsibility to leave openings to allow installation of the complete,operational electrical system. Openings required but not left shall be cut as outlined undercutting and patching. The Contractor shall coordinate all holes and other openings withnecessary diameters for proper firestopping.

1.17 TEMPORARY ELECTRICAL POWER

A. The Contractor shall be responsible for providing temporary electrical power as requiredduring the course of construction and shall remove the temporary service equipment when nolonger required. Temporary power is also addressed in Division 1.

1.18 OVERCURRENT PROTECTION

A. Circuit breakers or fused switches shall be the size and type as written herein and shown onthe Contract Drawings. Any additional overcurrent protection required to maintain anequipment listing by an authority having jurisdiction shall be installed by the Contractor at noextra cost to the Owner.

B. The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer actual nameplate data from motors shipped tothe site, stating motor identification as well as characteristics. Overload relay thermal unitselection tables shall accompany the motor data. The Engineer will select thermal unit sizesfrom this data for use by the Contractor in ordering proper thermal units.

1.19 TRAINING

A. All manufacturers supplying equipment for this division shall provide the Owner’s operationsstaff with training in the operation and maintenance on the equipment being furnished. Thetraining shall be conducted at the project site by a qualified representative of themanufacturer.

B. The cost of this training shall be included in the bid price.

C. The required training shall consist of both classroom and hands-on situation. Classroomtraining shall include instruction on how the equipment works, its relationship to allaccessories and other related units, detailed review of shop drawings, detailed presentationof written O & M instructions, troubleshooting and record-keeping recommendations. Hands-on-training shall include a review of the manufacturer’s O & M instructions, check out of eachoperator to identifying key elements of the equipment, tear down as appropriate, calibration,adjustment, greasing and oiling points, and operating manipulations of all electrical andmechanical controls.

D. The training shall be scheduled through the Contractor with the Owner. The timing of thetraining shall closely coincide with startup of the equipment, but no training shall beconducted until the equipment is operational.

E. The minimum number of hours to be provided by manufacturers supplying equipment on thisproject shall be in accordance with the following table:


Training Hours

Item Classroom Hands-on

Variable Speed Systems 2 2

F. At least 60 days prior to the training the manufacturer shall submit through the Contractor tothe Engineer an outline of the training proposed for the Engineer’s review and concurrence.

G. The Owner reserves the right to videotape all training sessions.

1.20 MAINTAINING CONTINUOUS ELECTRICAL SYSTEM AND SERVICE

A. Existing service(s) continuity shall be maintained at all times. In no way shall the installationand/or alteration of the electrical work interfere with or stop the normal operation of theexisting facilities, except where prior arrangements have been made

B. When additions and taps to existing service(s) require electrical outages of duration in excessof a few minutes, arrangements shall be made in advance for such outages. All outagesshall be held to an acceptable minimum with none exceeding 8 hours continuous duration. Ifnecessary, cuts shall be performed on premium time. If performed at night, requiring ageneral outage, the Contractor shall furnish an auxiliary source of light and power asrequired. Under no circumstances shall an electrical outage of any duration be initiated untilthe Owner and Engineer have concurred, and as far as possible in advance.

C. See Section 01520 for additional requirements.

1.21 GROUNDING AND BONDING

A. All metallic conduit, cabinets, equipment, and service shall be grounded in accordance withthe latest issue of the National Electrical Code. All supporting framework and other metal ormetal clad equipment or materials which are in contact with electrical conduit, cable and/orenclosures, shall be properly grounded to meet the code requirements.

1.22 RELATED SPECIFICATION DIVISIONS

A. The following divisions contain Specifications on utilization equipment, equipmentaccessories, and procedures related to execution of the electrical work, and are includedhere for the Contractor’s information. Bids shall still be based on complete ContractDocuments.

Division 00 – Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms, and Conditions of the ContractDivision 01 – General RequirementsDivision 02 – Existing ConditionsDivision 03 – ConcreteDivision 05 – MetalsDivision 08 – OpeningsDivision 09 – FinishesDivision 10 – SpecialtiesDivision 11 – EquipmentDivision 12 – FurnishingsDivision 13 – Special ConstructionDivision 14 – Conveying EquipmentDivision 22 – PlumbingDivision 23 – Heating, Ventilating, and Air-ConditioningDivision 31 – Earthwork


Division 33 – UtilitiesDivision 40 – Process IntegrationDivision 46 – Water and Wastewater Equipment

1.23 CONTRACTOR LICENSING

A. The Contractor performing the electrical work on this project shall be locally licensed, ifrequired by local law or ordinance. If the Contractor has passed the State test, it may not benecessary to meet local testing requirements. It shall be the Contractor’s responsibility toinvestigate these requirements and comply with same.

1.24 ANCHORING/MOUNTING

A. Electrical conduits and/or equipment shall be rigidly supported. Anchors used shall bemetallic expansion type, or if appropriate to prevent spalling concrete, epoxy set type. Plasticor explosive type anchors are prohibited.

B. All supports shall be consistent with the latest edition of the KBC and ASCE 7.

1.25 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT MOUNTING HEIGHTS

A. Unless otherwise indicated, mounting height for components shall be as defined herein. Incases of conflicts with architectural or structural aspects, the components may be relocated.If an indicated height conflicts with a code requirement, the code shall govern.

B. Mounting heights are given from finished floor elevation to the centerline of the component,unless otherwise noted.

Component Height Comments

1. Wall type light switch 4'-0" To top of box2. Low wall outlet 16" To bottom3. Medium height wall outlet 4'-0"4. Medium height telephone outlet 4'-0"5. High wall outlet or fixture 7'-0"6. Wall type buzzers, horns, etc. 8'-0"

Max.Top 2" below ceiling

7. Push-button or control stations 4'-0"8. Top of panelboards or control panels 6'-6" Maximum (except for

handicapped areas)10. Top of switch handle on motor control

center6'-6" Maximum

11. Top of local motor controller 6'-0" Maximum12. Top of local disconnect switch 6'-0" Maximum13. Wall mount exterior light fixtures 8'-0" or as shown14. Wall mount emergency light fixtures 6'-6" Maximum to test

button15. Wall thermostats 4'-0" To top of thermostat

In situations where there appears to be a conflict with Americans with Disabilities Act(ADA) legislation, utilize the ADA requirements herein.

1.26 RECEIPTS

A. Some sections of the Specifications call for equipment, materials, accessories, etc. to beprovided and “turned over to the Owner” or like requirements. The Contractor shall obtain a


receipt for each item turned over, signed by the Owner or his representative. A copy of thisreceipt shall be transmitted to the Engineer.

B. When a question arises concerning whether items have been turned over to the Owner, andthere is no signed receipt, it may be assumed that the items were not provided.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED)

PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT USED)

END OF SECTION

ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION 260100-1 TOWN BRANCH WWTP THICKENING

SECTION 260100 - ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Furnish all labor, equipment, materials, and supplies necessary for and reasonably incidentalto demolition of work hereinafter specified, indicated on drawings, required or intended forcompletion of the work.

B. Repair those areas damaged under demolition work once new services and systems havebeen installed.

1.02 SUBMITTALS

A. No submittals are anticipated under this Section.

1.03 JOB CONDITIONS

A. Provide adequate protection to persons and property. Execute work in such a manner as toavoid interference with required operations and use of or passage to and from adjoiningbuildings and facilities.

B. Demolition work of equipment necessary for the operation of the power and communicationsystems to be coordinated with the installation of new equipment. The demolition andinstallation work is to be done as quickly as possible to minimize any burdens on the Owner.

1.04 CONDITION OF EXISTING FACILITIES

A. Contractor shall verify the areas, conditions and features necessary to tie new work intoexisting construction. This verification shall be done prior to submittal of shop drawings,fabrication or erection, construction or installation. The Contractor shall be responsible forthe accurate tie-in of the new work to existing facilities.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

NOT APPLICABLE

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 SCHEDULES

A. Schedule all demolition work as to cause minimal interference with existing facility operations.Refer to Specification Divisions 0 and Division 01 for additional requirements.

B. Obtain prior approval of the Owner at least seven days in advance before starting demolitionof any equipment. Under no circumstances will demolition work be approved until newequipment is ready for installation.

ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION 260100-2 TOWN BRANCH WWTP THICKENING

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Disconnect or arrange for disconnection of utility service connections to equipment and areasto be demolished before starting demolition.

B. Preserve in operating condition all active utilities transversing the project site. Protect allequipment that remains (electrical and mechanical) during demolition, and repair all damagecaused by this work to satisfaction of Engineer.

3.03 APPLICATION

A. All existing walls, ceilings, floor slabs, etc., being cut or damaged under this Contract shall bepatched back to match existing by General Contractor.

B. All existing switchgear, lighting fixtures, receptacles, control equipment and switches beingremoved shall be disposed of by the Contractor. Refer to 260000 for more details.

C. Conduits, wire and wood products that are not salvageable shall be disposed of legally.

D. Primary work shall be completed with all facilities kept in service or with short periods ofscheduled momentary outages.

E. Holes in slabs or into classified areas to be patched to provide a gas, vapor and watertightbarrier.

3.04 STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. The Owner reserves the right to save materials that are a part of the demolition work, and theContractor shall turn over and store any such materials at the Owner’s direction.

B. All materials not turned over to Owner shall become property of Contractor and removedpromptly from project site at no additional cost to the Owner. Any permits or fees for disposalshall be the responsibility of the Contractor.

3.05 CLEANUP

A. Burn no materials or debris on premises.

B. Remove from site rubbish and debris found thereon and, except as otherwise specified,materials and debris resulting from work of demolition. Leave site in safe and cleancondition.

END OF SECTION

CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 260519-1 TOWN BRANCH WWTP THICKENING

SECTION 260519 - CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE OF WORK

A. All wire and cable shall conform to the latest requirements of the NEC and shall meet allASTM/UL specifications. Wire and cable shall be new; shall have size, grade of insulation,voltage rating and manufacturer’s name permanently marked on the outer covering at regularintervals. Complete descriptive literature shall be submitted to the Engineer for review andacceptance prior to installation.

B. Building wire #12 - #1 shall be applied based on a 60 degree Celsius temperature rise.Building wire larger than #1 may be applied at its 75 degree Celsius temperature rise.

1.02 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Wire and cable shall be suitably protected from weather and damage during storage andhandling and shall be in first class condition when installed.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Building Wire (types “THWN” and “THW”-cu.) – “Southwire,” “Collyer,” “American,” “Carol,” orequal.

B. Control Cables (Shielded or unshielded) 600V max. – “Belden,” “Eaton-Dekoron,” “Okonite,”or equal.

C. Instrumentation Cables (Shielded) 600V mx. – “Eaton-Dekoron,” “Manhatton,” “American,”“Belden,” “Okonite,” or equal.

D. VFD cable for motor branch circuits from VFD’s: “Belden”, “Draka”, “Service Wire Co”, orequal.

2.02 MATERIALS

A. General

1. In general, all conductors shall be 98 percent conductive, annealed copper unlessotherwise noted on the Contract Drawings.

2. Conductors shall be type THW or THWN insulation. Conductor size shall be AWG(American Wire Gauge) Standard. Minimum conductor size shall be AWG number 12except branch circuits in excess of 75 feet from panel to first outlet not smaller than no.10 AWG. Minimum voltage rating shall be 600 volts. Conductors for small power may besolid (i.e. lighting, receptacles), but conductors for control work shall be stranded.

3. Conductors with high temperature rated insulations and special construction shall beused where required in connecting to light fixtures or appliances that have specialrequirements.

B. VFD Cable


1. The cable shall be 600V/1000V rated, with stranded tinned copper conductors, shielded,suitable for use with Variable Frequency Drives.

2. The insulation shall be rated for 90 degrees Celsius Wet/Dry operating temperature.

3. Accessories (terminations) shall have ratings that are at least equal to those of the cable.

4. All cables shall be round.

5. Cable shall be suitable for use in wet/dry locations, indoors and outdoors, in cable trays,in conduits, trenches, and in underground ducts and direct burial.

6. The conductor shall be annealed stranded tinned copper per ASTM B3, B8, and B33.

7. The insulation thickness shall have a minimum average wall thickness of 30 mils. Theinsulation material must be XLPE with an XHHW-2 listing per UL 44. Each insulatedconductor shall be identified in accordance with ICEA Method 4 color coding.

8. The insulated conductors are to be cabled together with a minimum of one ground wire.The ground wire(s) are to have a minimum circular mil area equivalent to one circuitconductor. Fillers shall be included as necessary to make the cable round.

9. The cabled assembly shall be shielded using one of two methods:

a. Applying helically two 2-mil copper tapes. The shield shall provide 100% coverageover the assembly.

b. Applying an 80% minimum coverage tinned copper braid shield used in conjunctionwith an Aluminum Foil shield tape.

10. All cables shall have a continuous overall outer sheath of Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC),suitable for 90 degree Celsius use.

11. The jacket shall be resistant to abrasion, rated for direct burial, sunlight resistant, andflame resistant in accordance with UL 1277.

12. The following permanent legend shall be clearly embossed or printed at approximately 2foot intervals on the outer jacket for the entire length of the cable:

a. Manufacturer’s name and or Trade Mark.

b. Number of conductors and size (-- AWG).

c. Type of insulation (XLPE) or NEC Listed Conductor Type (XHHW-2).

d. Voltage rating.

e. TC-ER rating.

f. 1000V Flexible Motor Supply Cable rating.

g. Sequential footing marking at 2 foot intervals.

13. Only one continuous (without splices) length of cable shall be shipped on a reel. Bothends shall be waterproof sealed, secured, protected from damage, and both ends shallbe available for testing.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION/APPLICATION/ERECTION

A. General

1. Conductors shall be continuous from outlet to outlet and no splices shall be made exceptaccessible in junction or outlet boxes. Wire connectors of insulating material orsolderless pressure connectors, properly taped, shall be used for all splices in wiring,wherever possible.

2. Conductors shall be color coded in accordance with the following schedule:

480/277V 208/240V 120/240, Single3 Phase 3 Phase Phase

Phase A Brown Black Black

Phase B Orange Red Red

Phase C Yellow Blue

Neutral (Grounded) White or LightGray

White or LightGray

White or LightGray

3-Way Tracers Blue

Grounding Green Green Green

Remote EnergizedConductors (Control)

Yellow

Control Std. Code Std. Code

3. Conductors shall be pulled into raceways in strict accordance with manufacturer’srecommendations.

4. Ample slack conductors shall be allowed at each terminal point, and pull or junction box,to permit installation with ease and without crowding.

5. All conductors terminating at terminal blocks shall be identified with numbers and/orletters identical to circuit or control identification.

6. No conductors shall be drawn into conduits until all work which may cause wire or cabledamage is completed. Wire pulling shall be accomplished utilizing machinery andaccessories intended for the purpose.

7. All connections and splices shall be made in accordance with conductor manufacturer’srecommendations, and as written herein.

8. In general, feeder sizes shown are based on no more than three current carryingconductors in a conduit. Multiple small branch circuit feeders may be combined in acommon conduit, provided conductors are derated in accordance with NEC article 310-15.

9. Unless otherwise specifically indicated, neutrals may not be shared.


B. Feeders

1. All feeders are of the secondary type, below 600 volts, unless otherwise noted.Secondary feeder voltage shall be 480 volt, as noted in the Contract Drawings. Threephase, 4 wire for power and 208/120 volt, 3 phase, 4 wire for general lighting, unlessotherwise noted. The Contractor shall furnish and install all feeders from the distributioncenter(s) to each of the other structures/subpanels as shown on the Contract Drawings.

2. Wire shall be factory color coded for each phase and neutral, with green used for theground conductor. As far as practical, all feeders shall be continuous from origin to paneltermination without running splices in intermediate pull boxes.

C. Control Cable

1. Control cable shall be the size and have the number of conductors shown on the controlsystem drawings. Control cable shall be used for motor controls and monitoring only.Color coding shall be ICEA, Method 1. Control cables between buildings shall beunderground in conduit of the size shown in the control system schematic. Cabling shallprovide a minimum of 25 percent spare conductors. Voltage rating shall be 600 volts.

D. Instrument Cable

1. General

a. All signal lines should be constructed of individually twisted pairs (6 to 10 twists perfoot), including thermocouple extension leads. Cables should be made of twistedpairs, with all lays and pairs twisted in the same direction for maximum flexibility.

b. Wire size is #16 AWG minimum.

c. Stranded tinned copper conductor shall be used for all wiring other thanthermocouple extension leads.

d. Insulation resistance at 68 degrees Fahrenheit between conductors and betweenconductors and ground should be at least 500 megohms per 1,000 feet.

e. Multi-pair cable should be jacketed with poly-vinyl-chloride, polyethylene or Teflon atleast 0.045" thick. Voltage rating shall be 600 volts.

2. Signal Wiring

a. Low level analog (less than 500 millivolt d-c). Use twisted pairs which may be cabledwith other pairs carrying similar voltage levels. Foil wraps or equivalent shielding isrequired for each cable with the shield insulated from ground.

b. High level analog (greater than 500 millivolts d-c). Use twisted pairs which may becabled with other pairs carrying similar voltage levels and current levels less than 100ma. Shielding is required.

c. Analog outputs (normally 0-4 d-c or 4-20 ma). Same as b.

d. Contact inputs - use twisted pairs and run in separate conduit.

e. Contact outputs - same as d.

f. Pulse inputs - same as d.

3. Signal and Shield Grounding


a. All shields must be grounded at one point only as close as possible to the signalsource.

b. Thermocouples may be grounded or ungrounded.

c. Analog signals, if grounded, should be grounded as near the signal source aspossible.

d. Resistance bulbs should not be grounded.

4. Signal and Wiring Separation

a. Analog signals shall be run in a separate conduit from contact or pulse signals.

b. A minimum separation of 12 inches between analog signal leads and a-c powerleads should be maintained. For a-c power leads carrying 100 amps or greater, a 24inch separation should be maintained. Parallel runs should be limited to less than500 feet. Perpendicular runs may be as close as 6 inches.

E. Submersible pump Power Cable

1. Power cables for submersible pumps shall be of the extra hard usage type suitable forsubmerged duty and able to withstand common corrosive agents found in water andwastewater. They shall be provided with high grade non-magnetic stainless steel reliefcable grips installed at the pump end and high grade non-magnetic stainless steelsupport cable grips anchored to the wet well structure where they enter the wet well. Thestrain relief and support cable grips shall be as manufactured by Kellems, Slater/Flexcor,or equal. Non-metallic corrosion resistant grips may be used in lieu of stainless steel ifavailable for the cable size.

F. Ethernet Cables

1. Ethernet cables shall be Category 6 rated.

2. Ethernet cables inside VFD cabinets shall be Category 6 rated and shielded.


A. Testing

1. All testing shall be performed in accordance with the requirements of the GeneralConditions and Division 1. The following tests are required:

a. Witness Shop Tests

1) Not required.

b. Shop Test

1) Cable and wiring shall be tested in accordance with the applicable ICEAStandards. Wire and cable shall be physically and electrically tested inaccordance with the manufacturer’s standards.

c. Field Tests

1) Field testing shall be done in accordance with the requirements specified in theGeneral Conditions, Division 1, and NETA acceptance testing specifications.


2) After installation, all wires and cables shall be tested for continuity. Testing forcontinuity shall be “test light” or “buzzer” style.

3) After installation, all wires and cables shall be tested for insulation levels.Insulation resistance between conductors of the same circuit and betweenconductor and ground shall be tested. Testing for insulation levels shall be asfollows:

a) For 600V power and control cable, apply 1,000 VDC from a Megohmeter forone (1) minute for all 600V wires and cables installed in lighting, control,power, indication, alarm and motor feeder circuits. Resistance shall be noless than 100 Megohms.

b) 600V instrumentation signal cable shall be tested from conductor toconductor, conductor to shield, and conductor to ground using a SimpsonNo. 260 volt-ohmmeter, or approved equal. The resistance value shall be200 Megohms or greater.

4) Low voltage wires and cables shall be tested before being connected to motors,devices or terminal blocks.

5) Voltage tests shall be made successively between each conductor of a circuitand all other conductors of the circuit grounded.

6) If tests reveal defects or deficiencies, the Contractor shall make the necessaryrepairs or shall replace the cable as directed by the Engineer, without additionalcost to the Owner.

7) All tests shall be made by and at the expense of the Contractor who shall supplyall testing equipment. Test reports shall be submitted to the Engineer.

END OF SECTION

SUPPORTING DEVICES 260529-1 TOWN BRANCH WWTP THICKENING

SECTION 260529 - SUPPORTING DEVICES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE OF WORK

A. All electric equipment shall be rigidly mounted, and installed using supporting devices asindicated on the Contract Drawings, as required by the work, and described herein.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. “Kindorf,” “Unistrut,” or equal.

2.02 MATERIALS

A. All mounting brackets and strut shall be aluminum. Fasteners used to mount equipment shallbe stainless steel.

B. Aluminum support members shall not be installed in direct contact with concrete. Stainlesssteel or non-metallic "spacers" shall be used to prevent contact of aluminum with concrete.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 ANCHORING CABINETRY

A. All free standing equipment shall be anchored to its foundation using expansion bolts of thesize and number recommended by the equipment manufacturer.

3.02 SEISMIC CONSIDERATIONS

A. Where indicated, seismic restraints shall be provided for electrical equipment.

END OF SECTION

RACEWAYS 260533-1 TOWN BRANCH WWTP THICKENING

SECTION 260533 - RACEWAYS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE OF WORK

A. This section of the Technical Specifications includes all raceways for accommodation ofelectrical conductors, communications conductors, sleeves for underground electricalinstallations, conduit stubs for future installations, fittings therefore and accessories.

B. All raceways shall be marked with the manufacturer’s name or trademark as well as type ofraceway and size. This marking shall appear at least once every 10 feet and shall be ofsufficient durability to withstand the environment involved. All raceways shall be furnishedand installed as outlined under Part 3 of this Specification.

C. All raceways and fittings shall be painted to match existing or surrounding surfaces except inmechanical spaces.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Tubular Raceways

1. Steel, Galvanized, Rigid, Heavy-Wall, Threaded – “Wheatland Tube Co.,” “Triangle,”“Allied Tube & Conduit Corp.,” or equal.

2. Plastic (PVC); Type A (Thin Wall); Type 40 (or Schedule 40); Type 80 (or Schedule 80)(Heavy -Wall) – “Carlon,” “Cantex,” or equal.

3. Flexible Metal Conduit – “AFC,” “Southwire,” or equal.

4. Liquidtight Flexible Metal Conduit – “Carol Cable Co., Inc.,” “Superflex,” “OZ Gedney,” orequal.

5. Liquid-Tight Flexible Non-Metallic Conduit - Type "LNM-P" as manufactured by Electri-Flex, Type "Ultralite" as manufactured by Southwire, Type "CNP" as manufactured byAnaconda, or equal.

6. Aluminum Conduit - “Wheatland Tube Co.”, “Allied Tube & Conduit Corp.”, or equal.

7. PVC Coated Metallic Conduit (PCMC) - "Plasti-Bond Red" as manufactured by RobroyIndustries, "OCAL-Blue" as manufactured by Ocal, Inc., Perma-Cote Supreme by Perma-Cote Industries, or equal.

8. Explosionproof Flexible Coupling (Class I, Division 1, Group D) – “Crouse-Hinds,”“Appleton,” “Thomas & Betts,” “O-Z/Gedney,” or equal.

B. Raceway Fittings

1. Conduit fittings – “Crouse-Hinds,” “Appleton,” “OZ Gedney,” or equal.

2. Non-metallic conduit fittings –“Carlon,” “Cantex,” or equal.

3. Flexible conduit fittings – “Raco,” “T & B,” “OZ Gedney,” or equal.


4. PVC Coated Metallic Conduit fittings - "Plasti-Bond Red" as manufactured by RobroyIndustries, "OCAL-Blue" as manufactured by Ocal, Inc., Perma-Cote Supreme by Perma-Cote Industries, or equal.

2.02 MATERIALS

A. Rigid Steel Conduit

1. Rigid steel conduit and fittings shall be of mild steel piping, galvanized inside and out,and shall conform to UL standards. The conduit and fittings hall be listed and labeled byUL as well. The galvanized coating of zinc shall be of uniform thickness applied by thehot-dipped process, and shall be applied also to the threads. It shall be further dipped ina chromic acid bath so as to chemically form a corrosion resistant protective coating ofzinc chromate which has a characteristic yellow-green color. Each piece of conduit shallbe straight, free from blisters and other defects, cut square, and taper reamed. It shall bedelivered with plastic protectors on the threads.

B. Polyvinylchloride (PVC) Conduit

1. PVC conduit and fittings shall be Schedule 40, 80 heavy wall, or thinwall, as indicated inthese Specifications manufactured to conform to UL standards. It shall be listed andlabeled by UL. It shall have at least the same temperature rating as the conductorinsulation. Expansion joints shall be used as recommended by the manufacturer inpublished literature. PVC systems shall be 90 degrees Celsius minimum UL rated, havea tensile strength of 7,000 psi @ 73.4 degrees Fahrenheit, flexural strength of 11,000 psiand compressive strength of 8,000 psi.

C. Flexible Conduit

1. Flexible metallic conduit shall be constructed from flexibly or spirally wound elecro-galvanized steel. Connections shall be by means of galvanized malleable iron squeezetype fittings, or tomic twist-in type in sizes not exceeding 3/4 inch. Liquidtight conduitshall be light gray in color and have sealtight fittings, type UA.

2. In hazardous locations where flexible connections are required, flexible couplings ULlisted for the application shall be used. The couplings shall consist of stainless steeltubing and outer braid, with insulating liner. Female end fittings shall also be stainlesssteel, with removable steel close nipples. Couplings shall be O-Z/Gedney, or equal.

D. Liquid-Tight Flexible Metal Conduit

1. Liquid-tight flexible conduit (LFMC) shall be galvanized steel, single strip, with a copperstrip interwoven and suitable as a grounding means. LFMC shall be UL listed. LFMCshall have an extruded moisture and oil-proof PVC jacket.

2. PVC coated or stainless steel watertight connectors shall be used with liquid-tight flexiblemetal conduit on both ends.

E. Liquid-Tight Flexible Non-Metallic Conduit

1. Liquid-tight flexible non-metallic conduit (LFNC) shall be constructed of PVC. LFNC shallbe UL listed. LFNC shall have an extruded moisture and oil-proof PVC jacket.

2. Watertight connectors shall be used with liquid-tight flexible non-metallic conduit on bothends. LFNC shall be used to connect all vibrating equipment installed in sodiumhypochlorite storage and transfer areas as specified herein, and other applications asdirected by the Engineer or as indicated on the drawings.


F. Aluminum Conduit

1. Aluminum conduit shall be extruded from alloy 6063 and shall be the rigid type, non-toxic,corrosion resistant, and non-staining. It shall be manufactured per UL standards as wellas listed/labeled by same.

2. Fittings, boxes, and accessories used in conjunction with aluminum conduit shall be diecast, copper free type. They shall be resistant to both chemical and galvanic corrosion.All covers shall have neoprene gaskets.

3. All aluminum conduit used for this project shall be UL listed for the purpose.

G. PVC Coated Metallic Conduit

1. PVC coated rigid steel conduit (PCMC) shall be rigid galvanized steel conduit coveredwith a bonded 40 mil (minimum) thickness PVC jacket and coated inside with urethane.The conduit shall comply with NEMA RN-1.

H. Conduit Fittings

1. Rigid Steel Conduit Fittings

a. Standard threaded couplings, locknuts, bushings, and elbows made only of steel ormalleable iron are acceptable. Integral retractable type IMC couplings areacceptable also.

b. Locknuts: Bonding type with sharp edges for digging into the metal wall of anenclosure.

c. Bushings: Metallic insulating type, consisting of an insulating insert molded or lockedinto the metallic body of the fitting. Bushings made entirely of metal or nonmetallicmaterial are not permitted.

d. Erickson (union-type) and set screw type couplings: Approved for use in concrete arepermitted or use to complete a conduit run where conduit is installed in concrete.Use set screws of case hardened steel with hex head and cup point to firmly seat inconduit wall for positive ground. Tightening of set screws with pliers is prohibited.

e. Sealing fittings: Threaded cast iron type. Use continuous drain type sealing fittings toprevent passage of water vapor. In concealed work, installed fittings in flush steelboxes with blank coverplates having the same finishes as that of other electricalplates in the room.

f. Fittings for PVC coated rigid conduit shall be manufactured by the maker of theconduit.

2. Rigid Aluminum Conduit Fittings

a. Standard threaded couplings, locknuts, bushings, and elbows: Malleable iron, steelor aluminum alloy materials. Zinc or cadmium plate iron or steel fittings. Aluminumfittings containing more than 0.4 percent copper are prohibited.

b. Locknuts and bushings: As specified for rigid steel and IMC conduit.

c. Set screw fittings: Not permitted for use with aluminum conduit.

3. Expansion and Deflection Couplings


a. Accommodate 1.9 cm (0.75 inch) deflection, expansion, or contraction in anydirection, and allow 30 degree angular deflections.

b. Include internal flexible metal braid sized to guarantee conduit ground continuity andfault currents in accordance with UL, and the NEC code tables for groundconductors.

c. Watertight, seismically qualified, corrosion-resistant, threaded for and compatible withrigid or intermediate metal conduit.

d. Jacket: Flexible, corrosion-resistant, watertight, moisture and heat resistant moldedrubber material and stainless steel jacket clamps.

I. Explosionproof Flexible Coupling

1. Explosionproof flexible couplings shall be liquid-tight with flexible stainless steel innercore with stainless steel outer braid. End fittings shall be stainless steel. Couplings shallbe minimum 12 inches in length. For severely corrosive locations, coupling shall haveflexible PVC outer coating.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 PREPARATION

A. Exterior underground metallic conduits shall be degreased, pretreated, and coated with 2coats of Carboline 888 epoxy, or equal. Other finishes may be acceptable upon the

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Conduit

1. All conduit shall be installed in a first class workmanship manner. It shall be installed inhorizontal and vertical runs in such a manner as to ensure against trouble from thecollection of trapped condensation and shall be arranged so as to be devoid of trapswherever possible. Special care shall be used in assuring that exposed conduit runs areparallel or perpendicular to walls, structural members, or intersections of vertical planesand ceilings. No open wiring is allowed.

2. Fittings or symmetrical bends shall be required wherever right angle turns are made inexposed work. Bends and offsets shall be avoided wherever possible, but wherenecessary, they shall be made with an approved conduit bending machine. All conduitjoints shall be cut square, reamed smooth and drawn up tight, using couplings intendedfor the purpose.

3. Conduits shall be securely fastened to all sheet metal outlets, junction and pull boxeswith double galvanized locknuts and insulating-grounding bushings as required by theNEC. Conduit crossings in insulating roof fill will require both conduits to be secured tothe roof deck, and these crossings can only be made where the insulating fill is aminimum of 3 inches deep. Runs of exposed conduit shall be supported in accordancewith the NEC using cast aluminum or malleable iron one hole pipe straps with spacers toprovide an air space behind the conduit. Stainless steel minerallaac, one piece conduitclamps shall be acceptable where located such that building occupants are not in dangerof inadvertent contact, since this type fitting has several sharp edges. In general terms,they may be considered in areas such as on or above ceilings, or high on walls. Allconduit in walls and slabs shall be securely braced, capped (wooden plugs areprohibited), and fastened to the forms to prevent dislodgement during vibration andpouring of concrete.


4. During construction, all conduit work shall be protected to prevent lodgement of dirt,plaster or trash in conduits, fittings or boxes. Conduits which have been plugged shall beentirely freed of accumulations or be replaced. All conduits in floors or below grade shallbe swabbed free of debris and moisture before wires are pulled. Crushed or deformedconduit shall not be permitted.

5. Where GRS conduit penetrates a floor slab the conduit shall be painted with 2 coats ofKoppers Bitumastic 300-M or equal to a point 6 inches above the penetration.

6. The final section of conduit connecting each motor or piece of utilization equipmentsubject to vibration shall be of the flexible type. Type “UA” shall be used in all processareas and in outdoor or wet locations. Flexible conduit to space heaters shall be longenough to allow swivel action.

7. All underground conduits entering a building shall be sealed against water/condensateentering around the conductors. Sealant may be silicone rubber based caulk.

8. In certain situations, conduit expansion joints shall be required to ensure against conduitand/or cable damage due to settling or thermal expansion and contraction. Theseexpansion joints shall be required where required by the manufacturer or the ContractDrawings and shall be installed per manufacturer’s instructions.

9. Aluminum conduits shall not be in contact with concrete surfaces. Where aluminumconduits are routed along concrete surfaces, they shall be installed with one hole caststraps with clamp-backs to space the conduit ¼” away from concrete surface. Wherealuminum conduit passes through concrete, CMU or brick walls, the penetration shall bemade such that the aluminum conduit does not come in contact with concrete, CMU,brick or mortar. All penetrations shall meet or exceed the UL design standards.Aluminum conduit shall transition to PVC coated steel conduit where entering a concreteencasement, floor or ductbank.

10. Unless specifically identified on the Drawings as "Direct Buried," all conduits in the earth,including conduits below slabs-on-grade, shall be concrete encased. Joints in conduitshall be staggered so as not to occur side by side. Rigid non-metallic (PVC) conduit shallbe connected to PVC coated rigid steel conduit at the point where it leaves the ground,with the transition to metal conduit occurring inside the concrete encasement. PVCcoated rigid steel conduit may transition to non-coated conduit after exiting theencasement. The transition coupling between PVC coated conduit and non-coatedconduit shall be PVC coated.

11. It is the general intent that boxes for light fixtures, switches, receptacles, etc. in or on thebuilding be flush mounted with concealed conduit to the device, except in areasdesignated to have all conduit installed exposed.

12. All metal raceway systems shall be grounding conductive, solidly bonded throughout andgrounded in accordance with NEC requirements and/or as noted on the ContractDrawings. In addition, all raceway systems shall be provided with separate groundingconductors.

13. Minimum conduit size shall be 3/4 inch. The following table shows the minimum burialdepth required for all exterior conduit or cable:

Schedule 40 PVC, Concrete Encased 18"Schedule 40 PVC, Concrete Encased (for medium voltageservice entrance)

42"

14. Wire pulling shall be facilitated by the use of a UL approved pulling compound in pullsover 30 feet in length or where there are 2 or more 90 degree bends. Only


polypropylene, nylon, or manila pulling ropes will be permitted. Standard industryrecognized wire pulling equipment shall be used.

15. All conduits entering and leaving instrument enclosures shall be sealed around the wireswith silicone caulk.

16. All conduits for emergency lighting systems shall be separate from other building powerconduits.

17. Areas of use for each type of conduit:

LocationSchedule40 PVC

Schedule80 PVC

Aluminum PCMC

Process Area – Exposed X X

Process Area – Concealed inWall

X X X

Exterior Exposed X X

Exterior Underground,Underslab, or In Slab

X X X

18. All conduit shall have an insulated ground wire pulled to all equipment and receptacles.

19. All raceway runs are shown diagrammatically to outline the general routing of theraceway. The installation shall be made to avoid interference with pipes, ducts, structuralmembers or other equipment. Should structural or other interference prevent theinstallation of the raceways, or setting of boxes, cabinets, or the electrical equipment, asindicated in the Drawings, deviations must be approved by the Owner, and afterapproval, shall be made without additional charges and shown on the Record Drawings.

20. Assure conduit installation does not encroach into the ceiling height head room,walkways, or doorways.

21. No conduit shall be run exposed across roofs without first obtaining permission from theEngineer.

22. Conduit may be run inside concrete slabs as long as the slab is at least 6-inches thickand conduit will have at least 1 2-inches of cover on both sides.

23. Runs of flexible conduit above accessible ceilings shall be limited to 10 ft. Runs ofexposed flexible conduit shall be limited to 5 ft. All runs of flexible conduit shall besupported in accordance with NEC requirements.

24. All PVC coated conduit shall be installed in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.The Contractor shall use tools that are specifically suited for coated conduit systems.The use of pipe wrenches and other such tools on PVC coated RGS conduit isprohibited. The Engineer and Owner reserve the right to reject any installation of coatedconduit that does not meet the requirements of the Section or the manufacturer’sinstructions. The Engineer and Owner also reserve the right to reject any installation thatexhibits damage due to the improper use of tools. All rejected installations shall bereplaced by the Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner. The use of PVC coatedconduit repair compounds to repair damages or improper installation is prohibited.

25. All Contractor personnel that install PVC coated RGS conduit shall be trained by the PVCcoated RGS conduit manufacturer. Training shall include proper conduit systemassembly techniques, use of tools appropriate for coated conduit systems, and fieldbending/cutting/threading of coated conduit. The Contractor shall furnish evidence of


such training as specified herein. Training shall have been completed within the past 24months prior to the Notice to Proceed on this Contract for all coated conduit installationpersonnel. Contractor personnel not trained within this timeframe shall not be allowedto install coated conduit, or shall be trained/re-trained as required prior to commencementof conduit installation.

26. Sealing fittings shall be installed where conduits pass from non-hazardous locations tohazardous locations and as required by Chapter 5 of the NEC. See section 16050 forhazardous area classifications.

END OF SECTION

BOXES 260534-1 TOWN BRANCH WWTP THICKENING

SECTION 260534 - BOXES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Outlet and junction boxes shall be furnished and installed where indicated on the ContractDrawings, and\or as required by the work in accordance with the NEC.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Boxes – “Wiegmann,” “Appleton,” “Raco,” “Crouse-Hinds,” “Hoffman,” “Robroy Industries,”“Spring City,” “Carlon,” or equal.

2.02 GENERAL

A. All junction and/or pull boxes for dry (non-corrosive) areas shall be of code gauge sheetmetal construction, of the inside dimensions as required by code, with covers.

B. Outlet boxes for wet or damp locations shall be cast metal, rust and corrosion resistant(NEMA 4X), with at least 5-1/2 full threads for each (bossed) conduit opening, and shall besuitable for flush or surface mounting as required with drilled external, cast mountingextensions (bossed to provide at least 1/8" between back of box and mounting surface fordrainage). Box covers shall be hinged or cap screw retained as required, of the samematerial as the box and provided with stainless steel (rustproof) hardware.

C. Junction and/or pull boxes for out-of-doors use or indoor process areas, not mounted inconcrete may be sheet metal (NEMA 4X), waterproof, rustproof, rain and sleetproof, withhinged covers and latches and provided means of locking by means of keyed locks, tamper-resistant screws or padlocking as required and with clamping cap-screws top and bottomdoor edges to provide firm contact with gasketing. All gaskets shall be molded (unbroken)neoprene or butyl rubber.

D. NEMA 4X junction and/or pull boxes may be stainless steel, if called for on the ContractDrawings; or non-metallic or cast aluminum.

E. Underground junction or pull boxes shall be constructed of reinforced concrete cast-in-placeor pre-fabricated as detailed on the Contract Drawings.

F. Junction boxes for use in wet-wells and other hazardous areas shall be watertight, rustproofand corrosion resistant, and explosionproof with threaded conduit openings (5-1/2 full threads- minimum) and provided with rustproof hardware.

G. Explosionproof sealing fittings shall be furnished and installed in accordance with NECrequirements.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION, APPLICATION, AND ERECTION

A. General

BOXES 260534-2 TOWN BRANCH WWTP THICKENING

1. Outlets shall be installed in the locations shown on the Contract Drawings. TheContractor shall study the general building plans in relation to the space surroundingeach outlet, in order that his work may fit the other work required by these Specifications.When necessary, the Contractor shall relocate outlets so that when fixtures or otherfittings are installed, they will be symmetrically located according to room layout and willnot interfere with other work or equipment.

2. All supports for outlet boxes shall be furnished and installed by the electrical trades.

B. Concealed Work

1. All outlet boxes shall be standard galvanized steel type at least 2 inches deep, single organg type of size to accommodate devices shown. Exceptions shall be noted on theContract Drawings.

2. Standard deep type outlet boxes (concrete rings with appropriate covers) shall be used infloor slab construction so concealed conduits entering sides of boxes can clearreinforcing rods.

3. Outlet boxes for concealed telephone and signaling systems shall be the 4-inch squaretype, unless otherwise noted or required by the telephone company.

4. Boxes for use in masonry construction shall be 2-1/2 inches deep for 4-inch block and 3-1/2 inches deep for 6- and 8-inch block. Through wall boxes are prohibited for outletsopposite each other.

C. Exposed Work

1. Outlet or junction boxes for use with exposed aluminum conduit shall be copper free, castaluminum type.

2. Outlet or junction boxes for use with exposed PVC conduit shall be PVC.

D. Pull Boxes

1. Pull boxes for exterior underground work are shown on the Contract Drawings and arethe minimum number required. Others may be added at the Contractor’s option, but noextra pay shall be allowed. Interior pull boxes are not shown but shall be used asneeded. Pull box types are as follows:

Exterior - Per detail on the Contract Drawings.

Interior - Interior pull boxes in dry areas shall be of code gauge steel of not lessthan the minimum required by the NEC and shall be provided withhinged covers. In wet areas or pipe galleries, they shall be ratedwatertight, of stainless steel, cast aluminum, PVC, fiberglass, or equal.Hardware shall be stainless steel.

E. Openings in Electrical Boxes

1. All openings in electrical equipment, enclosures, cabinets, outlet and junction boxes shallbe by means of welded bosses, standard knockouts, or shall be sawed, drilled, orpunched with tools specially made for the purpose. The use of a cutting torch isprohibited. Unused openings shall be plugged per the NEC.

END OF SECTION

ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION 260553-1 TOWN BRANCH WWTP THICKENING

SECTION 260553 - ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 EQUIPMENT LABELING

A. All starters, feeder units in panelboards, switchboards, disconnects, instruments, etc. shall bemarked to indicate the motor, outlet, circuit they control, or variable monitored. Marking is tobe done with engraved laminated nameplates and shall bear the designation shown on theContract Drawings where this information is given. Nameplates shall be fastened toequipment with stainless steel screws, minimum of one each side. In no way shall theinstallation of mounting screws void the NEMA enclosure rating of the equipment in whichthey are installed. If there are more than one identical unit, they shall be given consecutivenumbers or other descriptions as designated by the Engineer. Nameplate background colorshall be white, with black engraved letters, unless otherwise noted.

B. Branch circuits in lighting panels shall be typed on a card suitable for the card framefurnished with the panel. The card shall bear the panel designation listed on the ContractDrawings where this information is given, as well as indicate what each circuit controls.

C. Electrical equipment such as switchboards, panelboards, control panels, motor controlcenters, individually mounted starters, etc. shall be labeled with vinyl self-adhesive signs thatwarn of “High Voltage” (state the specific voltage) and potential arc flash and shock hazards.Arc flash and shock hazard labels shall include all boundary identifications (flash protection,limited approach, restricted approach, prohibited approach), PPE level, flash hazard (incidentenergy) level, and shock hazard level. Main service entrance conduits to a building, whereexposed, shall be labeled with the voltage of the service they carry. Other major equipmentsuch as transformers, transfer switches, generator sets, pump control panels, etc., shall belabeled as such. The type of labels to be used shall have orange as the basic color toconform with OSHA requirements, letters shall be black. The labels shall be of proper size tofit flatly on the surface of the enclosure to make for a neat appearance and not interfere withthe operating function of the device it is attached to. These labels shall be as manufacturedby the Brady Identification Systems Division, Safety Sign Company, Westline ProductsCompany, or equal.

D. Furnish and install “Authorized Personnel Only” signs by doors into all power distributionequipment rooms/buildings. Furnish and install other signs as indicated on the ContractDrawings.



END OF SECTION

SWITCHBOARD MATTING 262414-1 TOWN BRANCH WWTP THICKENING

SECTION 16495 - SWITCHBOARD MATTING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Switchboard matting shall be furnished by the Contractor and placed in front of all powerdistribution and control equipment.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Switchboard matting shall be W.H. Salisbury & Company, Wearwell, Erico, or equal.

2.02 MATERIALS

A. Switchboard matting shall be nonconductive with a minimum of 40,000 volts dielectricstrength. The mat shall have a corrugated, non-slip surface and shall be a minimum of 1/4inch thick. Width shall be 36 inches and length shall be as required at each location. The matshall be black in color, ozone and oil resistant, and manufactured to meet all applicableANSI/ASTM standards.


END OF SECTION

PANELBOARDS 262416-1 TOWN BRANCH WWTP THICKENING

SECTION 262416 - PANELBOARDS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE OF WORK

A. This section of the Technical Specifications includes furnishing all labor, materials,equipment, and incidentals required for the installation of all lighting and distributionpanelboards as hereinafter specified and as shown on the Contract Drawings.

B. The panelboards for installation under this Contract shall be selected from the following typeswith the panel voltage and main sizes the determining factors. All panelboards shall be by thesame manufacturer.

C. Circuit breakers of size and type shown on Contract Drawings and described herein shall beprovided with the panelboards.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. “Schneider Electric”, “Eaton/Cutler Hammer”, or equal.

2.02 EQUIPMENT

A. Rating

1. Panelboard ratings shall be as shown on the Contract Drawings. All panelboards shallbe rated for the intended voltage.

B. Standards

1. Panelboards shall be in accordance with the Underwriter Laboratories, Inc. “Standard forPanelboards” and “Standard for Cabinets and Boxes” and shall be so labeled whereprocedures exist. Panelboards shall also comply with NEMA Standard for Panelboardsand the National Electrical Code.

C. Panelboard Construction (NEMA 1)

1. Interiors

a. All interiors shall be completely factory assembled with circuit breakers, wireconnectors, etc. All wire connectors, except screw terminals, shall be of the anti-turnsolderless type and all shall be suitable for copper or aluminum wire of the sizesindicated.

b. Interiors shall be so designed that circuit breakers can be replaced without disturbingadjacent units and without removing the main bus connectors and shall be sodesigned that circuits may be changed without machining, drilling or tapping.

c. Branch circuits shall be arranged using double row construction except when narrowcolumn panels are indicated. Branch circuits shall be numbered by the manufacturer.

d. A nameplate shall be provided listing panel type, number of circuit-breakers andratings.


2. Bussing

a. Bus-bars for the mains shall be of copper. Full size neutral bars shall be included.Bus-bar taps for panels with single pole branches shall be arranged for sequencephasing of the branch circuit devices. Bussing shall be braced throughout to conformto industry standard practice governing short circuit stresses in panelboards. Phasebussing shall be full height without reduction. Cross connectors shall be copper.

b. Neutral bussing shall have a suitable lug for each outgoing feeder requiring a neutralconnection.

c. Spaces for future circuit-breakers shall be bussed for the maximum device that canbe fitted into them.

d. Separate neutral and ground bus shall be provided, insulated and isolated from eachother.

3. Boxes

a. Recessed boxes shall be made from galvanized code gauge steel having multipleknockouts, unless otherwise noted. Surface mounted boxes shall be painted tomatch the trim. Boxes shall be of sufficient size to provide a minimum gutter space of4 inches on all sides.

b. Surface mounted boxes shall have an internal and external finish as hereinafterspecified. Surface mounted boxes shall be field punched for conduit entrances.

c. At least 4 interior mounting studs shall be provided.

4. Trims

a. Hinged doors covering all circuit-breaker handles shall be included in all panel trims.

b. Doors shall have semi flush type cylinder lock and catch, except that doors over 43inches in height shall have a vault handle and 3-point catch, complete with lock,arranged to fasten door at top, bottom and center. Door hinges shall be concealed.Two keys shall be supplied for each lock. All locks shall be keyed alike; directoryframe and card having a transparent cover shall be furnished on each door.

c. The trims shall be fabricated from code gauge sheet steel.

d. All exterior and interior steel surfaces of the panelboard shall be properly cleanedand finished with manufacturer’s standard gray paint over a rust-inhibitingphosphatized coating. The finish paint shall be of a type to which field applied paintwill adhere without cracking or peeling.

e. Trims for flush panels shall overlap the box by at least 3/4 inch all around. Surfacetrims shall have the same width and height as the box. Trims shall be fastened withquarter turn clamps.

D. Overcurrent Protective Devices (Circuit Breakers)

1. Panelboards shall be equipped with circuit-breakers with frame size and trip settings asshown on the Contract Drawings.

2. Circuit-breakers shall be molded case, bolt-in, thermal-magnetic trip.


3. Circuit-breakers used in 120/208 volt panelboards shall have an interrupting capacity ofnot less than 10,000 amperes, RMS symmetrical.

4. Circuit-breakers used in 480 volt panelboards shall have an interrupting capacity of notless than 22,000 amperes, RMS symmetrical.

5. GFCI (ground fault circuit interrupter) shall be provided for circuits where indicated on theContract Drawings. GFCI units shall be 1-pole, 120 volt, molded case, bolt-on circuit-breakers, incorporating a solid state ground fault interrupter circuit insulated and isolatedfrom the circuit-breaker mechanism. The unit shall be UL listed Class A Group I device(5 milliamp sensitivity, 25 millisecond trip time), and an interrupting capacity of 10,000amperes RMS.

6. Trip elements of multi-pole breakers shall be effectively insulated from one another.Multi-pole breakers shall be designed so that an overload on any pole shall open all polessimultaneously.

7. The breaker operating mechanism shall be the quick-make, quick-break type and shall beentirely trip free to prevent the contacts being held in a closed position against a shortcircuit.

8. Breakers shall have a thermal bimetallic element for time delayed overload protectionand a magnetic element for short circuit protection.

9. The breaker shall be trip indicating with the trip position midway between the “On” and“Off” positions.

10. Breakers for power distribution panels shall be F frame or larger. All breakers ratedabove 225 amps shall have interchangeable magnetic trip elements.

11. All breakers shall be UL listed, and conform to requirements of NEMA Standards.

PART 3 - EXECUTION


A. Boxes for surface mounted panelboards shall be mounted so there is at least 1/2 inch airspace between the box and the mounting surface.

B. Circuit directories shall be typed giving location and nature of load served.

C. Each panelboard shall be nameplated with plastic engraved nameplates stating the panel’sname, voltage, and the name of panel serving the panel. Nameplates shall be secured byuse of stainless steel screws.

END OF SECTION

MOTOR CONTROL 262419-1 TOWN BRANCH WWTP THICKENING

SECTION 262419 - MOTOR CONTROL

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Contractor shall furnish and install motor control equipment as specified herein and as shownon the Drawings.

1.02 SUBMITTALS

A. Motor control equipment shall be new and the equipment of one manufacturer. Eachcomponent is specified by a particular trade name; however, this does not relieve theContractor of the responsibility of submitting descriptive literature and Shop Drawings forreview of all components. Motor control shall be the same brand as power distributionequipment on projects with both.

B. Shop drawings, including layout drawings, complete schematic and composite wiringdiagrams, control circuit wiring diagrams and descriptive literature shall be submitted to theEngineer for review. Service manuals shall be submitted on all equipment and shall bebound in 3-ring looseleaf binders. The manuals shall also include information onaccessories such as timers, etc., built in the control center.

1.03 SERVICE OF MANUFACTURER'S REPRESENTATIVE

A. The Contractor shall provide the services of a qualified manufacturer's technicalrepresentative who shall adequately supervise the installation and testing of all equipmentfurnished under this Contract and instruct the Contractor's personnel and the Owner'soperating personnel in its maintenance and operation as outlined elsewhere in Division 1.The services of the manufacturer's representative shall be provided for a period of not lessthan as follows:

1. One trip of one (1) working day during installation of the equipment for each motor controlcenter.

2. One trip of one (1) working day after acceptance of the equipment.

3. One trip of one (1) working day during the warranty period.

B. Any additional time required to achieve successful installation and operation shall be at theexpense of the Contractor. The manufacturer's representative shall sign in and out at theoffice of the Engineer's Field Representative on each day he is at the project.

1.04 TRAINING

A. The Contractor shall provide training for Owner personnel. Training shall be conducted bythe manufacturer's factory trained specialists who shall instruct Owner personnel in operationand maintenance of all equipment provided under this Section.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Control Equipment

1. “Schneider Electric”, “Eaton/Cutler Hammer”, or equal.


B. Timers

1. “Paragon”, “Tork”, “Intermatic”, or equal.

2.02 MOTOR CONTROL CENTERS (MCC)

A. General

1. Quality of built-in transformers, starters, lighting panelboards, timers, etc. shall be aswritten elsewhere in this Division unless otherwise noted.

2. Motor Control Center(s) shall consist of one or more enclosed vertical sections joinedtogether to form a rigid, free standing assembly. The construction of the Motor ControlCenter shall meet the requirements set forth by Underwriters’ Laboratories publicationUL-845, NEMA publication number ICS-2-322, the National Electrical Code, and colorcoded.

3. The structure shall be UL listed and labeled as service equipment if applicable. Allsections shall bear UL labels.

4. Enclosures shall be NEMA 1 unless otherwise indicated, and each control center suitablefor connection to an available fault current of 65,000 RMS symmetrical amperes unlessotherwise indicated on the Drawings.

B. Construction

1. Vertical Sections

a. Vertical sections shall support the horizontal and vertical buses, combination starterunits, covers and doors, and shall be designed to allow for easy rearrangement ofunits by the purchaser. Vertical sections shall have structural supporting membersformed of a minimum of 13 gauge hot-rolled steel. All finished surfaces shall beblemish-free. Where needed, reinforcement structural parts shall be of 10-gaugesteel to provide a strong rigid assembly. Each section shall be 90 inches high andshall have 7 gauge steel, 3 inch high removable lifting angle and two 1 1/2 inch highbase channels. Complete control center line-ups shall be divided into shipping splitsno wider than approximately 60 inches. The lifting angle shall be provided on the topof each shipping split and shall extend the entire width of the shipping split. Liftingangles shall be designed to support the entire weight of the MCC section. Basechannels shall be provided with holes to permit bolting the Motor Control Center(s) tothe floor. The entire assembly shall be constructed and packaged to withstand allstresses induced in transit and during installation.

b. Motor Control Centers shall be designed so that matching vertical sections of thesame current rating and manufacture can be added later at either end of the line-upwithout use of transition sections and without difficulty or undue expense.Removable end closing plates shall be provided to close off openings on the end ofthe Motor Control Center line-up. A removable top plate shall be provided on eachvertical section and shall be of one-piece construction for added convenience incutting conduit holes. The design shall allow use of the standard conduit entrancearea without significant sag or deformation of the top plate.

c. Vertical sections shall be designed to accommodate plug-on units in front-of-board orback-to-back construction as shown on Contract Drawings. Vertical sections housingplug-on units shall be 20 inches wide and shall be 20 inches deep. Wider sectionswill be permitted only for bolted connection type units not fitting the 20-inch widesections. Unit mounting area shall be divided into 1/2 space factor divisions, eachapproximately 6 inches. NEMA Size 1 and 2 combination starter units shall use only


1 space factor, or 12 inches, of unit mounting space. Vertical sections shall allow for7 space factors of unit mounting space. Removable blank plates shall cover allunused unit-mounting spaces. Blank plates shall be flanged on all 4 sides and shallbe mounted with captive screws. Blank space shall be equipped for future use.

d. Vertical sections shall be provided with both horizontal and vertical wireways.Sufficient clearances shall be provided in the horizontal wireway so that no restrictionis encountered in running wires from the vertical to horizontal wireway. Wirewaysshall be in accordance with the wireway sections contained in this document.

2. Horizontal Wireways

a. Horizontal wireways shall be provided in the top and bottom of each vertical sectionas indicated in the Contract Drawings and shall be arranged to provide full-lengthcontinuity throughout the entire assembly. The top horizontal wireway shall have across sectional area of not less than 20 square inches with openings betweensections of not less than 11/2 square inches. The bottom horizontal wireway shallextend through the length and depth of the vertical sections and shall also beprovided with openings of not less than 11/2 square inches to allow for full lengthcontinuity throughout the entire assembly. The bottom horizontal wireway heightshall be not less than 9 1/4 inches. Covers for all wireways shall be equipped withcaptive type screws to prevent loss of hardware during installation. All wireways shallbe isolated from the bus bars.

3. Vertical Wireways

a. A vertical wire trough shall be located on the right -hand side of each vertical sectionand shall extend from the top horizontal wireway to the bottom of the available unitmounting space. Each vertical wire trough shall have a cross sectional area of notless than 19 square inches and shall be isolated from the bus bars to guard againstaccidental contact. A separately hinged door having captive type screws shall coverthe vertical wire trough to provide easy access to control wiring without disturbingcontrol units.

b. Reusable wire ties shall be furnished in each vertical wire trough for the purpose ofgrouping and securely holding wires in place for a neat and orderly installation.

4. Busbars

a. A continuous main three-conductor horizontal bus shall be provided over the fulllength of the control center. A fully rated horizontal neutral bus (1200 amperemaximum) shall also be supplied over the full length of the Motor Control Center.When necessary, the bus shall be split to allow for ease in moving and handling.Splice bars will be supplied to join the bus wherever a split has been made. All spliceconnections shall be made with at least two bolts and shall employ the use ofBelleville washers in the connection. Horizontal bus bars shall be mounted edgewiseand supported by insulated bus supports.

b. For distribution of power from the main horizontal bus to each unit compartment, athree-phase vertical bus shall be provided. The vertical bus shall be firmly bolted tothe horizontal bus for permanent contact.

c. The main horizontal and vertical buses shall be made of copper and the entire lengthshall be electrolytically tin plated to provide maximum protection to the bus bars fromnormal or adverse atmospheric conditions.

d. Bus supports shall be formed of high strength glass reinforced alkyd material. Bussupports shall have generous surface clearances in the vertical plane to shed dust


and maintain dielectric integrity. Bus supports and insulators shall be red to indicateproximity of energized bus parts.

e. Horizontal and vertical buses shall have continuous current ratings adequate tohandle all loads as shown on the one line diagram in the Contract Drawings.Continuous current ratings shall be in accordance with temperature risespecifications established by UL, ANSI, and NEMA standards.

f. A copper ground lug shall be provided in each incoming line vertical section capableof accepting a #8 to 250 MCM cable. A horizontal copper grounding bus shall beprovided in each section of the Motor Control Center. Horizontal grounding bus shallrun continuously throughout the control center except where splits are necessary forease of shipment and handling in which case splice bars shall be provided.Grounding bus shall be tin plated copper and have a cross sectional area equal to28% of the main horizontal bus cross sectional area. Horizontal ground bus shall belocated at the bottom of the Motor Control Center.

5. Bus Barriers

a. Insulated horizontal and vertical bus barriers shall be furnished to reduce the hazardof accidental contact with the bus. Barriers shall have a red color to indicateproximity of energized buses. Vertical bus barriers shall have interlocking front andback pieces to give added protection on all sides and shall segregate the phases toreduce the possibility of accidental “flash over”. Small, separate openings in thevertical bus barriers shall permit unit plug-on contacts to pass through and engagethe vertical bus bars. Bottom bus covers shall be provided below the vertical bus toprotect the ends of the bus from accidental contact with fish tapes or other itemsentering from the bottom of the enclosure.

b. Isolation of unused stab openings shall be accomplished by use of a manual shutterto close off the stab opening. These shutters shall be attached to the structure sothat when they are removed (to allow a stab connection) they are retained in thestructure and are readily accessible for use should a plug-in unit be removed from themotor control center.

6. Main Incoming Lug Compartment

a. A front accessible main lug compartment shall be provided with suitable main lugs toaccommodate the number of cables per phase as indicated on the ContractDrawings. The compartment shall be located in the top most or bottom most unitspace of the section to accommodate the user’s cables entering the Motor ControlCenter as indicated on the Contract Drawings. The main incoming lug compartmentshall be covered by a hinged door for maintenance access. This door shall be heldclosed with captive type screws to discourage unauthorized access. (A unit doorpadlock attachment shall also be provided to lock the door in the closed position withone 5/16 inch diameter shackle padlock. This attachment shall also accept a metertype seal.)

7. Units

a. Combination starter units shall consist of Size 1 minimum full voltage magneticstarters, autotransformer reduced voltage starters, molded case magnetic-only circuitbreakers, and auxiliary control devices, as required and/or shown on the one-line andelementary diagrams. Pilot light assemblies (push-to-test) shall be 30 mm LED. Allauxiliary equipment, except that which is specified for mounting on the door, shall bemounted within the compartment. All units shall be provided with unit doors, unitsupport pans, unit saddles and unit disconnect operators as outlined in thisSpecification. Each unit compartment shall be enclosed and isolated from adjacentunits, buses and wireways except for openings for conductor entrance into units.


Units shall be designed and constructed so that any fault will be localized within thecompartment. All units shall be UL listed for minimum of 65,000 amperes RMSsymmetrical fault withstand ability unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings.

b. Plug-on combination starter units of the same NEMA size and branch feeder units ofthe same trip size shall be readily interchangeable with each other. It shall bepossible to withdraw each plug-on unit to a de-energized position with the unit stillbeing supported by the structure. It shall be possible to lock the unit in this positionwith one padlock.

c. Full voltage non-reversing combination starter units shall have the following minimumspace factor requirements, shall be provided with plug-on connections and shall beprovided with ample space for customer wiring room:

Circuit BreakerSpace Factor

Size 1 1Size 2 1Size 3 1 1/2Size 4 2

8. Unit Plug-On

a. For convenient unit connection to bus bars, unit plug-on contacts shall be providedon the following units:

1) For circuit breaker type units; full voltage starters, size 4 and smaller; auto-transformer reduced voltage starters, size 4 and smaller; part winding reducedvoltage starters, size 4PW and smaller; branch circuit units, 225 ampere andsmaller.

b. The plug-on connection for each phase shall be of a high quality two- pointconnection and shall be designed to tighten around the vertical bus bar during aheavy current surge. For trouble-free connections, the plug-on fingers shall be silverplated and coated with a compound to assure a low resistance connection. Contactfingers shall be of a floating and self-aligning design to allow solid seating onto thevertical bus bars.

c. Starters NEMA size 4 and larger shall bolt directly to the vertical bus bars, circuitbreakers rated higher than 225 amps shall also bolt directly to the bus bars.

9. Unit Doors

a. Each unit shall have a door securely mounted with rugged concealed-type hingeswhich allow the door to swing open a minimum of 112° for unit maintenance andwithdrawal. Doors shall be fastened to the structure so that they remain in placewhen a unit is withdrawn and may be closed to cover the unit space when the unithas been temporarily removed. Doors shall be held closed with captive type screwswhich engage self-aligning cage nuts. These screws shall provide at least twothreads of engagement to hold doors closed under fault conditions. Each unit doorshall be interlocked with its disconnect mechanism to prevent the door from openingwhen the unit is energized. A defeater mechanism shall be provided for defeatingthis interlock by authorized personnel. Removable door panels held with captive typescrews shall be provided on starter unit doors for mounting push buttons, selectorswitches or pilot lights. Blank door panels capable of accepting future pilot devicesshall be furnished when pilot devices are not originally specified for starter units.Each starter unit door shall house an external low-profile overload reset button forresetting the overload relay in the event of tripping.


10. Unit Support Pan

a. Each plug-on unit shall be supported and guided by a tilt and lift-out removable panso that unit rearrangement can be easily accomplished. For easy unit installation andrearrangement, transfer of this unit support pan from one location to another shall beaccomplished with ease after the control unit and door have been removed.

11. Unit Saddles

a. Each plug-on unit shall have a saddle of 14 gauge hot rolled steel designed andconstructed to physically isolate the unit from the bus compartment and adjacentunits. Saddlers shall be equipped with captive, self-aligning mounting screws whichshall hold the unit securely in place during shipment. Flanged edges shall beprovided on each saddle to facilitate unit removal.

12. Disconnect Operators

a. An external operator handle shall be supplied for each switch or breaker. Thismechanism shall be engaged with the switch or breaker at all times regardless of unitdoor position to prevent false circuit indication. The operator handle shall be colorcoded to display red in the “ON” position and black in the “OFF” position. Theoperator handle shall have a conventional up-down motion and shall be designed sothat the down position will indicate the unit is “OFF”. For added safety it shall bepossible to lock this handle in the “OFF” position with up to three padlocks. Theoperator handle shall be interlocked with the unit door to prevent switching the unit to“ON” while the unit door is open. A defeater mechanism shall be provided for thepurpose of defeating this interlock by a deliberate act of an electrician should hedesire to observe the operation of the operator handle assembly or the unitcomponents. Operators shall not be higher than 6'-6" above finished floor elevation,as installed.

13. Wiring

a. The motor control center wiring shall be NEMA Class II, Type B.

b. All wiring to the terminal strips from outside the MCC shall be made with spade typeterminals of the proper size and rating for the wire used. Pull apart terminal blocksshall be provided in unit spaces of motor starters that contain field wiring energizedfrom a remote source to comply with NEC Article 430-74.

c. All control wiring shall be No. 14 AWG (minimum) labeled at each end in accordancewith the wiring numbers shown on the accepted shop drawings. Power wiring shallbe sized to suit the maximum horsepower rating of unit; No. 12 AWG (minimum).Wiring shall be type MTW rated for 105C. Wire color coding shall be red for control and black for power. Wire numbers shall not be repeated in a motor control center.

14. Finish

a. The finish shall be manufacturer’s standard gray enamel applied over a rust inhibitingphosphate primer.

15. Optional Modifications and Accessories

a. Additional modifications and accessories shall be as listed and specified on theContract Drawings.

16. Identification


a. A control center identification nameplate describing section catalog numbers andcharacteristics shall be fastened on the vertical wire trough door of every section.Each control center unit shall have its own identification nameplate fastened to theunit saddle. These nameplates shall have suitable references to factory records forefficient communication with supplier. Each control center unit shall also have anengraved Bakelite nameplate fastened to the outside of each unit door inscribed aswritten on the Contract Drawings for ease in identification and for making changeswhen regrouping units. An overall structure nameplate is also required.

17. Metering

a. All voltmeters, ammeters, wattmeters, current transformers, potential transformersand phase selector switches shall be furnished as shown on the Contract Drawings.Meter accuracy shall be + 1 percent. Solid state metering shall be as specified thissection.

C. Starters and Overcurrent Protective Devices

1. Magnetic Starters

a. Magnetic starters shall be furnished in all combination starter units unless otherwiseindicated on Contract Drawings. Starter Sizes 1 through 4 shall employ the use of abell-crank lever design to transform vertical action of the armature into horizontalaction of the contact carriers and thus minimize contact bounce and produce extralong contact life. Thermal overload relays on starters shall be ambient temperaturecompensated bimetallic type with selector for either auto or manual reset. Overloadheater units shall be provided in each starter unit. Overload relay heater schedulesshall be provided on each starter unit.

2. Circuit Breakers

a. Type FA, KA, LA, MA and PA molded case circuit breakers shall be furnished in allstarter and branch feeder units using circuit breakers as a disconnect means. Allcircuit breakers will have a push-to-trip test feature for testing and exercising thecircuit breaker trip mechanism.

3. Starters shall conform to requirements listed under individually mounted Motor ControlDevices, hereinafter.

D. Transformers

1. 480 volt primary, 120/240 volt or 120/208 volt secondary transformers shall be asspecified in other sections of this Division.

2.03 INDIVIDUALLY MOUNTED MOTOR CONTROL DEVICES (480, 240, OR 120 VOLT)

A. General

1. All motor control equipment shall be new and the product of 1 manufacturer. Allindividually mounted disconnects, push-button stations, latchout stations, starters, etc.,indoors shall be mounted on a 1 inch galvanized unistrut, 1 inch Kindorf channel, or equalto provide an air space at rear. Outside mounted equipment shall utilize 1-inch aluminumstrut as required in 26059.

B. Starters

1. General


a. All starters shall be of the voltage rating, type, and sized for the motor size shown inthese Specifications and/or on the Contract Drawings. For enclosure type see thesystem operation description and/or the Contract Drawings. All starters shall be ofthe magnetic type. Should a piece of electrically driven equipment be furnished witha larger motor than shown on the Contract Drawings, the proper size combinationstarter shall be provided for the equipment supplied, at no extra cost to the Owner.

b. See the Contract Drawings for the auxiliary equipment to be furnished and/or Section16900 - Controls of this division. Maximum control voltage shall be 120 volts, a-c.Minimum starter size shall be NEMA Size 1.

2. Overloads

a. Each starter shall have a thermal overload device in each ungrounded leg. Theoverload shall be of the “Ambient compensated Bi-metallic”, thermal element type.All overloads shall be of the manual reset type and shall be reset without opening thestarter enclosure. Heaters will be sized for the proper temperature rise of the motorthat it is being used on. Heaters for general service shall be of the standard trip type.Adjustable Overload Relay Thermal Units are not allowed. All integralhorsepower motors, 15 horsepower and over, require thermal elements embedded inthe windings. See Motor Specifications, this division. Siemens-Allis overload relaysshall be provided with a meter-sealed cover over relay adjustment controls.

3. Contactors

a. All contactors for motor starters shall be of the a-c magnetic type with “undervoltage”protection when used in conjunction with momentary contact push-button control and“undervoltage” release when used with maintained contact push-button control.

b. Contactor size shall be in accordance with NEMA Standards for the motor controlledand shall be horsepower rated. IEC rated equipment is not acceptable and shall beused as a basis for rejection of the equipment.

c. Contacts shall be of the heavy duty silver-to-silver type and shall be totally enclosedin individual arc quenching chambers. Contacts shall be easily accessible forreplacement.

d. The contactor coil shall be of the vacuum impregnated or epoxy resin type, moistureresistant and corrosion proof.

C. Control Stations

1. General

a. Control stations shall be heavy duty, maintained or momentary contact type, as notedon the Contract Drawings. Contacts shall be silver alloy, double break type. Thenumber and marking of controls shall be as shown on the Contract Drawings.Enclosures shall be NEMA 4X for indoor and outdoor mounting, unless otherwisenoted on the Contract Drawings. All control stations shall operate on 120 volt, a-cmaximum, unless otherwise designated on the Contract Drawings. “Latch-out”facilities shall be provided where called for in these Specifications and/or on theContract Drawings.

2. Maintained Contact

a. Maintained contact control switches shall be marked “On” and “Off”. The buttonpushed shall remain in and push the other button out until the other button is pushed.In general, they are to be used for hand control of motors which have to operate


continuously and restart whenever power is off then resumed, without any manualoperator. This is needed for motors which have to operate continuously in theabsence of an operator.

3. Momentary Contact

a. Momentary contact control push-button switches shall be marked “start” and “stop”.Pushbuttons shall spring out whenever pushed. If the circuit is dropped for anyreason, operation cannot be resumed until a “start” push-button is pushed. Ingeneral, they are to be used for hand control of motors which are desired to operateintermittently in the presence of the operator and stop and start independently frommore than one parallel control location.

D. Circuit Breakers

1. Circuit breakers shall be molded case type. Trip elements of multi-pole breakers shall beeffectively insulated from one another. Multi-pole breakers shall be designed so that anoverload on any one pole shall open all poles simultaneously.

2. The breaker operating mechanism shall be the quick-make, quick-break type and shall beentirely trip free to prevent the contacts being held in a closed position against a shortcircuit.

3. Breakers not used with motor starters shall be of the thermal magnetic type with athermal bimetallic element for time delayed overload protection and a magnetic elementfor short circuit protection.

4. The breaker shall be trip indicating with the trip position midway between the “On” and“Off” positions.

5. Breakers for combination starters shall be 100 amp frame or larger. All breakers forcombination starters shall have an adjustable magnetic trip element of the motor circuitprotector type.

6. Breakers for combination starters shall be F frame or larger. All breakers shall haveadjustable magnetic trip elements. Circuit breakers K frame and larger shall haveinterchangeable thermal-magnetic trip elements.

E. Safety Switches

1. Safety switches shall be of the heavy duty industrial, quick make, quick-break type.Ratings shall correspond to that of the equipment in which circuit it is used, fuses sizedas shown on the Contract Drawings. All safety switches at motor locations are of thenonfused type unless otherwise noted.

2. Safety switches shall have a mechanical door interlock to prevent the door from beingopened with the switch in the on position and facilities for locking it in the closed or openposition. Enclosures for process areas and outside installations shall be NEMA 4X andenclosures for indoor, non-process areas, shall be NEMA 1, unless otherwise designatedin Section 16900 of this division and/or on the Contract Drawings.

3. Safety switches shall be UL listed and shall conform to NEMA Standards. NEMA 4Xenclosed safety switches where called for shall be stainless steel, or fiberglass.

4. NEMA 1 enclosed switches shall be phosphate coated or equivalent, code gauge steelwith baked enamel finish.

F. Selector Switches


1. Hand-off-automatic type selector switches shall be of oil-tight construction and shall have3 positions. The switch must not have a spring loaded return. It shall be of the “quick-make”, “quick-break” type.

G. Manual Motor Starting Switches

1. Manual motor starting switches for the control of fractional horsepower motors shall besingle pole, and shall be provided with a thermal heater of the correct size for the loadcontrolled. Each starting switch shall be mounted where shown on the ContractDrawings. Where they are used for rotating equipment such as grinders, they shall beequipped with low voltage protection, and required manual reset after power failure. Asan alternate to low voltage protection built-in, a “Safety Restart Plug” may be utilized,available from Mitchell Instrument Company.

H. Alarm Horns

1. Alarm horns, where called for on the Contract Drawings, shall be weatherproof, suitablefor surface mounting and shall be provided with a silence button. Alarm horn shall beEdwards 876 series with 103dB at 10 feet, Federal Signal, or equal.

I. Timing Relays

1. Time delay relays shall have an adjustable timing range as shown on the ContractDrawings. The time delay shall be after energizing timer coil. Timing relays shall beAgastat, Square D, or equal.

2.04 TIMERS

A. Timers for various services required in the motor control equipment shall be Paragon, Tork orequal as indicated in control circuits shown on the Drawings.

B. Timers requiring tripping pins shall be supplied with enough pins to completely fill all locationson the dial face.

PART 3 - EXECUTION


A. Motor Control Centers

1. Ends of MCC(s) shall be closed with 1/4" mesh hardware cloth and galvanized oraluminized insect screen or sill covers to prevent the entrance of rodents and largeinsects into the MCC housing(s).

2. Each MCC shall be provided with a 4" high concrete pad.

3. One inch air space (min.) shall be allowed between back of MCC(s) and wall surface.

4. Lifting-eyes in tops of MCC(s) section shall be removed (and retained) and the threadedopenings closed with stainless cap screws and plastic washers or plastic seals providedfor that purpose by the MCC(s) manufacturer.

5. In installations where conduit runs to electrical equipment emanate from the top ofMCC(s) there shall be provided additional wiring space in the form of metal trough(s) ofthe same metal housing(s) dimensions and details. Trough(s) shall be provided by themanufacturer of the MCC(s).


B. Individually Mounted Motor Control Devices (480, 240, or 120 Volt)

1. Each motor disconnect shall be located as near as possible to its respective motor.

2. Remote control station at or near motor shall be mounted near its respective motor,adjacent to the motor disconnect.

3. All devices and equipment furnished under this section (electronic circuit monitors, powercorrection equipment, etc.) shall be programmed, configured, and calibrated by themanufacturer. Any settings required shall be as determined by the manufacturer. Ifcoordination studies or power system analysis is required, it shall be performed by themanufacturer.

3.02 EXTRA STOCK/SPARE PARTS

A. Provide the following spare parts:

10 fuses of each type/amperage used

1 pilot light lamp for each pilot light socket assembly provided

1 control transformer for each size utilized

END OF SECTION

WIRE CONNECTIONS AND CONNECTING DEVICES 262700-1 TOWN BRANCH WWTP THICKENING

SECTION 16150 - WIRE CONNECTIONS AND CONNECTING DEVICES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Wire connection and connecting devices shall be as herein specified.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Connectors, Lugs, etc. – “T & B”, “Anderson”, “Burndy”, or equal.

B. Termination and splice connectors – “3M Scotchlok”, “Anderson”, “T & B”, “Burndy”, or equal.

2.02 MATERIALS

A. Wire Splicing and Terminations (600 Volts and Below)

1. Electrical Terminal and Splice Connectors (#22 - #4 AWG)

a. Terminals and splice connectors from #22 - #4 AWG shall be compression types withbarrels to provide maximum conductor contact and tensile strength. Performance,construction, and materials shall be in conformance with UL standards for wireconnectors and rated for 600 volts and 105 degrees Celsius.

b. Connectors shall be manufactured from high conductivity copper and entirely tinplated. Terminal barrels shall be serrated on the inside surface and have achamfered conductor entry. Terminals shall have funnel entry construction to preventstrand fold-back. All barrels shall be brazed seam or seamless construction.

c. Spade type terminals shall be sized for the appropriate stud and shall be locking typethat snap firmly onto studs with a close fit for maximum retention. Spade typeterminals shall be insulated with an insulation suitable for maintaining a high dielectricstrength when crimped and be made form nylon, PVC, or equal.

2. Electrical Lugs and Connectors (#6 AWG - 1000 Kcmil)

a. Lugs and splice connectors from #6 AWG - 1000 Kcmil shall be compression typeswith barrels to provide maximum conductor contact and tensile strength. They shallbe manufactured from high conductivity copper and entirely tin plated. They shall becrimped with standard industry tooling. The lugs and connectors must have a currentcarrying capacity equal to the conductors for which they are rated and must alsomeet all UL requirements. All lugs above 4/0 AWG shall be 2 hole lugs with NEMAspacing. The lugs shall be rated for operation through 35 KV. The lugs shall be ofclosed end construction to exclude moisture migration into the cable conductor.

3. Twist-on Wire Connectors (#22 AWG - #10 AWG)

a. All twist-on wire connectors must have a corrosion resistant spring that is free toexpand within a steel jacket. The steel jacket must be insulated with a flexible vinyljacket capable of withstanding 105 degrees Celsius ambient temperatures and ofsufficient length to cover wires that are inadvertently overstripped.


b. Each connector size must be listed by UL for the intended purpose and color codedto assure that the proper size is used on the wire combinations to be spliced. Theconnectors must be compatible with all common rubber and thermoplastic wireinsulations.

4. Solderless/re-usable lugs shall be used only when furnished with equipment such ascontrol panels, furnished by others, where specification of compression type lugs isbeyond the Contractor’s control. In the event their use is necessary, the Contractor shallbe responsible for assuring that they are manufactured to NEMA standards, with propernumber and spacing of holes and set screws.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION, APPLICATION, & ERECTION

A. Insulation of Splices and Connections

1. Connections/splices with a smooth even contour shall be insulated with a conformable 7mil thick vinyl plastic insulating tape which can be applied under all weather conditionsand is designed to perform in a continuous temperature environment up to 105 degreesCelsius. The tape shall have excellent resistance to abrasion, moisture, alkalies, acids,corrosion, and varying weather conditions (including sunlight). The tape shall be equal toScotch 33+ and shall be applied in conformance with manufacturer’s recommendations.In addition, it shall be applied in successive half-lapped layers with sufficient tension toreduce its width to 5/8 of its original width. The last inch of the wrap shall not bestretched.

2. Connections/splices with irregular shapes or sharp edges protruding shall be firstwrapped with 30 mil rubber tape to smooth the contour of the joint before being insulatedwith 33+ insulating tape specified in the previous paragraph. The rubber tape shall behigh voltage (69 KV) corona-resistant based on self-fusing ethylene propylene rubber andbe capable of operation at 130 degrees Celsius under emergency conditions. The tapemust be capable of being applied in either the stretched or unstretched condition withoutany loss in either physical or electrical properties. The tape must not split, crack, slip, orflag when exposed to various environments. The tape must be compatible with allsynthetic cable insulations. The tape must have a dissipation factor of less than 5percent at 130 degrees Celsius, be non-vulcanizing, and have a shelf life of a least 5years. The rubber tape shall be applied in successive, half-lapped wound layers andshall be highly elongated to eliminate voids. Other manufacturer’s recommendations oninstallation shall be adhered to. The rubber tape shall be equal to Scotch 23 or 130Celectrical splicing tape.

3. Splices made in wet or damp locations shall be made submersible and watertight withspecial kits made for the application and compatible with type of cables employed.

B. Connection Make-up

1. Connections of lugs to bus bars, etc., shall be made up with corrosion resistant steelbolts having non-magnetic properties with matching nuts, and shall utilize a Bellevillespring washer (stainless steel) to maintain connection integrity. Connections shall betorqued to the proper limits. Prior to bolting up the connection, electrical joint compoundshall be brushed on the contact faces of the electrical joint.

2. All motor lead connections shall be made up to match the type of lead furnished on themotor. If the lead is not lugged, then twist-on wire connectors may be used. To preventpossible vibration problems, twist-on connectors shall be taped after installation.


3. All lugged motor lead connections (excluding motors over 200 horse-power) shall bemade up using ring tongue compression lugs with proper size stainless steel nuts andbolts. Belleville type spring shall be used to maintain tension on the connections. Theconnections shall then be insulated using the procedure described for irregular shapes,utilizing rubber tape in conjunction with vinyl electrical tape.

4. At the time of final inspection, the Engineer may request the Contractor to disassemble 3randomly selected motor lead connections in the Engineer’s presence, to assureconformance with these Specifications.

5. The Contractor shall include all necessary tools, materials, and labor in his bid fordisassembly of the connections and for remaking them with new insulating materials afterinspection.

END OF SECTION

CONTROL PANELS AND ENCLOSURES 262716-1 TOWN BRANCH WWTP THICKENING

SECTION 262716 – CONTROL PANELS AND ENCLOSURES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Equipment controls shall be as specified herein and shown on the Contract Drawings.Legends for VFD nameplates shall be taken from the one line diagram in the ContractDrawings.

B. Certain equipment starters contain nonresettable elapsed time meters as shown in theContract Drawings. Also, certain motor starters have remote control devices and requireconnections to operate these control devices as shown on starter schematics (controlcircuits).

C. All starters contain red “on” lights, control transformers, and auxiliary contacts to operate asdefined on the control circuits of the Contract Drawings. Reset pushbuttons shall also beprovided for overloads built into the starters.

1.02 CUSTOM CONTROL PANELS

A. All control panels furnished under this Contract shall be manufactured in accordance withindustry standards and as herein specified. Some control panels are specified to befurnished with the equipment controlled and others are to be furnished by the Contractor, aswritten elsewhere.

B. Panel construction shall comply with OSHA and other code requirements as applicable, andmay be attested to by UL listing the panels as an assembly. Otherwise, panel modificationsas required by the Electrical Inspector shall be performed by the supplier at no extra cost tothe Owner.

C. Control panels to be furnished on this project shall be wired to function according toschematics shown on the contract Drawings. In addition to the requirements shown on theContract Drawings, the panels shall adhere to additional requirements as written herein, andin the utilization equipment specifications.

D. Enclosures shall be dead front with all operators’ devices accessible without opening theenclosure door. All relays, timers, terminal strips, etc., shall be mounted to a subpanel insidethe enclosure. All wiring must be stranded and sized to be protected by a 20 A circuitbreaker. Supplemental overcurrent protection may be used in lieu of oversized wiring. Allpanels mounted outside shall have operators devices mounted on an inner door with anoutdoor door that is blank.

E. All terminal strips and lugs shall be of a type UL listed to terminate the size and quantity ofwires encountered. Myers hubs shall be installed to maintain the enclosure rating whereconduits enter NEMA 4X rated enclosures. The exterior of stainless steel NEMA 4Xenclosures shall be unpainted. The exterior of NEMA 12 panels shall be painted ANSI 49light gray, lacquer or enamel.

F. Enclosures shall be provided with a locking hasp and any exterior hardware shall be stainlesssteel or other corrosion resistant material. Enclosures for use in process or outdoor areasshall be NEMA 4X and enclosures for interior use in dry areas shall be NEMA 12, unlessotherwise indicated.

G. Elementary control schematics and connection diagrams showing the spatial relationship ofcomponents and wiring shall be submitted for review. Also, a bill of materials, drawing ofdevice arrangement on front, and enclosure fabrication drawings shall be submitted. Further,

CONTROL PANELS AND ENCLOSURES 262716-2 TOWN BRANCH WWTP THICKENING

descriptive literature is required on all components. A copy of the shop drawings shall befurnished and stored in a pocket inside the enclosure.

H. Sleeve type wire markers or other “permanent” type marker shall be installed on all wires,keynoted back to the elementary schematic or the connection diagram, and all terminalsidentified.


PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT USED

END OF SECTION

WIRING DEVICES 262726-1 TOWN BRANCH WWTP THICKENING

SECTION 262726 - WIRING DEVICES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Wiring devices shall be installed where indicated on the Contract Drawings.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. “Hubbell,” “Eagle,” “General Electric,” “Wiremold,” “P&S,” “Leviton,” “Daniel Woodhead,” orequal.

2.02 EQUIPMENT

A. Receptacles

1. Twin-convenience - outlet (interior) – “Hubbell” cat. no. 5362, or equal.

2. Twin-convenience - outlet (exterior) – “Hubbell” cat. no. 5362 with Taymac Corporation orIntermatic, Inc. safety outlet enclosure.

3. Special purpose outlet - Per equipment requirements.

4. Ground fault interrupting receptacles shall be required where shown on the ContractDrawings, and shall be indicated by the abbreviation “GFI” beside the circuit symbol onthe Contract Drawings. They shall be rated 20 amps (125 volts) and shall be of theduplex, feed through type, capable of protecting all downstream receptacles on the samecircuit. They shall be UL listed and interrupt the current between 4-6 milliamps of groundfault leakage. Appropriate plates shall be furnished and installed. The 20 ampere ratingshall apply not only to device internals but to the faceplate as well.

5. Provide explosion proof receptacles where indicated.

B. Plates and Covers

1. Furnish and install plates of the appropriate type and size for all wiring and controldevices, signal and telephone outlets.

2. All plates on flush and surface mounted boxes shall be of 302 stainless steel(nonmagnetic) with rounded or beveled edges, except where weatherproof covers areshown. All device plate screws shall be nylon or stainless steel with countersunk heads.Plates shall be installed vertically and with an alignment tolerance of 1/16 inch. Deviceplates shall be of the one-piece type, of suitable shape for the devices to be covered.Plates shall have a smooth finish with no crevices to collect dirt. Oversize plates are notacceptable.

3. Covers for boxes serving equipment where flexible conduit is to be tapped into coverplates shall be sheet metal drilled for conduit. Gaskets shall be required as well as allspecial adapters for mounting.

C. Wall Switches (Tumbler Type)

1. Single pole (interior) – “Hubbell” cat. no. 1221, or equal.

WIRING DEVICES 262726-2 TOWN BRANCH WWTP THICKENING

2. Single pole (exterior) – “Hubbell” cat. no. 1222, or equal, and Hubbell 1795 or equalplate.

3. 3-way switches (interior) – “Hubbell” cat. no. 1223, or equal.

4. 4-way switches (interior) – “Hubbell” cat. no. 1224, or equal.

5. Outside receptacles shall be labeled for the purpose.

6. Provide explosion proof switches where indicated.

PART 3 - EXECUTION


A. Wall Switches

1. Wall switches shall be mounted at a height as indicated in Section 16050, unlessotherwise noted on the Contract Drawings.

B. Receptacles

1. Outlets shall be located as shown on the Contract Drawings. Where located in specialinterior finishes, they shall be properly centered. Boxes shall be of the type noted andaccepted for the specific installation.

2. Furnish and install receptacle circuits where called for on the Contract Drawings and/orby these Specifications. Circuits shall be installed in conduit from panel to receptacle,with flush mounted boxes except as noted on the Contract Drawings.

3. Receptacles and lighting circuits shall not be combined on the same overcurrent device.For runs over 75 feet or for 30 amp receptacles, minimum wire size shall be AWG No. 10.

4. Receptacles for specific devices (i.e., air conditioner), shall be rated at the correct voltageand amperage for that unit.

5. The minimum free length of conductor at each box for the connection of a fixture, switchor receptacle shall be 8 inches. All connections shall be made mechanically andelectrically secure.

6. Receptacles shall be duplex type, rated at 20 amps, 125 volts, brown colored, unlessotherwise noted. Mounting height shall be as specified for low outlets in Section 16050.All receptacles shall be of the grounding type.

7. Exterior weatherproof receptacles, shall be weatherproof while in use. This requirementshall apply on all outdoor units and on others as indicated on the Drawings. To meet thisrequirement, appropriate safety outlet covers as manufactured by Taymac Corporation,Intermatic Guardian Series, or equal shall be utilized in these areas.

END OF SECTION

SAFETY SWITCHES 262816-1 TOWN BRANCH WWTP THICKENING

SECTION 262816 – SAFETY SWITCHES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Provide horsepower-rated, quick-make, quick-break, safety switches provided with thenumber of poles and fuses as required.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS/EQUIPMENT

A. Safety switches shall be as manufactured by General Electric, Square D Company, Eaton, orequal.

B. Switches shall be NEMA Type HD, single-throw, externally operated, non-fused or fused withClass R fuse clips.

C. Switches shall have arc shields, shall be of enclosed construction and fusible or non-fusibleas indicated. Switches shall be rated for either 250-volt AC or 600-volt AC service asrequired.

D. All switches shall be capable of interrupting locked rotor current of motor which it serves.

E. Enclosures shall be NEMA-1 for interior non-process area use and NEMA-4X for exterior andprocess area use unless noted otherwise.

F. Provide dual-element Bussman type FRN (250 volt) or type FRS (600 volt) fuses for anyfusible safety switch serving a motor circuit.

G. For non-motor loads, provide dual element Bussman type LPN (250 volt) or type LPS (600volt).

H. All switches shall be capable of being padlocked in either the “On” or “Off” position.

I. Safety switches shall be provided with auxiliary contacts where indicated on ContractDrawings.

J. Safety switches shall be UL listed and shall conform to NEMA Standards. NEMA 4Xenclosed safety switches where called for shall be stainless steel. Enclosures for switcheslocated in sodium hypochlorite storage or transfer areas shall be NEMA 4X non-metallic.

K. NEMA 1 enclosed switches shall be phosphate coated as equivalent, code gauge steel withbaked enamel finish.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Provide non-fusible switches at remote motor locations as indicated on drawings.

B. Provide fusible disconnects at package A/C units, fused as specified on unit nameplate.

SAFETY SWITCHES 262816-2 TOWN BRANCH WWTP THICKENING

C. Mount switches to walls or to equipment enclosures with a minimum of 4 bolts using toggleanchors for masonry construction, Phillips “Red Head” anchors for poured concreteconstruction and bolts, jumbo washers, lock washers and nuts for equipment enclosuremounting.

D. All safety switches to be identified with nameplates per Section 16075.

END OF SECTION

VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES 262923-1 TOWN BRANCH WWTP THICKENING

SECTION 262923 - VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 REFERENCES

A. The drive shall be designed to meet the following specifications:

1. NFPA 70 - US National Electrical Code

2. NEMA ICS 3.1 - Safety Standards for Construction and Guide for Selection, Installationand Operation of Adjustable Speed Drive Systems

3. NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment

4. UL 508C – Underwriter’s Laboratory

5. CAN/CSA-C22 No. 14-M91 - Canadian Standards Association

6. IEC 146 - International Electrical Code

1.02 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

A. The drive shall conform to the following requirements:

1. NFPA 70

2. IEC 146

3. EN Standard/CE marked for EMC directives

Emissions Immunity

EN 50081-1 EN 50082-1EN 50081-2 EN 50082-2EN 55011 Class A IEC 801-1,2,3,4,6,8EN 55011 Class B (per EN 50082-1,2)

4. EN Standard/CE marked for Low Voltage directives

EN 60204-1PREN 50178

5. IEC 801

6. C-UL marking to provide an approved listing for both United States and Canadian users.

1.03 QUALIFICATIONS

A. Manufacturer: The drive manufacturer shall have been in the drive business continuously fora minimum of 15 years and specialize in the design and manufacturing of PWM AdjustableFrequency Drives.

B. Support: The drive manufacturer shall maintain factory trained and authorized servicefacilities for their drives within 100 miles of the project and have a demonstrated record of


service for at least the previous three years. Full-time support personnel shall be employedby the drive manufacturer.

C. Certification: All drives must be assembled at locations that are certified to the ISO-9001Series of Quality Standards. This insures all quality and corrective action procedures aredocumented and implemented with a goal of Total Customer Satisfaction.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Schneider Electric Altivar 320 ATV320 or equal.

2.02 RATINGS

A. Input Power: The drive is self adjustable to accept an input voltage range between 200-240/380-480/500-600VAC, three phase +/-10%.

B. Displacement power factor shall range between 1.0 and 0.95, lagging, over the entire speedrange (0.80 for 0.5-5hp/0.37-3.7kW, 200-480V drives). The efficiency of the drive shall be aminimum of 97% at full load and speed.

C. Environment: Storage ambient temperature range: -40 to 70 C (-40 to 158 F). Operatingambient temperature range: 0 to 40 C (0 to 109 F) without derating. The relative humidityrange is 5% to 95% non-condensing.

D. Operating elevation: up to 1000 Meters (3,300ft) without derating.

E. Output Power: The output voltage is adjustable from 0 to rated input voltage. The outputfrequency range is adjustable from 0 to 400 Hz. The inverter section will produce a pulsewidth modulated (PWM) waveform using latest generation IGBTs.

2.03 DESIGN

A. Hardware: The drive hardware shall employ the following power components:

1. Diode or fully gated bridge on the input.

2. DC bus inductor on all ratings 5.5kW (7.5HP) or greater.

3. Switching logic power supply operating from the DC bus.

4. Phase to phase and phase to ground MOV protection.

5. Gold plated plug-in connections on printed circuit boards.

6. Microprocessor based inverter logic isolated from power circuits.

7. Latest generation IGBT inverter section.

8. Inverter section shall not require commutation capacitors.

9. Customer Interface common for all horsepower ratings. Interface shall include an LCDdigital display, programming keypad and operator keys option.

10. Main Control Board common for 5.5kW (7.5HP) and up.


11. Common control connection for all ratings.

12. Optimized for 4kHz carrier frequency at 44kW (60HP) or less, and 2kHz at 55kW (75 HP)and larger.

13. Peripheral Interface to enable attaching common options.

B. Control Logic: The drive shall be programmable or self adjusting for operation under thefollowing conditions:

1. Operate drive with motor disconnected.

2. Controlled shut down, when properly fused, with no component failure in the event of anoutput phase to phase or phase to ground short circuit and annunciation of the faultcondition.

3. Adjustable PWM carrier frequency within a range of 2-8kHz.

4. Selectable Sensorless Vector or V/Hz mode.

5. Selectable for variable or constant torque loads. Selection of variable torque provides115% of rated VT current for up to one minute. Selection of constant torque provides150% of rated CT current for up to one minute.

6. Multiple programmable stop modes including - Ramp, Coast, DC-Brake, Ramp-to-Holdand S-curve.

7. Multiple acceleration and deceleration rates.

8. Multiple acceleration and deceleration rates.

9. All adjustments to be made with the door closed.

10. Adjustable output frequency up to 400Hz.

C. POWER CONDITIONING: The drive shall be designed to operate on an AC line which maycontain line notching and up to 10% harmonic distortion. An input isolation transformer shallnot be required for protection from normal line transients. If line conditions dictate the use ofa transformer, the K factor shall be 4.0 or less.

2.04 FEATURES

A. Interface: The drive shall provide a removable Human Interface Module with integral displayto show drive operating conditions, adjustments and fault indications. The display shall beremovable under power without causing a fault and is visible and operable without openingthe enclosure door. The display shall consist of 2 lines of 16 character alphanumeric, backlitLCD with the display being configurable for simultaneously displaying two values usingcustomized multi-lingual text and user scaled units. The module shall provide LED indicationof drive direction and commanded direction. The display shall be capable of remotemounting by means of cable connection up to 10 meters (33ft) from the drive and is capableof being used as a hand-held terminal.

B. Control Mode: Programming shall provide the ability to select sensorless vector or v/hzmode. The sensorless vector mode shall use motor nameplate data plus motor operatingdata, such as IR drop, nominal flux current and flux up time. The volts per hertz mode shallbe able to be programmed for squared, cubed, straight line, pre programmed or full custompatterns.


C. Current Limit: Programmable current limit shall be available from 20% to 160% of constanttorque rating. Current limit shall be active for all drive states; accelerating, constant speedand decelerating. The drive shall employ PI regulation with an adjustable gain for smoothtransition in and out of current limit.

D. Acceleration/Deceleration: Accel/Decel settings shall provide separate adjustments to alloweither setting to be adjusted from 0 seconds to 3600 seconds. A second set of remotelyselectable Accel/Decel settings shall be accessible with Control Interface option. An adaptivecurrent limit circuit shall be able to be disabled in programming for fast acceleration of lowinertia loads.

E. Speed Regulation: The programmable speed regulation modes shall include the following:

1. Open Loop

2. Slip Compensation with 0.5% speed regulation

3. Droop - Negative Slip Compensation with 0.5% speed regulation

4. Traverse Function

5. Closed loop encoder feedback with 0.1% speed regulation

6. Process PI control

F. Speed Profiles: Programming capability shall allow the user to produce speed profiles withlinear acceleration/deceleration or "S-Curve" profiles that provide changing accel/decel rates.S-Curve profiles shall be selectable for fixed or adjustable values.

G. Adjustments: The digital interface shall be provided for all set-up, operation and adjustmentsettings. All adjustments are shall be stored in nonvolatile memory (EEPROM).Potentiometer adjustments are not acceptable. The drive shall provide EEPROM memory forfactory default values.

H. Process PI Control: An internal process PI regulator shall have both proportional and integralgain adjustments as well as error inversion and output clamping functions. The feedback maybe configured for normal or square root functions. If the feedback indicates that the process ismoving away from the setpoint, the regulator will adjust the drive output until the feedbackequals the reference. Process control shall be enabled or disabled with a hardwire input.Transitioning in and out of process control shall be able to be tuned for faster response bypreloading the integrator. Protection shall be provided for a loss of feedback or referencesignal.

I. Fault Reset/Run: The drive shall have the ability to conduct up to nine automatic fault resetand restarts following a fault condition before locking out and requiring manual restart. Theautomatic mode is not applicable to a ground fault, shorted output faults and other internalmicroprocessor faults. The time between restarts shall be adjustable from 0.5 seconds to 30seconds.

J. Skip Frequencies: The drive shall contain three adjustable set points that lock out continuousoperation at frequencies which may produce mechanical resonance. The set points shallhave a bandwidth adjustable from 0Hz to 15Hz.

K. Run On Power Up: A user programmable restart function shall be provided to automaticallyrestart the equipment after restoration of power after an outage. A maintained 2-wire startinput is required for this function.


L. Line Loss Restart: This programmable function shall be provided to select the reconnectmode of the drive after recovery from a line loss condition. The reconnect modes shall be BLast Speed, Speed Search, Track Volts, or Use Encoder. Disabling this feature shall forcethe drive to start from zero hertz.

M. Fault Memory: The last four faults as well as operating frequency, drive status and powermode shall be stored at the time of fault. Information shall be maintained in the event of apower loss.

N. Overload Protection: The drive shall provide Class 20 motor overload protection investigatedby UL to comply with N.E.C. Article 430. Overload protection shall be speed sensitive andadjustable for motors with speed ranges of 2:1, 4:1 and 10:1. A viewable parameter shallstore the overload usage in percent. An alarm bit can be used to adjust a process toeliminate an overload trip.

O. Auto Economizer: This feature shall automatically reduce the output voltage when the driveis operating in an idle mode (drive output current less than programmed motor FLA). Thevoltage shall be reduced to minimize flux current in a lightly loaded motor thus reducing kWusage. If the load increases, the drive shall automatically return to normal operation.

P. Terminal Blocks: Separate terminal blocks shall be provided for control and power wiring.

Q. Flying Start: The drive is shall be capable of determining the speed and direction of aspinning motor and adjust its output to "pick-up" the motor at the rotating speed. The flyingstart feature shall be operable with or without encoder feedback.

R. Ride Through: The control logic shall be capable of "riding through" a power outage of up to2 seconds in duration.

S. Analog Output: An output signal shall be provided and be jumper selectable for 0 - 10V DCor 0 - 20 mA which is user programmable such that it is proportional to one of 13 processparameters including output frequency, output current, encoder feedback, output power andothers. A programmable offset shall be provided to allow modification of the analog output toobtain 2 - 10V DC or 4 - 20 mA. Programmable gain adjustments for both upper and lowersettings shall allow for system calibration.

T. Reference Signals: The drive shall be capable of the following input reference signals:

Digital pulse input Digital MOPRemote potentiometer Serial10V DC HIM (Program/Control panel)4-20 mA

U. Loss of Reference: In the event of loss of the 4 - 20 mA reference signal, the drive shall beuser programmable to the following:

Fault and stopAlarm and maintain last reference within 10%Alarm and go to preset speedAlarm and go to minimum speedAlarm and go to maximum speedActive for Process PI reference or feedback

V. Digital I/O: Contact output ratings shall be 115V AC/30V DC, 5.0 Amp resistive, 2.0 Ampinductive. All four contacts provided shall be programmable to 17 different conditions.Factory settings shall be as follows:


Form A Run contactForm C Fault contactForm C Alarm contactForm A at Speed contact

W. Operator Devices, and Control Interface: Provide start and stop controls integrally with thedrive. Also provide control interface cards as required to accommodate the external controldeices shown in Control Circuits.

2.05 HARMONIC DISTORTION SUPPRESSION

A. A comprehensive pre-equipment-selection harmonic study shall be prepared by theContractor. The results of this pre-equipment selection study shall be submitted to theEngineer as part of the submittals specified herein. Should this study indicate the need fortuned filters, line reactors, isolation transformers, or other harmonic distortion suppressionequipment, these shall be supplied at no additional cost to the Owner. Indicate the locationof the harmonic suppression equipment in the submittal data. Location is subject toacceptance by the Engineer.

B. The harmonic distortion values resulting from operation of all or any variable frequency drive-driven motor-load combinations operating at full load shall be as defined in IEEEStandard 519.

1. Maximum allowable total harmonic voltage distortion (THD): 5 percent of thefundamental.

2. Maximum allowable individual frequency harmonic voltage distortion: within the limits ofIEEE standard 519.

3. Maximum allowable total demand distortion (TDD): within the limits of IEEE Standard519-1992, Table 10.3.

4. Maximum allowable individual frequency harmonic demand distortion: within the limits ofIEEE Standard 519-1992, Table 10.3.

5. The harmonic distortion levels shall be specific to the "Point of Common Coupling" (PCC)as defined in IEEE Standard 519 and indicated on the Drawings.

C. System single line diagrams and field access to the site will be provided to the Contractor forthe purpose of providing this study. Contractor shall obtain from others other information thatmay be necessary to perform this study. Input data and other pertinent information used inharmonic study shall be coordinated by the Contractor with the following:

1. Input data/information/results of the short circuit fault analysis specified herein.

2. Electrical system configuration and electrical equipment shop drawing submittal dataincluding, but not being limited to new non-linear loads, new linear loads, and newcapacitors.

D. Preparation of this pre-equipment selection study does not relieve the requirement for theContractor to perform and submit the results of a second, final comprehensive studyprepared by a recognized independent authority acceptable to the Owner after equipmentinstallation.

E. In addition, the Contractor shall field measure actual harmonic distortion and verify with testsperformed by an independent authority acceptable to the Owner after satisfactory full-loadoperation.


F. As part of the specified harmonic studies and other work for this project, identify and correctresonance conditions in the electrical distribution system at no additional cost to the Owner.Shop drawings, data, location of the respective equipment and its connection to the electricaldistribution system shall be acceptable to the Engineer.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with manufacturer’s recommendations, except as modified herein.

B. Drives shall be adjusted such that maximum speed is motor nameplate RPM, and minimumspeed is just high enough to provided motor driven equipment cooling.

3.02 START-UP, TRAINING, AND TESTING

A. The drive manufacturer shall provided factory authorized, trained service personnel for start-up and testing. Upon successful completion of installation and testing, training shall beprovided in accordance with 260000.

3.03 TOOLS AND SPARE PARTS

A. Any special tools required for normal operation and maintenance shall be provided by theequipment manufacturer.

B. Furnish the following spare parts:

Ten fuses for each type used.

Ten lamps for each type used.

END OF SECTION

LIGHTING 265100-1 TOWN BRANCH WWTP THICKENING

SECTION 265100 - LIGHTING

PART 1 - - GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE OF WORK

A. The specific characteristics of the light fixtures to be furnished and installed shall be asdetailed in the light fixture schedule on the Contract Drawings. Should a fixture of a differenttype or manufacturer than that specified be submitted for the Engineer's review, it will becompared to that specified on: construction, dimensions, and photometrics. Failure tocompare equally to what was specified will be grounds for rejection.

B. The Contractor shall be prepared to submit sample equipment for appraisal when requestedby the Engineer, and shall assume all transportation costs involved in the shipment andreturn of samples. All sample fixtures submitted shall be provided with lamps and shall bewired with cord and plug, to facilitate lighting for appraisal.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 DRIVERS

A. Acceptable manufacturers: eldoLED, Sylvania, or Philips that meet or exceed the criteriaherein.

B. Driver shall be > 80% efficient at full load across all input voltages. Input wires shall be18AWG solid copper minimum.

C. Driver shall be UL listed.

D. Maximum stand-by power shall be 1 Watt.

E. Driver disconnect shall be provided where required to comply with codes. Theelectronics/power supply enclosure shall be internal to the luminaire and be accessible perUL requirements.

F. The surge protection which resides within the driver shall protect the luminaire from damageand failure for transient voltages and currents as defined in ANSI/IEEE C64.41 2002 forLocation Category A, where failure does not mean a momentary loss of light during thetransient event.

2.02 LUMINAIRES

A. All fixtures shall be delivered complete with suspension and mounting accessories, drivers,diffusers, reflectors, etc., all wired and assembled. All accessory wiring shall be furnishedand installed as shown on the Contract Drawings.

B. All steel supports required for luminaires in addition to that furnished under the generalbuilding construction shall be furnished and installed by the Contractor.

C. When fixtures are noted to be installed flush, they shall be complete with the properaccessories for installing in the particular ceiling involved. All flush mounted fixtures shall besupported from the structure and shall not be dependent on the hung ceilings for theirsupport.

D. All outside luminaires shall be a type that will prevent insect accumulation inside theluminaire.


E. Exterior luminaires shall be weatherproof and rustproof.

F. Luminaires for vaults and pipe galleries shall be watertight and rustproof.

G. Luminaire wire shall be fixture type of non-asbestos construction.

2.03 LAMPS

A. Color temperature for LEDs are referenced in the Luminaire Schedule, refer to ContractDrawings.

PART 3 - EXECUTION


A. General

1. The Contractor shall furnish all light fixtures, lighting equipment, components, hangers,etc., as shown on the Contract Drawings and shall install them at the locations shown onthe Contract Drawings.

2. All fixture wiring shall be in conformance with the latest revision of the NEC and ULstandards.

3. Locations of fixtures shall be coordinated with Engineer’s reflected ceiling plans wherethey exist. Any conflicts between electrical plans and Engineer’s reflected ceiling plans,the reflected plans shall override.

B. Luminaires

1. Fixtures shall be rigidly mounted against the surface of the ceiling unless otherwise notedon the Contract Drawings. Conduit runs to and between fixtures shall be rigid metallictype. Use of flexible conduit for connection to fixtures is prohibited, except whereconcealed above a suspended ceiling.

2. All ferrous metal surfaces of fixtures and plaster frames shall be treated and given rust-inhibiting and finish coat adherence properties before final enamel coats are applied.Finish enamel coat shall be baked on at approximately 320 degrees Fahrenheit.

3. Similar fixtures in each room or area shall be installed with bottom of fixtures at sameelevation, unless otherwise noted.

4. Minimum wire size shall be AWG No. 10 for runs over 75 feet.

5. Outlets shall be as specified herein and shall be suitable for the installation conditionsencountered.

6. Flexible fixture hangers shall be used for all pendant mounted fixtures.

7. Conduit run in areas with hung ceilings shall be installed in the space above the hungceiling as close to the structure as possible. Conduits and junction boxes shall besupported from the structure.

8. No light fixtures shall be hung or installed until after painting is completed, however,temporary lighting shall be provided by the Contractor. Fixtures in suspended ceilingsshall be fastened to the main tees of the ceiling grid.


9. All fixtures shall be left in a clean condition, free of dirt and defects, before acceptance bythe Engineer.

END OF SECTION

MOTORS 266013-1 TOWN BRANCH WWTP THICKENING

SECTION 266013 - MOTORS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Motors are to be furnished with driven equipment except where otherwise noted on theContract Drawings or elsewhere in this Division of the Specifications. All motors shallconform to the following Specifications and any special requirements of the driven equipment.Special requirements of the driven equipment shall take precedence over theseSpecifications should a discrepancy occur. Starting torque and slip ratings shall conform tothe requirements of the driven equipment.

B. Polyphase motors shall be of the squirrel cage induction type and single phase of thecapacitor start-induction run type except as otherwise noted. Conduit boxes shall be tappedfor the size conduit shown on the Contract Drawings.

C. All motors shall be manufactured and installed in accordance with applicable NEMAstandards and NEC provisions, latest revisions.

1.02 DELIVERY, STORAGE, & HANDLING

A. All electrical motors shall be protected against the accumulation of moisture, dust and debrisand physical damage during the course of installation of the job.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Motors – “General Electric”, “Westinghouse”, “U.S. Motors”, “Gould Century”, “Lincoln”,“Baldor”, “Marathon”, “Reliance”, “Magnatek”, “Siemens”, or equal.

2.02 EQUIPMENT

A. Motors 200 Horsepower and Under for Service Under 600 Volts

1. Ratings and Electrical Characteristics

a. Time: All motors shall be rated for continuous duty.

b. Temperature: Based on NEMA standards for a maximum ambient temperature of 40degrees Celsius and an altitude of 3,300 feet or less, according to service factor andinsulation class employed.

c. Voltage: All single phase motors shall be rated 115/208/230 volts and all polyphasemotors 230/460 volts. Submersible polyphase motors to be operated at 460 voltsmay take exception to the dual voltage requirement. All motors shall be capable ofnormal operation at balanced voltages in the range of ±10 percent from rated windingvoltage.

d. Frequency: All a-c motors shall be rated for 60 Hz. operation. All motors shall becapable of normal operation at frequencies 5 percent above or below the nominalrating of 60 Hz.

e. Horsepower: Horsepower of the motors shall be as given in the SpecificationDivision on the driven equipment or as shown on the Contract Drawings.


Submersible motors shall be allowed to be furnished even though the horsepowerrating may not be in accordance with standard NEMA assignments. In many cases,the horsepower specified is a minimum requirement and certain alternatemanufacturers may require larger horsepower motors. The larger motor shall befurnished at no extra cost to the Owner.

f. Locked Rotor Current: Locked rotor current shall be in accordance with NEMAstandards.

g. Efficiency and Power Factor: Efficiency and power factor shall be givenconsideration during Shop Drawing review. The ratings at full, 3/4, and 1/2 load shallbe compared to similar motors manufactured by acceptable suppliers listed in theseSpecifications. Excessive variation shall be considered grounds for rejection.

h. Speed: Synchronous speed of motors shall correspond to standard NEMA ratings.Actual speed shall be as given in the Specification Division on the driven equipment.Slip shall not exceed 5 percent at full load.

i. Service Factor: The service factor shall be 1.15 unless requirements of the drivenload necessitate a higher service factor. The service factor for inverter duty ratedmotors shall be 1.0.

j. Insulation Class: Insulation shall be NEMA Class F, except as otherwise noted.Submersible motors shall be Class F, and inverter duty motors to be operated atvariable speed shall be Class H. Motors shall operate at a Class B rise at nameplatehorsepower loading regardless of Insulation Class.

k. Design Level: Motors shall be NEMA design B, except as otherwise noted.

l. Enclosure: Motors for process equipment 2 HP and smaller shall be totally enclosed.All motors for process equipment larger than 2 HP shall be TEFC (totally enclosedfan cooled), suitable for use indoors or outdoors, except as otherwise noted. Totallyenclosed non-ventilated (or air-over) motors may be used for ventilators and otherauxiliary equipment that by virtue of the load are provided with more than adequateventilation. ODP (open dripproof) motors may be used for ventilators where themotor is outside the air stream yet still protected from the weather. Division 15 of theSpecifications and the HVAC Contract Drawings will detail the type of enclosurerequired for ventilators. Submersible motors shall be air or oil filled and of watertightconstruction. Motors used in classified atmospheres shall be properly rated for thathazard.

m. Frame Size: Frame designations shall be in accordance with NEMA standards.

n. Winding Overtemperature Sensors: All motors 15 horsepower and over shall beprovided with motor winding thermostats. The devices shall be hermetically sealed,snap-acting thermal switches, actuated by a thermally responsive bi-metallic disk. Aminimum of 1 per phase is required, with switches wired into the control circuit of thestarter to provide deenergization should overheating threaten. All submersiblemotors shall be equipped with motor winding thermostats.

o. All submersible pump/motor assemblies shall be equipped to detect presence ofmoisture and alarm at the controller.

p. Motors specified for operation with variable frequency drives shall be inverter dutyand shall be designed to output 100 percent of nameplate horsepower undercontinuous duty service without exceeding the temperature rise specified hereinwhen controlled by the actual drives furnished. Inverter duty motors shall bedesigned to operate down to 10% of full load speed without the need for a linepowered cooling fan.


2. Mechanical Characteristics

a. Integral Horsepower Motor Construction

1) Motor frames for horizontal motors shall be cast iron, heavy fabricated steel, orcast aluminum (alloy 356 or 360). A steel insert ring shall be set into thealuminum alloy endshield when cast to minimize wear of the bearing support.Aluminum alloy motors shall not be used in areas where exposed tochlorine gas.

2) Motor frames for vertical motors shall be cast iron, heavy fabricated steel, orextruded aluminum (alloy 6063-T4 or 6063-T6). Endshields for vertical motorsmust be cast iron.

3) If an aluminum frame is used, the endshields and/or all other steel hardwaremust be plated with zinc or cadmium and coated with grease before assembly tominimize the galvanic action between the steel and aluminum.

4) Motor frames and endshields shall be of such design and proportions as to holdall motor components rigidly in proper position and provide adequate protectionfor the type enclosure employed. Lifting lugs of all motors shall conform toNEMA standards.

5) Windings shall be random or form wound, adequately insulated and securelybraced to resist failure due to electrical stresses and vibration. If the windingsare aluminum, there shall be a cold welded aluminum-copper transition joint atthe termination of the windings to permit the use of standard copper to copperconnection techniques by the electrician and to prevent galvanic action betweenthe copper power wires and the aluminum windings.

6) The motor shaft shall be made of high grade machine steel or steel forging ofsize and design adequate to withstand the load stresses normally encountered inmotors of that particular rating. Bearing journals shall be ground and polished.

7) Rotors shall be made from high grade steel laminations adequately fastenedtogether and to the shaft. Rotor cage windings may be cast aluminum of bartype construction with brazed end rings.

8) Integral horsepower motors shall be equipped with cone, roller, or ball bearingsmade to AFBMA standards, Grade 1 and shall be of ample capacity for the motorratings. The bearing housing shall be large enough to hold sufficient lubricant tominimize the need for frequent relubrication (ten years normal operation withoutlubrication), but facilities shall be provided for adding new lubricant and drainingout old lubricant without motor disassembly. The bearing housing shall havelong, tight running fits or rotating seals to protect against the entrance of foreignmatter into the bearings or leakage of lubricant out of the bearing cavity.

9) See the specification division relating to each piece of motor driven equipment foradditional motor requirements to those listed above.

b. Fractional Horsepower Motor Construction

1) Motor and shell shall be rigid welded steel designed to maintain accuratealignment of motor components and provide adequate protection. End shieldsshall be reinforced, lightweight, die cast aluminum. Windings shall be of varnishinsulated wire with slot insulation of polyester film and baked on bondingtreatment to make the stator winding strongly resistant to heat, aging, moisture,electrical stresses, and other hazards. Motor shafts shall be made from high


grade, cold rolled, shaft steel with drive shaft extensions carefully machined tostandard NEMA dimensions for shaft coupled drive connection. Bearings shallbe carefully selected precision ball bearings with extra quality, long life greaseand large reservoir providing 10 years normal operation without relubrication,AFBMA Grade 1.

c. Submersible Motor Construction

1) See Equipment Specifications.

3. Tests, Nameplates, and Shop Drawings

a. Tests

1) Tests shall be required on integral horsepower motors only. A factory certifiedtest report of “electrically duplicate motors previously tested” shall be supplied onall motors under 200 horsepower. The test shall be certified by the factory andshall contain a statement to the effect that complete tests affirm the guaranteedcharacteristics published in the manufacturer’s catalogs or descriptive literature.

2) Tests will be in accordance with IEEE test procedures.

b. Nameplates

1) Each motor shall have a permanently affixed nameplate of brass, stainless steel,or other metal of durability and corrosion resistance. The data contained on thenameplate shall be in accordance with NEMA standards.

c. Shop Drawings

1) Shop Drawings shall consist of motor dimensions, nameplate data from eachmotor and tests as outlined above. Also included shall be efficiency and powerfactor at 100, 75, and 50 percent load. Operation, maintenance, and lubricationinformation (including bearing catalog numbers) shall be submitted with ShopDrawings for review.

4. Efficiency Requirements

a. The following motor full load efficiency requirements shall be met as a minimum fortotally enclosed 3 phase integral horsepower motors, per NEMA test methods:

HorsepowerNominal

3600 RPM(Minimum %)

Nominal1800 RPM

(Minimum %)

Nominal1200 RPM

(Minimum %)

1 75.5 82.5 80.0

1.5 82.5 84.0 85.5

2 84.0 84.0 86.5

3 85.5 87.5 87.5

5 87.5 87.5 87.5

7.5 88.5 89.5 89.5

10 89.5 89.5 89.5

15 90.2 91.0 90.2

20 90.2 91.0 90.2

25 91.0 92.4 91.7


HorsepowerNominal

3600 RPM(Minimum %)

Nominal1800 RPM

(Minimum %)

Nominal1200 RPM

(Minimum %)

30 91.0 92.4 91.7

40 91.7 93.0 93.0

50 92.4 93.0 93.0

60 93.0 93.6 93.6

75 93.0 94.1 93.6

100 93.6 94.5 94.1

125 94.5 94.5 94.1

150 94.5 95.0 95.0

200 95.0 95.0 95.0

Open Motors where specified shall also comply with NEMA efficiency minimums.

b. Motors shall be energy efficient type to comply with requirements of the EnergyPolicy Act of 1992.

B. Motors Over 200 Horsepower for Service Under 600 Volts

1. Motors specified in this section shall comply with the requirements of preceding Section2.02, Sub-article A unless otherwise noted herein. Motors shall be furnished by the pumpsupplier to be installed by the Contractor.

2. Motors shall be especially suitable both electrically and mechanically to drive theequipment specified in other divisions. The speed, horsepower, torque, base, bearings,shaft and motor tolerances shall be coordinated closely with the equipmentmanufacturer’s requirements so as to provide a satisfactory, efficient drive withoutoverloading, overheating, or abnormal vibration.

3. Motors shall meet the NEMA temperature rise as defined for Class F insulation. Servicefactor shall be 1.15 and the motor shall be tested for temperature rise at its service factorload above a 40°C ambient. All motors shall be dynamically balanced and vibration shallbe measured per NEMA methods. Critical speed of the shaft and motor assemble shallbe above the operating speed of the motor by at least 10 percent.

4. Motors shall be equipped with nonreverse ratchets to prevent damage to pumps.

5. Bearings shall be selected to have AFBMA rated minimum life of 1 year when operatingcontinuously at rated speed of the motor and at total load consisting of the weight andhydraulic thrust load imposed on the motor by the pump. Angular contact ball thrustbearings, spherical roller thrust bearings, or plate thrust bearings shall be useddepending on thrust requirements. Motors shall have oil lubricated thrust and guidebearings, with visual level indicators, accessible drain plugs and accessible filling plugs.Oil lubrication system shall be so designed as to provide the correct quantity of lubricantwith minimum foaming or aeration. A nameplate shall be provided on all motors showingbearing numbers and oil type and required viscosity.

6. Motors shall be high thrust capable of carrying 30 percent momentary upthrust.

7. In addition to the test report required in the preceding Sub-article, the manufacturer shallsubmit data indicating: guaranteed efficiencies and power factor at 100 percent, 75percent, and 50 percent load; full load current; locked rotor current.


PART 3 - EXECUTION


A. Installation of motors shall comply with motor manufacturer’s instructions as well asapplicable NEMA recommendations and requirements of the driven equipment OEM (originalequipment manufacturer).

B. Motors shall be aligned to acceptable tolerances and shall not vibrate excessively.

C. Motors shall not be energized until they have been accepted by the OEM start up personnel.

END OF SECTION

DIVISION 31

EARTHWORK

EARTHWORK 312000-1 TOWN BRANCH WWTP THICKENING

SECTION 312000 - EARTHWORK

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Provide all materials, labor, equipment and services necessary to do all clearing andgrubbing, excavation, backfilling, providing of additional fill material and topsoil, control ofsurface drainage and ground water, finished site grading and erosion control required toconstruct the work as shown.


A. State and local code requirements shall control the disposal of trees and shrubs.

B. All burning shall be controlled by applicable local regulations.

C. EXCAVATION SUPPORT AND PROTECTION – Section 31 50 00

D. EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROL – Section 31 25 00

1.03 JOB CONDITIONS

A. Weather: Earthwork operations shall be suspended at any time when satisfactory resultscannot be obtained on account of rain, snow, ice, drought or other adverse weatherconditions.

B. Existing Utilities: Prior to commencement of work, the Contractor shall locate existingunderground utilities in areas of the work. If utilities are to remain in place, provide adequatemeans of protection during earthwork operations.

C. Use of Explosives: The Contractor (or any of his Subcontractors) shall not bring explosivesonto site or use in work without prior written permission from the Owner. All activitiesinvolving explosives shall be in compliance with the rules and regulations of the StateDepartment of Mines, and Minerals, Division of Explosives and Blasting. Contractor is solelyresponsible for handling, storage, and use of explosive materials when their use is permitted.

D. Protection of Persons and Property:

1. Barricade open excavations occurring as part of this work and post with warning lights.

a. Operate warning lights as recommended by authorities having jurisdiction.

b. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities from damagecaused by settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout, and other hazardscreated by earthwork operations.

E. Dust Control: Use all means necessary to control dust on or near the project site where suchdust is caused by the Contractor's operations or directly results from conditions left by theContractor.

1.04 UTILITY LINE ACTIVITIES COVERED UNDER NATIONWIDE PERMIT # 12

All activities involving utility line construction covered under NATIONWIDE PERMIT # 12shall meet the following conditions:


A. The general Water Quality Certification is limited to the crossing of intermittent and perennialstreams by utility lines.

B. The construction of permanent or temporary access roads will impact less than 300 linearfeet of intermittent and perennial streams and less than one acre of jurisdictional wetlands.

C. Utility lines shall be located at least 50 feet away from a stream which appears as a blue lineon a USGA 7 ½ minute topographic map except where the utility line alignment crosses thestream. Utility lines that cross streams shall be constructed by methods that maintain normalstream flow and allow for a dry excavation. Water pumped from the excavation shall becontained and allowed to settle prior to re-entering the stream. Excavation equipment andvehicles shall operate outside of the flowing portion of the stream. Spoil material from theutility line excavation shall not be allowed to enter the flowing portion of the stream.

D. The activities shall not result in any permanent changes in preconstruction elevation contoursin waters or wetlands or stream dimension, pattern or profile.

E. Utility line construction projects through jurisdictional wetlands shall not result in conversionof the area to non-wetland status.

F. Measures shall be taken to prevent or control spills of fuels, lubricants, or other toxicmaterials used in construction form entering the watercourse.

G. Removal of riparian vegetation in the utility line right-of-way shall be limited to that necessaryfor equipment access. Effective erosion and sedimentation control measures must beemployed at all times during the project to prevent degradation of waters of theCommonwealth. Site regarding and reseeding will be accomplished with 14 days afterdisturbance.

H. To the maximum extent practicable, all in stream work under this certification shall beperformed during low flow.

I. Heavy equipment, e.g. bulldozers, backhoes, draglines, etc., if required for this project,should not be used or operated within the stream channel. In those instances where such instream work is unavoidable, then it shall be performed in such a manner and duration as tominimize turbidity and disturbance to substrates and bank or riparian vegetation.

J. Any fill shall be of such composition that it will not adversely affect the biological, chemical, orphysical properties of the receiving waters and/or cause violations of water quality standards.If riprap is utilized, it is to be of such weight and size that bank stress or slump conditions willnot be created because of its placement.

K. Removal of existing riparian vegetation should be restricted to the minimum necessary forproject construction.

L. Should evidence of stream pollution or jurisdictional wetland impairment and/or violations ofwater quality standards occur as a result of this activity (either from a spill or other forms ofwater pollution), the Kentucky Division of Water shall be notified immediately by calling800/928-2380.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 SOIL MATERIALS

A. Definitions:


1. Satisfactory soil materials are defined as those complying with ASTM D2487 soilclassification groups GW, GP, GM, SM, SW, SP, GC, SC, ML, and CL.

2. Unsatisfactory soil materials are defined as those complying with ASTM D2487 soilclassification groups MH, CH, OL, OH and PT. The Contractor shall notify the Engineer ifthese soil materials are encountered.

3. Subbase Material: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel,crushed stone, crushed slag, natural or crushed sand.

4. Drainage Fill: Washed, evenly graded mixture of crushed stone, or uncrushed gravel,with 100 percent passing a 1/2 inch sieve and not more than 5 percent passing a No. 4sieve.

5. Backfill and Fill Materials: Satisfactory soil materials free of debris, waste, frozenmaterials, vegetable, and other deleterious matter.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 CLEARING AND GRUBBING

A. Work shall consist of cutting and removing designated trees, stumps, brush, logs, removal offences, or other loose and projecting material. Unless otherwise specified, it shall alsoinclude the grubbing of stumps, roots, and other natural obstructions which, in the opinion ofthe Engineer, must be removed to execute properly the construction work and operateproperly the facility upon the completion of construction.

. Trees, bushes, and all natural vegetation shall only be removed with the approval of theEngineer. No cleared or grubbed materials shall be used in backfills or embankment fills. Allstumps, roots, and other objectionable material shall be grubbed up so that no roots largerthan 3 inches in diameter remain less than 18 inches below the ground surface. All holesand depressions left by grubbing operations shall be filled with suitable material andcompacted to grade, as recommended in Paragraph 3.06.

C. Disposal shall be by burning or other methods satisfactory to the Engineer; however, burningwill be permitted only when the Contractor has obtained written permission from the localregulatory agency.

D. The Contractor shall also remove from the site and satisfactorily dispose of all miscellaneousrubbish including, but not limited to, masonry, scrap metal, rock, pavement, etc., that is underthe fill or to be removed as shown on the Drawings, specified herein, or directed by theEngineer.

E. Existing improvements, adjacent property, utility and other facilities, and trees, plants, andbrush that are not to be removed shall be protected from injury or damage resulting from theContractor's operations.

F. Trees and shrubs, designated to remain or that are beyond the clearing and grubbing limit,which are injured or damaged during construction operations shall be treated or replaced atthe Contractor's expense by experienced tree surgery personnel.

3.02 EROSION CONTROL

A. Temporary measures shall be applied throughout the construction period to control and tominimize siltation to adjacent properties and waterways. Such measures shall include, butnot be limited to, the use of berms, silt barriers, gravel or crushed stone, mulch, slope drainsand other methods.


B. These temporary measures shall be applied to erodible material exposed by any activityassociated with the construction of this project.

C. Refer to Section 31 25 00, Erosion and Sedimentation Control for requirements.

3.03 EXCAVATION

A. Excavation of every description and of whatever substances encountered within the gradinglimits of the project shall be performed to the lines and grades indicated on the Drawings. Allexcavation shall be performed in the manner and sequence as required for the work.

B. All excavated materials that meet the requirements for fill, subgrades or backfill shall bestockpiled within the site for use as fill or backfill, or for providing the final site grades. Wherepracticable, suitable excavated material shall be transported directly to any place in the fillareas within the limits of the work. All excavated materials that are not suitable for fill, andany surplus of excavated material that is not required for fill shall be disposed of by theContractor.

C. The site shall be kept free of surface water at all times. The Contractor shall install drainageditches, dikes and shall perform all pumping and other work necessary to divert or removerainfall and all other accumulations of surface water from the excavations. The diversion andremoval of surface water shall be performed in a manner that will prevent flooding and/ordamage to other locations within the construction area where it may be detrimental. TheContractor shall provide, install and operate sufficient trenches, sumps, pumps, hose piping,well points, deep wells, etc., necessary to depress and maintain the ground water level atleast two (2) feet below the base of the excavation during all stages of constructionoperations. The ground water table shall be lowered in advance of excavation andmaintained a minimum of two (2) feet below the lowest excavation subgrade made until theexcavation is backfilled or the structure has sufficient strength and weight to withstandhorizontal and vertical soil and water pressures from natural ground water.

D. Excavations for concrete structural slabs on grade shall extend two (2) feet below theindicated bottom of slabs. The over-excavation shall be backfilled with 18 inches, compactedthickness, of over lot fill material or suitable material as herein specified. The remaining six(6) inches of over-excavation shall be backfilled with porous fill material. The porous fill layershall extend beyond the limits of the concrete slab a minimum of two (2) feet on all sides asindicated on the Drawings. The porous fill shall be crushed stone or gravel and shall havethe following U.S. Standard Sieve gradation:

Sieve 1-1/2 1 3/4 1/2 3/8% Passing Min 100 95+5 58+17 Max 15 Max 5

E. Excavations for the construction shall be carefully made to the depths required. Bottoms forfootings and grade beams shall be level, clean and clear of loose material, the lower sectionstrue to size. Bottoms of footings and grade beams, in all locations, shall be at a minimumdepth of 30 inches below adjacent exterior finished grade or 30 inches below adjacentexisting grade, whichever is lower, whether so indicated or not. Footings and grade beambottoms shall be inspected by the Engineer before any concrete is placed thereon.

F. In excavations for structures where, in the opinion of the Engineer, the ground is spongy orotherwise unsuitable for the contemplated foundation, the Contractor shall remove suchunsuitable material and replace it with suitable material properly compacted.

G. Sheeting and shoring shall be provided as necessary for the protection of the work and forthe safety of the personnel. The clearances and types of the temporary structures, insofar asthey affect the character of the finished work, will be subject to the review of the Engineer, butthe Contractor shall be responsible for the adequacy of all sheeting, bracing andcofferdamming. All shoring, bracing and sheeting shall be removed as the excavations are


backfilled in a manner such as to prevent injurious caving; or, if so directed by the Engineer,shall be left in place. Sheeting left in place shall be cut off 18 inches below the surface.

H. Excavation for structures which have been carried below the depths indicated without specificinstructions shall be refilled to the proper grade with suitable material properly compacted,except that in excavation for columns, walls or footings, the concrete footings shall extend tothis lower depth. All work of this nature shall be at the Contractor's expense.

3.04 FILL

A. All existing fill below structures and paved areas must be stripped. The upper six (6) inchesof the natural subgrade below shall be scarified and recompacted at optimum moisture to atleast ninety-five percent (95%) of Standard Proctor Density ASTM D 698 (latest revision).

B. All vegetation, such as roots, brush, heavy sods, heavy growth of grass and all decayedvegetable matter, rubbish and other unsuitable material within the area upon which fill is to beplaced shall be stripped or otherwise removed before the fill is started. In no case will suchobjectionable material be allowed to remain in or under the fill area. Existing fill fromexcavated areas on site shall be used as fill for open and/or planted areas. Additional fillstockpiled at the site can be used for structural fill if approved by the Engineer. Anyadditional material necessary for establishing the indicated grades shall be furnished by theContractor and approved by the Engineer. All fill material shall be free from trash, roots andother organic material. The best material to be used in fills shall be reserved for backfillingpipe lines and for finishing and dressing the surface. Material larger than 3 inches maximumdimension shall not be permitted in the upper 6 inches of the fill area. Fill material shall beplaced in successive layers and thoroughly tamped or rolled in a manner approved by theEngineer, each layer being moistened or dried such that the specified degree of compactionshall be obtained. No fill shall be placed or compacted in a frozen condition or on top offrozen material. No fill material shall be placed when free water is standing on the surface ofthe area where the fill is to be placed and no compaction of fill will be permitted with freewater on any point of the surface of the fill to be compacted.

C. Where concrete slabs are placed on earth, all loam and organic or other unsuitable materialshall be removed. Where fill is required to raise the subgrade for concrete slabs to theelevations as indicated on the Drawings or as required by the Engineer, such fill shall consistof suitable material and shall be placed in layers. Each layer shall be moistened or driedsuch that the specified degree of compaction shall be obtained. All compaction shall beaccomplished in a manner and with equipment as approved by the Engineer. When thesubgrade is part fill and part excavation or natural ground, the excavated or natural groundportion shall be scarified to a depth of 12 inches and compacted as specified for adjacent fill.

3.05 BACKFILLING

A. After completion of footings, grade beams and other construction below the elevation of thefinal grades and prior to backfilling, all forms shall be removed and the excavation shall becleaned of all trash and debris. Material for backfilling shall be as specified for suitablematerial, placed and compacted as specified hereinafter. Backfill shall be placed inhorizontal layers of the thickness specified and shall have a moisture content such that therequired degree of compaction is obtained. Each layer shall be compacted by mechanicaltampers or by other suitable equipment approved by the Engineer to the specified density.Special care shall be taken to prevent wedging action or eccentric loading upon or againstthe structure. Trucks and machinery used for grading shall not be allowed within 45 degreesabove the bottom of the footings or grade beams.

B. The trenches shall be backfilled following visual inspection by the Engineer and prior topressure testing. The trenches shall be carefully backfilled with the excavated materialsapproved for backfilling, or other suitable materials, free from large clods of earth or stones.Each layer shall be compacted to a density at least equal to that of the surrounding earth andin such a manner as to permit the rolling and compaction of the filled trench with the adjoining


earth to provide the required bearing value, so that paving, if required, can proceedimmediately after backfilling is completed.

3.06 COMPACTION

A. Suitable material as hereinbefore specified shall be placed in maximum 8" horizontal layers.Compaction shall be performed by rolling with approved tamping rollers, pneumatic-tiredrollers, three wheel power rollers or other approved equipment. The degree of compactionrequired is expressed as a percentage of the maximum dry density obtained by the testprocedure presented in ASTM D-698. Laboratory moisture density tests shall be performedon all fill material. Material shall be moistened or aerated as necessary to provide themoisture content that will readily facilitate obtaining the specified compaction. Compactionrequirements shall be as specified below:

Fill Utilized ForRequired Density

(%)

Maximum PermissibleLift Thickness AsCompacted, Inches

Backfill & Utility Trenches UnderFoundations & Pavements

95-100 8

Backfill Around Structures95-100 8

Field and Utility Trench Backfill UnderSidewalks and Open Areas

90-100 8

B. Field density tests shall be performed in sufficient number to insure that the specified densityis being obtained. Tests shall be in accordance with ASTM Standards D 1556 or D 2922/D3017 and shall be performed as authorized by the Engineer. Payment for field density testsshall be by the Contractor. Contractor shall provide suitable notification for coordination oftesting. Delays due to the lack of adequate advance notification shall be the responsibility ofthe Contractor.

3.07 SITE GRADING

A. Where indicated or directed, topsoil shall be removed without contamination with subsoil andspread on areas already graded and prepared for topsoil, or transported and stockpiledconvenient to areas for later application, or at locations specified. Topsoil shall be stripped tofull depth and, when stored, shall be kept separate from other excavated materials and piledfree of roots, stones, and other undesirable materials.

B. Following stripping, fill areas shall be scarified to a minimum depth of six (6) inches to providebond between existing ground and the fill material. Material should be placed in successivehorizontal layers not exceeding twelve (12) inches uncompacted thickness. In general, layersshall be placed approximately parallel to the finished grade line.

C. In general and unless otherwise specified, the Contractor may use any type of earth movingequipment he has at his disposal, provided such equipment is in satisfactory condition and ofsuch type and capacity that the work may be accomplished properly and the gradingschedule maintained. During construction, the Contractor shall route equipment at all times,both when loaded and empty, over the layers as they are placed, and shall distribute thetravel evenly over the entire area.

D. The material in the layers shall be of the proper moisture content before rolling or tamping toobtain the prescribed compaction. Wetting or drying throughout the layer shall be required.Should the material be too wet to permit proper compaction or rolling, all work on the fill thusaffected shall be delayed until the material has dried to the required moisture content. If thematerial is too dry, it shall be sprinkled with water and manipulated to obtain the uniformmoisture content required throughout a layer before it is compacted.


E. Each layer of the fill shall be compacted by rolling or tamping to the standard specified inParagraph 3.06 and not less than 90% maximum density at optimum moisture content asdetermined by field density tests made by the Standard Proctor method. In general andunless otherwise specified, the Contractor may use any type of compaction equipment suchas sheepsfoot rollers, pneumatic rollers, smooth rollers and other such equipment he has athis disposal, provided such equipment is in satisfactory condition and is of such design, type,size, weight, and quantity to obtain the required density in the embankment. If at any timethe required density is not being obtained with the equipment then in use by the Contractor,the Engineer may require that different and/or additional compaction equipment be obtainedand placed in use at once to obtain the required compaction.

F. The Contractor shall be responsible for the stability of all embankments and shall replace anyportion which, in the opinion of the Engineer, has become displaced due to carelessness ornegligence on the part of the Contractor.

3.08 TOPSOIL

A. Provide all labor, materials, equipment and services required for furnishing and placingtopsoil. Samples of topsoil shall be submitted to the Engineer for review before topsoil isplaced. The material shall be good quality loam and shall be fertile, friable, mellow; free fromstones larger than one (1) inch, excessive gravel, junk metal, glass, wood, plastic articles,roots and shall have a liberal amount of organic matter. Light sand loam or heavy clay loamwill not be acceptable.

B. The topsoil shall be 3 inches thick in all areas to be seeded. No topsoil shall be placed untilthe area to be covered is excavated or filled to the required grade. Imported backfill materialwill be stockpiled on site for structure backfilling and top soiling.

END OF SECTION

DIVISION 33

UTILITIES

YARD VALVES 331216-1 TOWN BRANCH WWTP THICKENING

e

ul

SECTION 331216 – YARD VALVES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE OF WORK

r

A. Provide all labor, materials, equipment and services required to furnish and install all valvesshown on the Drawings and/or specified herein.

t


t

A. Drawings and General Provisions of the Contract, including General and SupplementaryConditions and Division 01 Specification sections, apply to work of this Section.

aB. Piping is specified in Division 33 Specification sections.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

D

A. Descriptive literature, catalog cuts, and dimensional prints clearly indicating all dimensionsand materials of construction, shall be submitted on all items specified herein to the Engineerfor review before ordering. Comply with provisions of Section 013323.

B. At the time of submission, the Contractor shall, in writing, call Engineer's attention to anydeviations that the submittals may have from the requirements of the Engineer's ContractDrawings and Specifications.

C. In accordance with the requirements of the General and Special Conditions and this Section,the following table includes, but is not limited to, the items required to be submitted:

Item Description Sh

op

raw

ing

s

Pro

du

ct

Dta

Sch

ed

ule

s

Insta

llati

on

Da

a

Part

sL

iss

Wir

ing

Dia

gam

Sam

ple

s

O&

MM

an

a

Crt

ific

ate

s

Warr

an

ty

Rep

ort

Oth

er

Valves X X X

Yard H ant X X Xydr

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 PLUG VALVES - BURIED

A. All plug valves shall be eccentric plug valves unless otherwise specified.

B. Valves shall be of the non-lubricated eccentric type with resilient faced plugs and shall befurnished with end connections as shown on the plans. Flanged valves shall be faced anddrilled to the ANSI 125/150 lb. standard. Mechanical joint ends shall be to the AWWAStandard C111-64, grooved ends per AWWA C606-87. Screwed ends shall be to the NPTstandard.


C. Valve bodies shall be flushing body type and made of ASTM A126 Class B cast iron. Valvesshall be furnished with a 1/8" welded overlay seat of not less than 95% pure nickel. Seatarea shall be raised, with raised surface completely covered with weld to insure that the plugface contacts only nickel. Screwed-in seats shall not be acceptable.

D. Plugs shall be made of ductile iron. The plug shall have a cylindrical seating surfaceeccentrically offset from the center of the plug shaft. The interference between the plug faceand body seat, with the plug in the closed position, shall be externally adjustable in the fieldwith the valve in the line under pressure. Plug shall be resilient faced with neoprene or hycar,suitable for use with sewage.

E. Valves shall have replaceable sleeve type bearings and grit seals at the upper and lowerjournals.

F. Valve shaft seals shall be of the multiple V-ring type and shall be externally adjustable andrepackable without removing the bonnet or actuator from the valve under pressure. Valvesutilizing O-ring seals or non-adjustable packing shall not be acceptable.

G. Valve pressure ratings shall be 175 psi through 12" and 150 psi for 14" through 72". Eachvalve shall be given a hydrostatic and seat test with test results being certified when requiredby the specifications.

H. Buried valves shall be manually operated with 2-inch square operating nuts in verticalposition for use in a valve box unless otherwise indicated on the plans. Buried valves shallhave extension stems that bring the 2-inch square operating nut to within 2 feet of finishedgrade. Each buried valve shall be supplied with a two (2) T-handle wrenches that allow thevalve to be operated with the T- handle at waist height. All valves 6-inch and larger shall beequipped with gear actuators. All gearing shall be enclosed in a semi-steel housing and besuitable for running in a lubricant with seals provided on all shafts to prevent entry of dirt andwater into the actuator. The actuator shaft shall be stainless steel and the quadrant shall besupported on permanently lubricated bronze bearings. Actuators shall clearly indicate valveposition and an adjustable stop shall be provided to set closing torque and to provide seatadjustment to compensate for change in pressure differential or flow direction change. Allexposed nuts, bolts, washers and appurtenances shall be stainless steel.

I. Valves and gear actuators for buried or submerged service shall have seals for all shafts andgaskets on the valve and actuator covers to prevent the entry of water. Actuator mountingbrackets for buried or submerged service shall be totally enclosed and shall have gasketseals. All exposed nuts, bolts, springs, washers and appurtenances shall be stainless steel.

J. Cylinder actuators shall be equipped with a 2-inch operating nut to allow manual valveoperation in case of supply failure.

K. Valves shall provide drip tight shutoff up to the full pressure rating. Valves shall be providedwith adjustable limit stops and rotate 90 degrees from fully opened to fully closed.

L. Valves shall have rectangular port openings for throttling service, and shall open to 100% ofthe corresponding pipe diameter.

M. All buried service plug valves shall have mechanical joint ends and have all exterior surfacesshop painted with two coats of Fed. Spec. TT-C-494A Asphalt Varnish.

N. All valves and actuators shall be as manufactured by Golden Anderson or Dezurik.


2.02 YARD HYDRANTS

A. Yard hydrants shall be installed where described on the Drawings or directed by the Engineerin accordance with the details shown. Hydrants shall be of the frostproof, compression typewith all working parts removable without digging up the hydrants. Hydrants shall be equippedwith removable handwheel or lever, hose connections (1-1/2" size) and bottom connection for2-inch water line. Hydrants shall be Model M-200 Murdock Manufacturing and SupplyCompany, American-Darling, Zurn, or equal.

B. All hydrants shall be backfilled to the ground surface with crushed stone.

C. Exposed portions of hydrants shall be factory painted with an enamel finish. Color chartsshall be furnished with Shop Drawings for color selection by the Engineer. Below groundportions shall have two (2) coats of Fed. Spec. TT-V-51F Asphalt Varnish.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. All valves shall be installed in accordance with details on the Contract Drawings and with themanufacturer's recommendations.

B. All valves shall be anchored in accordance with the details on the Contract Drawings.

END OF SECTION

DIVISION 40

PROCESS INTEGRATION

ELECTRIC VALVE AND GATE ACTUATORS 400057-1 TOWN BRANCH WWTP THICKENING

SECTION 400557 - ELECTRIC VALVE AND GATE ACTUATORS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Provide valve and gate actuators as indicated on the Contract Drawings and as specifiedherein.

1.02 RELATED WORK

A. Division 26 – Electrical

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop drawing approval is required. Valve and gate submittals shall include their respectiveactuators in a single submittal. Include complete wiring diagrams and electrical information.

B. Operation and Maintenance Manuals shall be submitted.


A. Actuators shall comply with AWWA C540.

1.05 WARRANTY AND SERVICE

A. Minimum one-year warranty is required on all actuators from the date of substantial completion.Provide extended warranty if necessary to meet this date requirement.

1.06 TRAINING

A. Provide one 4-hour training class on actuator operation, maintenance, and troubleshooting, foreach type of actuator provided.

PART 2 - PRODUCT

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Acceptable manufacturers for motorized actuators shall be Limitorque.

2.02 ACTUATOR CONSTRUCTION

A. Actuators shall consist of an electric motor, worm gear reduction, electronic torque sensor,mechanically and electrically interlocked reversing motor contactor, electronic control,protection, and monitoring package, manual override handwheel, valve interface bushing, LCD(Liquid Crystal Display), and local control switches. Actuator design life shall be at least onemillion drive sleeve turns.

B. Actuator Housing: Actuators installed above grade shall be NEMA 4X. Actuators proposed forhazardous areas (as indicated on the Drawings) shall be FM certified for the indicatedhazardous area. An integral space heater and thermostat shall be provided for prevention ofcondensation.

C. Actuators indicated as two-position actuators shall have limit switches to indicate positionstatus. Modulating actuators shall have an absolute position encoder and shall accept 4-20mAinput position control signal and shall generate a 4-20mA position feedback signal.


D. The power transmission shall be completely bearing-supported, and consist of a hardened alloysteel worm and bronze alloy worm gear; oil-bath lubricated using synthetic oil designedspecifically for extreme pressure worm and worm gear transmission service.

E. The actuator voltage rating shall be as indicated on the Drawings. The motor shall have ClassF insulation and a thermistor embedded within the motor windings to prevent damage due tooverload. The motor shall be easily removed through the use of a plug-in connector and shaftcoupling. Valve motors shall be listed for continuous duty operation.

F. Motors for open-close service shall be suitable for 100 starts per hour. Positioning actuatorsshall be rated 1200 starts per hour.

G. An electronic torque sensor shall be included. The torque limit may be adjusted from 40-100%of rating in 1% increments. The motor shall be deenergized if the torque limit is exceeded. Aboost function shall be included to prevent torque trip during initial valve unseating and duringextreme arctic temperature operation (-50°C), and a “Jammed Valve” protection feature, withautomatic retry sequence, shall be incorporated to de-energize the motor if no movementoccurs.

H. A Phase Correction circuit shall be included to correct motor rotation faults caused by incorrectsite wiring. The phase correction circuit shall also detect the loss of a phase and disableoperation to prevent motor damage. The monitor relay shall trip and an error message shallbe displayed on the LCD screen when loss of phase occurs and indicate the fault for Remoteoperation.

I. A monitor relay shall be included and shall trip when the actuator is not available for remoteoperation. Both N/O and N/C contacts shall be included, rated 125VAC, 0.5A and 30VDC, 2amps. The monitor relay shall be configurable for three additional fault indications; lost phase,valve jammed, and motor overtemp. The yellow LED shall blink when the monitor relay isactive.

J. Four (4) programmable relays shall be provided to provide the following signals to thecustomer’s control system:

1. #1 - Actuator full open.

2. #2 - Actuator full closed.

3. #3 - Actuator in “Remote” control.

4. #4 - Spare relay.

K. LCD display shall be provided with a lithium battery powered display back-up module tomaintain display illumination during a power outage.

L. A padlockable LOCAL-STOP-REMOTE switch and an OPEN-CLOSE switch shall be includedfor local valve actuator control. The control switches shall not penetrate the controls cover andshall be designed to electrically isolate the actuator’s internal components from the externalenvironment. The OPEN-CLOSE switch may be configured for maintained or push-to-run(inching) control.

M. Double sealed terminal compartment and Terminal block – All customer connections shall belocated in a terminal chamber that is separately sealed from all other actuator components.Site wiring shall not expose actuator components to the environment.

N. Coatings – The actuator shall be coated with a polymer powder coat. The coating system shallbe suitable for an ASTM B117 salt spray test of 1500 hours. External fasteners shall bestainless steel or high-strength carbon steel that has been chromate-hexavalent coated, and


then top coated with a high-strength, high-endurance polymer. The fasteners shall be suitablefor an ASTM B117 salt spray test of 500 hours.

O. A handwheel and declutch lever shall be provided for manual operation. The handwheel shallnot rotate during electric operation nor can a seized motor prevent manual operation. Changingfrom motor to manual operation is accomplished by engaging the declutch lever. Energizingthe motor shall return the actuator to motor operation. The lever to enable the declutch shallbe padlockable to permit motor operation only.

P. The actuator shall include a removable torque or thrust bushing to mate with the valve shaft.

Q. Factory testing – Every actuator shall be factory tested to verify: rated output torque, outputspeed, handwheel operation, local control, control power supply, valve jammed function, allcustomer inputs and outputs, motor current, motor thermistor, LCD and LED operation,direction of rotation, microprocessor checks, and position-sensor checks. A report confirmingsuccessful completion of testing shall be included with the actuator.

R. Schedule:

Tag No. Service Modulating/Open-Close

Voltage Accessories

FCV-12001 6” Plug Valve Modulating 460Vac 4FCV-12002 6” Plug Valve Modulating 460Vac 4FCV-12003 6” Plug Valve Open – Close 460Vac 4FCV-13001 6” Plug Valve Open – Close 460Vac 4FCV-13002 6” Plug Valve Open – Close 460Vac 4FCV-13003 6” Plug Valve Open – Close 460Vac 4FCV-13004 6” Plug Valve Open – Close 460Vac 4

Accessories:

1. Integral circuit breaker disconnect switch.

2. Communications: Modbus RTU.

3. Communications: Profibus.

4. Communications: DeviceNet.

5. Communications: Foundation Fieldbus.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Install the valve and actuator per manufacturer’s instructions.

B. Contractor shall furnish a factory certified field technician to check mechanical operation,configure programmable parameters, span input and output signals, test, and commission theactuator to ensure proper operation.

C. For modulating actuators – tune control loops to achieve stable operation with reasonableresponse time and accurate setpoint control.

END OF SECTION

BASIC CONTROL MEASUREMENT AND CONTROL 409000-1 TOWN BRANCH WWTP THICKENINGINSRUMENTATION MATERIALS AND METHODS

SECTION 409000 - BASIC MEASUREMENT AND CONTROL INSTRUMENTATION MATERIALS ANDMETHODS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 WORK INCLUDED

A. The Contractor shall furnish all materials, labor, tools, equipment, supplies and servicesnecessary to install all process control and instrumentation equipment complete as specifiedherein and shown on the Drawings. The Contractor shall be responsible for the expense ofchanging Drawings or structures, or any other expense necessitated by reason of installingalternative equipment. The Contractor will assume the responsibility for the satisfactoryoperation of any and all equipment offered.

B. The following equipment specification is included to establish the quality of equipment to beobtained. It is the intent of these Specifications to obtain industrial quality instrumentation andcontrol equipment. Equipment furnished shall be accepted by the Engineer, prior to purchaseby the Contractor.

C. Auxiliary and accessory devices necessary for system operation or performance, such astransducers or relays to interface with equipment provided under other Sections of thisSpecification, shall be included whether specified or not, at no extra cost.

D. In order to ensure proper integration and compatibility of the plant instrumentation and controlsystems, the systems must be supplied by a single provider of instrumentation and controlequipment. This is not to say that all equipment being supplied shall be manufactured by asingle manufacturer, but rather that a single provider of instrumentation and control equipmentshall be responsible for supplying the complete system. To facilitate the Owner’s futureoperation and maintenance, products performing the same function shall all be of the samemanufacturer, type, and model number.

E. Substitutions on functions or equipment specified will not be acceptable. In order to ensure theinterchangeability of parts, the maintenance of quality, the ease of interfacing between thevarious subsystems, and the establishment of minimums with regard to ranges and accuracy,strict compliance with the above requirements shall be maintained. In order to ensurecompatibility between all equipment, it shall be the responsibility of the system supplierhereunder to coordinate all interface requirements with mechanical and electrical systemsuppliers and furnish any signal isolation devices that might be required.

F. Equipment shall be fabricated, assembled, installed, and placed in proper operating conditionin full conformity with detail drawings, specifications, engineering data, instructions andrecommendations of the equipment manufacturer as accepted by the Engineer.

G. The instrument supplier for this Contract shall be responsible for making the modificationsshown on the Drawings and for recalibrating all instruments and placing them in proper workingorder.

H. The Contractor shall be responsible for subcontracting out and managing the SystemIntegration (programming) services and including this cost in the bid to be paid forunder an allowance. Refer to Specification Section 012100 on allowances.

1.02 RELATED WORK

A. The following Sections of this Specification Division contain requirements on instrumentationand control equipment and software which are considered to be covered by applicablerequirements of this section (and shall be included in the bid by a single InstrumentationSupplier for this Project):

WWS/PS RMP Specifications 409000-2 EHWWS Facility & Pump Stations

Section 409030 - Measurement and Control CommissioningSection 409134 – In-Line Flow Measuring SystemsSection 409136 – Level Measuring SystemsSection 409443 – Programmable Logic Process ControllersSection 409513 – Process Control Panels and HardwareSection 409533 – Cabled Process Control NetworksSection 409610 – Process Control SoftwareSection 409620 - Instrument Lists and ReportsSection 409700 - Process Control Auxiliary Devices

B. The following Divisions of these Specifications contain requirements on equipment furnishedby other suppliers that must interface with the instrument system, or on methods and materialsto be performed/used in the installation and/or wiring of the instrumentation system.

Division 01 – General RequirementsDivision 11 – EquipmentDivision 26 – ElectricalDivision 46 – Water and Wastewater Equipment


A. The system supplier shall be required to demonstrate a minimum of 4 years recent, pastexperience in the design, manufacture, and commissioning of instrumentation and controlsystems of comparable size, type, and complexity to the proposed project. Further, themanufacturer must have at least 10 similar systems in operation currently. The system suppliershall be required to have his own in-house capability to handle complete system engineering,fabrication, and testing.

B. The system supplier shall have in his employ the capable personnel for detail engineering,coordination, drafting, procurement and expediting, scheduling construction, testing inspection,installation, start-up service for calibration and commissioning, and warranty compliance forthe period specified.

1.04 REFERENCES

A. The Contractor is referred to Standards and Practices for Instrumentation published by theInternational Society of Automation (latest edition), for terminology, symbols, methods andpractices used or described herein or on the Drawings.

1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. General

1. Complete detail Drawings of the instrumentation and control systems and all componentsshall be submitted in 3 copies in a 3-ring loose-leaf cardboard reinforced vinyl binder to theEngineer for preliminary review. They shall include installation instructions, operation andmaintenance instructions, descriptive literature, connection drawings, and parts list foreach item as well as individual control schematic drawings for each item.

2. The Contractor shall make any corrections or changes required by the Engineer, within thescope of the Drawings and Specifications, and return copies in 3-ring loose-leaf cardboardreinforced vinyl binders for final review and distribution. Number of copies shall be asspecified in Special conditions and as agreed at the pre-construction conference.

3. Should any system submitted in the shop drawings not meet with the Engineer’sacceptance as to conformity with requirements of the Drawings and Specifications, it shall


be the responsibility of the successful Contractor to make whatever changes are necessaryfor acceptance at no extra cost to the Owner.

B. Detailed Requirements - Instruments/Hardware

1. Detailed information for each instrument or control device shall be submitted, includingmanufacturer’s descriptive literature and a specific data sheet for each device which shallinclude as a minimum:

a. Tag number assigned by the Contract Documents.

b. Product (item) name used herein and on the Contract Drawings.

c. Manufacturer’s complete model number.

d. Location of the device.

e. Input - output characteristics.

f. Electrical characteristics.

g. Range, size, and graduations.

h. Physical size with dimensions, enclosure NEMA classification, and mounting details.

i. Materials of construction of all components.

j. Instrument or control device sizing calculations where applicable.

k. Certified calibration data on all flow metering devices.

2. Submit a detailed loop diagram, for each monitoring or control loop, each on a single 8 ½in. x 11 in. sheet. The format shall be the Instrument Society of America, Standard forInstrument Loop Diagrams, ISA-S5.4.

3. The data sheets shall be provided with an index and proper identification and cross-referencing. Partial submittals will be rejected.

4. Submit detailed drawings concerning control panels and/or enclosures including:

a. Cabinet assembly and layout drawings to scale.

b. Fabrication and painting specifications.

c. I/O layout.

d. Elementary panel wiring diagrams

e. Point to point wiring diagrams depicting wiring within the panel as well as connectionsto external devices.

f. Color samples for paint selection by the Engineer and/or Owner.

g. Panel submittal drawings shall be on 11 in x 17 in. sheets.

5. Exceptions to the Specifications or Drawings shall be clearly indicated in the submittal bythe system supplier. Data shall contain sufficient details so a proper evaluation may bemade by the Engineer.


6. Prior to final acceptance, the final shop drawing submittal, which is to include Installation,Operation, and Maintenance instructions, shall be updated to reflect “As Constructed”status, and shall provide at least the following as a minimum:

a. A comprehensive index.

b. A complete “As Constructed” set of accepted shop drawings.

c. A complete list of the equipment supplied, including serial numbers, ranges, andpertinent data.

d. Full specifications on each item.

e. System schematic drawings “As Constructed”, illustrating all components, piping andelectrical connections of the systems supplied under this Section.

f. Detailed service, maintenance, and operation instructions for each item supplied.

g. Special maintenance requirements particular to this system shall be clearly defined,along with special calibration and test procedures.

h. The operating instructions shall also incorporate a functional description of the entiresystem, with reference to the systems schematic drawings and instructions.

i. Complete parts lists with stock numbers and name, address, and telephone number ofthe local supplier.


A. Shipping Precautions:

1. After completion of shop assembly, factory test, and acceptance, all equipment, cabinets,panels, and consoles shall be packed in protective crates and enclosed in heavy dutypolyethylene envelopes or secured sheeting to provide complete protection from damage,dust, and moisture. Dehumidifiers shall be placed inside the polyethylene coverings. Theequipment shall then be skid-mounted for final transport. Lifting rings shall be provided formoving without removing protective covering. Boxed weights shall be shown on shippingtags together with instructions for unloading, transporting, storing, and handling at the jobsite.

2. Special instructions for proper field handling, storage and installation required bymanufacturer for proper protection, shall be securely attached to each piece of equipmentproper to packaging and shipment.

B. Identification:

1. Each component shall be tagged to identify its location, tag number and function in thesystem. Identification shall be prominently displayed on the outside of the package.

2. A permanent stainless steel or other non-corrosive material tag firmly attached andpermanently and indelibly marked with the instrument tag number, as given in thetabulation, shall be provided on each piece of equipment supplied under this Section.

C. Storage:

1. Equipment shall not be stored out-of-doors. Equipment shall be stored in dry permanentshelters including in-line equipment, and shall be adequately protected against mechanicalinjury. If any apparatus has been damaged, such damage shall be repaired by the


Contractor at his own cost and expense. If any apparatus has been subject to possibleinjury by water, it shall be thoroughly dried out and put through such tests as directed bythe Engineer. This shall be at the cost and expense of the Contractor, or the apparatusshall be replaced by the Contractor at his own expense.

1.07 WARRANTY (MAINTENANCE CONTRACT)

A. A written total instrument maintenance contract shall be provided to the Owner, executed bythe system supplier as a part of the work under this Section. The maintenance contract shallinclude all labor, parts, and emergency calls providing on-site response within 48 hours, toprovide complete instrument system maintenance for a period of one year after the date of finalacceptance of the system. The maintenance contract shall also include a minimum of 2 semi-annual preventive maintenance visits by a qualified serviceman of the supplier who is familiarwith the type of equipment provided for this project. Each preventive maintenance visit shallinclude routine adjustment, calibration, cleaning, and lubrication of all system equipment andverification of correct operations. Emergency maintenance procedures or plant visits maycoincide with a scheduled preventive maintenance visit, however, they shall not replace thework intended to be performed during a preventive maintenance visit. The system suppliershall have full responsibility for the preventive and corrective maintenance including replacingof defective components, maintaining sufficient spare parts on-site, and complete calibrationof all components under this section, all at no cost to the Owner. The maintenance contractshall not begin until both the instrumentation training course and the system acceptance testhave been successfully completed, at which time the Owner shall be capable of performingnecessary preventive maintenance, and all instruments shall be functional.

B. During the one-year maintenance period, observation of maintenance operations bydesignated Owner personnel, and the instruction of said personnel in the details of themaintenance work being performed shall be provided.

C. A complete written report shall be furnished the Engineer and Owner after each scheduled andunscheduled visit, giving problems corrected, systems needing recalibration, andrecommendations to prevent recurrence, if applicable.

D. The costs for the one-year maintenance service contract shall be included in the Contract price.

1.08 TRAINING

A. A training program shall be set up and conducted by the major equipment manufacturerfurnishing the instrumentation package. The training session shall be for a minimum period of1 day uninterrupted and shall be conducted at the pump station.

B. A course outline showing the material to be covered shall be submitted to the Engineer forreview. The training program shall include both classroom and “hands-on” instruction for eachinstrument supplied under this group of the Specifications and shall furthermore includeoperational training, maintenance training, and training on use of calibration equipment.

C. As the equipment installed at the plant shall be used for the “hands-on” training, the trainingprogram shall not be conducted until all of the systems are operational, and operational related“punch list” items are corrected.

D. Training on equipment supplied by a manufacturer other than the major equipmentmanufacturer shall be by the original equipment manufacturer, and shall be scheduled in thetraining programs by the major equipment manufacturer. Exceptions may be granted if theinstructor demonstrates adequate knowledge on the care and operation of the othermanufacturers’ equipment.

E. The training programs shall be conducted at a time mutually agreeable to the Engineer, Owner,Contractor, and Supplier. The Owner shall decide how many of his personnel shall attend the


training. A representative of the Engineer may observe the training in progress. The Ownershall have the right to videotape all training as it is conducted.

F. The supplier shall make use of audio-visual aids in the training courses and shall provide theOWNERS staff his undivided attention (i.e., shall not conduct his company business duringtraining hours) for the full 1 day. The supplier shall furnish training participants with writtenhandouts, preferably copies of the shop drawing submittal books, up to a maximum of 6 copies,for purposes of familiarization with the shop drawings, and to assist in explanations.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL

A. All instrumentation supplied shall be of the manufacturer’s latest design and shall produce orbe activated by signals which are established standards for the water industry.

B. All electronic instrumentation shall be of the solid-state type and shall utilize linear transmissionsignals of 4 to 20 mAdc (milliampere direct current), however, signals between instrumentswithin the same panel or cabinet may be 0-10 V.d-c (volts direct current), or other manufacturerstandard.

C. Outputs of equipment that are not of the standard signals as outlined, shall have the outputimmediately raised and/or converted to compatible standard signals for remote transmission.No zero based signals will be allowed for remote transmission.

D. All instruments shall be provided with mounting hardware and floor stands, wall brackets, orinstrument racks as shown on the Drawings or as required.

E. All indicators and LED readouts shall be linear, direct reading in process units, unless otherwisenoted. Percentage scales and indicators are prohibited.

F. All transmitters shall be provided with either integral indicators or conduit mounted indicatorsin process units, accurate to two percent, unless otherwise noted.

G. Electronic equipment shall be of the manufacturer’s latest design, utilizing printed circuitry andsuitably coated to prevent contamination by dust, moisture and fungus. Solid state componentsshall be conservatively rated for their purpose, to assure optimum long term performance anddependability over ambient atmosphere fluctuations and 0 to 95 percent relative humidity. Thefield mounted equipment and system components shall be designed for installation in dusty,humid, and slightly corrosive service conditions.

H. All equipment, cabinets and devices furnished hereunder shall be heavy-duty type, designedfor continuous industrial service. The system shall contain products of a single manufacturer,in-so-far as possible, and shall consist of equipment models which are currently in production.All equipment provided shall be of modular construction and shall be capable of field expansion.

I. All equipment shall be designed to operate on a 60 Hertz alternating current power source ata nominal 115 volts, plus or minus 10 percent, except where specifically noted. All regulatorsand power supplies required for compliance with the above shall be provided between powersupply and interconnected instrument loop. Where equipment requires voltage regulation,constant voltage transformers shall be supplied.

J. All analog transmitter and controller outputs shall be 4-20 milliamperes into a load of 0-750ohms, unless higher load capacity is required.

K. All switches shall have double-pole double-throw contacts rated at a minimum of 600 VA,unless specifically noted otherwise.


L. Materials and equipment used shall be UL listed (or other independent lab listed) whereversuch listed equipment and materials are available.

M. All equipment shall be designed and constructed so that in the event of a power interruption,the equipment specified hereunder shall resume normal operation without manual resettingwhen power is restored.

N. All circuit boards in instruments mounted in damp locations or mounted outdoors shall befungus proofed. All field transmitters mounted outside shall be equipped with sunshields andshall be capable of operation to -20o Fahrenheit.

O. Equipment installed in a hazardous area shall meet Class, Group and Division as shown onthe contract drawings, to comply with the National Electrical Code. All power supply andsignals coming from and going to hazardous areas shall have intrinsic safety barriers provided.

2.02 INSTRUMENTS AND ACCESSORY EQUIPMENT

A. Refer to other Division 17 Instrumentation Specification Sections for equipment requirementsfor field mounted primary devices, transmitters and secondary instruments, receivers andcentral control equipment.


END OF SECTION

MEASUREMENT AND CONTROL 409030-1 TOWN BRANCH WWTP THICKENINGCOMMISSIONING

SECTION 409030 - MEASUREMENT AND CONTROL COMMISSIONING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 WORK INCLUDED

A. The Contractor shall furnish and install all instrumentation equipment and accessory items asshown on the Contract Drawings and as specified herein.

1.02 RELATED WORK

A. The following Sections of this Specification Division contain requirements on instrumentationand control equipment and software which are considered to be covered by applicablerequirements of this section (and shall be included in the bid by a single InstrumentationSupplier for this Project):

Section 409000 – Basic Measurement and Control Instrumentation Materials andMethodsSection 409134 – In-Line Flow Measuring SystemsSection 409136 – Level Measuring SystemsSection 409443 – Programmable Logic Process ControllersSection 409513 – Process Control Panels and HardwareSection 409533 – Cabled Process Control NetworksSection 409610 – Process Control SoftwareSection 409620 - Instrument Lists and ReportsSection 409700 - Process Control Auxiliary Devices

B. The following Divisions of these Specifications contain requirements on equipment furnishedby other suppliers that must interface with the instrument system, or on methods andmaterials to be performed/used in the installation and/or wiring of the instrumentation system.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

Not applicable.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 SEQUENCE OF CONSTRUCTION

A. Installation and startup of the Gravity Thickener Building SCADA unit DCU-H (PLC-H) shallbe coordinated with the Owner, as the equipment will communicate over an existing SCADAsystem.

B. Delivery, startup, and programming of new equipment furnished under this Division shall becoordinated with process equipment installation. A qualified technician shall be present onsite during pump startup.



A. Instrumentation and accessory equipment shall be installed in accordance with themanufacturer’s instructions. The locations of equipment, transmitters, alarms and similardevices shown on the Drawings are approximate only. Exact locations shall be as acceptedby the Engineer during construction. Obtain in the field all information relevant to the placingof process control work, proceed as directed by the manufacturer and furnish all labor andmaterials necessary to complete the work in an acceptable manner.

B. The instrumentation installation details on the Drawings indicate the designed installation forthe instruments specified. Where specific installation details are not specified or shown onthe Drawings, the manufacturer’s recommended practice shall be followed.

C. All work shall be executed in full accordance with codes. Should any work be performedcontrary to said codes and/or regulations, the Contractor shall bear full responsibility for suchviolations and assume all costs arising therefrom. All equipment used in areas designated ashazardous shall be designed for the Class, Division, and Group as required on the Drawingsfor the locations.

D. Unless specifically shown in the Contract Documents, direct reading or electrical transmittinginstrumentation shall not be mounted on process piping. Instrumentation shall be mountedon instrument racks or stands. All instrumentation connections shall be provided with shutoffand drain valves.

E. All piping to and from field instrumentation shall be provided with necessary unions, test tees,couplings, adaptors, and shut-off valves.

F. Field instruments requiring power supplies shall be provided with local electrical shut-offs andfuses as required.

G. Brackets and hangers required for mounting of equipment shall be provided. They shall beinstalled in a workmanlike manner and not interfere with any other equipment.

H. The system supplier shall investigate each space in the building through which equipmentmust pass to reach its final location. If necessary, the system supplier shall be required toship his material in sections sized to permit passing through restricted areas in the building.The system supplier shall also investigate, and make any field modifications to the allocatedspace for each cabinet, enclosure and panel to assure proper space and access (front, rear,side).

I. The shield on each process instrumentation cable shall be continuous from source todestination and be grounded as directed by the manufacturer of the instrumentationequipment but in no case shall more than one ground point be employed for each shield.

J. Lifting rings shall be removed from cabinets/assemblies. Hole plugs shall be provided for theholes of the same color as the cabinet.

K. The system supplier, acting through the Contractor, shall coordinate the installation, theplacing and location of system components, their connections to the process equipmentpanels, cabinets and devices, subject to the Engineer’s acceptance. He shall be responsibleto ensure that all field wiring for power and signal circuits are correctly done in accordancewith best industry practice and provide for all necessary system grounding to ensure asatisfactory functioning installation. The Contractor hereunder shall schedule and coordinatehis work under this Section with that of the electrical work specified under applicable Sectionsof Division 16.



A. After equipment and materials have been shipped to the job site, the Supplier shall furnishthe services of a factory-trained service technician or engineer to assist and advise theContractor during installation and to provide programming/calibration/ adjustment at initialstartup. A minimum period of 2 calendar days on the job site is required, and expensesassociated with additional days necessary shall be at no cost to the Owner.

B. Following installation, checkout, and final adjustment of all panels, instruments, meters,monitoring, and control devices, the Contractor shall schedule a performance test in thepresence of the Engineer on all equipment. The Contractor shall furnish the services of thesystem supplier’s servicemen, all special tools, calibration equipment, and labor to performthe tests.

C. Meters shall be tested at 0 percent, 25 percent, 50 percent, 75 percent, and 100 percent ofscale, if possible. All status and alarm switches as well as all monitoring and controlfunctions shall also be checked, including logging at printers and change of state on graphics.Testing shall be done from the signal source to the final element or device including all fieldwiring. Results of all testing shall be submitted to the Engineer in writing.

D. As much as possible, points shall be checked “end-to-end”. For example, valve status inputsshall be checked by stroking the valve, and a pump start output shall be checked by using itto start to start the pump. Simulated testing shall be allowed only when no practicalalternative exists. Workstation displays shall be verified for correctness at the same time. AnI/O checklist shall be used to record test results and a copy provided to the Engineer uponcompletion. During system testing, the Contractor shall have a representative onsitecontinuously who is capable of troubleshooting and modifying system configurationprogramming.

E. If, during running of the tests, one or more points appear to be out by more than the systemaccuracy statement, or fails to perform in accordance with agreed strategies, the systemsupplier’s servicemen shall make such adjustment or alterations as are necessary to bringequipment/programming up to specification performance. Following such adjustment, thetests shall be repeated for all specified points to ensure compliance.

3.04 PERFORMANCE TEST

A. Subsequent to the full system implementation, the Contractor shall conduct a successful 30day final acceptance test for the system furnished and installed under this Contract. In thistest, the entire system must operate continuously for 24 hours per day, 7 days per weekduring the test period, with zero downtime resulting from system failures. If a system failureoccurs, the 30-day test period will be repeated, starting over at time zero, from the time thatthe system failure is repaired. The Contractor shall repeat the test until it is satisfactorilycompleted. The system will only be acceptable to the Owner after all equipment andsoftware has satisfied the performance test requirements.

B. The Contractor shall submit a final acceptance test completion report which shall state that allContract requirements have been met and which shall include a summary ofmaintenance/repair efforts that were required during the test period. Final acceptance of thesystem by the Owner until this has occurred.

3.05 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. All equipment furnished under this Section of the Specifications shall be adjusted/calibratedas defined elsewhere this Section/Division.

B. All instruments and equipment shall be left free from shipping stickers, paint splatter, dirt,grease, etc., and shall be clean and in like new condition at final acceptance. Touch-up paint


shall be furnished as needed to repair blemishes and scratches in finish paint on panels andenclosures, which shall be corrected by the Contractor.

3.06 EXTRA STOCK/SPARE PARTS

A. The following supplies and spare parts shall be furnished:

1. Ten fuses for each type/size in the system.

2. Four Cutler-Hammer C799L2 oxidation inhibitors; install one in each cabinet.

3. 48 lamps for each type/size used.

4. One relay of every size and type provided in the project

B. Other spare parts are listed in specific instrument technical specifications in the appropriateDivision 40 Specification Section herein. All spare parts shall be packaged in an acceptablemanner for long-term storage and adequately protected against corrosion, humidity andtemperature extremes. All items shall be tagged externally with what they are; both a writtendescription and a manufacturer brand/part number.

END OF SECTION

PRESSURE MEASURING SYSTEMS 409129-1 TOWN BRANCH WWTP THICKENING

SECTION 409129 - PRESSURE MEASURING SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 THE REQUIREMENT

A. General: The Contractor shall provide pressure measuring systems, complete and operable,in accordance with the Contract Documents.

B. The requirements of Section 409000, Instrumentation and Control for Process Systems applyto this Section.

1.02 CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings, Owner's Manual, and Record Drawings shall be submitted in conformancewith Section 409000 and Section 013323 - Contractor Submittals.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL

A. General: Electrical interface and code compliance shall conform to the requirements ofSection 409000.

B. Provide pressure gauges as listed in the gauges schedule in Part 3 of this specificationsection.

2.02 PRESSURE GAUGES

A. All indicating gauges in dry non-process areas are pipe munted with male and brass threadedpipe connections. Gauges shall be 4 1/2 inch liquid filled for maximum vibration and corrosionprotection. Gauges shall have phosphor bronze Bourdon tubes, white lamintated phenoldials. Gauges shall have micrometer adjustment of pointers and black phenol, black castiron, brass, or aluminum case and ring, original rotary gear design, corrosion resistant,stainless steel movement, blowout protection, and bronze socket with wrench flats. Accuracyshall be within 1/2 of 1 percent of the scale range. They shall be Ashcroft, 1279 Duragage.

B. All indicating gauges in chemical feed areas and outside locations are pipe mounted withmale and 316 stainless steel threaded pipe connections. Gauges shall be 4 1/2 inch liquid-filled for maximum vibration and corrosion protection. Gauges shall have phosphor bronzeBourdon tubes (or other material compatible with stainless steel stem), white laminate phenoldials. Gauges shall have micrometer adjustment of pointers and black phenolic hemeticallysealed case and ring, original rotary gear design, corrosion resistant, stainless steelmovement, blowout protection, and 316 stainless steel socket with wrench flats. Accuracyshall be within 1/2 of 1 percent of the scale range. They shall be Ashcroft, 1279 SSDuragage.

C. Gauges shall be combination scale in both feet and PSI. Suction gauges shall be compoundvacuum and pressure.

D. All gauges shall be piped with provisions for venting pressure to allow calibration (zero)checks. Valves for gauge shutoff and zeroing shall be 1/4 turn ball valves with lever handle,corrosion-resistant. Ball vavles in chemical feed rooms and in outside locations shall be 316stainless steel.

PRESSURE MEASURING SYSTEMS 409129-2 TOWN BRANCH WWTP THICKENING

E. Liquid-filled diaphragm seals shall be isnstalled on all gauges as indicated in the GaugeSchedule herein. Diaphram seals shall be of the continous duty type, 3 piece constructionwith 1/4 inch flushing connection, 1/4 inch fill connection, 316 stainless xteel upper housing,lower housing and diaphragm material, 1/2 inch gauge connection and 1/2 inch lowerconnection. Housing bolts shall also be stainless steel. Acceptable models are Marsh 42-01,Helicoid 100H, or equal. Viton diaphragms are required on low range pressure applications(less than 15 psig). Diaphragm seals shall be “permanently” atttached to gauges byinstallation of a lead sealed wire connecting the two. This is to prevent accidental loss of fillfluid. Fill fluid shall be factory installed glycerine. All gauges shall be precalibrated, as anassembly with the seal.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 GENERAL

A. Pressure measuring systems shall be handled, installed, calibrated, loop-tested, pre-commissioned, and performance tested according to Section 409030. The manufacturershall furnish the manufacturer's service, supervision, and training indicated by Section409000.

3.02 PRESSURE GAUGE SCHEDULE

Quantity Location Required

Range

Accessories

Combination Compound

Size PSI FeetVacuum

(in) psi12 Rotary Lobe

Primary SludgePump

4-1/2 0-30 0-70 A, B, C

2 Rotary LobeThickened SludgePumps

4-1/2 0-15 0-35 A, B, C, *

2 Rotary Lobe ScumPumps

4-1/2 0-15 0-35 A, B, C, *

1 Chopper Pump 4-1/2 0-15 0-35 A, B, C, *

Pressure Gauge Accessory Code:

A – Gauge Liquid FilledB – Diaphragm Seal, Liquid FilledC – Ball Valves for Shutoff and VentD – Stainless Steel GaugeE – Stainless Steel Ball Valves and Piping* - Viton Diaphragm (0-15 psi)


IN-LINE FLOW MEASURING SYSTEMS 409134-1 TOWN BRANCH WWTP THICKENING

SECTION 409134 - IN-LINE FLOW MEASURING SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 WORK INCLUDED

A. General: The Contractor shall furnish and install all in-line liquid flow measuring systems.

B. The requirements of Section 409000, Instrumentation and Control for Process Systems applyto this Section.

1.02 CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS

A. General: Shop Drawings shall be submitted in conformance with the requirements of Section409000.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MAGNETIC FLOW MEASURING SYSTEMS

A. Magnetic Flowmeter (Tube Type):

1. Magnetic flowmeter systems shall be of the low frequency electromagnetic induction typeand produce a DC pulsed signal directly proportional to and linear with the liquid flow rate.Complete zero stability shall be an inherent characteristic of the flowmeter system. Eachmagnetic flow metering system shall include a metering tube, signal cable, andtransmitter. The metering tube shall be constructed of 304 stainless steel with flangedconnections, have at least 2 diametrically opposed, bullet-nosed, self cleaning electrodes,a liner material recommended by the manufacturer for the meters intended service asdescribed in these documents, a meter housing rated for NEMA 6 submergenceconditions, and a meter coating consisting of epoxy painted finish.

2. The signal converter/transmitter shall use a DC pulse technique to drive flux-producingcoils and convert the DC pulse signal from the tube to a 4-20 mA signal. The signalconverter/transmitter shall have a backlit alphanumeric display housed in a NEMA 4Xenclosure. It shall have integral zero return to provide a constant zero output signal inresponse to an external dry contact closure, an integral calibration self-test feature toverify proper operation of the electronics, high and low alarms and an automatic zeroadjustment. The transmitter installation shall support integral or remote mounting (up to300ft).

3. Meter package shall include (2) corrosion resistant grounding rings constructed of thesame material as the electrodes.

4. The meter shall be equipped with non-removable electrodes constructed of 316 SS. Themeter shall support measurement and totalization of bi-directional flow. Installationparameters shall be as follows:

a. Minimum 5 pipe diameters of straight pipe upstream

b. Minimum 3 pipe diameters of straight pipe downstream

5. Each flow metering system shall be hydraulically calibrated at a facility which is traceableto the US National Bureau of Standards. The calibration procedure shall conform to therequirements of MIL-STD-45662A. A real-time computer generated printout of the actualcalibration data indicating apparent and actual flows at 20, 40, 60, 80, and 100 percent of

IN-LINE FLOW MEASURING SYSTEMS 409134-2 TOWN BRANCH WWTP THICKENING

the calibrated range shall be submitted to the Engineer at least 30 days prior to shipmentof the meters to the project site.

6. If noted, the Contractor shall provide I/O to monitor both forward and reverse 4-20mA flowsignals.

7. The flow metering system shall conform to the following technical specifications:

a. Output: 4-20 mA forward flow (and reverse flow if required) into 600 ohms minimum;Time Constant = 0.5 to 100 seconds; galvanic or optic isolation

b. Scaled pulsed output for totalization

c. Accuracy: ± 0.25% of flow rate from 10 to 100% full scale

d. Repeatability: ± 0.05% or ± 0.0008 ft/s

e. Environmental Limits: - 10 to + 60º C

f. Power Consumption: 20VA or less

g. Power Requirements: 115 VAC, +/- 10%

h. Accessories: Provide sunshield for transmitter if exposed to direct sunlight. Provideremote mount flow transmitter option where indicated on Contract Drawings.

i. Approved Manufacturers:

1) Foxboro 9500A with IMT25 Transmitter, or equal.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 GENERAL

A. In-Line Flow Measuring Systems shall be handled, installed, calibrated, loop-tested, pre-commissioned, and performance tested according to Manufacturer’s instructions and Section409030. The manufacturer shall furnish the manufacturer’s service, supervision, and trainingto calibrate and commission these flowmeters.


LEVEL MEASURING SYSTEMS 409136-1 TOWN BRANCH WWTP THICKENING

SECTION 409136 - LEVEL MEASURING SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 WORK INCLUDED

A. General: The Contractor shall provide level measuring systems, complete and operable, inaccordance with the Contract Documents.

B. The requirements of Section 409000 Instrumentation and Control for Process Systems applyto this Section.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 NON-CONTACT RADAR TYPE

A. Where non-contact level measurement is indicated, the system shall consist of an integralsensor/transmitter assembly complete with housing, transmitter, microwave module andWave-Guide (antenna). The radar assembly will transmit energy in the form of microwavepulses, target the microwave pulses returning to the antenna, measure the transit time of themicrowave pulses and calculate the distance to the target. The radar assembly shall have thefollowing features: integral level indicator and adjustment module for field calibration anddisplay of process variable, DN80 3” compression flange process connection, 2-Wire Loop-Power (24 VDC) or 4-Wire Universal power supply (as shown on the P & ID) 24VDC or120VAC, with 4-20 mA HART output; programmable electronics shall provide linear 4-20mAoutput signal proportional to level or flow. The housing shall be a dual chamber aluminumstyle rated Class I, Division I Explosion Proof.

B. Radar assemblies shall be 2-wire or 4-Wire (as shown on P&ID) with Explosion ProofHousing for level and open channel flow measurement; PLICSCOM adjustment module forintegral display and field calibration; use optional Waveguide Extension for applications thatrequire a longer antenna length to protrude into the tank/channel (mounting through concreteslabs, etc.). Sun Shield shall be provided for all transmitters and remote indicators mountedoutside.

C. Non-contact radar level measuring systems shall be Vega VEGAPULS 67 series, or equal.

D. Where local field indicators are called out in the P&ID, they shall be the integral mount“Plicscom” module or the remote VEGADIS 61 with “Plicscom” module, which are bothpowered by the radar level transmitter electronics.

2.02 AUTOMATIC SLUDGE BLANKET METER

A. The Sludge Blanket Meter shall be housed in a stainless steel enclosure with built in fan andheater suitable for outdoor mounting even in cold climates down to -4°F. The suspendedsolids sensor shall be stainless steel with 11 meter cable. The system shall be complete withall required mounting plates and brackets, sensor flushing system requiring 60 psig reusewater, NEMA 4X control box, potted limit switch and stainless steel 3/8” trip arm.

B. The system shall provide 4-20 mA outputs for blanket and fluff depths.

C. Sludge blanket level measuring systems shall be Cerlic Model CBX/BB1, or equal.

LEVEL MEASURING SYSTEMS 409136-2 TOWN BRANCH WWTP THICKENING

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 GENERAL

A. Level-measuring systems shall be handled, installed, calibrated, loop-tested, pre-commissioned, and performance tested according to Section 409030. The manufacturer shallfurnish the manufacturer’s service, supervision, and training indicated by Section 409000.


PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC PROCESS CONTROLLERS 409443-1 TOWN BRANCH WWTP THICKENING

SECTION 409443 – PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC PROCESS CONTROLLERS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE OF WORK

A. This Section includes Programmable logic controllers for control of process equipment, processoriented machinery, and process systems.

1.02 RELATED WORK

A. Refer to Section 409000.

B. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and SupplementaryConditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Refer to Sections 013323 and 409000.

B. Product Data: For each type of PLC include dimensions, mounting arrangements, and weights.Also, include manufacturer's technical data on features, performance, electrical ratings,characteristics, and terminal connections.

C. Operation and Maintenance Data: Provide literature detailing routine maintenancerequirements (if any) for each PLC component including:

1. System specifications

2. Electrical power requirements

3. Application considerations

4. Assembly and installation procedures

5. Power-up procedures

6. Programming procedures

7. Explanation of internal fault diagnostics

8. Shut down procedures

9. Recommended spare parts list

1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. ASTM D999-91: Vibration

B. (CFR) Title 47, Part 18 (European EN 55011 (formerly C1SPR 11))

C. CSA Certification Class I, Division 2, Group A, B, C, D Hazardous or non-hazardous locations

D. IEC 60068-2.1 Environmental testing — Part 2-1: Tests - Test A: Cold, 2.2 Environmentaltesting - Part 2: Tests. Tests B: Dry heat, 2.3, 2.6 Environmental testing - Part 2: Tests - TestFe: Vibration (sinusoidal) and 2.27 Environmental testing. Part 2: Tests. Test Ea and guidance:Shock


E. IEC 61000 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) - Testing and measurement techniques

1. Part 4-2: Electrostatic discharge immunity test

2. Part 4-3: Radiated, radio-frequency, electromagnetic field immunity test

3. Part 4-4: Electrical fast transient/burst immunity test

4. Part 4-5: Surge immunity test

5. Part 4-6: Immunity to conducted disturbances, induced by radio-frequency fields

F. IEC 61131-3: Programmable controllers - Part 3: Programming languages

G. IEC 801-3: RFI Immunity

H. IEC 801-5: Ground Continuity

I. IEC 801-2: Electrostatic Discharge

J. IEEE 472-1974/ANSI C37.90/90A-1974 (Surge Withstand) IEEE Standard for Relays andRelay Systems Associated with Electric Power Apparatus

K. MIL STD 461B CS02: RFI/EMI Susceptibility

L. NEMA Pub No ICS2-230.42: Showering Arc Test

M. NSTA Project 1 A

N. UL 508 and CSA Standard C22.2 No. 142 (Isolation Voltages)


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer shall be capable of providing training,parts, and coordination of emergency maintenance and repairs.

B. The programmable controller and all of the corresponding components within the family ofcontroller products shall be manufactured by a company that regularly manufactures andservices this type of equipment.

C. The manufacturer shall comply with IS09001 standards for "Quality Systems- Model for QualityAssurance in Design/Development, Production, Installation, and Servicing".

D. The manufacturer shall provide complete technical support for all of the products. This shallinclude factory or on-site training, regional application centers, local or factory technicalassistance, and a 24/7/365 technical support phone service.


A. Deliver PLC components in packaging designed to prevent damage from static electricity andphysical damage.

B. Store PLC equipment according to manufacturer requirements. At a minimum, store indoors inclean, dry space with uniform temperature to prevent condensation. Protect PLCs fromexposure to dirt, fumes, water, corrosive substances, and physical damage. Also, protect thePLC from all forms of electrical and magnetic energy that could reasonably cause damage.


1.07 NOMENCLATURE AND IDENTIFICATION DEFINITIONS

A. AI: Analog Input

B. AO: Analog Output

C. Fixed I/O: A PLC style consisting of a fixed number of I/0, a processor, and a power supply allin one enclosure. Some fixed PLCs have limited expansion ability.

D. CPU: Central Processing Unit

E. DI: Discrete Input

F. Distributed I/O: Hardware specially designed to function as Remote I/O.

G. DO: Discrete Output

H. HMI: Human-Machine Interface

I. I/O Input and/or Output

J. Modular: A PLC style consisting of cards that are assembled to comprise a complete unit. AllI/O, CPU, and Power Supply are dedicated cards. Typically, these cards are inserted into achassis.

K. Master/Slave: Communication between devices in which one device, the master, controls allcommunications. The other devices, the slaves, respond only when queried by the master.Typically used in a Remote I/O application.

L. Peer to Peer: Communication between two or more devices, typically PLC's, in which eachdevice can control the communication exchange.

M. PID: Control action, proportional plus integral plus derivative.

N. PLC: Programmable Logic Controller

O. Remote I/O: I/O that is located remotely from the processor. Remote I/O can communicateover a variety of communication protocols and can use standard rack based I/O, or specialRemote I/O hardware referred to as Distributed I/O.

P. SCADA: Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition

1.08 SPARE I/O

A. Each I/O drop and I/O location shall include at least 20 percent (minimum of four) points ofeach type (AI, AO, DI, and DO) for future use, regardless of whether any of those point typesare used in that drop or location or not. The spares shall be the same type of I/O modulessupplied.

B. Spare output points that require the use of an external relay shall be supplied with the externalrelay.

C. Regardless of the spare requirement, all installed unused points on all I/O modules shall bewired to terminal blocks in the order that they occur on the I/O modules. Unwired spares shallnot be acceptable.


1.09 SPARE PARTS

A. General requirements for spare parts are specified in section 17490.

B. The following PLC spare parts shall be furnished:

1. Processors: Provide spare processor unit(s) for each unique processor installed.

2. Memory Cards: Provide spares for each type of card installed.

3. I/O Cards: Provide spares for each unique I/O module type installed. Provide two or 10percent of installed quantity, whichever is greater.

4. Network interface, remote I/O, and communication modules: Provide one sparecommunication module for each unique communication module installed.

5. Specialty Modules: Provide as a minimum a spare of each type of module identified.Provide an additional spare for every ten modules of a specific type installed.

6. PLC Power supplies: Provide spare power supplies for each unique power supply installed.

7. Chassis: Provide spare chassis for each unique chassis installed.

8. Fixed PLCs: Provide spares for each unique type of PLC installed.

9. Miscellaneous components (including cables): Provide spares for each unique componentinstalled.

1.10 MANUFACTURER SUPPORT

A. Provide a written proposal for a manufacturer support agreement for PLC hardware andsoftware for a minimum of 12 months starting at final completion of the project. The cost of thismanufacturer support agreement shall not be included in the Contract Price. The supportagreement shall be executed in the name of, and for the benefit of, the OWNER. At a minimum,this agreement shall provide the OWNER with:

1. Twenty-four hour, 7 day per week manufacturer telephone support

2. Access to the manufacturer's technical support web site

3. Software and firmware updates.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL

A. Provide Programmable Logic Controller equipment with the required memory and functionalcapacity to perform the specified sequence of operation with the scheduled input and outputpoints.

B. Processor Systems shall include processor, power supply, input/output modules,communication modules, redundancy modules, and remote interface modules as required tomeet system requirements.

C. Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories (UL), CSA, or FM approvalas suitable for purpose specified and indicated.


D. All equipment and devices furnished hereunder shall be designed for continuous industrialservice. The system shall contain products of a single manufacturer, insofar as possible, andshall consist of equipment models that are currently in production.

E. All equipment furnished shall be designed and constructed so that in the event of powerinterruption the systems shall go through an orderly shutdown with no loss of memory, andresume normal operation without manually resetting when power is restored.

F. The PLCs shall communicate between the operator workstation and field-mountedtransducers, switches, controllers, and process actuators. Communications protocol shall becompletely transparent to process operators at the Human Machine Interface (HMI).

G. The PLC shall be capable of stand-alone operation in the event of failure of the communicationlink to the HMI subsystem.

H. Backup Processor Systems, if indicated on the drawings, shall consist of two chassis withpower supplies, each containing a processor, redundancy module and communicationsmodule(s). Remote chassis shall be provided with communication modules to meet I/O andcommunication requirements.

I. Remote Input/Output Units shall include input/output modules, interface modules,communication modules, and power supply to meet system input and output requirements.

J. Agency and environmental specifications:

1. Electrical supply voltage to the PLC shall be 120 Vac, plus or minus 15 percent, 48-63Hz.PLC system power supplies shall be fused for overload protection.

2. Vibration: 3.5 mm Peak-to-Peak, 5-9 Hz: 1.0G, 9-1501Hz. The method of testing is to bebased upon IEC 68-2-6 and JIS C 0911 standards for vibration. The system is to beoperational during and after testing. Vibration Rating of 2.0G maximum peak accelerationfor 10 to 500Hz. in accordance with at least one of the following:

a. Installed rating: DIN rail mounted PLC: 10-57 Hz, amplitude 0.075 mm, acceleration25-100 Hz, and

b. Panel or plate mounted PLC: 2-25 Hz, amplitude 1.6mm, acceleration 25-200 Hz.

c. In compliance with IEC 60068 and IEC 61131.

3. Shock: 15G, 11 msec. The method of testing is to be based upon IEC 68-2-27 and JIS C0912 standards for shock. The system is to be operational during and after testing.

4. Temperature: All PLC hardware shall operate at an ambient temperature of 0 to +55degrees C (+32 to +140 degrees F), with an storage ambient temperature rating of -25 to+70 degrees C (-40 to +185 degrees F).

5. Relative Humidity: The Programmable Controller hardware shall function continuously inthe relative humidity range of 30 percent to 95 percent non-condensing.

6. Noise Immunity: The Programmable Controller system shall be designed and tested tooperate in the high electrical noise environment of an industrial plant as governed by thefollowing regulations: IEEE 472, IEC 801, MILSTD 461B, IEC 255-4, NEMA ICS 2-230.40,and ANSI/IEEE C-37.90A-1978.

7. Altitude:

a. Operation: 0-6,500 feet


b. Storage: 0-9,800 feet

8. Degree of protection: NEMA 1 (IP20)

9. All products shall have corrosion protection.

K. All major assemblies and sub-assemblies, circuit boards, and devices shall be identified usingpermanent labels or markings indicating:

1. Modules product type such as analog or digital

2. Modules catalog number

3. Modules major revision number

4. Modules minor revision number

5. Module manufacturer vendor

6. Module serial number

L. All necessary cables shall be included. All cables and connectors shall be as specified by themanufacturer. Cables shall be assembled and installed per the manufacturerrecommendations.

M. Manufacturers

1. Provide all PLCs from a single manufacturer. If the PLC manufacturer has authorized thirdparty vendors to provide modules that are compatible with their platforms, then productsmanufactured by these authorized third party vendors will be acceptable.

2. Provide the PLC system by one of the following:

a. Rockwell Automation Allen-Bradley

1) 1756-L71 ControlLogix

b. Or Engineer approved equal

N. Central Processing Unit (CPU)

1. The CPU shall be, at a minimum, a 16-bit microprocessor that provides system timing andis responsible for scheduling I/O updates, with no user programming required to ensurediscrete or analog update. It shall execute user relay ladder logic programs, communicatewith intelligent I/O modules, and perform on-line diagnostics. The CPU shall consist of asingle module which solves application logic, stores the application program, storesnumerical values related to the application processes and logic, and interfaces to the I/O.

2. The CPU shall sample all the discrete and analog inputs and outputs including internalcoils and registers, and service special function modules every scan. The CPU shallprocess the I/O with user program(s) stored in memory, then control the outputs based onthe results of the logic operation.

3. Supply the CPU with a battery-backed time of day clock and calendar.

4. The CPU family shall allow for user program transportability from one CPU model toanother.


O. Diagnostics

1. The CPU shall perform on-line diagnostics that monitor the internal operation of the PLC.If a failure is detected, the CPU shall initiate system shutdown and fail-over. The following,at a minimum, shall be monitored: Memory failure, memory battery low, and general fault,communications port failure, scan time over run, I/0 failure, and analog or special functionI/O module failure.

2. All diagnostic information shall be accessible to the host communications interfaces and tothe PLC program.

3. The PLC shall have indicators and on board status area to indicate the following conditions:

a. CPU run

b. CPU error or fault

c. I/O failure or configuration fault.

d. Battery good

e. Communications indicator

P. Memory

1. The user program and data shall be contained in non-volatile battery backed memory, oftype CMOS RAM program memory.

2. Memory Backup System: provide lithium battery backup capable of retaining all memoryfor a minimum of three months and a Flash memory system capable of reloading programin the event of memory loss.

a. Backup Battery: The backup battery shall be capable of being replaced withoutdisrupting memory integrity. Provide a visual indication of low battery voltage and a lowbattery alarm contact.

b. Flash Memory Card: Memory card storage capacity shall be a minimum of processormemory capacity. Memory cards shall be installed in processors for factory testing.

3. The operating system shall be contained in non-volatile firmware. The memory containingthe operating system shall be field updateable via a separate update tool.

Q. Programming Environment

1. Programming port: The PLC shall utilize a serial USB or Ethernet port for programming.

2. On-Line programming: Application programs may be modified or stored while the CPU isrunning, with minimal impact on the scan time.

3. Online programming including runtime editing

4. IEC 61131-3 programming languages supported: Ladder logic, function block, sequentialfunction chart, and structure text.

5. Supply all hardware and software necessary to program the CPU in these languages.

R. Communication Ports


1. The CPU shall be expandable and supplied with additional modules to support the requiredcommunication interfaces.

S. Remote I/O Communications

1. The CPU shall be capable of communicating with up to 12 remote base locations at acombined distance of 2500 feet. The CPU shall automatically sample and update all localand remote I/O modules each scan cycle of the CPU.

2. The communication link between the CPU and any RIO chassis shall be as recommendedby the PLC manufacturer. For racks located on a link of less than 2500 cable feet, thespeed of the communications link shall be greater than 230K baud with RIO scan rate ofless than 5 millisecond per RIO.

3. Diagnostic and equipment status information shall be available from each RIO.

4. It shall be possible to communicate with remote I/O racks or other PLCs via fiber opticcable.

5. The remote I/O system shall have available a remote input/output arrangement capable ofoperation at locations physically separated from the PLC CPU by up to 5,000 feet asdetailed on the drawings.

6. Communication with the remote I/O arrangement shall be through cable as recommendedby the PLC manufacturer and provided by the PLC system supplier under this specificationsection.

2.02 REDUNDANCY

A. The PLC shall be supplied with all hardware and software required to produce a completelyoperational redundant system if shown in the Drawings. Redundancy shall be implementedusing a minimum amount of user programming. Warm backup, which is not a standard offeringfrom the PLC manufacturer, is not acceptable.

B. The backup system shall consist of redundant controllers located in separate chassis.

C. The back-up system shall provide bumpless switchover for system outputs. All remote I/O shallmaintain their last position until either communications is re-established or the remote I/Owatchdog timer expires.

D. Switch-over between the on-line PLC and the back-up PLC shall occur within 100 millisecondsif any of the following conditions occurs in the on-line unit: Power failure, CPU fault,communications module fault, or change in the on-line unit's mode from RUN to PROGRAM.

E. The switchover shall be transparent to any devices networked to the redundant controllerchassis.

F. The system shall automatically cross-load the primary controller's program to the secondarycontroller.

G. System diagnostics and debugging tools shall be provided to assist in troubleshooting allredundancy equipment.

2.03 POWER SUPPLIES

A. The PLC shall have chassis mounted power supplies to power the chassis backplane, andprovide power for the processor and applicable modules.


B. Power supplies shall have a clearly visible LED to indicate that the incoming power isacceptable and the output voltage is present.

C. Power supplies shall feature over-current and over-voltage protection and should be designedto operate in most industrial environments without the need for isolation transformers.

D. Power supplies shall be sized to accommodate the anticipated load plus 30%.

E. DC power supplies shall be capable of handling ripple up to 2.4V peak to peak.

F. AC Line Voltage rating of 85 to 265Vac, 47-63Hz

G. The power supplies shall allow for brown outs of at least 1/2 of a cycle, a harmonic rate of 10%,and will sustain continuous operation through momentary interruptions of AC line voltage of10ms or less.

H. Automatically shut down the Programmable Controller system whenever its output power isdetected as exceeding 125% of its rated power

I. Provide surge protection, isolation, and outage carry-over up to 2 cycles of the AC line.

J. Redundant power supplies will comply with all the requirements of non-redundant powersupplies in addition to the features stated below.

1. The redundant power supplies shall be designed to share the current required by thechassis. In the event of a failure of one redundant power supply, the remaining supply willaccommodate the entire load of the chassis without disruption to the chassis activity.

2. Provide a failsafe fuse that is not accessible by the customer.

3. Provide a solid state relay connection to allow for failure annunciation when wired to aninput module.

4. Diagnostic LED status indicators for Power and redundancy.

2.04 CHASSIS

A. Medium and large PLC models shall be chassis based.

B. All system and signal power to the CPU and support modules shall be distributed on thebackplane. No interconnecting wiring between these modules via plug-terminated jumpersshall be acceptable.

C. All system modules, main and expansion chassis shall be designed to provide for free air flowconvection cooling. No internal fans or other means of cooling, except heat sinks, shall bepermitted.

D. All system modules including the processor shall be removable from the chassis or inserted into the chassis while power is being supplied to the chassis without faulting the processor ordamaging the modules.

E. Modules shall be designed to plug into a chassis and to be keyed to allow installation in onlyone direction. The design must prohibit upside down insertion of the modules as well assafeguard against the insertion of a module into the wrong slot or chassis via an electronicmethod for identifying a module. Electronic keying shall perform an electronic check to insurethat the physical module is consistent with what was configured.


2.05 DISCRETE INPUT AND OUTPUT MODULES

A. General

1. Digital input and output modules shall provide ON/OFF detection and actuation.

2. The I/O count and type shall be as required to implement the functions specified plus anallowance for active spares, as noted below.

3. Modules shall be designed to be installed or removed while chassis power is applied.

4. Modules shall have indicators to display the status of communication, module health andinput / output devices.

5. Each module shall have the following status indicators.

a. The On/Off state of the field device.

b. The module's communication status.

6. I/O modules shall contain a maximum of 16 points per module.

B. Module Specifications (120Vac Isolated Input Module)

1. Nominal Input Voltage of 120V ac

2. On-State Current of 15inA @132V ac, 47-63Hz maximum

3. Maximum Off-State Voltage of 20V

4. Maximum Off-State Current of 2.5mA

C. Module Specification (120Vac Isolated Output Module)

1. Each triac type discrete output shall have an associated interposing relay locatedin the same control panel. 120 VAC power for relay outputs shall be provided from theassociated motor starter control circuit (when used with motor starters) or other 120 VACsource (when I/O is not associated with a particular motor starter).

2. Output Voltage Range of 74-265V ac, 47-63Hz.

3. Output Current Rating:

a. Per Point - 2A maximum @ 30 degrees C; 1.0A maximum @ 60 degrees C; LinearDerating

b. Per Module - 5A maximum @ 30 degrees C; 4A maximum @ 60 degrees C; LinearDerating

4. Surge Current Per Point of 20A for 43ms each, repeatable every 2s @ 60 degrees C

5. Minimum Load Current of 10mA per point

6. Maximum On-State Voltage Drop of 1.5V peak @2.0A and 6V peak @load less than 50mA

7. Maximum Off-State Leakage of 3mA per point

D. Module Specifications (Contact Output Module)


1. Output Voltage Range of 10-265V ac, 47-63Hz

2. Output Current Rating:

a. Resistive - 2A @ 125V ac

b. Inductive - 2A Steady State, 15A make @125V ac

3. Power Rating (Steady State) of 250VA maximum for 125V ac inductive output

4. Maximum Off-State Leakage of 0 mA per point

5. Configurable States

a. Fault Per Point - Hold Last State, ON or OFF

b. Program Mode Per Point - Hold Last State, ON or OFF

2.06 ANALOG INPUT AND OUTPUT MODULES

A. General

1. Analog input modules shall convert an analog signal that is connected to the module'sscrew terminals into a digital value. The digital value representing the magnitude of theanalog signal shall be transmitted on the backplane. Analog output modules shall converta digital value that is delivered to the module via the backplane into an analog signal onthe module's screw terminals.

2. Modules shall be designed to be installed or removed while chassis power is applied.

3. Modules shall have indicators to display the status of communication, module health andinput / output devices.

4. Each analog module shall provide both hardware and software indication when a modulefault has occurred. Each module shall have an LED fault indicator and the programmingsoftware shall display the fault information.

5. Analog modules shall be software configurable through the I/O configuration portion of theprogramming software.

6. The following status shall be capable of being examined in ladder logic

a. Module Fault Word — Provides fault summary reporting.

b. Channel Fault Word — Provides under-range, over-range and communications faultreporting.

c. Channel Status Words — Provides individual channel under-range and over-rangefault reporting for process alarm, rate alarms and calibration faults.

7. The 24 VDC power for analog instrument loops shall be provided as a part of the system.The 24 VDC power supply shall be derived from the 120 VAC input power circuit to thePLC. The field side of the 24 VDC power sources(s) shall have individual or grouped (oflogically associated circuits) fusing and be provided with a readily visible, labeled blownfuse indicator.

B. Isolated Analog Input Module


1. Input Range of 4-20 mA

2. Resolution of approximately 16 bits across range

3. Input Impedance of Greater than 249 Ohms

4. Overvoltage Protection: 8V ac/dc with on-board current resistor

5. Normal Mode Rejection of 60dB at 60Hz

6. Common Mode Noise Rejection of 120dB at 60Hz, 100dB at 50Hz

7. Isolation Voltage

a. Channel to Channel - 100% tested at 1700V dc for ls based on 250V ac

b. User to System - 100% tested at 1700V de for is based on 250V ac

C. Isolated Analog Output Current Module

1. Output Current Range of 4 to 20 mA

2. Current Resolution of 12 bits across 20 mA

3. Open Circuit Detection — None

4. Output Overvoltage Protection - 24V ac/dc maximum

5. Output Short Circuit Protection — 20 mA or less (electronically limited)

6. Calibration Accuracy - Better than 0.1% of range from 4mA to 20 mA

7. Calibration Interval - 12 months typical

2.07 COMMUNICATION INTERFACES

A. The PLC will be capable of the following communication protocols as shown on the drawings:

1. 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX Ethernet communication.

2. Modbus (RTU and ASCII) for up to 247 slaves

3. Rockwell Automation's RIO Protocol

4. DeviceNet

5. Asynchronous serial link capable of communicating up to 19.2Kbps

B. When required provide a Communications Interface Module mounted in the chassis or theequivalent port directly on the CPU.

2.08 PLC SOFTWARE

A. Provide a PLC configuration and application development software package complete withdocumentation and disks. The PLC software package and associated licensing and/oractivation shall be installed on the computers shown on the drawings.


B. The software package shall allow on-line/off-line program development, annotation, monitoring,debugging, uploading, and downloading of programs to the PLCs.

C. All required hardware (including cables, cable adapters, etc.) for connection to PLCs shall befurnished.

D. All software licenses required to achieve the functionality described in the Specifications shallbe provided.

E. The software package shall include a software license agreement allowing the Owner the rightto use the software as required for any current or future modification, documentation, ordevelopment of the PLCs furnished for this project.

F. The software provided shall be capable of the following IEC 61131-3 functions:

1. Ladder logic.

2. Function block.

3. Sequential function chart.

4. Structure text.

G. In addition to the above editors, an add-on instruction editor shall work with any of the above-mentioned editors to create custom reusable function blocks. This software shall allow any ofthe derived function blocks to be modified on-line.

H. The software shall be Microsoft Windows-based and run on the supplied computers.

I. The software shall include a security feature to prevent unauthorized personnel from modifyingand downloading the programs.

J. Provide an I/O simulator which allows the PLC application load program to be tested on a PCwith simulated analog and digital inputs and outputs, allowing I/O testing and debugging to beperformed in a safe, isolated environment without the need for running the PLC CPU andprocess I/O boards.

2.09 OPERATOR INTERFACE TERMINALS (OIT)

A. OITs shall be mounted on control panels and shall run interface software separate from theexisting SCADA HMI software.

B. Manufacturers

1. Provide operator interface terminals (OIT) from one of the following:

a. Allen-Bradley Panel View Plus 7 series

b. Or equal

C. Software

1. The Operator Interface Terminal shall be pre-packaged with all configuration andprogramming software necessary to perform functions as shown on drawings and withinthe specifications.

2. The integrated OIT software shall have the following features


a. Trending

b. Data Logging

c. Alarms

d. Graphic Symbols

e. Animations

D. I/O Ports and Devices

1. The OIT shall have a minimum of one Ethernet 10/100 Mbps for connectivity orprogramming

2. The OIT shall have a minimum of one Serial RS232 port.

3. Include the following communication expansion modules in the selected OIT: a. ControlNet,DeviceNet, RIO, DH+, DH485, Modbus Plus and PROFIBUS

4. Compact flash ports shall be Type 2.

5. The OIT shall have a minimum of one USB port.

E. Display

1. The OIT display size shall be 10.4"

2. The type of display for the OIT shall be Color Active Matrix TFT.

3. The display resolution shall be a minimum of 640 x 480.

4. Display shall support touch screen input.

F. Environmental

1. Rating: OIT shall be rated to maintain the rating of the control panel it will be mounted in.

2. Operating Temperature: 0-50 degrees C.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 GENERAL INSTALLATION

A. Maintain area free of dirt and dust during and after installation of programmable controllerproducts.

B. Anchor PLCs within enclosures as recommended by the PLC manufacturer.

C. Ventilation slots shall not be blocked, or obstructed by any means.

D. Examine areas, surfaces, and substrates to receive PLCs for compliance with requirements,installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting performance. Proceed with installationonly after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

E. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.


F. Unload, unpack and transport equipment to prevent damage or loss.

G. Replace damaged components as directed by Engineer.

3.02 PANEL LAYOUT

A. Coordinate size and configuration of enclosure to meet project requirements. Drawings indicatemaximum dimensions for PLCs, minimum clearances between PLCs, and adjacent surfacesand other items.

B. Comply with indicated maximum dimensions and clearances, or with PLC vendors requireddistances if they are greater than the distances indicated.

1. Provide spacing around PLC as required by the PLC manufacturer to insure adequatecooling. Insure that the air surrounding the PLC has been conditioned to maintain therequired temperature and humidity range.

2. Wires entering and exiting PLC components shall be sized to comply with the PLCmanufacturers requirements. Doors on all components shall be able to be fully closed whenall the wires are installed.

3. For chassis mounted PLCs, no wiring, wire ducts, or other devices shall obstruct theremoval of cards from the rack.

4. PLC lights, keys, communication ports, and memory card slots shall be accessible at alltimes. Lights shall be visible at all times when enclosure door is opened.

C. Control panel designer shall provide independent line fuses or circuit breakers, per the PLCmanufacturer recommendation, for each power supply, input module, output module, and othermodules with separately derived power requirements.

D. Control panel designer shall insure that communication signals, 4-20mA signals (includingthose with embedded HART), are properly conditioned for the PLC and protected from allsources of radiated energy or harmonics.

E. Each PLC (including all I/O) shall be powered from the UPS power conditioning system inSection 17430.

F. Where multiple mechanical components are provided for process redundancy, their fieldconnections to I/O modules shall be arranged such that the failure of a single module will notdisable all mechanical components associated with the process redundancy (e.g., inputs andoutputs for redundancy device 1 shall reside on different modules than the inputs and outputsfor redundancy device 2, etc.), irrespective of the number of used points resulting from thisconfiguration.

G. Provide all required cables, cords, and connective devices for interface with other controlsystem components.

END OF SECTION

CABLED PROCESS CONTROL NETWORKS 409533-1 TOWN BRANCH WWTP THICKENING

SECTION 409533 – CABLED PROCESS CONTROL NETWORKS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 WORK INCLUDED

A. This section covers the furnishing of cables, connectors, equipment and testing for cabledprocess control network systems for the Process Control System (PCS). Cabling of thenetwork systems shall be as indicated on the Drawings and as described below.

B. System Integrator shall furnish all necessary cable equipment, interconnecting cables,accessories, and appurtenances for proper network operation and to meet the functionalrequirements indicated on the Drawings and specified herein.

C. Network Functional Description

1. The cabled process control network system shall provide Ethernet communicationsbetween the all Process Control System components.

1.02 RELATED WORK

A. The following Divisions of these Specifications contain requirements on equipment furnishedby other suppliers that must interface with the instrument system, or on methods andmaterials to be performed/used in the installation and/or wiring of the instrumentation system.


1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Refer to Sections 013323.

B. Product Data: For each type of component include dimensions, mounting arrangements, andweights. Also, include manufacturer's technical data on features, performance, electricalratings, characteristics, and terminal connections.

C. The submittals shall include the following items for the Cabled Network Design submittal:

1. A complete network topology diagram, detailing all hardware, cabling and theinterconnections between all connected equipment, interconnections to existing installedequipment and Owner-furnished equipment shall be included in the diagram.

2. A complete listing of IP addresses to be assigned to all equipment furnished under thiscontract shall be provided. The assignment of IP addresses shall be coordinated with theOwner.

D. All above documentation shall also be provided in the O&M manuals.

E. Operation and Maintenance Data: Provide literature detailing routine maintenancerequirements (if any) for each component.



A. Standards, Codes and Regulations:

1. Construction of panels and the installation and interconnection of all equipment anddevices mounted within shall comply with applicable provisions of the followingstandards, codes, and regulations:

a. National Electrical Code (NEC).

b. National Electrical Manufacturer's Association (NEMA) Standards.

c. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc (IEEE).

d. Local and State Building Code.

e. Operational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) Regulations.

f. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM).

g. Where any conflict arises between codes or standards, the more stringentrequirement shall apply.

2. All electrical materials and equipment shall be new and shall bear the label of theUnderwriters Laboratory (UL), Inc., Factory Mutual (FM) or equivalent where standardshave been established and label service regularly applies.

B. Acceptable Manufacturers:

1. Furnish devices by the named manufacturers or equal equipment by othermanufacturers, if so listed.

2. The named manufacturers have been specified to establish the standard of quality andperformance of the equipment to be supplied.

3. Obtain all devices of a given type from the same manufacturer.

C. Factory Assembly and Testing:

1. Fully assemble the Process Control System including all networking components andcabling at the factory prior to shipment, demonstrating that all specified functions areperformed.

2. Comply with the requirements of Section 409020, Factory Testing.


A. Deliver components in packaging designed to prevent damage from static electricity andphysical damage.

B. Store equipment according to manufacturer requirements. At a minimum, store indoors inclean, dry space with uniform temperature to prevent condensation. Protect components fromexposure to dirt, fumes, water, corrosive substances, and physical damage. Also, protect thecomponents from all forms of electrical and magnetic energy that could reasonably causedamage.


1.06 CONNECTION TO OWNER NETWORKS

A. Network hardware and software provided shall be compatible with the Owner's existingnetwork systems wherever a system interconnection is provided. System Integrator shallverify existing systems to ensure compatibility.

B. All connections to the Owner's existing network shall be fully coordinated between the Ownerand the System Integrator. Prior to connecting to the existing network, the System Integratorshall provide a written request to the Owner for an Owner's representative to be availablewhen existing systems are disconnected and at the time of any new connections.

C. The System Integrator shall coordinate all demolition, installation, and rework on the existingnetworks with the Owner and the Engineer. No work shall be performed without the writtenconsent of the Owner. The System Integrator shall submit a written request to perform workon the existing network, including date, time, scope of work, length of time, and any Owner'ssupport that may be required.

1.07 SPARE PARTS

A. The following spare parts shall be furnished:

1. 20 percent Ethernet patch cables used in the system.

2. One spare Ethernet switch used in the system.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 ETHERNET HARDWARE

A. Ethernet Switches

1. The Contractor shall provide new Ethernet switches and/or expansion modules forexisting switches as shown on Network Architecture Diagrams. All Ethernet switchhardware shall be Allen Bradley Stratix series.

B. Ethernet Connectors

1. Ethernet wiring connectors shall be RJ-45 male modular plug connectors.

2.02 ETHERNET UNSHIELDED TWISTED PAIR (UTP) CABLE

A. Ethernet cables and connectors shall be provided for a complete and working system, and/oras shown on the Drawings. Cable for Ethernet wiring shall be UTP Cat-6 cable with bluejacket.

B. Cable shall meet the following characteristics:

1. Category 6 UTP Cable.

a. Cat-6 cable shall meet the following requirements:

1) 23AWG

2) 4 pair solid strand FEP Teflon insulation


3) 100 Ohm impedance

4) 1250 MHz frequency range

5) Min attenuation 19.9 Db

6) 100 Ohm impedance

7) Min NEXT 44 3 dB/100MHz

8) Min PS-NEXT 42 3dB.100MHz

9) Min ELFEXT 27 8dB.100MHz

10) Min PS-ELFEXT 24.8dB/100MHZ

11) Min return loss 20.1 dB/100 MHz

12) Max delay skew 45 ns

13) Max propagation delay 540 ns

14) UL listed

15) EIA/TIA compliant

2. Plenum rated cable shall have FEP insulation jacketing and FEP insulation forconductors. Non plenum rated cable shall have PVC insulation jacketing andpolyethylene insulation for conductors. Cat-6 cable shall be Belden 1872 or equal.

C. Ethernet Patch Cables

1. Pre-wired and terminated patch cables with RJ-45 connectors and lever protecting bootshall be furnished for all connections to computers, network equipment, and controllerequipment except where physical conditions (i.e. length over 12 ft. or conduit size)require unterminated wire to be installed. Patch cables shall be Cat-6 and shall meet therequirements of Cat-6 cable specified in this section. Straight through cables shall bewired using the T568-B standard for both connectors. Crossover cables shall be wiredusing the T568-A standard for one connector and the T568-B standard for the oppositeend.

2.03 FIBER OPTIC CABLE

A. The fiber optic cable shall be a round, water-resistant, loose tube gel-filled cable suitable forboth indoor and outdoor installation. The fiber optic cable shall consist of, but not be limitedto the following components:

1. Singlemode optical fiber shall be all glass, graded index, with a core diameter of 9microns and cladding diameter of 125 microns. The optical fiber shall have anattenuation no greater than 0.5dB/km at a wavelength of 1550 nm supporting abandwidth of no less than 220MHz-km.

2. UV and moisture resistant black polyethylene (PE) jacket.

B. Fiber optic terminations shall be LC type.


2.04 FIBER MANAGEMENT

A. The Contractor shall provide fiber management panels to be bracket-mounted in PLCenclosures or cabinet-mounted as shown on Network Architecture Diagrams. The Contractorshall provide fiber optic patch cables which meet the performance characteristics of theprimary plant network fiber optic cabling. Fiber patch cables shall be obtained from theprimary fiber optic cable manufacturer. The Contractor shall provide all appurtenancesnecessary to complete a functional fiber run to Ethernet devices via the fiber managementpanel. The fiber management panels shall be as manufactured by Corning.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 GENERAL INSTALLATION

A. Install cabling in manufactured conduit sweeps and long-radius elbows whenever possible.Fiber optic cable shall be installed in innerduct tubing.

B. Install metal conduits with grounding bushings and connect with grounding conductor togrounding system.

C. Terminate all conductors; no cable shall contain unterminated elements. Make terminationsonly at indicated equipment, outlet, etc.

D. Cables may not be spliced. Secure and support cables at intervals not exceeding 30 inchesand not more than 6 inches from cabinets, boxes, fittings, outlets, racks, frames, andterminals.

E. Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points without exceeding manufacturer'slimitations on bending radii

F. Install cabling with horizontal and vertical cable guides in in network equipment racks orcabinets with terminating hardware and interconnection equipment.

G. Identify all system components, wiring, and cabling. All labels must be easily viewable. Allcables, components and device identities must be unique.

H. Visually inspect cable placement, cable termination, grounding and bonding, equipment andpatch cords, and labeling of all components.

I. Test UTP copper cabling for DC loop resistance, shorts, opens, intermittent faults, andpolarity between conductors. Test operation of shorting bars in connection blocks. Testcables after termination but not cross-connection.

J. Test instruments shall meet or exceed applicable requirements in TIA/EIA-568-B.2. Performtests with a tester that complies with performance requirements in "Test Instruments(Normative)" Annex, complying with measurement accuracy specified in "MeasurementAccuracy (Informative)" Annex. Use only test cords and adapters that are qualified by testequipment manufacturer for channel or link test configuration.

K. Test fiber optic cable for End-to-End Attenuation. Attenuation shall not exceed 7.5 dB.

L. Test UTP cable, fiber optic cable, passive network components, and miscellaneoussupporting equipment for operational performance. End-to-end continuity, performance, anddiagnostic tests should be final tests performed in all cases.


M. Data for each measurement shall be documented and supplied to the Owner and engineerfor review.

N. Remove and replace cabling where test results indicate that they do not comply withspecified requirements.

O. End-to-end cabling will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.


PROCESS CONTROL SOFTWARE 409610-1 TOWN BRANCH WWTP THICKENING

SECTION 409610 – PROCESS CONTROL SOFTWARE

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 WORK INCLUDED

A. General

1. The existing SCADA system shall be modified and expanded as part of this Contract.Work shall include programming and graphic modifications to the existing SCADA systemPLCs and workstations as well as programming new SCADA terminal unit DCU-H PLCand graphic terminal. The existing SCADA system utilizes Citect HMI software. Fieldverify software version and update to latest release.

2. The existing Plant Ethernet network shall be modified as part of this Contract. Refer tonetwork architecture diagram in the Drawings.

3. The Contractor is also responsible for implementing copper-side Ethernet switchconnections as well as all other configurations.

4. The SCADA system software shall be modified and all the database points, alarms,reports and graphics shall be created, as called out in these Drawings and Specifications.The System Integrator shall set up and configure all displays, reports, control sequences,trends, alarms, etc., with the Owner’s actual data base points at the plant after successfulequipment startup. Details of that implementation not included herein shall be asdetermined during the project meetings, throughout shop drawing review, and duringconstruction/startup. This implementation shall be done with OWNER personnel presentto expedite their understanding of commands, etc.

B. Systems I/O and Special Requirements

1. New SCADA system inputs and outputs (I/O) are defined in the Drawings and more fullyin Specification Section 409620.

C. Graphics and Reports

1. There shall be a maximum of 6 new customized graphic screens. There shall also be amaximum of 20 existing graphic screens which will require some level of modification.The System Integrator shall be responsible for creating these graphic screens. Thegraphics screens shall be as determined in project meetings as described in Part 3 ofthese Specifications.

2. There shall be a maximum of 4 customized reports (in addition to SCADA SystemStandard Reports). The System Integrator shall be responsible for creating these reports.

3. The system shall be set up by the System Integrator to automatically print reports for allflows, levels, outputs, inputs, and related data base points.

4. The System Integrator shall create custom reports and maintenance charts using thesoftware specified herein. Report format, arrangement, content, etc. shall be asdiscussed in the project meetings specified herein. The System Integrator shall beresponsible for programming the reporting and maintenance software to extract data fromthe HMI software as necessary.

5. Additional “pop-up” screens shall be available as a link to each, for alarms, operatorsetpoint adjustments, and trends.


6. The arrangement of the graphics screens shall include an alarm “banner” which providesa visual display of all alarms which are visible at any graphics screen, to alert operatorsof any alarm condition despite their location in the program. During an alarm condition,the event shall also be sent to the alarm/event printer.

1.02 RELATED WORK


DIVISION 01 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTSDIVISION 11 – EQUIPMENTDIVISION 26 – ELECTRICALDIVISION 46 – WATER AND WASTEWATER EQUIPMENT

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 SYSTEM HMI SOFTWARE - EXISTING

A. The existing HMI software package is Rockwell Factory Talk.

2.02 SOFTWARE LICENSES AND REGISTRATION

A. All software shall be modified within the terms of the software manufacturer’s licenseagreement.

B. All software and firmware shall be upgraded to the latest revision at the time of Projectacceptance.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 PROJECT MEETINGS

A. The System Integrator shall chair and develop an agenda for a meeting which shall addressthe basic criteria to be adhered to in the configuration and development of HMI graphicdisplays. At this meeting, which shall be attended by plant managerial personnel, the SystemIntegrator shall distribute sample display formats for illustration purposes. As a minimum, thismeeting shall address the following issues:

1. All in-plant and remote site areas and conventions for identifying tag names anddescriptors.

2. Designation of groups within each plant area along with tag names and descriptors.

3. The assignment of individual control loops and inputs to specific groups.

4. Organization of the systems universal display hierarchy.

5. Paging schemes to be used to enable the movement from one display to another.

6. An itemization of the type of display to be used at each level in the graphic hierarchy (i.e.pre-formatted displays, templates, custom graphics, etc.)


7. Color convention to be employed on all graphics for the annotation of various statusinformation, differentiation between alarms on the basis of alarm priority, backgroundcolors, static field colorization, and dynamic field colorization.

8. The utilization of blinking and conditional text.

9. Definition of graphic symbolism to be used on the Project. This listing shall include butnot be limited to symbols to be used for process instrumentation, process equipment,piping, vessels, and valves. All symbolism must be specific as opposed to generic, in thatshapes must define both function and type (i.e. specific symbols for each valve design,each pump design, each type of flowmeter, etc.). If the System Integrators library ofshapes does not adequately describe plant or pipeline conditions, the System Integratorshall develop additional shapes to meet the plant or pipeline requirements.

10. Definition of all display select commands that enable the operator to move within thedisplay hierarchy.

11. The utilization of cursor movement commands which enable the operator to move withina display.

12. Definition of control input commands which enable the operator to interact withfaceplates, control stations, and custom graphic displays to implement controloutputs/functions.

13. Definition of data input commands which enable the operator to enter numeric values intothe SCADA system.

14. Definition of the utilization of “poke” points or fields which are dynamically sensitive tooperator inputs to facilitate operator entry directly into graphic displays.

15. A review of graphics generation procedures:

a. Subsequent to the adjournment of the graphics meeting, the System Integrator shallprepare and formalize a document titled, “GRAPHICS CRITERIA”, which shallcontain the detailed minutes of the meeting and a definition of all graphic guidelinesto be adhered to. This report shall be supplemented by graphics examples whichillustrate the incorporation and application of each graphic criteria.

16. The System Integrator shall prepare a formalized submittal of the graphic layout packagefor review in similar fashion to a Shop Drawing, adhering to the graphics criteria.

B. The System Integrator shall chair and develop an agenda for a meeting which shall addressthe basic criteria to be adhered to in the configuration and development of the reports. At thismeeting, which shall be attended by plant managerial personnel, the System Integrator shalldistribute sample report formats for illustration purposes. As a minimum, this meeting shalladdress the following issues:

1. All in-plant and remote site areas and conventions for identifying tag names anddescriptors.

2. Designation of groups within each plant area along with tag names and descriptors.

3. The assignment of inputs to specific categories.

4. Organization of the systems universal report categories.

5. An itemization of the type of report available.


6. Definition of terms to be used on the reports.

7. Definition of all report commands that enable the operator to move within the reporteditor.

8. The utilization of cursor movement commands which enable the operator to move withina report.

9. Definition of data input commands which enable the operator to enter numeric values intothe system.

10. A review of report generation procedures:

a. Subsequent to the adjournment of the reports meeting, the System Integrator shallprepare and formalize a document titled, “REPORT CRITERIA”, which shall containthe detailed minutes of the meeting and a definition of all report guidelines to beadhered to. This report shall be supplemented by report examples which illustrate theincorporation and application of each report criteria. This report shall be submittedwithin 30 calendar days of the meeting’s adjournment.

11. The System Integrator shall prepare a formalized submittal of the report layout packagefor review in similar fashion to a Shop Drawing, adhering to the report criteria.

C. As written above, there are 2 separate project meetings required, to address graphics andreports separately. These meetings, and likewise the criteria, and submittal packages, maybe combined.

D. After the graphic screens have been created, the System Integrator shall schedule throughthe Contractor a final review meeting to demonstrate sample programming before finalfactory testing specified below. The System Integrator shall furnish a laptop with the HMIsoftware loaded for demonstration. The meeting shall be conducted at the wastewatertreatment plant. The System Integrator shall be prepared to simulate displays, controlfunctions, alarms, trending, setpoint adjustment, etc. The Owner shall have an opportunity tohave input to the programming arrangement during this review.

3.02 CALIBRATION, TESTING, AND INSTALLATION

A. Refer to Specification Section 409030.

3.03 TRAINING

A. Refer to Specification Section 409443 for additional training required.


INSTRUMENT LISTS AND REPORTS 409620-1 TOWN BRANCH WWTP THICKENING

SECTION 409620 - INSTRUMENT LISTS AND REPORTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDED

A. General: The Instrument Supplier shall be responsible for furnishing, installing, andconfiguring all instrumentation equipment and accessories. The System Integrator shall beresponsible for furnishing, installing, and configuring all PLC’s and HMI hardware forimplementation of the control strategies, the functions detailed on the Contract Drawings, andthe points listed in the I/O schedules. The requirements of Section 409000 – Instrumentationand Control for Process Systems apply to this section.

B. All PLC programs shall be capable of functioning normally in the absence of an HMI stationwithout any special modifications. All process logic, including monitoring, control, andalarming functions shall be programmed at the PLC level only.

1. Abbreviations used in this section:

LCS - Local Control StationLCP - Local Control PanelHMI - Human-Machine InterfacePID - Proportional + Integral + DerivativePLC - Programmable Logic ControllerSCADA - Supervisory Control and Data AcquisitionVFD - Variable Frequency DriveDCS - Distributed Control SystemOSC - Open-Stop-CloseL/R - Local/RemoteGUI - Graphic User InterfaceS/S - Start/StopMCC - Motor Control CenterA/M - Auto/ManualLOR - Local-Off-RemoteHOR - Hand-Off-RemoteHOA - Hand-Off-AutoVSD - Variable Speed Drive

C. All PLC control programming and workstation HMI programming shall be performed by theSystem Integrator. In the case of the PLC, this shall include the configuration of I/O racks andcommunication modules as well as the assignment and mapping of all I/O to a fixed PLC I/Oaddress. In the case of the control workstation, this shall include the configuration of theoperating system, the installation of the control system application and supporting controlprograms, (i.e. programming modules, database modules, report applications, etc.) and theinstallation of drivers, communication modules, or software patches to allow the controlworkstation to support all installed applications without error.

1.2 RELATED WORK


DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTSDIVISION 11 - EQUIPMENTDIVISION 26 – ELECTRICALDIVISION 46 – WATER AND WASTEWATER EQUIPMENT


1.3 GENERAL

A. Miscellaneous Monitoring:

1. Refer to Loop Diagrams in the Drawings for additional information on required monitoring.

B. Historical Data Collection and Display: The HMI shall historically collect, trend, and record allanalog data. In addition, the HMI shall:

1. Log runtimes to the historical database for all monitored equipment. Record in hours,incrementing by 0.1 hour.

2. Log the number of starts to the historical database for all monitored equipment.

3. Provide daily flow totals for all measured flows.

a. As a minimum, trends shall display the process variable, the transmitter tag, a cleardescription and the units for both axes. For variables, which are controlled by the PLC,both the setpoint and the controlled process variable shall be displayed on the sametrend. Where multiple variables are displayed, separate and distinct colors shall beused for each variable along with a color key with clear descriptions defining eachvariable.

C. Existing control strategies and graphic screens shall be modified where applicable toaccurately reflect changes made under this contract.

1.4 LOOP DESCRIPTIONS

A. Loop 1000 – Primary Sludge Pump Station No. 1 Sludge Pump Control/Monitoring

1. The primary sludge pump station SCADA unit PLC-1 shall provide digital start/stop and 4-20 mAdc speed reference signals to each rotary lobe sludge pump VFD (typical of 6).The plant SCADA system shall provide manual-off-automatic selection for each pump. Inthe manual position, the pumps shall operate using start/stop pushbuttons and anoperator adjustable speed setpoint in the plant HMI software. In the automatic position,the pumps shall start and stop based on a timing sequence and an operator adjustablespeed setpoint.

2. Analog and digital signals shall be output to SCADA unit PLC-1 from the local motorcontrol center for monitoring of the rotary lobe sludge pumps. Motor status, low suctionpressure, high discharge pressure, VFD fault, and in-automatic-mode shall be monitoredfor each pump as well as disconnect switch position for out-of-service indication. Providegraphical indication of status and alarms as well as record running time in the plantSCADA HMI software. Provide operator interface for pump speed setpoint and timingsequence adjustment as well.

B. Loop 2000 – Primary Sludge Pump Station No. 2 Sludge Pump Control/Monitoring

1. The primary sludge pump station SCADA unit PLC-2 shall provide digital start/stop and 4-20 mAdc speed reference signals to each rotary lobe sludge pump VFD (typical of 6).The plant SCADA system shall provide manual-off-automatic selection for each pump. Inthe manual position, the pumps shall operate using start/stop pushbuttons and anoperator adjustable speed setpoint in the plant HMI software. In the automatic position,the pumps shall start and stop based on a timing sequence and an operator adjustablespeed setpoint.


2. Analog and digital signals shall be output to SCADA unit PLC-2 from the local motorcontrol center for monitoring of the rotary lobe sludge pumps. Motor status, low suctionpressure, high discharge pressure, VFD fault, and in-automatic-mode shall be monitoredfor each pump as well as disconnect switch position for out-of-service indication. Providegraphical indication of status and alarms as well as record running time in the plantSCADA HMI software. Provide operator interface for pump speed setpoint and timingsequence adjustment as well.

C. Loop 3000 – Gravity Thickener Sludge Pump Control/Monitoring

1. The gravity thickener building SCADA unit DCU-H (PLC-H) shall provide digital start/stopand 4-20 mAdc speed reference signals to each rotary lobe sludge pump VFD (typical of2). The plant SCADA system shall provide manual-off-automatic selection for eachpump. In the manual position, the pumps shall operate using start/stop pushbuttons andan operator adjustable speed setpoint in the plant HMI software. In the automaticposition, the pumps shall start and stop based on a sludge blanket level in the respectivegravity thickener and an operator adjustable speed setpoint.

2. Analog and digital signals shall be output to SCADA unit DCU-H (PLC-H) from the localmotor control center for monitoring of the rotary lobe sludge pumps. Motor status, lowsuction pressure, high discharge pressure, VFD fault, and in-automatic-mode shall bemonitored for each pump as well as disconnect switch position for out-of-serviceindication. Provide graphical indication of status and alarms as well as record runningtime in the plant SCADA HMI software. Provide operator interface for pump speedsetpoint adjustment.

D. Loop 4000 – Gravity Thickener Scum Pump/Grinder Pump Control/Monitoring

1. The primary sludge pump station SCADA unit PLC-2 shall provide digital start/stop and 4-20 mAdc speed reference signals to each rotary lobe sludge pump VFD (typical of 6).SCADA unit PLC-2 shall also provide digital start/stop signals to each scum grinder pumpcontrol panel. Scum grinder pump operation shall be interlocked with operation of theeach respective scum pump. The Plant SCADA system shall provide (2) modes ofoperation for each pump. An operator selector shall be provided to place the pumps in“scum pump” mode or “thickened sludge pump” mode. The pumps shall operate in eachmode as follows:

2. In “scum pump” mode the plant SCADA system shall provide manual-off-automaticselection for each pump. In the manual position, the pumps shall operate using start/stoppushbuttons and an operator adjustable speed setpoint in the plant HMI software. In theautomatic position, the pumps shall start and stop based on level in the respective gravitythickener scum well and an operator adjustable speed setpoint.

3. In “thickened sludge pump” mode the pump shall operate as described above in Loop3000 – Gravity Thickener Sludge Pump Control/Monitoring

4. Analog and digital signals shall be output to the primary sludge pump station SCADA unitPLC-2 from the motor control center for monitoring of the submersible pumps and wetwell. Motor status, low suction pressure, high discharge pressure, VFD fault, and in-automatic-mode shall be monitored for each pump as well as disconnect switch positionfor out-of-service indication. Provide graphical indication of status and alarms as well asrecord running time in the plant SCADA HMI software. Provide operator interface forpump speed setpoint adjustment.

E. Loop 5000 – Primary Sludge Pump Station No. 1 Sludge Flow Monitoring

1. A new 4” electromagnetic flow meter shall be provided and located in Primary SludgePump Station No. 1 pipe gallery to measure pump station sludge flow. The localtransmitter shall produce continuous 4-20 mAdc signal linear with flow, which shall be


output to SCADA unit PLC-1. The measured flow signal shall be displayed, recorded,and totalized in the plant SCADA HMI software.

2. Calibration Range: 0-x,xxx gpm

F. Loop 6000 – Primary Sludge Pump Station No. 2 Sludge Flow Monitoring

1. A new 4” electromagnetic flow meter shall be provided and located in Primary SludgePump Station No. 2 pipe gallery to measure pump station sludge flow. The localtransmitter shall produce continuous 4-20 mAdc signal linear with flow, which shall beoutput to SCADA unit PLC-2. The measured flow signal shall be displayed, recorded,and totalized in the plant SCADA HMI software.


G. Loop 7000 – Gravity Thickener Thickened Sludge Flow Monitoring

1. A new 6” electromagnetic flow meter shall be provided and located in the GravityThickener Building to measure thickened sludge flow. The local transmitter shall producecontinuous 4-20 mAdc signal linear with flow, which shall be output to SCADA unit DCU-H (PLC-H). The measured flow signal shall be displayed, recorded, and totalized in theplant SCADA HMI software.


H. Loop 8000 – RAS/WAS Pump Station WAS Sludge Flow Monitoring

1. A new 6” electromagnetic flow meter shall be provided and located in the RAS/WASPump Station pipe gallery to measure pump station WAS sludge flow. The localtransmitter shall produce continuous 4-20 mAdc signal linear with flow, which shall beoutput to SCADA unit DCU-D (PLC-D). The measured flow signal shall be displayed,recorded, and totalized in the plant SCADA HMI software.


I. Loop 9000 – Pump Station No. 2 Chopper Pump Control/Monitoring

1. The primary sludge pump station SCADA unit PLC-2 shall provide digital start/stopsignals to the chopper pump starter in the local motor control center. The plant SCADAHMI shall provide operator interface for start/stop pushbutton control.

2. Digital signals shall be output to SCADA unit PLC-2 from the local motor control centerfor monitoring of the chopper pumps. Motor status, motor fault, and in-remote-mode shallbe monitored as well as disconnect switch position for out-of-service indication. Providegraphical indication of status and alarms as well as record running time in the plantSCADA HMI software.

J. Loop 10000 – Gravity Thickener Sludge Blanket Level Monitoring

1. The sludge blanket level in each of the (2) gravity thickeners shall be measured via newnear infrared (NIR) suspended solids sensor mounted inside each gravity thickener. Thelocal transmitter shall produce a continuous 4-20 mAdc signal linear with level, whichshall be output to the SCADA unit DCU-H (PLC-H). The measured level signal shall bedisplayed and recorded in the existing plant SCADA HMI software. Provide high levelalarm, with operator interface for alarm setpoint adjustments.

2. SCADA unit DCU-H (PLC-H) shall provide analog and digital outputs for speedadjustment and start/stop control of the thickened sludge pumps (typical of 2) based on


sludge blanket level. One thickened sludge pump is dedicated to each gravity thickener.The plant SCADA HMI shall include operator interface for start/stop level setpointadjustment.

3. Calibration Range: 0-XX ft

K. Loop 11000 – Scum Well Level Monitoring

1. The level in each of the (2) gravity thickener scum wells is measured via existing Vegaradar level sensors. The local transmitter shall be replaced with a new Moore IndustriesSPA2 controller (with analog output option) which shall produce a continuous 4-20 mAdcsignal linear with level, which shall be output to the SCADA unit DCU-H (PLC-H). Themeasured level signal shall be displayed and recorded in the existing plant SCADA HMIsoftware. Provide high and low level alarm, with operator interface for alarm setpointadjustments.

2. SCADA unit DCU-H (PLC-H) shall provide analog and digital outputs for speedadjustment and start/stop control of the scum pumps (typical of 2) based on scum welllevel. One scum pump is dedicated to each gravity thickener scum well. The plantSCADA HMI shall include operator interface for start/stop level setpoint adjustment.

3. Calibration Range: 0-XX ft

L. Loop 12000 – Centrifuge Dewatering System Control/Monitoring

1. The plant SCADA HMI software shall allow operator interface for control and monitoringof the packaged centrifuge dewatering system. The centrifuge control panel shall beconnected to existing SCADA unit DCU-F (PLC-F) via Ethernet protocol. A graphicalinterface shall be provided to display signals as shown on the loop diagram on sheet I-00-609. Centrifuge operation shall be initiated through the plant SCADA system. SCADA unitDCU-F (PLC-F) shall provide digital start/stop signals based on the control sequencesdescribed below. The SCADA unit shall also provide analog sludge feed flow signal to thecentrifuge control panel which is derived from WAS flow meter FE-8001 in the RAS/WASPump Station and WAS flow meter FE-12001 in the solids processing building. Thecentrifuge sludge feed flow signal shall be the difference in flow signals from FE-8001 andFE-12001.

2. The existing WAS sludge clamp-on type flow meter shall be disconnected and removed.A new 6” electromagnetic flow meter (FE-12001) shall be provided and located in thesolids processing building to measure pump station WAS sludge flow to the gravitythickeners and headworks. The local transmitter shall produce continuous 4-20 mAdcsignal linear with flow, which shall be output to SCADA unit DCU-F (PLC-F). Themeasured flow signal shall be displayed, recorded, and totalized in the plant SCADA HMIsoftware.

Calibration Range: 0-x,xxx gpm

3. The existing WAS sludge pipe in the solids processing building has an existing 6” plugvalve with modulating duty motor actuator (FCV-12001). SCADA unit DCU-F (PLC-F)shall provide analog signals for valve position control and position feedback. Valveposition shall be indicated in the SCADA plant HMI as well as whether the valve actuatoris in local or remote control mode. The valve shall be capable of being manually orautomatically positioned by the Plant HMI/PLC. In the manual position, the valveoperates using open/close pushbuttons and an operator adjustable valve positionsetpoint 0-100% in the plant SCADA HMI. Valve control shall be available locally at themotorized valve actuator via open-stop-close selector switches.

Plant HMI software shall allow operator interface for monitoring and control of the new 6”modulating duty motor actuated centrifuge sludge supply plug valve (FCV-12002). The


valve is located on the WAS sludge feed pipe supplying the new centrifuge. Valveposition shall be indicated in the SCADA plant HMI as well as whether the valve actuatoris in local or remote control mode. The valve shall be capable of being manually orautomatically positioned by the Plant HMI/PLC. In the manual position, the valveoperates using open/close pushbuttons and an operator adjustable valve positionsetpoint 0-100% in the HMI. Valve control shall be available locally at the motorizedvalve actuator via open-stop-close selector switches.

In automatic, control valves FCV-12001 and FCV-12002 shall work in conjunction asdescribed below:

PID control function shall be setup in the SCADA HMI/PLC to control flow control valvesFCV-12001 and FCV-12002. SCADA unit DCU-F (PLC-F) shall provide a continuous 4-20mAdc signal to each flow control valve to modulate and maintain an operatoradjustable flow rate (gpm) setpoint. The plant SCADA HMI shall include operatorinterface for flow setpoint adjustment.

Flow control valve FCV-12001 shall be commanded 100% open until flow meter FE-8001reaches 140 gpm. At this point PID control shall be initiated. The flow setpoint for controlvalves FCV-12001 and FCV-12002 shall be a percentage split of the WAS sludge flowsignal from FCV-8001. Operator interface shall be provided to change the percentagesetpoint for each control valve. The flow rate signal for flow control valve FCV-12001shall be flow meter FE-12001 and the flow rate signal for FCV-12002 shall be thedifference in flow signals from flow meters FE-8001 and FE-12001. The 4-20 mAdc outputto the valve actuator shall be proportional to the incoming flow signal. Upper flow ratesetpoint limits shall be provided in the PID control function to limit flow through each flowcontrol valve to a maximum of 160 gpm.

4. SCADA unit DCU-F (PLC-F) shall provide digital start/stop signals to the centrifugegrinder pump control panel. Grinder pump operation shall be interlocked with operationof the centrifuge. Provide graphical indication of status and alarms as well as recordrunning time in the plant SCADA HMI software.

M. Loop 13000 – Centrifuge Thickened Sludge Discharge System Control/Monitoring

1. The level in the centrifuge thickened sludge hopper shall be measured via new radarlevel sensor. The local transmitter shall produce a continuous 4-20 mAdc signal linearwith level, which shall be output to SCADA unit DCU-F (PLC-F). The measured levelsignal shall be displayed and recorded in the existing plant SCADA HMI software.Provide high and low level alarm, with operator interface for alarm setpoint adjustments.

SCADA unit DCU-F (PLC-F) shall provide digital signals to start/stop the thickenedsludge pump based on sludge hopper level. The thickened sludge pumps shall beoperate as primary and backup with operator selection of each mode. Only onethickened sludge pump shall run at time. One scum pump is dedicated to each gravitythickener scum well. The plant SCADA HMI shall include operator interface for start/stoplevel setpoint adjustment.

Calibration Range: 0-XX ft

2. SCADA unit DCU-F (PLC-F) shall provide digital start/stop signals to each rotary lobesludge pump starter (typical of 2). The plant SCADA system shall provide manual-off-automatic selection for each pump. In the manual position, the pumps shall operateusing start/stop pushbuttons and an operator adjustable speed setpoint in the plant HMIsoftware. In the automatic position, the pumps shall start and stop based on a sludgehopper level.

Digital signals shall be output to SCADA unit DCU-F (PLC-F) from the local motor controlcenter for monitoring of the rotary lobe sludge pumps. Motor status, low suction


pressure, high discharge pressure, and in-automatic-mode shall be monitored for eachpump as well as disconnect switch position for out-of-service indication. Providegraphical indication of status and alarms as well as record running time in the plantSCADA HMI software. Provide operator interface for pump speed setpoint adjustment.

N. Loop 14000 – Centrifuge Thickened Sludge Flow Monitoring

1. Two (2) new 3” electromagnetic flow meters shall be provided and located in the solidsprocessing building to measure thickened sludge flow from each thickened sludge pump.The local transmitter shall produce continuous 4-20 mAdc signal linear with flow, whichshall be output to SCADA unit DCU-F (PLC-F). The measured flow signal shall bedisplayed, recorded, and totalized in the plant SCADA HMI software.


1.5 GENERAL FUNCTIONALITY

A. General: The HMI shall display the status or value of all PLC input and output pointsdescribed in this section, detailed in the I/O schedule and shown on the Loop drawings.

1. Operator entered setpoints shall be constrained to match PLC programmed setpointranges. If a value lower than the setpoint range is entered, the PLC program shall defaultto the lowest possible range value. If a value higher than the setpoint range is entered,the PLC program shall default to the highest possible range value.

2. In general, confirmed PLC setpoint entries become the default program values. Should aPLC reboot occur, through purpose or uncontrolled event, the PLC program shall beautomatically restored with last setpoint entries. No operator intervention shall benecessary to bring a freshly rebooted PLC online and operational.

B. Historical Data Collection and Display: The HMI shall historically collect, trend, and record allanalog data. In addition, the HMI shall:

1. Log runtimes to the historical database for all monitored equipment. Record in hours,incrementing by 0.1 hour.

2. Log the number of starts to the historical database for all monitored equipment.

3. Provide daily flow totals for all measured flows.

a. As a minimum, trends shall display the process variable, the transmitter tag, a cleardescription and the units for both axes. For variables, which are controlled by the PLC,both the setpoint and the controlled process variable shall be displayed on the sametrend. Where multiple variables are displayed, separate and distinct colors shall beused for each variable along with a color key with clear descriptions defining eachvariable.

C. Fail Conditions: In addition to monitoring fail contacts for controlled equipment, if at any pointa device fails to start, stop, open, or close as commanded by the PLC, a timeout fail conditionshall be generated by the PLC and displayed at the HMI. PLC generated timeout failuresshall be reset at the HMI. This shall be in the form of a screen button made visible when atimeout failure exists for the equipment currently in timeout.

1. Alarms related to HMI displayed field equipment and facilities shall be displayed on therelated system control screen as well as recorded in the historical alarm summary.

D. Loop tuning parameters: The HMI/PLC interface shall be configured to allow operators withsupervisory level security clearance, access to all PID loop tuning parameters from the HMI


for any control loop. Changing loop tuning parameters SHALL NOT require reconfiguring,reprogramming, or reloading of the PLC program. All changes to any PID loop tuningparameters shall be logged to the historical database.

E. Flow Signal Dampening: Various flow meters are used to process water and chemicalsthroughout the facility. The PLC shall be programmed to dampen the incoming analog signal.This shall be accomplished by averaging the flow signal over a (5) second period.Specifically, the PLC shall sample the flow every half second for 5 seconds to calculate theaverage flow.

F. Out of Service: The control system shall have the facility to assign an “Out-of-Service” tag tomajor pieces of equipment. During extended periods of maintenance and/or repair, anoperator may make such an assignment so as to suppress associated alarms and inhibitHMI/PLC control functions.

G. Control Strategy Refinement: It shall be understood that some refinement and/or minormodification of the control strategies shall be necessary over the course of the project at noadditional cost. Forums for informal discussions and clarifications have been provided inthese documents. They include the Graphics/Reports Development meetings, FactoryTesting, and Startup.

H. Failure of the PLC shall result in safe shutdown of the equipment.

I. Analog values shall be scaled in engineering units and checked to see if process signal fromthe field devices is within acceptable range (4-20 mA ± 0.5 mA). Signals outside of this rangeshall be alarmed.

1.6 ALARM LIST

A. The alarm list will be developed during the Project meetings at the same time the displaysand reports are discussed. All existing alarms are to be duplicated.

1.7 TREND LIST

A. The list of variables to be trended and the desired time scale shall be discussed at the Projectmeetings at the same time as the displays and reports are discussed. All existing trends areto be duplicated.

1.8 DISPLAY LIST

A. The list of displays to be created shall be discussed in a Project meeting. All existing displaysare to be recreated.

1.9 REPORT LIST

A. The reports to be created shall be discussed in a Project meeting. All existing reports are tobe recreated.

1.10 CONTROL STRATEGIES/SEQUENCES

A. Any control strategies that are required shall be as advised by the Owner during one of theProject meetings.




END OF SECTION

DIVISION 46

WATER AND WASTEWATEREQUIPMENT

VENDOR CONTROL PANEL PLC 460500-1 TOWN BRANCH WWTP THICKENING

SECTION 460500 – BASIC REQUIREMENTS FOR VENDOR CONTROL PANEL PLC’S

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE OF WORK

A. This section of the specifications includes special requirements for process equipment vendorsupplied control systems that include programmable logic controllers (PLC’s). It supplementsrequirements of the applicable specific process equipment specification section in Division 11or Division 46 as well as appropriate electrical and instrumentation specification sections.


A. Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples: Section 013323

B. Equipment: Division 11

C. Electrical Work: Division 26

D. Instrumentation: Division 40

1.03 DESCRIPTION

A. The existing SCADA system shall be modified and expanded as provided as part of thisContract consisting of a programming and graphics modifications and a new SCADA terminalunit DCU-H. The existing SCADA system utilizes Factory Talk HMI software.

B. The existing Plant Ethernet network shall be modified as part of this Contract. Refer tonetwork architecture diagram in the Drawings.

C. The Contractor shall be responsible to establish communications and integrate vendor PLCcontrol systems into the plantwide SCADA system. See Specification Section 409433 forContractor PLC requirements. The manufacturer of the vendor control system shall cooperateand assist the Contractor and the overall project System Integrator in facilitating thiscommunications and integration.

D. The SCADA system configuration and design is based on Rockwell Automation ControlLogixPLC hardware, and Ethernet IP Communications protocol. All vendor furnished controlsystems shall be the same make and model and protocol as used in the plantwide SCADAsystem.

E. The manufacturer/vendor shall make all register data, passwords, software licenses, etc,available to the Contractor and overall project System Integrator. The System Integrator shallprovide IP addresses needed for vendor PLC hardware to the manufacturer.

F. Vendor PLC registers for handling analog data shall have enough significant digits to notcompromise the accuracy of trends or totalization.

G. HMI’s furnished mounted through the door of vendor control panels shall be rated for NEMA4 outdoor application except where specifically indicated otherwise. HMI’s shall becompatible with the plantwide SCADA system protocol, and specific HMI’s shall be as calledout in the equipment specification or as shown in the network architecture diagram.

H. All vendor PLC control systems shall have a local HMI device for interaction with the PLC, aswell as a port for remote access by laptop and a port for plantwide SCADA network interface.


I. The manufacturer shall provide a digital backup to the Owner for the control systemimplementation, so they can restore the program after a catastrophic failure.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 SPARE PARTS

A. As a minimum provide the following spare parts:

1. Processors: Provide one spare processor unit(s) for each unique processor installed.

2. Memory Cards: Provide one spare for each type of card installed.

3. I/O Cards: Provide spares for each unique I/O module type installed. Provide two or 10percent of installed quantity, whichever is greater.

4. Network interface, remote I/O, and communication modules: Provide one sparecommunication module for each unique communication module installed.

5. Specialty Modules: Provide as a minimum a spare of each type of module identified.Provide an additional spare for every ten modules of a specific type installed.

6. PLC Power supplies: Provide spare power supplies for each unique power supplyinstalled.

7. Miscellaneous components (including cables): Provide spares for each uniquecomponent installed.

8. Ten percent of total quantity of each type of fuse used in the system.

9. Twelve fan filters for each PLC cabinet (if ventilated).

10. 48 lamps for each type/size used.

11. Cutler-Hammer C799L2 oxidation inhibitor; install one in each control panel.

B. Spare parts shall be individually packaged for long term storage and identified with labelsdescribing contents. The Contractor shall replace, at no additional cost, all spare partsconsumed during the one-year warranty period.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 FACTORY TEST

A. Prior to the delivery and installation of the vendor control system at the jobsite, but after theprocurement, assembly, and configuration of all components, the manufacturer shall conduct afactory test. This test may be witnessed by representatives of the System Integrator, Ownerand/or Engineer. The factory test is not intended to be a complete system test, since this will beperformed at the jobsite prior to Project Closeout. The factory test shall demonstrate thefunctionality and performance of all significant specified features of the control system as notedbelow. The test shall include all verification of all vendor PLC’s, remote I/O systems, and all I/Opoints along with their respective local HMI status and/or control displays. A complete systemchecklist shall be available during the test for recording results of selected points.

B. The PLC’s, PLC programming terminal, and communications devices shall be loaded with theirapplicable software packages and configuration programming. Input and output modules shall


be installed in their assigned housings and wired to field termination points in the enclosures.The manufacturer shall have a complete, up-to-date set of wiring drawings, a register list, and adatabase list available for review throughout the test.

C. The manufacturer and Contractor shall schedule the factory test after the vendor processcontrol system shop drawing submittals have been submitted and approved and after receivingapproval of the vendor factory test procedures submittal. The Contractor shall provide theEngineer with written notice of the start and expected duration of the factory test at least 30days prior to the start of the test.

D. The factory test shall be conducted in accordance with the previously submitted and approvedtest procedures. All testing shall be completed in one continuous factory test which may extendover several continuous days if necessary. The test procedures shall include writtendescriptions of how individual tests shall be performed and shall incorporate testing thefollowing features as a minimum:

1. Communication: Verify all network components are able to communicate over the localcontrol system network using the contract required protocols and mediums.

2. Power Failure: External power to each enclosure shall be cycled in order to test theoperation of the UPS units.

3. Redundant Systems: Proper configuration and operation of the redundant PLCprocessors, PLC panel power supplies and control system HMI shall be confirmed.

4. I/O Verification: All I/O terminal point wiring shall be verified. The manufacturer shallprovide a means of easily introducing a discrete or variable analog signal to any and allI/O points and shall have the means of detecting or measuring PLC generated outputsignals at the terminal blocks. Signals shall be verified at the associated PLC register.

5. Remote Access Configuration and Security: A laptop shall be used to remotely accessthe control system network to simulate plantwide SCADA interface.

6. Alarm handling: Verification of alarm logging, summary display, outputs to horn, and theability to disable alarms. Silencing and acknowledging of alarms shall also be tested.

7. HMI: Preconfigured displays shall be checked for functionality

8. Ethernet Switch configuration tables shall be confirmed.

E. If the vendor control system does not operate as required, the manufacturer shall makewhatever corrections are necessary, and the failed part of the tests shall be repeated. If in theopinion of the Owner or Engineer’s representative, the changes made by the manufacturer toeffect such a correction are sufficient in kind or scope to effect parts of system operation alreadytested, then the affected parts shall be retested also. If a reliable determination of the effect ofchanges made by the manufacturer cannot be made, then the Owner or Engineer’srepresentative may require that all operations be retested. The manufacturer shall bear all of itsown costs for the factory test, including any required retesting.

F. All of the Engineer’s and Owner’s travel and per diem costs for factory testing shall be borne bythe Owner.

G. All of the Engineer’s and Owner’s travel and per diem costs for factory retesting shall be borneby the Contractor or manufacturer.

H. Test Report: The manufacturer shall record the results of all factory testing on preapproved testforms which the Owner’s and Engineer’s representatives shall sign (if in attendance). A copy of


the completed test forms and a report certifying the results shall be provided to the Engineerwithin 10 days of completing the test.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. The equipment shall be installed and commissioned in accordance with the manufacturer’srecommendations and requirements herein.

3.03 SERVICE

A. The equipment manufacturer shall provide a service representative properly trained ininspection and operation of the mechanism to startup the control system, approve theinstallation, instruct the Owner’s personnel on maintenance and operation, and tocooperate/coordinate with the System Integrator that is programming the plantwide SCADAsystem. If additional service time onsite is required due to the mechanism not being fullyoperational, at the time of service requested by the Contractor, the additional service daysnecessary to fulfill this obligation will be at the Contractor’s expense.

B. Should the project System Integrator be willing, and if a followup visit by the manufacturer isneeded due to a required program code revision, provide necessary software licenses and/orpasswords so the System Integrator may get into the program for the PLC and makecorrections needed.

END OF SECTION

SUBMERSIBLE MIXER 461023-1 TOWN BRANCH WWTP THICKENING

SECTION 461023 - SUBMERSIBLE MIXERS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 DESCRIPTION

A. The General Contractor shall furnish, install, test and place in satisfactory operation, as shownon the Plans and specified, one (1) submersible mixer complete with all appurtenances,accessories and spare parts as will be required to produce a complete and workableinstallation. The control system shall be furnished under Division 26.


A. Refer to Division 01 for supplementary requirements for guarantees, shop drawings, technicalmanuals, start-up, etc.

B. Division 09 for Painting.

C. Division 26 for Electrical

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Data to be submitted:

1. The Contractor shall submit information for the units which he proposes to supply,showing thrust, propeller diameter, propeller speed, gear ratios, brake horsepower,power input to electric drive motor for the various conditions under which the units are tooperate along with descriptive data and specifications describing in detail the constructionof the complete units.

2. The parameters thrust and power input to the electrical drives shall be measured inaccordance with ISO 21630.

B. Dimensional Data:

1. The successful bidder shall submit to the Engineer for approval, shop drawings, showingall weights and dimensions necessary for the installation of foundations and anchor bolts.

PART 2 - MATERIALS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturer:

1. Submersible mixers shall be SR 4620 as manufactured by Flygt, or pre-approved equal.2. Any manufacturer, other than specified, proposing to offer the following equipment must

submit sufficient information to the Engineer to determine that the equipment complieswith the requirements of the Contract Documents. This information must be received bythe Engineer not less than 14 days prior to the Bid Date. The Engineer will issue anaddendum prior to the bid date which lists any pre-approved equipment. Contractors andmanufacturers are advised that a manufacturer named as an approved supplier is not


excused from meeting all of the technical and performance requirements of thisspecification. The pre-bid qualification package shall include complete mixerperformance data, evidence of compliance with the installation experience requirementsof this Section and a letter from an officer of the company of the mixer manufacturerlisting all exceptions to the specifications.

B. Performance:

1. Furnish one (1) submersible mixer. The distribution box shall contain wastewater mixedliquor of a solids concentration of not more than 2.0% by weight. The mixer shall becapable of the following performance:

Minimum Propeller Diameter, inches (mm) 8.3 (210)

Number of Propeller Blades 2

Rated Shaft Power, kW (hp) 1.7 (2.3)

Minimum Thrust, pounds force, N 125

Maximum Motor Speed, rpm 1685

Maximum Nominal Motor HP per unit 2.3

2.02 MIXER CONSTRUCTION

A. General

1. Each mixer shall be of the integral design, close coupled, submersible type. Allcomponents of the mixer, including motor shall be capable of continuous underwateroperation.

2. Major mixer components shall be of 316L Stainless Steel construction.3. The oil housing cover plate shall be of corrosion resistant composite (4610/20 utilize a

vinyl ester composite motor cover).

4. All exposed fasteners shall be of stainless steel.

5. In order to insure that the low velocity area around the motor remains impervious to lowPH solids and or liquid attack, the motor housing exterior shall be made of 316 StainlessSteel.

6. All metal surfaces coming into contact with the mixed media, other than stainless steel,shall be protected by a factory applied spray coating of acrylic dispersion zinc phosphateprimer with an epoxy finish coat on the exterior of the mixer.

B. Elastomers

1. All mating surfaces where watertight sealing is required shall be machined and fittedwith a double set of Nitrile rubber, Viton or Terban O-rings.

2. Fitting shall be such that sealing is accomplished by metal-to-metal contact betweenmachined surfaces. This will result in controlled compression of the O-rings withoutrequiring a specific torque limit.

3. No secondary sealing compounds, rectangular gaskets, elliptical O-rings, grease orother devices shall be used.


C. Propeller

1. The propeller shall be of 316 stainless steel or High Chrome (select one), dynamicallybalanced, non-clogging backward curved design. Each blade shall be laser cut andwelded to the hub to ensure that the propeller is properly balanced.

2. The propeller shall be capable of handling solids, fibrous materials, heavy material andother matter found in typical industrial applications.

D. Bearings

1. All bearings shall have a minimum B-10 or L-10aa rated life of 100,000 hours and shallhave inner and outer races of metal construction. Bearings with races made ofnonmetallic construction will not be deemed acceptable or meeting the load handling andenvironmental requirements of this application.

2. The outboard propeller bearing shall be an angular contact bearing.3. The motor shaft end shall be supported by two bearings.4. A roller and an angular contact ball bearing shall take up the axial and radial loads while

an angular contact ball bearing shall take up the axial loads.5. The bearings shall be pre-loaded by a bearing loading nut located on the motor end of

the shaft in order to reduce shaft deflection and increase bearing life and seal life.6. Mixers without pre-loaded bearings will not be considered acceptable or equal.

E. Oil Housing

1. The oil housing shall contain two compartments consisting of an inner and an outersection with four ports to connect and facilitate oil flow. In the event that the mixed mediabypasses the other seal, this design will allow the outer compartment to collect theheavier (denser) fluids by means of a simple gravity process. Mixers which requirepropeller removal for oil change shall not be acceptable. Separate fill and drain plugsshall be provided to facilitate oil replacement.

F. Mechanical Seals

1. Each mixer shall be provided with two sets of lapped end face type mechanical sealsrunning in oil reservoirs for cooling and lubrication.

2. The standard inner mechanical seal is corrosion resistant Tungsten Carbide/AluminumOxide.

3. The outer seal faces are Tungsten Carbide/Tungsten Carbide. One face of the inner sealring pair shall have spiral grooves laser etched in it, to provide a pumping action to moveleakage from the stator housing back into the oil chamber.

4. In order to avoid seal failure due to sticking, clogging, and misalignment from elementscontained in the mixed media, only the seal faces of the outer seal assembly and itsretaining clips shall be exposed to the mixed media. All other components shall becontained in the oil housing.

2.03 MOTORS

A. Submersible Motors

1. The motor shall be directly connected to the propeller (gearbox designs are notacceptable) to produce a propeller speed of 1685 RPM.

2. The mixer motor shall be squirrel cage, induction, shell type design, housed in an airfilled, watertight chamber.


3. The stator winding shall be insulated with moisture resistant Class F insulation which willresist a temperature of 155°C (311°F).

4. The stator shall be insulated by the trickle impregnation method resulting in a winding fillfactor of at least 95%.

5. The motor shall be designed for continuous duty, capable of sustaining a maximum of atleast thirty (30) evenly spaced starts per hour.

6. The rotor bars and short circuit rings shall be made of aluminum.7. Thermal sensors shall be used to monitor stator temperatures. The stator shall be

equipped with three (3) thermal switches embedded in the end coils of the stator windingand set for 284°F (140°C). These shall be used in conjunction with, and supplementalto, external motor overload protection, and must be wired to the control panel asrequired by FM regulations.

8. In addition, FM regulations require that a leakage detector be installed in the motor andconnected through a Mini-CAS unit.

B. Power and Control Cables

1. Power and control cables shall be furnished in lengths to run un-spliced from the mixer tothe control panel or disconnect as shown on the Contract Drawings and as specifiedherein. Cables shall terminate with conductor sleeves that bundle the entire group ofstrands of each phase to improve termination at the pump control panel. The sleevesshall be provided to confirm that all strands of each conductor is terminated properly.

2. Cables shall be of the "NSSHOU" type and shall be approved by the MSHA for use inhazardous locations and shall conform to industry standards for loads, resistance undersubmersion against sewage, and be of stranded construction. The cables shall enter themixer motor through a heavy duty galvanized cast iron entry assembly which shall beprovided with an external clamp assembly to protect against tension once securedproviding a strain relief function as part of standard construction.

3. The cables for each mixer motor shall pass through the galvanized cast iron strain reliefcomponent and then through a series of stainless steel disks and Buna-n grommet that issandwiched between the disks to control compression of the grommet. The cable entrydesign shall be of the type recommended in the Factory Mutual Research Corporationspecifications for Explosion Proof Certification. The entry shall be comprised of the castiron fitting that will include the Buna-N strain relief grommet coupled with a pouredconductor section. In the poured section, only Factory Mutual approved sealant shall beused to wick into each conductor strand that has the insulation removed in this area toprovide a positively leak proof seal for the power and sensor cords.

2.04 REMOVAL SYSTEM

A. Guide Pipe Mounting System

1. A guide rail system shall be used to mount each mixer during operation and to guide theunits during installation and removal for service.

2. The Mounting System should consist of an adjustable mounting bracket and 2 inch O.D.stainless steel pipe.

3. The mounting system shall allow the mixer to be mounted at an angle for optimal mixing.4. An Adjustable Mounting Bracket, #7249925, as manufactured by Flygt should be used.

B. Hoist (Crane) Assembly:

1. A hoist system shall be used for lifting and lowering of the mixer on the guide rail duringinstallation and maintenance. The system shall be capable of 360 degree-rotation. Eachhoist assembly shall be rated at a minimum of 500 pounds. All crane and receiving boxesshall be constructed of AISI 304 stainless steel. The sleeves and the bearings in thereceiving box shall be constructed of Nylon (PA).


2.05 SHOP PAINTING

A. Primer and Finish Paint-Shop apply to all exterior ferrous surfaces of the mixer and motor.

1. Solids by volume: 97%2. Type: Solvent-free ceramic coating, impregnated with aluminum oxides3. Total Dry Film Thickness: 400 microns (15 mils) minimum4. Minimum Adhesion: 15 Newtons per square millimeter (2,030 psi) per ISO 4624.5. Minimum Hardness: 110 on Buchholz Indentation scale6. Resistance: Level 1 (continuous duty) for sewage with pH of 6-11, Level 1 for saltwater,

Level 3 (not recommended) for 10% hydrochloric acid.

B. Surface Preparation-Prepare all surfaces to receive coating system.

1. Method: Blasting per ISO 12944-42. Standard Cleanliness Grade: 2.53. Minimum Peak to Valley Height: 70 microns (2.75 mils)

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 WARRANTY

A. The submersible mixers and their motors will be covered by a non-prorated two (2) yearwarranty against defects in materials and workmanship that shall include 100% parts and labor.This warranty shall not be limited by hours of running time or operation from variable speeddrives.


A. The manufacturer shall provide the services of a factory trained service technician to inspect theinstallation, assist in the successful start-up of the mixers, and instruct the Owner in properoperation and maintenance of the equipment. This service shall be for a minimum period of two(2) full working days at the project site. Visits shall be a minimum of two (2) trips, one (1) duringthe installation, and one (1) after the equipment is ready for operation.

3.03 MIXER TESTING

The mixer manufacturer shall perform the following inspections and tests on each mixer beforeshipment from the factory:

1. Propeller, motor rating, and electrical connections shall first be checked for compliance tothe customer's purchase order.

2. A dielectric test shall be carried out in accordance to IEC 60034-1 (two times ratedvoltage plus 1000V). This test shall be done after assembly but before any performancetests. No records shall normally be provided.

3. Prior to shipment, the mixer shall be run dry to establish correct rotation and mechanicalintegrity.

A written report stating the foregoing steps have been done may be supplied with each mixer atthe time of shipment (upon request).


INTERIOR PROCESS PIPING 462010-1 TOWN BRANCH WWTP THICKENING

SECTION 462010 - INTERIOR PROCESS PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Provide all labor, materials, equipment and services required to furnish and install all plantprocess piping as shown on the Drawings and specified herein.


A. Interior Process Valves: Section 462012

B. Piping furnished with equipment is included in the specific equipment item.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. The Contractor shall comply with the requirements of Section 013323 of these specifications.

B. A notarized certification shall be furnished for all pipe and fittings which verifies compliancewith all applicable specifications.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 DUCTILE IRON PIPE/DUCTILE IRON FITTINGS

A. Unless otherwise noted or required, all inside ductile iron piping shall be flanged pipe withthreaded flanges in accordance with AWWA C 115. All piping flanges shall have ringgaskets, 1/8-inch thick.

B. All exposed iron pipe to be field painted shall be furnished with an external coating of rustinhibitive primer, such as Tnemec Series 1 OmniThane, Sherwin-Williams Corothane IGalvaPac, or equal. Pipe manufacturer shall be responsible for compatibility of shop appliedcoatings with the field paint systems and products specified in Division 09, Section 09 96 01.Do not apply asphalt or bituminous coatings on pipe to be painted.

C. The interior of all ductile iron pipe shall be cement-mortar lined with bituminous seal coat inaccordance with AWWA C 104. Thickness of the lining shall be as set forth in Section 4.8.1of the aforementioned specification unless otherwise directed by the Engineer.

D. Ductile iron fittings shall conform to AWWA C 110 with flanges faced and drilled 125-pound.Fittings shall have interior lining and exterior coating same as the pipe.

2.02 POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) PLASTIC PRESSURE PIPE

A. PVC Pressure Pipe, 3" and Smaller: Polyvinyl chloride plastic pipe shall be ASTM D 1785Schedule 80 or F441 CPVC, Schedule 80 with solvent weld joints. Fittings shall be ASTM D2467 Schedule 80 socket type. All socket type connections shall be made with PVC solventcement complying with ASTM D 2564 PVC solvent cement shall be furnished from the samesupplier as the PVC pipe. Provide socket-threaded adapters for connection to threadedappurtenances where required.


2.03 COPPER PIPING

A. Copper piping shall be ASTM B 88 Type L seamless copper water tube, with ANSI B16.18cast brass solder joint pressure fittings. Provide solder joint-threaded unions at all threadedvalves and appurtenances.

2.04 STAINLESS STEEL

A. Stainless steel pipe shall be ASTM A 312, AISI Type 316. Schedule 40, threaded. Stainlesssteel fittings shall be AISI Type 316, 150-lb., threaded, as manufactured by Camco FittingsCompany, Hamden, Connecticut, or equal.

2.05 WALL PIPE AND SLEEVES

A. All wall pipe shall be furnished with cast or welded collar water stops in the positions shownon the Drawings. Welding of water stop collars on pipe shall be accomplished by the wallpipe manufacturer in their shop. All centrifugally cast wall pipe shall be ductile iron meetingthe requirements of AWWA C151 for the pipe barrel, conforming to the pressure rating of thepipeline in which installed, and in no case be lighter than Class 53.

B. All statically cast wall pipe shall be ductile iron meeting the requirements of AWWA C110 forfittings. Mechanical joint end and cast-on flange end wall pipe shall conform to AWWA C110and threaded flange wall pipe shall conform to AWWA C115. Where flanged or mechanicaljoint bell ends are flush with the wall, they shall be drilled and tapped for stud bolts which areto be of 300 Series stainless steel.

C. The length of all wall pipe shall be not less than the thickness of the wall in which installed.Wall pipe shall have the same pressure rating as connecting pipe. All wall pipe shall becement-mortar lined per AWWA C104. The outside of wall pipes shall be left uncoated andshall be field primed for painting on the portion exposed, uncoated where embedded and fieldcoated with standard bituminous coated where buried.

D. Contractor may have the option to install wall pipe flush face-to-face of wall in lieu of thedimensioned length wall pipe shown on the Drawings, in order to eliminate form penetrations.This option will be subject to Engineer`s review at each wall pipe location and covers bothflanged and mechanical-joint bell-end wall pipe. Embedded flanged and M.J. bell-end boltholes shall be tapped for stud bolts; tapped bolt holes in embedded flanges shall be pluggedfor protection during concrete pouring.

E. All pipe wall sleeves shall be plain end galvanized steel pipe of diameter noted on Drawingsand length to fit flush face-to-face of wall.

2.06 INTERLOCKING LINK PIPE SEALS

A. In all locations indicated on the Drawings, interlocking link pipe seals shall be used in lieu oflead packing a pipe wall sleeve. Seals shall be modular mechanical type, consisting ofinterlocking synthetic rubber links shaped to continuously fill the annular space between thepipe and wall sleeve. Links shall be loosely assembled with bolts to form a continuous rubberbelt around the pipe with a pressure plate under each bolt head and nut. After the sealassembly is positioned in the sleeve, tightening of the bolts shall cause the rubber sealingelements to expand and provide an absolutely water-tight seal between the pipe and wallsleeve. Seals shall be "Link-Seal" as manufactured by Thunderline Corporation, Wayne,Michigan, or approved equal.

B. The Contractor shall determine the required diameter of each individual wall openingaccording to the manufacturer’s recommendations before ordering and installing the seal.Pipe shall be accurately centered in the sleeve and the link seals shall be sized, installed andtightened in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.


2.07 COUPLINGS AND ADAPTERS

A. Flexible couplings shall be of the sleeve type with a middle ring, two round-wedge shapedrubber gaskets at each end, two following rings together and compress the gasket againstthe pipe. Flexible couplings shall be steel with minimum wall thickness of the middle ring orsleeve installed on pipe being 5/16-inch for pipe smaller than 10 inches, 3/8-inch for pipe 10inches or larger. The minimum length of the middle ring shall be 5-inches for pipe sizes up to10 inches and 7 inches for pipe 10 inches to 30 inches. The pipe stop shall be removed.Gaskets shall be suitable for 250 psi pressure rating or at rated working pressure of theconnecting pipe. Couplings shall be harnessed and be designed for 250 psi.

B. Flanged adapters shall have one end suitable for bolting to a pipe flange and the other end offlexible coupling similar to that described hereinbefore. All pressure piping with couplings oradapters shall be harnessed with full threaded rods spanning across the couplings oradapters. The adapters shall be furnished with bolts of an approved corrosion resistant steelalloy, extending to the adjacent pipe flanges. Flanges on flanged adapter (unless otherwiseindicated or required) shall be faced and drilled ANSI B16.1 Class 125.

C. Flexible couplings and flanged adapters shall be as manufactured by Dresser, Rockwell, orequal, per the following, unless otherwise specified and/or noted on the Drawings:

1. Steel couplings for joining same size, plain-end, steel, cast iron, and PVC plastic pipe -

Dresser Smith-Blair

Style 253 (2”-15”)Style 38/138 (18” & above)

4ll

2. Transition couplings for joining pipe of different outside diameters-

Dresser Smith-Blair

Style 162 (4"-12") 413 steel (2"-24")Style 62 (2"-24") 415 steel (6"-48")

433 cast (2"-16")435 cast (2"-12")

3. Flanged adapters for joining plain-end pipe to flanged pipe, fittings, valves andequipment.

Dresser Smith-Blair

Style 227 cast (3"-12") 912 cast (3"-12")Style 128 steel (3"-48" D.I. Pipe) 913 steel (3"-24” D.I. Pipe)Style 128 steel (2"-96" steel pipe)

2.08 FLANGED JOINTS

A. Flange bolts and nuts shall be ASTM A 307, Grade B and shall have hexagonal heads.All bolts, nuts and studs for flanged pipe in submerged locations shall be of 300 Seriesstainless steel. The flanges shall be drawn together until the joint is perfectly tight, withbolts of a length such that they will not project greater than 1/4-inch from the nut nor fallshort of the end of the nut when drawn up. No washers shall be used. Gaskets shall becarefully fabricated prior to installation and must be suitable for pressure rating for thepipe for which it is used.

B. All flanges (unless otherwise indicated or required) shall be faced and drilled ANSI B16.1125-pound for ductile iron and ANSI B16.5 150-pound for steel.


C. At the Contractor's option, and at no additional expense to the Owner, the followingpatented SBR flange gaskets or approved equal may be substituted for standard sheetpacking ring gaskets in ductile iron flanged pipe:

1. TORUSEAL by American Cast Iron Pipe Company

2. FLANGE-TYTE by United States Pipe & Foundry Company

When using such gaskets, flange bolts shall be torqued to manufacturer's recommendedtorque values.

2.09 DISMANTLING JOINT

A. The dismantling joint shall be a double-ended flanged adapter that allows for longitudinaladjustment in a flanged piping system. It shall be made up with a flanged telescoping slippipe piece inside a flanged adapter with integral control rods passing through both flanges.The telescoping pipe piece and flanged adapter shall be made from carbon steel and befactory primed. Tie rods shall be steel ASTM A193 grade B1 and the nuts shall be steelASTM A194 grade H2. The rubber pipe gasket between the telescoping pipe and the flangeadapter shall be Buna-S rubber. Flanges shall conform to either ANSI B16.5 class 150 orclass 300 to match the ANSI B16.1 class 125 or class 250 pipe flanges as indicated on thedrawings, and as defined hereinafter in paragraph 2.08. The dismantling joint shall have amaximum working pressure equal to the working pressure of the associated mating flange,being 250 psi or 300 psi respectively.

B. The dismantling joint shall be Style 131 as manufactured by Dresser, or approved equal.

2.10 METAL PIPE SUPPORTS AND HANGERS

A. The Contractor shall furnish and install all pipe hangers, inserts, brackets, plates, anchors,and other supports not specifically included under other items. Generally pipe supports arenot shown on the Drawings, but shall be supplied as specified herein. However, any bracingor support details shown on the Drawings shall be followed.

B. Prior to installation, the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for review, manufacturer'sdata sheets on all catalogued items to be used and sketches covering all specially designedhanger and support assemblies and fabrications.

C. Supports and hangers shall be as manufactured by Grinnell, Elcen, or Fee & Mason, or equalor fabricated by the Contractor. Field fabricated supports may be used only for specialconditions where manufactured items may not be suitable. In such cases, details ofproposed supports shall be submitted to the Engineer for review. All such supports shall begalvanized.

D. Except as shown on the Drawings or as directed by the Engineer, supports and hangers shallbe as follows:

1. Pipes with centerlines less than 24 inches from a wall shall be supported by a typical wallsupport bracket. Pipes with centerlines less than 6 feet above a floor shall be supportedfrom below. All other pipes shall be hung from above. Piping shall be supported at nogreater than 10 feet 0 inches on centers.

2. Pipe supported from underneath shall have adjustable pipe saddle supports on properlysized pipe stanchions. The saddle assembly shall be of cast iron. Standard pipestanchions with hold-down "U" bolts shall be Grinnell Fig. 259, Elcen Fig. 49, Fee &Mason Fig. 2595, or equal.


3. Hangers are to be suspended from concrete work. Hangers shall be supported fromapproved metal inserts placed in concrete before the concrete is placed. Standardconcrete inserts shall be Grinnell Fig. 28l or 282, Elcen Fig. 86 or 65, Fee & Mason Fig.186 or 2570, or equal. If special support from overhead concrete is necessary due tounusually heavy loads, support shall be as detailed on the Drawings. In no case shallstandard concrete inserts be used where pipe load exceeds the manufacturer'srecommended load for the insert, or where the hanger rod exceeds 7/8" diameter.

4. All pipe hangers, inserts, clamps, supports and other like items shall be submitted forreview by the Engineer prior to installation.

5. All inside horizontal flanged piping shall be supported with approved split ring typeadjustable hangers of malleable iron with suitable hanger rods unless shown otherwiseon the Drawings. Special supports shall be constructed in accordance with details shownon the Drawings. Wall supports and/or hangers shall be placed not over 10 feet apart.All piping shall be rigidly supported to prevent loosening under vibration.

6. Pipe, valve operating stems, fixtures and conduits shall be bracketed or suspended fromwalls, ceilings, and beams at or near valves and fittings and where needed for firmsupport, by standard brackets, rods, turnbuckles, and rings made especially for pipe ofsizes supported. Perforated strap iron and/or copper will not be acceptable.

7. Clevis hangers for "iron pipe size" O.D. pipe shall be Grinnell Figure 65, Elcen Figure l2,Fee & Mason Figure 239, or equal. Clevis hangers for Cast Iron O.D. pipe shall beGrinnell Figure 260, Elcen Figure 12C, Fee & Mason Figure 104, or equal. All clevishangers shall be galvanized.

8. Turnbuckles shall be forged steel. Rods shall be of black steel, machine threaded offollowing sizes:

Pipe Size Rod Diameter

1/2" - 2" 3/8"2 1/2" - 3" 1/2"4" - 5" 5/8"6" 3/4"8" - 12" 7/8"14" - 16" 1"18" 1 - 1/8"20" - 24" 1 - 1/4"

9. Brackets shall be of standard castings of fabricated steel and shall be reviewed by theEngineer. Standard catalogued bracket shall be medium duty Grinnell Fig. 195, ElcenFig. 57, Fee & Mason Fig. 151, or equal, galvanized, size as noted on Drawings. Providelight or heavy duty brackets if specifically noted on Drawings. "U" bolts shall be GrinnellFig. 137, Elcen Fig. 68 or 68A, Fee & Mason Fig. 176, or equal.

10. Column type pipe supports shall consist of pipe columns of size required to carry the fullpipe and standard cast iron bases and saddles as required. Saddles shall be of propersize to fit the pipe being supported.

2.11 PIPE INSULATION

Where indicated on the Contract Drawings or stated in the specifications, process piping shallbe provided with insulation.

A. Insulation shall be one-piece fiberglass section insulation (K=0.23 at 75 degrees F.) withfactory applied white reinforced kraft/foil vapor barrier jacket. Longitudinal jacket laps and


butt joints shall be self-sealing using 3” wide lap strips. Insulation shall be one of thefollowing:

1. Johns-Manville “Flame Safe AP-T 500 degrees F.”

2. Owens/Corning “Fiberglass 25 ASJ/SSL”.

3. Certainteed “Fiberglass 500 Degree Snap-On”.

Insulation shall be 1” thick, minimum.

B. Finishing Materials:

1. Acceptable manufacturers, insulating cement:

a. Johns-Mansville No. 375.

b. 48 Insulations “Quik-Set”.

c. Rockwood Mfg. Co. “Delta-Maid One Shot”.

2. Acceptable manufacturers, breather mastic:

a. Benjamin Foster “Sealfas 30-36”.

b. Insul-Coustic “Permsure IC-102”.

c. Vimasco No. 713.

d. Childers “Chil-Seal CP-50”.

e. Epolux “Cadalog 336”.

3. Acceptable manufacturers, PVC premolded covers:

a. Johns-Manville “Zeston”.

b. Ceel-Co.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION OF PIPING

A. Materials shall be new and of the best grade and quality; workmanship shall be first class inevery respect.

B. Each piece of iron pipe and each fitting shall be plainly marked at the foundry with classnumber and weight.

C. Where indicated on the Drawings, plain-end pipe shall be joined by means of flangedadapters or flexible couplings which shall be Rockwell, Dresser, or equal.

D. All pipe couplings shall be designed to safely withstand the operating pressure of the lines inwhich they are installed. All couplings shall be shop primed with an approved rust inhibitiveprimer.


E. Taps and connections to piping shall be made as required to connect equipment, samplelines, etc., and where otherwise shown on the Drawings.

F. Piping shall be installed straight and true, parallel or perpendicular to walls, with approvedoffsets around obstructions. Standard pipe fittings shall be used for changing direction ofpiping. No mitered joints or field fabricated pipe bends are permitted unless accepted by theEngineer.

G. All piping, fittings, valves and other accessories shall be thoroughly cleaned of dirt, chips andforeign matter before joint connections are made.

H. All plastic pipe shall be adequately supported and braced. Support spacing shall not exceedthe recommendations of the Plastics Pipe Institute.

I. Teflon tape shall be used on all plastic pipe threaded connections.

J. Field cut male threads on plastic pipe shall be made with plastic pipe threading dies.

K. The annular space of plain wall sleeves shall be packed tight with lead wool to within 3/4" ofwall face and then patch grouted flush to wall face with non-staining nonshrink grout,Masterflow 713 by Master Builders, Sonogrout by Sonneborn-Contech, or equal.

L. All pipe sleeves passing through walls or floors of chlorine feed and storage areas shall beprovided with gas tight seals.

M. All pipe threads shall conform to ANSI B2.1.

N. Piping shall be erected to provide for expansion and contraction.

O. Screwed or soldered unions shall be provided in all small piping as required to permitconvenient removal of equipment, valves and piping accessories from the piping system.

P. Dielectric insulating couplings or brass adapters shall be used whenever the adjoiningmaterials being connected are of dissimilar material such as connections between coppertubing and steel pipe.

Q. All inside piping shall be color coded, stenciled and label tagged for identification as specifiedin Section 09 96 01.

3.02 INSTALLATION OF PIPELINE INSULATION

A. Piping:

1. Butt all joints firmly together and secure all “self-seal” jacket laps with lap adhesive. Sealall butt joints with joint strips furnished with insulation. Taper all pipe insulation ends andcover with insulating cement.

B. Fittings and valves:

1. Hot lines 2” and smaller: Valves, unions, and flanges shall not be insulated.

2. Hot and cold lines 2-½” and larger and cold lines 2” and smaller: Valves, unions, andflanges shall be insulated as follows, but insulation shall be removable to facilitatemaintenance.

3. Insulate with molded fiberglass fitting segments of pipe covering, or with firmlycompressed fiberglass blanket. Secure in-place with 20 gauge galvanized steel wire and


finish with a smooth coating of insulating cement. Pipe sizes under 4” may be insulatedwith hydraulic cement. All thicknesses shall be equal to that of adjoining pipe insulation.

4. Finish insulation with two (2) 1/16” thick coats of mastic, applied at not more than 15 sq.ft. per gallon and reinforced with white glass fabric embedded between the coats. (Usebreather mastic on hot pipe lines and vapor barrier mastic on cold pipelines). Lap theglass fabric on itself and on adjoining pipe insulation.

5. Option: Factory premolded PVC fitting covers may be used. Premolded covers shalloverlap the adjoining pipe insulation and jackets and shall be secured at all edges withvapor barrier adhesive on cold pipes. Secure ends of all covers with pressure sensitivevinyl tape which shall overlap both the jacket and the cover at least 1”. On fittings wheretemperature exceeds 250 degrees F., two layers of insulation shall be applied with a fewwrappings of twine on the first layer to eliminate any voids or hot spots.

END OF SECTION

INTERIOR PROCESS VALVES 462012-1 TOWN BRANCH WWTP THICKENING

SECTION 462012 - INTERIOR PROCESS VALVES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Provide all labor, materials, equipment and services required to furnish and install all newvalves as shown on the Drawings and/or specified herein.


A. Interior Process Piping: Section 462010

B. Valve Actuators: Section 330933

C. Valves furnished with equipment are included with equipment specifications.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Descriptive literature, catalog cuts, and dimensional prints clearly indicating all dimensionsand materials of construction, shall be submitted on all items specified herein to the Engineerfor review before ordering. Comply with provisions of Section 013323.

B. At the time of submission, the Contractor shall, in writing, call Engineer’s attention to anydeviations that the submittals may have from the requirements of the Engineer’s ContractDrawings and Specifications.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 PLUG VALVES

A. All plug valves shall be eccentric plug valves unless otherwise specified.

B. Valves shall be of the non-lubricated eccentric type with flanged ends faced and drilled perANSI B16.1 125 lb.

C. Valve bodies shall be flushing body type and made of ASTM A126 Class B cast iron. Valvesshall be furnished with a 1/8" welded overlay seat of not less than 95% pure nickel. Seatarea shall be raised, with raised surface completely covered with weld to insure that the plugface contacts only nickel. Screwed-in seats shall not be acceptable.

D. Plugs shall be made of ductile iron and have a cylindrical seating surface eccentrically offsetfrom the center of the plug shaft. The interference between the plug face and body seat, withthe plug in the closed position, shall be externally adjustable in the field with the valve in theline under pressure. Plug shall be resilient faced with neoprene or hycar, suitable for usewith sewage.

E. Valves shall have replaceable sleeve type bearings and grit seals at the upper and lowerjournals.

F. Valve shaft seals shall be of the multiple V-ring type and shall be externally adjustable andrepackable without removing the bonnet or actuator from the valve under pressure. Valvesutilizing O-ring seals or non-adjustable packing shall not be acceptable.


G. Valve pressure ratings shall be 175 psi through 12" and 150 psi for 14" through 72". Eachvalve shall be given a hydrostatic and seat test with test results being certified when requiredby the specifications.

H. Manually operated valves 4-inch and larger shall have a worm gear actuator, stainless steelinput shaft and handwheel operator. Manually operated valves 3-inch and smaller shall havea lever operator. All gearing shall be enclosed in a semi-steel housing and be suitable forrunning in a lubricant with seals provided on all shafts to prevent entry of dirt and water intothe actuator. The actuator shaft shall be stainless steel and the quadrant shall be supportedon permanently lubricated bronze bearings. Actuators shall clearly indicate valve positionand an adjustable stop shall be provided to set closing torque and to provide seat adjustmentto compensate for change in pressure differential or flow direction change. All exposed nuts,bolts and washers shall be stainless steel.

I. Any cylinder actuators shall be equipped with 2-inch square operating nuts to allow manualvalve operation in case of supply failure. Electric motor actuated valves shall comply withspecification.

J. Valves shall provide drip tight shutoff up to the full pressure rating. Valves shall be providedwith adjustable limit stops and rotate 90 degrees from fully opened to fully closed.

K. Valves located 6 feet or more above the floor shall be furnished with chain wheel operators.

L Valves shall have rectangular port openings for throttling service, and shall open to 100% ofthe corresponding pipe diameter.

M. Plug valves shall be as manufactured by Golden Anderson or DeZurik.

2.02 GATE VALVES

A. Gate valves 4" and larger shall conform with AWWA C-509 standard, and shall be of theresilient seat type, iron body, fully bronze mounted, non-rising stem and have a designworking pressure of 200 psi. Valves shall be of standard manufacturer and of the highestquality both as to materials and workmanship.

B. Valves ends shall be flanged and shall conform to ANSI B16.1 class 125 and be handwheeloperated, unless otherwise shown on the Drawings or specified hereinafter.

C. An epoxy coating conforming to AWWA C-550 shall be applied to the interior and exteriorferrous surfaces of the valve except for finished or seating surfaces.

D. All gate valves shall have the name or monogram of the manufacturer, the year the valvecasting was made, the size of the valve, and the working water pressure cast on the body ofthe valve.

E. Gate valves shall be as manufactured by Mueller Co., M&H, Clow, American Valve &Hydrant, Kennedy, or equal.

2.03 CHECK VALVES

A. The valve is a counterweighted, rubber seated check valve with attached cushion chamberwhose function is to permit flow in only one direction, close tightly when its discharge sidepressure exceeds its inlet pressure, and to close without a slam or bang.

B. The swing check valve shall be constructed with heavy cast iron or cast steel body with abronze or stainless steel seat ring, a non-corrosive shaft for attachment of weight and lever,and complete non-corrosive shockless chamber.


C. It shall absolutely prevent the return of water, oil or gas back through the valve when the inletpressure decreases below the delivery pressure. The valve must be tight seating, and mustbe shockless in operation. The seat ring must be renewable.

D. The cushion chamber shall be attached to the side of the valve body externally and soconstructed with a piston operating in a chamber that will effectively permit the valve to beoperated without any hammering action. The shock absorption shall be by air, and thecushion chamber shall be so arranged that the closing speed will be adjustable to meet theservice requirements.

E. The valve disc shall be of cast iron or cast steel and shall be suspended from a non-corrosiveshaft which will pass through a stuffing box and be connected to the cushion chamber on theoutside of the valve.

F. All material and workmanship shall be first class throughout and the purchaser reserves theright to inspect this valve before shipment.

G. The valves will be Golden-Anderson Industries, Inc. Fig. No. 250-D, 125# or equal.

2.04 VALVE OPERATORS

A. Valve operators shall be as shown on the plans and specified herein and in Section 330933.Special operators where shown on the plans shall be furnished under this item and Section330933. Valves shall be positioned to provide for the most convenient position of theactuator possible.

B. Valves located six (6) feet or more from floor level shall be furnished with chain wheeloperators or chainlevel operators. Chains shall extend to within four (4) feet off the floor. AllNRS floor stands and geared operators shall be indicating type.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. All valves shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations.

END OF SECTION

IN-LINE GRINDER 462423-1 TOWN BRANCH WWTP THICKENING

SECTION 462423 – IN-LINE GRINDER

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Provide all labor, materials, equipment and service required to furnish and install each in-linegrinding equipment specified herein and as shown on the Drawings.

B. The in-line grinders, model 30004T-1206-DI, and motor controllers, PC2200, shall be asmanufactured by JWC Environmental.


A. Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples: Section 013323

B. Operations & Maintenance Manuals: Section 017823

C. Concrete: Section 033100

D. Electrical: Sections in Division 26

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Descriptive literature, catalog cuts, dimension prints, shop drawings, installation, operationand maintenance instructions shall be submitted to the Engineer for review before shipment.The data shown on the shop drawings shall be completed with respect to dimensions,materials of construction, wiring diagrams, and the like, to enable the Engineer to review theinformation as required.

B. At the time of submission, the Contractor shall, in writing, call the Engineer's attention to anydeviations that the drawings may have from the requirements of the Engineer's specifications.

C. Comply with the provisions of Section 013323 and Section 017823.

1.04 GUARANTY

A. The Contractor shall guarantee and warrant that the equipment furnished and installed is freefrom defects of design, material and workmanship, and will operate satisfactorily. In theevent the equipment fails to perform as specified, and after the Owner has given due notice,the Contractor or Supplier, at their own expanse, shall promptly repair or replace thedefective equipment without any additional cost to the Owner.

B. The guaranty period shall be as set forth in specification Section 011400 General Provision.In the event that the manufacturer’s guarantee period exceeds that as stated in the GeneralProvisions, the manufacturer’s guarantee period will stay in effect and shall not be replacedby that previously stated.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL

A. Each in-line grinder shall be capable of processing 300 gpm in a 6” diameter pipeline.

2.02 GRINDER(S)

A. GENERAL


1. Each grinder shall include cutters, spacers, shafts, bearings and seals, in-line housingwith pipe flanges, inspection ports, cutter stack, reducer, and motor.

2. The cutter cartridge and drive assembly shall be removable from the main housing as acomplete assembly without further disassembly. The components of that assemblyinclude cutters, spacers, shafts, reducer, motor, bearings, and seals.

3. The grinder shall be of two (2) -shaft design and be capable of continuous operation,processing wet or dry. Grinders designed with cutter and spacer cartridges rather thanindividual cutters and spacers, shall not be acceptable. Single shaft devices utilizing asingle rotating cutter bar with stationary cutters shall not be acceptable.

4. Two-shaft design shall consist of two parallel shafts alternately stacked with individualintermeshing cutters and spacers positioned on the shaft to form a helical pattern. Thetwo shafts shall counter-rotate with the driven shaft operating at approximately two-thirds(2/3) the speed of the drive shaft.

B. COMPONENTS

1. Individual Cutters and Spacers

a. The cutting chamber shall be a nominal height of 12 inches.

b. Individual cutters and spacers shall be 4130 heat treated alloy steel, surface groundfor uniformity and through-hardened to a minimum 45-50 Rockwell C.

c. The inside configuration of both the individual cutters and the individual spacers shallbe hexagonal so as to fit the shafts with a total clearance not to exceed 0.015 inch(0.38 mm) across the flats to assure positive drive, minimize wear on the cutters, andincrease the compressive strength of the spacers.

d. Cutter configuration shall consist of individual 11 tooth cam cutters on both shafts.To maintain particle size, the height of the tooth shall not exceed 1/2 inch (13 mm)above the root diameter. Cutter to cutter root diameter overlap shall be not less than1/16 inch (1.6 mm) or greater than 1/4 inch (6 mm) to maintain the best possiblecutting efficiency while incurring the least amount of frictional losses. Clearancebetween overlapping cutters of opposing shafts shall be no greater than 0.011 inches(0.28 mm).

e. The cutters shall exert a minimum force at the tooth tip of 2,051 lbs./hp (12,235N/kW) during momentary load peaks.

2. Shafts

a. Grinder drive and driven shafts shall be made of 4140 heat treated hexagon steelwith a tensile strength rating of not less than 149,000 psi (1,027 kPa).

b. Each hexagonal shaft shall measure a nominal two (2) inches (51 mm) acrossparallel surfaces.

3. Intermediate Shaft Support

a. An intermediate shaft support shall be provided in the center of the cutter stack for allgrinders with 24 inch (610 mm) cutter stacks.

b. The intermediate shaft support shall provide additional support for heavier thannormal influent grinder demand loads and protection for the seal assemblies.


c. The intermediate shaft support shall be made of a cast 303 stainless steel collar andtwo (2) bushings. The bushings shall act as bearings to allow the free rotation of theshafts.

4. Main Housing and Covers

a. The main housing shall be a solid cast structure made of A536-84 ductile iron. Theone-piece flanged body shall be capable of remaining in-line if removal of the cuttercartridge and drive assembly is required for service.

b. The inside profile of the main housing shall be concave to follow the radial arc of thecutters. To direct larger particles toward the cutters and assure fineness of grind, themain housing shall maintain a clearance not to exceed 5/16 inch (8 mm) between themajor diameter of the cutter and the concave arc of the housing.

c. The main housing shall be provided with a covered access port for equipmentinspection. Inspection port covers shall be A536-84 ductile iron.

5. Shaft Bearings and Seals

a. The radial and axial loads of the cutter shafts shall be borne by sealed, oversized,deep-groove ball bearings at each end.

b. The bearings shall be protected by a combination of a replaceable and independenttortuous path device and mechanical seals.

c. Face materials shall be tungsten carbide to tungsten carbide.

d. O-rings shall be made of Buna-N elastomers.

e. Products requiring continuous or occasional lubrication or flushing shall not beaccepted.

f. The mechanical seal shall be rated at 90 psi (620 kPa) continuous duty by the sealsupplier.

g. The bearings shall be housed in a replaceable cartridge that supports and aligns thebearings and seals, as well as protects the shafts and end housings. The sealelements shall be independent of the stack height, therefore cutter stack tightnessshall not affect seal performance. The seal elements shall maintain their factory setpreload independent of the cutter stack tightness.

h. Seals shall meet required pressure rating regardless of cutter stack fit. The sealcartridge shall provide seal protection against axial loading on shafts and bearingsduring shaft deflection.

i. Each seal element shall be positively locked to its corresponding rotating or staticcartridge element. This positive lock on the seal elements is critical to long seal life inapplications where grit or other abrasive materials are present.

6. Gear Housing and Cover

a. The gear housing shall be provided with a covered access port for cutter stacktightening.

b. The gear housing shall be A536-84 ductile iron.

c. The cutter stack tightening cover shall be A36 carbon steel.

7. Reducer


a. The speed reducer shall be a grease-filled planetary-type of reducer with a 500%shock load capacity. The reduction ratio shall be 29:1.

b. The input shaft of the reducer shall be directly coupled to the motor using a three (3)-piece coupling, and the output shaft of the reducer shall be directly coupled with thegrinder using a two (2)-piece coupling.

8. Motor

a. The motor shall be 3 hp (2.2 kW), TEFC, 1,725 rpm, 460 volt,3 phase, 60 Hz.

b. Motor service factor shall be 1.15, the efficiency factor not less than 85% at full loadand the power factor not less than 75% at full load.

c. Required Running Torque per Horsepower (kW):

d. At Momentary Load Peaks: 4,752 in-lbs/hp (721-Nm/kW)

2.03 MOTOR CONTROLLER

A. GENERAL

1. The controller shall provide independent control of the grinder.

2. Controller shall be the supplier's standard UL/cUL listed Model PC2200.

3. The controller shall be rated for 3 hp (2.2 kW), 460 volts, 3 phase, 60Hz.

B. OPERATION

1. The controller shall be equipped with a GRINDER ON-OFF/RESET-REMOTE-three (3)position selector switch.

a. In the ON position the grinder will run.

b. In the OFF/RESET position the grinder shall not run.

c. In the REMOTE position, the grinder shall start and stop as controlled by an externaldevice.

d. The grinder shall only be reset by switching the GRINDER ON-OFF/RESET-REMOTE switch to the OFF/RESET position.

C. COMPONENTS

1. Enclosure

a. Enclosures shall be NEMA 4X, fabricated of fiberglass-reinforced polyester resins,and shall be suitable for wall mounting. Doors shall have hinges and corrosion-resistant latches.

b. Enclosure shall house the control devices, relays, terminal blocks and reversingmotor starters.

2. Control Devices

a. Pilot devices shall be mounted on the enclosure front panel door.

b. The controller shall have indicator lights for POWER ON, RUN, and FAIL.


c. Indicator lights shall be LED type pilot lights. Lights and the selector switches shallbe heavy duty NEMA 4X type.

d. Control transformer shall be protected by two (2) primary fuses and one (1)secondary fuse. The 120 volt secondary shall have one (1) leg grounded.

e. Relay contacts shall be included for GRINDER run and FAIL signal outputs. Thecontacts shall be rated two (2) ampere, 240 VAC, resistive load.

3. Motor Starter

a. Starter shall be a full-voltage reversing type with 120 volt operating coils.

b. Forward and reverse contactors on the starters shall have both mechanical andelectrical interlocks.

c. Overload relays (OL) shall be adjustable so that the range selected includes the FLA(full load amperes) rating and service factor.

D. SAFETY FEATURES

1. When a grinder jam condition occurs in the grinder ON mode the controller shall stop thegrinder and reverse grinder rotation to clear the obstruction. If the jam is cleared, thecontroller shall return the grinder to normal operation. Up to two (2) additional reversingcycles (3 times total) may occur within 30 seconds before the controller de-energizes thegrinder motor and activates the grinder fail indicator and relay.

2. If a power failure occurs while a grinder is running, operation will resume when power isrestored.

3. If a power failure occurs while the grinder is in a fail condition the fail indicator shallreactivate when power is restored.

4. The controller shall provide overload protection for the motor through an overload relaymounted directly on the grinder starter.

5. Short-circuit protection requires that a properly-sized circuit breaker or fuses be installedby others.

6. Controller reset shall be from the local panel controls only.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. The in-line grinding equipment shall be installed and placed into service in accordance withthe manufacturer's recommendations.

3.02 MANUFACTURERS SERVICES

A. The Contractor shall include with his bid the services of the Equipment Manufacturer's fieldservice technician.

B. This service shall be for the purposes of check-out, initial start-up certification, and instructionof plant personnel.

C. A written report covering the technician's findings and installation approval shall be submittedto the Engineer covering all inspections and outlining in detail any deficiencies noted.


END OF SECTION

4649-01 RADIAL FLOW CARBON ADSORBER 463220-1

SECTION 463220 - RADIAL FLOW CARBON ADSORBER

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE

A. This section includes the work necessary to furnish and install, complete, one radial flowactivated carbon-based odor control system. This system shall be located as indicated on theContract Drawings and shall serve the Source, as shown on the Drawings.

B. The system shall include the following components:

1. Carbon Adsorber Vessel

2. Media

3. Fan and Motor Assembly

4. Instruments

5. Interconnecting Ductwork

6. Guardian Prefilter

7. Fan Acoustic / Weather Enclosure

8. System Accessories

1.02 REFERENCES

A. ASTM International

1. D2563, Standard Practice for Classifying Visual Defects in Glass Reinforced PlasticLaminate Parts.

2. D2584, Standard Test Method for Ignition Loss of Cured Reinforced Resins.

3. D2854, Standard Test Method for Apparent Density of Activated Carbon.

4. D 2867, Standard Test Methods for Moisture in Activated Carbon.

5. D3299, Standard Specifications for Filament-Wound Glass-Fiber-Reinforced ThermosetResin Corrosion-Resistant Tanks.

6. D3467, Standard Test Method for Carbon Tetrachloride Activity of Activated Carbon.

7. D3802, Standard Test Method for Ball-Pan Hardness for Activated Carbon.

8. D4097, Standard Specification for contact-molded glass-fiber-reinforced Thermoset ResinCorrosion-Resistant Tanks.

9. D3982, flanges

B. National Bureau of Standards (NBS) PS 15-69, Custom molded reinforced polyester forchemical resistant process equipment


1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Vendor shall provide a detailed engineering submittal for the proposed equipment. All materialscontained in the packaged must be specific to addressing items below, submittals that includeany general data sheets or general marketing material will be rejected without review.Submittals shall include:

1. General Specification Compliance Document

a. A copy of this specification with a notation beside each line item confirming complianceor any deviations / exceptions. Any deviations or exceptions should be clearlyexplained in a separate section of the submittal. If any items are not found to beaddressed during an engineer review the submittal will be rejected.

b. Designer’s resume showing 10 years of experience in radial flow dry media systemdesign. Experience shall be specific to process design and not manufacturing FRPvessels for this application.

c. Installation list with engineering data for each individual reference and contactinformation. All references will be checked.

2. Vessel, Isolation valve and Interconnecting Ductwork:

a. Provide structural calculations, including material property test data.

b. Vessel fabrication details and materials of the components shall be included in shopdrawings, and submitted for approval before fabrication.

c. Vessel design calculations stamped by a professional engineer.

d. Resin manufacturer’s certificate listing the nomenclature, composition, andcharacteristics of the resin shall be furnished for all major components including thevessel, dampers and ductwork. This should include a letter from the resin manufacturerstating recommended corrosion liner for service outlined in this specification.

e. AMCA certified pressure drop and leakage tests for the vessel isolation damperaccompanied by a letter confirming the product has current AMCA certification.

f. Vessel fabricator’s certificate of compliance with fabrication requirements.

g. Copy of fabricator’s quality assurance (QA) program.

h. Detailed information on the internal media retention system to include free areacalculations, construction data, baffling system and compaction compensation calcs.Calculations shall be supported by detailed CFD modeling.

i. 12” x 12” sample of the proposed carbon retention system

3. Prefilter

a. Detailed drawing showing wall construction, pad construction details, end connectionsand access configuration.

b. Installation instructions and O&M Data

c. Detailed removal and performance calculations


d. List of twenty previous installations where a similar prefilter has been utilized by thesystem supplier complete with names and contact numbers.

e. Detailed pressure drop and removal calculations for the prefilter.

4. Media:

a. Furnish with 60 days after contract execution, a certificate from the media manufacturercertifying that the proposed media will meet the specifications. Provide a 1-gallonrepresentative carbon sample of each media and specification sheet.

b. Statement of origin and manufacturers test data noting lot numbers. Submitted lotnumbers shall be confirmed with actual material delivered. Private labeled media is notacceptable.

c. Media manufacturer’s certificate to include statement of origin and test results.

5. Catalog information, descriptions, specifications layouts, sketches and other informationsufficient to clearly and readily demonstrate compliance with all parts of the specificationsand drawings.

6. Dimensional and weight information. Include empty weight and operating weight withcarbon.

7. A list of twenty installations where similar radial flow equipment by the manufacturer iscurrently in service; include contact name, telephone number, mailing address, and thenames of the engineer, owner, and installation contractor. All references will be checked.

8. CFD (Computational fluid dynamic) modeling of the proposed radial flow model showingairflow distribution through the air plenum and media consumption. Modeling shall beperformed utilizing ANSYS software, solidworks modeling is not acceptable.

9. Resin manufacturer’s certificate listing the nomenclature, composition, and characteristicsof the resin shall be furnished for all major components including the vessel, dampers andductwork. This should include a letter from the resin manufacturer stating recommendedcorrosion liner for service outlined in this specification.

10. Special shipping, storage, and protection, and handling instruct ruction.

11. Suggested spare parts list to maintain the equipment in service for a period of 1 year.

B. Comply with the provisions of Section 013323 and Section 017823.

1.04 EXPERIENCE QUALIFICATIONS

A. Vendor shall have a minimum of 10-years’ experience in the design and manufacture of radialflow dry media systems, and have at least 20 systems equal or larger to the specified airflowin operation. At least one reference shall have been in operation for a minimum of ten years.In each case, vendor shall prove that they were responsible for process design. The list shouldinclude location, contact information, airflow, date installed. All installations will be contactedand confirmed to be radial flow design. Vendors who’s primary business is the manufacture offiberglass components are not acceptable.


A. The system supplier shall be experience in radial flow adsorption systems in wastewatertreatment plant order control applications, demonstrating at least 10 years’ experience.Experience shall be based on the company and not any individual.


B. Fabricator’s QA Supervisor: Minimum of 10 years’ experience in fabrication of fiberglassstructures, and carbon based odor control systems.

C. Designer: Registered professional engineer with a minimum of 10 years of experience in thedesign of odor control systems.

1.06 GUARANTY

A. The Contractor shall guarantee and warrant that the equipment furnished and installed is freefrom defects of design, material and workmanship, and will operate satisfactorily. In the eventthe equipment fails to perform as specified, and after the Owner has given due notice, theContractor or Supplier, at their own expanse, shall promptly repair or replace the defectiveequipment without any additional cost to the Owner.

B. The guaranty period shall be as set forth in specification Section 011400 General Provision. Inthe event that the manufacturer’s guarantee period exceeds that as stated in the GeneralProvisions, the manufacturer’s guarantee period will stay in effect and shall not be replaced bythat previously stated.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL

A. The system supplier shall furnish all of the items required to provide a properly functioningsystem for the service conditions listed herein, including but not limited to the vessels, media,fan, controls, interconnecting ductwork, prefilter, exhaust stack, inlet damper, interconnectingductwork, inlet / outlet flexible connectors for the fan and all appurtenances necessary for acomplete system. Basis of design is the VX-5500 from ECS Environmental Solutions.

B. The products shall be the end products of one responsible system supplier in order to achievestandardization of appearance, operation, maintenance, spare parts, and manufacturer’sservices. Acceptable suppliers of the full packaged system include ECS EnvironmentalSolutions of Belton TX or EcoVerde Odor Control Technologies, Tempe Arizona, ECSEnvironmental Solutions, or Engineer approved equal.

2.02 SERVICE CONDITIONS

A. The odor control system shall be designed to remove the odorous constituents from theprocess air stream under the following operating conditions:

Process Parameter Value

Duty Continuous

Inlet Air Temp 0 to 120 degrees F

Inlet Relative Humidity 30% to 90%

Designed system airflow 5500

Removal Required H2S: 99 % removalOdor Units (OU): 90% removal

B. The vessels shall conform to the following parameters:

Process Parameter Value

Vessel Type (both systems) Radial Flow

Vessel Material of Construction FRP

Pressure Drop (Max) Vessel (Inlet to Outlet): 6” w.c.


Media volume (Min) 330 cf

Max Avg Bed Velocity 60

Vessel Inside Diameter 96”

2.03 ADSORBER VESSEL AND DUCTWORK

A. The INSULATED FRP adsorber vessels shall be filament-wound, manufactured in accordancewith ASTM D3299. The visual defects, per ASTM D2563, shall not exceed Level II on the vesselinterior and Level III on the vessel exterior. The resin used shall be Dow 510, AOC K022, orapproved equal suitable for continuous exposure to saturated water vapor, hydrogen sulfidegas, and their associated acidic products. The resin system should provide a class 1 flamespread rating. Antimony, Nyacol or any other additives are not allowed. A permanent waxcontaining resin coating, formulated according to the resin manufacturer's most recentrecommendations (or other Engineer-approved method) shall be used for surface protectionand to prevent air inhibition of resin curing. Contact molded accessories shall be manufacturedin accordance with NBS PS15. The completed vessel shall be translucent until it is gel coated.The final gel coat color shall be selected by the owner or engineer. A certificate from the resinmanufacturer listing the nomenclature, composition, and characteristics of the resin shall befurnished with the vessel. Stainless, PVC, HDPE, PP or other non-reinforced plastic vesselswill not be acceptable. Acceptable manufacturers for the FRP vessel are ECS, DiamondFiberglass, Ershigs, Belco, Ancor or engineered prequalified equals.

1. An inner corrosion barrier shall be provided consisting of no less than three laminatedlayers. The inner corrosion layer shall be resin rich, not to exceed 20 percent plus or minus5 percent glass by weight, and a minimum thickness of 10 to 15 mils. The inner corrosionlayer shall be followed by at least two layers of chopped-strand mat or two passes ofchopped roving to a total of 3 ounces per foot. Should the chopped roving technique beemployed, the chopped fibers shall be 1/2 inch to 2 inches in length. The total corrosionbarrier shall total 100 mils minimum and be 27 percent plus or minus 5 percent glass byweight.

2. The structural aspects of the vessel shall be sufficient to meet recommendedrequirements, including seismic requirements for all conditions during the design life.Manufacturer shall include with the shop drawings, detailed calculations illustrating theseismic characteristics of the proposed vessels. Calculations shall be signed andstamped by a registered mechanical engineer.

3. In addition to the above requirements, the adsorber vessel shall have an average glasscontent of 55 percent plus or minus 5 percent by weight per ASTM D2584.

4. Tie down lugs and lifting lugs shall be 316 stainless steel. Quantity and design shall bedetermined in the PE stamped vessel calculations.

5. The adsorber vessel shall be complete with integral carbon screen support structure,access manways, air inlet connection, air outlet, no-loss discharge stack, pressuredifferential assembly, a fill connection, a drain connection, sample port nozzles, 316stainless grounding rod and all necessary accessories as shown on the Drawings and/orspecified within. All exhaust air shall leave the vessel at the top. Provide sufficient accessmanway so that all internal parts can be easily removed from the vessel. All metal partsshall be Type 316 stainless steel with no metallic parts contacting the carbon except forgrounding purposes. No pultruded components shall be used on the interior of the vesselunless they are completely coated with the specified 100-mil corrosion barrier andmanufactured using the specified resin systems.

6. Access manway covers shall be airtight at the pressure equal to or higher than thecorresponding fan static pressure. Poly manways are not acceptable. The fabricationdetails and materials of the components shall be included in shop drawings, and submittedfor approval before fabrication.


7. Vessel shall have an internal slope bottom. Bottom shall be sloped to a drain nozzle at 1/8”per foot in diameter. Low point of the slope shall be raised to ensure full drainage.

8. Vessels shall have a flanged top section to facilitate complete removal of all internalcomponents. Flange shall be design for 12” positive pressure and full hydrostatic loading.

9. Vessel design and airflow configuration shall be furnished to accommodate a cylindrical,vertical carbon bed. Airflow shall be horizontal through the bed.

a. Support system requirements:

1) The bed and vessel configuration is to be conducive to easy carbon replacement.Beds shall have carbon fill / access ports and one access manway placed so man-entry of the vessel is not required.

2) Each vessel shall be provided with two independent internal support columns.

3) Columns shall be manufactured from FRP, 316 Stainless Steel or hastelloy.Unreinforced plastic columns (PVC, PP, HDPE) are not acceptable. Retentionscreen shall inter-wound in the support column so that it cannot be disturbed duringfilling / removal of media. If metal is utilized retention screen shall have anindependent structure on either side.

10. Each bed shall be grounded with a 316 stainless steel rod to prevent static electricityfrom accumulating. A predrilled and tapped copper grounding pad shall be located onexternal vessel walls.

11. All cut-walls from tank wall nozzle cutouts shall be reinforced as required by serviceconditions. Press molded or compression molded flanged nozzles are not acceptable.

12. Add ultraviolet absorbers to surfacing to improve weather resistance.

13. No dyes, pigments or colorants except in exterior gel coating.

14. Vessels shall be factory insulated to prevent condensation. Insulation should consist of 2”rigid foam board covered with a helical wound ¼” thick outer skin. Skin should have at leastone expansion joint to prevent cracking when the vessel expands/contracts.

2.04 TYPE:

A. Product shall be as manufactured by ECS Environmental Solutions.

B. Sufficient activated carbon shall be provided to fill the reactor vessel to the height of the vessel.The activated carbon shall be virgin pelletized activated carbon made from a coconut shell orbituminous coal base. Wood or lignite based carbon is not acceptable. The activated carbonshall be suitable for the vapor phase adsorption of sewage treatment odors. Engineer reservesthe right to have a sample of the delivered carbon tested to confirm material properties andH2S capacity meet the specification. The activated carbon shall have the followingspecifications:

1. Iodine No., mg/g 800 min

2. Butane Activity, weight % 31.4 min

3. Moisture, weight % as packed 4 max

4. Hardness No. 95 min


5. Apparent Density, g/ml 0.44 min

6. Mean Particle Diameter, mm 4 min

7. H2S Breakthrough Capacity, g H2S removed/cc Carbon1 0.3 min

1 The determination of H2S breakthrough capacity will be made by passing a moist ( 85% R.H. )air stream containing 1% H2S at a rate of 1,450 cc/min. through a 1 inch diameter by 9 inch deepbed of uniformly packed activated carbon and monitored to 50 ppm breakthrough. Results areexpressed in grams H2S removed per cc of carbon. Test shall be performed per ASTM Test methodD-6646, without modification or addition.

2.05 FANS

A. The fan shall be a centrifugal industrial FRP fan that meets AMCA requirements. All parts ofthe fan that are exposed to the airstream shall be encapsulated in FRP with graphiteimpregnation to insure corrosion resistance and spark proof operation.

B. All fans shall be equipped with the following features and accessories:

1. Flanged inlet/outlet

2. PVC coupling drain

3. Teflon Shaft Seal

4. Shaft and Belt Guards

5. Constant-speed V-belt drive

6. Inverter duty motor

C. The primary fan shall be rated for 5500 CFM @ 10 w.c.

D. The primary fan motor shall be TEFC heavy duty, with a 1.15 SF, 15 hp, 3-60-230/480 voltinverter duty

E. The backup fan motor shall be TEFC heavy duty, with a 1.15 SF, 5 hp, 3-60-230/480 voltinverter duty

2.06 SOUND ATTENUATION PACKAGE

A. A FRP sound enclosure shall be provided by the system supplier. Construction andperformance shall be as follows:

1. Walls shall be vacuum-formed construction with two layers of FRP over a honey-combcore.

2. Resin, liner, color and exterior coating system shall be the same as specified for theadsorber vessel.

3. Enclosure shall have an exhaust fan with explosion-proof motor and acoustic louverinstalled.

4. Enclosure shall be manufactured so that it can be easily removed for maintenance. Asingle split-line is to be centered on the fan outlet.


5. Enclosure shall be single-piece construction. No seams or joints are allowed. Bolt-togetherkit enclosures are not acceptable.

6. Enclosure shall have 2” of ECS Sound-adsorb lining all internal surfaces.

7. Performance of the enclosure design should produce a 20 Db insertion loss at 3’.

2.07 DUCTWORK, DAMPER, AND FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS

A. The system supplier shall be responsible for supplying an inlet and outlet flexible connector forthe fan, ductwork between the fan outlet and isolation valve on the vessel inlet.

1. Interconnecting ductwork shall be manufactured and designed using the sameconstruction, resin system and finish as the carbon adsorber vessel. All flanges shallbe drilled per ASTM 3982 standards and furnished 316 stainless hardware / EPDMgaskets.

2. Vessel inlet valve shall have an AMCA Certified ultra-low leak isolation damper installed.Acceptable products are the ECS X03, Ershigs type B or Belco 204. Damper shallutilized a PTFE oring to seal. Dampers with a bladder laminated into the body are notacceptable.

3. Flexible connectors shall be W design configuration. Material of construction shall beEPDM and have flanged construction. Backing rings shall be 316 stainless steel. Slip-ontype flexible connectors are not acceptable.

2.08 INSTRUMENTATION

A. Pressure differential instruments shall be provided and include Magnehelic style pressuregauges allowing determination of the pressure loss in inches of water column across thecarbon. The range shall be 0-10 inches of water. Tubing shall be bonded to a solid acrylicplastic block that contains safety traps. Magnehelic shall be Dwyer or equal.

B. Sampling Ports: Each adsorption unit shall have three 2-inch diameter sample ports whichextend into the carbon bed 1 foot minimum, suitable for extracting carbon samples. Provideone grain thief that is capable of extracting a core sample of the in-place carbon through thesample ports. Ports shall be adequate to provide suitable extraction of air samples from thecarbon bed and be nonbinding. Each port nozzle shall extend outside the vessel wall andbe blocked off with a 2-inch ball valve. One additional air sampling port shall be providedabove the carbon bed.

2.09 CONTROLS

A. Control Panel / Motor Starter – The system shall be furnished with a Local Control Panel. Thepanel shall be housed in a NEMA 4X stainless steel enclosure with 3 point latching system.The control panel shall be mounted 3 feet away for any leakage sources.

B. The Local Control Panel shall control the exhaust fan.

1. NEMA 4X SST enclosure with:

a. 480v main circuit breaker

b. Control transformer – 120v

c. Controls/Contacts/Alarms

1) HOA switch for fan


2) Main power disconnect

3) Red “On” pilot light’

4) Dry Contacts for:

a) Exhaust Fan Run

b) Fan Fail

2.10 SYSTEM ACCESSORIES

A. 16 gauge SST name plate with ¼” die-stamped equipment tag number securely mounted in areadily visible location.

B. 316 SST or FRP lifting and anchor lugs

C. Vessel shall be supplied with a Dwyer differential pressure gauge assembly complete withisolation valves.

2.11 PRE-FILTER

A. A prefilter shall be provided to collect airflow, remove moisture / particulate and direct it into afan.

B. Housing: Housing shall be manufactured using fiberglass reinforced plastic. Stainless oralternate plastic materials are not acceptable. Manufacture shall have a minimum of 10 year’experience in the design and supply of similar equipment. Manufacturer shall retain theservices of an independent inspector who is responsible to confirm the prefilter has beenmanufactured in accordance with this specification and all FRP work meets or exceeds ASMERTP-1 level 2 visual inspection criteria.

1. Resin system shall be a corrosion resistant vinyl ester with a class 1 flame spread rating.Acceptable products are AOC K022-AC or Dow Derakane 510-B series. Resin systemshall not require any additives such as nyacol or antimony to achieve the class 1 flamespread rating. Finished laminate including liner and structure shall be translucent.

2. All internal surfaces shall have a 100-mil corrosion liner made up of a single nexus veilfollowed by two layers of 1.5 oz chopped strand matt.

3. All exterior surfaces shall have gelcoat applied. This coating shall contain UV inhibitors,color to be selected by the owner.

4. Housing shall have machined UMHW guides to prevent stainless frame on filter pad fromscratching or damaging the corrosion liner.

5. Filter housing shall be designed for 12” positive and negative pressure with a maximum of1/8” deflection.

6. Housing shall have an access door for pad removal complete with EPDM gasket and 316Stainless hinges / quick latches. For filter housings larger than 3’ across, two access doorsshall be provided. Access doors shall have stainless toggle clamps for easy pad access.Bolt-on access doors are not acceptable. Plastic clamps are not acceptable.

7. Housing shall be provided with a 2” drain connection at the base, and come from themanufacturer complete with ball valve. Drain shall direct liquid from a 2” diameter basesump extending the width of the housing to a point where the effluent can be handled.External drain piping shall have a water trap, no valves are allowed.


8. For installation, housing shall have (2) 8” diameter FRP legs. Length of legs shall becoordinated with the contactor. Housing shall be supported by these legs independent ofthe connecting ductwork, anchored with stainless steel HILTI bolts.

9. Housing shall have a differential gauge bracket and be supplied with a dwyer magnehlicpressure gauge and connections for gauge on either side of filter pad. Unit shall comecomplete from the factory with all DP equipment pre-assembled and installed.

10. Filter pad

11. Pad shall have 2” of stainless mesh followed by 4” of poly mesh. Mesh shall be heldtogether by a stainless steel frame. Total pad width including pads and frame shall be 8”.

12. Maximum pad segment width of pads is 24”. Pads larger than 24” wide must be segmentedto allow easy removal by the owner. Segment width should not exceed 24”

C. Dimensions / Design:

1. End connections shall be sized for a maximum air velocity of 2500 f/m. Flange dimensionsshall match the connecting ductwork. Flange thickness shall not be less than that listed inASTM 3982.

2. Inlet cone shall be designed so that the airstream can spread evenly over the pad surface.Cone angle shall be no less than 60 deg.

3. Housing shall be sized so that air velocity through the filter pad is 400 f/m.

4. Particle removal efficiency shall be 99% of particles 10 microns or larger.

2.12 PIPE INSULATION

Where indicated on the Contract Drawings or stated in the specifications, process piping shallbe provided with insulation.

A. Insulation shall be one-piece fiberglass section insulation (K=0.23 at 75 degrees F.) with factoryapplied white reinforced kraft/foil vapor barrier jacket. Longitudinal jacket laps and butt jointsshall be self-sealing using 3” wide lap strips. Insulation shall be one of the following:

1. Johns-Manville “Flame Safe AP-T 500 degrees F.”

2. Owens/Corning “Fiberglass 25 ASJ/SSL”.

3. Certainteed “Fiberglass 500 Degree Snap-On”.

Insulation shall be 1” thick, minimum.

B. Finishing Materials:

1. Acceptable manufacturers, insulating cement:

a. Johns-Mansville No. 375.

b. 48 Insulations “Quik-Set”.

c. Rockwood Mfg. Co. “Delta-Maid One Shot”.

2. Acceptable manufacturers, breather mastic:


a. Benjamin Foster “Sealfas 30-36”.

b. Insul-Coustic “Permsure IC-102”.

c. Vimasco No. 713.

d. Childers “Chil-Seal CP-50”.

e. Epolux “Cadalog 336”.

3. Acceptable manufacturers, PVC premolded covers:

a. Johns-Manville “Zeston”.

b. Ceel-Co.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 FACTORY TESTING

A. All equipment shall be factory tested for compliance with the requirements specified herein.In addition, a full hydrostatic atmospheric leak test (zero leakage allowed). Hydro test shallbe witnessed by an independent inspector.

3.02 FUNCTIONAL TESTING

A. Functional testing shall be conducted after the installation of the carbon vessels and allappurtenances and the equipment has been operated for a sufficient period to make anycorrections or adjustments. Each carbon vessel shall be subject to field functional testsunder actual operating conditions to determine that operation is satisfactory and incompliance with the Specifications.

B. The Contractor will provide, calibrate, and install all temporary gauges and meters, andinstall all temporary piping and wiring required for the functional tests.

C. The functional tests shall include the following:

1. Alignment: Test complete assemblies for correct and proper alignment and connection,and quite operation

2. Flow Throughput: Measured by system or temporary instrumentation.

3. Discharge and Inlet Static Pressure: Measured by system instrumentation or temporarymeasurement devices.

4. Test all system components for proper adjustment and operation in both manual andautomatic operating modes.

5. Prior to filling the vessel with carbon the contractor (under direction of the system supplier)shall run a full water regeneration cycle. The system shall prove to be functional, no leaksare allowed.

D. System Start-up

1. Shall be performed by qualified representative of the manufacture.


3.03 MANUFACTURER’S SERVICES

A. Factory Technician: Present at Site and/or classroom designated by Owner for minimumperson-days listed below.

1. Three person-days for installation assistance.

2. One person-days for inspection, functional testing, and completion of Manufacturer’sCertificate of Proper Installation.

3. One person-day for system review, supplemental training and a complete PM one-yearafter acceptance.

END OF SECTION

GRAVITY THICKENER 467113-1 TOWN BRANCH WWTP THICKENING

SECTION 467113 - GRAVITY THICKENER EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 DESCRIPTION

A. Number of Mechanisms: (2)

Diameter of Basin: 34 feet, see Drawings.

B. Each mechanism shall be suitable for installation in the existing concrete basin as shown onthe contract drawings. Each mechanism shall be a center column supported, center feed unitwith peripheral effluent collection. A center drive mechanism shall be provided for rotation ofthe rake arms and scum skimming mechanism.

C. The equipment shall be designed to effectively thicken settled primary and/or secondary sludgeand scrape the settled solids from the basin floor to the sludge withdrawal sump as shown onthe drawings. The clarified effluent shall be collected uniformly by the peripheral launder.Surface scum shall be collected by the scum skimming equipment and discharged through thescum withdrawal pipe.

D. The equipment furnished for each thickener mechanism shall include, but not be limited to, thefollowing: walkway with handrails, center drive assembly, center drive platform, center supportcolumn with inlet openings, feedwell, center cage, sludge collection arms with rake blades,surface scum skimming equipment, anchor bolts and assembly fasteners, spare parts, [effluentweir plates and scum baffle].

E. Except where specifically indicated otherwise, all plates and structural members designated forsubmerged service shall have a minimum thickness of 1/4 inch. All structural steel will conformto ASTM A-36 requirements and steel plate will conform to ASTM A283C requirements. Allanchor bolts and assembly fasteners shall be 304 SS. Handrail, skimmer, and rake bladesqueegee fasteners shall be 304 stainless steel.


A. CONCRETE 033100

B. FINISHES 099610

C. ELECTRICAL Division 26

D. INSTRUMENTATION Division 40

1.03 PROCESS REQUIREMENTS (Each Unit)

A. Design average flow 150 gpm

B. Design peak flow 150 gpm

C. Drive continuous torque 16,000 ft-lbs at 0.09 rpm

E. Drive momentary peak torque 68,000 ft-lbs

F. Mechanism rotation Clockwise

G. Rake arm tip speed, constant 8 – 10 ft/min


1.04 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS

Basin diameter 34 feet

Side water depth 12 feet

Tank freeboard 3 feet

Floor slope 1/4

Center support column diameter 18”

Center influent pipe diameter 8”

Feedwell diameter 8’-0

Feedwell submerged depth 4'-0"

Feedwell scum ports two (2)

Cage minimum size 2’-10" square

Rake arm minimum size 2’-10" square

[Full Radius Scum Trough]

1.05 FIELD SERVICE REQUIREMENTS

A. Number of eight-hour days (4)

B. Number of trips to jobsite (4)

1.06 REFERENCES

A. American Society of Testing Materials (ASTM):

1. A36 Structural Steel Specifications

2. A992 Structural Steel Specifications

3. 304 Bolt Specifications

4. A325 Fastener Specifications

5. A123 Hot-Dip Galvanized Coatings

6. A153 Hot-Dip Galvanized Bolts

7. A48 Cast Iron Specifications

8. A536 Ductile Iron Specifications

9. A283C Steel Plate Specifications

B. American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI), Heat Treated Steel Specifications

C. American Gear Manufacturers' Association (AGMA), Gear Ratings


D. American Welding Society (AWS), Current Standards

E. Anti-friction Bearing Manufacturers' Association (AFBMA), Bearing Life Specifications

F. National Electrical Manufacturer's Association (NEMA), Motor Design Standards andStandards for Control Enclosures


A. The thickener equipment manufacturer shall modify their standard equipment to meet theminimum values specified for dimensions, design, and the intent of this specification.

B. The thickener equipment shall be manufactured by Ovivo, USA, or Evoqua.

C. Manufacturers regularly engaged in the manufacture of the thickener equipment as specifiedherein and who can demonstrate equipment of this specified design, in actual service for aperiod of not less than 10 years will be considered as acceptable manufacturers.

D. Manufacturers shall show evidence of quality assurance in manufacturing and supplyingequipment essential in details to the equipment herein specified.

1.08 SUBMITTALS

A. Descriptive literature, catalog cuts, dimension prints, shop drawings, installation, operation andmaintenance instructions shall be submitted to the Engineer for review before shipment. Thedata shown on the shop drawings shall be completed with respect to dimensions, materials ofconstruction, wiring diagrams, and the like, to enable the Engineer to review the information asrequired.



1.09 GUARANTY



1.10 DELIVERY

A. Fabricated assemblies shall be shipped in the largest sections permitted by carrier regulationsand properly match-marked for ease of field erection.

B. Components shall be erected immediately upon receipt from the thickener manufacturer orstored in strict conformance with storage recommendations provided by the thickenermanufacturer in the operations and maintenance manual.


C. The mechanism shall be lubricated in strict accordance with the instructions of the thickenermanufacturer's field service representative. The required lubricants shall be provided by thecontractor.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL

Each thickener mechanism shall be of the center-drive type, supported on a stationary influentcolumn, with the flow entering at the bottom of the influent column and flowing upward to theinlet openings located at liquid level. The thickener shall be designed to remove sludgeuniformly from the bottom of the tank.

A. Drive Mechanism: The center drive assembly mounted to the center pier shall consist of a castiron turntable base with ball race, and an internal forged steel spur gear designed such that thegear and precision bearing balls can be removed for service or replaced without removing theaccess bridge, gear housing, or disconnecting the drive cage, and anything attached theretofrom the drive assembly. All repairs or replacement of drive components can be performedwithout dewatering the collector basin or disrupting the flow through the basin. All work can beperformed with the aid of only a portable hoist with no more than a one (1) ton capacity.

B. The main gear shall be an internal cut spur gear which shall be of AISI 1045 forged steel,hardened to 280 to 320 BHN, having a 99,000 psi yield strength. The main gear shall haveteeth with a diametric pitch and length to produce up to 43,000 ft.-lbs. continuous operatingtorque as calculated by AGMA 218.01. The gear shall have a minimum 35.0" pitch diameter.The gear teeth shall be stressed to no more than the allowable bending stress at the continuousrated output torque. Life factors should be based on 1 million load cycles.

C. Main gear shall be supported by a 4-point precision bearing with 40inch pitch diameter and 11 ¼ inch diameter bearing balls.

D. A separate circular cast iron load and torque transfer ring with heavy cast iron mounting padsfor the drive cage frame shall be bolted to the inner rotating race of the gear / bearing. Eachof the four (4) mounting pads shall have provision for four (4) 3/4” dia. fasteners.

E. The main gear housing shall be a heavy casting of high strength Class 40B gray iron. Thehousing shall be adequately proportioned and stiffened to support the entire rotating weight ofthe mechanism, the access bridge, and all possible dead and live loads anticipated for the lifeof the equipment. The housing shall be circular in shape to conform to the general geometryof the spur gear bearing and load plate, and shall provide containment for the oil bath lubricationof the spur gear and bearing.

F. The main gear housing shall be fitted with an oil fill port and an oil level sight glass. A drainshall be provided to assure the complete removal of spent oil and condensate from the housing.The center opening of the housing shall provide easy access to the oil and condensate drain.The main base housing shall be machined for a minimum of eight (8) 1” dia. mounting / levelingall-thread rods.

G. The spur gear shall be driven by an internal pinion. The pinion shall be machined from AISIType 4140 alloy steel, quenched and tempered to 350 to 400 BHN hardness. The pinion shallbe keyed to and driven by a low speed shaft mounted between bearing assemblies to offsetthe overhung load produced by gear meshing.

H. The intermediate gear reducer housing shall be constructed of SAE Class 30 gray cast iron.Gears shall be manufactured from case hardened steel and hardened to 58-62 Rockwell C.All gear teeth are shaved or ground to ensure accurate tooth profile. Minimum 95% gearefficiency shall be achieved regardless of ratio. The bearings shall be of ABEC-1 tolerance


class. The shafting shall be of SAE 1045 steel or equivalent. The shaft seals shall be of Nitrile(Buna-N) rubber with double lip on the output seal. The reducer shall be rated for continuousduty at the mechanical capacity and shall not be thermally limited. The gearbox shall bedesigned with a high cross section modulus and a center wall for maximum rigidity. The gearreducers shall be provided with stainless steel nameplates. The reducers shall be AGMA ratedto provide a maximum Class 1 output torque required to achieve the required continuousoperating torque. The reducer output shaft shall be direct coupled to the drive pinion withmachined slip fit tolerances to effectively provide a continuous pinion shaft through theintermediate drive unit. The primary gear motor shall be constructed to the same specificationsas the intermediate reducer with the exception of the integrally mounted motor and the hollowoutput shaft.

I. The motor shall be 3 phase TEFC, with NEMA B characteristics. It shall be rated for continuousduty at nameplate rating meeting electrical standards per NEMA publication MG1. The conduitbox and output shaft end shield / flange shall be of SAE Class 30 gray cast iron. The motorshall have Class F winding insulation with Mylar phase separators and slot liners. The statorshall be copper wound. The motor shall have an oil seal at the shaft end shield and V-ring atthe fan end shield. The motor shall have double sealed or shielded bearings lubricated for life.The motor shall be fitted with stainless steel nameplates. The motor stator shall be made ofcorrosion resistant aluminum alloy (Silafont-13). The internal surfaces, including stator bore,windings, end shields, and conduit box shall be coated with Dolph's Spray ER-41, Class Fpolyurethane red insulator. The end shields and conduit box shall be sealed at the joints.Fastener hardware shall be plated or stainless steel. The motor shall be painted with corrosionresistant paint. The motor shall be rated for a 1.15 service factor.

J. A spring loaded torque arm shall be attached to the secondary reducer to restrict rotation ofthe primary reducer about the secondary reducer. The compression imposed upon the springshall be proportional to the amount of torque transmitted between the primary and secondaryreducers. The torque arm shall be fitted with two (2) adjustable, magnetically actuatedproximity switches to signal alarm when the drive reaches a torque load of 100% continuous.and shut-off when the continuous output torque load reaches 125% continuous. Inaddition to providing signals at specific torque load set points, a continuous torque readout, asa percent of full load, shall be provided by a mechanical scale and pointer integral to the torquearm. The torque monitor unit shall be suitable for outdoor service including stainless steel orplated internal ports for corrosion resistance. The components shall be intrinsically safe forhazardous locations.

K. The complete spur gear drive assembly shall rotate the rake arm at a tip speed of approximately7 to 10 ft./min. with the drive cage and rake arm assembly designed to withstand approximately2 times the continuous design output torque of the drive unit.

L. Drive Control Panel: The manufacturer of the sludge collector equipment shall provide a localdrive control panel to be mounted to the gear drive service platform handrails. Theinterconnecting wiring and conduit shall be provided by the Contractor.

a. The drive control panel shall be a NEMA Size 1 combination starter with 3leg thermal overload protection and external reset, including a circuitbreaker with flange mounted visible disconnect switch, all in a NEMA 4Xstainless steel oversized enclosure. Additional devices mounted within theenclosure shall include: a fused 0.5 KVA control power transformer,pending overload relay, shutdown overload relay, alarm silence relay, andterminal strips for connecting the overload and alarm contacts located inthe drive torque monitor.

External controls shall be weatherproof NEMA 4X corrosion resistant andshall include: pull-to-start / push-to-stop, illuminated run switch; alarmsilence push-button; and overload reset push-buttons. Also included aredoor mounted H-O-A switches for the scum pump and spray system


solenoid valves. A weatherproof combination horn and light fixture with100 watt bulb shall be mounted to the top of the enclosure.

b. The Contractor shall provide 3/60/460 volt power to the control panel andall interconnecting wire and rigid conduit between the control panel andthe torque monitor mounted to the spur gear drive.

2.02 WALKWAY ACCESS BRIDGE

A. The thickener shall be provided with a 36 inch clear open width walkway extending from thetank wall to the center drive platform. The walkway shall be supported at one end by the driveunit and supported at the other end by the tank wall. As a minimum the walkway shall bedesigned to safely withstand all dead loads plus a live load of 50 pounds per square foot witha maximum deflection of l/360, over the entire span. The walkway shall consist of beams or astructural steel truss, sufficiently braced to resist the specified design loads. The walkwaydecking shall be 1-1/4 inch aluminum I-Bar grating.

B. A center drive operations platform shall be provided. It shall be a minimum of 8 feet square toprovide clearance around the center assembly and drive control for maintenance and service.The drive platform shall be decked with 1/4 inch aluminum checkered floorplate or 1 ¼”aluminum I-bar grating and have sufficient structural steel supports to meet the specified designload conditions.

C. Provide handrails with toe plate along both sides of the walkway and around the center driveplatform. Truss sides may serve as walkway handrails for truss style designs. Handrails shallbe the mechanical type, 2-rail design, with 1-1/2 inch diameter aluminum pipe and with fittingsfactory assembled to posts. Rails are to be shipped to the job site in stock lengths for cuttingand fitting. The toe plate shall be a 4 inch x ¼ inch plate or a 4” tall aluminum extruded channel.

2.03 CENTER CAGE AND RAKE ARMS

A. The center cage shall be of steel box truss construction, and shall be provided with connectionsfor the two (2) sludge removal arms, trough scrapers. The top of the cage shall be bolted tothe main gear which shall rotate the cage with the attached arms. The minimum angle sizeused for construction of the cage and rake arms shall be 2 inch x 2 inch x 1/4 inch members.

B. The thickener mechanism shall include two (2) sludge removal arms of steel truss construction,with steel raking blades, pickets, trough scrapers and adjustable 20 gauge, 304 stainless steelsqueegees. The rake blades shall be properly spaced to insure complete raking of the basinfloor twice per revolution.

C. The cage and rake arms shall be designed such that calculated stresses do not exceed theAISC allowable stress at twice the drive continuous rating.

2.04 CENTER COLUMN

A. A stationary center column with an influent pipe inside the stationary support column whichshall be provided to serve as the influent pipe and the support for the thickener mechanismand one end of the access walkway bridge. Minimum center column thickness shall be 1/4".

B. One end of the column shall have a 1-1/4 inch support flange for bolting to the foundation witha minimum of eight (8) 1-1/4 inch diameter anchor bolts as shown on the plans. A similar flangeshall be provided at the top of the column for supporting and securing the center driveassembly.


C. Influent openings shall be provided in the upper portion of the center column to allowunrestricted passage of the flow. Influent velocity shall be reduced by providing a total inletport area a minimum of 135 percent of the center column cross sectional area.

2.05 FLOCCULATING FEEDWELL

A. The feedwell shall be fabricated out of 3/16 inch steel plate with stiffeners as required.

B. The feedwell shall be supported by stationary structural members attached to tank wall asshown on the drawings.

C. The scum ports shall be equally spaced around the feedwell periphery to allow scum to exitfrom the feedwell at water level.

2.06 SURFACE SKIMMING AND SCUM COLLECTION EQUIPMENT

A. Each gravity thickener shall be equipped with two full radius skimmer arm assemblies to collectand discharge surface scum into a full radius scum trough supported from the tank wall andthe feedwell support structure.

B. Each skimmer arm shall be either a structural steel truss assembly or a fabricated tubeassembly connected to the center cage and cantilevered from the rotating feedwell. Tie rodsshall be properly located to allow adjustment of the skimmer arm as well as to resist horizontalforces.

C. Each skimmer arm shall be equipped with a hinged 1/2 inch 60 durometer neoprene wiperblade extending the full width of the arm. The neoprene blade shall be fastened to the armwith stainless steel fasteners with steel back-up bars

D. The full radius scum trough shall be fabricated from 1/4 inch steel plate and shall be supportedfrom the tank wall and feedwell support structure as shown on the drawings. Trough shallextend from the scum baffle to the center rotating cage to insure skimming inside and out ofthe feedwell. The trough and support structure shall be designed for all dead loads plus a 200hundred pound point load at the feedwell end of the trough with no more than 1/2 inchdeflection. The approach ramp of the trough shall be of radial design, having a tapered width.The trough shall be 8 inches wide with a uniformly sloped bottom to allow scum to dischargetoward the tank wall. Fabrication of the trough shall be true and free of warpage. A 6 inchschedule 40 pipe connection shall be provided at for connection to the scum drain line.

E. The gravity thickener equipment manufacturer shall furnish a flush valve assembly forautomatic flushing of the scum trough and scum pipe. The flush valve assembly shall beadjustable to allow 0 to 5 gallons of clarified effluent to enter the scum trough as the skimmerassembly passes over the scum box. The assembly shall consist of a stainless steel lever,UHMW seal plate and neoprene diaphragm mounted to the scum trough. The diaphragm shallbe opened and closed by an easily adjustable, submerged actuation arm mounted to therotating feedwell. The flush volume adjustment mechanism shall be above the water level andshall include at least three settings.

2.07 SURFACE PREPARATION AND PAINTING

A. Non-submerged fabricated steel shall be sandblasted to SSPC-SP-6 specifications and givenone coat of manufacturer's epoxy primer 3-5 MDFT. Submerged fabricated steel shall besandblasted to SSPC-SP-10 specifications and given one coat of manufacturer's epoxy primer3-5 MDFT.

B. Prior to assembly of the drive unit, the castings shall have been sandblasted and thoroughlycleaned to remove any foreign particles in the drive base. After assembly, the drive mechanism


shall be solvent cleaned and power wire brushed as needed prior to application ofmanufacturer's standard primer.

C. Gear motors shall be furnished with manufacturer's standard enamel.

2.08 SPARE PARTS

A. As a minimum, provide the following spare parts:

1. One (1) set of oil sight glasses for each mechanism.

2. One (1) set of neoprene skimmer wipers for each mechanism.

2.09 EFFLUENT WEIR AND SCUM BAFFLE

A. Effluent weir plates shall consist of 9 inch deep x 1/4 inch thick FRP sections with 2-1/2 inchdeep 90 degree V-notches at 6 inch intervals. The weir sections shall be fastened to the tankwall using 304 stainless steel cinch anchor bolts, hex nuts and 5 inch diameter FRP washers,allowing for vertical adjustment. To prevent leakage, surfaces between the launder walls andweir plates shall be given a seal coat of suitable mastic by the erection contractor.

B. The scum baffle shall be 12 inches, except the baffle shall be 24 inches starting approximately6 feet before and ending approximately 6 feet after the scum box. The baffle plates shallconsist of 1/4 inch thick FRP sections and shall be supported from the tank wall by FRP anglebrackets secured with 304 stainless steel cinch anchor bolts and hex nuts, allowing for verticaland radial adjustment. ]

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. The equipment shall be erected by the contractor in strict accordance with the manufacturer'srecommendations.

B. A 2" layer of grout shall be applied to the tank floor by the contractor in accordance with themanufacturer's recommendations. Screed boards shall be supplied by the erecting contractor.

3.02 SERVICE

A. The equipment manufacturer shall provide a service representative properly trained ininspection and operation of the mechanism to approve the installation, certify that the torquesettings of the drive overload protection device are correct, perform the torque test, and instructthe owner's personnel on maintenance and operation. If additional service is required due tothe mechanisms not being fully operational at the time of service requested by the contractor,the additional service days will be at the contractor's expense.

3.03 TORQUE TEST

A. The thickener mechanism shall be field torque tested. The purpose of the torque test is toverify the structural integrity of the structural steel design and the center drive unit. The testingshall be carried out under the supervision of the equipment manufacturer's representative andas approved by the Engineer before the mechanisms are accepted and placed into operation.

B. The torque test shall consist of securing the rake arms by cables to anchor bolts temporarilyinstalled by the contractor in the tank floor at locations specified by the equipmentmanufacturer. A load shall be applied gradually to the scraper arm by means of a ratchet leverand cylinder connected to the cable assembly.


C. The manufacturer's service representative shall verify that the alarm, motor cut-out, and backupsafety motor cut-out switches are properly set and are in proper operation to protect thethickener mechanism as specified.

END OF SECTION

CENTRIFUGE THICKENER 467136-1 TOWN BRANCH WWTP THICKENING

SECTION 467136 – CENTRIFUGE THICKENER

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE

A. Work described in this section includes furnishing labor, equipment, materials, tools andincidentals required for a complete and operable installation of one (1) horizontal decantercentrifuge, centrifuge control panel, power panel, and related appurtenances. All equipmentshall be installed, adjusted, tested, and placed in operation in accordance with thesespecifications, the manufacturer’s recommendations and as shown on the drawings.

1.02 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS

A. The equipment shall be suitable for exposure to continuous 95 percent relative humidityconditions and for operation in ambient air temperatures from 40 to 110 degrees F.

B. The sludge to be thickened will be product of municipal water or wastewater treatment.

C. The unit shall be capable of continuous operation for up to 24 hours per day, seven days perweek.

D. The centrifuge shall be optimized for thickening. In addition, the adjustable pond setting damsmay require changing for optimum process capabilities.

E. The design criteria for the centrifuge shall be as follows:

Type of sludge Anaerobically DigestedWAS

Feed concentration, %TSVSS, %TSS

0.85%

Sludge feed rate, gpm 160Solids loading, lbs/hr 680Minimum cake solids, %TS > 5%Maximum polymer dosage, lbs/ton d.s. TBD (0-6 est.)Minimum recovery, %SS >97% w/ poly; TBD w/o

poly

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit drawings and equipment data in accordance with the General Conditions and thefollowing:

1. Equipment Data Sheet

2. Materials of Construction / Abrasion Protection Features

3. Anchor Bolts / Vibration Isolator Detail

4. Standard Instruction Manual

5. Centrifuge Installation Instructions

6. Lubrication and Maintenance Schedule

7. Equipment Shipment / Storage Instructions


8. Spare Parts and Tools List

9. Surface Preparation and Painting Details

10. Sample Factory Test Report

11. Discharge Connection Details

12. Motor Data Sheets

13. Control Panel Drawings

14. Control Panel Bill of Materials

15. Control Panel Component Data Sheets

16. Sequence of Operations

17. Vibration Monitor Details

18 Variable Frequency Drive Details

19. Installation Plan

20. Process & Instrumentation Diagram

A. Descriptive literature, catalog cuts, dimension prints, shop drawings, installation, operation andmaintenance instructions shall be submitted to the Engineer for review before shipment. Thedata shown on the shop drawings shall be completed with respect to dimensions, materials ofconstruction, wiring diagrams, and the like, to enable the Engineer to review the information asrequired.



1.04 GUARANTY



C. The manufacturer shall guarantee the decanter centrifuge to be free from defects in materialsand workmanship for a period of twelve (12) months following installation or eighteen (18)months following the delivery. Any defects found within the warranty period shall be repairedor defective components replaced. Ancillary and control components shall be warranted perthe original equipment manufacturer’s warranty.

D. Certificate of Compliance: The manufacturer shall warrant that the centrifuge(s) shall bemanufactured in accordance with the Contract Specifications.


E. All manufacturing facilities shall be ISO 9001 certified.

F. The centrifuge manufacturer must have their headquarters established in the United States fora minimum of at least 10 years. The facility must include a full working shop with the capabilityto fully service all the machines including, but not limited to, welding, balancing, sandblastingand machining to ensure the fastest possible turnaround time. The facility should also stockall wear parts for the machine sold.

1.05 SLUDGE THICKENING SYSTEM

A. The sludge thickening system shall consist of:

1. One (1) solid bowl centrifuge

2. One (1) total solids transmitter

3. One (1) control system as specified herein

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL DESCRIPTION

A. The centrifuge shall be a Flottweg C4E-4/454 or ANDRITZ D4LL specifically designed to utilizeall new technology. The centrifuge shall be a solid bowl, horizontal, continuous feed, scrolltype unit. The centrifuge equipment shall be designed and built to operate continuously orintermittently. The bowl/scroll design shall utilize the conical section for optimal thickening ofthe cake solids.

B. The centrifuge manufacturer shall be responsible for providing a complete centrifuge system,as described herein. The equipment shall be installed by an installing contractor who shall beresponsible for off-loading the equipment, providing any temporary storage, and installing theequipment in place. Installation shall include mounting the unit, piping the unit, providing powerto the panels and all inter-connected wiring and piping required between the variouscomponents.

C. All equipment specified herein, shall be fabricated, assembled, erected and placed in properoperating condition in full conformity with drawings, specifications, engineering data,instructions, and recommendations of the equipment manufacturer. The centrifuge units shallbe the product of suppliers with a minimum of fifty (50) years’ experience in the design andmanufacture of centrifuges for water and wastewater applications and shall be specificallydesigned for the intended conditions of service. Appurtenant equipment shall be new and shallbe designed, fabricated and assembled in accordance with the best engineering and shoppractices. All facilities shall be ISO 9001 certified. Individual parts shall be manufactured tostandard sizes and gauges. Components of the centrifuge shall be designed for the stresses,which may occur during fabrication, shipping, erection or maintenance. Materials shall besuitable for service conditions and as described herein.

D. The unit shall be completely tested in the manufacturing facility with a standard factory testpanel. The equipment shall be shipped in a minimum number of components and they shalltypically be comprised of the centrifuge frame, rotating assembly, main drive assembly, controlpanel, power panel, and a separate crate of tools and spare parts.

2.02 MATERIALS OF CONSTRUCTION

A. All wetted parts of the centrifuge rotating assembly shall be a minimum of 316 stainless steel,except for the "O" rings, seals, and abrasion-resistant material. "O" rings shall be Buna-Nrubber; lip type seals shall be Buna-N. The feed tube shall be constructed of 316 stainless


steel. The bowl cover shall be of 2 layer stainless steel design with sound insulation.Fiberglass reinforced plastic covers shall not be allowed. The frame and casing shall befabricated of mild steel. All protective guards shall be constructed of painted carbon steel.

2.03 BOWL

A. The centrifuge bowl shall be 79" in length, with the inside diameter of16.9" in the cylindrical section, plus a conical beach extension. The bowl shall be manufacturedfrom centrifugal castings of duplex stainless steel. All centrifugal cast material shall beinspected for cracks, shrinkage, porosity, or other defects, by means of a liquid dye penetranttest. The bowl shell shall be designed to operate at a minimum force of 3500 x G. Fabricatedor statically cast bowl shells shall not be allowed.

B. The front and rear bowl hubs shall be precision cast of duplex stainless steel. The pool depthin the bowl shall be adjustable by use of weirs at the large diameter end of the bowl. Adjustableweirs should have a means of directing the centrate flow using open vanes in order to recoverenergy and reduce power consumption. Methods using tubes or similar shapes shall not beaccepted. The bowl shall include longitudinal stainless steel wear strips or grooves spacedevenly around the inside surface of the bowl. The wear strips shall preclude scroll wear on thebowl casting and provide a sludge layer to improve sludge transportation and prevent bowlerosion. Bowls utilizing grooves shall not be acceptable.

C. The thickened solids shall be conveyed by the scroll rotating at a positive differential speed.The solids shall be discharged from the bowl via a series of rectangular discharge ports. Eachport shall be protected by a field replaceable chilled cast iron or tungsten carbide bushing. Thebushings shall be weight balanced in pairs.

2.04 SCROLL CONVEYOR

A. The centrifuge shall include a horizontal scroll conveyor equipped with solid helical flights andindependently mounted concentrically within the centrifuge bowl. Both the centrifuge bowl andthe scroll conveyor shall be independently balanced such that a scroll conveyor can beinterchanged with another from the same model centrifuge. The scroll shall utilize a differentialspeed, which is greater than the bowl speed to convey thickened solids from the cylindricalsection to the conical section and out of the bowl with a minimum disturbance to the pool. Theedge and the face of the conveyor flights shall be protected by flame-sprayed tungsten carbideor sintered tungsten carbide tiles over the entire length of the conveyor.

2.05 BEARINGS

A. The centrifuges shall be designed so that the entire rotating assembly is supported by two mainpillow block bearings located outside of the process area. Each main bearing shall be greaselubricated ball or cylindrical roller type bearing. Commercially available bearings shall be used.Bearing temperature monitoring shall be included. Seals shall be NBR.

2.06 FRAME AND CASING

A. The rotating assembly and bearings of the centrifuge shall rest on a mild steel frame,specifically designed for rigidity and noise reduction. Frames containing concrete or otherbalast materials shall not be allowed. The stainless case shall be designed to act as aprotective guard and to provide a complete enclosure for odor containment. The bottom of thecasing shall contain flanged connections for sludge cake. The product collection chambersshall be stainless steel with flanges for the thickened solids and centrate discharge. Fiberglassreinforced plastic casings (covers) shall not be allowed.

2.07 DRIVE SYSTEMS

A. Main Drive System


1. The main drive system shall consist of a 40 HP electric motor and a belt drive system. Thebelt drive system shall consist of multiple V-belts to provide full load capacity and towithstand the full starting torque of the system, with an ABB, Siemens, Eaton or Square-D6 pulse variable frequency drive with line reactors.

2. The main motor shall be a squirrel cage induction motor and shall be provided with thermalprotection. The motor shall have copper windings and be of a high thermal capacity designfor operation of 480 / 3 / 60 power. The motor shall have Class F insulation with a B Rise,TEFC, 1.0 service factor, chemical duty, NEMA design A, oversized cast iron terminal box,and continuous duty. The motor temperature shall not exceed 130°C at 90% nameplatevoltage. The noise level shall not exceed 85 dbA sound pressure measured at 3 feet fromthe motor in all directions.

3. With the motor at ambient temperature, it shall be capable of making two (2) completestarts in succession with coasting to rest between starts. The motor shall also be capableof at least one restart within one hour after any shutdown. The motor bearings shall begrease lubricated, ball or roller anti-friction type of standard manufacture. The bearingsshall be conservatively designed to withstand all stresses of the service specified.

B. Scroll Drive System

1. The scroll drive system shall consist of an AC inverter duty motor mounted on the frameand an automatic torque control module incorporated into the variable frequency drive. Thescroll drive motor shall be completely independent of the main drive motor allowingoperation of the scroll when bowl is stationary. The scroll drive shall be equipped with anapproved PWM digital dual quadrant variable frequency drive, with self-tuning. The driveshall have a maximum wire length to motor of 1000 feet. Drive shall be 6 pulse, constanttorque and factory tested for severe centrifuge duty. The electrical noise shall be inaccordance with IEEE standards. The drive shall include a DC link filter and fundamentalpower factor of 0.98, an IGBT inverter output, primary filter (EMI/ RFI type), and output linechokes with LC filters to control line harmonics.

2. The centrifuge shall be equipped with a scroll drive system to provide control of thedifferential speed between the centrifuge bowl and conveyor. The scroll drive system shallconsist of a multi-stage planetary or cyclo gear that serves as the drive mechanism andgear reduction between the bowl motor and centrifuge scroll. The gears shall be oillubricated. The gear shall be independently balanced from the centrifuge andinterchangeable. The scroll shall be protected from damage due to high torque overload.A thermal overload protection device in the drive motor shall not be considered as providingfor sufficient protection for the scroll drive.

C. The drive system shall use one motor for the bowl drive and a 7.5 HP AC motor for the scrolldrive. The scroll drive motor shall be a 480/3/60 inverter duty motor.

2.08 NOISE AND VIBRATION

The centrifuge shall be designed such that the average noise level measured at three (3) feetaround the periphery of the complete centrifuge assembly shall not exceed 85 dbA when testedat the manufacturing facility without feed and with the inlet and discharges closed.Manufacturers that do not meet the specified noise level must provide a complete soundenclosure with the centrifuge.

The centrifuge, when running without feed, shall be measured for vibration in the manufacturingfacility. The vibration velocity shall be less than 11.4 mm/s when measured under dry shoptest conditions.

A. Vibration Isolators


1. The centrifuge shall be mounted on rubber-type vibration isolators. The number andvibration constant of the isolator shall be as recommended by the manufacturer for the loadand impact resulting from the operation of the centrifuge.

2. There shall be no rigid connections at the feed tube, vents, thickened solids discharge,liquid discharge or other components whatsoever to the machine, thus preventingtransmission of vibration to structure, piping and appurtenant equipment.

B. Flexible Connectors

1. To insure a quiet installation, flexible connectors shall be provided to isolate the centrifugefrom the building structure. The thickened solids and centrate chutes shall be equippedwith 304 stainless steel backup flanges. All hardware shall be supplied by the installingcontractor. Flexible pipe connections shall be supplied for the sludge feed line, polymerconnection and frame drain. All flexible connections shall be flanged for simple connectionto associated piping.

2. Due to local conditions, flexible connectors for the main drive motor, scroll drive motor andcentrifuge junction boxes must be furnished by the installing contractor, such that all localelectrical codes are met.

C. Vibration Monitoring

1. The centrifuge shall be equipped with a vibration monitoring system consisting of anaccelerometer, 4-20 mAmp output, alert alarm and danger alarm.

a. Upon reaching an alert (stage 1) alarm, the control system will issue a warning alarmat the panel. Upon reaching a danger alarm (stage 2), the control system will shutdown the centrifuge in a controlled shut down sequence.

2.09 LUBRICATION

A. The two main pillow block bearings on the centrifuge and the gears shall be grease lubricated.The scroll bearings shall be sealed and permanently grease lubricated.

2.10 GUARDS

A. Guards for all rotating components, gearboxes and belt drives shall be a minimum 16 guagestainless steel and shall be designed to OSHA standards. Completely enclose the entire beltdrive system and construct to minimize noise and vibration. Guards manufactured from carbonsteel or fiberglass reinforced plastic shall not be allowed.

2.11 ANCHOR BOLTS

A. Anchor bolts shall be supplied by the installing contractor.

2.12 VALVES

A. Solenoid Valve for control of the centrifuge flushing connection shall be supplied with theSystem. Valves shall be of stainless steel construction.

2.13 STANDARD TOOLS AND ACCESSORIES

A. One set of standard tools shall be provided to disassemble and re-assemble the centrifuge asrequired.

B. The following tools shall be supplied as a minimum:


1. One Belt Tensioning Device

2. One set of lifting straps for lifting the machine housing

3. One complete set of threaded spindles and plates used for disassembling and assemblingclose tolerance parts

2.14 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS

A. General

1. The centrifuge control system shall have a PLC and an Operator Interface Terminal (OIT).The control system shall be designed to work in manual and automatic modes. Should adisruption occur, the centrifuge monitoring system shall indicate the cause with a first outsequence and define the interruption. The interlock must be reset in order to continue.

2. The scroll drive will be controlled by monitoring the percent total suspended solids (TSS)of the thickened sludge which will control the differential speed. In the automatic mode,scroll drive speed is automatically adjusted to maintain a constant percent of thickenedsludge, thereby compensating for varying feed characteristics while optimizing residencetime and separation. The OIT provides digital display of bowl speed, differential speed and% TSS. Set points for the differential speed, %TS, gradient, etc… are entered via anumeric keypad on the OIT.

3. Ethernet communication with the Plant SCADA System shall be provided. The Suppliershall coordinate with the Instrumentation Contractor to establish the communicationsbetween the Main Control Panel and the Plant PCIS. The Supplier shall coordinate withthe Programmer to establish status functions, as shown in the I-Series Contract Drawings.

4. Contractor shall review the I-00-600 series Contract Drawings and provide requireddiscrete inputs, discrete outputs, analog inputs and analog outputs for signals shown onthe Loop Diagrams.

B. Centrifuge Control Panel

1. NEMA 4X wall-mounted stainless steel enclosure. Included in the enclosure shall be anE-stop pushbutton and alarm horn. A 10” Allen-Bradley Panelview Plus 7 series OIT shallbe provided. An alarm acknowledge and alarm silence shall be integral to the OIT. Allpushbuttons and pilot lights shall be water tight and corrosion resistant. The OIT shall beutilized for major operational adjustments. The OIT shall display fault messages withactual time and date.

C. Centrifuge Power Panel

1. NEMA 12 double-door free-standing enclosure with fan and filter, plus a through–the–dooroperated main disconnect that can be locked in the off position. The enclosure shall havelifting eyes and can be arranged to have top or bottom conduit entry. The enclosure shallhave a pad-lockable 25,000 UL interrupting capacity rated main circuit breaker, 6 pulsemain drive VFD, 6 pulse scroll drive VFD, and industrial hardware components. An Allen-Bradley ControlLogix 5570 Series (1756-L71) programmable logic controller shall besupplied and programmed to operate any and all necessary sequences. Included shall bea centrifuge automatic torque control module that shall maintain process optimization withinadjustable preset limitations and operate in differential speed and torque modes. Allcomponents in the control panel shall be completely factory wired. All external controlconnection points shall terminate on a terminal strip. There shall be a minimum of10% spare terminal connections supplied. The PLC shall be capable of interfacing viaEthernet, to the SCADA systems. Included within the control panel shall be a Pilz safetyemergency stop relay and an hour meter. An emergency stop pushbutton, a folding shelf,


and an interface with a convenience outlet and Ethernet connection shall be provided onthe exterior of the enclosure. This enclosure shall be illuminated using 24 VDC LEDlighting.

2. The Owner has experienced equipment failure due to use of line side contactors onthe VFDs. Line side contactors shall not be utilized to disconnect power to eachVFD. In the event of an emergency stop, overspeed condition, high motortemperature, or excessive vibration the drive logic input shall be utilized for a faststop type function. If line side contactors must be used to meet a specific electricalstandard (ie. NFPA 79) the manufacturer shall ensure that contactor operation is incompliance with the manufacturer’s cycle time requirement to prevent damage tothe drive.

D. Remote Connectivity

1. An Ewon Cosy, Ewon Flexy, or Phoenix Contact Mguard Ethernet switch shall be providedby the manufacturer as part of the control system to allow for a direct remote connectionto the control components (PLC and HMI) from the manufacturer’s headquarters in orderto complete timely simple program changes.

E. Redundant Control Power Supplies

1. In order to continue processing during a short power interruption, loss of 480 VAC shouldbe detected by instrumentation. If the duration of the interruption is less than 3 seconds,a warning should appear on the OIT and the machine should continue normal operation. Ifthe duration of the interruption exceeds 3 seconds, a shutdown alarm shall appear and asemi-controlled shutdown sequence shall be initiated. The centrifuge system shall providefor an immediate restart by the operator once power is restored. With the centrifugeoperating at full speed, the control system shall remain powered up for a minimum of 15minutes after 480 VAC power is lost.

2. As part of this system, redundant power supplies with a diode module shall be provided. A120 VAC/24 VDC power supply and a 650 VDC/24 VDC power supply with Sitopredundancy module, all manufactured by Siemens, shall be used to ensure properoperation.

F. Total Solids Transmitter

1. One total solids transmitter shall be mounted after the centrifuge as shown on the drawingsand shall continuously monitor the thickened sludge concentration and, via a feedbackcontrol loop, adjust the centrifuge scroll differential speed to maintain a set concentration.

2. Transmitter shall use microwave technology and be maintenance free.

3. Transmitter shall be manufactured by METSO, Valmet, or equal. No other manufacturerwill be allowed.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 FACTORY TESTING

Factory testing of the centrifuge shall be performed at the centrifuge manufacturer’s facility todemonstrate the absence of mechanical or electrical defects and that the centrifuge operateswithin the specified limits. Factory testing of the control and power panels shall be at the panelfabrication facility.

A. Shop Testing Procedure


1. Centrifuge manufacturer shall allow inspection and witness of the shop test of the equip-ment by the Engineer.

2. Equipment to be shop tested and witnessed by the Engineer shall include:

a. Centrifuge.

b. Control Panel and Power Panel (to be tested at point of manufacture).

3. Centrifuge manufacturer shall notify Engineer of the test schedule not less than 14 days inadvance.

4. Test conditions:

a. The following tests shall be completed before the centrifuge is released for shipment.

1) Vibration measurement with bowl empty.

2) Vibration measurement with bowl filled with water.

3) Operation of machine for several hours with water.

4) Motor starting amperage.

5) Test equipment/procedures:

a) Test equipment shall be calibrated.

b) Unit and control system shall be tested with a simulation panel.

c) All circuits shall be checked and all alarms and shutdown conditions simulatedto check the alarm circuits.

5. Certified test results shall be submitted after completion.

3.02 FIELD MECHANICAL TESTING

Field testing of the centrifuge shall be performed to demonstrate the equipment was notdamaged during storage, transportation, or installation. Also, that the equipment is properlyinstalled and aligned, and that there are no mechanical defects in any parts. The properinteraction of the centrifuge, drive motor, scroll drive, and control panel will also bedemonstrated.

The test procedure, submitted by the manufacturer and approved by the Engineer or Owner,shall be run by a qualified representative of the centrifuge manufacturer in the presence of theOwner and/or Engineer.

It shall be the Owner’s responsibility to make sure that qualified technical representatives fromthe suppliers of all ancillary equipment be present during this test period to demonstrate theproper interaction of their equipment with the centrifuge. The Owner shall be responsible fordelays in testing due to non-availability of personnel, services, or utilities.

The field tests shall consist of a two-hour dry run of the centrifuge followed by a four-hour wetrun of the centrifuge together with the polymer system, sludge feed system, washwater system,cake conveyance equipment, and associated instrumentation and controls.

A. Field Testing Procedure


1. Field Inspection

a. The centrifuge manufacturer will inspect the final installation and supervise the fieldacceptance tests of the equipment.

2. Functional Test

a. Functional testing shall be conducted after the installation of the centrifuge and allappurtenances and the equipment has been operated a sufficient period to make anycorrections or adjustments. The complete unit shall be subject to field acceptancetests under actual operating conditions to determine that operation is satisfactory.

b. The functional test shall be made under the direct supervision of the centrifugemanufacturer and in the presence of the Engineer.

c. The functional test shall determine the characteristics of the unit and shall demonstratethat under all conditions of operation the unit:

1) Has not been damaged by transportation

2) Has been properly installed.

3) Has no mechanical defects.

4) Is in proper alignment.

5) Has been properly connected.

6) Is free of overheating of any parts.

7) Is free of objectionable vibration.

8) Is free of overloading of any parts.

d. Prior to acceptance, the centrifuge manufacturer shall operate the centrifuge for a oneday 6 hour per day period under actual conditions with sludge from the Owner’s facility.

3. Vibration Test

a. The centrifuge manufacturer shall verify operations are within tolerances.

4. Acceptance Test

a. After satisfactory completion of the functional start-up test and after the Engineer hasagreed that all ancillary equipment both upstream and downstream of the centrifugesis in satisfactory operating condition, an acceptance test shall be conducted usingrepresentative sludge.

b. Prior to testing, the Contractor shall supply the manufacturer with sufficient quantitiesof representative sludge to conduct bench scale testing of polymers. Based upon thetest result, the centrifuge manufacturer shall recommend the polymer for use inacceptance testing.

c. The Contractor shall furnish all operating and support personnel, power, water,chemicals, heat and all other incidentals required to take samples and perform thetests. The Contractor shall be responsible for collecting all required samples andmeasurements. The Owner shall be responsible for supplying all polymers.


d. The centrifuge shall be fed representative sludge and polymer in a proportionrecommended by the centrifuge manufacturer. The acceptance test shall demonstratesatisfactory operation of all equipment, controls, interlocks and alarms. The unit shalloperate continuously, trouble free, for a minimum of three 6-hour periods on threeseparate days.

3.03 FIELD PROCESS PERFORMANCE TESTING

A. After satisfactory completion of acceptance tests conducted on the centrifuge, the centrifugeshall be tested for three (3), 4-hour periods to determine acceptable performance in accordancewith the Design Requirements .

B. The unit shall be fed representative sludge and polymer during which the average performanceof the unit must equal or exceed the design performance parameters.

C. During each day’s performance test, the Contractor shall be responsible for collecting allrequired samples and measurements at 1-hour intervals in order to make the followingdeterminations. The first set of samples and measurements shall be taken 1 hour after thebeginning of the test run.

1. Sludge feed – total solids.

2. Centrate - total solids.

3. Centrate – suspended solids.

4. Final cake discharge – total solids.

5. Plant water (one or two daily composites) – total solids.

6. Polymer feed rate - gallons per minute.

7. Sludge feed rate – gallons per minute.

8. Solids capture – percent.

9. Setting for polymer feed pump.

10. Setting for sludge feed pump.

11. Differential speed.

12. Motor amperage.

13. Sludge feed – percent volatile solids.

14. Sludge feed – SVI

D. During the entire Performance Test period, all laboratory analyses shall be performed bythe Owner.

E. All data collected during performance tests shall be made available for the Engineer fordetermining compliance with the Specifications.

F. The average values of the tests conducted shall meet or exceed the performancecriteria.


G. Polymer dosage shall be determined as the total active polymer consumed divided by the drysolids fed to the machine.

H. Test data that are in apparent error shall be discarded.

I. In the event the equipment is not meeting the guaranteed performance, themanufacturer shall, at his own expense modify the equipment to meet thesestandards.

J. The equipment shall be modified and the test repeated until successfully completed, or oneyear has elapsed since the failure of the first attempted performance test.

3.04 TECHNICAL SERVICES

Technical Services of the manufacturer’s representative shall be supplied in the followingareas:

A.. Five (5) days to confirm proper installation, alignment, mechanical start-up, andfield mechanical.

B. Ten (10) days for process start-up, training and field process performance testing.

C. For every five (5) days of time allotted to the project, one trip shall be included. One trip shallconsist of the associated expenses of airfare and carfare, plus accommodations and meals.Additional days shall be billable in accordance with the standard rate schedule.

END OF SECTION

ROTARY LOBE PUMP 467510-1 TOWN BRANCH WWTP THICKENING

SECTION 467510 – ROTARY LOBE PUMP

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment, testing, etc. to install rotary lobe pump as specified inthis section below, as listed in the table and where shown on the drawings. Pump shall becomplete pump unit consisting of pump, motor and completely assembled on fabricated steelbase and shall conform to the pump requirement described herein.

B. Unless otherwise specified, the pump manufacturer shall furnish each pumping unit completewith drive motor and all other components and shall be held entirely responsible for thecompatibility in all respects of all components furnished.

C. All equipment specified under this section and the “In Line Macerator Grinder” section467505 shall be supplied by a single reputable manufacturer.


A. Submittals: Section 013323

B. Concrete: Section 033100

C. Precision Grouting: Section 036000

D. In-Line Macerator/Grinder: Section 462423

E. Interior Process Piping: Section 462010

F. Interior Process Valves: Section 462012

G. Painting: Division 9

H. Electrical: Division 26

I. Operating & Maintenance Data: Section 017823

1.03 DEFINITION

A. When the term "pumping unit" is used hereinafter, it shall be deemed to mean a pump orpumps, complete with, but not limited to, drive motor, connecting shafting, bearings,couplings, accessories, appurtenances, and all associated equipment.

1.04 CONTRACT DRAWINGS

A. The contract drawings are intended to show a general arrangement of pumping equipment,drives, structural supports, foundations, connected piping and valves.

B. The pump suction and discharges shown shall be considered minimum sizes unlessotherwise specified.

1.05 MANUFACTURER

A. Manufacturers:

1. Boerger


2. Vogelsang

3. Approved Equal

B. Quality Assurance: All pumping units shall be of approved design and make products ofmanufacturers who have built equipment of similar type, size and capacity.

C. Additional Submittals: The Contractor shall submit, upon request, any additional informationthat the Engineer may deem necessary to determine the ability of the proposed manufacturerto produce the specified equipment.

D. Replacement Parts Capability: Pumping units shall be the products of manufacturers whocan produce evidence of their ability to promptly furnish any and all interchangeablereplacement parts as many be needed at any time within the expected life of the pumps.

1. Upon request, the Contractor shall submit full details of the proposed manufacturer'sability to promptly fill replacement orders.

E. Manufacturer Information: All manufacturer information required by the specifications shallbe submitted by the Contractor within thirty (30) calendar days of the date of receipt of theNotice to Proceed.

1. Any additional information or data, specifically requested by the Engineer, concerningmanufacturer's capabilities (especially relating to requirements described hereinbefore),shall be submitted by the Contractor within fourteen (14) calendar days of the receipt ofthe written request therefore, unless otherwise specified.

2. Approval of manufacturers or suppliers will not be given until all information required bythe specifications or requested by the Engineer has been submitted and acceptable.

F. Disqualification of Manufacturer:

1. Failure to successfully comply with the provisions of subparagraphs A through E,inclusive, will constitute grounds for disqualification of pump manufacturer.

2. Poor performance of similar pumping equipment now in operation under the specifiedconditions of service and pump rating constitute grounds for disqualification of the pumpmanufacturer, supplier, or both, unless such poor performance has been corrected.

1.06 SUBMITTALS

A. General: The Contractor shall comply with the provisions of Section 013323 regardingsubmittals, unless otherwise specified herein.

B. Content of Submittals: The following shall be included in submittals as a minimum.However, any additional information or data shall be added if and whenever requested by theOwner or the Engineer. Where applicable, submit separate data for each pump.

1. Descriptive Literature:

a. Dimensions

b. Materials of Construction (including required coating).

c. Performance Data.

1) Size of Pump


2) GPM

3) TDH

4) BHP

5) Overall pump efficiency inlet thought discharge head)

6) RPM

7) Performance curves showing overall pump efficiencies.

8) NPSH curve if applicable)

9) Shutoff head

10) Weight of pump

11) Head

12) Rated HP of motor

13) Weight of motor

2. Installation Information: Submit drawings and information necessary for final design offoundations, connecting piping and valves, pump drip and drainage piping, electricalconnections, starting, speed regulating and protective equipment, and auxiliaryequipment.

a. Submit details for mechanical seal assemblies.

b. Submit drawings showing locations, size and full details of foundation bolts for allcomponents for all pumping units.

c. For all pumping units, a dimensioned and scaled assembly outline drawing ordrawings of the complete pump, drive, and all associated equipment furnished shallbe submitted for approval. Such drawing or drawings shall show plan, elevation, andany other views or sections requested.

d. For all pumping units, a scaled cross-sectional drawing of the assembled pumpshowing full details and materials of construction shall be submitted for approval.

e. The Contractor shall submit all other drawings, material lists and other informationspecified, requested and/or necessary to show complete compliance with all detailsof the contract documents.

3. Maintenance and Operations Manual: Manual shall contain all information necessary forproper operation and maintenance of pumping units, as well as the location of thenearest permanent service headquarters. Comply with Section 017823 Operation andMaintenance Manual.

1.07 TESTS

A. Field Tests:

1. The field tests shall be made by the Contractor in the presence of and as directed by theEngineer. Testing shall be done in accordance with the Hydraulic Institute Standards.


2. Field tests shall be made on each pumping unit. Included therein, each pump shall berun at maximum rated speed for at least three (3) rates of flow corresponding to minimumrate, design rate, and maximum rate of flows specified as evidenced by thecorresponding total dynamic head shown by the pump gages; simultaneous ammeterreadings shall be taken. Variation of the rate of flow shall be made by throttling thedischarge valve (where applicable). The rated motor nameplate current and power shallnot be exceeded at any rate of flow within the specified range.

3. Before any pump is rotated, the Contractor shall make certain that no debris is present insuction well, pumps or pipe lines. Any internal damage done to equipment while startingup shall be assumed to be caused by debris and shall be replaced at the Contractor'sexpense. No pump shall be rotated under power unless filled with liquid.

4. When water can be pumped, the Contractor shall commence pumping and shall haverepresentatives from the pump manufacturer to start the pumps. When flow conditionsare favorable, the Contractor or pump manufacturer shall in the presence of theEngineer, run a series of tests to establish the adequacy of the pumping program.

B. Failure of Tests: Any defects in the equipment or failure to meet the guarantees orrequirements of the specifications shall be promptly corrected by the Contractor byreplacements or otherwise. The decision of the Engineer as to whether or not the Contractorhas fulfilled his obligations under the Contract shall be final and conclusive. If the Contractorfails or refuses to make these corrections or if the improved equipment, when tested, shall failagain to meet the guarantees of specified requirements, the Owner notwithstanding its havingmade partial payment for work and materials which have entered into the manufacture of saidequipment, may reject said equipment and order the Contractor to remove it from thepremises at his own expense.

1. In case the Owner rejects said equipment, then the Contractor hereby agrees to repay tothe Owner all sums of money paid to him for said rejected equipment on progresscertificates or otherwise on account of the lump sum prices herein specified, and uponthe receipt of said sum of money the Owner will execute and deliver to the Contractor abill of sale of all its rights, title, and interest in and to said rejected equipment; provided,however, that said equipment shall not be removed from the premises of the Owner untilthe Owner obtains from other sources the equipment to take the place of the rejected.The Owner hereby agrees to obtain said other equipment within a reasonable time andthe Contractor agrees that the Owner may use the equipment furnished by him withoutrental or other charge until said other new equipment is obtained.

C. Responsibility During Test: The Contractor shall be fully responsible for the proper operationof equipment during tests and instruction periods and shall neither have nor make any claimfor damage which may occur to equipment prior to the time when the Owner formally takesover the operation thereof.

D. Manufacturer's Representative: For all pumping units, the Contractor shall furnish theservices of accredited representatives of the pump manufacturer who shall supervise theinstallation, adjustment, and field tests of each pumping unit and give instructions to theoperating personnel. As one condition necessary to acceptance of any pumping unit, theContractor shall submit a certificate from the manufacturer, stating that the installation of thepumping unit is satisfactory, that the unit is ready for operation, and that the operatingpersonnel have been suitably instructed in the operation, lubrication, and care of the unit.

1.08 IDENTIFICATION - NAMEPLATES

A. Each piece of equipment shall be provided with a substantial nameplate, securely fastened inplace and clearly inscribed with the manufacturer's name, year of manufacture, serial numberand principal rating date.


1.09 GUARANTEE PERIOD

A. The Contractor shall guarantee and warrant that the equipment furnished and installed is freefrom defects of design, material and workmanship, and will operate satisfactorily. In theevent the equipment fails to perform as specified, and after the Owner has given due notice,the Contractor or Supplier, at their own expense, shall promptly repair or replace thedefective equipment without any additional cost to the Owner.

B. After successful completion of tests and trials under operating conditions on all equipment,the Contractor shall guarantee all equipment and materials from undue wear and tear frommechanical and electrical defects, and from any failure whatever except those resulting fromproven carelessness or deliberate actions of the Owner, for a minimum of one (1) year fromSubstantial Completion as detailed in section 011400 General Provisions. This one (1) yearminimum shall not replace a standard manufacturer’s guarantee if it exceeds one (1) year.

1.10 PUMP WARRANTY

A. The equipment shall be warranted by the Manufacturer for a period of two (2) years fromsubstantial completion against defects in workmanship and materials under normal use,operation and service. If the equipment should fail during the warranty period due to adefective part, it shall be replaced and the units restored at no expense to the owner.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 ROTARY LOBE PUMP

A. General

1. The Rotary Lobe Pumps shall be designed to be abrasion resistant for applications inwastewater treatment plants. The pump shall have a minimum displacement of 71 gal /100 rev. (PL 300) & 226.2 gal / 100 rev. (FL 776).

2. The ratio of the axial length of the lobe as compared to the lobe diameter(length/diameter) shall not exceed 1.0.

3. The pumps shall be of the positive displacement, rotary lobe type, designed to pumpprimary and secondary wastewater sludge as manufactured by Boerger.

4. All fluid-wetted parts including the mechanical seal shall be replaceable through the quickrelease front cover without disassembly of coupling, drive unit or the pipe system.

5. The pumps shall be designed to temporarily run dry and to operate in either direction. Oil-quench for protection of the mechanical seal is mandatory. Seal water flush systems arenot acceptable.

6. The pumps shall be constructed with an oil-filled intermediate chamber between thepump casing and the gearbox with the following functions:

a. Oil-Quench (Lubrication and cooling) of the mechanical seals

b. Detection of seal failures

c. Buffer zone to the sealed timing gear

7. Oil drain of gearbox and intermediate chamber shall be easily accessible with sidemounted drain screw. Oil drain under the pump is not acceptable.


8. The rotor/shaft connection shall be oil-lubricated fed by an intermediate chamber andshall not come in contact with the pumped fluid.

B. System and Fluid Conditions – Primary Sludge Pumps

Fluid Name SludgeSolids Content 1-2%Capacity 400 gpmDischarge Pressure 11.3 psiSuction Condition FloodedTemperature AmbientpH Value NeutralSpecific Gravity 1.0Duty Continuous

C. Pump Unit

Model FL776Drive Type Geared MotorDrive Configuration TBDMotor Power 15 hpPump Speed 198 rpmSuction Flange 6” ANSI 150-lbDischarge Flange 6” ANSI 150-lb

D. System and Fluid Conditions – Thickened Sludge and Scum Pumps

Fluid Name Thickened Sludge/ScumSolids Content 3-6%Capacity 150 gpmDischarge Pressure 3.9 psiSuction Condition FloodedTemperature AmbientpH Value NeutralSpecific Gravity 1.0Duty Continuous

E. Pump Unit

Model PL300Drive Type Geared MotorDrive Configuration TBDMotor Power 7.5 hpPump Speed 216 rpm* / 260 rpm^Suction Flange 4”* or 6”^ ANSI 150-lbDischarge Flange 4”* or 6”^ ANSI 150-lb

F. Pump Construction

1. The pump casing shall be Cast iron ASTM A48 grade 40, Brinell hardness 264 Brinell

2. The rear of the pump casing and the front cover shall be protected with replaceable wearplates with a hardness of 550 Brinell. The front cover protection plate shall be reversible.The quick release cover shall be held in place by four eye nuts. The stationary threadedstuds shall keep the front cover on the same level as the pump casing in the process ofopening the pump for easy handling.


3. PL Series

a. Rotors shall be tri-lobe or 4-tip Hi-Flo screw rotor design and shall consist of a non-sludge-wetted cast iron core entirely coated with abrasion-resistant Buna-N.Stacking of lobes is not acceptable. Rotors shall be keyed to the shaft and securedwith one central screw to a cylindrical thread inside the shaft. The cast iron core ofthe rotor shall be equipped with a female thread to enable the removal of the rotorfrom the shaft with ease. Rotor/shaft designs with a cover disc and/or spring washersare not acceptable.

4. FL Series

a. Rotors shall be tri-lobe or 4-tip Hi-Flo screw rotor design with individually replaceabletips and the tips shall consist of a cast iron core coated with abrasion-resistant Buna-N Stacking of lobes is not acceptable. Rotors without tips shall not be acceptable.Rotors shall be keyed to the shaft with a cylindrical bore.

b. The shafts shall be non-sludge-wetted. The rotor/shaft connection shall be lubricatedwith quench fluid of the intermediate chamber. The shafts shall be timed in theirrotation by straight cut timing gears running in a separate oil chamber, which alsocontains the ball and roller bearings for each shaft. Sludge wetted rotor/shaftconnections are not acceptable. The shafts shall be constructed from AISI 4140carbon steel or oversize C45 carbon steel machine with no step down.

c. The pumps shall be fitted with maintenance free, quenched mechanical seals withduronit seal faces. The seals shall be operating in a common oil-filled intermediatechamber (Quench for lubrication and cooling). Purge systems for the seals are notacceptable. The rotating holding bush shall be locked in a fixed radial position by akeyway that also holds the rotor in place. Seal designs that open during rotorreplacement are not acceptable. No sleeves shall be necessary for the mechanicalseal set up. Design of the pump shall allow removal and replacement of the seal viathe front cover.

d. Bearings and timing gear shall be located in a common oil-filled cast iron gearbox,fitted with a built in sight glass to monitor oil level. The timing gear shall maintainnon-contact between the rotors. Bearing life to be designed for L-10 bearing liferating of 100,000 hours at design conditions.

e. Suction and discharge connections from galvanized steel shall be ANSI 150-lbflanges.

f. Pump and drive fitted on common base, made from galvanized steel.

2.02 MOTORS

A. Each unit shall consist of a pump with a gear reducer and 1800 rpm electric motor.

B. The motor shall be 3-phase, 60 Hz, 460 V with 1.15 SF and Class F Insulation.

C. All motors shall be built in accordance with latest NEMA, IEEE, ANSI and AFBMA standardswhere applicable.

2.03 DRY RUN PROTECTION

A. The pump manufacturer shall provide a temperature sensing probe fitted into the front pumpcover, and a digital temperature controller. The temperature controller shall be shipped loosefor installation in control panel furnished under Division 216.


2.04 DISCHARGE PRESSURE PROTECTION

A. The pump manufacturer shall provide a discharge pressure switch and gauge assembly with1/2” process connection to mount on the pump discharge. The switch shall be AshcroftNEMA 4X, watertight Model LPAN4HB25, adjustable setpoint, adjustable deadband, SPDT.The discharge assembly shall be fitted with a 4” stainless steel 0-100 psi glycol filled pressuregauge and diaphragm seal, Model 50-20055 04T CK. All wetted parts shall be SS 316. Theunits shall be capable of being cleaned in place by simply using the process pressure througha SS316 isolation valve mounted to the top of the sensor. The opposite end of the valve shallbe fitted with a universal, quick acting coupling, suitable for compressed air.

2.05 CONTROL PANEL

A. See Division 26 Drawings and Specifications.

2.06 SPARE PARTS

A. One (1) set of mechanical seals and o-rings for each pump model

B. One (1) set of rotor tips and o-rings for each pump model

C. One (1) set of axial protection plates for each pump model

D. One (1) set of radial liners for each pump model

E. One (1) set of special tools for each pump model

2.07 FINISHES

A. All cast iron and carbon steel components shall be finished with manufacturer’s standardindustrial grade primer 2 – 3 mils DFT suitable for multiple top coat finishes. The top coatshall be industrial enamel 2 – 3 mils DFT.

B. All stainless steel and aluminum surfaces will remain unpainted. All weld splatter shall beremoved and all welds ground smooth for a neat appearance.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 PREPARATION

A. Coordinate with other trades, equipment and systems to the fullest extent possible.

B. Take all necessary measurements in the field to determine the exact dimensions for all workand the required sizes of all equipment under this contract. All pertinent data and dimensionsshall be verified by the Contractor.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Installation shall be in strict accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions andrecommendations in the locations shown on the Drawings. Anchor bolts shall be set inaccordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations and setting plans.

B. Qualified supervisory services, including manufacturer’s engineering representatives, shall beprovided for a minimum of 2 man-days to insure that the work is done in a manner fullyapproved by the respective equipment manufacturer. The pump manufacturer’srepresentatives shall specifically supervise the installation and alignment of the pump with thedriver, the grouting, the alignment of the connection piping and the installation of the field-


installed mechanical seal. If there are difficulties in the start-up or operation of the equipmentdue to the manufacturer’s design or fabrication, additional service shall be provided at no costto the Owner. Services of the manufacturer’s representatives and training shall be providedwhen the first pump is started, with follow-up visits upon start-up of each subsequent pump.

C. Connection of piping to pumps shall be done in presence of the Engineer. All pipingconnections to the pump shall be done without bending and/or twisting the piping to matewith the pump flange connections.

D. A certificate from each equipment manufacturer shall be submitted stating that the installationof his/her equipment is satisfactory, that the equipment is ready for operation and that theoperating personnel have been suitably instructed in the operation, lubrication and care ofeach unit.

3.03 TRAINING

A. A factory representative shall provide a minimum of eight (8) man-hours of training to theOwner’s operations staff concerning the recommended operation and maintenance of theequipment. Training shall be performed after substantial completion of the project with theuse of operating equipment.

END OF SECTION

CHOPPER PUMP 467520-1 TOWN BRANCH WWTP THICKENING

SECTION 467520 – CHOPPER PUMP

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment, testing, etc. to install chopper pump as specified inthis section below, as listed in the table and where shown on the drawings. Pump shall becomplete pump unit consisting of pump, motor and completely assembled on fabricated steelbase and shall conform to the pump requirement described herein.

B. Unless otherwise specified, the pump manufacturer shall furnish each pumping unit completewith drive motor and all other components and shall be held entirely responsible for thecompatibility in all respects of all components furnished.


A. Submittals: Section 013323

B. Concrete: Section 033100

C. Precision Grouting: Section 036000

D. In-Line Macerator/Grinder: Section 462423

E. Interior Process Piping: Section 462010

F. Interior Process Valves: Section 462012

G. Painting: Division 9

H. Electrical: Division 26

I. Operating & Maintenance Data: Section 017823

1.03 DEFINITION

A. When the term "pumping unit" is used hereinafter, it shall be deemed to mean a pump orpumps, complete with, but not limited to, drive motor, connecting shafting, bearings,couplings, accessories, appurtenances, and all associated equipment.

1.04 CONTRACT DRAWINGS

A. The contract drawings are intended to show a general arrangement of pumping equipment,drives, structural supports, foundations, connected piping and valves.

B. The pump suction and discharges shown shall be considered minimum sizes unlessotherwise specified.

1.05 MANUFACTURER

A. Manufacturers:

1. Vaughan


2. Approved Equal

B. Quality Assurance: All pumping units shall be of approved design and make products ofmanufacturers who have built equipment of similar type, size and capacity.

C. Additional Submittals: The Contractor shall submit, upon request, any additional informationthat the Engineer may deem necessary to determine the ability of the proposed manufacturerto produce the specified equipment.

D. Replacement Parts Capability: Pumping units shall be the products of manufacturers whocan produce evidence of their ability to promptly furnish any and all interchangeablereplacement parts as many be needed at any time within the expected life of the pumps.

1. Upon request, the Contractor shall submit full details of the proposed manufacturer'sability to promptly fill replacement orders.

E. Manufacturer Information: All manufacturer information required by the specifications shallbe submitted by the Contractor within thirty (30) calendar days of the date of receipt of theNotice to Proceed.

1. Any additional information or data, specifically requested by the Engineer, concerningmanufacturer's capabilities (especially relating to requirements described hereinbefore),shall be submitted by the Contractor within fourteen (14) calendar days of the receipt ofthe written request therefore, unless otherwise specified.

2. Approval of manufacturers or suppliers will not be given until all information required bythe specifications or requested by the Engineer has been submitted and acceptable.

F. Disqualification of Manufacturer:

1. Failure to successfully comply with the provisions of subparagraphs A through E,inclusive, will constitute grounds for disqualification of pump manufacturer.

2. Poor performance of similar pumping equipment now in operation under the specifiedconditions of service and pump rating constitute grounds for disqualification of the pumpmanufacturer, supplier, or both, unless such poor performance has been corrected.

1.06 SUBMITTALS

A. General: The Contractor shall comply with the provisions of Section 013323 regardingsubmittals, unless otherwise specified herein.

B. Content of Submittals: The following shall be included in submittals as a minimum.However, any additional information or data shall be added if and whenever requested by theOwner or the Engineer. Where applicable, submit separate data for each pump.

1. Descriptive Literature:

a. Dimensions

b. Materials of Construction (including required coating).

c. Performance Data.

1) Size of Pump


2) GPM

3) TDH

4) BHP

5) Overall pump efficiency inlet thought discharge head)

6) RPM

7) Performance curves showing overall pump efficiencies.

8) NPSH curve if applicable)

9) Shutoff head

10) Weight of pump

11) Head

12) Rated HP of motor

13) Weight of motor

2. Installation Information: Submit drawings and information necessary for final design offoundations, connecting piping and valves, pump drip and drainage piping, electricalconnections, starting, speed regulating and protective equipment, and auxiliaryequipment.

a. Submit details for mechanical seal assemblies.

b. Submit drawings showing locations, size and full details of foundation bolts for allcomponents for all pumping units.

c. For all pumping units, a dimensioned and scaled assembly outline drawing ordrawings of the complete pump, drive, and all associated equipment furnished shallbe submitted for approval. Such drawing or drawings shall show plan, elevation, andany other views or sections requested.

d. For all pumping units, a scaled cross-sectional drawing of the assembled pumpshowing full details and materials of construction shall be submitted for approval.

e. The Contractor shall submit all other drawings, material lists and other informationspecified, requested and/or necessary to show complete compliance with all detailsof the contract documents.

3. Maintenance and Operations Manual: Manual shall contain all information necessary forproper operation and maintenance of pumping units, as well as the location of thenearest permanent service headquarters. Comply with Section 017823 Operation andMaintenance Manual.

1.07 TESTS

A. Field Tests:


1. The field tests shall be made by the Contractor in the presence of and as directed by theEngineer. Testing shall be done in accordance with the Hydraulic Institute Standards.

2. Field tests shall be made on each pumping unit. Included therein, each pump shall berun at maximum rated speed for at least three (3) rates of flow corresponding to minimumrate, design rate, and maximum rate of flows specified as evidenced by thecorresponding total dynamic head shown by the pump gages; simultaneous ammeterreadings shall be taken. Variation of the rate of flow shall be made by throttling thedischarge valve (where applicable). The rated motor nameplate current and power shallnot be exceeded at any rate of flow within the specified range.

3. Before any pump is rotated, the Contractor shall make certain that no debris is present insuction well, pumps or pipe lines. Any internal damage done to equipment while startingup shall be assumed to be caused by debris and shall be replaced at the Contractor'sexpense. No pump shall be rotated under power unless filled with liquid.

4. When water can be pumped, the Contractor shall commence pumping and shall haverepresentatives from the pump manufacturer to start the pumps. When flow conditionsare favorable, the Contractor or pump manufacturer shall in the presence of theEngineer, run a series of tests to establish the adequacy of the pumping program.

B. Failure of Tests: Any defects in the equipment or failure to meet the guarantees orrequirements of the specifications shall be promptly corrected by the Contractor byreplacements or otherwise. The decision of the Engineer as to whether or not the Contractorhas fulfilled his obligations under the Contract shall be final and conclusive. If the Contractorfails or refuses to make these corrections or if the improved equipment, when tested, shall failagain to meet the guarantees of specified requirements, the Owner notwithstanding its havingmade partial payment for work and materials which have entered into the manufacture of saidequipment, may reject said equipment and order the Contractor to remove it from thepremises at his own expense.

1. In case the Owner rejects said equipment, then the Contractor hereby agrees to repay tothe Owner all sums of money paid to him for said rejected equipment on progresscertificates or otherwise on account of the lump sum prices herein specified, and uponthe receipt of said sum of money the Owner will execute and deliver to the Contractor abill of sale of all its rights, title, and interest in and to said rejected equipment; provided,however, that said equipment shall not be removed from the premises of the Owner untilthe Owner obtains from other sources the equipment to take the place of the rejected.The Owner hereby agrees to obtain said other equipment within a reasonable time andthe Contractor agrees that the Owner may use the equipment furnished by him withoutrental or other charge until said other new equipment is obtained.

C. Responsibility During Test: The Contractor shall be fully responsible for the proper operationof equipment during tests and instruction periods and shall neither have nor make any claimfor damage which may occur to equipment prior to the time when the Owner formally takesover the operation thereof.

D. Manufacturer's Representative: For all pumping units, the Contractor shall furnish theservices of accredited representatives of the pump manufacturer who shall supervise theinstallation, adjustment, and field tests of each pumping unit and give instructions to theoperating personnel. As one condition necessary to acceptance of any pumping unit, theContractor shall submit a certificate from the manufacturer, stating that the installation of thepumping unit is satisfactory, that the unit is ready for operation, and that the operatingpersonnel have been suitably instructed in the operation, lubrication, and care of the unit.


1.08 IDENTIFICATION - NAMEPLATES

A. Each piece of equipment shall be provided with a substantial nameplate, securely fastened inplace and clearly inscribed with the manufacturer's name, year of manufacture, serial numberand principal rating date.

1.09 GUARANTEE PERIOD

A. The Contractor shall guarantee and warrant that the equipment furnished and installed is freefrom defects of design, material and workmanship, and will operate satisfactorily. In theevent the equipment fails to perform as specified, and after the Owner has given due notice,the Contractor or Supplier, at their own expense, shall promptly repair or replace thedefective equipment without any additional cost to the Owner.

B. After successful completion of tests and trials under operating conditions on all equipment,the Contractor shall guarantee all equipment and materials from undue wear and tear frommechanical and electrical defects, and from any failure whatever except those resulting fromproven carelessness or deliberate actions of the Owner, for a minimum of one (1) year fromSubstantial Completion as detailed in section 011400 General Provisions. This one (1) yearminimum shall not replace a standard manufacturer’s guarantee if it exceeds one (1) year.

1.10 PUMP WARRANTY

A. The equipment shall be warranted by the Manufacturer for a period of two (2) years fromsubstantial completion against defects in workmanship and materials under normal use,operation and service. If the equipment should fail during the warranty period due to adefective part, it shall be replaced and the units restored at no expense to the owner.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 CHOPPER PUMP

A. Design Specifications:

Pump Type Flow Head Application

Chopper Pump 150 gpm 7.89 ft Scum/Grease

B. Casing and Back Pull-Out Plate: The pump casing shall be of volute design, spiraling outwardto the Class 125 flanged centerline discharge. Back pull-out design shall incorporate jackingbolts for accurate adjustment of impeller-to-cutter bar clearance, and shall allow removal ofpump components without requiring disconnection of casing from inlet or discharge piping.Casing & backplate shall be ductile cast iron with all water passages to be smooth, and freeof blowholes and imperfections for good flow characteristics. A pressure tap shall be includedon or near the discharge flange. Backplate shall include a replaceable Rockwell C 60 alloysteel cutter adjustable for 0.005-0.050" clearance to cut against the rotating impeller pumpoutvanes for removing fiber and debris.

C. Impeller: Shall be semi-open type with pump out vanes to reduce seal area pressure.Chopping/maceration of materials shall be accomplished by the action of the cupped andsharpened leading edges of the impeller blades moving across the cutter bar at the intakeopenings, with a set clearance between the impeller and cutter bar of 0.015-0.025” cold.Impeller shall be cast alloy steel heat treated to minimum Rockwell C 60 and dynamically


balanced. The impeller shall be keyed to the shaft and shall have no axial adjustments andno set screws.

D. Cutter Bar Plate: Shall be recessed into the pump bowl and shall contain at least 2 shearbars extending diametrically across the intake opening to within 0.010-0.030” of the rotatingcutter nut tooth, for the purpose of preventing intake opening blockage and wrapping ofdebris at the shaft area. Chopper pumps utilizing individually mounted shear bars shall not beacceptable. Cutter bar shall be cast alloy steel or alloy steel heat-treated to minimumRockwell C 60.

D. Cutter Nut: The impeller shall be secured to the shaft using a cutter nut, designed to cutstringy materials and prevent binding using a raised, rotating cutter tooth. The cutter nut shallbe cast alloy steel heat treated to minimum Rockwell C 60.

E. Upper Cutter: Shall be threaded into the back pull-out adapter plate behind the impeller,designed to cut against the pump-out vanes and the impeller hub, reducing and removingstringy materials from the mechanical seal area. Upper cutter shall be cast alloy steel heattreated to minimum Rockwell C 60. The upper cutter teeth are positioned as closely aspossible to the center of shaft rotation to minimize cutting torque and nuisance motor tripping.The ratio of upper cutter cutting diameter to shaft diameter in the upper cutter area of thepump shall be 3.0 or less.

F. Pump Shafting: Shall be heat treated alloy steel.

G. Bearings: Shall be oil-bath lubricated with ISO Grade 46 oil. Shaft thrust in both directionsshall be taken up by two back-to-back mounted single-row angular contact ball bearings ortwo face to face mounted tapered roller bearings. Two adjacently mounted singlerow radialbearings or one cylindrical roller type shall also be provided. L-10 bearing life shall beminimum 100,000 hours.

H. Bearing Housing: Shall be ductile cast iron and machined with piloted bearing fits forconcentricity of all components. Bearing housing shall include a side-mounted oil reservoir.Viton® double lip seals riding on stainless steel shaft sleeves are to provide sealing at eachend of the bearing housing. Thrust bearings are mounted in an adjustable cartridge to allowexternal upper cutter adjustment.

I. Stuffing Box: Shall be ductile cast iron. The stuffing box shall be designed to accommodatethe mechanical seal, or packing. Mechanical seal with no seal water flush and flushedtandem mechanical seal as described below do not require stuffing box.

J. Seal: [NOTE TO CONSULTING ENGINEER]: Please choose one of the four options below:

1. Mechanical Seal system specifically designed to require no seal flush: The mechanicalseal shall be located immediately behind the impeller hub to eliminate the stuffing boxand maximize the flushing available from the impeller pumpout vanes. The seal shall be acartridge-type mechanical seal with Viton O-rings and silicon carbide (or tungstencarbide) faces. This cartridge seal shall be preassembled, and pre-tested so that no sealsettings or adjustments are required from the installer. Any springs used to push the sealfaces together must be shielded from the fluid to be pumped. The cartridge shall alsoinclude a 17-4PH, heat-treated seal sleeve and stainless steel seal housing.

2. Flushed Tandem Mechanical Seal: The seal shall be cartridge-type tandem mechanicalseal with Viton O-rings and silicon carbide (or tungsten carbide) faces. This cartridge sealshall be a pre-assembled and pre-tested so that no seal settings or adjustments arerequired from the installer. Any springs used to push the seal faces together must be


shielded from the fluid to be pumped. The cartridge shall also include a 17-4PH, heat-treated seal sleeve and stainless steel seal housing. Seal requires flush to drain at 3 USgallons per hour flow rate.

3. Mechanical seal with throttle bushing and water fitting for seal water flush. The seal shaftsleeve shall be AISI 316 SS. Mechanical seal materials shall be 316 stainless steel orAlloy 20 with silicon carbide or tungsten carbide faces. Seal shall be positively driven byset-screws. Elastomers shall be of Buna N, and stationary seal member shall be of thecup-mounted type to ensure cushioning of face material from mechanical shock.Contractor is to provide a 6-10 gal./hr. seal flush with filtered water, a rotameter, throttlevalve, and solenoid operated isolation valve interlocked with an auxiliary contact of themotor starter.

4. Packing design with 5-ring Kevlar packing split Teflon lantern ring and water fitting. Thepacking shaft sleeve shall be 316 SS with Nickel-Chrome-Boron coating. Contractor is toprovide a filtered water packing flush at 10 PSI greater than pump discharge pressure.The flush water line is to be interlocked with an auxiliary contact of the motor starter so itis automatically turned on when the motor is started.

K. Inlet Manifold: The pump assembly shall be mounted vertically on a 90 degree carbon steelelbow with a Class 150 inlet flange, cleanout, 1/4" NPT suction pressure tap, drainconnection and pedestal base.

L. Shaft Coupling: Bearing housing and motor stool design is to provide accurate, self-aligningmounting for a C-flanged electric motor. Pump and motor coupling shall be T.B. WoodsSureflex elastomeric type.

M. Stainless Steel Nameplate: Shall be attached to the pump giving the manufacturer’s modeland serial number, rated capacity, head, speed and all pertinent data.

N. Pump shall be Vaughan Vertical Pedistal Chopper Pump Model PE4K6CS-063, 6” 150 lbinlet flange and 4” 125 lb discharge flange, or engineer approved equal.

2.02 MOTOR

A. Drive motor shall be 5 HP, 1170 RPM, 230/460 volts, 3 phase, 60 hertz, 1.15 service factor,C-flange mounted, TEFC enclosure. The motor shall be sized for non-overloading conditions.

B. See Division 26 Drawings and Specifications.

2.03 CONTROL PANEL

A. See Division 26 Drawings and Specifications.

2.04 FINISHES

A. Solvent wash and a single coat of Tnemec 431 epoxy applied at 5 MDFT minimum (exceptmotor).

B. SSPC-SP6 commercial sandblast (except motor), a prime coat of Tnemec 431 epoxy and afinish coat of Tnemec 431 epoxy for total finish of 30 MDFT minimum (except motor).


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 PREPARATION

A. Coordinate with other trades, equipment and systems to the fullest extent possible.

B. Take all necessary measurements in the field to determine the exact dimensions for all workand the required sizes of all equipment under this contract. All pertinent data and dimensionsshall be verified by the Contractor.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Installation shall be in strict accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions andrecommendations in the locations shown on the Drawings. Anchor bolts shall be set inaccordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations and setting plans.

B. Qualified supervisory services, including manufacturer’s engineering representatives, shall beprovided for a minimum of 2 man-days to insure that the work is done in a manner fullyapproved by the respective equipment manufacturer. The pump manufacturer’srepresentatives shall specifically supervise the installation and alignment of the pump with thedriver, the grouting, the alignment of the connection piping and the installation of the field-installed mechanical seal. If there are difficulties in the start-up or operation of the equipmentdue to the manufacturer’s design or fabrication, additional service shall be provided at no costto the Owner. Services of the manufacturer’s representatives and training shall be providedwhen the first pump is started, with follow-up visits upon start-up of each subsequent pump.

C. Connection of piping to pumps shall be done in presence of the Engineer. All pipingconnections to the pump shall be done without bending and/or twisting the piping to matewith the pump flange connections.

D. A certificate from each equipment manufacturer shall be submitted stating that the installationof his/her equipment is satisfactory, that the equipment is ready for operation and that theoperating personnel have been suitably instructed in the operation, lubrication and care ofeach unit.

3.03 TRAINING

A. A factory representative shall provide a minimum of eight (8) man-hours of training to theOwner’s operations staff concerning the recommended operation and maintenance of theequipment. Training shall be performed after substantial completion of the project with theuse of operating equipment.

END OF SECTION